Loading...
MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PROJECT - 16-0035-PR• 0 0 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS Prepared for INVITATION TO BID APRIL /2017 • City of Clearwater, Florida MORINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PROJECT No. 16- 0035 -PR TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS • SECTION IVa ARCHITECTURAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS • APPENDIX OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS PREQUALIFICATION FOR BIDDING CITY OF CLEARWATER PROJECTS CLW GAS MORNINGSIDE REC CENTER (MAIN BLDG.) GEO TECHNICAL REPORT DES 167913 SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer COVER Page II Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION I INVITATION TO BID NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS Morningside Recreation Center Documents and plans for Project # 16- 0035 -PR are available at www.myclearwater.com /bid Construction of a new 21,000 square foot recreation center at 2400 Harn Blvd. Clearwater, FL 33764. Work includes but not limited to: all internal & external infrastructures, landscaping and an asphalt parking lot. RECOMMENDED Pre -Bid Conference: May 3, 2017 at 1pm Municipal Service Building, Room 130 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 Pre - qualification DEADLINE: May 9, 2017 Category: Commercial Building for $4,250,000 Bids DUE: May 23, 2017 at 1 P.M. City of Clearwater, Project #16- 0035 -PR Purchasing Office, 3rd Floor 100 S. Myrtle Ave, Clearwater, FL 33756 -5520 Issued by: Alyce Benge, Purchasing Manager For additional information contact: Engineering Dept. 727 - 562 -4750 • SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1 2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1 3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1 4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2 5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3 6. CONTRACT TIME 3 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3 8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3 9. SUBCONTRACTORS 3 • 10. BID /PROPOSAL FORM 4 11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4 12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5 13. REJECTION OF BIDS 5 14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5 15. OPENING OF BIDS 5 16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5 17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS /VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6 18. AWARD OF CONTRACT 7 19. BID PROTEST 7 20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 9 • 21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 9 SECTION II i Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1. Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are accessible through the City of Clearwater website at address: www.myclearwater.com /cityprojects. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the Jiffy Reprographics Plan Room, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non - refundable. Bidding Documents may include, but aren't limited to, plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits, bid /proposal form and Addendums. 1.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub - bidders or others. 2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1. Each prospective Bidder must pre - qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner. An application package for pre - qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758 -4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520 (street address) or by phone at (727) 562 -4750. Pre - Qualification requirement information is also available on the City of Clearwater Website at address: www.myc learwater.com /gov /depts /pwa/engin /Construction /prequal .asp. Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre - qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. It is the Contractor's responsibility to confirm pre - qualification status before a Bid Opening. 3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer in writing of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2. For the purposes of bidding or construction, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, but not upon non - technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof. Drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, may be relied upon by Bidder for accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3. Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the SECTION II Page 1 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data tarnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6. On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights -of -way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8. The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1. All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed in writing to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, via the Jiffy Reprographics Plan Room to all parties recorded by the Plan Room as plan holders having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified on the pre -bid meeting agenda, prior to the date for opening of Bids, may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. 4.2. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. SECTION II Page 2 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders • 5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10 %) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a Proposal /Bid Bond (on form provided in Section V) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. 5.2. The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid Opening. 5.3. The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in, the State of Florida. 6. CONTRACT TIME 6.1. The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. • 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES • 7.1. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement, Section V. 8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1. The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9. SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1. If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50 %) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder SECTION II Page 3 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid Security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10. BID /PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The Bid /Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be printed in ink or typewritten. All blanks on the Bid /Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the Bid /Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which they will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid /Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2. Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice - president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3. Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4. All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1. Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a sealed envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Bids in any other form will not be accepted. 11.2. The sealed bid envelope shall contain, but not be limited to, the Proposal /Bid Bond and corresponding Power of Attorney, Affidavit, Non Collusion Affidavit, Proposal (pages one SECTION II Page 4 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders to three), Addendum Sheet, Bidder's Proposal, and Scrutinized Companies and Business Operations with Cuba and Syria Certification Form. 12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2. After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13. REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1. To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1. Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non - Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15. OPENING OF BIDS 15.1. Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1. The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees SECTION II Page 5 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION 11— Instructions to Bidders and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2. The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3. The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4. The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials purchased by the City and incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, as may be indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions. 17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS /VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1. In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug -free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug -free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug -free workplace program. In order to have a drug -free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug -free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. SECTION II Page 6 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • • • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through implementation of this section. 1 certify that this firm does /does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. 18. AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2. In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid /Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4. Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 18.5. The successful bidder /contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2014), specifically to: (a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service; (b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law; (c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and (d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater. 19. BID PROTEST 19.1. RIGHT TO PROTEST: SECTION II Page 7 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his /her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2. PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid /request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he /she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his /her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his /her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. 19.3. PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4. STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. SECTION II Page 8 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 410 20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918 -08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60 - 553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. • • 21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction- related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction - related Best Management Practices. SECTION II Page 9 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: 1. DEFINITIONS 1 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5 2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5 2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5 2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT 5 2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 6 2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6 2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS 6 3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 6 3.1. INTENT 6 3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 7 4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 7 4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 8 4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8 4.4. REFERENCE POINTS 8 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 9 5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND 9 5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 9 5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE 9 5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE 10 5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE10 5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY /MALPRACTICE /ERRORS OR OMISSIONS INSURANCE 10 5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT /INLAND MARINE /PROPERTY INSURANCEI0 5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE 10 5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS 10 5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS 11 6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 12 6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12 6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 12 6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 13 • 6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 14 SECTION III I Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 6.5. USE OF PREMISES 14 • 6.5.1. STAGING AREAS 15 6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 15 6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 16 6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16 6.8. PERMITS 16 6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION 17 6.10. EMERGENCIES 17 6.11. DRAWINGS 18 6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18 6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 19 6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS 21 6.11.4. DELIVERABLES 23 6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23 6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK 23 6.14. INDEMNIFICATION 23 6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 24 6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS 24 7. OTHER WORK 25 7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE 25 7.2. COORDINATION 25 8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY 26 9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION26 9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE 26 9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 26 9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 27 9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 27 9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 27 9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 28 10. CHANGES IN THE WORK 28 11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 30 11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK 31 12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 31 13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 32 13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION 32 • 13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK 33 SECTION III II Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions I3.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 33 13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 13.5. WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD 34 13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 34 13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 34 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 35 14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 35 14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 36 14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 36 14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION 37 14.5. FINAL INSPECTION 37 14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 38 14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 38 14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS 39 15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 39 15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 39 15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE 39 15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE 40 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION 41 • 17. MISCELLANEOUS 41 17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 41 17.2. GIVING NOTICE 41 17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM 41 17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 41 17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 41 17.6. RENEWAL OPTION 42 17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS 42 18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 42 19. MATERIAL USED 42 20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 42 21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 42 21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS 42 21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK 43 21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS 43 21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION 44 22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 44 411 22.1. GENERAL 44 SECTION III iii Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 22.2. EXAMPLE 46 23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 46 23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE 46 23.2. TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 46 23.3. FIXED SIGN 47 23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS 47 23.5. SIGN COLORING 47 23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT 47 23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE 47 23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 48 24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE48 25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 49 SECTION III iv Updated 6/3/2016 • • • 1. DEFINITIONS • • SECTION III — General Conditions Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agent Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the City. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the SECTION III Page 1 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule —CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty -four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. SECTION III Page 2 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • • • SECTION III — General Conditions Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F.D.O.T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish ", "furnish and install ", "install ", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service ". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. Person A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. SECTION III Page 3 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre- construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. SECTION III Page 4 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • • • SECTION III — General Conditions Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments. and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME /NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the.date that the Contract Time commences to run. Pursuant to Section 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, the Notice to Proceed cannot be issued until Contractor provides City with a certified copy of the recorded bond issued by the Pinellas County Clerk of Court. SECTION III Page 5 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE After Contract has been fully executed and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at the preconstruction conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also submit a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a completed Emergency Call List, a completed Authorized Signature List, and Verification of Illegal Discharge Construction Site Training. 2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi- weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. 3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1. INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be SECTION III Page 6 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • SECTION III — General Conditions constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well - known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES • If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. • 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights -of -way, easements, rights of entry for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. SECTION III Page 7 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation. The Sunshine State One Call of Florida is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. 4.4. REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, unless otherwise noted in the Contract, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per SECTION III Page 8 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one - hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond pursuant to Section 255.05, Florida Statutes in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents in Section V and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall, at its own cost and expense, acquire and maintain (and cause any sub- contractors, representatives or agents to acquire and maintain) during the term with the City, sufficient insurance to adequately protect the respective interest of the parties. Coverage shall be obtained with a carrier having an AM Best Rating of A -VII or better. In addition, the City has the right to review the Contractor's deductible or self - insured retention and to require that it be reduced or eliminated. Specifically the Contractor must carry the following minimum types and amounts of insurance on an occurrence basis or in the case of coverage that cannot be obtained on an occurrence basis, then coverage can be obtained on a claims -made basis with a minimum four (4) year tail following the termination or expiration of this Agreement: The following insurance limits may be achieved by a combination of primary and umbrella/excess liability policies. 5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage, including but not limited to, premises operations, products /completed operations, products liability, contractual liability, advertising injury, personal injury, death, and property damage in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) per occurrence and $2,000,000 (two million dollars) general aggregate. SECTION III Page 9 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance coverage for any owned, non- owned, hired or borrowed automobile is required in the minimum amount of $L000,000 (one million dollars) combined single limit. 5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Statutory Workers' Compensation Insurance coverage in accordance with the laws of the State of Florida, and Employer's Liability Insurance in the minimum amount of $100,000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each employee each accident, $100.000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each employee by disease and $500,000 (five hundred thousand dollars) aggregate by disease with benefits afforded under the laws of the State of Florida. Coverage should include Voluntary Compensation, Jones Act, and U.S. Longshoremen's and Harbor Worker's Act coverage where applicable. Coverage must be applicable to employees, contractors, subcontractors, and volunteers, if any. 5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY /MALPRACTICE /ERRORS OR OMISSIONS INSURANCE Professional Liability /Malpractice /Errors or Omissions Insurance coverage appropriate for the type of business engaged in by the Contractor with minimum limits of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) per occurrence. If a claims made form of coverage is provided, the retroactive date of coverage shall be no later than the inception date of claims made coverage, unless prior policy was extended indefinitely to cover prior acts. Coverage shall be extended beyond the policy year either by a supplemental extended reporting period (ERP) of as great a duration as available, and with no less coverage and with reinstated aggregate limits, or by requiring that any new policy provide a retroactive date no later than the inception date of claims made coverage. 5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT /INLAND MARINE /PROPERTY INSURANCE If Contractor is using its own property in connection with the performance of its obligations under this Agreement, then Contractor's Equipment — Inland Marine Insurance and /or Property Insurance on an "All Risks" basis with replacement cost coverage for property and equipment in the care, custody and control of others is recommended. City is not responsible for Contractor's (or any sub - contractors, representatives, or agents) equipment or property. 5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE The City will provide at its expense, Builder's Risk Insurance for the project to cover all risks of loss in the complete and full value of the project. Contractor agrees to cooperate in a timely manner with providing any information or documentation required for the application and by the carrier as the project proceeds. 5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS Upon approval of this Agreement by City Council, and then annually upon the anniversary date(s) of the insurance policy's renewal date(s) for as long as this Agreement remains in effect, the Contractor will furnish the City with a Certificate of Insurance(s) (using appropriate ACORD SECTION III Page 10 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • • • SECTION III — General Conditions certificate. SIGNED by the Issuer, and with applicable endorsements) evidencing all of the coverage set forth above and naming the City as an "Additional Insured." In addition when requested in writing from the City. Contractor will provide the City with certified copies of all applicable policies. The address where such certificates and certified policies shall be sent or delivered is as follows: City of Clearwater Engineering Department Attn: Construction Office Specialist P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758 -4748 1. The Description (of Operations /Locations /Vehicles) should specify Project Name and Project Number. 2. Contractor shall provide thirty (30) days written notice of any cancellation, non - renewal, termination, material change or reduction in coverage. 3. Contractor's insurance as outlined above shall be primary and non - contributory coverage for Contractor's negligence. 4. Contractor reserves the right to appoint legal counsel to provide for the Contractor's defense, for any and all claims that may arise related to Agreement, work performed under this Agreement, or to Contractor's design, equipment, or service. Contractor agrees that the City shall not be liable to reimburse Contractor for any legal fees or costs as a result of Contractor providing its defense as contemplated herein. The stipulated limits of coverage above shall not be construed as a limitation of any potential liability to the City, and the City's failure to request evidence of this insurance shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor's (or sub - contractors, representatives, or agents) obligation to provide the insurance coverage specified. 5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub - contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting SECTION III Page 11 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, disrespectful or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor represents the City of Clearwater and shall conduct themselves in a professional manner to the public at all times. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $80.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good SECTION III Page 12 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • SECTION III — General Conditions discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor shall adhere to the Community Development Code, Section 3 -1508 regarding noise restrictions from 6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. any day and all day Sunday. Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start -up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment or materials to be incorporated into the Work under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, per Section III, Article 21. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. 6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. Request for substitute shall identify why a substitute is submitted and include advantages to the Owner. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute SECTION III Page 13 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with this list the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and organization for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons and organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5. USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right -of -way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any SECTION III Page 14 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs. losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1. STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. Use of right of way within the limits of construction must be approved by the City. All applicable erosion control, tree barricade and restoration, including time limits, specifications, etc., must be followed. • 6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right -of -ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. • Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. • Any irrigation systems or components damaged or impacted by construction activities shall be repaired or replaced "in- kind" within forty -eight (48) hours to minimize the loss of turfgrass or landscape plantings, particularly during periods of drought. • Sod must be restored "in- kind" within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations, replacement of driveways or sidewalks or other project specific milestone. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. • If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. SECTION III Page 15 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. if Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11 -02 shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E- Verify System to verify employment eligibility. 6.8. PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. SECTION III Page 16 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions • 6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when execution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. • • 6.10. EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or SECTION III Page 17 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11. DRAWINGS 6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will have a transmittal cover sheet identifying the shop drawing name, number, and technical specification reference; will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of,such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of SECTION III Page 18 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number greater than twenty percent (20 %) of the total number of first time submittals, per the approved initial submittal log. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. 6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As -Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As -Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up redline prints do not conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay SECTION III Page 19 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As -Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As -Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As -Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1. General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS -BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 5J- 17.052, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 5J- 17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As -Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and /or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also known as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As -Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As -Built Survey. 6.11.2.2. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New and replaced service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. The terminal ends of all subdrains, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3. Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4. Electrical and Control Wiring The as -built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as -built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall SECTION III Page 20 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • SECTION III — General Conditions prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, I -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5. Horizontal and Vertical Control The As -Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6. Standards The As -Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 5J -17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as -built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7. Other The As -Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. • 6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1. Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1. Prefixes and Suffixes • DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.1.2. Laver Naming Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk SECTION III Page 21 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions WATER water lines and appurtenances. sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of Swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2. Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3. Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0 °, and times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle height of .010 times the plot scale. SECTION III a text height of .008 of 22.5 °, and a text Page 22 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • • SECTION III — General Conditions 6.11.4. DELIVERABLES The as -built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 " =20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver two hard copies and one digital copy of all drawings. Requested file formats are: Autodesk DWG and Adobe PDF files. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562 -4762 or e -mail address Thomas.Mahony cr,myClearwater.com. 6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non - execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance ". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14. INDEMNIFICATION To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold the City, its officers, agents, and employees, harmless from and against any and all liabilities, demands, claims, suits, losses, damages, causes of action, fines or judgments, including costs, attorneys', witnesses', and expert witnesses' fees, and expenses incident thereto, relating to, arising out of, SECTION III Page 23 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions or resulting from: (i) the services provided by Contractor personnel under this Agreement; (11) any negligent acts, errors. mistakes or omissions by Contractor or Contractor personnel; and (iii) Contractor or Contractor personnel's failure to comply with or fulfill the obligations established by this Agreement. Contractor will update the City during the course of the litigation to timely notify the City of any issues that may involve the independent negligence of the City that is not covered by this indemnification. The City assumes no liability for actions of Contractor and will not indemnify or hold Contractor or any third party harmless for claims based on this Agreement or use of Contractor - provided supplies or services. Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, this indemnification provision shall not be construed as a waiver of any immunity to which Owner is entitled or the extent of any limitation of liability pursuant to § 768.28, Florida Statutes. Furthermore, this provision is not intended to nor shall be interpreted as limiting or in any way affecting any defense Owner may have under § 768.28, Florida Statutes or as consent to be sued by third parties. 6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email addresses, etc. 6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS The ENGINEER will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2014), specifically to: a) Keep and maintain public records required by the city of Clearwater (hereinafter "public agency ") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder. b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 1 1 9, Florida Statutes, as many be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law. c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the records to the public agency. d) Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for the retaining public records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency. SECTION III Page 24 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess the requested records. the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time. f) The Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in accordance with the contract. g) A Contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes. h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if: 1 The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public records request within a reasonable time; and 2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the public request, including a statement that the contractor has not complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor. i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic format. j) A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement. 7. OTHER WORK 7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2. COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. SECTION III Page 25 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions. the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. SECTION III Page 26 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions • 9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. • • 9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. SECTION III Page 27 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CET, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. 10. CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. SECTION III Page 28 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • • • SECTION III — General Conditions Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: • changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; • changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and • changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; • provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be .adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (1) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by SECTION III Page 29 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the Work, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the Work. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full- unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor -owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand -by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15 %) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5 %), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10 %). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10 %) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances SECTION III Page 30 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • • • SECTION III — General Conditions include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes: and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. 12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract SECTION III Page 31 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of th is paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, SECTION III Page 32 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • • • SECTION III — General Conditions or of materials, mix designs. or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by SECTION III Page 33 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5. WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if SECTION III Page 34 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • • • SECTION III — General Conditions Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed once each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5 %) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as -built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on -site marked up as -built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and /or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have SECTION III Page 35 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. 14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment, unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty -five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's SECTION III Page 36 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set -off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5. FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. SECTION III Page 37 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As -built /Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (1) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, and (ii) executed consent of the surety to final payment using the form contained in Section V of the Contract Documents. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as SECTION III Page 38 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • SECTION III — General Conditions to form and substance, the Owner shall. within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. 14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terns of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. • 15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and • SECTION III Page 39 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract SECTION III Page 40 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • • • SECTION III — General Conditions Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 17. MISCELLANEOUS 17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2. GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. SECTION III Page 41 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 17.6. RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the Contractor /Vendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. 17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers and /or dumpsters for their disposal and hauling needs. For availability or pricing contact Mike Pryor at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, by phone: (727) 562 -4923 or email: M ichael.Pryor @myClearwater.com. 18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 19. MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. 20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications and Technical Specifications. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality, more stringent or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance with the Engineer /Architect's interpretation. 21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS The Owner reserves the right to purchase certain portions of the materials or equipment for the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. The contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. Owner - purchasing of construction materials or equipment, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. The contract price shall be reduced by the actual cost of the materials or equipment purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales SECTION III Page 42 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • • • SECTION 111 — General Conditions tax, even if the actual cost is in excess of the cost for the materials or equipment as -bid by the Contractor. For purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, however, the original, as -bid contract amount shall be used. Direct purchase shall be considered for single items or materials that exceed $10,000 in value and /or items identified in Section V, Bidders Proposal. The Contractor shall provide the Owner an ODP Summary of all intended suppliers, vendors, equipment and materials for consideration as ODP materials or equipment (refer to ODP Instructions in Contract Appendix). 21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK Owner will issue Purchase Orders and provide a copy of Owner's Florida Consumer Certification of Tax Exemption and Certificate of Entitlement directly to the Vendor for ODP materials or equipment. Invoices for ODP materials or equipment shall be issued to the Owner, and a copy sent to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the transfer of ODP materials or equipment by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all ODP materials or equipment; therefore, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss at the time of purchase or delivery of items, unless material is damaged as the result of negligence by the Contractor. 21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials or equipment furnished to the Owner including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, and inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery. The Owner shall coordinate with Contractor and Vendor delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular materials or equipment furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials or equipment. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non - payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. As ODP materials or equipment are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for items delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of ODP materials or equipment is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and /or an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward an electronic copy of the invoice and supporting documentation to the Owner for payment within fourteen (14) calendar days of receipt of said goods or materials. Such payment shall be directly from public funds, from Owner to Vendor. The Contractor shall insure that ODF3`materials or equipment conform to the Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials or equipment are patently defective, and whether such materials or equipment are identical to the materials or equipment ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non - conformities in ODP materials or equipment upon such visual inspection, the SECTION III Page 43 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials or equipment in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials or equipment can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming ODP materials or equipment, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials or equipment into the Project, including liquidated damages. 21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION The Contractor shall maintain records of all ODP materials or equipment it incorporates into Contractor's Work from the stock of ODP materials or equipment in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any ODP materials or equipment delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials or equipment which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials, equipment and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage- repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that purchases made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to ODP materials or equipment. ODP Purchase Orders must be closed out prior to closing out the contract /Contractor Purchase Order. If material costs needed for project exceed the ODP Purchase Order amount, the ODP Purchase Order will not be increased. Amounts in excess of the ODP Purchase Order will be paid for by the Contractor. 22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1. GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and /or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and /or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by SECTION III Page 44 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • • • SECTION HI — General Conditions the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4 -1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non - specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. SECTION III Page 45 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 22.2. EXAMPLE CITY LOGO of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing the (state project name) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right -of -way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right -of -way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and /or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right -of -way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right -of -way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION 1V, SCOPE OF WORK. 23.2. TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined SECTION III Page 46 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • • • SECTION III — General Conditions after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 23.3. FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of l /2- inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4 -inch by 4 -inch (4 "x4 ") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24- inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24- inches by 30- inches (24 "x30 ") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 - inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 23.5. SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's logo. The Project Manager /City Representative shall provide the appropriate electronic logo file(s) to the Contractor. 23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right -of -way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right -of- way, the signs will be placed in the right -of -way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. SECTION III Page 47 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN `PROJECT NAME==} < CONTRACT NUMBER <DEPARTMENT NAME> PROJECT CONTRACTOR: COMPLETION DATE• FUNDING OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE' ).>E;'ii.3TEt.'i.-7'�1` it 24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written Notice to Proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar days as determined in Section IV, Scope of Work. Contract Time to commence at start date noted on the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay SECTION III Page 48 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • • SECTION III — General Conditions the City of Clearwater, Florida. the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight -hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. 25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list or engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or response, in accordance with section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. The certification form (the Certification) is attached hereto, and it must be submitted, along with all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non - responsive. If the City of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a false certification form, has been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2012) then the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies mentioned in the previous sentence may be asserted on a case -by -case basis, at the sole discretion of the City of Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist: A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the following must occur): 1. The scrutinized business operations were made before July 1, 2011. 2. The scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2011. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. SECTION III Page 49 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized and is implementing a formal plan to cease scrutinized business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new scrutinized business operations. B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria: 1. The business operations were made before July 1, 2012. 2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2012. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new business operations in Cuba or Syria. Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the contract is offered. The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification form. See Section V of the Contract for Certification Form to be executed and submitted with the Bid /Proposal Form. SECTION III Page 50 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 • • • • Table of Content: SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 100 SERIES: GENERAL 1 101. SCOPE OF WORK 1 102. FIELD ENGINEERING 8 102 -1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 8 102 -2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 9 103. DEFINITION OF TERMS 9 103 -1. REFERENCE STANDARDS 9 104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. 10 105. AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 10 105 -1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO /VIDEO RECORDING 10 105 -2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIO /VIDEO RECORDING 10 105 -3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 10 105 -4. EQUIPMENT 10 105 -5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION 11 • 105 -6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION 11 105 -7. VIEWER ORIENTATION 11 105 -8. LIGHTING 11 105 -9. SPEED OF TRAVEL 11 105 -10. VIDEO LOG /INDEX 12 105 -11. AREA OF COVERAGE 12 105 -12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 12 106. STREET SIGNS 12 107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 12 107 -1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 12 107 -2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 12 107 -3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 13 107 -4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 14 107 -5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 14 107 -6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 15 107 -7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 15 108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 15 108 -1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS 15 108 -2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 15 109. PROJECT WEB PAGES 16 109 -1. WEB PAGES DESIGN 16 109 -2. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES 16 • 109 -3. THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE 16 SECTION IV i Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications 109 -4. MAPS AND GRAPHICS 17 109 -5. INTERACTIVE FORMS 17 109 -6. POSTING 17 109 -7. WEB PAGES UPDATES 17 200 SERIES: SITEWORK 18 201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK 18 202. OBSTRUCTIONS 19 203. DEWATERING 19 203 -1. GENERAL 19 203 -2. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 19 204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL 20 204 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 20 204 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 20 205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 20 206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 21 206 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 21 206 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 21 207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 21 207 -1. GENERAL 21 207 -2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL 21 207 -3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 22 207 -4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 22 207 -5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 22 207 -6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 22 207 -7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 22 207 -8. MAINTENANCE 22 207 -9. COMPLIANCE 23 208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES. 23 208 -1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS 23 208 -2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION 23 208 -3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL 23 208 -4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL 23 208 -5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY 24 208 -6. RIP -RAP 24 208 -7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL 24 300 SERIES: MATERIALS 25 301. CONCRETE 25 302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 25 302 -1. EXCAVATION 25 302 -2. FORMS 25 303. REINFORCEMENT 25 SECTION IV ii Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications • 303 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 26 304. BACKFILL 26 304 -1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL 26 304 -2. TESTING AND INSPECTION 26 305. RIPRAP 27 305 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 27 305 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 28 400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER 29 401. SANITARY MANHOLES 29 401 -1. BUILT UP TYPE 29 401 -2. PRECAST TYPE 29 401 -3. DROP MANHOLES 30 401 -4. FRAMES AND COVERS 30 401 -5. MANHOLE COATINGS 30 401 -6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 30 402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES 30 402 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 30 403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 31 403 -1. MATERIALS 31 403 -2. INSTALLATION 31 403 -3. TESTING 32 • 403 -4. BASIS OF PAYMENT 33 404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 33 404 -1. INTENT 33 404 -2. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR /INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 33 404 -3. MATERIALS 33 404 -4. CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION 34 404 -5. TELEVISION INSPECTION 35 404 -6. LINER INSTALLATION 36 404 -7. LATERAL RECONNECTION 36 404 -8. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 36 404 -9. PAYMENT 36 405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 37 405 -1. SCOPE AND INTENT 37 405 -2. PAYMENT 37 405 -3. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 37 405 -4. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 38 405 -5. INFILTRATION CONTROL 39 405 -6. GROUTING MIX 39 405 -7. LINER MIX 39 405 -8. WATER 40 405 -9. OTHER MATERIALS 40 405 -10. EQUIPMENT 40 • 405 -11. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 41 SECTION IV iii Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications 405 -12. 1NNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 42 500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER MAINS, FIRE LINES AND APPURTENANCES 48 501. SCOPE 48 502. MATERIALS 48 502 -1. GENERAL 48 502 -2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 48 502 -3. GATE VALVES 50 502 -4. VALVE BOXES 51 502 -5. HYDRANTS 51 502 -6. SERVICE SADDLES 52 502 -7. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 52 502 -8. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 53 502 -9. TAPPING SLEEVES 53 502 -10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 53 503. CONSTRUCTION 54 503 -1. MATERIAL HANDLING 54 503 -2. PIPE LAYING 54 503 -3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 55 503 -4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES 56 504. TESTS 57 504 -1. HYDROSTATIC TESTS 57 504 -2. NOTICE OF TEST 57 505. STERILIZATION 57 505 -1. STERILIZING AGENT 57 505 -2. FLUSHING SYSTEM 57 505 -3. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE 57 505 -4. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 58 505 -5. BACTERIAL TESTS 58 506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 58 506 -1. GENERAL 58 506 -2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 59 506 -3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 59 506 -4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 59 506 -5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 59 600 SERIES: STORM WATER 61 601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 61 601 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 61 602. UNDERDRAINS 61 602 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 61 602 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 62 SECTION IV iv Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications • 603. STORM SEWERS 62 603 -1. TESTING AND INSPECTION 62 603 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 63 604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES 63 604 -1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES 63 604 -2. PRECAST TYPE 64 604 -3. BASIS OF PAYMENT 64 605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 64 605 -1. MATERIAL 64 605 -2. PERFORMANCE 65 700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS 67 701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 67 702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 67 702 -1. BASE 67 702 -2. SUBGRADE 69 703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 70 703 -1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 70 703 -2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & • QUALITY ASSURANCE 70 703 -3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 71 703 -4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 71 703 -5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 71 703 -6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 71 703 -7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES 72 703 -8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 72 703 -9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 73 703 -10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 73 704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 73 705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS 74 705 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 74 705 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 74 706. CONCRETE CURBS 74 706 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 74 706 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 75 707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 75 707 -1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 75 707 -2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 75 707 -3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS 75 707 -4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 75 707 -5. BASIS OF PAYMENT 76 • 708. MILLING OPERATIONS 76 SECTION IV v Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications 708 -1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 76 708 -2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 76 708 -3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 77 708 -4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 77 708 -5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 77 708 -6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 77 708 -7. TYPES OF MILLING 77 708 -8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 77 708 -9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 78 708 -10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 78 800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND MARKINGS 79 801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 79 801 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 79 802. SIGNING AND MARKING 79 802 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 80 803. ROADWAY LIGHTING 80 803 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 80 900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING /RESTORATION 81 901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 81 902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 81 902 -1. IRRIGATION 81 902 -2. LANDSCAPE 91 903. SODDING 106 904. SEEDING 106 905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 106 905 -1. SCOPE 106 905 -2. SCHEDULING OF WORK 107 905 -3. WORK METHODS 107 906. LEVEL OF SERVICE 109 907. COMPLETION OF WORK 110 908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 110 909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 110 910. TREE PROTECTION 110 910 -1. TREE BARRICADES 110 910 -2. ROOT PRUNING 111 910 -3. PROPER TREE PRUNING 112 SECTION IV vi Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 100 SERIES: GENERAL 101. SCOPE OF WORK Project Name: Morningside Recreation Complex — New Recreation Building Project Number: 16- 0035 -PR Scope of Work: 1. General Contractor shall provide labor, equipment, materials and all insurances as necessary for construct a new recreation building approximately 21,000 sq. ft. all site work required at Morningside Recreation Complex — 2400 Ham Boulevard — Clearwater Florida 33754 according to Building Permit BCP2017 -01415 and the construction documents of Project Number 16- 0035 -PR for the lump sum price provided in this contract. 2. The Contractor shall provide 1 [Fixed project signs as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required at no additional cost to the Owner due to the Contractor's schedule of work. 3. List Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Items to be included in the Contract Document contractor to include all sales taxes as applicable by law for this project. See ODP document in Appendix of this contact document. 4. All Bidders shall be Pre - qualified in May 9, 2017 two week prior to bid opening date. Prequalification minimum amount is $4,250,000.00 attached copy of pre - qualifications is included in this contract document. 5. 10% bid bond is required and a performance surety bond is also required for this project see detailed information in this contract document 6. The prospective bidders shall agree to hold his bid prices for ninety (90) days from bid opening date. 7. The General Contractor shall note the Owner shall continue daily operations of the facility (pool playground tennis courts and parking lot other than as shown on the contract documents during the construction of the recreation building and the General Contractor shall minimize disruption of daily operational business activities. 8. General Contractor's lay down area shall be within the confines of construction limit and exact location shall be provided at the pre- construction meeting. 9. The Owner has submitted for Building Permit application and the Contractor shall collect the Building Permit from the City of Clearwater Building Dept. There shall be no fee required for the General Contractor to collect the building permit. The Building Permit No. SECTION IV Page 1 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications BCP2017- 01415. The General Contractor shall call in for all inspections as required at the correct intervals for City inspector observe the work performed and sign of as the project progresses. The General Contractor shall be required to close out the building permit and obtain a Certificate of Completion. Provide the Building Permit and Certificate of Completion originals to the Owner in the Operation & Maintenance Manual (O &M Manual). 10. General Contractor shall construct the recreation center per the permitted drawings with the City of Clearwater Building Dept. No deviations from the permitted construction drawings or technical specifications of this project. Deviations shall only be allowed in writing by the General Contractor to the Architect and Owner and deviations shall be approved in writing by the Architect and Owner. Any approved deviation shall be the responsibly of the General Contractor and issues may arise from the deviations requested and approved by the Architect and Owner. Under no circumstance shall the Architect or Owner provide any additional funds for any cost arise from the deviation in completing a fully functional recreation center per the design intent of the building permitted drawings. Any deviation from the permitted drawings the building permit shall be updated by submitting an amendment to the building permit by the General Contractor prior to beginning and approved deviations. 11. Schedule: a. Plans available for General Contractor for collection April 20, 2017 b. Pre Bid Meeting Municipal Service Bldg. - 100 S. Myrtle Ave. - Rm. 130 - Clearwater, FL 33756 -5520 c. Last Day for Prequalification Submission Date -May 9, 2017 d. Last Day for Question (Request for Information) Date - May 12, 2017 e. Last Addendum Issue Date - May 16, 3017 f. Bid Due Date - May 23, 2017 — 1:00 PM - Purchasing Office, 3rd Floor 100 S. Myrtle Ave, Clearwater, FL 33756 -5520 g. Intent award of contract by City Council shall be on June 15, 2017 and contractor shall collect the contract on Friday June 16, 2017 and execute signing the contract. Notice to proceed with the work shall be on Monday, June 26, 2017 and contractor shall be on site performing the work within 7 days from Notice to Proceed. Contract duration 330 Consecutive Calendar Days Substantial Completion of the work shall be Tuesday, May 22, 2018 12. Substantial completion means the General Contractor shall have substantially completed the building and site work to obtain a Certificate of Completion from the City of Clearwater Building Dept. and the Owner may occupy the new building for operation of the facility. 13. In execute signing the contract the Surety Performance Bond shall be recorded at the Pinellas County Court House and the original and the executed sign contractor shall be returned to the City for finalization of the contract. 14. The Owner shall develop a request to requisition and formally submit for Purchase Order based on the amount of contract approved by City Council and submitted on Friday June 16, 2017 and the Contractor shall receive the purchase order the following week. SECTION IV Page 2 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 15. The Owner has elected to institute tax saving to for this project and the General Contractor shall provide cost for direct purchase order by the City. The General Contractor shall included all applicable sales tax for materials to be purchased by the city. Upon contract award and execution. a Purchase Order (PO) shall be issued to General Contractor for the full amount of contract. 16. General Contractor shall submit a list Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Summary of Materials of potential ODP vendors and estimated dollar amounts (minimum of $10,000) to the City for consideration prior to initial pay application. Certain bid proposals will list pre- determined item(s) for ODP and the accompanying tax savings. The ODP Summary shall list: (a) item cost and (b) sales tax savings associated with the item. Direct purchase shall be considered for single items that exceed $10,000 in value and /or items identified in Section V, Bidders Proposal. See Appendix for additional information Owner Direct Purchase of Materials. 17. Pre - construction meeting prior to award of contract (June 2017, exact date to be determined). At this meeting the contractor will provide the following: a. Schedule of Values to be utilized for progress payments. Final copy of Payment Schedule in the 0 & M Manual. b. Detailed progress schedule shall be submitted at the pre construction meeting and updated for each progress meeting and long lead items shown on the schedule. Final Schedule in the 0 & M Manual. c. Material submittals & Shop Drawings — list of materials to be provided to the Architect /Engineer for approval prior to purchasing. All material and shop drawings shall be submitted within 75 day from notice to proceed. Contractor shall maintain a submittal log showing dates of submittal, status of submittals and approvals. All Material & Shop Drawing Submittals in the 0 & M Manual. d. Discussion of project closeout procedures. 3 hard copies of 0 & M Manual shall be provided to the Owner in a three ring binder and separate tabs shall separate each section. e. All warranty shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. f. Owner to provide electric and water during the construction of the project. g. General Contractor to provide employee sanitation (shall not use Owner public restrooms). h. The schedule is to be discussed at project progress meetings and shall be held every two week at an agreed day and time. Discussion items at the meetings as follows: i. Work completed the past two (2) weeks. ii. Work scheduled next two (2) weeks. iii. Issues of concern. (Questions and answers.) iv. Updated schedule. v. Draft pay request and submission of invoice. 18. Quality Assurance: a. The General Contractor's field superintendent is to review the project documents in total, and subsequently meet with the engineer prior to starting the work to address any questions relevant to the project requirements. b. General Contractor shall provide all barricades, as necessary to protect the property structure and safety of the residents, visitors, and workers at all times. SECTION IV Page 3 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications c. General Contractor's staging area to be determined at the pre - construction meeting. 19. The General Contractor's superintendent shall be required to maintain a daily log on -site identifying the number of workers, work activity, change in weather conditions, etc. and shall be included in the 0 & M Manual 20. Payment for work performed. a. The General Contractor shall submit pay application of the 25t11 of each month of work performed the pass 30 days. b. A pencil draft of the pay application shall be provided to the Engineer and Owner at one of the progress meeting for review. Upon approval the General Contractor shall submit an electronic pay application for approval and upon approval by the Engineer shall send electronic copy to the Owner for payment. c. Payment of request for payment shall be made within 30 days from date of invoice and payment shall be made to the General Contractor's mailing address. No check will be provided by hand delivering and only delivery by U. S. Postal Service. d. Final payment shall be made as stipulated in the contract documents. e. 10% retainage of total project cost shall be retained by the Owner until the following schedule of items are completed: i. 5% retainage may be requested upon: 1. Substantial completion of the project: a. Close out of Building Permit Final b. Obtain Certificate of Completion c. Preliminary walk through by Engineer & Owner d. Punch list has been provided to the Contractor to perform punch list ii. Remaining 5% retainage may be request upon: 1. Punch list items are completed and request for final walk through by the Owner and Engineer and approval punch list items are completed. 2. 0 & M Manual has been reviewed and approved by Engineer, turned over to the Owner 3. 3 Hard Copies of the 0 & M Manual with divider tabs of each section 4. 1 Hard copy set of red lined As Built drawings 5. 3 electronic CD's of tiles in the 0 & M Manual and As built drawings 21. Deliverable at Close Out of Project: a. Red Line `As- Built' drawings shall be provided to the Owner. The Contractor shall obtain a clean set of drawings from the Owner. The clean set of drawings the Contractor shall red line and changes to the work performed. 22. Surveying layout and grades by the General Contractor. 23. General Contractor shall install: a. Temporary construction fencing b. Tree barricades c. Root pruning SECTION IV Page 4 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications d. Silt fencing and any other storm water protection prior to calling Land Recourses for inspection for collection of Building Permit BCP2017 -01415 24. General Contractor shall note the Owner intends to operate the Aquatic Center beginning Memorial weekend May 2018 and will continue operation during the construction of the new recreation center. General contractor shall take all safety precautions necessary for safety and welfare of the public and city stag. 25. The Owner has provided temporary power for existing irrigation well and the General Contractor shall maintain operation of existing irrigation well and provide permanent power from new recreation building. 26. Existing irritation system is operational and General Contractor shall relocate irritation system as required to construct new recreation center. 27. Hearing Loop in Multipurpose Room General Contractor shall contact Patrick Ostman for instruction of installing hearing loop in proposed floor and termination points for connection of hearing loop equipment. Contract information: Indoor Wireless Solutions 732 Stremma Rd Largo, FL 33770 Office: 813- 333 -6557 Cell: 813 -597 -3227 Email: patrick.ostman@l-W-S.org 28. Fire Alarm and Security system shall contact John Maire for installation of low voltage wiring system and hardware. The Owner has ongoing contract with Maire Company for monitoring and supply of hardware the Fire Alarm and Security systems. Maire Company P. O. Box 1346 Dunedin, FL 34697 Office: (727) 712 -3250 Email: mairesys @verizon.net The General contractor shall provide all conduits /raceway for fire alarm and security systems and no conduits exposed on finished wall viewable to public spaces. All conduits and raceway shall be behind walls, coordinate all work with Maire Company. 29. Natural gas water heaters the Owner has received from Clearwater Gas for installation of Rinnia C199i tankless water heaters contact person with Clearwater gas is Chris Thorn in the appendix is attached proposal for gas installation. The Owner shall contract directly with Clearwater Gas for gas system piping and gas water heaters for the facility. The General Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with Clearwater Gas for installation of gas piping system and all electrical and potable water and blow off plumbing for the water SECTION IV Page 5 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications heaters and any other items inclusive for a complete operable gas system of the propose new recreation center's Yanmar Gas HVAC system. Chris Thorn Clearwater Gas System 711 Maple St. Clearwater FI. 33755 Office: (727)562 -4980 x7457 Cell: (727)224 -7306 Fax: (727)562 -4989 Enail: chris.thorn@myclearwater.com Description of work installation by Clearwater Gas: From existing Natural Gas meter serving Pool, extend underground gas line to new Recreation Center. Extend gas line into Electrical Room. Mount two (2) Rinnai C199i Tankless Water Heaters on wall common with Multi Purpose Room. Connect gas line to heaters and vent Water Heater through roof above. From underground gas line, extend another gas line into Rec. Center, extend gas line above dropped ceiling to Janitor Room located near Bathrooms. Mount two (2) Rinnai CI 99i Tankless Water Heaters on wall common with Men's Bathroom. Connect gas line to heaters and vent Water Heaters through Roof above. Continue gas line through Lobby to Gymnasium. Continue gas line through Gymnasium into Storage Room located on North side of Gymnasium. Mount one (1) Rinnai C199i Tankless Water Heater on wall common with Life Guard Room. Connect gas line to heater and vent Water Heater through Roof above. Extend gas line behind stackable Washer /Dryer. Connect gas line to Dryer with Stop and Flex Connector. Install second Natural Gas meter at Northeast corner of building to serve Natural Gas A/C system. Extend gas line to ten (10) Yanmar Gas Fired Refrigeration Units. Connect gas line to units with stops and flex connectors. 30. The HV /AC YANMAR System is a Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) natural gas heat pump system, Owner recommends the system be installed with a certified YANMAR installer or an HVAC company who has vast knowledge of installation of variable refrigerant flow systems. YANMAR provide seminars for being a certified YANMAR System, contact: Roger Davis Integrity Sales & Marketing, Inc. 3140 Mulford Rd. Mulberry, fl. 33860 Cell: 863 -581 -0687 Email: roger @intsales.com or Brad Hopkins Integrity Sales & Marketing, Inc. 3140 Mulford Rd. Mulberry, fl. 33860 Cell: 863 -581 -0690 Email: brad @intsales.com Upon receiving and opening bid the Owner will issue a letter of intent to award the contract to the successful responsible low bidder. The Owner shall request meeting with the General Contractor for schedule of values of the project base on his bid price based on specification division for value of the work. The cost associated with the installation of the YANMAR SECTION IV Page 6 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications HV /AC System verses a conventional electrical HVAC system. which includes but not limited to the following: a. YANMAR HV /AC System b. Concrete flatwork c. Retaining wall d. Screening of mechanical yard e. All piping and redundant condensation piping f. Additional structural steel fabrication works to hang system g. Additional electrical work h. Condensation stainless steel pans i. Additional HVAC ducts j. Extra labor involved 31. The General Contractor shall an electrical man lift to meet the Florida Building Code, Section 306.3 Appliance in Attic. The Owner man lift shall be large enough to allow removal of the largest appliance and wide enough to accommodate two (2) service personnel to perform servicing the appliances in the gymnasium. The man lift shall be stored on site in the storage room off the gymnasium prior to completion of the project. The proposed man lift shall not be utilized during the construction of the project. Man lift shall be sized to reach the highest point in the gym and care shall be taken in section of the lift as not to damage the maple hardwood flooring. The man lift shall have charging equipment included as part of the man lift package. Shop drawings shall be provided to the Architect and Owner for approval prior to General Contractor purchasing the man lift. 32. General contractor shall note sanitary sewer lines shall be only mechanical, electrical, plumbing (MEP) installed below grade no other shall be allowed below grade except for penetration into the building. All MEP shall be installed in walls or above reflective ceiling or exposed shall be painted. 33. All painted wall surface shall receive heavy knock down textured surface, General Contractor shall provide 5'x5' textured surface for approval by Owner. Approved texture surface sample shall be store by General Contractor for future reference. 34. Pool trench drain is shown circular curve for ease of installation this will now be segmental sections and shop drawing shall be provided by the General Contractor for approval by the Owner and Engineer prior to ordering trench drain. 35. All landscape bed which has been compacted during constructions shall be tilled to a minimum depth of 30 inches to loosen up compaction. 36. The General Contractor shall retain a certified irrigation designer to design irrigation system for approval by Owner. The irrigation system shall be designed based on irritation detail plans and technical specifications provided. The General Contractor shall note: a. No drip irrigation system shall be allowed such as Netafim b. Locate existing irrigation system and utilize existing system as necessary. c. Relocate existing irrigation system as necessary. SECTION IV Page 7 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications d. Provide a complete operational irritation system from existing well e. Design system base on well providing 65 psi at 50 gallons per minute from point of connect at existing well location. f. Hedge along parking lot shall be irrigated with full spray nozzle and spaced accordingly. g. All spray shall be designed with 80% of maximum radius distance of nozzle to allow adjustment for wind. h. No trenching beneath tree canopy drip line of existing trees, either bore beneath tree root system or go around tree canopy drip line. i. All parkways (space between sidewalk and curb of street) shall be irrigated. j. All pipe beneath hard surfaces shall be sleeved twice the size irrigation pipe passing through and 2 inch wire sleeve shall be provided for irritation control wires. k. No irrigation head shall be spraying towards building but away from building. 1. Irrigation Consultant Designer and General Contractor is not obligated to use recommended designer: Michael C. Essenwein ICD Services 10803 Providence Oaks Drive Riverview, FL 33578 Office: (813) 653 -1587 Cell: (813) 495 -4987 Fax: (813) 436 -9603 Email: irrigate @tampabay.rr.com 37. Upon Owner in providing letter intent to award contract the General Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule of value by Technical Specification Divisions. Contract Period: _330_ Consecutive Calendar Days 102. FIELD ENGINEERING 102 -1.1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the State of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section 11I (General Conditions), Article 6.1 1.2 of these Contract Documents. SECTION IV Page 8 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • 102 -1.2. GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS • • Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Professional Land Surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. 102 -1.3. LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 102 -2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY If line and grade is supplied by the City, at the completion of all work the Contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section II1 (General Conditions), Article 6.1 1.2 of these Contract Documents. 103. DEFINITION OF TERMS For the Purpose of these Technical Specifications, the Definition of Terms from Section 111, Article 1 - Definitions of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the Contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 103 -1. REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. SECTION IV Page 9 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications The most stringent specification prevails in the case where more than one specification is referenced for the same task. Contractor shall utilize applicable FDOT Standards and Specifications for tasks that are not covered by City's Standards and Specifications. 104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 105. AUDIO /VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 105 -1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio /video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights -of -way, Tots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of pre- construction conditions. 105 -2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIO /VIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty -one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 105 -3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio /video recording shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre- construction color audio /video recording documentation. 105 -4. EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio /video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio /video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. SECTION IV Page 10 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • 105 -5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 105 -6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during video playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. • 105 -7. VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the video viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed by the Contractor in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed ten feet (10'). The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. • 105 -8. LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No videoing shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 105 -9. SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within the construction area's zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during videoing shall not exceed forty -four (44) feet per minute. SECTION W Page 11 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 105 -10. VIDEO LOG /INDEX AM videos shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by video number and project title. Each video shall have a log of that video's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 105 -11. AREA OF COVERAGE Video coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc., within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 105 -12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 106. STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is prohibited. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 107 -1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 107 -2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and /or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and /or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident SECTION IV Page 12 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation. or most recent addition. This plan shall be reviewed and approved by City Traffic Operations personnel regardless if MOT plan details are included in the contract plans. 107 -2.1. WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety are to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specitic objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation they will be facing as the driver proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and /or around construction or maintenance work zones. Per the 2014 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 or latest revision: "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved pedestrian longitudinal channelizing devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and marked detours shall be provided by appropriate signs." Per the 2014 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction or latest revision FDOT Design Standards (DS): 102 -5 Traffic Control, 102 -5.1 Standards, are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans. 107 -3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increases with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season without prior approval by the City Engineer. 107 -3.1. ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County or Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. SECTION IV Page 13 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 107 - 3.1.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 107 -3.2. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic Division staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 107 - 3.2.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of seven (7) day notice period prior to road closure and potentially longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 107 -3.3. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 107 - 3.3.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C -View Release 107 -3.4. MAJOR ARTERIALS 107 - 3.4.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than seven (7) days. 107 -4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone (727) 562 -4747, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 107 -5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. SECTION IV Page 14 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 410 107 -6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL • • Payment for work zone traffic control is a non - specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise. 107 -7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and /or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a twenty -four (24) hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day -to -day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a twenty -four (24) hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 108 -1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines, the Contractor shall utilize one of the following options: Option 1 - Having the power lines de- energized and visibly grounded. Option 2 - Maintaining a minimum distance of twenty feet (20') of clearance for voltages up to 350 kV and fifty feet (50') of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV. Option 3 - Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the following table. 108 -2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES VOLTAGE MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE SECTION IV Page 15 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications (nominal, kV, alternating current) (feet) Up to 50 10 Over 50 to 200 15 Over 200 to 350 20 Over 350 to 500 25 Over 500 to 750 35 Over 750 to 1,000 45 Over 1,000 (as established by the utility owner /operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electric power transmission and distribution) Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up to and including 200kV. 109. PROJECT WEB PAGES 109 -1. WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 109 -2. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WA1-WEBCONTENT-19990505/ http: / /www.section508.gov/ In particular, use of variable -width tables, user - adjustable /relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design /aesthetics. 109 -3. THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, SECTION IV Page 16 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened. or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by City departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from Public Communications. 109 -4. MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 109 -5. INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow the Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 109 -6. POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different server than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. • 109 -7. WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed, Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up -to -date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. • SECTION IV Page 17 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 200 SERIES: SITEWORK 201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The Contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The Contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the Contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C ". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify their Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff is required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the Contractor. City staff, in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements, is to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform to OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the Contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The construction quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract do not contain sufficient quantities to allow the Contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench - shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than four hundred feet (400') of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be a minimum of six inches (6 ") wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. SECTION IV Page 18 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 202. OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires. mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully. promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 203. DEWATERING 203 -1. GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry ". The Contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. Contractor shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this Contractor may be required to divert the water to a suitable place of discharge as may be determined by the Engineer. Where possible, Contractor may contain produced groundwater on the project site, a dewatering plan must be submitted to the City for approval if a discharge permit is not obtained or required. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per linear foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 203 -2. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 203 -2.1. DEWATERING DISCHARGE The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting the Notice of Intent to use the Generic Permit for the Discharge of Groundwater from Dewatering Operations and associated fee in accordance with Florida DEP Requirements, F.A.C. 62- 621.300(2)(b) prior to discharging of produced groundwater into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to construction, a dewatering plan must be prepared and submitted to the City for review. It shall include site- specific notes and details presenting the Contractor's proposed dewatering and disposal methods. The City will field- inspect the dewatering operation throughout construction. SECTION IV Page 19 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated from under pipes, structures and roadways and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off -site at their expense. The limits and depths of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. 204 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of clean fill placed as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. Included in the cost of cubic yards of suitable material placed is the removal, hauling and disposal of unsuitable material. 204 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems, Slurry Pipe Lines and Potable Water SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER Reclaimed Water, Irrigation and Slurry Lines SECTION IV Page 20 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications WHITE Proposed Excavation PINK Temporary Survey Markings Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be six inch (6 ") x three inch (3 ") and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be four inch (4 ") x two inch (2 ") and be placed on the curb face. 206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard -Specifications. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off -site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 206 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 206 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 207 -1. GENERAL Erosion and sediment control shall conform to the requirements of the FDOT Standard Specifications for Prevention, Control, and Abatement of Erosion and Water Pollution. Contractor shall use temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E &SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater Standard Indices. 207 -2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) Florida Stormwater, Erosion, and Sedimentation Control Inspector Training & Certification. All personnel working on the Project shall complete illicit discharge training once per calendar year. Contractor shall provide documentation to the City prior to Notice To Proceed. Example of SECTION IV Page 21 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications training and training sign -in sheet will be provided by the City to the Contractor at the Pre - Construction Meeting. 207 -3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other temporary vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 207 -4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on -site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 207 -5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E &SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater Standard Indices, or equals approved by the City Engineer before installation. 207 -6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 207 -7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: no more than 400 linear feet of trench shall be open at any one time; and, wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 207 -8. MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and /or repaired as required. SECTION W Page 22 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 207 -9. COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and /or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order ". 208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES. Other beach erosion control structures, accompanied by a certified survey showing the location of the groin or other beach erosion control structure and adjoining groins or other beach erosion control structures, shall be presented to the city council for final approval. Where steps are necessary to provide access along the beach to the public, then such steps shall be shown as part of the plan for groin construction prior to issuance of the permit, and such steps shall be constructed and maintained in a safe condition at all times. 208 -1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS Existing seawalls and revetments on natural waterbodies may be replaced with a revetment or with a vertical seawall with the provision of rip rap placed at the base of the wall up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall. Revetments and seawalls may be replaced with a vertical seawall in manmade waterbodies, provided that the seawall is within the property line and maintains the established shoreline. • 208 -2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION The top of cap elevation for all replacement and new seawalls and seawall caps shall not exceed 4.8 feet N.A.V.D. If the top of a seawall cap is constructed at an elevation differing from the adjacent property owner top of cap elevation by greater than one foot, then a return wall is required to sufficiently provide for the break in grade at the property line. Seawalls exceeding 4.8 feet N.A.V.D. in height prior to the effective date of this article may be maintained, repaired and replaced to their current height. • 208 -3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL Seawalls and revetments located seaward of the coastal construction setback line are controlled by regulations of the Division of Beaches and Shores of the Florida Department of Environmental Protection. Replacement of a seawall or revetment that is located seaward of the coastal construction setback line necessitates submission of a permit application to the state department of environmental protection. 208 -4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL The placement of a new seawall waterward of an existing seawall is permitted, subject to the following conditions: (a) A Florida registered professional engineer must certify the new seawall design. (b) The new seawall shall not extend more than 18 inches from the waterward face of the original alignment of the existing vertical seawall location. SECTION IV Page 23 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications (c) The new seawall shall be placed vertically plumb. (d) Placing a seawall in front of an existing seawall shall only be permitted once unless the seawall behind the new seawall is removed. (e) Existing seawall sections that interfere with new seawall location shall be removed. (f) The new seawall shall include an adequate closure of gaps at each property line. (g) For zoning purposes, the setbacks for the property will be measured from either the property line or the waterside of the original seawall slab, whichever is more restrictive, and will not be adjusted to accommodate the new seawall addition. For purposes of pier construction, the shore normal dimensions will be measured from the waterside of the original seawall slab. 208 -5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY Prior to final inspection and approval of a new or replacement seawall or seawall cap, a post - construction survey shall be required. Repairs of existing seawalls and seawall caps which do not alter the height or location shall not be subject to this requirement. 208 -6. RIP -RAP On all natural waterways, an apron of rip -rap shall be placed at the base of all new and repaired seawalls up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall to absorb the wave energy and protect the underlying soft earth or sand from being carried away, as well as to provide habitat for desirable marine species. This rip -rap shall be required at the base of all new seawalls and at the time that an existing seawall is repaired where the replacement constitutes greater than 50 percent of the entire length of the seawall or includes the replacement of a panel. 208 -7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL A retaining wall may be built as an alternative to a vertical seawall, provided that all activities, including dredging, filling, slope grading, or equipment access and similar activities and all portions of the wall are located landward of the mean high water line. SECTION IV Page 24 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 300 SERIES: MATERIALS 301. CONCRETE The Contractor shall notify the Construction Inspector or City a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of all concrete placement. Unless otherwise noted elsewhere or directed, the following requirements shall be adhered to: All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at twenty - eight (28) days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M -85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C -33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C -94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of three inches (3 ") to five inches (5 "), except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than five cubic yards (5 cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding five cubic yards (5 cy), one set of three (3) compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 302 -1. EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point six inches (6 ") outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. 302 -2. FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal, except curbs. Curb forms shall be metal only, unless at radius, intermittent sections less than ten (10) linear feet or by written permission from Engineer. They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. 303. REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA -A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete SECTION IV Page 25 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Welded wires shall be elevated by the use of chairs. Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM A775/A77 requirements. 303 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 304. BACKFILL 304 -1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL Material for backfill other than under Gabion mattress shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from clay, muck, organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than three inches (3 ") in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Material for backfill under Gabion mattress shall be an A -1 soil meeting AASHTO M145. Backfill shall be carried up evenly in layer not exceeding eight inches (8 ") in thickness and shall be compacted into place by mechanical tamping before the next layer is applied. A hydro - hammer shall not be used for compaction. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to twelve inches (12 ") above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. For backfill in small areas that do not permit any type of tamping, Contractor may use flowable fill to achieve required density. Flowable fill shall adhere to Section 121 of FDOT specifications. Where wet conditions are such that dewatering by normal pumping methods would not be effective, as determined by the Engineer, Contractor may use #57 stone (meeting FDOT's specifications) and hand tamping until backfill has reached an elevation and condition such as to make the use of the mechanical tampers practical. Fully wrap the stones with a layer of Type D filter fabric of FDOT Index 199. Do not place stones within four feet (4') of the ends of trench or ditch; use normally accepted backfill material at the ends. Where new cast -in -place concrete work is performed, do not place backfill until the specified twenty -eight (28) days compressive strength occurs. Do not allow heavy construction equipment to cross over pipes or culverts until placing and compacting backfill material to the finished earthwork grade or to an elevation of at least four feet (4') above the top of the pipe or culvert. The cost of backfill, flowable fill, alternative approved material for wet conditions, and extra dewatering effort to achieve required density, etc., shall be included in the contract unit price or lump sum price for the item of the work specified. 304 -2. TESTING AND INSPECTION Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory, approved by the Owner, to perform density testing on backfilled material. All testing shall be witnessed by SECTION IV Page 26 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications the Owner's Representative. The test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. The Contractor shall be charged for all retests and re- inspection services. Backfill under all type of impervious areas and around structures: Backfill in these areas shall be compacted to a minimum of 98% Modified Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D 1557 or ASSHTO T 180. Tests shall be performed up to the proposed bottom of pavement elevation. Backfill outside of impervious areas: Backfill in these areas shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D -698 or AASHTO T -99. Tests shall be performed up to the proposed finished grade. Backfill Testing: The Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of backfill compaction by performing density testing. For each test location, density testing shall be performed at eight inch (8 ") lifts. The character of the backfill material will be observed during the excavation for density testing to determine conformance with the specifications. Density testing shall be performed using nuclear field density equipment or conventional weight - volume methods. If the weight - volume method is used, volume shall be determined by using the sand replacement test (ASTM D 1556) or liquid displacement methods (ASTM D 2167). If nuclear methods are used, the trench correction effect shall be accounted for by recalibrating the nuclear gauge on its calibration block at the location of each test prior to taking the density measurement. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, tools, and labor to prepare the test site for testing. Normal Testing Frequency: One test shall be performed for each one hundred feet (100') of backfill or fraction thereof or for each single run of pipe /culvert connecting two (2) successive structures whichever is less. The location of the test within each section shall be selected by the Owner's Representative. Testing shall progress as each one hundred foot (100') section is completed. Four (4) tests equally spaced around each structure shall be performed on each eight inch (8 ") lift. Testing which indicates that unacceptable material has been incorporated into the backfill, or that insufficient compaction is being obtained shall be followed by expanded testing to determine the limits of the unacceptable backfill. Expanded Testing Requirements: If normal testing within a testing section indicates unacceptable backfill, the Owner's Representative may require additional testing within the same test section to determine the limits of unacceptable backfill. Additional testing required by the Owner's Representative shall be paid for by the Contractor and shall not exceed testing of four (4) additional locations within the test section. Unacceptable backfill within the limits established by the testing shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Additional testing beyond that required may be performed by the Contractor at his expense to further delineate limits of unacceptable backfill. 305. RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 305 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the dry weight in tons. SECTION IV Page 27 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 305 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand - cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing. labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand - cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on -site is used as rubble riprap. SECTION IV Page 28 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER 401. SANITARY MANHOLES 401 -1. BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches (24 "). Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches (24 "). Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire interior and exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch (1/2 ") of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 401 -2. PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of five inches (5 "). The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from Contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. SECTION IV Page 29 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five inches (5 ") thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 401 -2.1. MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 703 -7, Asphaltic Concrete — Adjustment of Manholes. 401 -3. DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 401 -4. FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Index 301. 401 -5. MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type 11 Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a 15 mil dry thickness of Sherwin Williams Targuard® Coal Tar Epoxy or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or PP -R Liner with a minimum thickness of two millimeters (2 mm). 401 -6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by NPC Kor -N -Seal® or approved water stop coupling. 402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 402 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. SECTION IV Page 30 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 403 -1. MATERIALS 403 -1.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than ten feet (10') of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of twenty feet (20'). Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in these Technical Specifications Article 501. A two -way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 403 -1.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 403 -2. INSTALLATION 403 -2.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of Thermoplastic gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus eight inches (8 ") to twelve inches (12 ") on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without SECTION IV Page 31 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the Contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (one half inch (1/2 ") diameter aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint two (2) feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The Contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 403 -2.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 403 -3. TESTING 403 -3.1. TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed fifty (50) gallons per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at their own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any dips or sags of more than five percent (5 %) of the inside pipe diameter dimension shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 403 -3.2. TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. SECTION IV Page 32 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 403 -4. BASIS OF PAYMENT 403 -4.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per linear foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per linear foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two -way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 403 -4.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 404 -1. INTENT • It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of eight inch (8 ") to twelve inch (12 ") sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. • 404 -2. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR /INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive track record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 404 -3. MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, SECTION IV Page 33 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E= 113,000 psi Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft -lb /in Flexure Modulus E= 136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c =0.009 in /in /deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at five (5) foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of fifty (50) years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Any liner system must be approved by the Engineer prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and /or liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than fourteen (14) days prior to the date for receiving bids. 404 -4. CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to SECTION IV Page 34 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution Toads at the • • City's treatment plants. 404 -5. TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected with a digital camera and recorded in DVD format as specified below. 404 -5.1. VIDEO, PHOTO CAPTURE AND DATA COLLECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR MANHOLE AND PIPELINE INSPECTION This section describes the requirements of the Contractor in providing the following minimum requirements for Video, Photo Capture and Database structure to the City. The City is currently using CUES Granite XP video and data collection software. The Contractor shall provide the TV Inspections in the same Granite XP database, photo and video capture format. The Contractor - provided TV Inspections, Database, DVDs, Photos and related files shall have the ability to direct synchronize to the City's existing Granite XP database. 404 -5.2. IMAGE (PHOTOS) CAPTURE FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS The Inspection image files (pictures) shall have the ability to export to Industry Standard Formats to include JPEG, BMP, and TIFF formats and be transferable by disk, DVD and /or external hard drive to an external personal computer utilizing standard viewers and printers. 404 -5.3. DIGITAL VIDEO FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS Digital video files (Inspection Videos) shall be captured and /or recorded in the MPEG 1, 2 or 4 format or as specified by the City. The Video capture files shall be in MPEG format with data linking (Inspection Observations) to the database file(s). The "Link" of the video capture file to the database observation file is required. The inspection observation(s) shall link to the video record in real -time. The accompanying database shall support the following code systems: WRc, PACP, CUES standard, or current code system being utilized by the City. The Database and Software program (Granite XP V2.X) shall be able to import asset data from an ArcGIS (City current version) geo- database file utilizing the network features to associate Sewer Mains with corresponding Sewer Nodes. The database structure shall retain information on the various structures found within a sewer or storm system. It is important that the structures, nodes, manholes and pipe identifiers and related attribute information be retained as separate tables from the Inspection allowing import of existing data from multiple sources. The data structure allows different projects to reside within a single database. Information gathered in projects shall be available to view by project or by system. Data gathered during project inspection shall be available to view by the selected structure. Therefore, all inspections can be viewed on a structure even if gathered in different projects. SECTION IV Page 35 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 404 -5.4. SYNCHRONIZATION The database shall have the ability to synch assets and inspections from replicated databases. The synch process should have built -in error checking for duplicates, updates and any modifications to the data being synched. This allows for multiple sources of data to be effectively consolidated into a single unitary database for analysis and evaluation. 404 -6. LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at their expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 404 -7. LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 404 -8. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight (8) hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 404 -9. PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per linear foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc., to provide a fully SECTION IV Page 36 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 405 -1. SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made -in -place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 405 -2. PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and /or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. The cost of such work shall be included in the pay item, per linear foot of liner. 405 -3. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 405 -3.1. MATERIALS 405 - 3.1.1. LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel Toad. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The Contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 405 - 3.1.2. MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two (2) and three (3) parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. SECTION IV Page 37 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 405 - 3.1.3. GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four (4) bags of Portland Cement Type I I per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. 405 -3.2. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the Toss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertical as possible. Pour six inches (6 ") of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe water tightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, refer to Standard Detail Index 104, "Street and Driveway Replacement for Concrete and Asphaltic Concrete Surfaces ". 405 -4. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator /contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum one half inch (1/2 ") thickness using a machine specially SECTION IV Page 38 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: I . The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a two (2) coat application. 405 -4.1. MATERIALS 405 - 4.1.1. PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C -109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C -596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C -952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +1- 5 pcf 405 -5. INFILTRATION CONTROL • Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C -109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C -952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. • 405 -6. GROUTING MIX Strong -Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacturer's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum twenty -eight (28) day compressive strength of 250 psi and a one (1) day strength of 50 psi. 405 -7. LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at twenty -eight (28) days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi SECTION IV Page 39 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Project site. Bag weight shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be one -half inch (1/2 ") to five- eighths inch (5/8 ") long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the unmixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2 %) by weight. Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65% to 75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 to 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of 0.67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than one -half inch (1/2 ") in length nor greater than five- eighths inch (5/8 ") in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two (2) coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure a minimum of one -half inch (1/2 ") thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 405 -8. WATER Shall be clean and potable. 405 -9. OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 405 -10. EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete SECTION IV Page 40 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 405 -11. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 405 -11.1. PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and /or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some Teaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 405 -11.2. MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for thirty (30) seconds to one (1) minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 405 -11.3. SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after Tight troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be fifteen (15) minutes to one (1) hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of one -half inch (1/2 "). The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than twenty -four (24) hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produced from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no Tess than one -half inch (1/2 "). The SECTION IV Page 41 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 405 -11.4. PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) two inch (2 ") cubes may be prepared each day or from every fifty (50) bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 405 -11.5. CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. 405 -11.6. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10 ") of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine inches (9 "). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty -eight inch (48 ") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty inch diameter (60 "), and ninety (90) seconds for seventy -two inch (72 ") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 405 -12. INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 405 -12.1. SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration. 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam - injected through wall of manhole to fill voids, and /or b. Hydrophilic gel- injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of one -half inch (1/2") SECTION IV Page 42 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of thirty (30) dry mils 405 -12.2. MATERIALS 405 - 12.2.1. REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 -3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi 405- 12.2.2. HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574 -86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574 -86 Bonding Strength 250 -300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density 8.75 -9.17 lbs /gal ASTM D -3574 Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412 Elongation 250% ASTM D -3574 Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D -1042 Toxicity Non Toxic 405 - 12.2.3. WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components -two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the SECTION IV Page 43 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six (6) months. Upon completion, the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant /Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM C882 Modified 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength 380 psi (2.62 MPa) (7 day cure) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) ASTM C 190 Permeability 8.1x10 -10 cm /sec to (3 day cure) 7.6x10 -11 cm /sec CRD 48 55 at 100% RH at 50% RH 405 - 12.2.4. CEMENT LINING A self - bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze -Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity /Adsorption Test 4 - 5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after twenty -four (24) hours moist curing at 68 degrees Fahrenheit. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one (1) pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch (1/2 "), but no greater than two inches (2 "). It will have a dark grey color. 405 - 12.2.5. EPDXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of thirty (30) dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees Fahrenheit: SECTION IV Page 44 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray Pot Life, hrs 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 Tensile Elongation, % 10 -20 Water Extractable Substances, mg. /sq. in., max 5 Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 405 - 12.2.6. CHEMICAL RESISTANCE The sanitary sewer liner shall be resistant to: Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3 %), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10 %), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3 %), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3 %), and many others. 405 -12.3. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 405 - 12.3.1. PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and /or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and /or sand blast structure. d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client.) 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious /crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and /or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1 -5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty -four (24) hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 405 - 12.3.2. PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and /or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from SECTION IV Page 45 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines (where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 405 - 12.3.3. STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing /crystallization. 405 - 12.3.4. INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill five- eighths inch (5/8 ") holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 405 - 12.3.5. WATERPROOFING /CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. 405 - 12.3.6. CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (1/2 ") (and no more than two inches (2 ")) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a twenty -four (24) hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. SECTION IV Page 46 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • 405 - 12.3.7. EPDXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least thirty (30) mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. • • 405 - 12.3.8. CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 405 - 12.3.9. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10 ") of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine inches (9 "). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for a forty eight inch (48 ") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy -two inch (72 ") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 405 - 12.3.10. WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. SECTION IV Page 47 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER MAINS, FIRE LINES AND APPURTENANCES 501. SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, fire lines, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. 502. MATERIALS 502 -1. GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 502 -2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 502 -2.1. DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. SECTION IV Page 48 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest revision. Ductile iron pipe shall be used for all hydrant installations and for fire line installations from the main to the backflow preventer. 502 -2.2. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe four inch (4 ") through eight inch (8 ") shall be in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: Size Dimension Ratio (OD /Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than eight inch (8 ") shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes four inch (4 ") through eight inch (8 ") when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of four inch (4 ") and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated twelve (12) gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about eighteen inches (18 ") between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a two inch (2 ") PVC pipe to twelve inches (12 ") minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The two inch (2 ") PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the two inch (2 ") PVC pipe shall be plugged with a two inch (2 ") removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 502 -2.3. FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from four inch (4 ") through sixteen inch (16 ") in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C153 /A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI /AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with SECTION IV Page 49 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications requirements of ANSI /AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C111 /A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI /AWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 502 -2.4. RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 502 -2.5. PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 502 -3. GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be hand wheel operated with rising stems. Valves four inches (4 ") and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with two inch (2 ") square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, non - shock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch (2 ") diameter and smaller are not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch (3 ") diameter are not allowed. Gate Valves, four inch (4 ") to sixteen inch (16 ") diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI /A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509 -515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0-ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body. SECTION IV Page 50 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Gate valves larger than sixteen inches (I 6 ") shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI /AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by -pass. 502 -4. VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be three -piece valve box assemblies. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. 502 -5. HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 8ID Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant • AVK Nostalgic 2780. • American Darling B -84 -B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C -502 latest revision and must be UL /FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an 0-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately two inches (2 ") above the ground line. Breakaway bolts are not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one -piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. SECTION IV Page 51 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 one and a half inch (1-1/2") pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, one quarter (1/4) turn type with 0-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a six inch (6 ") Mechanical Joint epoxy Tined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a five and one quarter inch (5 -1/4 ") valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) two and one half inch (2 -1/2 ") hose nozzles and one (1) four and one half inch (4 -1/2 ") pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C- 502 -85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Restrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Restrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. 502 -6. SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to four inch (4 ") P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on four inch (4 ") main shall be one and one half inch (1-1/2"). Service saddles shall be used on all two inch (2 ") service connections to six inch (6 ") and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 502 -7. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. SECTION IV Page 52 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws. or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 502 -8. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, and when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customer's private system. The types of devices allowed are: 1 Double Check Valve Assembly - a device composed of two (2) single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the water tightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device - a device containing a minimum of two (2) independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 502 -9. TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith -Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and three - quarter inch (3/4 ") bronze test plug. 502 -10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. SECTION IV Page 53 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 503. CONSTRUCTION 503 -1. MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at their expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 503 -2. PIPE LAYING 503 -2.1. ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of thirty inches (30 ") and a maximum of forty -two inches (42 ") below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. 503 -2.2. INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe SECTION IV Page 54 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into the pipe, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of ten percent (10 %) or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems, or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI /AWWA C600 -82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. 503 -3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 503 -3.1. GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 503 -3.2. VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed eighteen inches (18 ") from the main line. SECTION IV Page 55 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 503 -3.3. HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located ten feet (10') of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a six inch (6 ") ductile iron branch controlled by an independent six inch (6 ") gate valve. If hydrant is placed greater than ten feet (10') from the main, an additional valve shall be installed at the hydrant and shall be included in the hydrant assembly cost. 503 -3.4. ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant run out length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 503 -4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater. SECTION IV Page 56 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 504. TESTS 504 -1. HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at their expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 504 -2. NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative forty -eight (48) hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 505. STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. 505 -1. STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification O- S -602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perch loron ". 505 -2. FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. 505 -3. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more than twenty -four (24) hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. SECTION IV Page 57 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 505 -4. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 505 -5. BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 506 -1. GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and /or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joint materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. SECTION IV Page 58 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • 506 -2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 506 -2.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 506 -2.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains completely and ready for operation. 506 -3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 506 -3.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSI /AWWA C110 /A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 506 -3.2. PAYMENT • Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. • 506 -4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 506 -4.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 506 -4.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 506 -5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 506 -5.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Article 501 -2.5 of these Technical Specifications. No exceptions. SECTION IV Page 59 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 506 -5.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant completely including necessary thrust anchorage, six inch (6 ") pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. SECTION IV Page 60 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 600 SERIES: STORMWATER 601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 601 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 602. UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub - surface drainage pipe as directed in the Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non - degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be eight inches (8 ") in diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F -758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M -189 described in FDOT Section 948 -1.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A -2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe that exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949 -93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non - perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly- chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140 -N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. Filter aggregate for underdrains shall be as specified in the FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 901 — Course Aggregate, and shall be either #6 or #57. If #57 is used, it must be washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag, or crushed gravel. 602 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of linear feet of eight inch (8 ") Sub -drain in place and accepted. SECTION IV Page 61 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 602 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per linear foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 603. STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be steel reinforced concrete unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 430 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 603 -1. TESTING AND INSPECTION 411 The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a watertight sewer under all conditions. The work under this Article shall include the internal video recording of new stormwater drainage pipes and drainage structures. The Contractor shall provide the City with a video of the completed stormwater drainage system, and a written report. The Contractor shall pump down and clean the pipes and drainage structures, to the satisfaction of the City, prior to video recording. The video shall be of the standard DVD format, in color, with all the pertinent data and observations recorded as audio on the DVD. The data should include: 1) An accurate recorded footage of the pipe lengths. 2) The drainage structure number and pipe size. 3) The run of the pipe and direction of flow (i.e. from S -1 to S -2). 4) Details of structural defects, broken pipes, sags, dips, misalignments, obstructions and infiltration. The written report shall include the four (4) items listed previously. All visual and video recording inspections shall be completed by the Contractor and be in accordance with Section 430 -4.8 of FDOT Standard Specifications. Any deficient or damaged pipe discovered during the video recording process shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair or replace at their own expense within the contractual duration. SECTION IV Page 62 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications As a complement to the video report, the Contractor shall also provide digital photos of areas of concern in electronic (computer CD /DVD) and hard copy form (in color). All known pipe breaks or those breaks discovered after the video inspection shall be repaired by the Contractor regardless of the test allowances. Faulty sections of drainage pipes or drainage structures rejected by the Engineer shall be removed and re -laid by the Contractor. Sections of pipe that are repaired, re -laid or replaced shall be accompanied with a corresponding post construction video inspection at the Contractor's expense. In all cases that a leak is found, re- inspection shall be required at the Contractor's expense, to confirm that the problem has been resol ved. 603 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, gravel bedding if needed for stabilization, labor and incidentals, etc.). 604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Index Numbers 201 to 231. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Articles 301, 302, 303 and 202, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 604 -1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Built up type manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on Index Numbers 201. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with grout. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with a skim coat of one half inch (1/2 ") of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. SECTION IV Page 63 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 604 -2. PRECAST TYPE Precast manholes shall be constructed as shown on Index 202. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches (5 ") thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturer's option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. 604 -3. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 605 -1. MATERIAL 605 -1.1. PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES 605 - 1.1.1. GABION & MATTRESS BASKETS Gabion and mattress baskets units shall conform to ASTM A975, be of non - raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.106 inches. 605 - 1.1.2. PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 '/2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.134 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.174 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. SECTION IV Page 64 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. 605 - 1.1.3. GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. Crushed concrete shall not be used for filler material. 605 - 1.1.4. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 985. 605 -2. PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one -half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical SECTION IV Page 65 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than twelve inches (12 ") into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. In wet conditions, a base shall be established by spreading and compacting #57 stone prior to placement of geotextile fabric and gabions or mattresses. SECTION IV Page 66 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS 701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum eight inches (8 ") compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus two inches (2 "), if over six inches (6 "), and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T -180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per linear foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All necessary restoration exceeding this footprint will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per linear foot; sidewalk four inches (4 ") or six inches (6 ") thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of six inches (6 ") thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 303 and 707). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 702 -1. BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 101 "Scope of Work" of the City's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be eight inches (8 ") compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be twelve inches (12 ") compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is SECTION IV Page 67 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications found within the limits ofthe base, Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) ofthe City's Technical Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. Shell Base: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. Limerock Base: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. Crushed Concrete Base: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 100. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the City by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. Superpave Asphalt Base: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 234 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 5. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement Base: Reclaimed asphalt pavement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 283 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. As per FDOT Section 283, RAP material shall be used as a base course only on non - limited access paved shoulders, shared use paths, or other non - traffic bearing applications. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. SECTION IV Page 68 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • 702 -1.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED • • BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half -inch (1/2 "). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 702 -1.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 702 -2. SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the City's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade: The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value of the subgrade after the materials are mixed for the stabilized subgrade. 702 -2.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161 -6.4 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per Section 160 -7.2 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 702 -2.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. SECTION IV Page 69 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 703 -1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 703 -1.1. AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 915 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 703 -1.2. BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 703 -2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control /assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per FDOT's Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per FDOT's Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least twenty -five feet (25') from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per FDOT's Standard Specifications. In addition, for excesses of one - quarter inch ('/4 ") or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. SECTION IV Page 70 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • 703 -3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES • • All asphalt mix designs, acceptance procedures and quality control /assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Sections 330 and 334 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. 703 -4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Type SP /Spec 334 -1 Type FC /Spec 337 -8 Type B /Spec 234 -8 ATPB /287 -8 703 -5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, Quality Control Testing, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 703 -6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 703 -6.1. CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 703 -6.2. POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. SECTION IV Page 71 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 703 -7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A -36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A -36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc., will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 703 -8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. SECTION IV Page 72 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre - wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter. the final compacted asphalt shall be one - quarter inch (1/4") above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 703 -9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT • Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. • 703 -10. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and /or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID. PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than ten percent (10 %) from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http: / /www. dot.state.fl.us/ construction /fuel &bit /fuel &bit.shtm. For additional information, call FDOT at (850) 414 -4252. SECTION IV Page 73 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. 705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing asphalt driveways that must be altered for project construction shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six inches (6 "). Remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street. Use Article 703 Asphaltic Concrete, of these Technical Specifications, as specified for the street paving. When the finished surface of the existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Asphalt Driveways. 705 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Asphalt Driveways in place and accepted. 705 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Asphalt Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 706. CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed ten feet (10'). In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 301, 302 and 303 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 706 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be linear feet of curb in place and accepted. SECTION IV Page 74 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 706 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 707 -1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4-). except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6 ") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10 /10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every five feet (5'). Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical Specifications shall also apply. • 707 -2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six inches (6') in thickness with 6/6 x 10 /10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four feet (4') measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical Specifications shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. • 707 -3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS The contractor is responsible for constructing ADA compliant concrete curb ramps per the plans and installing detectable warning surfaces on said ramps as called for in the plan set. Concrete curb ramps and detectable warning surfaces are to be constructed per FDOT Standards and Specifications. 707 -4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of four inch (4 ") concrete sidewalk, six inch (6 ") concrete sidewalk, and six inch (6 ") concrete driveways in place and accepted. SECTION IV Page 75 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 707 -5. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 708. MILLING OPERATIONS 708 -1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify the City of Clearwater Project Representative a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of all milling. 708 -2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the Contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven (7) days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre- wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and /or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City SECTION IV Page 76 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 708 -3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified, all salvageable materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the City Project Representative to schedule delivery of material at least 48 hours prior to starting work. 708 -4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 708 -5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All private utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. City -owned utilities and structures shall be located by the Owner /City and adjusted by the contractor. The Contractor shall arrange their schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 708 -6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 703 -7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 708 -7. TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot (6') wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line /edge of pavement to curb line /edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. 708 -8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and /or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend SECTION IV Page 77 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications approximately fifty (50) to one hundred (100) feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 708 -9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 708 -10. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and /or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. SECTION IV Page 78 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • 800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND • • MARKINGS 801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LEDs and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is prohibited unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. All damaged inductive loop detectors shall be restored by the contractor per FDOT Index 17781. 801 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and /or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 802. SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators /flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. SECTION IV Page 79 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications The Contractor is responsible for restoring all striping in paint and reflective beading per the FDOT indices mentioned above. The City's Traffic Engineering department shall follow up with thermoplastic striping at a later date unless otherwise specified. 802 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and /or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 803. ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 803 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and /or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. SECTION IV Page 80 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING /RESTORATION 901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The Contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The Contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the Contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's Water Reclamation Facilities, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the Water Reclamation Facilities will be coordinated at the pre- construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 902 -1. IRRIGATION 902 -1.1. DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and /or specified. Work noted as "NIC ", "existing ", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf /landscape areas except at road /paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 902 - 1.1.1. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. SECTION IV Page 81 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 13. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the Contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders, with three rings, containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the Contractor's address and business telephone number, twenty - four (24) hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four -hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two -hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. 902 - 1.1.2. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation of twenty -four inch (24 ") diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. SECTION IV Page 82 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • 902 - 1.1.3. WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater. 902 -1.2. PRODUCTS 902 - 1.2.1. GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 902 - 1.2.2. PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. • 902 - 1.2.3. PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. • 902 - 1.2.4. PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 902 - 1.2.5. THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 902 - 1.2.6. GATE VALVES 902 - 1.2.6.1. MANUAL GATE VALVES TWO INCHES (2 ") AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200 -250 psi Ball Valve SECTION IV Page 83 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded -Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non -Shock Safe -T -Shear Stem 5. Safe -T -Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 902 - 1.2.6.2. GATE VALVES TWO AND A HALF INCHES (21/2") AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA-C-509 2. 200 lb. O.W.G. 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with two inch (2 ") square operating key with tee handle . B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve three inches (3 ") and larger. The "street key" shall be five feet (5') long with a two inch (2 ") square operating nut. 902 - 1.2.7. SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 902 - 1.2.8. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance - pressure across -the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25 -30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical /UV resistant materials. The valve's one -piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a one inch (1") (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch (I ") slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. SECTION IV Page 84 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902 - 1.2.9. VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UN1K control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36 -T cast iron traffic bearing cover. or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 ten inch (10 ") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6 ") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 902 - 1.2.10. DRIP IRRIGATION 902 - 1.2.10.1. CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one -half inch (1/2 ") low- density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self - cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing (12 ", 18 ", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self - flushing /cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 902- 1.2.10.2.OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7 -70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15 -45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow /reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12 ", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be seven inch (7 "). B. For on- surface or under mulch installations, six inch (6 ") metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed three feet (3') to five feet (5') on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 902 - 1.2.10.3. LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub - surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 902- 1.2.10.4.AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE SECTION IV Page 85 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air /Vacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 902 - 1.2.10.5. PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressure of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within +/ -6 %. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high - impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 902 - 1.2.10.6. FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 902 - 1.2.10.7. FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 902 - 1.2.11. AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three (3) independent programs with eight (8) start times each, station run time capability from one (1) minute to twelve (12) hours in one (1) minute increments, and a seven (7) day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. SECTION IV Page 86 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • 902 - 1.2.12. FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. • • C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 902 - 1.2.13. LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES -B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 902 -1.3. EXECUTION 902 - 1.3.1. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in Contractor's absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Specifications. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In the event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. SECTION IV Page 87 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. 902 - 1.3.2. EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 902 - 1.3.2.1. TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain six inch (6 ") horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain six inch (6 ") vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 902 - 1.3.2.2. BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have eighteen inches (18 ") of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than one half inch (' /z "). C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Standard Specifications. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six inches (6 ") thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. SECTION IV Page 88 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 110 902 - 1.3.2.3. ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non- pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. • • 902 - 1.3.3. INSTALLATION 902 - 1.3.3.1. WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 902 - 1.3.3.2. ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Specifications. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 902 - 1.3.3.3. SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and /or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 902 - 1.3.3.4. PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least fifteen (15) minutes setup /curing time before moving or handling. SECTION IV Page 89 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four (4) hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least twenty -four (24) hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 902 - 1.3.3.5. CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineer's representative prior to installation. 902 - 1.3.3.6. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than six inches (6 "), nor less than four inches (4 ") cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with twenty -four inch (24 ") minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, three feet (3') minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than seven feet (7') from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 902 - 1.3.3.7. GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. SECTION IV Page 90 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • 902 -2. LANDSCAPE • • 902 -2.1. GENERAL 902 - 2.1.1. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 902 - 2.1.2. SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Article. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and /or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Article shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 902 - 2.1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Article shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plans shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in their employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety SECTION IV Page 91 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non- compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Article. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call " / "Sunshine 811" at 8 -1 -1; "Sunshine 811" administrative offices may be reached at (800) 638 -4097. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 902 - 2.1.4. SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two (2) copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one (1) year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. 902 - 2.1.5. ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions /alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions /alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through their Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 902 - 2.1.6. ABBREVIATIONS /DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT: The over -all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C.T.: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. C. W: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SECTION IV Page 92 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST.TR.: Straight trunk. MIN.: Minimum. GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. O.C.: On center, distance between plant centers. DIA.: Diameter. LVS.: Leaves. D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade. CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. B &B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. PPP: Plants per pot. FG: Field grown. STD.: Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner 's Representative: Owner's on -site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 902 - 2.1.7. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 902 - 2.1.7.1. PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container -grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. SECTION IV Page 93 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications C. Balled and burlapped ("B & B ") plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than one foot (1") diameter of ball to every one inch (1 ") caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than two - thirds (2/3) of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of four (4) weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form cabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of twelve inches (12 ") of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within twenty -four (24) hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty -four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 902 - 2.1.8. JOB CONDITIONS 902 - 2.1.8.1. ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub - grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. SECTION IV Page 94 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to sod installation or seeding lawns. Protect existing lawn, trees, and promptly repair damages from planting operations. 902 - 2.1.8.2. SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's Representative and /or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc., in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and /or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representatives may request work stoppage in writing. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor, with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 902 - 2.1.8.3. UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 902 -2.2. PRODUCTS 902 - 2.2.1. MATERIALS 902 - 2.2.1.1. PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc., shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Schedule. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 902 - 2.2.1.2. PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insects, pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well - developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided SECTION IV Page 95 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part 1 and I1, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name, variety, size, quality, or designated area. E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit to the Landscape Architect proof of it being non - available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and /or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect, with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container -grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 902 - 2.2.1.3. GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as /if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious weed, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than SECTION IV Page 96 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications twenty -four (24) hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 902 - 2.2.1.4. MULCH A. Mulch shall be as specified in the plans or by the project manager. B. Install mulch to an even depth of three inches (3 ") before compaction, as shown in the PLANTING DETAILS in the plans. 902 - 2.2.1.5. FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20 -10 -5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grasses at the rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than one- fourth (1/4) the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). 902 - 2.2.1.6. STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over two inch (2 ") caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees two inch (2 ") caliper and under. A minimum of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of three (3) stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two — three- quarter inch (% ") steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. SECTION IV Page 97 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902 - 2.2.1.7. PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the City, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of one -third (1/3) peat and two - thirds (2/3) sandy loam, with no lumps over one inch (1"). C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under one (1) gallon container size shall consist of three inches (3 ") of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer six inches (6 ") to eight inches (8 ") into native soil. 902 - 2.2.1.8. SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra -Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 902 - 2.2.1.9. TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members six feet (6') to eight feet (8') on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot (1') for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH (four and one half feet)') above grade. 902 - 2.2.1.10. ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and /or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 902 - 2.2.1.11. PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 902 - 2.2.1.12. PESTICIDES SECTION IV Page 98 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 902 -2.3. EXECUTION 902 - 2.3.1. PREPARATION 902 - 2.3.1.1. OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 902 - 2.3.1.2. GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed /turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre - emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round -Up" or "Rodeo ", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over one and one half inches (11/4") in any dimension from individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 902 - 2.3.1.3. PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread three inches (3 ") of one -third (1/3) Florida peat and two- thirds (2/3) sandy, or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer six inches (6 ") to eight inches (8 ") into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. SECTION IV Page 99 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902 - 2.3.1.4. PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub - grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of four inches (4 "). C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top four inches (4 ") of soil. E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 902 - 2.3.2. INSTALLATION 902 - 2.3.2.1. BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well - drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 902 - 2.3.2.2. LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc., as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an eighteen inch (18 ") (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. SECTION IV Page 100 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the Plans. 902 - 2.3.2.3. PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about one inch (1") higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20 -10 -5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each 1/4" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7 - 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back - filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 four inches (4 ") (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back -fill up to the proper grade. Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of eighteen inches (18 ") from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. SECTION IV Page 101 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed -free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. 1. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 902 - 2.3.2.4. SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6 -6 -6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). The ground shall be moistened before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to one inch (1 ") to one and one half inches (1 -1/2 ") below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within two (2) hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of two inches (2 ") (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling -in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes 3:1 or steeper, and as required, a geotextile fabric shall be installed per manufacturer's specifications prior to placing sod. The sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 902 - 2.3.2.5. SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 902 - 2.3.2.6. TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by SECTION IV Page 102 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of four feet (4') height of stake above grade and a minimum of thirty inches (30 ") of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of three (3) stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of five (5) layers of burlap and five (5) - 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two (2) three - quarter inch (3/4 ") steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of five feet (5') of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 902 - 2.3.2.7. MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. Mulch should be below top of curb and resistant to washout from stormwater run- off. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a three inch (3 ") layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum three inch (3 ") clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum six inch (6 ") clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum six inches (6 ") of non - mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. 902 - 2.3.2.8. PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 902 - 2.3.2.9. CLEAN -UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean -up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 902 - 2.3.2.10. PROTECTION SECTION IV Page 103 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. The Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 902 - 2.3.2.11. REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by their operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by their work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 902 - 2.3.3. MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash -out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch (1") of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 902 - 2.3.4. INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 902 - 2.3.4.1. INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within fifteen (15) days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and /or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and /or Landscape Contractor. SECTION IV Page 104 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • 902 - 2.3.4.2. REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in the Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within fifteen (15) days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. • • 902 - 2.3.4.3. ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material, if any, have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent ", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from their Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or their representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under - specified plant materials. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 902 - 2.3.5. WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. SECTION IV Page 105 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 903. SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the Contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than seventy -two (72) hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and /or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 904. SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and /or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 Ib. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, .then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 905 -1. SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces SECTION IV Page 106 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the specified landscaped street areas including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 905 -2. SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, such as cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. 905 -3. WORK METHODS 905 -3.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 905 -3.2. DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The Contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 905 - 3.2.1. LITTER AND DEBRIS Remove trash and debris from the project site. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is the Contractor's responsibility. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The Contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the Contractor would be considered. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the Contractor. SECTION IV Page 107 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 905 - 3.2.2. VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within twenty -four (24) hours after providing the service. 905 - 3.2.3. PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular species. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, consistent with the following specification: 905 - 3.2.3.1. PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; and remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation, such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 905 - 3.2.3.2. TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the Contractor, according to the approved Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 905 - 3.2.3.3. PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 905 - 3.2.4. PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20 -6 -12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid - February, early June, and mid - September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 905 - 3.2.5. WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by Contractor at their expense. SECTION IV Page 108 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • 905 - 3.2.6. MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually three inches (3-). • • 905 - 3.2.7. IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the system's proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. 905 - 3.2.8. LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 905 - 3.2.9. PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three (3) pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. 905 - 3.2.10. FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze /frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze /frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility. Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty -four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on -site work at the contracted rate per man -hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and Contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze /frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 906. LEVEL OF SERVICE The Project Site is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within seven (7) working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six (6) and no further than ten (10) calendar days apart. SECTION IV Page 109 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 907. COMPLETION OF WORK Within twenty -four (24) hours of completing work the City either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. 908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given forty -eight (48) hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a twelve (12) month period on plants, trees and palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads /fronds as they feel appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. 3. All work shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or their employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs on the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required work to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 910. TREE PROTECTION 910 -1. TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and /or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two- thirds (2/3) of the dripline of all other protected species SECTION IV Page 110 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two inch (2 -) lumber- for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet (4') in length with a minimum of one foot (1') anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet (8') apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch (1 ") by four -inch (4 ") lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 910 -2. ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and /or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18 ") below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than eighteen inches (18 ") from existing grade. The City's Representative on Engineering Department projects for Root Pruning issues is the Senior Landscape Architect and can be reached at (727) 562 -4747, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. SECTION IV Page 111 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. if there is a likelihood of excessive wind and /or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches (10 ") per one inch (1-) of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18 ") from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than eighteen inches (18 "). H. Root pruning shall be performed using a root cutting machine specifically designed for this purpose. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 910 -3. PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and /or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A -300. B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. C. No protected tree shall have more than thirty percent (30 %) of its foliage removed. SECTION IV Page 112 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion- tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. SECTION IV Page 113 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • Technical Specifications MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2400 Harn Boulevard Clearwater, Florida 33764 100% CD Submittal 11/04/2016 Architect Wannemacher Jensen Architects, Inc. 180 Mirror Lake Drive St. Petersburg, Florida 33701 -3214 727 - 822 -5566 AA0002277 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1 — GENERAL CONDITIONS 011000 SUMMARY 012300 ALTERNATES 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014200 REFERENCES 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 017300 EXECUTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DIVISION 2 — SITE 025116 TERMITE CONTROL DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE 032900 UNDER -SLAB VAPOR BARRIER /RETARDER 033000 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 034800 CONCRETE U- LINTELS AND SILLS DIVISION 4 — MASONRY 042000 UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 5 — METALS 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL 052100 STEEL JOISTS 053100 STEEL DECK 054000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 6 — WOOD AND PLASTICS 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061525 COMPOSITE CLADDING PANELS 064116 PLASTIC - LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CABINETS DIVISION 7 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071900 WATER REPELLENTS 072100 BUILDING INSULATION 072726 FLUID - APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 074113 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 075200 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES 079200 JOINT SEALANTS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page i PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX DIVISION 8 — DOORS AND WINDOWS 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081116 ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS AND FRAMES 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 083333 SECURITY GRILLES 084113 ALUMINUM - FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 088000 GLAZING 088300 MIRRORS 089119 FIXED LOUVERS DIVISION 9 — FINISHES 092216 NON - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092400 EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 093000 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING AND CRACK ISOLATION 093013 CERAMIC TILING 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 096400 WOOD SPORTS -FLOOR ASSEMBLIES 096450 RESILIENT SPORTS -FLOOR COVERINGS 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096519 RESILIENT FLOORING 096623 RESINOUS URETHANE FLOORING 096813 TILE CARPETING 099100 PAINTING 099623 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 101400 SIGNAGE 102239 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102800 TOILET ACCESSORIES 104400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 107300 ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS 122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 123661 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS DIVISION 21 — FIRE SUPPRESSION 210000 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING 220503 PLUMBING 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 221100 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM 221313 SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM 221413 STORM WATER SYSTEM 224200 PLUMING FIXTURES, TRIM, AND SPECIALTIES DIVISION 23 — HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 230501 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 230510 INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 230531 ROOF CURBS 230548 VIBRATION ISOLATION TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ii PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 230593 TEST AND BALANCE; FINAL 230700 INSULATION, THERMAL 231123 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM 231316 PIPING AND FITTINGS 232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING, VALVES, AND SPECIALTIES 233113 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 233313 FIRE DAMPERS 233423 FANS, POWER ROOF VENTILATOR 233713 AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 238129 GAS ENGINE HEAT PUMP WITH VARIABLE REFRIGERANT 238219 FAN COIL UNITS DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL 260500 ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL 260519 BUILDING WIRE, CABLE, AND CONNECTORS 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING 260530 CONDUIT 260531 BOXES AND FITTINGS 260533 RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS 260553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 262600 PANELBOARDS 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262727 CONTACTORS 262728 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 262729 FUSES 262816 DISCONNECTS AND SAFETY SWITCHES 263500 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES 265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES DIVISION 27 — COMMUNICATIONS 270000 TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEM DIVISION 28 — ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 283100 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DIVISION 31 — SITEWORK 312300 SITE PREPARATION, EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK FOR FOUNDATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page iii PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work by Owner. 4. Purchase contracts. 5. Access to site. 6. Work restrictions. 7. Specification and drawing conventions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Morningside Recreation Complex 1. Project Location: 2400 Harn Boulevard Clearwater, FL 33764 B. Owner: City of Clearwater, Florida. C. Architect: Wannemacher Jensen Architects, Inc. 180 Mirror Lake Drive N. St. Petersburg, FL 33701 D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. Civil Engineer and Landscape Architect: Deuel & Associates 565 S. Hercules Avenue Clearwater, FL 33764 2. Structural Engineer: McCarthy and Associates, Inc. 2555 Nursery Road, Suite 101 Clearwater, FL 33764 3. Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Protection and Electrical Engineers: Colwill Engineering Consulting Engineers, Inc. 220 W. 7th Ave. #210 Tampa, FL 33602 E. Project Web Site: A project Web site administered by the Contractor will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage. SUMMARY 011000 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for establishing, administering and using the Project Web site. 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. A new 1- story, 20,000- square -foot recreation center building. 2. Site work required to serve the new facilities, their users and staff. B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 WORK BY OWNER A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner. 1.6 PURCHASE CONTRACTS A. General: Owner has negotiated purchase contracts with suppliers of material and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Owner will assign these purchase contracts to Contractor. Include costs for purchasing, receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment in the Contract Sum, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Contractor's responsibilities are same as if Contractor had negotiated purchase contracts, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final purchasing agreements. 1.7 ONWER - FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner shall furnish those products indicated on the Drawings as Owner - furnished or furnished by Owner. The Work includes unloading, handling, storing, protecting and installing Owner - furnished products and making building services connections as directed and turning them over to Owner at Project closeout. 1.8 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On -Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7 a.m. to 7 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. C. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor -air intakes. D. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted. E. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times. F. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site. SUMMARY 011000 - Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative. 1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 SUMMARY 011000 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. One: Deduct Alternate. 1. Base Bid: Purchase and install the ceramic tile per the Drawings and the Technical Specifications. 2. Deduct Alternate: Do not purchase the ceramic tile indicated on the Drawings. Purchase the setting materials, including the mortar /adhesives and grout, and the accessory materials, including the flooring transition materials, indicated on the Drawings and per ALTERNATES 012300 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX the Technical Specifications Manual and install Owner - purchased ceramic tile in the locations and patterns indicated on the Drawings and in compliance with Part 3 of the Technical Specifications Manual. END OF SECTION 012300 ALTERNATES 012300 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 016000 'Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORN!NGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability; or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. I. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Construction Manager of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner - Initiated Proposal Requests: The Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by the Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail." B. Contractor - Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURE 012600 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges. equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request (Proposal)," with attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail." 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, the Contractor will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Architect on AIA Document G701. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: The Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURE 012600 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. Cost - loaded Critical Path Method Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the schedule of values. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one - hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. a. Include separate line items under principal subcontracts for LEED documentation and other Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance. 7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line -item value of unit -cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line -item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor. 10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in -place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner- requested project acceleration. E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on- site and items stored off -site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. F Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project Web site. 5. Project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field - engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, on Project Web site, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 1 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project- specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Coordinate the addition of trade - specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 2 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. B. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements: 1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings. 2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File (PDF) format. 3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in AutoCAD Format. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106. 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 3 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architects response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor - generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.2B. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.8 PROJECT WEB SITE A. Provide, administer, and use Project Web site for purposes of hosting and managing project communication and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site shall include the following functions: 1. Project directory. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 4 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Project correspondence. 3. Meeting minutes. 4. Contract modifications forms and logs. 5. RFI forms and logs. 6. Task and issue management. 7. Photo documentation. 8. Schedule and calendar management. 9. Submittals forms and logs. 10. Payment application forms. 11. Drawing and specification document hosting, viewing, and updating. 12. Online document collaboration. 13. Reminder and tracking functions. 14. Archiving functions. B. Provide up to seven Project Web site user licenses for use of the Owner, Architect, and Architect's consultants. Provide eight hours of software training at Architect's office for Project Web site users. C. On completion of Project, provide one complete archive copy of Project Web site files to Owner and to Architect in a digital storage format acceptable to Architect. D. Contractor, subcontractors, and other parties granted access by Contractor to Project Web site shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106. 1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Lines of communications. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 5 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of record documents. I. Use of the premises. m. Work restrictions. n. Working hours. o. Owner's occupancy requirements. P. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Procedures for moisture and mold control. r. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. s. Construction waste management and recycling. t. Parking availability. u. Office, work, and storage areas. v. Equipment deliveries and priorities. w. First aid. x. Security. y. Progress cleaning. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. I. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 6 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. I. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 7 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 8 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect. C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 1 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. B. Startup construction schedule. 1. Approval of cost - loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost - loaded activities. C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label. E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement of the Work until most recent Application for Payment. F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. H. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. I. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. J. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. K. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request. B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 2 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including work stages and interim milestones. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner - furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures, including commissioning activities. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 3 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1 Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. I. Building flush -out. m. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 2. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. c. Permanent space enclosure. d. Completion of mechanical installation. e. Completion of electrical installation. f. Substantial Completion. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. See Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar -chart -type construction schedule within seven days of date established for commencement of the Work. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 4 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt -Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt -chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity -on -node) format. B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for commencement of the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a cost- and resource - loaded, time - scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for commencement of the Work. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time. 2.5 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages. and losses. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 5 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage. C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1. In -House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 6 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 7 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final completion construction photographs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation. 2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as project record documents at Project closeout. 3. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation. B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file. 3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan. 1.4 USAGE RIGHTS A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 12 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels. PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out -of -focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image- editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect. C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of excavation, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 3. Take 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. 4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. E. Architect - Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, Architect will instruct photographer about number and frequency of photographs and general directions on vantage points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to show the status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. F. Time -Lapse Sequence Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs as indicated, to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. 1. Frequency: Take photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. 2. Vantage Points: Following suggestions by Architect and Contractor, photographer to select vantage points. During each of the following construction phases, take not Tess than two of the required shots from same vantage point each time to create a time -lapse sequence as follows: a. Commencement of the Work, through completion of subgrade construction. b. Above -grade structural framing. c. Exterior building enclosure. d. Interior Work, through date of Substantial Completion. G. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as project record documents. Architect will inform photographer of desired vantage points. H. Aerial Photographs: Take a set of three (3) photographs at the Commencement of the Work, a set of three (3) photographs at each one (1) month interval, beginning one month after the Commencement of the Work, for the duration of the Work and, a set of three (3) final photographs at Substantial Completion of the Work. Provide two (2) close -up photographs of PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX the two best views of the construction in progress and project site work, and one (1) overall photograph of the entire Morningside Recreation Center site in each set of three photographs. Take the one (1) overall site photograph in each set from the same vantage point. Provide a final overall campus photograph that is of sufficient quality, with sufficient detail and scope to be used by the Owner for planning future projects on this site. Additional Photographs: Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum. 1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible. 2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow -up when on -site events result in construction damage or losses. c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit -cost allowances. d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. f. Owner's request for special publicity photographs. END OF SECTION 013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values. 2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 5. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device - independent and display resolution- independent fixed - layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 1 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in REVIT. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement. d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline: 1) Floor plans. 2) Reflected ceiling plans. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 2 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. 6. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 7. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 8. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of subcontractor. f. Name of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. I. Other necessary identification. D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS- 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS- 061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 3 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. I. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect and Construction Manager on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's and Construction Manager's action stamp. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's and Construction Manager's action stamp. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 4 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory - installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project- specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architects digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full -size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8 -1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 5 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality - control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full -size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 6 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1 Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 7 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED - DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated- Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. END OF SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 8 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality- assurance and - control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality - assurance and - control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality- assurance and - control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality- Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality - Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on -site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1. Laboratory Mockups: Full -size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. 2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies. 3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. QUALITY REQUIRMENTS 014000 - Page 1 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality - Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality - Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on -site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer /Applicator /Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub - subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade - specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction. 1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality - Control Plan: For quality- assurance and quality - control activities and responsibilities. B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality - control personnel. C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic- force - resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality- assurance plan prepared by Architect. 2. Main wind - force - resisting system or a wind - resisting component listed in the wind- force- resisting system quality- assurance plan prepared by Architect. QUALITY REQUIRMENTS 014000 - Page 2 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality - control service. 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY- CONTROL PLAN A. Quality - Control Plan, General: Submit quality - control plan within 10 days of Notice of Award, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality- assurance and quality - control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule. Quality - Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full -time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality- assurance and quality - control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. 1. Project quality - control manager may also serve as Project superintendent. C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. D. Testing and Inspection: In quality - control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 1. Contractor - performed tests and inspections including subcontractor - performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor - elected tests and inspections. 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections." 3. Owner - performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents. E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: QUALITY REQUIRMENTS 014000 - Page 3 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory- Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory- authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory- authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. QUALITY REQUIRMENTS 014000 - Page 4 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. Factory- Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site - assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. QUALITY REQUIRMENTS 014000 - Page 5 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups: do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality- assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re- review of each mockup. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 1.10 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality - control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders. 3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality - control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality - control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality - control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality - control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality - control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality - control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. QUALITY REQUIRMENTS 014000 - Page 6 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect field - assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. E. Retesting /Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality- control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in -situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality - control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality - control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality- assurance and - control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality - control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality - control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. QUALITY REQUIRMENTS 014000 - Page 7 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1 Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.11 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality - control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality - control service to Architect through Contractor with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality - control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality - control services. END OF SECTION 014000 QUALITY REQUIRMENTS 014000 - Page 8 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved ": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed ": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated ": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations ": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish ": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install ": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide ": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site ": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." REFERENCES 014200 - Page 1 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. 2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org. 3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org. 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; www.transportation.org. 5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org. 6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org. 7. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.concrete.org. 8. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete- pipe.org. 9. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org. 10. AF &PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org. 11. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org. 12. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org. 13. AHRI - Air - Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org. 14. Al - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org. 15. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org. 16. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. 17. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org. 18. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc - glulam.org. 19. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. 20. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org. 21. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com. 22. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org. 23. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org. 24. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org. 25. ARI - Air - Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 26. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 27. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org. 28. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org. 29. ASCE /SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers /Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE). 30. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers; www.ashrae.org. 31. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers); www.asme.org. 32. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org. 33. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse- plumbing.org. 34. ASTM - ASTM International; (American Society for Testing and Materials International); www.astm.org. 35. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org. 36. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org. 37. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. REFERENCES 014200 - Page 2 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 38. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com. 39. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; (Formerly: American Wood- Preservers' Association); www.awpa.com. 40. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 41. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org. 42. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 43. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com. 44. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org. 45. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association); www.bifma.com. 46. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org. 47. BOCA - BOCA; (Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.); (See ICC). 48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation); www.bwfbadminton.org. 49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org. 50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca. 51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org. 52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 53. CFSEI - Cold- Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org. 54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org. 56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org. 58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org. 59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com. 60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet- rug.org. 61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org. 62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca. 64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa- international.org. 65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org. 66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org. 68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA). 69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. 70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; www.ec - central.org. 72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECA). 73. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 74. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. 75. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org. 76. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org. 77. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA). REFERENCES 014200 - Page 3 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 78. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo - world.org. 79. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation); www.fiba.com. 80. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation); www.fivb.org. 81. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com. 82. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com. 83. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.; www.floridaroof.com. 84. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com. 85. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 86. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 87. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com. 88. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org. 89. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org. 90. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute /Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI). 91. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). 92. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org. 93. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com. 94. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org. 95. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA). 96. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC). 97. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 98. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net. 99. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa - hq.org. 100. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org. 101. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch. 102. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org. 103. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America); www.ies.org. 104. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES). 105. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org. 106. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org. 107. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu. 108. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com. 109. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA); www.intertek.com. 110. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society); www.isa.org. 111. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA). 112. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org. 113. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org. 114. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA). 115. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int /home. 116. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org. REFERENCES 014200 - Page 4 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 117. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA). 118. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org. 119. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. 120. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org. 121. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org. 122. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org. 123. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org. 124. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble - institute.com. 125. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (Formerly: Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association); www.wmmpa.com. 126. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com. 127. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.mss- hq.org. 128. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 129. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International); www.nace.org. 130. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com. 131. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org. 132. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com. 133. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org. 134. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 135. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 136. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 137. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. 138. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org. 139. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org. 140. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org. 141. NFPA - NFPA; (National Fire Protection Association); www.nfpa.org. 142. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA). 143. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 144. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. 145. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 146. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA). 147. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 148. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 149. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org. 150. NSF - NSF International; (National Sanitation Foundation International); www.nsf.org. 151. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 152. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. 153. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 154. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 155. PCI - Precast /Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org. 156. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. 157. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association); www.plasa.org. REFERENCES 014200 - Page 5 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 158. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org. 159. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 160. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com. 161. SAE - SAE International; (Society of Automotive Engineers); www.sae.org. 162. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 163. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 164. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. 165. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association; www.sefalabs.com. 166. SEI /ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute /American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE). 167. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org. 168. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org. 169. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org. 170. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org. 171. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org. 172. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org. 173. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 174. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spr.org. 175. SRCC - Solar Rating and Certification Corporation; www.solar - rating.org. 176. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 177. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org. 178. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com. 179. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 180. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org. 181. TCA - Tilt -Up Concrete Association; www.tilt- up.org. 182. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; (Formerly: Tile Council of America); www.tileusa.com. 183. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org. 184. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association; (Formerly: TIA /EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association /Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org. 185. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association /Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 186. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org. 187. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org. 188. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org. 189. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org. 190. UBC - Uniform Building Code; (See ICC). 191. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com. 192. UNI - Uni -Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni- bell.org. 193. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org. 194. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org. 195. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org. 196. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org. 197. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org. REFERENCES 014200 - Page 6 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 198. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org. 199. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com. 200. WI - Woodwork Institute; (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California); www.wicnet.org. 201. WMMPA - Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (See MMPA). 202. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 203. WPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org. C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de. 2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 4. ICC -ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc- es.org. D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. 2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov. 4. DOD - Department of Defense; http: / /dodssp.daps.dla.mil. 5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. 8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov. 9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov. 11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies Division; http: / /eetd.lbl.gov. 12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov. 14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; www.trb.org. 15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov. 16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. 17. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice; www.ojp.usdoj.gov. 18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeia; www.usp.org. 19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com. E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. REFERENCES 014200 - Page 7 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov /fdsys. 2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http: / /dodssp.daps.dla.mil. 3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 4. FED -STD - Federal Standard; (See FS). 5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http: / /dodssp.daps.dla.mil. a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide; www.wbdg.org /ccb. 6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access - board.gov. 8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB). F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CBHF - State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic Appliance and Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov. 2. CCR - California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com. 3. CDHS - California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH). 4. CDPH - California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal- iaq.org. 5. CPUC - California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov. 6. SCAQMD - South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov. 7. TFS - Texas Forest Service; Forest Resource Development and Sustainable Forestry; http: / /txforestservice.tam u.edu. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200 REFERENCES 014200 - Page 8 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary' for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer - service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Pay water - service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric - power - service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation - Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. C. Fire - Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire - prevention program. D. Moisture - Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. 1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water- damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water - damaged Work. 3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire - resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. E. Dust- and HVAC - Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC- control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 1 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Locations of dust - control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air - filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust - control measures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire - resistive sheet, 10 -mil minimum thickness, spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. B. Dust - Control Adhesive - Surface Walk -off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches. with flame- 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common -Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project -site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120 -V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4 -foot- square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 2 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self- contained, liquid - propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline- burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return -air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures ". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 3 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1 Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common -use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after -hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two -way radio for use when away from field office. J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide dust - control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 4 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire - fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. G Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste - collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution." Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary." C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil- bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation - control Drawings, requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is most stringent. 1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones. 2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation - control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. 3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 5 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. F. Pest Control: Engage pest - control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. K. Covered Walkway and Roadway: Erect protective covering for walkways and roadways for passage of individuals and motor vehicles through or adjacent to Project site. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Construct protective walkway and roadway coverings using scaffold or shoring framing. 2. Provide overhead decking, protective enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, exit signs, lights, safe and well- drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage. 3. Paint and maintain appearance of walkway and roadway protection for duration of the Work. L. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. M. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire - protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire - prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 6 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire - prevention and - protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire - protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture - Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water - damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry -in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum - based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective. b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 7 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24 -hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 8 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 2. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis -of- Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis -of- design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis -of- Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long -term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather - protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Special Warranty: Written specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a identification, ready for execution. warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide written document that contains appropriate terms and 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project- specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer /Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis -of- Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample ", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner - installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner - accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in -place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor. B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. D. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. E. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land- surveying services of the kind indicated. EXECUTION 017300 - Page 1 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load- carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire - suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire - detection and -alarm systems. i. Conveying systems. j. Electrical wiring systems. k. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their Toad- carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain -wall construction. d. Sprayed fire - resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration - control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on -site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In -Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in -place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in -place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. EXECUTION 017300 - Page 2 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water - service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates. C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." EXECUTION 017300 - Page 3 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect and Construction Manager promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. EXECUTION 017300 - Page 4 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field- engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for Toad conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. EXECUTION 017300 - Page 5 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in -place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in -place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Cutting: Cut in -place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. F Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 OWNER- INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. EXECUTION 017300 - Page 6 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on -site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 017300 EXECUTION 017300 - Page 7 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction photographic documentation. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 5. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractors punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - Page 1 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Owner's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit test /adjust /balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - Page 2 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest - control final inspection report. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy -duty, three -ring, vinyl- covered, loose -leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8- 1/2 -by -11 -inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic- covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - Page 3 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS -37, or if GS -37 is not applicable„ use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste - removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even - textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard - surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision- obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - Page 4 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. I. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. n. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992 -01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning. o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned -out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - Page 5 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect and Owner will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory. b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.. C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Owner's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's and Owner's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - Page 1 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 7. Cross - reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross - referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - Page 2 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - Page 3 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break -in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color- coding where required for identification. 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross - reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - Page 4 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: For each system. subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross - reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross - referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - Page 5 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents." G. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - Page 6 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey. 2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Final Submittal: 1) Submit one paper -copy set of marked -up record prints. 2) Submit record digital data files and three sets of record digital data file plots. 3) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked -up Product Data as a component of manual. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record - keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. E. Reports: Submit written report indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked -up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked -up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross - reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. 1. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked -up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red - colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked -up record prints with Architect and Construction Manager. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution. C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 4. Identification: As follows: PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked -up paper copy of Specifications. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked -up paper copy of Product Data. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked -up miscellaneous record submittals. 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer - produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module. B. Qualification Data: For facilitator. C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance -based test. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module. 1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date of video recording. 2. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page. 3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use in PDF electronic file format on compact disc. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory- authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required. D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break -in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. I. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Architect will furnish an instructor' to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. 2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on -site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in- place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance -based test. F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. 1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline. B. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time. C. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording. 1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required. D. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed. E. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment. F. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training. END OF SECTION 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 025116 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes soil treatment for termite control. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EPA - Registered Label. B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products certifying that treatments furnished comply with requirements. C. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's record information, including the following as applicable: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. D. Warranty: Specimen copy of special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A pest control operator who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced and has completed termite control treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has a record of successful in- service performance. B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with EPA - Registered Label requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground - supported slabs, before construction. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of TERMITE CONTROL 025116 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A. General: Provide an EPA - registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product's EPA - Registered Label. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. "Dragnet FT" permethrin; FMC Corporation; Agricultural Products Group. 2. "Prelude" permethrin; Syngenta. 3. "Prevail" cypermethrin; FMC Corporation; Agricultural Products Group. 4. "Probuild TC" cypermethrin; Syngenta. 5. "Termidor" fipronil; BASF Corporation; Agricultural Products. 6. "Premise 75" Imidacloprid; Bayer Environmental Science. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer. 3.3 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA - Registered Label for products. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA - Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute the treatment evenly. TERMITE CONTROL PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 025116 - Page 2 of 3 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1 Slabs -on- Grade: Under ground - supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers and piers; and along entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. 4. Allow not less than 12 hours of drying after application before concrete placement or other construction activities. C. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. D. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground - supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA - Registered Label instructions. E. Post warning signs in areas of application. F. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. 1. Place all irrigation heads a minimum of 12 inches away from structure to prevent excessive moisture at base of structure. END OF SECTION 025116 TERMITE CONTROL 025116 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 032900 - UNDER -SLAB VAPOR BARRIER /RETARDER PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied Under This Section 1. Vapor Barrier, seam tape, pipe boots, and detail strip for installation under concrete slabs. Related Documents 1. Specification 033000 Cast -in -Place Concrete 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM E 1745 -97 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil Or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs 2. ASTM E 154 -88 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs 3. ASTM E 96 -95 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 4. ASTM E 1643 -98 Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 302.1 R -96 Vapor Barrier Component 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control / Assurance 1. Independent laboratory test results showing compliance with ASTM & ACI Standards. 2. Manufacturer's samples, literature 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions for placement, seaming and pipe boot installation PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Vapor Barrier (Performance based specification) 1. Vapor Barrier membrane must have the following properties. a. Minimum WVTR as tested by ASTM E96 of 0.008 b. Water Vapor Barrier ASTM E -1745 Meets or exceeds Class B c. Water Vapor Transmission Rate ASTM E -96 0.006 gr. /ft2 /hr. or lower d. Permeance Rating ASTM E -96 0.01 gr. /ft2 /hr. or lower e. Puncture Resistance ASTM E -1745 minimum 1970 grams f. Tensile Strength ASTM E -1745 minimum 45.0 Ibf /in 2. Vapor Barriers a. Stego (15miI) Vapor Barrier by STEGO INDUSTRIES LLC. b. W.R. Meadows Premoulded Membrane with Plasmatic Core c. Vaporguard by Reef industries. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape UNDER -SLAB VAPOR BARRIER /RETARDER 032900 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. Minimum width 4 inches. B. Pipe Boots 1. Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape per manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ensure that subsoil is approved by architect 1. Level and tamp or roll aggregate, sand or tamped earth base. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install Vapor Barrier: 1. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E 1643 -98. a. Unroll Vapor Barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour. b. Lap Vapor Barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls. c. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape. d. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) with manufacturer's pipe boot. e. No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. f. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape. END OF SECTION 032900 UNDER -SLAB VAPOR BARRIER /RETARDER 032900 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 033000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE OF WORK 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete all cast -in- place concrete work, including formwork, reinforcing steel and all related work as shown and specified, except as specifically excluded hereinafter. 2. In addition to construction of cast -in -place concrete work, the work includes the items listed below: a. Setting anchor bolts, frames, and other items indicated to be embedded in concrete b. Grouting of structural steel bearing on concrete c. Concrete curbs d. Dowels for masonry walls e. Concrete walks f. Concrete pavement g. Laboratory field testing services 3. Cooperate with affected personnel or contractors in setting and /or fastening sleeves, piping, inserts, conduits, hangers, ties and similar items in the forms, where such items are to be furnished and installed under other subdivisions of these specifications. B. RELATED WORK NOT SPECIFIED UNDER THIS SUBDIVISION 1. Foundations and pads not shown on architectural, civil or structural drawings. 2. Furnishing steel frames and grating. 3. Furnishing miscellaneous steel shapes and plates embedded in concrete. 4. Furnishing anchor bolts for structural steel. 5. Furnishing piping and conduit embedded in concrete. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. APPLICABLE STANDARDS 1. Provide all materials and perform all work in accordance with the latest issue of ACI 301 "Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete A" and the reference specifications listed therein. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 — Page 1 of 13 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. The applicable provisions of the latest issue of the following ACI and CRSI Standards are made a part of these specifications. Where the provisions of any reference specification conflict with those of ACI 301, the more stringent provisions govern. ACI NUMBER TITLE 302.1R Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction 304.R Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete 304.2R Placing concrete by pumping methods. 305R Hot Weather Concreting 306R Cold Weather Concreting 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete 309R Guide for Consolidation of Concrete 315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures 318 Building code requirements for reinforced concrete 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork 70 -56 Guide for Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete — Committee 503 Report 75 -18 Concrete committee 503 report. Cold weather concreting. CRSI NUMBER TITLE 63 Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, not less than 21 days prior to placing of concrete, the following proposed concrete mix design data: 1. Intended usage and location for each type 2. Mix design for each type 3. Cement content in pounds per cubic yard 4. Coarse and fine aggregate in pounds per cubic yard 5. Water- cement ratio by weight 6. Cement type and manufacturer 7. Slump range 8. Air content range 9. Admixture types and manufacturers 10. Percent of admixtures by weight 11. Strength test data required to establish mix design B. Submit complete detail and placing shop drawings for all reinforcing steel including accessories that have been reviewed and stamped by the General Contractor. C. Refer to Section 01300 for all submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement - ASTM C 150, Type I. Type III may be used where authorized by the Engineer. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 — Page 2 of 13 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Air - Entraining Admixtures - ASTM C 260, Darax AEA, W. R. Grace & Company, SIKA AER, SIKA, MB -AE90, Master Builders, Air Mix, Euclid Chemical Corp. C. Water- Reducing Admixtures - ASTM C 494, Type D. WRDA -64, W.R. Grace & Company Plastiment, SIKA; Pozzolith N, Master Builders. D. No accelerators, retarders or admixtures containing chlorides will be permitted. E. Use fresh, clean and drinkable water for concrete. F. For normal weight concrete use coarse and fine aggregate to conform to ASTM C33. G. Super Plasticizer ASTM C494 Type F or G where authorized by the Engineer. H. Fly -ash ASTM C618 Type C618. Maximum loss on ignition shall not exceed 3% by weight. The combined weight of fly -ash shall not exceed 20 percent of the total weight of cementitious material. The fly -ash present in blended cement conforming to ASTM C595 shall be included in the calculated percentage. Do not use for architectural concrete. I. Ground granulated blast- furnish slag ASTM C989. the combined weight of GGBFS shall not exceed 50 percent of the total weight of cementitious material. Slag used in blended hydraulic cement confirming to ASTM C595 shall be included in the calculated percentage. 2.2 PROPORTIONING A. Concrete Strength — See structural drawings for minimum concrete compressive strength at 28 days. B. PROPERTIES 1. Provide concrete having the general properties specified for each class of concrete with the following tables to provide workability and consistency so concrete can be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without segregation or bleeding, and to provide an average compressive strength adequate to meet acceptance requirements of ACI 301. 2.3 PRODUCTON OF CONCRETE A. Concrete must be batched, mixed and transported in accordance with specifications for ready - mixed concrete ASTM C 94. B. Concrete shall be batched to produce a slump of 4" plus /minus 1 ". Refer to 2.02B unless noted otherwise. C. Provide at the site, delivery tickets for each batch of concrete showing the following: 1. Batch number, volume and date 2. Time of loading 3. Design 28 -day compressive strength 4. Concrete type 5. Cement content in pounds per cubic yard 6. Water content in pounds per cubic yard 7. Admixtures in amount per cubic yard 8. Maximum amount of water that may be added at the job site. D. Restrict the addition of mix water at the job site. Do not add water without the approval of the general contractor and do not exceed slump limitations or total allowable water to cement ratio. Use cold water from the truck tank and remix to achieve consistency. The reports shall indicate how much water was added at the job site. Note on delivery ticket amount of water added and name of person authorizing. E. During hot weather, conform to the detailed recommendations of ACI 305. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 — Page 3 of 13 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX F. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F., reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. When air temperature is higher than 90 degrees, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. G. Concrete should be deposited as nearly as practicable to its final position to avoid segregation of materials due to re- handling or flowing. H. Concreting should be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily into spaces between reinforcement. I. The use of the following is prohibited: 1. Partially hardened concrete 2. Contaminated concrete 3. Re- tempered concrete 4. Concrete that has been re -mixed after it has taken its initial set. J. After concreting has been started, it should be carried on as a continuous operation until placing of a panel or section, as determined by its boundaries or joints, is completed. K. All concrete should be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during placement and should be worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners of forms. 2.4 PLACING CONCRETE A. GENERAL 1. Inner surfaces of conveying equipment must be free of hardened concrete and foreign materials. 2. All reinforcing bars are to be tied in proper position prior to placing concrete. 3. Provide sufficient time for inspection of all preparatory work before proceeding with the placing of concrete. 4. Immediately prior to placing concrete, sprinkle semi - porous sub - grades sufficiently to eliminate suction and seal porous sub - grades, except where a vapor barrier is used. 5. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers continuously, no deeper than 18 inches. Horizontal cold joints will not be permitted. Fill forms completely using methods to ensure even distribution of aggregate around reinforcement and into corners of forms. 6. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. When air temperature is higher than 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 7. Concrete shall have a wet cure time of 7 days minimum at 50 degrees minimum temperature. 8. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable to its final position to avoid segregation of materials due to re- handling or flowing. 9. Concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily into spaces between reinforcement. 10. The following conditions are prohibited: a. Partially hardened concrete. b. Contaminated concrete. c. Re- tempered concrete. d. Concrete that has been re -mixed after it has taken its initial set. 11. After concreting has been started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until placing or a panel or section, as determined by its boundaries or joints, is completed. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 — Page 4 of 13 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. CONSOLIDATION 1. Consolidate concrete by vibration in accordance with the detailed recommendations of ACI 309. 2. Internal vibrators must be used in beams, girders and framed slabs and along bulkheads or slabs -on -grade to thoroughly consolidate the concrete. Do not use grossly oversized equipment. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. C. FINISHING 1. Finish concrete slabs in accordance with the finishes and tolerances as specified in ACI 301, and the detailed recommendations in ACI 302. Confirm all finishes with Architect. 2. Dusting of slabs with cement or other materials to absorb excess bleed water is strictly prohibited. TOLERANCE ITEM CLASS FINISH Exterior Pavement B Broom or belt Exterior Walks /Curbs B Fine broom Interior Slabs A Troweled Exterior Steps A Nonslip 3. For flat, very flat and super flat floors, "F" numbers are required for defining flatness and levelness. Refer to ACI 301.1R, Fig. 8.15.1.1, for minimum required "F" numbers for type of slab use. D. NONSLIP FINISH 1. Give surface a dry shake application as specified in ACI 301 using crushed selected abrasive aggregate of aluminum oxide. The rate of application of blended mixture should not be Tess than 25 pounds per 100 square feet of surface. 2. Acceptable products are: TYPE MANUFACTURER Grip -It L &M Construction Chemicals Frictex N.S. Sonneborn Nonslip Euclid Chemical Co. Emag 20 Lambert Corp. 2.5 REINFORCEMENT A. GENERAL 1. Details of concrete reinforcement and accessories not covered herein or shown on drawings to be in accordance with ACI 315. 2. Reinforcement is to be secured in proper position and thoroughly clean of loose rust, scale, grease or other coatings. B. REINFORCING MATERIALS 1. Unless otherwise indicated, for all reinforcing shown provide deformed bars conforming to ASTM A 615, or a 616 Grade 60. 2. Smooth dowels - ASTM A 615 and A 616, plain bars having a minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi. 3. Welded wire fabric - ASTM A 185 plain wire fabric in flat sheets. 4. Plain wire to conform to ASTM A 82. 5. Accessories to conform to ACI 315. 6. Where reinforcing rods are used as supports, use rods no lighter than No. 5. 7. Where concrete surfaces are exposed, make those portions of all accessories in contact with the concrete surface or within 1/2 inch thereof, of plastic or stainless steel. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 — Page 5 of 13 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 8. Reinforcing steel should be free of kinks and non -shop bends. Field bends should be only as approved by the architect. C. FIBROUS REINFORCING (Synthetic) 1. Reinforcing fibers to be virgin 100% polypropylene fibers, per ASTM C1116, specifically manufactured for use in concrete, containing no reprocessed olefin materials, with the following minimum physical characteristics: a. specific gravity: 0.91 b. modulus of elasticity: 500 -700 KSI c. tensile strength: 70 -110 KSI d. fiber length: multi- design gradation, 3/4" maximum. 2. Reinforcing fibers to be supplied by the following approved manufacturers: a. "FIBERSTRAND 100 ", Euclid Chemical Company b. "FIBERMESH INFORCE e3 or STEALTH e3 ", SI Concrete Systems c. "FORTA SUPER - NET ", Forta Corporation d. "NYCON FIBERS ", Nycon, Inc. 3. Fibers to be added in manufacturer's approved amount with a minimum of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard for poly and 1.0 pounds per cubic yard for nylon. 4. Concrete to be batched and mixed in accordance with fiber manufacturer's recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion of fiber bundles into single strands within concrete. 5. Reinforcing fibers may be used in concrete slabs -on -grade in lieu of WWF with approval of the engineer. 6. Submit product data for review and approval. 7. For a "non- hairy" surface use a monofilament fiber. Collated fibrillated fibers wear away in a short period of time. D. FIBROUS REINFORCING (alternate to wwf on composite metal decks) 1. All fibers must meet the criteria in the Steel Deck Institute design manual (Publication No. 30). 2. Cold drawn steel fibers meeting the criteria of ASTM A820, at a minimum addition rate of 25 Ib /yd3 (14.8 kg /m3) and possessing an average residual strength of at least 80 psi 550 kpa when tested ASTM C1399, may be used as a suitable alternative to the welded wire fabric specified for temperature and shrinkage reinforcement. 3. Reinforcing fiber to be supplied by the following approved suppliers: a. "NOVOMESH 850, or NOVOCON 1050" by SI Concrete Systems b. "DRAMIX 65/60" by Bekaert 4. Steel fibers do not replace rebar over girders, which are used to control negative moment. 5. Steel fibers are to be added at the batch plant and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLACING A. GENERAL 1. Place reinforcing in conformance with the requirements of CRSI 63. Place reinforcement in proper position prior to placing concrete. Placing reinforcement during concrete placement will not be permitted. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 Page 6 of 13 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, provide minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement as follows: a. Concrete deposited against the ground, 3 ". b. Formed surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with the ground, 2" for reinforcing bars No. 6 or larger, and 1 -1/2" for reinforcing bars No. 5 or smaller. c. Interior surfaces, 1 -1/2" for beams, girders and columns, 3/4" for slabs, walls and joists. d. See drawing for special conditions. 3. Support reinforcing for slabs -on -grade on staggered concrete bricks or metal or plastic bar chairs and spacers with metal plates. 4. Unless specifically authorized, do not bend reinforcement partially embedded in hardened concrete. 5. Support and fasten all dowels in the formwork prior to placing concrete. Do not place dowels after concrete is in place. 3.2 JOINTS A. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 1. Construction joints not shown in the contract documents must be located and made to least impair the strength of the structure. 2. No horizontal construction joints will be permitted in beams, girders or slabs. 3. Location of any construction joint not shown is subject to review and acceptance by Engineer. 4. Reinforcing is continuous through all construction joints. Obtain bond by roughening surface of concrete in an acceptable manner which will expose aggregate uniformly and will not leave any latence, loosened particles or aggregate or damaged concrete at surface. 5. Construction joints shall be cleaned, wetted, and standing water removed. 6. All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during placement and should be worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners of forms. 7. Concrete wet cure time to be 7 days minimum at 50 degrees minimum temperature. EXPANSION JOINTS 1. Reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete (except dowels in floors bonded on only one side of joints) will not be permitted to extend continuously through any expansion joint. C. DOWELED SLIP JOINTS 1. Use completely smooth round bars for dowels. 2. For construction joints, paint half of bar with red lead paint. When dry, coat painted end with satisfactory grease to insure against bond with concrete. 3. For control joints, paint and grease entire bar. 4. For expansion joints, paint, grease and provide a metal expansion cap for one end. 5. Place in forms to insure that bars are perpendicular to joint face. Stop reinforcement at doweled slip joints so that it will not extend through joint. D. JOINT MATERIALS 1. Expansion joint filler non- bituminous type - ASTM D 1752, resin impregnated fiberboard Homosote 300 or Thermosetting Polyurethane, W. R. Meadows' Rescor. Asphalt impregnated materials are unacceptable. 2. Polyethylene Film - ASTM D 2103 minimum 6 mil. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 — Page 7 of 13 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Horizontal Joint Sealer - 2- component self - leveling urethane conforming to Federal Specification TT- S -227E, Type 1, Class A. Color to match concrete. Acceptable products are TYPE MANUFACTURER Daraseal -U A. C. Horn Sonolastic SL2 Sonneborn Pourthane W. R. Meadows 4. Vertical Joint Sealer - 1- component Polyurethane conforming to Federal Specification TT- S- 002306, Type II, Class A, color to match concrete. Acceptable products are: TYPE MANUFACTURER SIKAFLEX IA SIKA SONOLASTIC NPI Sonneborn 5. Epoxy Joint Sealer - semi -rigid epoxy, MM80 as manufactured by Metzger McGuire Co., master fill 300 by Master Builders. 6. Epoxy Bond - 2- component 100 percent solids epoxy resin, amine cured. Acceptable materials are Concresive Series by Master Builders, Sonneborn =s Epogrip and Epiweld 580 by Lambert Corp. 7. Epoxy Grout - Epoxy bond filled with suitable mineral filler, 100 percent passing the No. 100 sieve, in ratio to insure thixotropic action without impairment of adhesive properties. 8. Compressive Joint Material - expanded polystyrene having a compressive strength not less than 8 psi when the board is compressed to a deformation of 5 percent of its original thickness when tested in conformance with ASTM C 165, modified to change drying temperature to 150oF. 9. Felt - 30 pound asphalt or coal tar roofing felt ASTM D 226 or D 227. E. PLACING DOWELS IN EXISTING CONCRETE 1. Use deformed reinforcing bars as dowels. Drill holes in existing concrete of size 1/2" larger in diameter than the dowel using power- driven drill with tungsten- carbide tipped bit ground to insure against oversize hole. Clean out holes with air Thoroughly swab surfaces of hole and embedded portion of dowel with epoxy grout. Force dowel into place. Wipe off excess grout and let set for not less than 12 hours at a temperature above 60 °F. 3.3 FORMWORK A. GENERAL 1. Provide and construct formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and 347. 2. Form design by P.E. registered in the State of Florida. 3. Observe and check formwork continuously while concrete is being placed to determine that there are no evidences of changes of elevations, plumbness, or camber and adjust forms as necessary. If, during construction, any such evidence or other defect appears, stop the work, remove concrete placed, if necessary, and repair formwork or supports before proceeding. 4. Earth cuts may be used as forms for footing vertical surfaces increase size 2 inch. 5. Forms and shoring is the responsibility of General Contractor. B. FORMWORK MATERIALS 1. Make forms of lumber, plywood, metal or other materials suitable to provide the strength and tolerances specified herein before and the surface finishes specified hereinafter. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 — Page 8 of 13 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Forming exposed surfaces use any of the following materials as suitable for the specified finish, and to produce smooth uniform surfaces, true -to -line, in order that surfaces produced will require little finishing: a. New plastic- bonded natural plywood, American Plywood Association, HD Overlay Plyform Class I, Ext -APA, or equal. 3. For forming exposed surfaces use plywood, or other nonmetallic surfaces free from knots, warps, breaks, or other defects likely to cause irregular surfaces. 4. Provide commercial formulation form coating compounds with maximum VOC of 350 mg /1 that will not bond with stain or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface treatments. C. REMOVAL OF FORMS 1. Forms and shoring in the formwork supporting the weight of concrete, in beams, slabs and other structural elements are to remain in place until the concrete has reached its specified 28 -day compressive strength. 2. Formwork and facing forms for members such as grade beams, foundation walls and spread footings not supporting the weight of concrete may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from the removal operations. 3. Arrange shores and other vertical supports so that the non -load carrying form - facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing the shores and supports. 4. Whenever the formwork is removed during the curing period, continue curing of both the unexposed and exposed concrete by one of the methods specified in section "Curing and Protection ". D. REMOVAL STRENGTH 1. Removal Strength - The concrete will be presumed to have reached its specified strength when additional test cylinders (paid for by contractor) are field cured along with the concrete they represent and have reached the strength specified. 3.4 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS A. GENERAL 1. Patch all tie holes and repair all honeycombed and defective areas immediately after form removal. 2. For surfaces other than those to be backfilled against, use patching mortar. 3. For surfaces to be backfilled against, use mastic damp - proofing compound, except that where reinforcing is exposed, use patching mortar. 4. Remove all honeycombed and defective concrete down to sound concrete prior to patching. Thoroughly clean the holes of dirt and debris. B. PATCHING MORTAR 1. Cut edges of honeycombed and defective concrete to form dove -tail (undercut) joints. No feather edges will be permitted. 2. Apply a chemical bonding agent to voided surface. An acceptable product is L &M Construction chemicals — Everbond or equivalent. 3. Patch the cement mortar as specified in ACI 301, or with proprietary patching compounds, except that proprietary patching mixtures may be not used on exposed surfaces. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 — Page 9 of 13 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 4. Acceptable proprietary patching mixtures are: a. Euclid Chemical Corporation - Poly Patch b. SIKA - Sikaset Mortar c. Emaco R Series - Master Builders d. Lambert Corp, Lambco Vinyl Patch e. Sonneborn - Sonopatch C. MASTIC DAMP - PROOFING COMPOUND 1. Patch full depth of hole and flush the surface with emulsified asphalt mastic heavy viscosity for trowel application. Prepare and place in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Acceptable products are: a. W. R. Meadows - Sealmastic Trowel Mastic b. Euclid Chemical Company - Damp - proofing Asphalt Coatings c. Sonneborn - Hydrocide 700 Mastic d. Lambert Corp — Waterban 60M 3.5 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES - GENERAL A. After removal of forms, give surfaces of concrete the following finishes as specified in ACI 301. SURFACE FINISH Unexposed Rough Form Exposed Smooth Form Exposed to Public View Smooth Rubbed 3.6 CURING AND PROTECTION A. GENERAL 1. Conform to the applicable detailed recommendations of ACI 301 and 308. 2. Hot weather curing to be in accordance with applicable ACI Standard 305. 3. All cast -in -place concrete must be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for a minimum of 7 days following the placing of the concrete by the use of a water spray, water saturated fabric, moisture retaining membrane or liquid curing compound. 4. Full curing days will be determined by the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof during which the temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50oF. 5. Cure slabs -on -grade for the first 72 hours by the use of: a. fog spraying b. ponding c. sprinkling d. continuously wet absorptive mats or fabric e. continue curing by use of moisture retaining cover until concrete has obtained its specified 28 day compressive strength f. or liquid curing compound after finishing process is completed. g. concrete wet cure time to be 7 days minimum at 50 degrees minimum temperature. 6. Submit materials and method of curing for review. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 — Page 10 of 13 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 7. Do not use moisture retaining curing compounds for curing surfaces to receive the following coverings, unless it has been demonstrated that such compounds will not prevent bond of: a. Carpet b. Flexible flooring c. Ceramic tiled floors d. Other specified floor systems B. MATERIALS 1. Where moisture retaining membranes or curing compounds are used for curing, provide only materials conforming to the following requirements: a. Polyethylene Film - ASTM C171, Type II b. Waterproof Paper - ASTM C 171, Type I c. Absorptive Cover - AASHTO M 182, Class 3, Burlap cloth made from Jute or Kenaf or ASTM C 440 cotton mats d. ASTM C309 spray on at max. C. TEMPERATURE, WIND AND HUMIDITY 1. Do not permit concrete not fully cured to be exposed to excessive temperature changes or high winds. 3.7 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. GENERAL 1. Prior to concreting, place all embedded items to be provided under this subdivision or to be furnished under other subdivisions for installation under this subdivision. 2. Give all contractors whose work is related to the concrete or must be supported by it, ample notice and opportunity to introduce and /or furnish embedded items before the concrete is placed. 3. Make certain that all embedded items furnished and set in forms by them are secured in position, and exercise due care not to disturb or damage their work while placing concrete. 4. Set anchor bolts for steel and equipment in accordance with setting drawings or templates which have been reviewed and found satisfactory. 5. Where holes in concrete for such purposes as recesses for railing posts, passageways for pipes, and the like are shown formed by sleeves, the contractor may, at his option, provide such holes by drilling with a acceptable diamond or tungsten carbide tipped drill bits. Fill with epoxy seal after railings are in place. B. EMBEDDED ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED UNDER THIS SUBDIVISION 1. Dovetail anchor slots and dovetail brick anchors - DAS -G20 beehive dovetail anchor slot as manufactured by Gateway Building Products, together with DBA -G14 dovetail brick anchors. provide masonry trades with one anchor for each 16" of anchor slot or fraction thereof plus one additional anchor for each vertical section. Place anchor slots 1' -4" on center in beams and walls where masonry abuts and one slot in each face of each column faced with masonry. Furnish anchors to space 16" on center in slots. 2. Plastic reglets for above and below grade counter flashing. Make of Type A rigid polyvinyl chloride, 0.060" thick, as manufactured by Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc. or equal. 3. Sleeves - galvanized steel pipe ASTM A 120, or plastic pipe ASTM D 2661, ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 2852, bituminized fiber pipe conforming to ASTM D 1861 or Wilson anchor bolt sleeve. 4. Column Anchor Bolts - ASTM F 1554. Furnish with one leveling nut plus one nut and one washer. 5. Anchor Bolts — ASTM A 307. As shown on drawings. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 — Page 11 of 13 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 6. Cast Iron Frames and Grates - as manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company. Castings as manufactured by Flockhart Foundry Company or McKinley Iron Works may be acceptable, provided the dimensions and design are comparable in all respects. 7. Water stops locations as shown on drawings. 3.8 VAPOR RETARDER 1. Provide sub -grade under concrete slabs -on -grade with vapor retarder consisting of polyethylene film not thinner than 10 mils, conforming to ASTM E1745, or asphalt laminated reinforced Kraft paper with polyethylene coating on both sides. Moistop as manufactured by FortiFiber Building Systems Group. 2. Provide film in width and length not less than one foot larger than dimensions of slab sub - grade unless patently impracticable. Lap edges not less than 6" and tape continuously. Take care to avoid puncturing film. Immediately prior to placing concrete, tape -seal all tears, cuts and holes. 3.9 GROUTING OF BASE PLATES 1. Nonferrous grout acceptable products are: TYPE MANUFACTURER Crystex L &M Construction Chemicals Five Star U.S. Grout Sonogrout Sonneborn Euco N.S. Euclid Chemical Company Construction Grout Master Builders Vibroprvf #11 Lambert Corp. 2. Mix and place in conformance with printed instructions of the manufacturer. 3.10 TESTING A. GENERAL 1. The services of an independent testing laboratory shall be retained for obtaining test specimens and performing quality control work, routine testing of materials or proposed mix designs and of resulting concrete for compliance with technical requirements of specifications. 2. Testing of field -cured test cylinders, or testing required because of changes requested by contractor in materials or proportions of the mix, as well as any extra testing of concrete or materials occasioned by failure to meet specification requirements, to be at contractor's expense. 3. Failure of the testing laboratory to detect any defective work or materials is not in any way to prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered, nor is it to obligate the owner for final acceptance. 4. The testing agency and /or its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the specifications, not to approve or accept any portion of the work, not to act as foreman or perform other duties for contractor. B. SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE TESTING AGENCY 1. Field Sampling - Secure from different batches, on a truly random basis, composite samples for all field testing required below in accordance with ASTM C 172 where applicable. Take all samples at discharge end of conveying system. Clearly mark each test specimen master as to exact part of the structure represented, class of concrete curing conditions, temperature of concrete, and time and date of sample. 2. Compressive Strength Test - mold and cure test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 31 and test each cylinder for strength in accordance with ASTM C 39. Take one "test set" consisting of three cylinders for each day's pour of 100 cubic yards, or fraction thereof. Test cylinders one at 7 and two 28 days. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 — Page 12 of 13 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Slump Tests - determine slump range for each "test set" in conformance with ASTM C 143. 4. Air Content Test - determine air content for each "test set" for air - entrained concrete in accordance with ASTM C 231. 5. Submit two copies of the results in each of the above tests and inspection to the contractor and the owner's representative and Engineer. 6. Should any of the test results fail to meet the requirements specified, make an immediate telephone report to the contractor and the owner's representative. 7. Furnish evaluation reports of compression tests as recommended by ACI 214 when any compression test fails to meet the specified strength. 8. Criteria for acceptance of concrete cylinder tests: a. Every arithmetic average of any consecutive three tests equals or exceed fc, and b. No individual strength test (average of two cylinders) <fc by more than 500 psi. 3.11 ACCEPTANCE OF STRUCTURE A. GENERAL 1. Acceptance of structure will be made in conformance with ACI 301, except that contractor must pay all costs incurred for providing any additional testing or analysis required when strength of structure is considered potentially deficient. B. CRACKS 1. The contractor will be required to restore without cost to the owner any concrete which develops cracks within a period of one year after placement which has not been caused by action of the owner or others in over stressing the concrete. 2. Repair the cracks by means that will restore the cracked members to their designed strength and appearance by acceptable methods which will not impair the appearance of the affected surfaces, if exposed. Such repairs must be performed by use of suitable epoxy cements employed by an organization having satisfactorily demonstrated ability in the techniques necessary to effect such repairs, or by other acceptable methods. END OF SECTION 033000 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 — Page 13 of 13 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 034800 - PRECAST CONCRETE U- LINTELS AND SILLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: precast concrete U- lintels and sills B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Masonry Units 2. Concrete Reinforcement 3. Cast -in -Place Concrete 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) 1. C33 — Specification for Concrete Aggregates 2. C150 — Specification for Portland Cement B. Precast /Pre - Stressed Concrete Institute (PCI) Standards: Manual for Quality Control for Precast and Pre - Stressed Concrete MNL -116. C. American Concrete Institute: Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318) D. American Concrete Institute: Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI 530) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's catalog engineering data. B. Manufacturer shall rate U- lintel units for gravity, uplift, and lateral loads in units of pounds per linear foot. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator's Qualifications: Units shall be fabricated by a firm engaged in the manufacturing of precast and pre- stressed concrete U- lintels and sills for a minimum of 5 years. Fabricator shall have a quality assurance program that complies with the procedures of Manual 116 by the Precast /Pre- Stressed Concrete Institute (PCI). B. Plant records of production and quality control shall be kept in accordance with PCI recommendations and made available upon request for the Architect. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. If storage is required prior to erection, take all necessary precautions to provide protection to prevent damage prior to installation. Maintain units free of dirt and airborne pollutants until immediately prior to erection. B. Replace all units that are damaged due to mishandling at the job site. PRECAST CONCRETE U- LINTELS AND SILLS 034800 — Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I or III, gray color 2. Aggregates: ASTM C33 3. Water: Potable 4. Admixtures: Shall not contain calcium chloride or chloride ions 2.2 FABRICATION A. Unless specified otherwise, conform to PCI MNL -116. B. All U- lintel units 14 feet in overall length and shorter shall be made of concrete with a minimum strength of 3500 psi at 28 days. C. All U- lintel units exceeding 14 feet in overall length shall be made of concrete with a minimum strength of 6000 psi at 28 days and shall be pre- stressed concrete. D. All sill units shall be made of concrete with a minimum strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. E. All units shall be sand block finish except pre- stressed, 6" wide, and 12" wide U- lintels shall be smooth form finished. F. Tolerances shall be per PCI MNL -116. G. Minor patching in plant is acceptable provided structural adequacy of units is not impaired. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FURNISHING A. Furnish to the concrete masonry unit installer, all units that will be installed as part of the work of that section. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect all stored and installed units from job site debris and impact. B. Units damaged during storage shall be replaced if beyond repair to restore its structural adequacy. END OF SECTION 034800 PRECAST CONCRETE U- LINTELS AND SILLS 034800 — Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply this Section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide labor, material, equipment and perform operations necessary for, and incidental to, erection of masonry work. Related sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 3 section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels in unit masonry are specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrication ". 2. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry are specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry ". 3. Reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing are specified in Division 7 Section Flashing and Sheet Metal ". 4. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings are specified in Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames". 5. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings are specified in Division 8 Section "Custom Hollow Metal Work ". 6. Sealants 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (I'm): 1. f'm = 1500 psi on net area. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, manufacturers literature and /or drawings of material that is pre- fabricated or pre - assembled. 1. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product indicated. 2. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcing" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement. 3. Submitted shop drawings must be checked and signed by the General Contractor. 4. Material certificates signed by manufacturer and Contractor certifying that each type of masonry unit complies with requirements specified in referenced unit masonry standard, including fire performance characteristics. 5. Hot weather construction procedures evidencing compliance with requirements specified in referenced unit masonry standard. 6. Results from tests and inspections performed by Owner's representatives will be reported promptly and in writing to Architect and Contractor. UNIT MASONRY 042000 — Page 1 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unit masonry standard: ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6 "Specifications for Masonry Structures ". B. Fire performance characteristics: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistances has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Single source responsibility for masonry units: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from the manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. D. The contractor shall retain a qualified testing laboratory to perform the following tests: 1. Sample and test grout in accordance with ASTM C1019 for each 5000 square foot of masonry. 2. Slump tests - ASTM C143. E. When requested by the Architect /Engineer, a qualified testing laboratory shall be retained to perform masonry prism test in accordance with ASTM E447, Method B, modified as follows: 1. Prisms shall be stack bond, one unit long and thick with a full mortar bed. 2. Limit height /thickness ratio from 1.33 - 5.00 3. Provide a minimum of one joint. One set of three (3) prisms prior to construction and during construction for each 5000 square feet of wall. F. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for typical exterior and interior walls 60 inches (1500 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness. 2. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather - resistant membrane. 3. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for each type of exposed unit masonry construction typical exterior and interior walls in sizes approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) by 48 inches (1200 mm) 60 inches (1500 mm) high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories. a. Include a sealant - filled joint at least 16 inches (400 mm) long in each exterior wall mockup. 2. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather - resistant membrane. 3. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. UNIT MASONRY 042000 — Page 2 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry material to project in undamaged condition. B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not place until units are in an air -dried condition. C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in dry location. D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each days work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. B. Extend cover to minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. C. Where one wythe of multi -wythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. D. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. E. Stain prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. F. Protect base of walls from rain splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of covering spread on ground and over wall surface. G. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. H. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finish from mortar droppings. I. Hot weather construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard. J. Decorative CMU's: ASTM C 90. 1. Colors: provide exposed CMU of various colors per Architects selection for interior walls of gym and fitness room. 2. Random pattern per Architect's instructions. Match Architect's samples. a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL UNIT MASONRY 042000 — Page 3 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements specified in this Section applicable to each material indicated. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Comply with requirements indicated below applicable to each form of concrete masonry required. B. Masonry Units for Fire -Rated Walls 1. Provide fire -rated units which are rated product of manufacturer listed in latest revision of building materials list, published by UL. In lieu of above rating, furnish fire resistive units on basis of examination, tests and report by nationally recognized testing agency acceptable to governing authorities and codes having jurisdiction. Report must state that units proposed to be furnished are equivalent in fire rating to those products furnished by producers in above UL building materials list. C. Size: Provide concrete masonry units complying with requirements indicated below for size that are manufactured to specified face dimensions within tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification for concrete masonry units. Concrete masonry units: Manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8 inch less than nominal widths by nominal heights by nominal lengths indicated on drawings. E. Provide Type 11, non - moisture controlled units. F. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. G. Hollow load- bearing concrete masonry units: ASTM C 90, Grade N and as follows: 1. Unit compressive strength: Provide units with minimum average net area compressive strength indicated below. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit masonry construction of compressive strength indicated. 2. Use inspection and cleanout holes at bottom of wall reinforced vertical cells for grouting lifts over 5 feet high. Cleanout holes should be 3" minimum, see ACI 530.1 -02, Section 3.2F. See grout space requirements for various grout pour heights in ACI 530.1 -02, Section 3.5C with Table 7. See Florida Building Code page 35.1 H. Weight classification: Normal weight 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Mortar - Type S B. Grout - 2500 psi at 28 days C. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color. D. Ready -mixed mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements specified in this article, combined with set controlling admixtures to produce a ready -mixed mortar complying with ASTM C 270. E. Hydrated lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. F. Aggregate for mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. G. Aggregate for grout: ASTM C 404. H. Water: Clean and potable. 2.4 REINFORCING STEEL A. General: Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard and this article, formed from the following: UNIT MASONRY 042000 — Page 4 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1 Galvanized carbon steel wire, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. B. Description: Welded wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not Tess than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner an tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Wire diameter for side rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gage). C. For single wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods: 1. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches O.C. D. For multi -wythe masonry provide type as follows: 1. Ladder design with perpendicular cross spaced not more than 16 inches O.C. 2. Number of side rods for multi wythe concrete masonry: One side rod for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches or less in nominal width. E. Tab design with single pair of side rods and rectangular box -type cross ties spaced not more than 16 inches O.C., with side rods spaced for embedment within each face shell of backup wythe and ties extended to engage the outer wythe by at least 1 -1/2" inches. F. Use units with adjustable two piece rectangular ties where horizontal joints of facing wythe do not align with those of backup by more than and where indicated. G. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering joint reinforcement that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AA Wire Products /Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2. Dur -O -WaI, Inc. 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America 2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of reference unit masonry standard and this article. B. Galvanized carbon steel wire: ASTM A 82, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. C. Wire diameter: 0.1875 inch. D. Galvanized heavy thickness steel sheet: ASTM A 635 (commercial quality) hot - rolled carbon steel sheet hot -dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525, Class B3, for rigid anchors fabricated from steel sheet or strip with a thickness of 0.180 inch and greater. E. Steel plates and bars: ASTM A 36, hot dipped galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153, Class B3, as applicable to size and form indicated. F. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Dur -O -WaI, Inc. 2. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2.6 BENT WIRE TIES A. Individual units prefabricated from bent wire to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Tie shape for hollow masonry units laid with cells vertical: Rectangular with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. B. Type for masonry where coursing between wythes align: Unit ties bent from one piece of wire. UNIT MASONRY 042000 — Page 5 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Type for masonry where coursing between wythes does not align: Adjustable ties composed of two parts, one with pintles, the other with eyes, maximum misalignment 1 -1/4 inches. 2.7 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL WORK A. General: Two piece assemblies as described below allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between wall and framework parallel to plane of wall, but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it. B. For anchorage to concrete framework, provide manufacturer's standard with dovetail anchor section formed from sheet metal and triangular shaped wire ties section seized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face and as follows: 1. Wire diameter: 0.1875 inch 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Unit type masonry inserts in concrete: Cast iron or malleable iron inserts of type and sized indicated. B. Dovetail slots: Furnished dovetail slots, with filler strips, or slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.0336 inch (22 gage) sheet metal. 2.9 POST - INSTALLED ANCHORS A. Anchors as described below, with capacity to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory. 1. Type: Chemical anchors 2. Type: Expansion anchors B. Corrosion protection: Carbon steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). C. For cast -in -place and post - installed anchors in concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times loads imposed by masonry. D. For post - installed anchors in grouted concrete masonry units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times loads imposed by masonry. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Non - metallic expansion joint strips: Pre - molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2 (closed cell), Class A (cellular rubber and rubber -like materials with specific resistance to petroleum base oils), Grade 1 (compression deflection range of 2 -5 psi), compressible up to 35 percent, of width and thickness indicated, formulated from the following material: 1. Neoprene 2. Urethane 3. Polyvinyl chloride B. Pre - formed control joint gaskets: Materials as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 1. Styrene- Butadiene rubber compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation 2AA -805 2. Polyvinyl Chloride: ASTM D 2287, General Purpose Grade, Type PVC -65406 C. Bond breaker strips: Asphalt saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). UNIT MASONRY 042000 — Page 6 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job mixed detergent solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2 cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water. Job mixed muriatic solution: Solution of 1 part muriatic acid and 10 parts clean water, mixed in a non - metallic container with acid added to water. C. Proprietary acidic cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength, general purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar /grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. D. For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a concentrated blend of surface acting acids, cheating, and wetting agents. E. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors. F Available products: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be used to clean until masonry surfaces includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. "Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent ", ProSoCo, Inc. 2. "Sure Klean No. 101 Lime Solvent ", ProSoCo, Inc. 3. "Sure Klean Vana Trol ", ProSoCo, Inc. 2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air - entraining agents, antifreeze compounds, or admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. C. Procedures of ASTM C780 is to be used to test and evaluate mortar and establish pre - construction datum and quality control testing for types of mortar indicated below: 1. Type S D. Grout for unit masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 and referenced unit masonry standard. E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete masonry unit tests: For each type, class, and grade of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested by qualified independent testing laboratory for strength, absorption, and moisture content per ASTM C 140, if required by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. B. Examine rough -in and built -in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. UNIT MASONRY 042000 — Page 7 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Mix mortar and grout in power driven, drum type mixers. Operate mixer a minimum of 5 minutes after addition of all materials. B. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. C. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in this and other sections of the specifications. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses. Coordinate masonry with all adjacent work of other trades. D. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. E. Cut masonry units with motor driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining constructions. Use full size units without cutting where possible. F. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units form several pallets or cubes as they are placed. 1. Select and arrange units of different colors to achieve pattern per Architect's instructions. G. Matching existing masonry: Where applicable, match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of new masonry with existing masonry. H. Do not use masonry units with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or other defects. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Comply with construction tolerances of ACI 530 or N.C.M.A. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of Tess- than - half -size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. C. Bond pattern for exposed masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. One half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bounded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with Tess than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. E. Stopping and resuming work: In each course, rack back 1/2 unit length for one -half running bond or 1/3 unit length for one -third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly (if required), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. F. Re- temper mortar as necessary to keep plastic. Use no mortar after setting has begun or after 2 1/2 hours of initial mixing. G. Built -in work: As construction progresses, built -in items specified under this and other sections of the specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built -in items. UNIT MASONRY 042000 — Page 8 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX H. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. I. Where built -in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. J. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 inches) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. K. Reinforced vertical concrete blocks cells, grouting solid where indicated on plan. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. 3.6 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch of exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bed reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. D. Provide horizontal joint reinforcement at doors and windows for first and second block course above and below apertures. Run reinforcing continuous or extend two feet from aperture edge. 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 26 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.8 MOVEMENT (CONTROL AND EXPANSION) JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build in related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in -plane restraint of wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Fit bond breaker strips on in ends of block units on one side of control joint. Fill the joint with mortar and rake joints in exposed faces. 3.9 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1' -0" for brick size units and 2' -0" for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. UNIT MASONRY 042000 — Page 9 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Provide reinforced precast concrete lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and installation. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. General: Install reinforced unit masonry to comply with requirements or referenced unit masonry standard. B. Temporary formwork: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. Contractor is completely responsible for the proper design and construction of all temporary forms and bracing. C. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. D. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. E. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. 3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. C. Final cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non - metallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and non - masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet all surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean concrete masonry by means of cleaning method indicated in N.C.M.A. TEK 45 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 042000 UNIT MASONRY 042000 — Page 10 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 051223 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All requirements of the general provisions of the contract including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 0 and Division 1 forms a part of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE OF WORK 1. This Section includes fabrication, delivery, unload and store in locations directed and erect all structural steel work, as shown on drawings and specified, including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location of members, typical connections, and types of steel required. B. Related work not specified under this subdivision: 1. Steel joist 2. Setting of anchor bolts, cast in concrete, or masonry. 3. Metal fabrications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, complete shop drawings covering fabrication and erection of all work under this subdivision, including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location of members, typical connections, and types of steel required. B. Submitted shop drawings must be checked and signed by the General Contractor. C. Test reports conducted on shop and field bolted and welded connections. Include data on type(s) of test conducted and test results. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and standards: Comply with applicable provisions of the latest issue of the following, except as otherwise indicated: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" - except paragraph 4.2.1. AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings ", including "Commentary". 2. "Specifications and Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections. 3. Structural Welding Code (AWS D1.1) 4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) B. Qualifications for welding work: Qualify welding procedures and welding operations in accordance with AWS "Qualification" requirements. C. Welders to have current certificates, If re- certification of welders is required, re- testing will be Contractor's responsibility. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress or work. Store on site only in authorized locations. STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS 051223 — Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast -in -place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not to delay work. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground. Protect steel members and packaged materials from exposure to the weather. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Misc. structural shapes, plates, etc...: ASTM A 36 B. Structural beams, columns, etc...: ASTM A36 or ASTM A992 GR.50 - Refer to structural drawings. C. Hot - formed steel tubing: ASTM A 501 D. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B; or ASTM A501 E. Anchor bolts: ASTM A 307, non - headed type, with nuts and washers. F. Unfinished threaded fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low- carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers. Provide hexagonal heads. G. High strength threaded fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, complying with ASTM A325. H. Electrodes for welding: Comply with AWS Code. Use E70XX electrodes. I. Grout: non - shrink, non - metallic, flowable or plastic with minimum of 7,000 psi at 28 days in accordance with CRD -C 621, Army Corps of Engineers. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Properly mark -match materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. B. Work shall be executed by skilled workmen under experienced supervision. C. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections. D. Bolt field connections with high- strength bolts, except where welded connections are indicated. E. Field verify all existing dimensions and elevations prior to fabrication. F. High strength bolted construction: Install high strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 Bolts ". Use bearing type bolts with threads included in shear plane. G. Welded construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. H. Holes for other work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop drawings. 2.3 SHOP PAINTING A. General: Shop paint all structural steel, except anchor bolts and surfaces to be field welded. B. Paint all members after fabrication, except where surfaces would be inaccessible for surface prep and painting. C. Apply paint in sufficient volume or coats to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 3 but not more than 5 mils. STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS 051223 — Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX D. Surface preparation: Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC - SP3 Power Tool Cleaning). 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspections at tests in mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. B. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not comply. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Must conform to the applicable provisions of AISC specifications. B. Temporary planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete work. C. Setting bases and bearing plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond - reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. D. All anchor bolts shall be built into connections work in advance. E. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on leveling nuts. Do not use wedges of shims. F. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. G. Field assembly: Set structural frame accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. H. All bolts, including anchor bolts, shall have enough projection to expose not less than 1 -1/2 threads after nuts is tightened. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. I. If steel is damaged or does not fit -up, Contractor shall submit proposed corrective measures for review by Engineer. J. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Drill or ream holes that must be enlarged to accommodate next larger fastener, where possible. K. The use of a gas cutting torch in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural members will not be permitted. L. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas where shop coat was damaged. Spot and prime areas using same material as used for shop coat. M. Set all members so that, in their final location, level, plumbness and alignment are within the tolerances prescribed by AISC Code. 3.2 QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing and inspection agency shall be retained to inspect structural steel members high strength bolted connections and welded connections. STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS 051223 — Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests, state in each report whether test specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom. Submit 3 copies of each report to Owner's representative. C. Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is begin fabricated or produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished. D. Minimum required testing: 1. Visually inspect all structural steel beams, columns, etc. 2. Visually inspect all bolted and welded connections. 3. Test all beam or column splices. 4. Test a representative sample of all full or partial penetration welds. E. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor's expenses, as necessary to reconfirm any non - compliance of original work and to show compliance of corrected work. 3.3 FINAL CLEANUP A. All temporary guys, braces, falswork, cribbing, rubbish and other debris are to be removed upon completion of erection. END OF SECTION 051223 STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS 051223 — Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOISTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all equipment, labor and perform all work as necessary to fabricate, furnish, deliver, unload, store in locations directed and erect on supports to be provided under another subdivision all open -web steel joists and accessories as specified herein and as indicated. B. Related work not specified under this subdivision: 1. Structural Steel 2. Steel and ironwork of a miscellaneous nature 3. Setting anchor bolts 4. Grouting bearing plates 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide joists fabricated in compliance with the following, as herein specified. B. Steel Joist Institute (SJI) "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Table" for: 1. K- Series open web steel joists C. Joist fabricator shall be a member of the Steel Joist Institute. D. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) E. American Welding Society (AWS) F. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) G. Qualification of field welding: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with American Welding Society "Structural Welding Code ", AWS D1.1 H. See Structural Steel 05120, 3.02 for testing requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review complete shop drawings covering, fabrication of all work under this subdivision including erection of such work on supports furnished under a separate subdivision. B. Submitted shop drawings and calculations signed, sealed and dated by the Specialty Professional Engineer who is a Florida licensed Engineer in the structural discipline. C. Design techniques, type, and format of supporting calculations, and all submittals must be reviewed by the Engineer -of- Record. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Joist shall be inspected by the manufacturer and workmanship. B. Deliver, unload, store in locations directed, "Specifications ". Handle and store joists in a excessive stresses. before shipment to insure compliance of materials and handle steel joists as recommended in SJI manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 — Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chord members: 50 ksi yield B. Web members: 36 ksi or 50 ksi yield C. If requested by owner's representative, evidence that the steel meets design yield strength shall be provided in the form of certified test reports. D. Bearing plates ASTM A36. E. High strength bolts ASTM A325. F. Steel prime paint: 1. Steel Structures Painting Council specification 15 -68T, Type I. Asphalt paint shall not be used. 2.2 FABRICATIONS A. General: The design and manufacture of steel joists shall conform to the latest standard specifications and load tables for open web steel joists, as adopted by the Steel Joist Institute. Holes in chord members: Provide holes in chord members where shown for securing other work to steel joists; however, deduct area holes from the area of chord when calculating strength member. C. Extend ends: Provide extended ends on joists where shown, complying with manufacturer's standards and requirements of applicable SJI "Specification" and Toad tables. D. Bridging: Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging for joists and joist girders, complying with SJI "Specifications ". E. Provide bridging anchors for ends of bridging lines terminating at walls or beams. F. Splices: May occur at any point in the chord members and shall be butt welded splices developing 100% of the cross sectional area of the member splices, and shall develop a minimum tensile strength of 57,000 psi on the full cross sectional area. G. Deflection: Live load deflections shall not exceed: 1/240 of span for roofs and 1/360 of span for floors. H. Camber: See SJI specifications for required camber. I. Shop painting: Prior to shipping, all joists shall be cleaned of rust and mill scale by brushing with steel bristle brushes and shall have one shop coat of paint meeting Steel Structures Painting Council Specification (SSPC) 15 -68T, Type I, gray applied by either dipping and /or spraying. Shop coat of paint shall be 1 mil minimum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI "Specifications ", final shop drawings, and as herein specified. Anchors: Furnish anchor bolts, bearing plates, and other devices to be built into concrete and masonry construction. C. Refer to Division 4 sections for installation of anchors set in masonry. STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 — Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX D. Placing joist: Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and secured. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing before permanently fastening. E. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during construction. F Where "open web" joist lengths are 40 feet and longer, install a center row of bolted bridging to provide lateral stability before slackening of hoisting lines. G. Bridging: Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at walls or beams. H. Uplift: See plan for net wind load uplifts on roofs. Steel joist bottom chords must safely resist the wind uplift. A single line of bottom chord bridging must be provided at the first panel point from each support. I. Temporary bracing: Contractor shall provide any temporary bracing required to adequately distribute erection loads so that the carrying capacity of any individual joist is not exceeded. J. Field weld or bolt joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI "Specifications" for type of joists used. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of joists. K. Damaged joists: Shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. L. Touch -up painting: After joist installation, paint field bolt heads and nuts, and welded areas, abraded or rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before painting. Use same type of paint as used for shop painting. M. Do not permit any application of construction loads to joists unless all joists are fastened in place and permanent bridging installed. N. Fasten joist and joist girders to structural steel at column lines by bolting per SJI standard specification provisions. END OF SECTION 052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 — Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE OF WORK 1. This section includes fabrication, delivery, unload and store in locations directed and erect all roof deck units as shown on drawings and specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification section. B. Product data including manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of decking and accessories. C. Shop drawings showing layout and type of deck units, anchorage details, and conditions requiring closure strips, supplementary framing, sump pans, cant strips, cut openings, special jointing, and other accessories. D. Submitted shop drawings must be checked and signed by the General Contractor. E. Welder certificate: See Section 05120 for certification submittal requirement. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and standards: Comply with provisions of the following Codes and Standards, except as otherwise indicated: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), "Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members ". 2. American Welding Society (AWS), D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel ". 3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), "Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks ". B. Qualification of field welding: Use qualified welding processes and welding operators in accordance with "Welder Qualifications" procedures of AWS. Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing. C. FM listing: Provide steel roof deck units that have been evaluated by Factory Mutual System and are listed in "Factory Mutual Approval Guide" for "Class I" fire -rated construction. D. See Structural Steel 05120, 3.02 for testing requirements. STEEL DECKING 053100 — Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Roof deck to be 2 inch deep dovetail profile, 20 gauge, (Type ER2R) with painted finish. Minimum properties are as follows. Computation of properties shall reflect the "Effective Compress Flange Width" concept. 20 Gauqe = 0.47 in." (4) Sp = 0.34 in." (3) Sn = 0.31 in." (3) Maximum live load deflection =1/240 of span. Maximum working stress = 24 ksi B. Roof deck to be 1 1/2 inches deep, 22 gauge, Type BA, acoustical deck and Type B (see plans for locations) with painted finish. Minimum properties are as follows. Computation of properties shall reflect the "Effective Compress Flange Width" concept. 22 Gauge I = 0.155 in." (4) Sp = 0.186 in." (3) Sn = 0.192 in." (3) 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Epic Metals Corporation 2. Vulcraft Div., Nucor Corporation 2.3 MATERIALS A. Steel for galvanized metal deck units: A653 Grade 33 with coating designation G90. B. Miscellaneous steel shapes: ASTM A 36. C. Sheet metal accessories: ASTM A 924, galvanized, G90. D. Galvanizing repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A 780. E. Flexible closure strips: Manufacturer's standard mineral fiber closures. F. Metal deck and sheet metal coating designation: 1. With structural concrete or insulating concrete topping — G90 2. Without structural concrete or insulating concrete topping — G60 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span three or more supports, with flush, telescoped, or nested 2 inch laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, of metal thickness, depth, and width as indicated. B. Roof deck units: Provide deck configurations that comply with SDI "Specification and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck ". STEEL DECKING 053100 — Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Roof sump pans: Fabricate from single piece of 0.071 inch min. (14 gauge) galvanized sheet steel with level bottoms and sloping sides to direct water flow to draining. Provide sump pans of adequate size to receive roof drains and with bearing flanges not less than 3 inches wide. Recess pans not less than 1 -1/2 inches below roof deck surfaces unless otherwise shown or required by deck configuration. Holes for drains will be cut in the field by others. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Delivery and storage: Deliver deck to job site in bundles and store off ground with one end elevated for water drainage. Cover with waterproof covering, ventilated to avoid condensation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, shop drawings, and as specified herein. B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with end accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. C. Align deck units for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of abutting units. D. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or deflection. E. Suspended ceiling, light fixtures, ductwork, piling or other utilities shall not be suspended from decking. F. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. G. Fasten roof deck to supporting steel by welding. See drawings for weld pattern. H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc weld, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welded work. Minimum puddle welded size = 5/8 inch diameter. I. Use care in selecting electrodes and amperage to provide positive weld and to prevent blow- out holes. J. Use welding washers for all decking 24 gage or thinner. K. Mechanically fasten side laps of adjacent deck units between supports with No. 10 self- tapping machine screws. L. Uplift loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading. See plan for uplift loading requirements. Cutting and fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown. N. Reinforcement at openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work shown. O. Roof sump pans: Place over openings provided in roof decking and weld to top decking surface. Space weld not more than 12 inches o.c. with at least one weld at each corner. Detail on architectural drawings. STEEL DECKING 053100 — Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX P. Closure strips: Provide metal closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking and in voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation. Q. Touch -up painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. R. Touch -up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 053100 STEEL DECKING 053100 — Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 054000 - COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes some or all of the following: 1. Exterior load- bearing wall framing. 2. Interior load- bearing wall framing. 3. Exterior non -load- bearing curtain -wall framing. 4. Floor joist framing. 5. Roof trusses. 6. Roof rafter framing. 7. Ceiling joist framing. 8. Shear walls. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: Minimum uncoated thickness of cold- formed framing delivered to the project site shall be not less than 95 percent of the thickness used in the cold - formed framing design. Lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at bends due to cold forming. B. Producer: Entity that produces steel sheet coil fabricated into cold- formed members. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold- formed metal framing members, connectors, and fasteners capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated on the structural drawings. 1. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand the specific design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Load - Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall height. b. Interior Load - Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height. c. Exterior Non - Load - Bearing Curtain -Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall height. d. Floor Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. e. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection: 1) total load = 1/240 of the span 2) live load = 1/360 of the span f. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection 1) total load = 1/360 of the span 2) live load = 1/480 of the span 2. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 degrees F (67 degrees C) COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - Page 1 of 9 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Design exterior non -load- bearing curtain -wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials. C. Design roof trusses according to AISI's "Design Guide for Cold- Formed Steel Trusses." 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold- formed metal framing product and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacing, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold - formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. 1. Contractor shall retain a licensed (delegated) professional engineer, experienced in the design of light gauge framing, to design all work described in this section and prepare shop drawings. 2. Shop drawing submittals shall be signed /sealed by the delegated engineer and shall include calculations when required. C. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer, or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency, indicating steel sheet complies with requirements. D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. E. Fastener Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each of the following fasteners comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products: 1. Expansion anchors. 2. Power - actuated anchors. 3. Self- drilling screws. 4. Miscellaneous mechanical fasteners. F. Research /Evaluation Reports: Evidence of cold- formed metal framing's compliance with building code in effect for project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installed who has completed cold- formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Engineering Responsibility: The contractor shall retain a qualified professional (delegated) engineer to prepare design calculations, shop drawings, connection details, and other structural data. C. Delegated Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installation of cold - formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this project in material, design and extent. D. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer, or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including uncoated steel thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and galvanized- coating thickness. E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - Page 2 of 9 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code — Steel", and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel." G. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Where metal framing is part of a fire - resistance -rated assembly, provide framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire - Resistance Ratings: Indicated by GA File Numbers in GA -600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual," or by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. H. AISI Specifications: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members" or "Load Resistance Factory Design Specification for Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members" and the following for calculating structural characteristics of cold- formed metal framing: 1. CCFSS Technical Bulletin: "AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections." I. Comply with HUD's "Prescriptive Method for Residential Cold- Formed Steel Framing ". J. Pre - installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings ". 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold- formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage and handling. B. Store cold- formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold - formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Clark Steel Framing Industries 2. Dale Industries, Inc. 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. The Steel Network, Inc. 5. Unimast, Inc. 6. United Metal Products, Inc. B. Connector Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold- formed metal framing connectors by The Steel Network, Inc. or approved equivalent. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Framing a. Grade: 33 b. Coating: G60 2. Connectors a. Grade: 50, Class 1 or 2 b. Grade: 50, Class 1 or 2 (See 2.03A) c. Coating: G90 COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - Page 3 of 9 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C- shaped steel studs and joists, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955. 1. Minimum Uncoated -Steel Thickness: 0.0329 inch 2. Flange Width: 1 -5/8 inches C. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U- shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm) D. Connector Devices: By The Steel Network, Inc. or approved equivalent. 2.3 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel- framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa) for studs 20 gauge (33 mils) and lighter, minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (340 MPa) for studs 18ga (43 mils) and heavier. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing 2. Web stiffeners 3. End clips 4. Foundation clips 5. Gusset plates 6. Stud kickers, knee braces and girts 7. End closures 8. Hole reinforcing plates 9. Backer plates 2.4 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon -steel hex - headed bolts and carbon - steel nuts; and flat, hardened -steel washers; zinc coated. C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Power - Actuated Fastening Systems: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion- resistant - coated, self - drilling, self- threading steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low - profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. F. Welding electrodes: comply with AWS standards. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - Page 4 of 9 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150; Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2 -1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Nonmetallic, Non - shrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, non - corrosive, non- staining grout containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage- compensating agents, and plasticizing and water - reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30- minute working time. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold- formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold- formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install as designed by the specialty engineer and according to shop drawings, with screw penetrating jointed members by not less than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold- formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to shop drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold- formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out -of- square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold- formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold- formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - Page 5 of 9 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Install shop or field- fabricated, cold- formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Bolt or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true -to- line joists with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). D. Install cold- formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true -to -line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold- formed framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire typing of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install as designed by the specialty engineer according to shop drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not Tess than three exposed screw threads. E. Install framing members in one -piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated on signed /sealed shop drawings. F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold- formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. H. Install insulation in built -up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold- formed metal framing level, plumb, and true -to -line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.4 LOAD - BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, as shown on signed /sealed shop drawings. 1. Spacing: 16 inches on center maximum. B. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as shown on signed /sealed shop drawings. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non -plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations. D. Align studs vertically where wall- framing continuity is interrupted by floor framing. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated. COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - Page 6 of 9 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip -angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on shop drawings. 2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full- height wall studs. H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. 1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 48 inches on center maximum or the dimension indicated on shop drawings apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Bridging: Cold- rolled steel channel, BridgeBarTM BB mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with BridgeClip by The Steel Network, Inc. or approved equivalent. J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip -angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure. K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall - framing system. 3.5 NON - LOAD - BEARING CURTAIN -WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise noted. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 24 inches maximum, but refer to architectural wall system requirements for smaller spacing if required. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non -plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non -load- bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Mechanically fasten vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to primary building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in curtain -wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on shop drawings but not more than 48 inches (1370 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Bridging: Cold- rolled steel channel, BridgeBarTM BB mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with BridgeClip by The Steel Network, Inc. or approved equivalent. F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtain - wall- framing system. 3.6 JOIST INSTALLATION A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on shop drawings. COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - Page 7 of 9 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track. 1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip angles, or steel -stud sections as indicated on shop drawings. Space joists not more than 2 inches (51 mm) from abutting walls, and as follows: C. 1. Joist Spacing: 16 inches on center or as indicated on signed /sealed shop drawings. D. Frame openings with built -up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated. E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as indicated on shop drawings. 1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above. F. Install bridging at each end of joists and at intervals indicated on shop drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows: 1. Bridging: Cold- rolled steel channel, mechanically fastened to bottom flange of joists with BridgeClip by The Steel Network, Inc. or approved equivalent. G. Secure joists to load- bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange. H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold -down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist- framing assembly. 3.7 TRUSS INSTALLATION A. Install, bridge, and brace trusses according to shop drawings and requirements in this section. B. Truss Spacing: as indicated on signed /sealed shop drawings. C. Do not alter, cut, or remove framing members or connections of trusses. D. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other, align, and accurately position at spacings indicated. E. Erect trusses without damaging framing members or connections. F. Align webs of bottom chords and load- bearing studs or continuously reinforce track to transfer loads to structure. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points. G. Install continuous bridging and permanently brace trusses as indicated on shop drawings. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: A qualified independent testing agency shall be retained to perform field quality - control testing. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to inspection and testing. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to contractor, engineer and architect. D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at contractors expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - Page 8 of 9 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.9 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold- formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Touchup Painting: Wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on fabricated and installed prime - painted, cold- formed metal framing. Paint framing surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, which ensure cold- formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 054000 COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - Page 9 of 9 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Miscellaneous framing and supports. 2. Aluminum Ladders 3. Aluminum Ladder safety cages. 4. Metal bollards. 5. Miscellaneous steel trim. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted - channel inserts, and wedge -type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. [Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.] Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions. 2. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors and grilles. 3. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 4. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions. 5. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 6. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 7. Metal ladders. 8. Ladder safety cages. 9. Structural -steel door frames. 10. Metal bollards. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - Page 1 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. B. Welding certificates. C. Research /Evaluation Reports: For post - installed anchors, from ICC -ES. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code — Aluminum." 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" to design metal ladders ladders and architectural louver system. B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders, including landings, shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost. C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 /A 500M, cold- formed steel tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. F. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold- formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA -4. 1. Size of Channels: As indicated. 2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B, with G90 coating; 0.108 -inch nominal thickness. G. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061 -T6. H. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063 -T6. I. Aluminum -Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061 -T6. J. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0 -F. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - Page 2 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless -steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc - plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe /Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade; and class required. 1. Provide stainless -steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot -dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. D. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot -dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. F. Post - Installed Anchors: Torque - controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe /Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless -steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594. G. Slotted - Channel Inserts: Cold- formed, hot -dip galvanized -steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA -4, 1 -5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee -head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc - plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099120 Interior Painting." B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast - curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with MPI #79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc -rich primer. C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc - coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc- dust - content paint complying with SSPC -Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold- applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory- packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for normal - weight, air - entrained, concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - Page 3 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. L Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1 -1/2 inches, with a minimum 6 -inch embedment and 2 -inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1 Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. 2.7 METAL LADDERS A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, except for elevator pit ladders. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1 /CSA B44. B. Aluminum Ladders: METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - Page 4 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Siderails: Continuous extruded - aluminum channels or tubes, not less than 2 -1/2 inches deep, 3/4 inch wide, and 1/8 inch thick. 3. Rungs: Extruded - aluminum tubes, not less than 3/4 inch deep and not less than 1/8 inch thick, with ribbed tread surfaces. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; fasten by welding or with stainless -steel fasteners or brackets and aluminum rivets. 5. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from pressure - locked aluminum bar grating or extruded - aluminum plank grating, supported by extruded - aluminum framing. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension. 6. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted aluminum brackets. C. Aluminum Ladder Safety Cages: 1. Primary Hoops: 1/4 -by -4 -inch flat bar hoops. 2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 1/4 -by -2 -inch flat bar hoops. 3. Vertical Bars: 1 /4 -by -2 -inch flat bars secured to each hoop. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim. 2.9 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 1. Cap bollards with 1/4- inch -thick steel plate. B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8- inch -thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4 -inch anchor bolts. C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4 -inch- thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of bollard. D. Prime bollards with zinc -rich primer. 2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - Page 5 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil; flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process. C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc -rich primer is indicated. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Exterior Items: SSPC -SP 6 /NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Other Items: SSPC -SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC -PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in -place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Fill metal- capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing. B. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - Page 6 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC -PA 1 for touching up shop - painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - Page 7 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes miscellaneous wood materials to be used in the construction of primarily steel framed structures. Final material characteristics must be determined based on code requirements for flame spread and flammability. 1. Wood blocking. 2. Wood nailers. 3. Wood furring. 4. Wood grounds. 5. Plywood backing panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension. D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory- fabricated product indicated. 1. Include data for wood - preservative and fire - retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the authority having jurisdiction for all lumber thickness and treatment. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2- inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Structural Panels: 1. Plywood: DOC PS 1. Strength as required meet code requirements. 2.2 WOOD- PRESERVATIVE - TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 lumber except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). B. Kiln -dry material after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. C. Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing, and in direct contact with masonry and concrete. 2.3 FIRE- RETARDANT - TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire - retardant - treated materials are indicated, provide materials that comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27 plywood. Identify fire - retardant - treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516, for plywood. 2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 3. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 4. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated for all plywood backing boards used throughout the project. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. Miscellaneous interior blocking Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods; NELMA. 3. Northern species; NLGA. 4. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 2.5 TIMBER AND MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. For timbers of 5 -inch nominal size and thicker, provide material complying with the following requirements: 1. Species and Grade: Southern pine, Select Structural No. 1 grade; SPIB. B. Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Blocking. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Nailers. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C -D Plugged, fire - retardant treated, 5/8 inch thick. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: 1. Provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2. Power - Driven Fasteners: CABO NER -272. 3. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. B. Metal Framing Anchors: Made from hot -dip, zinc - coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fit- ted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Lo- cate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for at- taching other construction. B. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative- treated lumber and plywood. C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as required by code and complying with the following: 1. CABO NER -272 for power- driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the Standard Building Code. D. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA De- sign /Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural -use panels and ap- plications indicated. 1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above - referenced guide. E. Fastening Methods: 1. Plywood Backing Panels Screw to supports.. END OF SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 COMPOSITE CLADDING PANELS 061525 - Page 1 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.08 2.01 2.02 FIBER REINFORCED HYBRID DECKING 061525 - Page 2 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.03 FIBER REINFORCED HYBRID DECKING 061525 - Page 3 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.04 FIBER REINFORCED HYBRID DECKING 061525 - Page 4 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04 3.05 FIBER REINFORCED HYBRID DECKING 061525 - Page 5 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.06 FIBER REINFORCED HYBRID DECKING 061525 - Page 6 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC - LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic - laminate -faced architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic - laminate -faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 2. Section 123661 "Simulated Stone Countertops ". 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including high - pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large -scale details, attachment devices, and other components. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches color, pattern, and surface finish. 2. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 2. Thermoset decorative panels. 3. High - pressure decorative laminate. 4. Glass. 5. Adhesives. C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. PLASTIC - LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - Page 1 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, measurements before being enclosed, C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets dimensions for areas where cabinets are coordinate construction to ensure that actual and reinforcements that support cabinets by field and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. are indicated to fit to other construction, establish to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC - LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic - laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. B. Grade: Custom. C. Type of Construction: Frameless. D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. E. Reveal Dimension: 1/8 inch. F. High- Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Basis -of- Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated on the Drawings, or comparable products by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Lamin -Art, Inc. c. Nevamar Decorative Surfaces d. Wilsonart International; Division of Premark International. G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed and Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGL. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 4. Edges: Grade VGS. 5. Pattern Direction: As indicated. PLASTIC- LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - Page 2 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic- Laminate Surfaces: High - pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent. B. Composite Panel Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. Provide products manufactured with No Added Urea - Formaldehyde (NAUF) resins and complying with the California Air Resources Board (CARB) Airborne Toxic Control Measure ( "CARB Rule "). 1. Particle Board: ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2. 2. Medium - Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 4. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP -1. C. Cabinet Components: 1. Vertical Surfaces (Fronts /Doors & Drawers): Cabinet Grade Plywood, 3/4 -inch thick. 2. Horizontal Surfaces & Countertops: Cabinet Grade Plywood, 3/4- inch - thick. 3. Face Frames, Rails, Toe Kicks, Cabinet Bases: Exterior Grade Plywood, 3/4- inch - thick. 4. Adjustable Shelves: 3/4- inch -thick Cabinet Grade Plywood. 5. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid- hardwood lumber. 6. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 08712 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)." B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening. C. Back - Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter. E. Catches: Roller catches, BHMA A156.9, B03071. F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. G. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. H. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Grade 1HD -100 and Grade 1HD -200: Side mounted; full - extension type; zinc - plated -steel ball- bearing slides. 2. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD -100. 3. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1 HD -100. 4. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1 HD -100. 5. For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100. I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. J. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. PLASTIC - LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - Page 3 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX K. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. L. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. M. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post - installed anchors. Use nonferrous - metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. C. Shop -cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop- fabricated work for completion and complete work as required. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed. PLASTIC - LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - Page 4 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 064116 PLASTIC - LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - Page 5 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 071900 — WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes penetrating water - repellent treatments for the following vertical and horizontal surfaces: 1. Cast -in -place concrete. 2. Unit masonry. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Water repellents shall meet performance requirements indicated without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation. 1. Water Repellents: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing substrate assemblies representing those indicated for this Project. B. Water Absorption: Minimum 90 percent reduction of water absorption after 24 hours in comparison of treated and untreated specimens. 1 Cast -in Place Concrete: ASTM C 642. 2. Clay Brick: ASTM C 67. 3. Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco): ASTM D 6532. C. Water -Vapor Transmission: Comply with one or both of the following: 1. Maximum 10 percent reduction in rate of vapor transmission in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 96/E 96M. 2. Minimum 80 percent water -vapor transmission in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, according to ASTM D 1653. D. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Minimum 90 percent reduction in leakage rate in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 514. E. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water - repellent properties after 2500 hours of weathering according to ASTM G 154 in comparison to water - repellent- treated specimens before weathering. F. Chloride -Ion Intrusion in Concrete: NCHRP Report 244, Series II tests. 1. Reduction of Water Absorption: 80 percent. 2. Reduction in Chloride Content: 80 percent. 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing: Installed water repellents shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as evidenced by reports of tests performed on manufacturer's standard substrate assemblies by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's printed statement of VOC content. WATER REPELLENTS 071900 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Include manufacturer's recommended number of coats for each type of substrate and spreading rate for each separate coat. 3. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2 that specifies water repellents approved by MPI, with the proposed product highlighted. Samples: For each type of water repellent and substrate indicated, 12 by 12 inches in size, with specified water - repellent treatment applied to half of each Sample. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Applicator. D. Product Certificates: For each type of water repellent, from manufacturer. E. Field quality - control reports. F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. MPI Standards: Comply with MPI standards indicated and provide water repellents listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." C. Mockups: Apply water repellent to each type of substrate required. 1. Locate each test application as directed by Architect. 2. Size: 10 sq. ft. 3. Final approval by Architect of water - repellent application will be from test applications. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted weather and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements: 1. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for not Tess than 28 days. 2. Building has been closed in for not less than 30 days before treating wall assemblies. 3. Ambient temperature is above 40 deg F and below 100 deg F and will remain so for 24 hours. 4. Substrate is not frozen and substrate - surface temperature is above 40 deg F and below 100 deg F. 5. Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours. 6. Not Tess than 24 hours have passed since surfaces were last wet. 7. Windy conditions do not exist that might cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Applicator agree(s) to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency specified in "Performance Requirements" Article within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS A. Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 20 percent or more solids of alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. WATER REPELLENTS 071900 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Siloxane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 10 percent or more solids of oligomerous alkylalkoxysiloxanes; with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. C. Silane /Siloxane - Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, silane and siloxane blend with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. D. Siliconate, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, methyl siliconate water repellent with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. E. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 1. Sure Klean Weather Seal Siloxane WB 2. Hydrozo Enviroseal Double 7 For Brick 3. Huls Chem -Trete BSM20 and Aqua -Trete PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water - repellent manufacturer's requirements. Check moisture content in three representative locations by method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Inspect for previously applied treatments that may inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents. 3. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped beneath the application of water repellent. 4. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water repellent. 5. Mortars and grout shall have been allowed to cure a minimum of 28 days. 6. Remove and repoint any damaged mortar or cracks in the mortar joints exceeding .02 ". 7. Allow repointed mortar to cure 7 days prior to application. 8. All caulking and sealant work must be done and allowed to cure completely before application of water repellents. Refer to manufacturer's recommendations. B. Test pH level according to water - repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure chemical bond to silica- containing or siliceous minerals. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could impair penetration or performance of product according to water - repellent manufacturer's written instructions. Assure that all surfaces are clean and dry. B. Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow -over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live vegetation. C. Coordination with Mortar Joints: Do not apply water repellent until pointing mortar for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water - repellent treatment has been installed and cured. Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water - repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 1. Water - repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those required. WATER REPELLENTS 071900 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.3 APPLICATION A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used. B. All materials, along with surrounding air, must be maintained above 45 Fahrenheit degrees during application. C. Test a small area of surface to insure compatibility with existing conditions, and to establish proper coverage rates. Do not dilute or alter water repellents. E. Apply water repellent from the bottom of the wall up. Initially fog the wall down with a fine mist, followed by flooding the wall with a minimum 8 inch rundown using a manual -pump low- pressure sprayer. Roll or brush out excessive drip areas. F. Apply a heavy- saturation coating of water repellent, on surfaces indicated for treatment, using 15 psi - pressure spray with a fan -type spray nozzle, roller or brush to the point of saturation. Apply coating in dual passes of uniform, overlapping strokes. Remove excess material; do not allow material to puddle beyond saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure unless otherwise indicated. G. Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Water - Repellent Material: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when water repellent is being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample water - repellent material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of water - repellent material with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying water repellents if test results show material being used does not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying material from Project site, pay for testing, and correct deficiency of surfaces treated with rejected materials, as approved by Architect. B. Coverage Test: In the presence of Architect, hose down a dry, repellent- treated surface to verify complete and uniform product application. A change in surface color will indicate incomplete application. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when surfaces will be tested. 2. Reapply water repellent until coverage test indicates complete coverage. 3.5 CLEANING A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water - repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused by water - repellent application, as approved by Architect. B. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. END OF SECTION 071900 WATER REPELLENTS 071900 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 072100 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Extruded polystyrene foam - plastic board. 2. Glass -fiber and mineral fiber blanket insulation. 3. Masonry cell insulation. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 075423 "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. B. Research /Evaluation Reports: For foam - plastic insulation, from ICC -ES 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface- Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire - Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM- PLASTIC BOARD A. Extruded polystyrene boards in this article are also called "XPS boards." Roman numeral designators in ASTM C 578 are assigned in a fixed random sequence, and their numeric order does not reflect increasing strength or other characteristics. B. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type IV: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25 -psi minimum compressive strength; unfaced; maximum flame- spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Corporation. 2. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly. 2.2 GLASS -FIBER AND MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Unfaced, Glass -Fiber or Mineral Fiber Batts: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame- spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Provide one of the following: 1. "Unfaced Precut Batts "; Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 2. "Unfaced Standard Density Batts "; Knauf Fiber Glass. 3. "Thermal Batts "; Owens Corning. 4. "SAFB Insulation "; Fibrex Insulations, Inc. 5. "Thermafiber FS -15 Blankets "; Thermafiber. B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame- spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Provide one of the following: 1. CertaPro AcoustaTherm Batt "; CertainTeed Corp. 2. "Unfaced Batts "; Johns Manville. 3. "Sound Attenuation Batts "; Owens Corning. 4. "SAFB Insulation "; Fibrex Insulations, Inc. 5. "Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets "; Thermafiber. 2.3 MASONRY -CELL INSULATION A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Forced Foam insulation in Masonry: a. Core -Fill 500 by Tailored Chemical Products, Inc. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Glass -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame - spread and smoke - developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. 2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame - spread and smoke - developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 160819 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water- Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. F. Seal joints between closed -cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. G. Set vapor- retarder -faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces. H. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE MASONRY SUBSTRATES A. Install board insulation between furring members on interior surface of exterior concrete masonry walls receiving furred gypsum board by adhesively attached, spindle -type insulation anchors as follows: 1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated. BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER 2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation. 3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation- retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness. 4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Glass -Fiber and Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3 -inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal- framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 3.1 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY CELL INSULATION A. Pump foam wall insulation into the open block cavities indicated to receive insulation, taking care to fill voids completely. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close ports after confirming complete coverage. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for product liquid ratios at mixing gun. B. Install masonry cell wall insulation through the exterior faces of the exterior masonry wall assemblies receiving exterior finish materials, such as stucco, so that the closed (after the insulation installation) injection holes through the exterior masonry face will be covered by the exterior finish material and so that there will be no injection holes created through any exposed (painted) interior faces of the masonry wall assemblies. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 072100 BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 160819 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 072726 - FLUID - APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes fluid - applied, vapor - retarding membrane air barriers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Air - Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air. B. Air - Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. Include list of ABAA - certified installers and supervisors employed by the Installer, who work on Project. B. Product Certificates: From air - barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier. C. Product Test Reports: For each air - barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program and 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air - barrier manufacturer. 1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air- barrier performance. 2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist. FLUID - APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726 - Page 1 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air - barrier materials and air - barrier accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. VOC Content: 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and complying with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor- retarding air barrier. Air - barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie -ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. B. Air - Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm /sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 Ibf /sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E 783 or ASTM E 2357. 2.3 VAPOR - RETARDING MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER A. Fluid - Applied, Vapor- Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: Elastomeric, modified bituminous or synthetic polymer membrane. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Elastomeric, Modified Bituminous Membrane: 1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash Liquid. 2) Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Air - Shield LM. 3) Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir 120SP /R. b. Synthetic Polymer Membrane: 1) Grace, W. R., & Co. - Conn.; Perm -A- Barrier Liquid. 2) Henry Company; Air -Bloc 32. 3) Rubber Polymer Corporation, Inc.; Rub -R -Wall Airtight. 2. Physical and Performance Properties: a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm /sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 - Ibf /sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178. b. Vapor Permeance: Maximum 0.1 perm; ASTM E 96/E 96M. c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 500 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C. 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: Accessory materials recommended by air - barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air- barrier assembly and compatible with primary air - barrier material. B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air - barrier material manufacturer. C. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air - barrier manufacturer's glass- fiber -mesh tape. D. Substrate - Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel -grade substrate filler. E. Adhesive and Tape: Air - barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure- sensitive adhesive tape. F. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and Series 300 stainless -steel fasteners. G. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two- component, foamed -in- place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft density; flame- spread index of 25 or less according to FLUID - APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726 - Page 2 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer. H. Adhesive- Coated Transition Strip: Vapor - permeable, 17 -mil- thick. self- adhering strip consisting of an adhesive coating over a permeable laminate with a permeance value of 37 perms. I. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 2000, minimum 50- to 65 -mil- thick, cured sheet neoprene with manufacturer - recommended contact adhesives and lap sealant with stainless -steel termination bars and fasteners. J. Preformed Silicone - Sealant Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured low - modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single- component, neutral- curing, Class 100/50 (low- modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal. b. Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; US11000 UltraSpan. c. Pecora Corporation; Sil -Span. d. Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; Spectrem Simple Seal. K. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single- component, neutral- curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." L. Termination Mastic: Air - barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid - applied elastomeric liquid; trowel grade. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1 Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants. 2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air - barrier manufacturer. 3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust -free, and dry substrate for air- barrier application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form - release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film- forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate - patching membrane. E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another. FLUID - APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726 - Page 3 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless -steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier. 3.3 JOINT TREATMENT A. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 1193 and air - barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces. 1. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of air - barrier manufacturer's recommended preparation coat extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of joints and cracks. Apply a double thickness of fluid air - barrier material and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat. B. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch with sealant according to ASTM C 1193 and air - barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply first layer of fluid air- barrier material at joints. Tape joints with joint reinforcing strip after first layer is dry. Apply a second layer of fluid air - barrier material over joint reinforcing strip. 3.4 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION A. General: Install strips, transition strips, and accessory materials according to air - barrier manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier. 1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air - barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 1. Prime glass- fiber - surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats. C. Connect and seal exterior wall air - barrier material continuously to roofing- membrane air barrier, concrete below -grade structures, floor -to -floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain -wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials. D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic. E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air- barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Fill gaps in miscellaneous penetrations of air - barrier material with foam sealant. G. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic. H. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction. 3.5 FLUID AIR- BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. General: Apply fluid air - barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air - barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply fluid air - barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. FLUID - APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726 - Page 4 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. 2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air - barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. Membrane Air Barriers: Apply a continuous unbroken air- barrier membrane to substrates according to the following thickness. Apply air - barrier membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 1. Vapor- Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in writing by manufacturer to meet performance requirements, but not less than 40 -mil dry film thickness, applied in one coat. C. Apply strip and transition strip a minimum of 1 inch onto cured air - barrier material or strip and transition strip over cured air- barrier material overlapping 3 inches onto each surface according to air - barrier manufacturer's written instructions. D. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency. E. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air- barrier components. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Inspections: Air - barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following: 1. Continuity of air- barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes. 2. Continuous structural support of air - barrier system has been provided. 3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions, and mortar droppings. 4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained. 5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. 6. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. 7. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths. 8. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges. 9. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate. 10. Compatible materials have been used. 11. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 12. Connections between assemblies (air- barrier and sealants) have complied with requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal. 13. All penetrations have been sealed. C. Tests: As determined by testing agency. D. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 1. Apply additional air- barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness. 2. Remove and replace deficient air- barrier components for retesting as specified above. E. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing: follow manufacturer's written instructions. FLUID - APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726 - Page 5 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect air - barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than 30 days, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full- thickness, air - barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed membrane according to air - barrier manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air - barrier manufacturer. B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. C. Remove masking materials after installation. END OF SECTION 072726 FLUID - APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726 - Page 6 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 074113 — STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Standing seam metal roofing system. B. Flat metal roofing accessories. C. Metal roofing edge metal and flashing. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05310 - Steel Deck B. Section 05400 - Cold- Formed Metal Framing: Structural framing supporting metal roofing C. Section 07550 - Modified Bituminous Roofing D. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium - Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. C. ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy - Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. D. ASTM A 875 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -5 % Aluminum Alloy- Coated by the Hot -Dip Process E. ASTM B 101 - Standard Specification for Lead - Coated Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. F. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. G. ASTM B 370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. H. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt- Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. I. ASTM D 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. J. ASTM D 2178 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. K. ASTM D 3575 - Standard Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials made from Olefin Polymers. L. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. M. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. N. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - Page 1 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX O. ASTM E 1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. P. ASTM E 1646 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Q. ASTM E 1680 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems. R. ASTM E 2140 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Metal Roof Panel Systems by Static Water Pressure Head. S. AAMA 501.1 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Using Dynamic Pressure. T. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. U. FM 4470 Approval Standard for Class 1 Panel Roofs. V. FM 4471 - Class 1 Panel Roof; Factory Mutual Research Corporation.. W. ICC -ES AC166 - Test Procedure for Wind Driven Rain Resistance of Metal Roof Coverings. X. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Y. National Coil Coating Association (NCCA) Z. NRCA - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. 1.4 Testing Application Standards (TAS): A. TAS 100 Test Procedure for Wind and Wind Driven Rain Resistance of Discontinuous Roof Systems B. TAS 125 Standard Requirements for Metal Roofing Systems C. TAS 114 app. G Test Procedure for Susceptibility to leakage of discontinuous roof systems. 1.5 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Standing Seam Roofing System: R -Mer Span 1. Thermal Expansion and Contraction: a. Completed metal roofing and flashing system shall be capable of withstanding expansion and contraction of components caused by changes in temperature without buckling, producing excess stress on structure, anchors or fasteners, or reducing performance ability. b. Design temperature differential shall be not less then 200 degrees F. c. Interface between panel and dip shall provide for unlimited thermal movement in each direction along the longitudinal direction. d. Location of metal roofing rigid connector shall be at roof ridge unless otherwise approved by the Project Architect. Metal ridge connector may require design as per job conditions by specified manufacturer. 2. Uniform Wind Load Capacity: a. Installed roof system shall withstand negative (uplift) design wind loading pressures complying with the following criteria. 1) Design Code: ASCE 7, Method 2 for Components and Cladding. 2) Safety Factor: 1.67 after any Toad reduction or material stress increase. b. ASTM E 1592: Capacity shall be determined using pleated airbag method in accordance with ASTM E 1592, testing of sheet metal roof panels. Allowable safe working loads shall be determined by dividing the ultimate test load by the safety STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - Page 2 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX factor specified above. 3. Uniform Positive Load Capacity. a. Installed roof system shall be capable of resisting the following positive uniform roof loads: Roof Live Load of 20 psf; b. Installed roof system shall carry positive uniform design Toads with a maximum system deflection of L/180 as measured at the rib (web) of the panel. 4. ASTM E 283: Static pressure air infiltration (doors, windows, curtain walls): a. Pressure Leakage Rate 1) 1.57 PSF 0.0007 cfm /sq.ft. 2) 6.24 PSF 0.0002 cfm /sq.ft. 3) 20.0 PSF 0.0036 cfm /sq.ft. 5. ASTM E 331: Static pressure water infiltration (doors, windows, curtain walls): a. Pressure Result: 1) 5 Gal. /Hr. per S.F. and Static No Leakage 2) Pressure of 20.0 Psf. for 15 minutes 6. ASTM E 1646: Static pressure water infiltration (roof panels): a. Pressure Result: 1) 5 Gal. /Hr. per S.F. and Static No Leakage 2) Pressure of 20.0 Psf for 15 minutes 7. Capacities for gauge, span or loading other than those tested may be determined by interpolation of test results within the range of test data. Extrapolations for conditions outside test range are not acceptable. 8. Water penetration (dynamic pressure): No water penetration, other than condensation, when exposed to dynamic rain and 70 mph wind velocities for not less than five minutes duration, when tested in accord with principles of AAMA 501.1. 9. Wind and wind driven rain resistance: No water penetration or panel movement when exposed to 110 mph wind velocities when tested in accordance with TAS 100. 10. Installed roof system assembly shall show that it can resist the calculated roof pressure in accordance with the test results of TAS 125. 1 1. Water penetration in low slope applications: No water penetration or panel movement when subject to 6 inch head of water for 6 hours when tested in accordance with the ASTM E 2140 and when subject to 6 inch head of water for 7 days when tested in accordance with the TAS 114 appendix G. 12. Submit third party validation of environmental claims, prepared UL Environment, for all metal roof panels containing recycled content and /or bio based content. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings showing layout of every roof panel and structural supporting member required in the installation with side laps and end laps marked within % deviation of their actual location. 1. Provide details for edge conditions, seams, joints, corners, panel profiles, assembly anchoring techniques, round and square flashings, and counter flashings. B. Product Data: Submit product data, test reports, and certifications in accordance with quality assurance and performance requirements specified herein. C. Design Loads: Submit manufacturer's minimum design load calculations according to ASCE 7, Method 2 for Components and Cladding. In no case shall the design loads be taken to be less than those specified herein. D. Any material submitted as equal to the specified material must be accompanied by a report signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state in which the installation is to take place. This report shall show that the submitted equal meets the Design and Performance criteria in this specification. Substitution requests submitted without licensed engineer approval STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - Page 3 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX will be rejected for non - conformance. E. Selection Samples: Illustrating thickness, finish, color and textures of materials. F. Closeout Submittals: 1. Provide manufacturer's maintenance instructions that include recommendations for periodic checking and maintenance of installed roof system. 2. Provide executed copy of manufacturer's warranty. 1.7 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Design and Test Reports: Provide the following certified test reports from an independent testing laboratory: 1. Independent laboratory testing report for system design load and seam integrity. 2. Professional engineer's documentation that roofing system incorporates sufficient allowance for stress and movement 3. A letter from an officer of the manufacturing company certifying that the materials. furnished for this project are the same as represented in tests and supporting data. 4. Manufacturer's verifications that the panels are factory roll formed. 5. ASTM E 15192: Test results must clearly demonstrate compliance with the following requirements: a. The ultimate test failure load shall be reduced by the safety factor specified in article 1.5 to determine the allowable working load for the panel system. b. The proposed system has been tested to insure that the allowable working load of the panel system meets or exceeds the specified negative wind uplift pressures listed in article 1.5 of this specification for all roof zones. c. The test results are applicable for the thickness, width, and profile specified. Results are not applicable for systems that are thinner or wider than the system which was tested. If the tested material was not the specialty material specified herein (for instance, the tested material was galvalume steel), then the test results shall be reduce by the ratio of the yield strength (Fy) of the specified material to the tested material. d. The results must clearly show that the allowable clip spacing meets or exceeds the requirements specified for all roof areas. Clip spacing shall not be reduced for any roof zone from that which is specified. 6. ASTM E283 and E331: Test results must clearly demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements specified in article 1.5 7. ASTM E1646 and E1680: Test results must clearly demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements specified in article 1.5. Results are not applicable for systems that are thinner, wider, lower grade, or different material /profile than the system which was tested. The differential test pressures must be identical to those specified in article 1.5. 8. FM 4471: Test report must be submitted for windstorm rating no less than that specified in article 1.5. The proposed roof system must have approval over the specified substrate with clips spaced as specified in article 3.3.0 for roof Zone 1. 9. AAMA 501.1: Test report shall show passed ratings for panel type as specified. 10. TAS 100: Test report shall show passed ratings for panel type as specified. 11. TAS 125: Test report shall show rating no less that that as specified in article 1.5. STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - Page 4 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 12. TAS 114 appendix G: Test report shall show passed ratings for panel type as specified. B. Design Loads: Submit copy of manufacturer's minimum design load calculations according to ASCE 7 -10, Method 2 for Components and Cladding. In no case shall the design loads be taken to be Tess than those detailed in Design and Performance Criteria article. C. Qualification Data for Roofing Installer: Refer to Quality Assurance Article below. D. Certification of work progress inspection frequency: Refer to Quality Assurance Article below. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 12 years documented experience and having ISO 9001:2008 certification. B. Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal roofing installation with a minimum 5 years experience and certified by roofing system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's roofing materials. 1. If required, fabricator /installer shall submit work experience and evidence of adequate financial responsibility. C. Installer's Field Supervision: Maintain a full -time Supervisor /Foreman on job site during all phases of roofing work and at any time roofing work is in progress. Maintain proper supervision of workmen. Maintain a copy of the specifications in the possession of the Supervisor /Foremen and on the roof at all times. D. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of roof system from a single manufacturer. Secondary products that are required shall be recommended and approved in writing by the roofing system Manufacturer. 1. Upon request of the Architect or Owner, submit Manufacturer's written approval of secondary components in list form, signed by an authorized agent of the Manufacturer E. Insurance Certification: Assist Owner in preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as may be necessary in connection with fire and extended coverage insurance on roofing and associated work. 1.9 PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene a pre- roofing conference approximately two weeks before scheduled commencement of roofing system installation and associated work. B. Require attendance of installers of deck or substrate construction to receive roofing, installers of rooftop units and other work in and around roofing which must precede or follow roofing work including mechanical work, Architect, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative. C. Objectives include: 1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work, including set up and mobilization areas for stored material and work area. 2. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates, inspect and discuss condition of substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations and other preparatory work. 3. Review structural loading limitations of deck and inspect deck for Toss of flatness and for required attachment. 4. Review roofing system requirements, Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents. 5. Review and finalize schedule related to roofing work and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - Page 5 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX delays. 6. Review required inspection, testing, certifying procedures. 7. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing. 8. Record conference including decisions and agreements reached. Furnish a copy of records to each party attending. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Manufacturer's Responsibilities: 1. All roof panels shall be shipped from the manufacturer with strippable film or similar packaging material separating the individual panels to minimize flexing, stressing, scratching or otherwise damaging the material during transit to the job. 2. Fully cover panels with tarpaulins or similar protective cover during transit to prevent dirt and debris from coming in contact with the finished goods. B. Installers Responsibilities: 1. Stack pre- finished materials to prevent twisting, bending, abrasion, and denting. Elevate one end to facilitate moisture run -off. 2. Unload roof panels using a boom or crane, supporting the panels in at least two (2) locations during lifting, and never lift more than three (3) panels at a time. 3. Protect moisture - sensitive and water -based materials from the weather. 4. Inspect materials upon delivery. Reject and remove physically damaged or marred material from the project site. Document with photos, any damaged material. 5. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. B. Determine that work of other trades will not hamper or conflict with necessary fabrication, storage, and protection requirements for roofing system. 1. Protection: a. Protect completed roofing from subsequent construction operations. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. b. Do not overload roof with stored materials. t12 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer shall execute a single warranty covering of the following criteria. Multiple- source warranties are not acceptable. 1. Manufacturer's 30 year watertight warranty, including coverage for all trim, flashings, and penetrations associated with the roof area. 2. 20 year coverage on finish including checking, crazing, peeling, chalking, fading, and /or adhesion. 3. Warranty shall commence on date of substantial completion, whichever is agreed by contract. 4. Provide installers 2 year warranty covering roofing system installation and water- tightness. STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - Page 6 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.13 MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTIONS A. When the project is in progress, the roofing system manufacturer will inspect the work at minimum three (3) days per week. In addition, the manufacturer will: 1. Keep the Architect or Owner informed as to the progress and quality of the work as observed. Emailed weekly progress reports to include digital pictures outlining the weeks progress is required. 2. Report to the Architect in writing any failure or refusal of the Contractor to correct unacceptable practices called to the Contractor's attention. 3. Confirm after completion that manufacturer has observed no application procedures in conflict with the specifications other than those that may have been previously reported and corrected. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Basis of Design: Materials, manufacturer's product designations, and /or manufacturer's names specified herein shall be regarded as the minimum standard of quality required for work of this Section. Comply with all manufacturer and contractor /fabricator quality and performance criteria specified in Part 1. B. Substitutions: Productions proposed as equal to the products specified in this Section shall be submitted in accordance with Bidding Requirements and Division 01 provisions. 1. Proposals shall be accompanied by a copy of the manufacturer's standard specification section. That specification section shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state in which the installation is to take place. Substitution requests containing specifications without licensed engineer certification shall be rejected for non- conformance. 2. Include a list of three (3) projects of similar type and extent, located within a one hundred mile radius from the location of the project. In addition, the three projects must be at least five (5) years old and be available for inspection by the Architect, Owner or Owner's Representative. 3. Equivalency of performance criteria, warranty terms, submittal procedures, and contractual terms will constitute the basis of acceptance. 4. The Owner's Owner's decision regarding substitutions will be considered final. Unauthorized substitutions will be rejected. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The design is based upon R -MER Span roofing systems engineered and manufactured by: 1. The Garland Company, Inc. 2. Approved equals 2.3 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING A. General: 1. The products, quality, and performance criteria specified shall be regarded as the minimum standard of quality for the project. 2. Basis of Design: R -MER Span System manufactured by the Garland Company Cleveland, OH. 1 813.777.1745 B. R -Mer Span: 1. Width of Standing T -Seam Panel: 1 inch T -seam. a. 16 inches. STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - Page 7 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Standing Seam: 2 -3/8 inch tall mechanically seamed with factory installed hot melt sealant in -seam cap. Panel /Cap is configured with a total of 4 layers of metal surrounding anchor clip. 3. Panel Profile: Provided with minimum 1 -1/2 inches wide elevated mesa's every 2 inches on center continuous throughout panel. a. Slope: Open Purlins or Solid Substrate down to 1/4:12. 4. Panel material: a. Aluminum, 3105 -H14 alloy, smooth as per ASTM B 209, .040 inch thickness. 5. Flashing and flat stock material: Fabricate in profiles indicated on Drawings of same material, thickness, and finish as roof system, unless indicated otherwise. 6. Uncoated Mill Finish: Exposed and unexposed surfaces for uncoated panels mill finish. 7. Accessory Components: a. Anchor Clips: 1) Concealed Standard Anchor Clips: Clips 16 gauge stainless steel, alloy 316L, 1 piece clip with projecting legs for additional panel alignment and provision for unlimited thermal movement in each direction along the longitudinal dimension. b. Gable anchor clips for: 1) Standing Seam style. a) Stainless steel, alloy 316L, minimum thickness: 16 gauge. c. Fasteners: 1) Concealed fasteners: Corrosion resistant steel fasteners (zinc plated, stainless steel or equal) designed to meet structural loading requirements. 2) Exposed fasteners: Series 410 stainless steel fasteners or 1/8 inch diameter stainless steel waterproof rivets. All exposed fasteners shall be factory painted to match the color of the standing seam panels. d. Closures: Factory precut closed cell foam meeting ASTM D 1056 or ASTM D 3575, enclosed in metal channel matching panels when used at hip, ridge, rake, and jamb. e. Provide all miscellaneous accessories for complete installation. 2.4 FLAT METAL ROOFING ACCESSORIES A. Sealant: 1. Job Installed In -Seam Sealant: Modified polyisobutylene tape, 3/32 inch thick by 2 inches wide, minimum for R -Mer Lite II and 1/8 inch thick by 1 -1/2 inches wide, minimum for R -Mer Lite. a. Pre - formed, non - hardening polyisobutylene rubber based elastic compound designed for use where space tolerance is limited. b. Elongation: 25 percent Maximum c. Recovery: 2 percent Maximum d. Solids: 100 percent Maximum e. Odor: None f. Cure Time: Non - Curing g. Flow: Slight h. Color: Gray i. Adhesion (Metal): Peel: 151 lbs. /lin. in. j. Shear: 55 lbs. /in. j. Seamability: 100 percent cohesion of mating surfaces k. Cold Temperature: Passes minus 30 degrees F. Flex over 1 inch Mandrel. I. Softening Point: 200 degrees F. 2. Factory Applied Sealant: Hot melt, 100 percent solids thermoplastic material. 3. One component urethane meeting 360 percent elongation, ASTM D 412 and Tear Resistance of 140 lbs. /in. ASTM D 1004. STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - Page 8 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 4. One component acrylic terpolymer meeting FS TT -S- 00230. B. Framing System Fasteners: 1. Metal Deck: Fluorocarbon coated #14 fastener or equivalent. C. Seam Screws: Sheet Metal Fastener size #10 or #12 by 3/4 inch or 1 inch by roof system manufacturer. D. Wood Nailers, Curbs and Sleepers: California Redwood. #2 grade. No treated wood utilizing salt -base preservatives shall be allowed. Material safety Data Sheets must be provided for verification of preserving agents prior to the installation of any pressure treated wood. E. Miscellaneous Fasteners: 1. TEK #1 or #4 screws 2. Expanding fasteners 1/4 inch minimum. F. Prefabricated Stack Flashings: Flexible pre- fabricated round stack flashings with integrated pressure ring shall be used for all round pipe flashings by roof system manufacturer. G. Temporary Night Sealant: Self- contained, two - component urethane foam. H. Unitized Vents: Spun - aluminum, one -way moisture vapor relief vents by roof system manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive metal roofing. Notify the Architect in writing of any defective conditions encountered. Starting of work shall constitute acceptance of such conditions. B. Structural Deck Substrate: 1. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, and properly sloped. 2. Verify deck is dry and joints are solidly supported and fastened. 3. Verify wood nailers are installed and correctly located. Do not use pressure- treated wood containing salt -based preservatives or materials corrosive to steel. C. Structural Framing Substrate: I . Verify primary and secondary framing members are installed and fastened, properly aligned and sloped. 2. Verify damaged shop coatings are repaired with touch up paint. D. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets are in place, and nailing strips located. E. Correct defective conditions before beginning work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in conformance with the NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and Manufacturers installation requirements. B. Form panel shape as indicated on Drawings, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. C. Install underlayment and eave protection sheet underlayment as recommended by the Manufacturer. D. Coordinate with installation of rigid board insulation as specified in Section 07200. STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - Page 9 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX E. Install all panels continuous from ridge to eave. Transverse seams are not permitted. F. Panel lengths that exceed maximum shipping lengths shall be field rolled on equipment owned by the panel manufacturer. Seam sealant must be factory applied. G. Exposed fasteners, screws and /or roof mastic are unacceptable and will be rejected. System configuration only allows for exposed fasteners at panel overlap, if required, and at trim details in accordance with the Manufacturer's requirements. H. Where not otherwise indicated conform to SMACNA details including flashings and trim. I. Install sealants where indicated to clean dry surfaces only without skips or voids.. J. Install metal edge treatment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the approved shop drawings. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch -up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 074113 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - Page 10 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 075200 - MODIFIED BITMINUOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING — HOT APPLIED PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Hot applied asphalt modified bituminous membrane roofing over prepared substrate and insulation system. 1. Through 1/2" High Density Wood Fiber Board, mechanically attach polyisocyanurate into metal deck. 2. Adhere one (1) ply of the specified base roofing ply in the hot asphalt bitumen over the recovery board. 3. Adhere one (1) ply of the specified modified asphalt reinforced membrane roof ply in the specified hot asphalt bitumen. 4. Install two (2) ply modified asphalt membrane flashing system in the specified hot asphalt bitumen. 5. Apply specified approved coating system 1.3 SECTION INCLUDES A. This portion of the specification sets forth the general requirements and describes materials and workmanship for installing the hot applied modified bituminous membrane roof system over prepared substrates. B. Roofing contractor shall furnish and install all materials described herein unless specifically noted otherwise. C. This section is for work on roofs where indicated on the drawings as otherwise. 1.4 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, cants, curbs, and blocking and for wood - based, structural -use roof deck and walls. B. Division 7 Section "Roof Insulation ". C. Division 7 Section "Modified Bituminous Membrane Re- roofing Procedures ". D. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ". 1.5 REFERENCES A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. ASCE 7 -10, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D41, Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing. 2. ASTM D312, Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 1 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. ASTM D451, Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Granular Mineral Surfacing for Asphalt Roofing Products. 4. ASTM D1079, Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing and Bituminous Materials. 5. ASTM D1863, Specification for Mineral Aggregate Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing. 6. ASTM 02178, Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing. 7. ASTM D2822, Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement. 8. ASTM D2824, Specification for Aluminum- Pigmented Asphalt Roof Coating. 9. ASTM D4601, Specification for Asphalt Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing. 10. ASTM D5147, Test Method for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials. 11. ASTM D6162, Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using a Combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber Reinforcements. 12. ASTM D6163, Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements. 13. ASTM E108, Test Methods for Fire Test of Roof Coverings. C. Factory Mutual Research (FM): 1. Roof Assembly Classifications. D. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): 1. Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. Fire Hazard Classifications. F. FL Product Approval 1. Approval: FL12144 -R4 I System No: S -3 (Pg. 8) 1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. It is the intent of this specification to install a long -term, quality roof system that meets or exceeds all current NRCA guidelines as stated in the most recent edition of the NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. Please discuss any concerns with the Roofing System Manufacturer. 1.7 DISCLOSURE OF MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. The materials outlined herein are the type of materials that should be used in this project. When a particular make or trade name is specified, it shall be indicative of the minimum standard required. The bidder must disclose in his /her bid package the manufacturer that they intend to use on this Project if other than the Basis of Design manufacturer. If no manufacturer is listed, the bidder's bid is accepted only with the use of the Basis of Design manufacturer and the bidder must use the Basis of Design manufacturer. i. Bidder will not be allowed to change materials after the bid opening date. ii. If an alternate material is bid, the material must be equal or exceed the specifications, and submitted by the bidding Roofing Contractor to the Architect for approval and include the following: 1. Written application with explanation of why it should be considered. 2. Material product data sheets. 3. A certificate from an accredited testing laboratory comparing the physical and performance attributes of the proposed material with those materials denoted as pre- approved systems or the characteristics noted in the material specification section, including but not limited to the following: MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 2 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX a. Modified roofing membrane(s) and flashings substantiating Flexibility, Tensile Strength and Tear Strength. Test results must be dated, notarized and be on testing laboratory stationary. Testing for SBS membrane must follow standard ASTM D 5147 test methods. Testing shall be performed at 77 °F. Tests at 0 °F shall not be considered. 4. The materials installed for the waterproofing membrane must be physically manufactured and guaranteed by the material supplier. 5. A sample warranty by the manufacturer of the modified bitumen membrane roofing system. The manufacturer must be the organization that physically manufacturers and guarantees the modified roofing membrane. 6. All products must be in accordance with the Health, Safety and Environmental Control (H, S & E) Regulations, e.g., No asbestos materials, no harmful solvent release materials, etc. 7. In making a request for submission, Bidder /Contractor represents: a. He /she has personally investigated the proposed product or method, and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. b. He /she will provide the same guarantee for substitution as for the product and method specified. c. He /she will coordinate installation of accepted substitution in work, making such changes as may be required for work to be completed in all respects. d. Cost data is complete and includes all related cost under his /her contract or other contracts, which may be affected by the substitution. e. He will reimburse the Owner for all redesign cost by the Architect for accommodation of the substitute. iii. The Architect reserves the right to be the final authority on the acceptance or rejection of any or all bids, proposed alternate roofing systems or materials that has met ALL specified requirement criteria. iv. Alternate material submissions shall be sent to the Architect by the bidding Roofing Contractor. Only substitutes approved in writing by the Architect will be considered. v. NOTE: Failure to submit substitution package, or any portion thereof requested, will result in immediate disqualification and consideration for that particular contractors request for manufacturer substitution. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Contract Documents and this section. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's technical product data for each type of roofing product specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. C. Samples: Submit two (2) samples of each product specified. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions and recommendations indicating special precautions required for installing the membrane. E. Manufacturer's Fire Compliance Certificate: Certify that roof system furnished is approved by Factory Mutual, Underwriters Laboratories, Warnock Hersey or approved third party testing facility in accordance with ASTM E108, Class A for external fire and meets local or nationally recognized building codes. F. Manufacturer's Wind Uplift Certificate: The physical manufacturer of the modified bitumen membrane must provide certification that the proposed roof system will be secured properly to the structure to meet or exceed the specific project wind uplift requirements per Section 1.16 Design and Performance Criteria. MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 3 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX G. Manufacturer's Manufacturing Certificate: Certify that modified membrane materials to be used on this project are physically manufactured by the distributing manufacturer in the United States and conform to requirements specified herein, are chemically and physically compatible with each other, and are suitable for inclusion within the total roof system specified herein. H. Manufacturer's Manufacturing Certificate: Submit a certified copy of the roofing manufacturer's ISO 9001:2008 compliance certificate. I. Test Reports: Submit test reports, prepared by an independent testing agency, for all modified bituminous sheet roofing, indicating compliance with ASTM D5147. Testing must be performed at 77 °F. Tests at 0 °F will not be considered. J. Submit a copy of an unexecuted manufacturer's warranty for review. K. Provide approval letters from insulation manufacturer for use of their insulation within this particular roofing system type. L. Shop Drawings: Indicate size and materials. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, fastening patterns, and clearances. Submit three (3) and retain approved copies at the Site. M. Design Loads: Submit copy of manufacturer's minimum design load calculations according to ASCE 7 -10, prepared by an engineer employed by the system manufacturer as a full -time staff engineer. In no case shall the design Toads be taken to be less than those detailed in article 1.16 of this specification. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 12 years documented experience and having ISO 9001:2008 certification. B. Installer: Company specializing in modified bituminous roofing installation with a minimum 5 years experience and certified by roofing system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's roofing materials. C. Installer's Field Supervision: Maintain a full -time Supervisor /Foreman on job site during all phases of roofing work and at any time roofing work is in progress. Maintain proper supervision of workmen. Maintain a copy of the specifications in the possession of the Supervisor /Foremen and on the roof at all times. 1. Maintain a copy of the Contract Documents in the possession of the Supervisor /Foreman and on the roof at all times. D. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of roof system from a single manufacturer. Secondary products that are required shall be recommended and approved in writing by the roofing system Manufacturer. 1. Upon request of the Architect or Owner, submit Manufacturer's written approval of secondary components in list form, signed by an authorized agent of the Manufacturer. E. Immediately correct roof leakage during construction. If the Contractor does not respond within twenty four (24) hours, the Owner has the right to hire a qualified contractor and backcharge the original contractor. F. Insurance Certification: Assist Owner in preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as may be necessary in connection with fire and extended coverage insurance on roofing and associated work. MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 4 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.10 PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Pre - Roofing Conference: Convene a pre- roofing conference approximately two (2) weeks before scheduled commencement of modified bituminous roofing system installation and associated work. B. Require attendance of installer of each component of associated work, installers of deck or substrate construction to receive roofing work, installers of rooftop units and other work in and around roofing which must precede or follow roofing work (including mechanical work if any), Architect, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of the Work, including (where applicable) Owner's insurers, testing agencies and governing authorities. C. Objectives of conference to include: 1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work. 2. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks), inspect and discuss condition of substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations and other preparatory work performed by others. 3. Review structural loading limitations of deck and inspect deck for loss of flatness and for required attachment. 4. Review roofing system requirements (drawings, specifications and other contract documents). 5. Review required submittals both completed and yet to be completed. 6. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 7. Review required inspection, testing, certifying and material usage accounting procedures. 8. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing (if not mandatory requirement). 9. Record discussion of conference including decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached and furnish copy of record to each party attending. 10. Review notification procedures for weather or non - working days. D. The Owner's Representative will designate one of the conference participants to record the proceedings and promptly distribute them to the participants for record. E. The intent of the conference is to resolve issues affecting the installation and performance of roofing work. Do not proceed with roofing work until such issues are resolved the satisfaction of the Owner and Architect. This shall not be construed as interference with the progress of Work on the part of the Owner or Architect. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site with seals and labels intact, in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged. B. Store and handle roofing sheets in a dry, well - ventilated, weather -tight place to ensure no possibility of significant moisture exposure. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on pallets or other raised surface. Stand all roll materials on end. Cover roll goods with a canvas tarpaulin or other breathable material (not polyethylene). MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 5 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. In accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations; immediately remove the plastic wrapping on the roof recovery boards and cover with a watertight, ventilated enclosure (Le. tarpaulins). Prevent the formation of condensation on the boards. D. Do not leave unused materials on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress unless protected from weather and other moisture sources. E. It is the responsibility of the contractor to secure all material and equipment on the job site. If any material or equipment is stored on the roof, the contractor must make sure that the integrity of the deck is not compromised at any time. Damage to the deck caused by the contractor will be the sole responsibility of the contractor and will be repaired or replaced at his expense. 1.12 MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTIONS A. When the project is in progress, the roofing system manufacturer will provide the following: 1. Keep the Architect informed as to the progress and quality of the work as observed. 2. Provide job site inspections a minimum of three (3) days a week with reports to the Architect. 3. Report to the Architect in writing any failure or refusal of the Contractor to correct unacceptable practices called to the Contractor's attention. 4. Confirm after completion that manufacturer has observed no applications procedures in conflict with the specifications other than those that may have been previously reported and corrected. 1.13 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit unit of work to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements. B. Do not apply roofing insulation or membrane to damp deck surface. C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same day. 1.14 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of modified bituminous sheet roofing with related units of work specified in other sections to ensure that roof assemblies including roof accessories, flashing, trim and joint sealers are protected against damage from effects of weather, corrosion and adjacent construction activity. B. Fully complete the installation of insulation system and base roofing ply assembly, and /or the installation of the modified bituminous membrane roof ply each day. Phase construction between the base roofing ply and modified membrane roof ply (top ply) is acceptable. 1.15 WARRANTY A. Upon completion of installation, and acceptance by the Owner and Architect, the manufacturer will supply to the Owner a single- source, thirty (30) year Edge -to -Edge no dollar limit (NDL) warranty. This Edge -to -Edge warranty shall cover the roof system and the pre- fabricated metal edge fascia system and metal edge coping cap system. Warranty will include the roof systems, pre- manufactured metal edge fascia system, pre- manufactured metal coping cap system, Energy Star coating system, flashings, and the transition between all systems. MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 6 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Installer will submit a minimum of a two (2) year warranty to the membrane manufacturer with a copy directly to Owner. C. At the request of the Owner, the manufacturer will provide an annual inspection of the roof. These inspection requests can occur for the life of the warranty. 1.16 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Uniform Wind Uplift Load Capacity: 1. Installed roof system shall withstand negative (uplift) design wind loading pressures complying with the following criteria. a. Design Code: ASCE 7 -10 b. Category IV Building with an Importance Factor of 1. c. Wind Speed: TBD d. Ultimate Pullout Value: TBD e. Exposure Category: C f. Design Roof Height: TBD g. Minimum Building Width: TBD h. Roof Pitch: VARIES i. Topography Factor: 1.00 j. Basic Velocity Pressure: TBD Roof Area (Al Upper Roof) Design Uplift Pressure: Zone 1 - Field of roof TBD Zone 2 - Perimeter TBD Zone 3 - Corners TBD 1.17 SITE CONDITIONS A. Field measurements and material quantities: 1. Contractor shall have SOLE responsibility for accuracy of all measurements, estimates of material quantities and sizes, and site conditions that will affect work. 2. Contractor is responsible for depth of all edge nailers, fascia, flashing to meet height of new insulation if applicable. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Building space directly under roof area covered by this specification will be utilized by on -going operations. Do not interrupt Owner operations unless prior written approval is received from Owner. C. Waste Disposal: 1. Do not re -use, re -cycle or dispose of materials except in accordance with all applicable regulations. The use of products is responsible for proper use and disposal of product containers. D. Safety Requirements: 1. All application, material handling, and associated equipment shall conform to and be operated in conformance with OSHA safety requirements. 2. Comply with federal, state, local and Owner fire and safety requirements. 3. Advise Owner whenever work is expected to be hazardous to Owner, employees, and /or operators. 4. Maintain a crewman as a floor area guard whenever roof decking is being repaired or replaced. 5. Maintain fire extinguisher within easy access whenever power tools, roofing kettles, fuels, solvents, torches and open flames are being used. MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 7 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. When a particular trade name or performance standard is specified it shall be indicative of the minimum standard required. Product names for the materials used in this section shall be based on performance characteristics of the modified bitumen roof system manufactured by The Garland Company, Cleveland, OH, (813)777 -1745 and shall form the basis of the contract documents. B. This specification is based on the performance characteristics of the system identified herein. Any proposed alternate systems, specified or not, must meet or exceed the following listed characteristics and be submitted for approval. Additionally, all Warranty Criteria (Section 1.15) and Design and Performance Criteria (Section 1.16) must be met and submitted as well as all items listed in the Disclosure of Materials and Substitutions (Section 1.7). Failure of a system to meet all requirements of this specification will result in forfeiture of the bid award. C. Any item or materials submitted as a substitution to the basis of design manufacturer specified, must be submitted by the bidding Contractor and must comply in all respects as to the quality and performance of the brand name specified. Any substitutions must have the required FL product approvals for system. The Architect shall be the sole judge as to whether or not an item submitted as a substitute is truly equal. Should the Contractor choose to submit a substitute product, he shall assume all monetary or other risk involved, should the Architect find the substitution unacceptable. D. Provide primary products, including each type of roofing membrane, base roofing ply, base flashing ply, modified membrane flashing ply, modified membrane roof ply, and miscellaneous flashing materials from a single source roof manufacturer. A roof manufacturer is defined as the company who physically manufacturers the products. Provide secondary products (insulation, mechanical fasteners, etc.) only as recommended by the roof manufacturer of primary products for use with the roof system specified. E. The following manufacturers are acceptable, providing they meet these specifications and the minimum standards stated. a. The Garland Company, Inc. (Basis of Design) b. Approved Equal 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Modified bituminous roofing work including but not limited to: 1. Install the specified tapered and /or flat rigid roof insulation systems in accordance with Divison 7 Section 07 22 00. 2. Base Roofing Ply: STRESSBASE 80; One (1) ply of a 80 mil SBS (Styrene- Butadiene- Styrene) fiberglass reinforced modified membrane base roofing ply bonded to the prepared substrate with specified asphalt bitumen. 3. Modified Membrane Roof Ply: VERSIPLY MINERAL; 135 mil SBS (Styrene- Butadiene- Styrene) mineral surfaced, rubber modified roofing membrane with dual fiberglass reinforced scrim. 4. Hot Bitumen: ASTM D312, Type IV special steep asphalt having the following characteristics: a. Softening Point 210 °F - 225 °F b. Flash Point 500 °F c. Penetration @ 77 °F 15 -25 units d. Ductility @ 77 °F 1.5 cm 5. Base Flashing Ply: STRESSBASE 80; One (1) ply of a 80 mil SBS (Styrene-Butadiene- Styrene) fiberglass reinforced modified membrane base roofing ply bonded to the MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 8 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX prepared substrate with specified asphalt bitumen. Modified Membrane Flashing Ply: VERSIPLY MINERAL; 145 mil SBS (Styrene - Butadiene- Styrene) mineral surfaced, rubber modified roofing membrane with dual fiberglass reinforced scrim. 2.3 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS A. Asphalt Primer: V.O.C. compliant, ASTM D -41. B. Asphalt Roofing Mastic: V.O.C. compliant, ASTM D -2822, Type II. C. Interply Adhesive: ASTM D312, Type IV Special Steep Asphalt. D. Flashing Adhesive: ASTM D312, Type IV Special Steep Asphalt. E. Aluminized Asphalt Roofing Mastic for Vertical Seams of Flashings: SILVER - FLASH. F. Elastomeric Asphaltic Sealant: GARLA -FLEX SEALANT or approved equal. 2.4 SHEET MATERIALS A. Base Roofing Ply (Field & Flashing): STRESSBASE 80 1. STRESSBASE 80: ASTM D6163, Type I; A 80 mil SBS modified membrane with woven fiberglass scrim reinforcement with the following minimum performance requirements according to ASTM D5147. Properties (Finished Membrane): Tensile Strength (ASTM D5147) 2 in /min. @73.4 +/- 3.6 °F MD 100 Ibf /in CMD 100 Ibf /in Tear Strength (ASTM D5147) 2 in /min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 °F MD 110 Ibf CMD 110 Ibf Elongation at Maximum Tensile (ASTM D5147) 2 in /min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 °F MD 2.5% CMD 2.5% Low Temperature Flexibility (ASTM D5147): Passes -20 °F Recycled Content 20% Pre - Consumer Thickness : 80 mils B. Modified Membrane Roofing Ply (Field & Flashing): VERSIPLY MINERAL 1. VERSIPLY MINERAL; ASTM D6163, Type III Grade G Tensile Strength (ASTM D5147) 2 in /min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 °F MD 220 Ibf /in CMD 220 Ibf /in 50 mm /min. @ 23 +/- 3 °C MD 38.50 kN /m CMD 38.50 kNm Tear Strength (ASTM D5147) 2 in /min. @ 73.4 +l- 3.6 °F MD 300 Ibf CMD 300 Ibf 50 mm /min. @ 23 +/- 3 °C MD 1335 N CMD 1335 N Elongation at Maximum Tensile (ASTM D5147) 2 in /min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 °F MD 4.5% CMD 4.5% 50 mm /min. @ 23 +/- 3 °C Low Temperature Flexibility (ASTM D5147): Passes -30 °F ( -34 °C) Recycled Content 6% Post- Consumer Thickness 145 mils C. Reinforcing Mesh for Flashing Seams — GARMESH Styrene- Butadiene - Rubber (SBR) coated, woven, fiberglass scrim. 2.5 SURFACING MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 9 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX A. Mineral Surfaced Membrane: Roofing Granules shall meet requirements of ASTM D -451 and /or be recommended by the membrane manufacturer. Loose granules for bleedout shall match size and color of granulated membrane sheet. B. Garla -Brite Roofing Coating: Energy Start approved aluminum roof coating system have the following characteristics: Base & Top Coat Properties: a. Weight /Gallon — 8.51 lbs. /gal. b. Non - Volatile % (ASTM D 2824) — 45% min c. Color — Aluminum d. Wet Film Thickness: 16 mils (at 1 gal.) e. Coverage: .5-.75 gal. per 100 sq. ft. per coat (2 coats required). 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS A. Roof Insulation and Roof Recovery Board: In accordance with Division 7 Section 07 22 00. B. Roof Insulation Fasteners: In accordance with Division 7 Section 07 22 00. C. Roof Insulation and Roof Recovery Board Adhesives: In accordance with Division 7 Section 07 22 00. D. Nails and Fasteners: Non- ferrous metal or hot dipped galvanized fasteners complying with ASTM A153 and connectors complying with ASTM A653, Class G185; Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel fasteners and connectors shall be used with new generation of pressure - treated wood; except that hard copper nails shall be used with copper; aluminum or stainless steel nails shall be used with aluminum; and stainless steel nails shall be used with stainless steel. Fasteners shall be self - clinching type of penetrating type as recommended by the manufacturer of the wood blocking /nailer material. Nails and fasteners shall be flush- driven through flat metal discs. 1. Approved Fasteners to be used in accordance with FL Product Manufacturers System Approval FL12144 -R3 a. OMG #12 Heavy Duty Fastener with three (3) inch galvalume steel plate. F. Lead Flashing Sheet: Meets Federal Specification QQ -L -201, Grade B, four (4) pounds per square foot. G. Metal Termination Bars: 1. Shall be heavy flat bar aluminum unless otherwise recommended by membrane manufacturers. 2. Material shall be .125" x 1" (minimum) aluminum conforming to ASTM B -221, mill finish. H. Urethane Sealant: One part, non -sag sealant as provided by or recommended by the membrane manufacturer for moving joints. 1. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412) 250 psi 2. Ultimate Elongation (ASM D412) 950% 3. Hardness, Shore A (ASTM C920) 35 4. Adhesion -in -Peel (ASTM C920) 25 pli 5. 100% Modulus (ASTM D412) 50 psi 6. Bond (Durability -Class 25, ASTM C920) Passes 7. Service Temperature Range -40 °F to +180 °F 8. Stain and Color Change (ASTM C920) Passes 9. Tack Free Time (ASTM C679 (max 72 hrs.) 16 hrs. 10.Weep and Sag (ASTM C920 (max 3/16 "(4mm))) Passes 11. Weight loss after heat aging (ASTM C920 (max 10 %)) Passes MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 10 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX I. Pitch Pocket Sealer: Two -part, 100% solids, pourable, self leveling, urethane sealant for filling pitch pans as provided by or recommended by the membrane manufacturer. 1. Viscosity: A Component 100,000 to 150,000 cps B Component 500 to 2,000 cps 2. Pot Life: End Point 1 million centipoises @ 100 °F — 20 to 30 minutes @ 70 °F — 40 to 50 minutes 3. Durometer (ASTM D 2240) 40 to 50 shore 4. Elongation (ASTM D 412) 250% 100 mil @ 70 °F 5. Specific Gravity Cured Rubber 1.01 6. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 412) 200 psi, 100 mil 7. Peel Adhesion (ASTM C 836) Cotton Webbing Bonded to: Aluminum — 15 pli Concrete — 18 pli Steel Galvanized — 19 ph Wood — 20 pli 8. Moisture Vapor Transmission (ASTM E 96) 0.05 Perms J. Non - Shrink Grout: Use an all weather fast setting chemical action concrete material to fill pitch Pans. 1. Flexural Strength (ASTM C -78 (modified)) 7 days 1100psi 2. High Strength (ASTM C -109 (modified)) 24 days 84001bs (3810kg) K. Liquid Flashing System: TUFF -FLASH system as supplied by the roof system manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive modified bituminous membrane roof system and associated work and conditions under which roofing will be installed. Do not proceed with roofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the manufacturer. B. Prior to installing the finish modified membrane roofing ply, the contractor must notify the roof system manufacturer representative, and Architect, to examine the roof area for high and low spots. It may be necessary to mist the roof with water to identify the problem areas. The contractor will correct all problem areas identified. This examination should take place no less than 24 hours in advance of installing the finished membrane. C. Verify that deck surfaces and project conditions are ready to receive work of this section. D. Verify that deck is supported and secured to structural members. E. Verify that deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, projections or ripples, and is properly sloped to drains. F. Verify that adjacent roof members do not vary more than 1/4 inch in height. G. Verify that deck surfaces are dry, not corroded /rotten or deteriorated, and do not have bacterial growth and are structurally sound. H. Verify that openings, curbs, pipes, conduit, sleeves, ducts, and other items which penetrate the roof are set solidly, and that wood cant strips, wood nailing strips and reglets are set in MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 11 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX place. Verify that all roof curb heights are satisfactory and that the wood blocking height along the perimeter of the building and /or roof levels is satisfactory to provide positive roof pitch away from the building edge. I. Contractor is responsible to verify existing substrate is sloped, or level /plumb, as stated in /on the project documents prior to installation of the insulation system. All defects in roof pitch to be accommodated with tapered insulation to insure a positive pitch to all roof drains and gutters. 3.2 PREPARATION — METAL DECK A. Clean substrate of debris and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to the roof system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp objects. B. Protect other work from spillage of roofing materials and prevent materials from entering or clogging roof gutters, drainpipes and conductors. Use roof drain plugs as required to prevent materials from entering and clogging drains, drainpipes and conductors. Remove roof drain plugs at the end of each workday, or when rain is forecasted. Replace or restore other work damaged by installation of the modified bituminous roofing system. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Cooperate with manufacturer, inspection and test agencies engaged or required to perform services in connection with installing the roof system. B. Insurance /Code Compliance: Where required by code, install and test the roofing system to comply with governing regulation and specified insurance requirements. C. Protect other work from spillage of roofing materials and prevent materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace or restore other work damaged by installation of the modified bituminous roofing system. D. Coordinate installation of roofing system components so that rosin paper, insulation and roofing plies are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed overnight. Provide cut -offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roof plies and insulation with two (2) plies of the specified base flashing ply set in full moppings of bitumen, glaze coated and with joints and edges sealed with roofing cement. Remove cut -offs immediately before resuming work. E. Asphalt Bitumen Heating: Heat and apply bitumen in accordance with the Equiviscous Temperature (EVT) Method as recommended by National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA). Do not raise temperature above minimum normal fluid - holding temperature necessary to attain EVT (plus 5 °F at point of application) more than one (1) hour prior to time of application. Determine flash point, finished blowing temperature, EVT, and fire -safe handling temperature of bitumen either from information by manufacturer or by suitable test. Do not exceed recommended temperature limits during bitumen heating. Do not heat to a temperature higher than twenty five degrees (25 °) below flash point. Discard bitumen that has been held at temperature exceeding Finishing Blowing Temperature (FBT) for more than three (3) hours. Keep kettle lid closed except when adding bitumen. F. Bitumen Mopping Rate: 1. Base Roofing Ply Mopping: Apply bitumen at the rate of approximately thirty (30) lb. of bitumen per roof square. 2. Modified Membrane Roof Ply Mopping: Apply bitumen at the rate of approximately thirty (30) lb. of bitumen per roof square. G. Substrate Joint Penetrations: Prevent bitumen from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. H. Apply roofing materials as specified by manufacturer's instructions. MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 12 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Keep roofing materials dry before and during application. 2. Begin and apply only as much roofing in one day as can be completed that same day. I. Cut - Offs /Envelope Waterstops: At end of each day's roofing installation, protect exposed edge of incomplete work, including roof ply membranes and insulation. Provide temporary covering of an approved coated base sheet. Install waterstop /temporary flashing a minimum of 6 inches under face edge of insulation and wrapped up face and back a minimum of 6 inches from the face in asphalt mastic at % pounds per foot, top dress waterstop with asphalt mastic. 3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Roof Insulation and Roof Recovery Board: In accordance with Division 7 Section 07 22 00 B. Roof Insulation Fasteners (Metal Deck): In accordance with Division 7 Section 07 22 00 C. Deck type: Metal D. Insulation: Flat rigid polyisocyanurate insulation with a minimum thickness and compressive strength as specified and 1/2" thick roof recovery board. E. Insulation Attachment (Metal Deck): Through 1/2" thick recovery board, mechanically attach insulation into metal deck per fastening specification. 3.5 BASE ROOFING PLY INSTALLATION A. SBS Modified Membrane Base Roofing Ply: Install one (1) fiberglass reinforced modified base roofing ply membrane in thirty (30) lbs. per 100 square feet of the specified hot asphalt bitumen adhesive. B. The modified membrane shall be shingled in direction of the slope of the roof and tapered insulation system to shed water. C. The modified membrane roll must push a puddle of asphalt in front of it with asphalt slightly visible at all side laps. Exercise care during application to eliminate air entrapment under the membrane. D. Apply pressure to all seams to ensure that the laps are solidly bonded to substrate. E. Install subsequent rolls of modified membrane across the roof as above with a minimum of four (4) inch side laps and eight (8) inch end laps. Stagger the end laps a minimum of 12 inches. Apply the modified membrane in the same direction as the previous layers but stagger the laps so they do not coincide. F. Apply asphalt no more than five (5) feet ahead of each roll being embedded. G. Lightly broom in the base roofing ply to assure complete adhesion. H. Extend membrane to the top edge of all cants in full moppings of the specified asphalt as shown on the drawings. Seal top of membrane with asphalt mastic until base flashing ply is installed. I. Install base flashing ply to all perimeter and projection details in the specified cold applied flashing adhesive. 3.6 MODIFIED MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install specified Modified Membrane Roofing Ply as described below. MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 13 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. SBS Modified Membrane Roof Ply: Solidly bond one (1) fiberglass reinforced modified roofing ply membrane to the base roofing ply in thirty (30) lbs. per 100 square feet of the specified hot asphalt bitumen adhesive. C. The modified membrane roof ply shall be shingled in direction of the slope of the roof and tapered insulation system to shed water. D. The modified membrane roof ply roll must push a puddle of asphalt in front of it with asphalt slightly visible at all side laps. Exercise care during application to eliminate air entrapment under the membrane. E. Apply pressure to all seams to ensure that the laps are solidly bonded to substrate. F. Install subsequent rolls of modified membrane across the roof as above with a minimum of four (4) inch side laps and eight (8) inch end laps. Stagger the end laps a minimum of 12 inches. Apply the modified membrane in the same direction as the previous layers but stagger the laps so they do not coincide with the laps of the base layer. G. Apply asphalt no more than five (5) feet ahead of each roll being embedded. H. Lightly broom in the modified membrane roofing ply to assure complete adhesion. I. Extend membrane to the top edge of all cants in full moppings of the specified asphalt as shown on the drawings. Seal top of membrane with asphalt mastic until modified membrane flashing ply is installed. J. Install modified flashing ply to all perimeter and projection details in the specified cold applied flashing adhesive. 3.7 FLASHING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Seal all curb, wall and parapet flashings with an application of mastic and mesh on a daily basis. Do not permit conditions to exist that will allow moisture to enter behind, around or under the roof or flashing membrane. B. Prepare all walls, drain lead flashing, penetrations and where shown on the drawings to be flashed with asphalt primer at the rate of one hundred (100) square feet per gallon. Allow primer to dry tack free. C. The wall /cant juncture will be examined for air passage. If airflow is present, the joint between the cant and wall will be sealed with a closed cell joint backing and reglet joint sealant. D. Use the specified Modified Membrane Flashing Ply as the top flashing ply membrane and adhere to the underlying base flashing ply. Secure at a minimum of eight (8) inches from the finished roof, unless noted otherwise, at all vertical surfaces with a continuous termination bar fastened at a maximum of six (6) inches on center. E. Solidly adhere the entire sheet of flashing membrane to the base flashing ply and substrate with the specified flashing adhesive. F. Seal all vertical laps of flashing membrane with a three - course application of Garla -Flex trowel -grade mastic and mesh. G. Coordinate counter flashings, cap flashings and similar work with modified bitumen roofing work as specified in other sections. H. Coordinate roof accessories, miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items, including piping vents and other devices with the roofing system work as specified in other sections. MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 14 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX I. Flash all penetrations as specified below and per the project documents. If specific detail is not shown in drawings or specified below, flash detail in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications to comply with the specified guaranty. J. Pre - manufactured Metal Edge System 1. Position base plies of the built -up and /or modified roofing membrane over the roof edge covering nailers completely, fastening eight (8) inches on center. Install membrane and cap sheet with proper material and procedure according to manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Cant Dam: Install Cant Dam overlapping Cant a minimum of 1 inch. Fasten Cant Dam through the top of nailer and outside face in accordance with ANSI /SPRI ES -1 test report. 3. BUR or Modified Flashing: Prime Cant Dam at a rate of 100 square feet per gallon and allow to dry. 4. Strip in Cant Dam with base flashing membrane extending six (6) inches into roof field, followed with a cap sheet extending 9 inches into the roof field. Install membrane and cap sheet with proper material and procedure according to manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Fascia Cover: Install fascia cover with splice plate under one end by pressing downward firmly until "snap" occurs and cover is engaged along entire length of miter. Field cut where necessary with fine tooth saw. 6. Sealant is to be placed between splice plates on metal edge pieces. 7. Install a second ply of modified flashing ply in bitumen over the base flashing ply, 9 inches (228 mm) on to the field of the roof. K. Roof Drain: 1. Plug drain to prevent debris from entering plumbing. 2. Taper insulation to drain minimum of 24 inches from center of drain. 3. Run roof system plies over drain. Cut out plies inside drain bowl. 4. Set lead flashing in % inch bed of mastic. Run lead into drain a minimum of 2 inches. Prime lead at a rate of 100 sq. ft. per gallon and allow to dry. 5. Install base flashing ply (40 inch square minimum) in bitumen 6. Install modified membrane (48 inch square minimum) in bitumen 7. Install clamping ring and assure that all plies are under the clamping ring. 8. Remove drain plug and install strainer. L. Exhaust Fan /Passive Vent/Air Intake: 1. Minimum curb height is eight (8) inches off the finished roof surface. As required, raise existing curbs to the required height. Prime vertical curb surface at a rate of one hundred (100) square feet per gallon and allow to dry. 2. Set cant in bitumen. Run base roofing ply over cant a minimum of two (2) inches. 3. Install base flashing ply in the specified flashing adhesive covering curb with six (6) inches on to field of the roof. 4. Install modified membrane over cant and up the curb a minimum of two (2) inches. 5. Install the modified flashing ply in the specified flashing adhesive over the base flashing ply, nine (9) inches on to field of the roof. Attach top of membrane to top of wood curb and nail at eight (8) inches o.c. Apply a three - course application of Silver -Flash aluminized mastic and mesh at all vertical seams. 6. Install metal exhaust fan over the wood nailers and flashing to act as counterflashing. Fasten per manufacturer's recommendation. If the existing fan cover cannot fit over the installed flashing system, stop the flashing system at the top of the curb and fasten with cap nails at eight (8) inches on center. Install an 0.040" aluminum slip flashing under the fan cover and fasten to the curb at eight (8) inches on center with neoprene gasketed screws. The slip flashing shall cover the top of the flashing system three (3) inches minimum. Install new corner pieces on the fan cover. MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 15 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX M. Plumbing /Soil Stack: 1. Minimum stack height is twelve (12) inches. 2. Run roof system over the entire surface of the roof. Seal the base of the stack with mastic 3. Prime flange of new lead sleeve. Install properly sized lead sleeve set in 1/4 inch bed of roof cement. 4. Install base flashing ply in the specified flashing adhesive. 5. Install modified membrane in the specified flashing adhesive. 6. Seal the intersection of the membrane and stack with the specified elastomeric asphaltic sealant. 7. Turn sleeve a minimum of one (1) inch down inside of stack. For pipes 2 inches or less in diameter, lead top caps will be required. N. Pitch Pocket WITH UMBRELLA: 1. Run all plies up to the penetration. 2. Place the pitch pocket over the penetration and prime all flanges. 3. Strip in flange of pitch pocket with one (1) ply of base flashing ply in the specified flashing adhesive. Extend six (6) inches onto field of roof. 4. Install the modified membrane flashing ply in the specified flashing adhesive. Extending nine (9) inches onto field of the roof. 5. Fill pitch pocket to 1" of the top edge with non - shrink grout. Let this cure and top off with specified two -part pourable sealer. 6. Caulk joint between roof system and pitch pocket with the specified elastomeric asphaltic sealant. O. Coping Cap: 1. Minimum flashing height is 8 inches above finished roof height. Maximum 2. flashing height is 24 inches. Prime vertical wall at a rate of 100 square feet per gallon and allow to dry. 3. Set cant in bitumen. Run all field plies over cant a minimum of 2 inches. 4. Attach tapered board to top of wall. 5. Install base flashing ply covering entire wall and wrapped over top of wall and down face 6. with 6 inches on to field of roof and set in cold asphalt. Nail membrane at 8 inches o.c. 7. Install a second ply of modified flashing ply in bitumen over the base flashing ply, 9 8. inches (228 mm) on to the field of the roof. Apply a three - course application of mastic and mesh at all seams and allow to cure and aluminize. 9. Install continuous cleat and fasten at 6 inches o.c. to outside wall. 10.Install new metal coping cap hooked to continuous cleat. 11.Fasten inside cap 24 inches o.c. with approved fasteners and neoprene washers through slotted holes, which allow for expansion and contraction. P. Liquid Flashing 1. Mask target area on roof membrane with tape. 2. Clean all non - porous areas with isopropyl alcohol. 3. Apply 32 wet mil base coat of liquid flashing over masked area. 4. Embed polyester reinforcement fabric into the base coat of the liquid flashing. 5. Apply 48 -64 wet mil top coat of the liquid flashing material over the fabric extending 2 inches past the scrim in all directions. 6. Apply minerals immediately or allow the liquid flashing material to cure 15 -30 days and then install reflective coating. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 16 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX A. Perform field inspection and testing as required by this specification and under provisions of Section 1. B. Correct defects or irregularities discovered during field inspection. C. Require attendance of roofing materials manufacturers' representative(s) at site during installation of the roofing system as specified in Section 1.9 above. 3.14 CLEANING A. Remove bitumen adhesive drippings from all walls, windows, floors, ladders and finished surfaces. B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other sources of soiling caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning instructions and conform to their instructions. C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section. 3.15 FINAL INSPECTION A. At completion of roofing installation and associated work, meet with Contractor, Architect, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of roofing system. B. Walk roof surface areas of the building, inspect perimeter building edges as well as flashing of roof penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment. List all items requiring correction or completion and furnish copy of list to each party in attendance. C. The roofing system manufacturer and /or Architect reserves the right to request a thermographic scan of the roof during final inspection to determine if any damp or wet materials have been installed. The thermographic scan shall be provided by the Roofing Contractor at a negotiated price. D. If core cuts verify the presence of damp or wet materials, the Roofing Contractor shall be required to replace the damaged areas at his own expense. E. Repair or replace deteriorated or defective work found at time above inspection as required to produce an installation which is free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. F. Notify the Architect, Owner and roofing system manufacturer upon completion of corrections. G. Following the final inspection, provide written notice of acceptance of the installation from the roofing system manufacturer. END OF SECTION 075200 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 075200 - Page 17 of 17 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Formed equipment support flashing. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. All manufacturers shall meet ES -1 Wind Standards. B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. C. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations. Distinguish between shop- and field - assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identify material, thickness, weight and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams and dimensions. 3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim, including fasteners, clips, cleats and attachments to adjoining work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - Page 1 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure and noncorrosive installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory - applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. 1. Finish: No. 2D (dull, cold rolled). 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6 -mil thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397. B. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt- saturated organic felt, nonperforated. C. Slip Sheet: Rosin -sized paper, minimum 5-lb/100 sq. ft. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self- tapping screws, self - locking rivets and bolts and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory- applied coating. 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self - drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 3. Blind Fasteners: High- strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets. 4. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. C. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless -steel sheet manufacturer. Sealing Tape: Pressure - sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - Page 2 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single- component, solvent - release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two -part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam - cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. H. Bituminous Coating: Cold- applied asphalt mastic, SSPC -Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricates items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat - lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed -to -view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. 1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick. 2.6 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one -half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - Page 3 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings. B. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches. C. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. D. Self- Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self- adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3- 1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless -steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - Page 4 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull -out resistance. E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. 1. Where sealant - filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant -type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants." F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre -tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1 -1/2 inches, except reduce pre- tinning where pre- tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder aluminum sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3. Stainless -Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength. 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 -inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - Page 5 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - Page 6 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof hatches. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders for access to roof hatches. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation. B. Coordinate dimensions with rough -in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA- M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for type of use, finished to match assembly where used, otherwise mill finished. C. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation. B. Glass -Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, thickness as indicated. ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, thickness as indicated. D. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1 -1/2 inches thick. E. Bituminous Coating: Cold- applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. F. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. G. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. H. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane or silicone polymer sealant as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight. I. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single- component, solvent - release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement. J. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.3 ROOF HATCH A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof -hatch units with lids and insulated double - walled curbs, welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid -to -curb counter-flashing and weathertight perimeter gasketing, and integrally formed deck - mounting flange at perimeter bottom. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AES Industries, Inc.Babcock- Davis. b. Bilco Company (The). c. Dur -Red Products. d. J. L. Industries, Inc. e. Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. f. Naturalite Skylight Systems; Vistawall Group (The). g. Nystrom. h. O'Keeffe's Inc. Pate Company (The). B. Type and Size: Single -leaf lid, 30 by 36 inches. C. Loads: Minimum 40- Ibf /sq. ft. external live load and [20- Ibf /sq. ft. internal uplift load. D. Hatch Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.090 inch thick. 1. Finish: Clear anodic. E. Construction: 1. Insulation: Glass -fiber or polyisocyanurate board. 2. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid. 3. Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb. 4. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. F. Hardware: Stainless -steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle -type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside. G. Ladder - Assist Post: Roof -hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof - access ladder. ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Operation: Post locks in place on full extension: release mechanism returns post to closed position. 2. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck. 3. Material: Steel tube. 4. Post: 1 -5/8 -inch diameter pipe. 5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or powder coat. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks. 2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads. 3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates. 4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals. B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof accessories for waterproof performance. C. Roof -Hatch Installation: 1. Install roof hatch so top surface of hatch curb is level. 2. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating mechanism and hardware. 3. Attach safety railing system to roof -hatch curb. 4. Attach ladder- assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions. ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Clean off excess sealants. C. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 079200 — JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants for glazing assemblies. 2. Urethane joint sealants for concrete masonry construction 3. Latex joint sealants for acoustical treatments. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. 3. Section 093000 "Tiling" for sealing tile joints. 4. Section 095113 "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with acoustical sealants. 1.3 A. B. C. D. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each joint - sealant product indicated. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, with joint sealants in 1/2- inch -wide joints formed between two 6- inch -long matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. Joint - Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint - sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint - sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint - sealant formulation. 4. Joint - sealant color. of cured sealants provide Samples strips of material 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. C. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 1 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint - sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint - sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint - sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 2 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g /L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g /L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g /L. C. Liquid - Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid - applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stain - Test - Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. F. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS FOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Single- Component, Nonsag, Neutral- Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS AND PRIMERS A. Two - component, non -sag, Polyurethane -base material; applicable in horizontal, vertical, and overhead joints; principally a chemical cure to form and elastomeric substance; color introduced through a color -pak system. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Sikaflex 2c, as manufactured by Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey, is considered to conform to the requirements of this specification and has performed satisfactorily for joint sealing for a minimum of three years. 2. Sikaflex Primer 429, as manufactured by Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey, is considered to conform to the requirements of this specification and has performed satisfactorily for joint sealing for a minimum of fifty years. 3. Substitutions: The use of other than the specified products will be considered providing the Contractor requests its use in writing to the Architect. This request shall be accompanied by (a) A certificate of compliance from an approved independent testing laboratory that the proposed substitute product meets or exceeds the specified performance criteria, tested in accordance with the specified test standards; (b) Documented proof that the proposed substitute product has a fifteen year proven record of performance of joint sealing confirmed by actual field tests and five successful installations that the Architect can investigate. 2.4 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA FOR URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS AND PRIMERS A. Properties of the Mixed Polyurethane Sealant (Sika - flex -2c): 1. Pot Life: 3 -4 hours JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 3 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Initial Cure (Tack -Free Time): 6 -8 hours. 3. Consistency: Non - sag /self- leveling. 4. Color: 43 Architectural color standard via color pack system. Properties of the Cured Polyurethane Sealant (Sikaflex -2c): 1. Tensile Properties (ASTM D -412) at 14 days: a) Tensile Strength: 175 psi min. b) Elongation at Break: 650% min. c) Tensile Stress at 100% Elongation: Non -sag 75 psi, self - leveling 100 psi. 2. Hardness (ASTM D -2240) at 14 days (Shore A): a) Non -Sag: 30 max. b) Self- Leveling: 45 max. 3. Tear Strength (ASTM D -624) at 14 days — non -sag 75 Ibs /in, sel- leveling 100 Ibs /in. 4. Adhesion in Peel (TT- S- 00227E) at 21 days: a) Concrete: 20 Ib min. b) Aluminum: 25 Ib min. c) Glass: 25 Ib min. 5. Service Range: 40 to 170 F. 6. Conform to Specification TT- S- 0227E, Type I and II, Class A. 7. Conform to ASTM C -920, Type M, Grade P or NS. 8. Capable of + of the average joint width when tested in accordance with the durability bond test of Federal Specification TT- S- 0027E. 9. Non - staining. 10. Final Cure: 3 days max. C. Properties of the Uncured Primer (Sikaflex Primer 429): 1. Dry time prior to sealant installation: >1<8 hours 2. Consistency: Brush -, dauber- or spray - applied liquid. 3. Color: Clear. D. Properties of the Cured Primer (Sikaflex Primer 429): 1. Promotes adhesion to the following substrates: a) Cast -in -Place Concrete. b) Precast Concrete. c) Concrete Unit Masonry. d) Mortar. e) Grout. f) Brick. 2. Non - staining. 3. Service Range: 40 to 170 F. 4. The primer shall conform to Specification TT- S- 0227E, Type I and II, Class A. 5. The sealant shall conform to ASTM C -920, Type M, Grade P or NS. 6. Capable of being reapplied if necessary.. 7. Acceptable for use in joints which will be subjected to total water immersion. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 4 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.3 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed -cell material with a surface skin), Type 0 (open -cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint - sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond - Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint- filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. B. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint - sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 5 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form - release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint - sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint - sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond - breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 6 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. G. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. H. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound -rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 7 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 081113 — HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow -metal work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow -metal doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM- HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow -metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal -edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow -metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. Exterior Hollow -Metal Doors and Frames: A Miami -Dade Notice of Acceptance. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow -metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project -site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory- finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - Page 1 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Store hollow -metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4- inch -high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4 -inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of- Design Manufacturer: Allegion Company. Subject to compliance with requirements, comparable products by one of the following manufacturer's may be submitted for consideration: 1. Steelcraft — No Substitutions B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow -metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire - protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Smoke- and Draft- Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 2.3 INTERIOR HOLLOW -METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Hollow -Metal Doors and Frames: NAAMM -HMMA 860. 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: Graintech Doors — No Substitutions b. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inches. c. Face: Metallic- coated, cold - rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. d. Edge Construction: Continuously welded with no visible seam. e. Core: Steel- stiffened. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic- coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Factory Prime. 2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW -METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Basis -of- Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Steelcraft Series Flush Outswing Commercial Steel Doors w /wo Panic Exit Devices by Allegion. C. Hollow -Metal Doors and Frames: NAAMM -HMMA 860 at locations indicated on the drawings. 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - Page 2 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX a. Type: As indicated on the Drawings. b. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inches. c. Face: Metallic- coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 -inch, with minimum G60 or A60 coating. d. Edge Construction: Continuously welded with no visible seam. e. Core: Steel stiffened. 1) Thermal -Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal- resistance value (R- value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft. /Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic- coated steel sheet; minimum thickness of 0.067 -inch, with minimum G60 or A60 coating. b. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Factory Prime. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap- and - stirrup or T- shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip -on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In -Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8 -inch diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable -type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2 -inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Cold - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Power- Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow -metal frames of type indicated. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - Page 3 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. H. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame- spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. I. Bituminous Coating: Cold- applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow -metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. Hollow -Metal Doors: 1. Steel- Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full -door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral -fiber 2. Vertical Edges for Single- Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at manufacturer's discretion. 3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. 4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire - protection ratings indicated. 6. Exterior Doors: Provide weep -hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. C. Hollow -Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip -on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:. 1) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. b. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - Page 4 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 2) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 6. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal -stud partitions. 7. Door Silencers: Except on weather - stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single -Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double -Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. 8. Terminated Stops: Terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a 45- degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded -steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot - rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow -metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface- mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow -metal work for hardware. F Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow - metal work. 2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 3. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow -metal work. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast - curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field- applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not Tess than 0.016 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - Page 5 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built -in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface - mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow -metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow -Metal Frames: Install hollow -metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM -HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. b. At fire -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power- actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral -fiber insulation. 5. In -Place Concrete Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow -metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - Page 6 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow -Metal Doors: Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non - Fire -Rated Steel Doors: a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. c. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. 2. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow -metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow -metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air - drying, rust - inhibitive primer. D. Metallic- Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Factory- Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - Page 7 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 081116 — ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 Section Includes: A. Aluminum Flush Doors. B. Aluminum Door Frames. 1.2 Related Sections A. Section 042000 — Unit Masonry (frame installation). B. Section 079000 — Joint Sealers. C. Section 087100 — Door Hardware. 1.3 References A. Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA). 1. AA 5005 -H14 — Sheet Architectural. 2. AA 6061 -T6 — Heavy Duty Structures. 3. AA 6063 -T5 — Extrusions, Pipe, Architectural. 4. AA DAF -45 — Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA). 1. AAMA 609 — Anodized Architectural Finishes Cleaning and Maintenance. 2. AAMA 611 -98 — Anodized Architectural Standards. 3. AAMA 701 — Pile Weather Strip. C. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). 1. A 123 — Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings. 2. C 728 -97 — Insulation Board, Mineral Aggregate. 3. E 330 -97e1— Structural Performance of Exterior Doors. 1.4 Testing and Performance Requirements A. Structural Test Unit: Minimum size of 3 -feet by 7 -feet shall be evaluated compliant with ASTM E 330 testing method. B. Test Procedures and Performances: 1. With door closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 330 at static air pressure dif- ference of 90.0 pounds per square foot positive pressure and 90.0 pounds per square foot nega- tive pressure with 155 miles per hour wind load. 2. At conclusion of test there shall be no permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms or actuating mechanism, nor any other damage that would cause the door to be inoperable. 1.5 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Section 013000. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for each type door and frame: include the following information: 1. Fabrication methods. ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS AND FRAMES 081116 - Page 1 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Finishing. 3. Hardware preparation. 4. Accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following: 1. Elevations and details of each door and frame type. 2. Schedule of doors and frames. 3. Conditions at openings with various wall thicknesses and materials. 4. Location and installation requirements for hardware. 5. Thicknesses of materials, joints. 6. Connections and trim. D. Samples: Two sets of color chips representing specified colors and finishes. E. Verification Samples: 1. Submit samples of each type, consisting of aluminum door corner construction, minimum 6- inch by 6 -inch legs. 2. Where color or texture variations are anticipated, such as anodized finishes, include two or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of variations. F. Hardware Templates: Provide finish hardware mounting details. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Printed installation instructions for each product, including product storage requirements. H. Operations and Maintenance Data: Printed instructions for each product. 1.6 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum door and frame systems of the type required for this project, with minimum ten continuous years documented expe- rience. B. Product Qualifications: Wind -load test certification conforming to ASTM E 330 on samples of pre- vious products shall be provided for the type of door to be used. C. Installer's Qualifications: Workmen skilled in handling aluminum door and frame systems of the type required for this project. D. Instruction: The manufacturer or his representative will be available for consultation to all parties engaged in the project, including instruction to installation personnel. 1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Deliver doors and frames palleted, wrapped or individually crated. Doors shall be side protected with surrounding grooved 2 -inch by 4 -inch wood frame and covered with 275 -pound test corrugated cardboard. B. Inspect delivered doors and frames for damage; unload and store with minimum handling. Repair minor damage if refinished items are equal in all respects to new work; otherwise, remove damaged items and replace with new. C. Store products of this section under cover in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installa- tion. 1. Place units on minimum 4 -inch wood blocking. 2. Avoid non - vented plastic or canvas covers. 3. Remove packaging immediately if packaging becomes wet. 4. Provide 0.25 -inch air spaces between stacked doors. ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS AND FRAMES 081116 - Page 2 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.8 Project Conditions A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements of areas to receive aluminum frames; note dis- crepancies on submitted shop drawings. 1.9 Scheduling A. Ensure that all approvals and /or shop drawings are supplied or returned to the manufacturer in time for fabrication without affecting construction progress schedule. B. Ensure that templates and /or actual hardware requested by manufacturer are available in time for fabrication without affecting construction progress schedule. 1.10 Warranty A. Manufacturer: Ten -year warranty against defects in workmanship and materials, including warp- ing, rotting, decaying or bowing. B. Installer: Warrant installation procedures and performance for five years against defects due to workmanship and materials handling. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers A. Basis -of- Design Manufacturer: Model: Series 100BE Cline Aluminum Doors, Inc. 112 — 32nd Avenue West, Bradenton, Florida 34205 -8907 Telephone: (800) 648 -6736, (941) 746 -4104, Fax: (941) 746 -5153 Website: www.clinedoors.com, Email: inquire @clinedoors.com B. Requests for substitution will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 016000. 2.2 Components A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion re- sistance, and application of required finish. B. Aluminum Door Components: Minimum 5 -ply composite laminated construction to include: 1. Facing: One -piece 0.040 -inch smooth 5005 -H14 stretcher - leveled aluminum alloy. 2. Substrate: One -piece oil- tempered hardboard backer. 3. Core: Organic materials shall be used to form a marine grade honeycomb core with high com- pression strength of 94.8 psi (ASTM C365), and internal aluminum hardware backup tube. 4. Hardware Backup: The hardware backup tube shall be a minimum of 4.25- inches in width, 1.375- inches in depth with a wall thickness of 0.0125- inches. Contiguous for the full perimeter of the door to allow for all specified and non - specified hardware reinforcement. 5. Hardware Prep: Basic to include mortise lock edge prep or cylindrical lock prep; and pairs prepped for flush bolts, if required. 6. Bonding Agent: Environmentally friendly adhesive with strength buildup of 350 pounds per square inch. 7. Perimeter Door Trim: Wall thickness of 0.050 -inch minimum in 6063 -T5 extruded aluminum al- loy with special beveled edge cap design and integral weather stripping on lock stile. 8. Replaceable Door Trim: Mechanically fastened to the hardware backup tube, allowing for re- placement in the field, if damaged. 9. Trim Finish: To have minimum of a Class I anodized finish. 10. Weather stripping: Replaceable wool pile with nylon fabric, polypropylene backing meeting ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS AND FRAMES 081116 - Page 3 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX AAMA 701 standards. Applied weather stripping is not acceptable. 11. Materials: Only nonferrous, non - rusting members shall be acceptable, including tie rods, screws and reinforcement plates. 12. Regulations: All components and agents to meet EPA standards. C. Aluminum Frames: 1. Frame Components: Extruded channel 6063 -T5 aluminum alloy, minimum wall thickness 0.125 -inch; cut corners square and joinery shall be mechanical with no exposed fasteners. 2. Profile: Open Back with Applied Stop (OBS), 1.75 -inch by 6 -inch. 3. Hinge and Strike Mounting Plates: Extruded aluminum alloy bar stock, 0.1875 -inch thick mounted in a concealed integral channel with no exposed fasteners. 4. Replaceable Weather stripping: AAMA 701, wool pile with nylon fabric, polypropylene backing, at head and jambs. 5. Door Stop: No screw -on stops acceptable. 2.3 Finish A. Finish: Clear anodic coating; AA- M12C22A31 Class 11 mechanical finish, non - specular, with chem- ical medium -matte etch, minimum thickness 0.4 -mil. 2.4 Fabrication A. General: Receive hardware if required by manufacturer. B. Aluminum Flush Door Construction: Of type, size and design indicated: 1. Minimum Thickness: 1.75- inches, 5 -ply composite laminate system. 2. Door Size: Sizes shown are nominal; provide standard clearances as follows: a. Hinge and Lock Stiles: 0.125 -inch. b. Between Meeting Stiles: 0.25 -inch. c. At Top Rails: 0.125 -inch. d. Between Door Bottom and Threshold: 0.125 -inch. 2.5 Accessories A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other material warranted by manufacturer as non - corrosive and compatible with aluminum components. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high- strength aluminum units where feasible, oth- erwise, nonferrous stainless steel. C. Bituminous Coating: Cold- applied asphaltic mastic, compounded for 30 -mil thickness per coat. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Verify that wall surfaces and openings are ready to receive frames and are within tolerances specified in manufacturer's instructions. B. Verify that frames installed by other trades for installation of doors of this section are in strict ac- cordance with recommendations and approved shop drawings and within tolerances specified in manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 Preparation A. Perform cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of frames as required for project conditions; ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS AND FRAMES 081116 - Page 4 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX do not damage sight- exposed finishes. B. Separate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action between metals. 3.3 Installation A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings; set frames plumb, square, level, and aligned to receive doors. B. Anchor frames to adjacent construction in strict accordance with recommendations and approved shop drawings and within tolerances specified in manufacturer's instructions. 1. Seal metal -to -metal joints between framing members using good quality elastomeric sealant. C. Where aluminum surfaces contact with metals other than stainless steel, zinc or small areas of white bronze, protect from direct contact by one or more of the following methods. 1. Paint dissimilar metal with one coat of heavy- bodied bituminous paint. 2. Apply good quality elastomeric sealant between aluminum and dissimilar metal. 3. Paint dissimilar metal with one coat of primer and one coat of paint recommended for alumi- num surface applications. 4. Use non - absorptive tape or gasket in permanently dry locations. D. Hang doors with required clearances as follows: 1. Hinge and Lock Stiles: 0.125 inch. 2. Between Meeting Stiles: 0.250 inch. 3. At Top Rails: 0.125 inch. 4. Between Door Bottom and Threshold: 0.125 inch. E. Adjust doors and hardware to operate properly. F. Install hardware for doors of this section. G. Installation of door hardware is specified in Section 087100. 3.4 Cleaning A. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean door and frame surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609. B. Do not use abrasive, caustic or acid cleaning agents. 3.5 Protection A. Protect products of this section from damage caused by subsequent construction until substantial completion. B. Repair damaged or defective products to original specified condition in accordance with manufac- turer's recommendations. C. Replace damaged or defective products that cannot be repaired to Architect's acceptance. END OF SECTION 081116 ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS AND FRAMES 081116 - Page 5 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes solid -core doors as follows: 1. Doors with wood - veneer faces with or without factory finishing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details; location and extent of hardware blocking; mortises, holes, and cutouts; requirements for veneer matching; fire ratings; and other pertinent data. C. Samples: For each face material and finish. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated. B. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Doors that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 2. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. 3. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 4. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Veneer for Doors Scheduled for Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces) 2. Species and Cut: Select White maple, rotary cut or plain sliced 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match. 4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center balance 5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. B. Interior Veneer -Faced Solid -Core Doors: 1. Core: Particleboard. 2. Construction: Three plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before faces are applied. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Fire -Rated Doors: 1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or manufacturer's standard mineral -core construction as needed to provide fire rating indicated. 2. Edge Construction: Manufacturer's standard laminated -edge construction with improved screw - holding capability and split resistance. D. Provide doors with either glued -block or structural composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores at locations where exit devices are indicated. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project -site fitting. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory finish doors. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: WDMA TR -4 conversion varnish or WDMA TR -6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 4. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. B. Job - Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces and the top and bottom and sides after fitting and machining. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors. END OF SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 083333 - OVERHEAD SECURITY GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Upcoiling Security Grilles, power operated. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for grilles, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories 3. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 5. Installation methods. 6. Include description of automatic closing device and testing and resetting instructions. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies, and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure. 4. For exterior components, include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction. 5. Show locations of controls, locking devices, and other accessories. 6. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and textures available for units with factory - applied finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each finish product specified, two samples, representing actual product, color, and patterns. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. OVERHEAD SECURITY GRILLES 083333 - Page 1 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads. 1. Design Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Operability under Wind Load: Design overhead coiling doors to remain operable under design wind load, acting inward and outward. 2.3 DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Overhead Coiling Aluminum Grilles: Basis of Design - Overhead Door Corporation Model 670 with an Automatic Release for power operated doors. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Overhead Door Corp. b. Clopay Building Products. c. Cookson Company. d. Cornell, Inc. B. Curtain: Horizontal 5/16 inch (7.8 mm) diameter rods with network of vertically interlocking links to form a pattern. Bottom bar extruded aluminum tubular shape. C. Door Curtain Material: Aluminum. D. Vertical Rod Spacing: 1. 2 inches (51 mm) on center. E. Pattern: 1. Straight lattice; horizontal spacing 3 inches (76 mm) on center. F. Bottom Bar: 1. Tubular extruded aluminum, clear anodized. G. Guides: 1. Extruded aluminum shapes with retainer grooves and continuous silicone treated wool -pile strips or PVC inserts to reduce noise and assist operation. 2. Guides face mounted on adjacent construction. H. Brackets: Minimum 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) steel to support barrel, counterbalance and hood as applicable. I. Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel, supporting the curtain with maximum deflection of 0.03 inches per foot of span. Counterbalance adjustable by means of an adjusting tension wheel. J. Hood: 1. Aluminum, clear anodized with intermediate supports as required. 2. Mounting: As shown on Drawings. K. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly. 1. Locking Device Assembly: Cremone type, both jamb sides locking bars, operable from inside and outside with cylinders. L. Electric Door Operator: Electric Motor with Emergency Egress: Provide code compliant emergency egress operator system with self - locking mechanism that automatically unlocks, automatically releases, and opens grille fully to permit passage if power is not available. Provide OVERHEAD SECURITY GRILLES 083333 - Page 2 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX UL listed electric operator, size as recommended by manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot nor more than 1 foot per second. 1. 1/2 horsepower single phase. a. 115 V 2. Mounting: a. Front of hood. 3. Release: Push /Pull Emergency Release Button. a. Flush mount. 4. Entrapment Protection: a. 2 wire electric sensing edge b. Photo cell operation. 5. Control accessories: Control Panel is to be supplied at same voltage as operator selected. 6. Locking: Model 670 egress grille self - locking mechanism to prevent forced opening of a closed grille that does not interfere with normal electric operation but fail safe for emergency operation. M. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with push /pull handles and automatic closing device. N. Door Finish: 1. Powder- Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color full range. 2.4 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.5 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling -door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc - coated (galvanized), cold - rolled structural steel sheet; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90 zinc coating; nominal sheet thickness (coated) of 0.028 inch; and as required. B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain, and a continuous bar for holding windlocks. 2.6 HOODS A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface- mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between -jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 1. Galvanized Steel: Nominal 0.028 -inch- thick, hot -dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M. OVERHEAD SECURITY GRILLES 083333 - Page 3 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.7 LOCKING DEVICES A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring - loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks. 1. Lock Cylinders: Cylinders specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware" and keyed to building keying system. 2. Keys: Three for each cylinder. B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power- operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked. 2.8 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES A. Push /Pull Handles: Equip each push -up- operated or emergency- operated door with lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door. 2.9 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable- tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease - sealed bearings or self- lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot - formed, structural - quality, seamless carbon -steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled -up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in. /ft. of span under full load. C. Counterbalance Spring: One or more oil- tempered, heat - treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast -steel barrel plugs. D. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold - rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. E. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold - rolled steel plate. 2.10 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation - cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory - prewired motor controls, starter, gear- reduction unit, solenoid- operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Door Operator Location(s): Operator location indicated for each door. 1. Wall Mounted: Operator is mounted to the inside front wall on the left or right side of door and connected to door drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Side room is required for this type of mounting. Wall mounted operator can also be mounted above or below shaft; if above shaft, headroom is required. D. Motors: Reversible -type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated. 1. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in. /sec. and not more than 12 in. /sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 2. Operating Controls, Controllers, Disconnect Switches, Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. OVERHEAD SECURITY GRILLES 083333 - Page 4 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed. E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. F. Obstruction Detection Devices: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non - fire -rated doors, activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction. a. Self- Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self- monitoring feature is activated, door closes only with sustained or constant pressure on close button. G. Control Station: Three - button control station in fixed location with momentary- contact push- button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant - pressure push- button control labeled "Close." 1. Interior - Mounted Units: Full- guarded, surface- mounted, heavy -duty type, with general - purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. H. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 Ibf. I. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand - operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. J. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit- switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. K. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. 2.11 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM /NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500 -06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.12 STEEL AND GALVANIZED -STEEL FINISHES A. Baked - Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. B. Examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to be performed. OVERHEAD SECURITY GRILLES 083333 - Page 5 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. E. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 16150. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components. F. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Section 07900. G. Install perimeter trim and closures. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Test security grilles for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without binding or distortion. B. Adjust hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean curtain and components using non - abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. B. Remove labels and visible markings. C. Touch -up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. END OF SECTION 083333 OVERHEAD SECURITY GRILLES 083333 - Page 6 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 084113 — ALUMINUM - FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Exterior storefront framing. 2. Exterior manual -swing entrance doors and door -frame units. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum- framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units. B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum- framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to [edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing liter to 3/4 inch, whichever is Tess. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. E. Structural -Test Performance: Provide aluminum- framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. ALUMINUM- FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - Page 1 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds. F. Windborne- Debris - Impact- Resistance Performance: Provide aluminum- framed systems that pass missile- impact and cyclic - pressure tests when tested according to [ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 or AAMA 506. 1. Large - Missile Impact: For aluminum- framed systems located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small - Missile Impact: For aluminum- framed systems located more than 30 feet above grade. G. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum- framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm /sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static - air - pressure difference of 1.57 Ibf /sq. ft.. H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum- framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static - air - pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 Ibf /sq. ft.. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum- framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Interior Ambient -Air Temperature: 75 deg F. J. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum- framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation - resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45 when tested according to AAMA 1503. K. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum- framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U- factor of not more than 0.57 Btu /sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each system indicated. B. Substitutions: Whenever substitute products are to be considered, supporting technical data, samples and test reports must be submitted ten (10) working days prior to bid date in order to make valid comparison. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation and attachments to other Work. 1. Prepare data based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. 2. For entrance systems, include hardware schedule and locations. 3. Provide drawings sealed by an Engineer licensed by the authority having jurisdiction. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color required. E. Closeout Submittals:: 1. Warranty: Submit warranty documents specified herein. 2. Project Record Documents: Submit project record documents for installed materials in accordance with Division 1 Project Closeout (Project Record Documents) Section. ALUMINUM - FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - Page 2 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For aluminum- framed systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. C. Welding certificates. D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For sealant. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum- framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements. 1. Miami -Dade Notice of Acceptance. F. Source quality - control reports. G. Field quality - control reports. H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum- framed systems to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated. C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum- framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in- service performance. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC /ANSI A117.1. F. Source Limitations for Aluminum- Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. G. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." ALUMINUM - FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - Page 3 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum- framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace systems that fail in materials and workmanship within five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Failure of operating components to function normally. 5. Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERIOR STOREFRONT FRAMING A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide YHS 50 FS Flush Glazed Aluminum Storefront System by YKK AP, or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer Company, Inc. 2.2 EXTERIOR MANUAL -SWING ENTRANCE DOORS AND DOOR -FRAME UNITS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Aluminum Storefront Doors by YKK AP, or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer Company, Inc. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003 -H14 Aluminum Alloy, 0.080" (1.95 mm) minimum thickness. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc -rich, corrosion- resistant primer, complying with SSPC -PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC- SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold - Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot - Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 2.5 ACCESSORIES ALUMINUM- FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - Page 4 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX A. Manufacturer's Standard Accessories: 1. Fasteners: Zinc plated steel concealed fasteners; Hardened aluminum alloys or AISI 300 series stainless steel exposed fasteners. 2. Glazing: Setting blocks, edge blocks, and spacers in accordance with ASTM C 864, shore durometer hardness as recommended by manufacturer, Glazing gaskets in accordance with ASTM 864. 3. 0.050 Aluminum Sill Flashing End Dams featuring 3 point attachment. 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS (Specified in Other Sections) A. Glass: Refer to Division 8 Glazing Section for glass materials. B. Hardware: refer to Division 8 Door Hardware. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate and assemble units with joints only at intersection of aluminum members with uniform hairline joints; rigidly secure, and sealed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Hardware: Drill and cut template for hardware. Reinforce frames and door stiles to receive hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Electronically Controlled and Monitored Doors and Entrances: Fabricate and assemble frames to allow installation of electronic wiring and equipment where required. See Drawings and Section 087100, Door Hardware. 3. Welding: Conceal welds on aluminum members in accordance with AWS recommendations or methods recommended by manufacturer. Members showing welding bloom or discoloration on finish or material distortion will be rejected. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA- M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1. Basis -of- Design Finish: YKK Clear Anodized PLUS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Isolate metal surfaces in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer. B. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. C. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing." 1. Mechanically fasten glazing in place until structural sealant is cured. 2. Install secondary sealant (weatherseal) to produce weatherproof joints. 3. Remove excess sealant before sealant has cured. D. Install sealants at system perimeter to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Install framing components true in alignment with established lines and grades to the following tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Limit to 1/8 inch in 12 feet over total length. 2. Alignment: For surfaces abutting in line, limit offset to 1/16 inch. For surfaces meeting at corners, limit offset to 1/32 inch. ALUMINUM - FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - Page 5 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. F. Install doors without warp or rack. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and smooth operation. G. Bed windowsill and door thresholds in a full bed of sealant. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Water Spray Test: After completing installation of each area, test system for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2. 1. Repair or remove and replace Work that fails or is damaged by testing; repair or replace to comply with requirements. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjusting: Adjust swing doors for operation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Cleaning: The General Contractor shall clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to Owner's acceptance, and remove construction debris from project site. Legally dispose of debris. C. Protection: The General Contractor shall protect the installed product's finish surfaces from damage during construction. END OF SECTION 084113 ALUMINUM- FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - Page 6 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 084413 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes aluminum curtain wall systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 084113 "Aluminum- Framed Entrances and Storefronts ". 2. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass and glazing requirements. 1.3 ALLOWANCES A. Preconstruction laboratory mockup, Source quality - control and field quality - control testing is part of testing and inspecting allowance. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For glazed aluminum curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections, full -size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full -size isometric details of each vertical -to- horizontal intersection of glazed aluminum curtain walls, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. 3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory - applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical -to- horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12- inch lengths of full -size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. F Delegated- Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 - Page 1 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and field testing agency. B. Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and components from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC - certified energy performance values for each glazed aluminum curtain wall. C. Product Test Reports: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. D. Quality - Control Program: Developed specifically for Project, including fabrication and installation, according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. Include periodic quality - control reports. E. Source quality - control reports. F. Field quality - control reports. G. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For glazed aluminum curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals. B. Maintenance Data for Structural Sealant: For structural - sealant - glazed curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals. Include ASTM C 1401 recommendations for post - installation -phase quality - control program. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated and accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO /IEC 17025. C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D. Structural - Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of curtain wall assemblies. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to "Conditions of the Contract" for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by an authorized company official. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's one (1) year standard warranty commencing on the substantial date of completion for the project provided that the warranty, in no event, start later than six (6) months from the date of shipment by the manufacturer. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 - Page 2 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazed aluminum curtain walls. B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long -term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind -load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind -load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not Tess than 10 seconds. F Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows: 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area: a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm /sq. ft. at a static - air - pressure differential of 6.24 Ibf /sq. ft. G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static - air - pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 15 Ibf /sq. ft. H. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U- factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U- factor of not more than 0.42 Btu /sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100. 2. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC - certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 72 as determined according to NFRC 500. Noise Reduction: Test according to ASTM E 90, with ratings determined by ASTM E 1332, as follows: GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 - Page 3 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum 37. 2. Outdoor - Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 32. J. Windborne- Debris Impact Resistance: Pass missile- impact and cyclic - pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 4. 1. Large - Missile Test: For glazed openings located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small- Missile Test: For glazed openings located more than 30 feet above grade. K. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. L. Structural - Sealant Joints: 1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing. 2. Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than 20 psi. M. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural - sealant- glazed curtain walls without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure. 1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind. 2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate because sealant -to- substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of- Desiqn Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide YCW 750 OG (Outside Glazed) Insulating, Impact- Resistant Aluminum Curtain Wall System by YKK AP America, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer North America. 3. Oldcastle, Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of curtain wall system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer. 2.3 FRAMING A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed - aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Front. 4. Finish: Clear anodic finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Either factory- or field- fabricated system. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high- strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Materials: 1. Aluminum: AIIoy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. a. Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063 -T5. b. Aluminum Sheet Anodized Finish ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 5005 -H14 Aluminum AIIoy, 0.050" minimum thickness. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 - Page 4 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturer's Standard Accessories: 1. Fasteners: Zinc plated steel concealed fasteners; Hardened aluminum alloys or AISI 300 series stainless steel fasteners. Joint fasteners may be concealed. 2. Sealant: Non - skinning type, AAMA 803.3. 3. Glazing: Setting blocks, edge blocks, and spacers in accordance with ASTM C 864, shore durometer hardness as recommended by manufacturer; exterior glazing silicone compatible EPDM gaskets, in accordance with ASTM C 864, designed to lock into gasket reglet, interior by means of silicone spacer and structural silicone adhesive. 4. Glazing Adhesive Basis -of- Design: Dow Corning 995 Structural Silicone. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate and assemble units with joints only at intersection of aluminum members with uniform hairline joints; rigidly secure, and sealed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Hardware: Drill and cut template for hardware. Reinforce frames and door stiles to receive hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Electronically Controlled and Monitored Entrances: Fabricate and assemble frames to allow installation of electronic wiring and equipment where required. See Drawings and Section 087100, Door Hardware. 3. Welding: Conceal welds on aluminum members in accordance with AWS recommendations or methods recommended by manufacturer. Members showing welding bloom or discoloration on finish or material distortion will be rejected. B. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 612, AA- 6063 -T5, Class I, or thicker. 1. Basis -of- Design Finish: YSIN Clear Anodized Plus by YKK AP America. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality - control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures, sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 - Page 5 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install manufacturer's system in accordance with shop drawings, and within specified tolerances. 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding. 7. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum is in contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior. D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather - stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation. F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." 1. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. G. Install weatherseal sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch. c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch. 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon request, provide manufacturer's field service consisting of site visit for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 - Page 6 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Test Area: Perform tests on representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain walls. D. Field Quality - Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain walls. Conduct test in accordance with AAMA 501.2. E. Structural - Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," Appendix X2. 1. Test a minimum of two areas on each building facade. 2. Repair installation areas damaged by testing. F. Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 - Page 7 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 087100 — DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work in this section shall include furnishing of all items of finish hardware as hereinafter spec- ified or obviously necessary to complete the building, except those items that are specifically ex- cluded from this section of the specification. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames B. Aluminum Doors and Frames C. Wood Doors and Frames 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish labor and material to complete hardware work indicated, as specified herein, or as may be required by actual conditions at building. B. Include all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, other devices, if necessary, as required for proper hardware application. The hardware supplier shall assume all responsibility for correct quantities. C. All hardware shall meet the requirements of Federal, State and Local codes having jurisdiction over this project, notwithstanding any real or apparent conflict therewith in these specifications. D. Fire -Rated Openings: 1. Provide hardware for fire -rated openings in compliance with A.I.A. (NBFU) Pamphlet No. 80, NFPA Standards NO. 101, UBC 702 and UL10C. This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for the types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame labels. 2. Where panic exit devices are required on fire -rated doors, provide supplementary marking on door UL label indicating Fire Door to be equipped with fire exit hardware and provide UL label on exit device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware ". E. Fasteners: 1. Hardware as furnished shall conform to published templates generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish each item complete with all screws required for installation. Typically, all exposed screws installation. 3. Insofar as practical, furnished concealed type fasteners for hardware units which have ex- posed screws shall be furnished with Phillips flat heads screws, finished to match adjacent hardware. 4. Door closers and exit devices to be installed on wood or composite fire doors shall be at- tached with closed head through bolts (sex bolts). F. Florida Building Code (Latest edition) 1. Provide Miami -Dade Notice of Authorization (NOA) if required by authority having jurisdiction require. 2. Engineering Reports that opening meet requirement for wind load, water infiltration and im- pact as required in FBC DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - Page 1 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170303 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The supplier to be a directly franchised distributor of the products to be furnished and have in their employ an AHC (Architectural Hardware Consultant). This person is to be available for con- sultation to the architect, owner and the general contractor at reasonable times during the course of work. B. The finish hardware supplier shall prepare and submit to the architect six (6) copies of a complete schedule identifying each door and each set number, following the numbering system and not creating any separate system himself. He shall submit the schedule for review, make corrections as directed and resubmit the corrected schedule for final approval. Approval of schedule will not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing all necessary hardware, including the re- sponsibility for furnishing correct quantities. C. No manufacturing orders shall be placed until detailed schedule has been submitted to the archi- tect and written approval received. D. After hardware schedule has been approved, furnish templates required by manufacturing con- tractors for making proper provisions in their work for accurate fitting, finishing hardware setting. Furnish templates in ample time to facilitate progress of work. E. Hardware supplier shall have an office and warehouse facilities to accommodate the materials used on this project. The supplier must be an authorized distributor of the products specified. F. The hardware manufactures are to supply both a pre - installation class as well as a post - installation walk -thru. This is to insure proper installation and provide for any adjustments or re- placements of hardware as required. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Wrap, protect finishing hardware items for shipment. Deliver to manufacturing contractors hard- ware items required by them for their application; deliver balance of hardware to job; store in des- ignated location. Each item shall be clearly marked with its intended location. 1.06 WARRANTY A. The material furnished shall be warranted for one year after installation or longer as the individual manufacturer's warranty permits. B. Overhead door closers shall be warranted in writing, by the manufacturer, against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years commencing on the Date of Final Completion and Acceptance, and in the event of failure, the manufacture is to promptly re- pair or replace the defective with no additional cost to the Owner. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. To the greatest extent possible, obtain each kind of hardware from one manufacturer only. B. All numbers and symbols used herein have been taken from the current catalogues of the follow- ing manufacturers. PRODUCT 1) Hinges 2) Locks & Latches 3) Cylinders, Keys, Keying 4) Exit Devices ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER Ives Schlage Lock BEST Von Duprin ACCEPTABLE SUBSTITUTE Hager, Stanley None None None DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - Page 2 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170303 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 5) Door Closers LCN None 6) OH Stops /Holders Glynn Johnson Rixson 7) Wall Stops /Floor Ives Rockwood, Hager Stops, Flushbolts 8) Kick Plates Ives Rockwood, Hager 9) Threshold/ Weather -strip Zero National Guard, Pemko 10) Silencers Ives Rockwood, Hager 11) Key Cabinet Lund Key Control C. If material manufactured by other than that specified or listed herewith as an equal, is to be bid upon, permission must be requested from the architect seven (7) days prior to bidding. If substi- tution is allowed, it will be so noted by addendum. 2.02 FINISH OF HARDWARE: A. Exterior Hinges to be Stainless Steel (32D) and Interior hinges to be Satin Chrome (26D) Door Closers to be Aluminum, Locks to be Satin Chrome (26D). Exit Devices to be Satin Chrome (26D). Overhead Holders to be Satin Chrome (26D), Stainless Steel (32D) and the Thresholds to be Mill Finish Aluminum. 2.03 HINGES AND PIVOTS: A. Exterior butts Continuous Hinges B. Interior butts shall be Continuous Hinges. 2.04 KEYING: A. Locks shall be Schlage Lock Company. B. Cylinders shall be Schlage Everest 29 SFIC R125 Restricted Keyway, Structure Number KS20578. 1. Coordinate keying requirements with City of Clearwater and Tom Wojtkiw Building and Maintenance Supervisor. C. Provide Two (2) each change keys per lock and Six (6) each construction master keys. 2.05 LOCKSETS: A. Locksets shall be Heavy Duty Cylindrical type, unless specified otherwise, in "CO200" series, lev- er design as manufactured by Schlage Lock. 1. Acceptable substitutions: a. None 2.06 EXIT DEVICES: A. All devices shall be Von Duprin 98 Series in types and functions specified. All devices must be listed under "Panic Hardware" in accident equipment list of Underwriters Laboratories. All labeled doors with "Fire Exit Hardware" must have labels attached and be in strict accordance with Un- derwriters Laboratories. B. All exit devices shall be tested to ANSI /BHMA A156.3 test requirements by a BHMA certified test- ing laboratory. C. All surface strikes shall be roller type and come complete with a plate underneath to prevent movement. And shall be provided with a dead - latching feature to prevent latch bolt tampering. 1. Acceptable Substitutions: a. None DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - Page 3 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170303 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.07 DOOR CLOSERS: A. All closers shall be LCN 4000 series with slim cover having non - ferrous covers, steel arms sepa- rate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arm mounted on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Furnish with non -hold open arms unless otherwise indicated. B. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast construction to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSI /BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. C. Door closers shall utilize temperature stable fluid capable of withstanding temperature ranges of 120 degrees Fahrenheit to -30 degrees Fahrenheit, without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire -rated doors shall be provided with tem- perature stabilizing fluid that complies with the standards UBC 7 -2 (1997) and UL 100. D. Door closers shall incorporate tamper resistant non - critical screw valves of V -slot design to re- duce possible clogging from particles within the closer. Closers shall have separate and inde- pendent screw valve adjustments for latch speed, general speed, and hydraulic backcheck. Backcheck shall be properly located so as to effectively slow the swing of the door at a minimum of 10 degrees in advance of the dead stop location to protect the door frame and hardware from damage. Pressure relief valves (PRV) are not acceptable. 1. Acceptable Substitutions: a. None 2.08 TRIM AND PLATES: A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be .050 gauge with 32D finish. Kick plates to be 10" high, mop plates to be 4" high. All plates shall be two (2) inches less full width of door. B. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown in the hardware schedule. 2.09 DOOR STOPS: A. Door stops shall be furnished for all door to prevent damage to doors or hardware from striking adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall bumpers equal to Ives WS407 Series are preferred, but where not practical furnish floor stops equal to Ives FS436 or FS438 series. Where conditions prohibit the use of either wall or floor type stops, furnish surface mounted overhead stops equal to Glynn Johnson, 450 Series. 2.10 THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIP: A. Thresholds and weatherstrip shall be as listed in the hardware schedule. 2.11 DOOR SILENCERS: A. Furnish rubber door silencers equal to Ives SR64 for all new interior hollow metal frames, (2) per pair and (3) per single door frame. PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with the Finish Hardware schedule. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - Page 4 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170303 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Contractor to provide a secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after in- stallation. C. No hardware is to be installed until the hardware manufactures have provided a pre - installation class. This is to insure proper installation of the specified products. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Contractor shall adjust all hardware in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Prior to turning project to owner, contractor shall clean and make any final adjustments to the finish hard- ware. 3.03 PROTECTION: A. Contractor shall protect hardware as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. B. Contractor shall protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. 3.04 KEY CABINET: A. Set up and index one (1) Key Cabinet that allows room for expansion for 150% of the number of keys for the project. 3.05 HARDWARE SCHEDULE: A. The following schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the contractor; do not consider it as entirely inclusive. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled hardware group, provide door or item with hardware same as required for similar purposes. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors; or for each single door. B. This hardware schedule prepared by: Mark # HWSet # 101A 01 101B 01 101C 13 101D 13 103 11 104A 03 104B 07 105A 03 105B 01A 106 02 107A 08 107B 05 108A 10 109 12 DOOR HARDWARE Door /Hardware Index Mark # HWSet # 110 12 111A 10 112 09 113A 04 113B 04 113C 02 113D 02 114 11 115A 09 115B 09 116 08 117 06 087100 - Page 5 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170303 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Door /Hardware Groups Hardware Group No. 01 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Qty 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA Description CONT. HINGE CONT. HINGE POWER TRANSFER PANIC HARDWARE ELEC PANIC HARDWARE ELEC EXIT DEVICE TRIM SFIC EVEREST CORE SURFACE CLOSER SURF. AUTO OPERATOR CUSH SHOE SUPPORT BLADE STOP SPACER ACTUATOR PKG WALL MT THRESHOLD WIRE HARNESS WIRE HARNESS POWER SUPPLY Balance of Door Hardware to be supplied Opening to comply with FBC Access Control by Electronic Trim, Power Hardware Group No. 01A Catalog Number 224HD 224HD EPT EPT10 CON HH- 9847 -EO -SNB Q E L + -H H- 9847 -E O- SNB -CO N CO-200-993R-70-PR-RHO-BD 80 -037 4040XP CUSH 9542 HL /D MS 4040 -30 4040 -61 8310- 3860TW 65A- MSLA -10 CON -12 CON -192 PS902 900 -2RS by Aluminum supplier Operator on Active door Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Qty Description 2 EA CONT. HINGE 2 EA PANIC HARDWARE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 2 EA CUSH SHOE SUPPORT 2 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 1 EA THRESHOLD Catalog Number 224HD HH- 9847 -EO -SNB 4040XP CUSH 4040 -30 4040 -61 65A - MSLA -10 Balance of Door Hardware to be supplied by Aluminum supplier Hardware Group No. 02 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description 1 EA CONT. HINGE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 1 EA ELEC EXIT DEVICE TRIM 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80 -037 Catalog Number 224HD HH- 9847 -E O -S N B CO-200-993R-70-PR-RHO-BD Finish Mfr 628 IVE 628 IVE 689 VON 626 VON 626 VON 626 SCE 626 SCH 689 LCN ANCLR LCN 689 LCN 689 LCN 630 LCN A ZER VON VON LGR VON Finish Mfr 628 IVE 626 VON 689 LCN 689 LCN 689 LCN A ZER Finish Mfr 628 IVE 626 VON 626 SCE 626 SCH DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - Page 6 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170303 • • • 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH CUSH SHOE SUPPORT 4040 -30 BLADE STOP SPACER 4040 -61 THRESHOLD 65A- MSLA -10 Balance of Door Hardware to be supplied by Aluminum supplier Opening to comply with FBC Access Control by Electronic Trim Hardware Group No. 03 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 2 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 2 EA PANIC HARDWARE HH- 9847- EO -SNB 1 EA ELEC EXIT DEVICE CO- 200- 993R- 70 -PR- RHO -BD 1 EA 2 EA 2 EA 2 EA TRIM SFIC EVEREST CORE SURFACE CLOSER CUSH SHOE SUPPORT BLADE STOP SPACER 80 -037 4040XP CUSH 4040 -30 4040 -61 Balance of Door Hardware to be supplied by Aluminum supplier Access Control by Electronic Trim Hardware Group No. 04 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM CO- 200- CY- 70 -PR- RHO -BD LOCK 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80 -037 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH 1 EA CUSH SHOE SUPPORT 4040 -30 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4040 -61 Balance of Door Hardware to be supplied by Aluminum supplier Access Control Electronic Lock Hardware Group No. 05 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 2 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 2 EA SURFACE BOLT SB360 12" T 1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM CO- 200- CY- 70 -PR- RHO -BD 1 EA 2 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA LOCK SFIC EVEREST CORE SURFACE CLOSER GASKETING THRESHOLD RAIN DRIP 80 -037 4040XP HEDA 188S -BK 65A - MSLA -10 142A 689 689 689 A LCN LCN LCN ZER Finish Mfr 628 IVE 626 VON 626 SCE 626 SCH 689 LCN 689 LCN 689 LCN Finish Mfr 628 IVE 626 SCE 626 SCH 689 LCN 689 LCN 689 LCN Finish Mfr 628 IVE 604 IVE 626 SCE 626 SCH 689 LCN S -Bk ZER A ZER A ZER DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - Page 7 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170303 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Opening to Comply with FBC FL #12400 Alarm Kit Egress Doors Only Hardware Group No. 06 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM CO- 200- CY- 70 -PR- RHO -BD LOCK 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE SURFACE CLOSER GASKETING THRESHOLD RAIN DRIP Access Control Electronic Lock Hardware Group No. 07 80 -037 4040XP RW /PA 188S -BK 65A- MSLA -10 142A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98- L- NL- 06 -SNB 1 EA SFIC RIM HOUSING 80 -129 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80 -037 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH 1 EA GASKETING 188S -BK Alarm Kit Egress Door Only Hardware Group No. 08 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Qty Description 2 CONT. HINGE 2 MANUAL FLUSH BOLT 1 1 EA 2 EA 2 EA 2 EA EA EA EA ELEC CLASSROOM LOCK SFIC EVEREST CORE SURFACE CLOSER WALL STOP SILENCER Access Control Electronic Lock Hardware Group No. 09 Catalog Number 224HD FB458 C O- 200- CY -70 -P R -RHO -B D 80 -037 4040XP HEDA WS406 /407CCV SR64 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Description Catalog Number CONT. HINGE 224HD ELEC CLASSROOM CO- 200- CY- 70 -PR- RHO -BD LOCK 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80 -037 Qty 1 EA 1 EA DOOR HARDWARE Finish Mfr 628 IVE 626 SCE 626 SCH 689 LCN S -Bk ZER A ZER A ZER Finish Mfr 628 IVE 626 VON 626 SCH 626 SCH 689 LCN S -Bk ZER Finish Mfr 628 IVE 626 IVE 626 SCE 626 SCH 689 LCN 630 IVE GRY IVE Finish Mfr 628 IVE 626 SCE 626 SCH 087100 - Page 8 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170303 • • • • 1 EA 1 EA 3 EA MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SURFACE CLOSER WALL STOP SILENCER Access Control Electronic Lock Hardware Group No. 10 4040XP RW /PA WS406 /407CCV SR64 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM CO- 200- CY- 70 -PR- RHO -BD 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 3 EA LOCK SFIC EVEREST CORE SURFACE CLOSER KICK PLATE WALL STOP THRESHOLD SILENCER Access Control Electronic Lock Hardware Group No. 11 80 -037 4040XP RW /PA 8400 10" X 2" LDW B -CS WS406 /407CCV 65A -M SLA -10 SR64 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM CO- 200- CY- 70 -PR- RHO -BD LOCK 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE 80 -037 1 EA WALL STOP WS406 /407CCV 3 EA SILENCER SR64 Access Control Electronic Lock Hardware Group No. 12 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty 1 1 1 1 3 EA EA EA EA EA Description CONT. HINGE PRIVACY LOCK KICK PLATE WALL STOP SILENCER Hardware Group No. 12A - Not Used Catalog Number 224HD L9040 06A L583 -363 L283 -722 8400 10" X 2" LDW B -CS WS406 /407CCV SR64 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA Description CONT. HINGE PRIVACY LOCK KICK PLATE WALL STOP Catalog Number 224HD L9040 06A L583 -363 L283 -722 8400 10" X 2" LDW B -CS WS406 /407CCV 689 630 GRY LCN IVE IVE Finish Mfr 628 IVE 626 SCE 626 SCH 689 LCN 630 IVE 630 IVE A ZER GRY IVE Finish Mfr 628 IVE 626 SCE 626 SCH 630 IVE GRY IVE Finish Mfr 628 IVE 626 SCH 630 IVE 630 IVE GRY IVE Finish Mfr 628 IVE 626 SCH 630 IVE 630 IVE DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - Page 9 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170303 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1 EA GASKETING 188S -BK S -Bk ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 65A- MSLA -10 A ZER Hardware Group No. 13 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 2 EA HINGE 3029 -6 626 BOM 1 EA EXIT X BLANK OUTSIDE ND25D RHO 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406 /407CCV 630 IVE Miscellaneous Items Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr Handing 1 EA HANDHELD DEVICE HHD KIT SCE END OF SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - Page 10 of 10 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170303 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 088000 — GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section includes: 1. Transparent glass glazing for general and special purpose applications including; coated, float, heat - strengthened, insulating, impact resistant, low emissivity, laminated and tempered glass. 2. Work Results: Manufacture, handle, deliver and install glazing systems as shown on the architectural drawings or as otherwise specified and in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" 2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" 3. Division 8 Section "Aluminum- Framed Entrances and Storefronts" 4. Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" 1.2 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1. AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association 2. ANSI American National Standards Institute 3. ASTM Formerly the American Society for Testing and Materials 4. CPSC Consumer Products Safety Commission 5. FT Fully Tempered 6. GANA Glass Association of North America 7. HS Heat - strengthened 8. ICC International Code Council 9. LBNL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratories 10. LEED Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design 11. Low -E Low emissivity 12. LSG Light to Solar Gain 13. NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council 14. SHGC Solar Heat Gain Coefficient 15. SC Shading Coefficient 16. USGBC The U.S. Green Building Council 17. VLT Visible Light Transmittance B. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM C 1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass 2. ASTM C 1048 Standard Specification for Heat - treated Flat Glass — Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated 3. ASTM C 1172 Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass 4. ASTM E 1300 Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings GLAZING 088000 - Page 1 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 5. ANSI Z97.1 Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings 6. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials 7. 2010 Florida Building Code, Building C. Definitions: 1. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developing from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. 2. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delaminating material obstructing vision through glass and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standards. 3. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass products as defined in referenced glazing publications. 4. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036 5. Fully Tempered Glass: Glass that has been heat - treated using horizontal (roller hearth) method and complies with ASTM C 1048, Type I, Class I (clear). 6. lnterspace: Space between lites of an insulating -glass unit. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show details of each type of glazing system in conjunction with the framing system indicating type of glass, sizes, shapes, glazing material and quantity. Show details indicating glazing material, glazing thickness, bite on the glass and glass edge clearance. C. Samples: Submit 12 -inch long samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12 -inch long samples of each color required, except black, for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Delegated- Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. F. Qualification Data: For installers. G. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for laminated glass, glazing sealants and glazing gaskets. 1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36 -month period. I. Test and Evaluation Reports: Glazing contractor shall obtain compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealant as well as other glazing materials including insulating units. J. Warranties: a. Provide a written 5 -year warranty from date of manufacture for laminated glass. Warranty covers deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, GLAZING 088000 - Page 2 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX installing, and cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. b. Provide a written 10 -year warranty from date of manufacture for sputter coated glass. Warranty covers deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to the glass manufacturer's published instructions. c. Provide a written 5 -year warranty from date of manufacture for fully tempered glass that has been Heat Soaked. Warrants that heat soaked tempered glass will not break spontaneously as a result of Nickel Sulfide (NS) inclusions at a rate exceeding 0.5% (5/1000) for a period of five years from date of manufacture. d. Provide a written 10 -year written warranty from date of manufacture for insulating glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating -glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. D. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain laminated glass and tempered glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. E. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations listed under Article 1.2, References, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. G. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. H. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass- framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. GLAZING 088000 - Page 3 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of- Desiqn Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Viracon, or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Guardian Industries Corp.; SunGuard. 2. Pilkington North America. 3. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope 4. PPG Industries, Inc. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. All products shall comply with ASTM standards. B. Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movements, wind loads and impact loads, without failure, including loss due to defective manufacture, fabrication and installation, deterioration of glazing materials, and other defects in construction. C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG -1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB -3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM -3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." D. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer . Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. E. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated. F. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat - strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat - strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat - strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance GLAZING 088000 - Page 4 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality -Q3. B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type 1, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality -Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller - hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. C. Heat - Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality -Q3. D. Reflective- Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1376. 2.4 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than as needed to comply with requirements. 2. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. B. Windborne- Debris - Impact- Resistant Laminated Glass: Comply with requirements specified above for laminated glass except laminate glass with one of the following to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Polyvinyl butyral interlayer. C. Transparent Coated (Low -E) Insulating Laminated Glass (Exterior locations. See plans.): 1. Basis -of- Design Product: VNE 29 -63 Insulating Laminated Coated Glass as manufactured by Viracon. 2. Performance Requirements a. Visible Light Transmittance: 43% b. Exterior (Vis -Out) Reflectance: 17% c. Winter U- Value: 0.29 d. Summer U- Value: 0.26 e. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.23 2.5 PERFORMANCE A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing. C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300. 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center -of -glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. GLAZING 088000 - Page 5 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. D. Windborne-Debris-lmpact Resistance: Exterior glazing shall comply with enhanced - protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 4 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on Project. 1. Large - Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. E. Thermal and Optical Performance: Provide glass products with performance properties specified in Article 2.4. Performance properties to be manufacturer's published data as determined according to the following procedures; 1. Center of glass U- Value: NFRC 100 methodology using LBNL WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 2. Center of glass solar heat gain coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBNL -35298 WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 3. Solar optical properties: NFRC 300. 4. For insulating -glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 1 Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; material surfaces. B. Clean -cut or flat -grind vertical edges of butt - glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. D. Insulating -Glass Units: Factory - assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1 Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. 2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. GLAZING 088000 - Page 6 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass- framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install products using the recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials including those in the GANA Glazing Manual except where more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. GLAZING 088000 - Page 7 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX E: Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8 -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly Tess than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. K. Where wedge- shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. L. Square cut wedge- shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. M. Prevent glass from contact with contaminating substances that result from construction operations such as weld splatter, fire - safing or plastering. If substances do come into contact with the glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by the glass manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and dean surfaces. B. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 088000 GLAZING 088000 - Page 8 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors. 1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Glazing ". 2. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for metal- framed mirrors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Deterioration of Mirrors: Defects developed from normal use that are attributable to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to mirror manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide mirrors that will not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass breakage and deterioration attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality - control provisions. 2. Mirror mastic. 3. Mirror hardware. B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each type of mirror product required, in the form indicated below: 1. Mirrors, 12 inches (300 mm) square, including edge treatment on 2 adjoining edges. 2. Mirror clips. 3. Mirror trim, 12 inches (300 mm) long. D. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror, signed by product manufacturer. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic was tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are installed. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed mirror glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in mirror MIRRORS 088300 - Page 1 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX installations with a record of successful in- service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under NGA's Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers). B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from one source for each type of mirror indicated. C. Source Limitations for Mirror Glazing Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from one source for each type of accessory indicated. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations: 1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." E. Safety Glazing Products: For mirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. F. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are installed. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected from moisture including condensation. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below: 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering mirrors that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. 2. Gardner Glass Products. 3. Gilded Mirrors, Inc. 4. Guardian Industries Corp. 5. Independent Mirror Industries, Inc. 6. Lenoir Mirror Company. 7. Messer Industries, Inc. 8. Sunshine Mirror. MIRRORS 088300 - Page 2 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 9. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc. 10. VVP America, Inc.; Binswanger Mirror Products. 11. Walker Glass Co., Ltd. 2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRROR MATERIALS A. Clear Glass Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror 1. Nominal Thickness: 1/8" minimum. B. Annealed Float Glass for Inner Lite of Laminated Mirrors: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality -Q3; Class 1 (clear). 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges. C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Gunther Mirror Mastics. b. Palmer Products Corporation. 2.4 MIRROR HARDWARE A. Top and Bottom Aluminum J- Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece. 1. Bottom Trim: J- channels formed with front leg and back leg not Tess than 3/8 and 7/8 inch (9.5 and 22 mm) in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). 2. Top Trim: J- channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 1 inch (16 and 25 mm) in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.062 inch (1.57 mm). 3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bottom Trim: 1) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Standard "J" Channel. 2) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Medium Gauge Aluminum Shallow Nose "J" Moulding Lower Bar. 3) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Shallow Nose "J" Moulding Lower Bar. b. Top Trim: 1) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Deep "J" Channel. 2) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Medium Gauge Aluminum Deep Nose "J" Moulding Upper Bar. 3) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Deep Nose "J" Moulding Lower Bar. 4. Bottom Trim: J- channels formed with front leg and back leg not Tess than 5/16 and 3/4 inch (7.9 and 19 mm) in height, respectively. MIRRORS 088300 - Page 3 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 5. Top Trim: Formed with front leg with a height of 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) and back leg designed to fit into the pocket created by wall- mounted aluminum cleat. 6. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Bottom Trim: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; D638 FHA Type "J" Channel. b. Top Trim: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; D 1638 Top Channel. c. Cleat: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; D 1637M Mirror Mount System Cleat. B. Mirror Bottom Clips: Manufacturer's standard C. Mirror Top Clips: Manufacturer's standard Plated Steel Hardware: Formed -steel shapes with plated finish indicated. 1. Profile: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard finish line D. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. E. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead- shield expansion -bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes. B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished edge. 1. Seal edges of mirrors after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating. 2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes. D. Laminated Safety Mirrors: Provide laminated mirrors fabricated to produce units complying with ASTM C 1172, Kind LM, and the following: 1. Glass Lites: Outer lite of mirror glass with silver coating on second surface and inner lite of clear float glass. 2. Interlayer Material: Mirror manufacturer's standard 0.030 -inch- (0.76 -mm -) thick, polyvinyl - butyral interlayer with a proven record of showing no tendency to delaminate from, or cause damage to, silver coating. 3. Laminating Process: Laminate glass using laminator's standard heat - plus - pressure process to produce glass free from foreign substances, air or glass pockets, and other defects. 4. Seal edges of laminated units to comply with written requirements of interlayer manufacturer. E. Film- Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with pressure- sensitive adhesive coating over mirror backing paint as recommended in writing by film- backing manufacturer to produce a surface free of bubbles, blisters, and other imperfections. Use adhesives and film backing compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance. MIRRORS 088300 - Page 4 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with mirror installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating surfaces with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. C. For wall- mounted mirrors, install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. 1. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. 2. For mirror hardware in the form of continuous J- channels at bottom, provide setting blocks 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, 2 slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wide by 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) long. 3. For mirror hardware in the form of a continuous J- channel at bottom and continuous top trim at top, fasten J- channel directly to wall and attach top trim to continuous cleat fastened directly to wall. 4. For metal or plastic clips, place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling of mirror edges. 5. Where indicated, install mirror hardware in the form of J- channels that are fabricated in single lengths to fit and cover top and bottom edges of mirrors. 6. Where indicated, install bottom trim and top clips. Fabricate bottom trim in single lengths to fit and cover bottom edges of mirrors. Locate top clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced. 7. Where indicated, install bottom and top clips symmetrically placed and evenly spaced. 8. Install mastic as follows: a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrors and backing material. b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum air space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting surface. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. END OF SECTION 088300 MIRRORS 088300 - Page 5 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 089119 — FIXED LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: A. Fixed, extruded - aluminum louvers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal). 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. A. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. A. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion. B. Show mullion profiles and locations. C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to AMCA 500 -L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements specified. B. Windborne- debris - impact- resistance test reports C. Florida Product Approval, issued by the Florida Department of Business and Professional regulation, certifyithat testing, approved and monitored by this agency, has sufficiently demonstrated that the fixed louver, as designed and manufactured, will withstand the wind pressures and wind -borne missile impact forces in compliance with all code and jurisdictional requirements for the project location when installed according to the manufacturer's instructions as well as those instructions that may be provided with the Florida Product Approval documents. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: A. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." B. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." C. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - Page 1 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory - applied color finish. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver -blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building. A. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500 -L. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. A. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. E. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED - ALUMINUM LOUVER A. Basis -of- Desiqn Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings: B. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 2.4 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. A. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. B. Screening Type: Bird screening. B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless -steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c. C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. A. Metal: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded- aluminum screen frames at corners with clips. B. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. C. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert. D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - Page 2 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX A. Bird Screening: Stainless steel, 1/2- inch - square mesh, 0.047 -inch wire. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063 -T5, T -52, or T6. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. A. Use Phillips flat -head tamper- resistant screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. B. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless -steel fasteners. C. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot - dip - galvanized steel or 300 series stainless -steel fasteners. D. For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless -steel fasteners. E. For color- finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. D. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque - controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless -steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed for masonry, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold- applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field - bolted assembly with close- fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates. A. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade- spacing pattern. C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. A. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated. E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than is recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less. A. Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close - fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction. B. Semirecessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions partly recessed behind louver blades so louver blades appear continuous. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with interlocking split mullions and close- fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction. C. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations; provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction. FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - Page 3 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX D. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered and welded blades and with fully recessed mullions at corners. G. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers. H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish louvers after assembly. B. High - Performance Organic Finish: Four -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. A. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. E. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous -metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing. F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period. FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - Page 4 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. A. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air -dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory - applied finish coating. END OF SECTION 089119 FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - Page 5 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 092216 - NON - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non -load- bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 054000 "Cold- Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load- bearing and exterior non -load- bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For dimpled steel studs and runners and firestop tracks, from ICC -ES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: For fire- resistance -rated assemblies that incorporate non - load- bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.025 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: NON - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - Page 1 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Single Long -Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2 -inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double- Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2 -inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire - resistance -rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch. F. Cold - Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053 -inch minimum base -metal thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1 -1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1 -1/2 by 1 -1/2 inches, 0.068 -inch- thick, galvanized steel. G. Hat - Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch. H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. I. Cold - Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053 -inch uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated -steel thickness of 0.033 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048 -inch- diameter wire. J. Z- Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1 -1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated -metal thickness of 0.018 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048 -inch- diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: [Cast -in -place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms] [Postinstalled, chemical anchor] [Postinstalled, expansion anchor]. 2. Powder- Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and NON - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - Page 2 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating. soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated. E. Carrying Channels: Cold- rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0.053 inch and minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1 -1/2 inches. F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold- Rolled Channels: 0.053 -inch uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness:[0.027 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.025 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Hat - Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. 5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct -hung system composed of main beams and cross - furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt- Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive - backed, closed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building NON - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - Page 3 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire - Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire - resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire- resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 2. After sprayed fire - resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non -load- bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire - resistive materials below that required for fire - resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire - resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load- bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 -inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. NON - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - Page 4 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire - Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire - resistance -rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire- resistance- rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound -rated assembly indicated. 6. Curved Partitions: a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c. E. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder- driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Z- Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z- furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder- driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw- attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated. but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 24 inches o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. NON - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - Page 5 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast -in -place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled -in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire - Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Seismic Bracing: Sway -brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross - furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 092216 NON - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - Page 6 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 092400 — EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fluid applied waterproof air barrier sheathing substrates. B. Materials and installation of exterior stucco wall covering. C. Acrylic- Based, Vertical Above -Grade Exterior Wall Coating for Concrete and Stucco. D. Accessories including Channel Reveals. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 033000:Cast -In -Place concrete B. Section 076200:Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim C. Section 079200:Joint Sealants D. Section 092900:Gypsum Board E. Section 076200: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1.3 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS A. ASTM Standards: 1. A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc- Coated (Galvanized ) Carbon Steel Wire 2. A 653 Specification for Sheet Steel Zinc coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality 3. B 69 Specification for Roller Zinc 4. C 578 Specification for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation 5. C 847 Standard Specification for Metal Lath 6. C 897 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job -Mixed Portland Cement - Based Plasters 7. C 1032 Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base 8. C 1063 Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement Plaster 9. C 1177 Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum for Use as Sheathing 10. C 1278 Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum for Use as Sheathing 11. C 1396 Specification for Gypsum Board 12. D 1784 Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds 13. D2247 Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humdity 14. D4541 Test Method for Pull -Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Tester 15. E 283 Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 16. E96 Water Vapor Permeability, wet cup method 17. E 119 Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM 092400 - Page 1 of 14 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 18. E136 Behavior of Materials in Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 °C 19. Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen 20. E 330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 21. E 331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 22. G 155 Standard Practice for Operating Light- Exposure Apparatus (Xenon -Arc Type) With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials B. Gypsum Association 1. GA -253 Application of Gypsum Sheathing C. ICC ES (International Code Council Evaluation Service) 1. AC 11 Acceptance Criteria for Cementitious Exterior Wall Coatings 2. AC 212 Acceptance Criteria for Water- resistive Coatings Used as Water- resistive Barriers over Exterior Sheathing. D. Proprietary Publications 1. Sto S422 StoGuard Waterproof Air Barrier Handbook 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Structural (wind and axial loads) 1. Design for maximum allowable deflection, normal to the plane of the wall, of L/360 2. Design for wind load in conformance with code requirements. Consult applicable code compliance report. B. Moisture Control 1. Prevent the accumulation of water into or behind the stucco, either by condensation or leakage into the wall construction, in the design and detailing of the wall assembly. a. Provide corrosion resistant flashing to direct water to the exterior where it is likely to penetrate components in the wall assembly, including, above window and door heads, beneath window and door sills, at roof /wall intersections, decks, abutments of lower walls with higher walls, above projecting features, and at the base of the wall. b. Air Leakage Prevention — prevent excess air leakage in the design and detailing of the wall assembly. Provide continuity between air barrier components in the wall assembly. Refer to StoGuard Air Barrier and Moisture Control Handbook. c. Vapor Diffusion and Condensation -- perform a dew point analysis of the wall assembly to determine the potential for accumulation of moisture in the wall assembly as a result of water vapor diffusion and condensation. Adjust insulation thickness and /or other wall assembly components accordingly to minimize the risk of condensation. Avoid the use of vapor retarders on the interior side of the wall in warm, humid climates. d. Provide StoGuard Waterproof Air Barrier over concrete, or over sheathing with slip sheet. e. At expansion joints, back joints with barrier membrane. Refer to Sto details at www.stocorp.com. C. Grade Condition 1. Do not specify the stucco for use below grade or on surfaces subject to continuous or intermittent water immersion or hydrostatic pressure. Provide EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM 092400 - Page 2 of 14 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX minimum 4 inch (100 mm) clearance above earth grade, minimum 2 inch (51 mm) clearance above finished grade (pavers /sidewalk). Provide increased clearance in freeze /thaw climate zones. D. Joints 1. Provide two piece expansion joints in the stucco system where building movement is anticipated: at joints in the substrate or supporting construction, where the system is to be installed over dissimilar construction or substrates, at changes in building height, at floor lines, at columns and cantilevered areas. 2. Provide one piece expansion joints every 144 ft' (13 m2) *. Cut and wire tie lath to the expansion joint accessory so lath is discontinuous beneath the accessory. Do not exceed length to width ratio of 2 -1/2:1 in expansion joint layout and do not exceed more than 18 feet (5.5 m) in any direction without an expansion joint. Where casing bead is used back -to -back as the expansion joint, back the joint with barrier membrane. 3. Provide one piece expansion joints at through wall penetrations, for example, above and below doors or windows. Note: the requirement for one piece expansion joints at through wall penetrations may be waived in the following case: when another type of expansion joint is provided in lieu of the one -piece expansion joint, for example, back -to -back casing beads. 4. Provide minimum 3/8 inch (9 mm) wide joints where the system abuts windows, doors and other through wall penetrations. 5. Provide appropriate accessories at stucco terminations and joints. 6. Provide appropriate sealant at stucco terminations. 7. Indicate location of joints, accessories and accessory type on architectural drawings. E. Solid Substrates 1. Provide surface plane tolerance not to exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3.0 m). 2. Concrete — prevent the use of form oil, curing compounds or other bond breakers that inhibit bond to the surface or provide for their removal. 3. Concrete Masonry— provide open texture concrete masonry units with flush joints. F. Stucco Thickness: General 1. Direct Application to Concrete: a. Stucco thickness shall not exceed 1/2 inch applied in one or two coats. 2. Application to Metal Plaster Bases: a. Galvanized diamond mesh metal lath: i. Stucco thickness shall not exceed 5/8 inch and not more than 7/8 inch applied in two coats. b. Woven wire fabric lath: stucco thickness shall be 1/2 inch applied in one or two coats 3. Thickness shall be uniform throughout the wall area. EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM 092400 - Page 3 of 14 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Waterproof Air Barrier Aging/Water Penetration Resistance Water Resistance Testing Water Vapor Transmission Air Leakage: Sto Gold Fill Tensile Adhesion AATCC 127 and ICC ES AC 212 (Water Column) ASTM D 2247 ASTM E 96 Method B (Water Method) ASTM E 283 (GCMG <0.003 ft3 /min -ft2 at Technical Guide 1.57 psf Method) Resist 21.6 inches waters for 5 hours before and after aging Absence of deleterious effects after 14 day exposure Measure RESULT No water penetration before and after aging No deleterious effects after 14 day exposure ASTM D 4541 > 15 psi Surface Burning B. ASTM E 84 Stucco Flame Spread: <25 Smoke Developed: <450 Sto Gold Fill: 7.10 perms Sto EmeraldCoat: 17.0 ;_perms 0.0002 ft3 /min -ft2 Gypsum (ASTM C 79): i 16.5 psi Gypsum (ASTM C 1177): >15.8 psi ( Flame Spread: <25 E Smoke Developed: <450 NFPA or ICC Class A building material TEST I ETHOD RITERIA mm'. RESULT Accelerated Weathering Combustibility Freeze -Thaw Surface Burning Fire Resistance ASTM G 26 ASTM E 136 ICC -ES AC 11 2000 hours No chalking, cracking, checking, crazing, or erosion Non - combustible Material 10 cycles Pass No cracking, checking or crazing ASTM E 84 ASTM E 119 Wind Loads ASTM E 330 Flame spread of less than 25, Smoke Developed of less than 450 One hour fire resistive rating Allowable and ultimate design pressures Flame Spread: < 5 Smoke Developed: < 10 Pass, refer to ICC -ES ESR 2323 for listed assemblies. Pass, refer to ICC -ES ESR 2323 for listed assemblies. EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 092400 - Page 4 of 14 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's specifications, details, installation instructions and product data. B. Sustainable Project Submittals: 1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. 2. Product Data: For sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 3. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Manufacturer's code compliance report. D. Manufacturer's standard warranty. E. Samples for approval as directed by architect or owner. F. Prepare and submit project- specific details (when required by contract documents). 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer requirements 1. Waterproof air barrier and stucco products manufacturer for a minimum of twenty (20) years. 2. Waterproofing air barrier and stucco finish products manufactured under ISO 9001:2000 Certified Quality System and 14001:2004 Environmental Management System. B. Contractor requirements 1. Licensed, insured and engaged in application of portland cement stucco for a minimum of three (3) years. 2. Knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of Basis -of- Design materials. 3. Employ skilled mechanics who are experienced and knowledgeable in portland cement stucco application, and familiar with the requirements of the specified work. 4. Successful completion of minimum of three (3) projects of similar size and complexity to the specified project. 5. Provide the proper equipment, manpower and supervision on the job site to install the system in compliance with Basis -of- Design manufacturer's published specifications and details and the project plans and specifications. C. Inspections 1. Provide independent third party inspection where required by code or contract documents. 2. Conduct inspections in accordance with code requirements and contract documents. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials in their original sealed containers bearing manufacturer's name and identification of product. B. Protect coatings (pail products) from freezing and temperatures in excess of 90 °F. Store away from direct sunlight. EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM 092400 - Page 5 of 14 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Protect Portland cement based materials (bag products) from moisture and humidity. Store under cover off the ground in a dry location. 1.9 PROJECT /SITE CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient and surface temperatures above 40 °F during application and drying of waterproofing /air barrier. Maintain ambient and surface temperature above 40 °F and for 24 hours after set of stucco. B. Provide supplementary heat for installation in temperatures less than 40 °F such that temperatures are maintained as in 1.8A. Prevent concentration of heat on uncured stucco and vent fumes and other products of combustion to the outside to prevent contact with stucco. C. Prevent uneven or excessive evaporation of moisture from stucco during hot, dry or windy weather. For installation under any of these conditions provide special measures to properly moist cure the stucco. D. Provide protection of surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from application of materials. 1.10 COORDINATION /SCHEDULING A. Protect sheathing from climatic conditions to prevent weather damage until installation of waterproofing /air barrier. B. Provide protection of the waterproof air barrier installation with stucco no later than 60 days after installation. C. Provide minimum 28 day cure of concrete before the installation of stucco. D. Commence the stucco installation after completion of all floor, roof construction and other construction that imposes dead loads on the walls to prevent excessive deflection (and potential cracking) of the stucco. E. Sequence interior work such as drywall installation prior to stucco installation to prevent stud distortion and potential cracking of the stucco. F. Provide site grading such that the stucco terminates above earth grade minimum 4 inches and above finished grade (pavers /sidewalk) minimum 2 inches. Provide increased clearance in freeze /thaw climate zones. G. Provide protection of rough openings before installing windows, doors, and other penetrations through the wall and provide sill flashing. Coordinate installation of moisture barrier with window and door installation to provide weather proofing of the structure and to prevent moisture infiltration and excess air infiltration. H. Install window and door head flashing immediately after windows and doors are installed. Install diverter flashings wherever water can enter the wall assembly to direct water to the exterior. J. Install copings and sealant immediately after installation of the stucco and when finish coatings are dry. K. Attach penetrations through stucco into structural support and provide water tight seal at penetrations. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty. EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM 092400 - Page 6 of 14 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of- Design Manufacturer: Sto Corp. B. Basis -of- Design Manufacturer: Structa Wire Corp. C. Provide stucco, metal lath, reinforcing mesh, primer and finish from single source manufacturer. 2.2 EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM. A. Basis -of- Design System: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide StoPowerwall Next Stucco with Structura Wire Metal Lath: Fiber Reinforced Portland Cement Stucco with Fluid Applied Waterproof Air Barrier for Concrete and Frame Construction, or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers:. 1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 2. Pleko Group LLC Products, Inc. 3. Stuc -O -Flex International, Inc. 2.3 WATERPROOF AIR BARRIER A. Basis -of- Design Product: StoGuard — fluid applied waterproof air barrier for sheathing substrates consisting of three components: (Choose either Sto EmeraldCoat, Sto Gold Fill and Sto Guard Mesh or Emerald Coat, StoGuard Fabric and StoGuard RediCorner). 1. Sto Gold Fill — ready mixed acrylic based flexible joint treatment for rough opening protection, joint treatment of wall sheathing, and connections with flashing. 2. Sto EmeraldCoat — ready mixed flexible waterproof coating for wall sheathing. 3. StoGuard Mesh — nominal 4.2 oz /yd2, self- adhesive, flexible, symmetrical, interlaced glass fiber fabric, with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials (used with Sto Gold Fill to reinforce rough openings, inside and outside corners, sheathing joints, and connections with flashings). 4. StoGuard Fabric — nonwoven cloth reinforcement used with Sto EmeraldCoat to treat sheathing joints, inside and outside corners and rough openings. 5. StoGuard RediCorner — a preformed fabric piece used in the corners of the rough openings for quicker installation of the StoGuard system. 2.4 SLIP SHEET A. Minimum No. 15 asphalt saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type 1, or one layer of Grade D kraft building paper, or paperbacked stucco lath conforming to 2.5. 2.5 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Bonding Agent and Admixture -- copolymer bonding agent for brush or roller application to prepared concrete surfaces. 2.6 LATH A. Minimum 2.5 Ib. /yd2 self- furred galvanized steel diamond mesh metal lath in compliance with ASTM C 847. 2.7 MECHANICAL FASTENERS A. Appropriate non - corroding fasteners, depending on the type framing or substrate: EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM 092400 - Page 7 of 14 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Channel Reveals and Channel Reveal Intersections: 1. PVC plastic in compliance with ASTM D 1784, cell classification 13244C. 2. Basis -of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide 1" reveal, perforated flanges, Product Number DC58- 100SE, PB Channel Reveals and PV Channel Reveal Intersections, manufactured by Vinyl Corp. a) Continuous horizontal reveals spaced sixteen (16) inches apart and continuous horizontal and vertical reveals spaced thirty -two (32) inches apart. See Drawings. C. All accessories shall have perforated or expanded flanges and shall be designed with grounds for the specified thickness of stucco. 2.8 JOB MIXED INGREDIENTS A. Water —clean and potable. B. Clean, well graded sand free of deleterious materials in compliance with ASTM C 897 or ASTM C144. 2.9 STUCCO A. Basis -of- Design Product: StoPowerwall Stucco — factory proportioned, fiber reinforced portland cement based stucco for trowel or pump application, field mixed with graded sand and water as manufactured by Sto Corp. 2.10 PRIMER A. Basis -of- Design Product: Sto Hot Primee— acrylic based primer /sealer for high pH surfaces as manufactured by by Sto Corp.. B. Performance and Physical Properties: Meet or exceed the following values for material cured at 73 degrees F and 50 percent relative humidity. 1. Application: Spray, roller, or brush. 2. Working time: 10 -20 minutes, depending on ambient conditions. 3. Admission to concrete: 680 psi, ASTM D 4541. 4. Flame Spread Index: 0, ASTM E 84. 5. Smoke Developed: 10, ASTM E 84. 6. Water vapor transmission: 30 perms, tested at 3 dry mils applied in one coat, ASTM E 96, wet cup method. 7. VOC: <0.84 lb/gal, EPA 24. 2.11 FINISH COAT A. Single component acrylic -based coating containing acrylic polymer, and colored pigments. 1. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Basis -of Design Product : StoCoat Lotusan as manufactured by Sto Corp.. C. Performance and Physical Properties: Meet or exceed the following values for material cured at 73 degrees F and 50 percent relative humidity. 1. Working Time: 10 -20 minutes, depending on ambient conditions. 2. Solids: 53 %, by volume. 3. Application: Spray, roller, or brush. 4. Water Vapor Permeability: 40 perms, tested at 6 dry mils applied in two coats, ASTM E 96, wet cup method. 5. Flame Spread Index: <25, ASTM E 84, Class A building material. EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM 092400 - Page 8 of 14 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 6. Smoke Developed: <450, ASTM E 84. 7. Accelerated Weathering: No cracking, peeling, blistering, or other deleterious effects after 2000 hours exposure in Xenon Arc apparatus. 8. Tensile Strength: 182 psi, minimum, ASTM D 412. 9. Mold Resistance: No Mold Growth at 28 days, ASTM D 3273. 10. Adhesion to Concrete: 550 psi, ASTM D 4541. 11. VOC: 0.75 lb/gal, EPA 24. 2.12 MIXING A. StoGuard: 1. Sto Gold Fill – mix with a clean, rust -free electric drill and paddle to a uniform consistency. Do not thin, or dilute with water. 2. Sto EmeraldCoat – mix with a clean, rust -free electric drill and paddle to a uniform consistency. Do not thin, or dilute with water B. Sto Bonding Agent and Admixture —no mixing required when used as a bonding agent. Use at full strength. Shake sealed container before use to a homogeneous consistency. Sto Bonding Agent and Admixture may be used as an admixture in the stucco mixture. When used in this way, dilute 1 part Sto Bonding Agent and Admixture to 3 parts clean water used as part of the mixing water for the stucco. C. StoPowerwall Stucco - mix 200 lbs. of sand to an 80 lb bag of StoPowerwall Stucco and approximately 4 gallons of clean water in a paddle type mortar mixer. Add 1/2 to 2/3 of the required water, 1/2 of the sand, and one bag of StoPowerwall Stucco in a paddle type mortar mixer. Then add the rest of the sand and sufficient water to achieve a uniform mix of workable consistency. Mix for 3 -5 minutes after all materials are in the mixer. Stucco material can be retempered once in the first hour after mixing. Avoid retempering after the first hour and discard material older than 1.5 hours. Keep mix ratio consistent from batch to batch and mix each batch separately. Use only the amount of water necessary for a workable mix. Use of excess water is detrimental to performance. D. Primer - -mix with a clean, rust -free high speed mixer to a uniform consistency. E. Finish - -mix with a clean, rust -free high speed mixer to a uniform consistency. A small amount of water may be added to adjust workability. Limit addition of water to amount needed to achieve the finish texture. F. Mix only as much material as can readily be used. G. Do not use anti- freeze compounds or other additives. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS A. Pre - qualify under Quality Assurance requirements of this specification (section 1.7.B). 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Inspect surfaces for: 1. Contamination—algae, chalkiness, dirt, dust, efflorescence, form oil, fungus, grease, laitance, mildew or other foreign substances. 2. Surface absorption and chalkiness. 3. Cracks—measure crack width and record location of cracks. 4. Damage and deterioration. EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM 092400 - Page 9 of 14 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 5. Moisture damage— record any areas of moisture damage. B. Inspect sheathing application for compliance with applicable requirement: 1. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Sheathing —refer to manufacturer's instructions. C. Report deviations from the requirements of project specifications or other conditions that might adversely affect the stucco and acrylic finish installation to the General Contractor. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Concrete (Cast -in- Place) 1. Provide a surface that is slightly scarified, water absorbent, straight and true to line and plane. Remove form ties and trim projecting concrete so it is even with the plane of the wall. Remove form release agents by washing with a trisodium phosphate detergent and rinsing with clean water. Establish surface profile by sandblasting, waterblasting, wire brushing, chipping or other appropriate means. Remove all dust, dirt, grease, laitance or other bond inhibiting material. Pre - moisten absorbent surfaces with water prior to placement of stucco. B. Gypsum Sheathing in compliance with ASTM C1396, Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Sheathing: 1. Verify installation of sheathing in compliance with applicable requirement. 2. Protect the substrate with a moisture barrier as required by the applicable code and install lath and accessories as in 3.6 B1 —B6. 3.4 WATERPROOF AIR BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Reinforcement: 1. StoGuard Mesh: Place minimum 4 inch wide mesh at sheathing joints and minimum 9 inch wide mesh at rough openings and inside and outside corners. Immediately apply Sto Gold Fill by spray or trowel over the mesh and trowel smooth. Protect from rain and freezing until dry. B. Surface Defects and Fasteners in Sheathing: 1. Spot fasteners with Sto Gold Fill. Protect from rain and freezing until dry. C. Sheathing Surface Waterproofing: 1. Apply Sto EmeraldCoat by spray or roller over sheathing surface, including the dry joint treatment, to a uniform wet mil thickness of 10 mils in one coat. Use 3/4 inch nap roller for glass mat faced gypsum sheathing.. Protect from rain and freezing until dry. Note: Back rolling is not required for spray applications over sheathing. Inspect surface after initial applications over sheathing. 2. Coordinate installation of connecting waterproofing /air barrier components, for example at expansion joints, penetrations, openings, foundation, and roof, with other trades to provide continuous air tight membrane and moisture protection. 3. Coordinate installation of flashing and other moisture protection components with other trades to achieve complete moisture protection such that water is directed to the exterior, not into the wall assembly, and drained to the exterior at sources of leaks (windows, doors, structural members and similar penetrations through the wall assembly. 4. Note that some flashing components such as window or door head flashing, roof sidewall step flashing, and weep screeds at the base of the wall, require a splice strip of reinforcing mesh, joint treatment and waterproofing. This creates a "shingle lap" and proper shedding of water onto the face of the flashing, not behind the flashing. D. Concrete Surface Waterproofing: EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM 092400 - Page 10 of 14 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Repair cracks in concrete surface up to 1/8 inch with Sto Gold Fill. For cracks larger than 1/8 inch, up to 1/4 inch, fill with paintable latex caulk, tool flush and allow to dry. Do not use Sto Gold Fill to fill moving cracks, consult the project engineer for repair methods. 2. Apply Sto EmeraldCoat by spray or roller over concrete surface to a uniform wet thickness of 10 to 30 mils in one coat depending on surface conditions. Apply second coat of 10 to 30 wet mil thickness to achieve pin hole void free surface. If Sto EmearldCoat is to be applied using spray equipment, backrolling ofeach coat will be necessary. Sto EmeraldCoat may also be applied using a paint roller with nap thickness of 3/4 inch. 3. Coordinate installation of connecting waterproofing /air barrier components, for example at expansion joints, penetrations, openings, foundation, and roof, with other trades to provide continuous air tight membrane and moisture protection. 4. Coordinate installation of flashing and other moisture protection components with other trades to achieve complete moisture protection such that water is directed to the exterior, not into the wall assembly, and drained to the exterior at sources of leaks (windows, doors, structural members and similar penetrations through the wall assembly. 5. Note that some flashing components such as window or door head flashing, roof sidewall step flashing, and weep screeds at the base of the wall, require a splice strip of reinforcing mesh, joint treatment and waterproofing. This creates a "shingle lap" and proper shedding of water onto the face of the flashing, not behind the flashing. 3.5 SLIP SHEET INSTALLATION A. Install in compliance with applicable building code requirements for building paper. Lap paper over foundation weep screed attachment flange and window /door head flashings. 3.6 STUCCO INSTALLATION Apply the stucco in discrete panels without interruption to avoid cold joints and differences in appearance. Abut wet stucco to set stucco at natural or architectural breaks in the wall such as expansion joints, pilasters, terminations, or changes in plane. Hot or dry conditions accelerate drying and moisture loss from stucco which can affect strength and resistance to cracking. Adjustments in the application, scheduling and curing of stucco to prevent rapid loss of moisture are necessary to achieve a satisfactory stucco installation. Cold temperatures retard drying and strength gain and adjustments may have to be made in the application, scheduling and curing of stucco to prevent damage from frost and other trades. Do not install stucco during extremely hot, dry and /or windy conditions. Do not install stucco during freezing conditions or on frozen substrates. Do not install stucco onto grounds of accessories. Completely embed lath and flanges of accessories and completely cover attachments with stucco. Moist cure stucco minimum 48 hours for optimum strength gain and resistance to cracking. Allow final stucco application to completely dry before applying primer or finish. The finished installation must be true, plumb and square. Should stucco get into control or expansion joints, remove the stucco from within the joint before the stucco sets. After satisfactory inspection of surfaces and correction of any deviations from specification requirements commence the stucco installation in accordance with A or B below. A. Installation over cast -in -place concrete: 1. Install foundation weep screed at the base of the wall. 2. Install casing beads at stucco terminations— doors, windows and other through wall penetrations. Install two piece expansion joints (or back -to -back casing beads) at joints in the supporting construction, building expansion joints, where EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM 092400 - Page 11 of 14 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX the stucco is to be installed over dissimilar construction or substrates, at changes in building height, at floor lines, columns, and cantilevered areas. Install one piece expansion joints at corners of windows, doors and similar through wall penetrations, and every 250 ft2. Install corner bead at outside corners and corner lath at inside corners. Install full accessory pieces where possible and avoid small pieces. Seal adjoining pieces by embedding ends in sealant. Abut horizontal into vertical joint accessories. Attach at no more than 7 inches on center into concrete /masonry with appropriate fasteners. 3. Pre - moisten concrete prior to the placement of stucco. 4. Scratch Coat: apply the stucco with sufficient pressure to ensure intimate contact with the substrate and complete coverage to an approximate thickness of 1/4 inch. Score the stucco upon completion of each panel in preparation for a second coat. Score horizontally. 5. Brown Coat: as soon as the first coat is firm enough to receive the second coat without damage, apply the second coat. Alternatively, moist cure the first coat up to 48 hours and dampen the scratched surface with water immediately before applying the second coat. Apply the second coat with sufficient pressure to ensure intimate contact with the first coat to an approximate thickness of 1/8 or 1/4 inch and as needed to bring the stucco to the desired thickness. Use a rod or straight edge to bring the surface to a true, even plane. Fill depressions in plane with stucco. Final thickness of stucco shall not exceed 1/2 inch. 6. After the stucco has lost sufficient moisture so that the surface sheen has disappeared, float the surface lightly with a darby or wood float to densify the surface and to provide a smooth, even surface. Float before the stucco becomes so rigid that it cannot be moved beneath the float. 7. Moist cure after the stucco has set by lightly fogging the surface for at least 48 hours. Fog as frequently as required during the 48 hour period to prevent loss of moisture from the stucco. Avoid eroding the stucco surface with excess moisture. If relative humidity exceeds 75% the frequency of moist - curing can be diminished. B. Installation over frame construction with sheathing: 1. Weep Screed Installation a. Install foundation weep screed at the base of the wall securely to framing with the appropriate fastener. Locate foundation weep screed so that it overlaps the joint between the foundation and framing by a minimum of 1 inch. Locate the foundation weep screed minimum 4 inches above earth grade, 2 inches above finished grade (paved surfaces, for example). 2. Weather Protection a. Protect sills of rough openings with barrier membrane. b. Apply moisture barrier in compliance with the applicable building code. Wrap paper into rough opening and lap over barrier membrane at jambs. Lap paper over foundation weep screed attachment flange and window /door head fleshings. Refer to Sto Details. 3. Casing Bead and Expansion Joint Installation a. Install casing beads at stucco terminations— doors, windows and other through wall penetrations. Install expansion joints (or back -to -back casing beads) at building expansion joints, where the stucco is to be installed over dissimilar construction or substrates, at changes in building height, at floor lines, columns, and cantilevered areas. Install one piece expansion joints at corners of windows, doors, and similar through wall penetrations, and every 144 ft2. Install full accessory pieces where possible and avoid small pieces. Seal adjoining pieces by embedding ends in sealant. Abut horizontal into vertical joint accessories. Attach at no more than 7 inches into framing with appropriate fasteners. EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM 092400 - Page 12 of 14 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 4. Lath Installation a. Diamond Mesh Metal Lath 1. General -- install metal lath with the long dimension at right angles to structural framing. Terminate lath at expansion joints. Do no install continuously beneath joints. ii. Seams /Overlaps -- overlap side seams minimum 1/2 inch and end seams minimum 1 inch. Stagger end seams. Overlap casing beads and expansion joints minimum 1 inch over narrow wing accessories, minimum 2 inches over expanded flange accessories. Do not install lath continuously beneath expansion joints. iii. Attachment -- fasten securely through sheathing into structural framing at 7 inches on center maximum vertically and 16 inches on center horizontally. Wire tie at no more than 9 inches on center at: side laps, accessory overlaps, and where end laps occur between supports. 5. One Piece Expansion Joint Installation a. Install one piece expansion joints over lath at through wall penetrations, for example, above and below doors or windows. Install one piece expansion joints over lath every 144 ft2. Wire tie one piece expansion joints to lath at no more than 7 inches on center. Make certain lath is discontinuous beneath joints. 6. Inside and Outside Corners a. Install corner lath at inside corners and corner bead at outside corners over lath. Attach through lath into framing at no more than 7 inches on center with appropriate fasteners. 7. Stucco Installation a. Scratch Coat: apply stucco with sufficient pressure to key into and embed the metal lath. Apply sufficient material, 3/8 -1/2 inch, to cover the metal lath and to permit scoring the surface. Score the stucco upon completion of each panel in preparation for a second coat. Score horizontally. b. Brown Coat: as soon as the first coat is firm enough to receive the second coat without damage, apply the second coat. Alternatively, moist cure the first coat up to 48 hours and dampen the scratched surface with water immediately before applying the second coat. Apply the second coat with sufficient pressure to ensure intimate contact with the first coat and as needed to bring the stucco to a uniform thickness that matches the grounds of the accessories. Use a rod or straight edge to bring the surface to a true, even plane. Fill depressions in plane with stucco. Final thickness of stucco shall be minimum 1/2 inch, maximum 7/8 inch. c. After the stucco has become slightly firm float the surface lightly with a darby or wood float to densify the surface and to provide a smooth, even surface. d. Moist cure after the stucco has set by lightly fogging for at least 48 hours. Fog as frequently as required during the 48 hour period to prevent loss of moisture from the stucco. Avoid eroding the stucco surface with excess moisture. If relative humidity exceeds 75% the frequency of moist curing can be diminished. C. Primer Installation 1. Sto Hot Prime —Moist cure stucco for a minimum of 48 hours. Apply primer evenly with brush, roller or proper spray equipment over the clean, dry stucco and allow to dry before applying finish. D. Finish Installation 1. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions and the following: 2. Apply acrylic -based finish to primed stucco when dry. Apply finish by spraying or troweling with a stainless steel trowel, depending on the finish specified. Follow these general rules for application of finish: EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM 092400 - Page 13 of 14 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX a. Weather conditions: Apply when ambient and surface temperatures are 40 degrees F and rising. Do not apply in freezing conditions or during precipitation. Do not apply if the surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the ambient due point temperature. b. Concrete and stucco substrates: Apply 805 Sto Hot Prime in one coat by brush, roller, or spray to a thickness of 6 — 8 wet mils. c. Allow primer to dry completely before applying finish coating. d. Decorative and Protective finish coating (one coat application): Apply one coat, 5 -7 wet mils, 216/216D/217 StoCoat Lotusan to primed surface. e. Do not apply finish into or over joints or accessories. Apply finish to outside face of wall only. f. Do not apply finish over irregular or unprepared surfaces, or surfaces not in compliance with the requirements of the project specifications. g. Protect installed materials from rain, freezing, and continuous high humidity until completely dry. h. Do not overcoat with solvent -based materials. i. Finish color and texture: To be selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of colors and textures. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them. B. Provide protection of installed stucco from dust, dirt, precipitation, and freezing. C. Provide protection of installed primer and finish from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing and continuous high humidity until fully dry. END OF SECTION 092400 EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM 092400 - Page 14 of 14 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceiling and soffits. 3. Glass -mat gypsum sheathing board. 4. Tile backing panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full -size Sample in 12- inch -long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper -faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - Page 1 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Georgia- Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple- Inland. 8. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1 Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Abuse - Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Gypsum board wall assembly panels from floor to eight feet above finish floor in the following rooms and areas in the Recreation Center Building (see Drawings): 110 TEEN, 111 AEROBICS /DANCE, 112 INDOOR PLAY, 117 VESTIBULE 123 MULTI - PURPOSE, 123 -1 TEMPORARY STAGE AREA, 127 COMMONS, 201 LOBBY, 204 MULTIPUR, 210 MULTI -PUR, 211 CARD /SENIOR, 212 ARTS AND CRAFTS, 215 CARDIO DECK. 2.3 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp. b. Georgia- Pacific Gypsum LLCLafarge North America Inc c. National Gypsum Company. d. USG Corporation. 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2.4 GLASS -MAT GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD A. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with fiberglass mat laminated to both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Sheathing. b. Georgia- Pacific Gypsum LLC; Dens -Glass Gold. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond, e(2)XP. d. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Sheathing. 2. Core: 1/2 inch, regular type. 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer. b. Georgia- Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer. 2. Core: 1/2 inch. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - Page 2 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. b. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum- coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper -faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC -Bead: J- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L -Bead: L- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U -Bead: J- shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint. f. Curved -Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries. 2. Aluminum: AIIoy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, AIIoy 6063 -T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion - resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10 -by -10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting -type taping compound. a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - Page 3 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Laminating adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire - Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly. E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Pecora Corporation. d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical joint sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07210 "Building Insulation." G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07210 "Building Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install panels with face side out. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - Page 4 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back - blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor /roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8- inch -wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load- bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2- inch -wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide - dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. J. STC -Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound - flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces with the exception of those surfaces where abuse - resistant type is specified. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. B. Single -Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall /partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions /walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire - resistance -rated assembly. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - Page 5 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. On Z- furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4 -inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile. C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. Curved -Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings. D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. E. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3: Panels that are substrate for wall covering (vinyl). 4. Level 5: At all panel surfaces exposed to view. E. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. F. Glass -Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - Page 6 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non - drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - Page 7 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 093000 - SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING AND CRACK ISOLATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sheet membrane waterproofing and crack isolation for interior installations receiving ceramic tile finishes. 2. Sheet membrane waterproofing and crack isolation for exterior installations receiving ceramic tile finishes. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108.13 - Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin -Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone. B. ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin -Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation. C. ANSI A118.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin -Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation. D. ASTM C 627 - Evaluating Ceramic Floor Tile Installation Systems Using the Robinson -Type Floor Tester. E. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. F. ASTM E 96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. G. TCNA Handbook - TCNA Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each specified product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include details sheet membrane waterproofing installation, with flashings and terminations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality - control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET MEMBRANE INTERIOR WATERPROOFING AND CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. Sheet Membrane: ANSI A118.10; composite sheet membrane made from an alloy of non - plasticized chlorinated polyethylene (CPE) with non woven fiber laminated to both sides. 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Noble Company. 2. Basis of Design Product: NobleSeal TS. B. Performance: 1. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM ASTM E 96/E96M, Procedure E; maximum 0.15 perms. 2. Crack Isolation: Rated "High Performance" in the System Crack Resistance portion of ANSI A118.12. 2.2 ACCESSORIES SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING AND CRACK ISOLATION 093000 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX A. Bonding Mortar: 1. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. B. Bonding Adhesive: Type recommended by sheet membrane manufacturer. 1. Basis of Design Product: NobleBond EXT. C. Mortar Bed: 1. Latex Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset): ANSI A108.02. D. Seam Sealant: Waterproof type recommended by sheet membrane manufacturer. 1. Basis of Design Product: NobleSealant 150. E. Perimeter Sealant: ASTM C 920, construction sealant, type recommended by sheet membrane manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for unacceptable conditions affecting installation of sheet membrane and tile. B. Correct unacceptable conditions before installing sheet membrane. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Examine, prepare, and test concrete floors for finish flooring installation in accordance with ASTM F 710. Perform one moisture emission test in accordance with ASTM F 1869 and one alkalinity test for every 2,000 sf. Obtain instructions corrective measures from flooring and adhesive manufacturers when test results are not within specified limits. 1. Surface Tolerance: Maximum variation from plane of 3/16 inch in 10 feet. a. Floor systems over which tile will be installed shall be in conformance with applicable building codes. 2. When NobleBond EXT is used as a bonding agent: a. Moisture Emission Rate: Maximum is 4 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hours when tested using calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours. b. Relative Humidity: Maximum 85 percent. c. Alkalinity Range: pH of 7.0 to 9.0. B. When tested moisture emission rate exceeds specified maximum, consult membrane manufacturer and bond coat manufacturer for acceptable mitigation methods and materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION - SHEET MEMBRANE INTERIOR WATERPROOFING A. Comply with ANSI A108.13, TCNA Handbook, and the manufacturer's instructions for installation of sheet membrane waterproofing. B. Bonded Installation for Thin -Set Applications: 1. Apply bonding adhesive for full coverage of substrate. 2. Install sheet membrane and fully embed into bonding material. a. A carpet type roller may be used to embed sheet membrane on horizontal surfaces. b. Hand roller or flat side of trowel can be used to embed sheet membrane on vertical surfaces. C. Overlap sheets minimum 2 inches (50 mm) shingle fashion in direction of water drainage. Seal joints watertight. SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING AND CRACK ISOLATION 093000 - Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX D. Turn sheet membrane installed on floors up vertical surfaces minimum 2 inches (50 mm) higher than flood plane and bond to substrate. 1. Shower Walls: When sheet membrane is turned up and terminated behind backer board; extend minimum 3 inches (75 mm) above flood plane and fasten to substrate win no penetrations less than 2 inches (50 mm) above flood plane. E. Extend sheet membrane into floor drains. Cut drain opening in sheet membrane and seal to drain body. Secure membrane with floor drain clamping ring. F. Seal sheet membrane watertight to items penetrating sheet membrane. 3.4 INSTALLATION - SHEET MEMBRANE CRACK ISOLATION A. Comply with ANSI A108.17, TCNA Handbook, and the manufacturers instructions for installation of sheet membrane waterproofing. B. Apply bonding mortar for full coverage of substrate. C. Install sheet membrane and fully embed into bonding material. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of sheet membrane waterproofing installation, plug drains, dam perimeter of waterproofing and fill with water with a minimum deep required by local code and maintain for 24 hours. 1. Inspect waterproofing for leaks. 2. Repair leaks and re -test until watertight. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. Indicate corrective measures required to make installation watertight. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect sheet membrane from pedestrian and vehicular traffic and prolonged exposure to sunlight. END OF SECTION 093000 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING AND CRACK ISOLATION 093000 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 093013 — CERAMIC TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Floor and wall tile in interior applications. 2. Provide patterns indicated or for 20% of all wall and floor tile areas to have random accent tiles. B. This Section includes the following: 1. Porcelain Floor Tile. 2. Porcelain Wall Tile. 3. Porcelain Base Tile. 4. Glazed Wall Tile. C. Related requirements: 1. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for tile backing panels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include tile locations and patterns. Include details and locations of contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. B. Elastomeric sealant sample for Architect's approval of color. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Full -size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Metal corner protector, edge trim, and edge strips in 6 -inch lengths. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Install mockups, if required by Owner, to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. B. Elevated slabs to receive tile shall also include a mortar setting bed over specified waterproofing. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Full -size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each type, color, texture, and size indicated, but not fewer than 10 units. 2. Grout cleaning product — 1 container with instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PORCELAIN FLOOR TILE A. Porcelain Floor Tile: 1. Basis -of- Desiqn Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated on the Drawings. CERAMIC TILING 093013 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Setting Materials: 1. Thin -Set Mortar: ANSI A118.4, latex portland cement. 2. Reinforced Mortar Bed in accordance with ANSI A108.1. C. Grout Materials: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Laticrete, SpectraLOCK PRO Grout. a. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 2.2 PORCELAIN WALL TILE A. Porcelain Wall Tile: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated on the Drawings. B. Setting Materials: 1. Thin -Set Mortar: ANSI A118.4, latex portland cement. 2. Reinforced Mortar Bed in accordance with ANSI A108.1. C. Grout Materials: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Laticrete, SpectraLOCK PRO Grout. a. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 2.3 PORCELAIN BASE TILE A. Porcelain Floor Tile: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated on the Drawings. B. Setting Materials: 1. Thin -Set Mortar: ANSI A118.4, latex portland cement. 2. Reinforced Mortar Bed in accordance with ANSI A108.1. C. Grout Materials: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Laticrete, SpectraLOCK PRO Grout. a. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range 2.4 GLAZED WALL TILE A. Glazed Wall Tile including cove base units, trim and accent units: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated on the Drawings. B. Setting Materials for normal wall applications: 1. Thin -Set Mortar: ANSI A118.4, latex portland cement. 2. Setting Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I, organic. C. Grout Materials: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: Laticrete, SpectraLOCK PRO Grout. a. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Mortar Bed Reinforcing: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches by 0.0162 -inch diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82, except for minimum wire size. B. Elastomeric Sealants: ASTM C 920. 1. Non - Traffic Surfaces: Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786 or approved equal. CERAMIC TILING 093013 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Traffic Surfaces: Tremco, Inc.; THC -900. 3. Colors: Match color of grout in adjacent tile. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Methods: Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA designations indicated. B. Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" applicable to installation methods and setting and grouting materials indicated. C. Waterproofing: Install to produce a waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is securely bonded to substrate. 1. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and has passed testing to determine that it is watertight. D. Cementitious Backer Units: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated, and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11. E. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to produce a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. F. Accurately form intersections and returns. Cut and drill tile without marring visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built -in items to produce straight aligned joints. Fit tile to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. G. Jointing Pattern: Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths. 1. Lay tile in grid pattern with highlight tile as indicated on marked up submittals. H. Joint Widths: Produce uniform joint widths not to exceed 1/8" in floor and wall tile. I. Wainscots: Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. J. Expansion Joints: Form expansion joints and other sealant - filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." K. Grout: Install to comply with ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated. L. Cleaning: After grouting, clean ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of grout and foreign matter. M. Temporary Protective Coating: After setting and grouting of tile provide rosin paper covering for the duration of the construction. 3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Interior Installation Method: slab on grade construction: 1. Mortar in accordance with ANSI A 108.5. 2. Grout in accordance with ANSI A 108.10. CERAMIC TILING 093013 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.3 WALL TILE INSTALLATION A. Interior Installation Method: All walls: 1. Mortar or adhesive in accordance with ANSI A 108.5 2. Grout in accordance with ANSI A 108.10. END OF SECTION 093013 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 095113 — ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ceilings consisting of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual acoustical panels or sections of acoustical panels, suspension systems, and moldings showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of ceiling assembly indicated. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and ad- dresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations for Ceiling Units: Obtain each acoustical ceiling panel from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. D. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the fol- lowing requirements. 1. Fire - response tests were performed by UL, ITS/Warnock Hersey, or another independent testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that performs testing and follow -up services. 2. Surface- burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84. 3. Fire - resistance -rated assemblies, which are indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory," from ITS/Warnock Hersey's "Directory of Listed Products," or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency, are identical in materials and construction to those tested per ASTM E 119. 4. Products are identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agen- cy. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, uno- pened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - Page 1 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized mois- ture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and am- bient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other con- struction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equip- ment, fire - suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protec- tive covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full -size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 per- cent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIS -OF- DESIGN A. Provide the following products or comparable products by another manufacturer, subject to ap- proval by the Architect, at the locations indicated on the drawings: 1. ACOUSTIC PANEL, CL -3 a) Armstrong ULTIMA Tegular 1912 Acoustical Ceiling Panels, 24" x 24 x 5/8 ", square edge, lay -in, white scrubbable vinyl - laminated surfaces, CAC of 35, NRC of .70, ASTM Fire Class A. 2. WASHABLE ACOUSTIC TILE, CL -4 a) USG Interiors, Inc., Clean Room ClimaPlus 10M -100M Acoustical Ceiling Panels, 24" x 24 x 5/8 ", square edge, lay -in, white scrubbable vinyl - laminated surfaces, CAC of 35, NRC of 55. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical rat- ings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring Noise Reduction Coefficient: Type E -400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15 -3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795. B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing ASTM E 1264 pattern designations and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range of products that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical per- formance, edge detail, and size. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - Page 2 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimi- crobial solution consisting of a synergistic blend of substituted ammonium salts of alkylated phos- phoric acids admixed with free alkylated phosphoric acid that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram - positive and gram- negative bacteria. D. Panel Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated in the Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM E 1264 classifications. E. Panel Protection of light fixtures: Use specified acoustical panels to protect light fixtures in listed UL assembly. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal suspen- sion systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. B. Metal Suspension System Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated in the Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3. C. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manu- facturer's standard factory - applied finish for type of system indicated. 1. High- Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high- humidity finishes are indicated. D. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Cast -in -Place and Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicat- ed below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as de- termined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agen- cy. a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors. b Corrosion Protection: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC service condition (mild). 2. Postinstalled Powder- Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with clips or other acces- sory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by test- ing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. E. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc - Coated Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 - inch- diameter wire. F. Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufactur- er's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and sus- pension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. For lay -in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspen- sion member. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - Page 3 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. For narrow -face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer's standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners. 2.4 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, painta- ble, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: 1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies ac- cording to ASTM E 90. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. PL Acoustical Sealant; Chemrex, Inc., Contech Brands. b. AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp. c. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast -in -place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections. 1. Furnish cast -in -place anchors and similar devices to other trades for installation well in ad- vance of time needed for coordinating other work. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less- than - half -width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manu- facturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636. 2. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommenda- tions for Direct -Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings -- Seismic Zones 0 -2." 3. U.B.C.'s "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay -in Panel Ceilings ": U.B.C. Standard 25 -2. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire - resistance -rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - Page 4 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapez- es or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appro- priate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast -in -place hanger inserts, powder- actuated fasteners, or drilled -in anchors that extend through forms into concrete. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without at- taching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into con- crete with cast -in -place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of mold- ings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2. For square -edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of sus- pension system runners and moldings. 3. Paint cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manu- facturer. 4. Install hold -down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire - resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written in- structions, unless otherwise indicated or required. 5. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire - resistance -rated assembly. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - Page 5 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspen- sion system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - Page 6 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 096400 - WOOD SPORTS -FLOOR ASSEMBLIES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Related work specified under other sections. (A cross - reference should be incorporated in these sections.) 1. Concrete and Concrete Finishing - Section 033000. a. Concrete Slab Depression: 2 1/4" using 25/32" flooring and subfloor. b. Surface Finish: steel troweled and finished smooth. c. Concrete Tolerance: +/- 1/8" in radius of 10'. d. Floor Flatness and Floor Levelness (FF and FL) numbers are not recognized. e. Compressive Strength: Concrete shall be a minimum of 3,000 psi and a maximum of 4000 psi compressive strength after 28 days. Concrete shall be free of washed river gravel, pea gravel, flint or hardener additives. No lightweight concrete. f. High spots shall be ground level and low spots shall be filled in with approved leveling compound by the general contractor to meet the tolerance above. 2. Membrane Waterproofing and Dampproofing - Section 072600. a. Concrete subfloors on or below grade shall be adequately waterproofed beneath the slab and at the perimeter walls and on the earth side of below grade walls by general contractor using suitable type membrane. b. Sand -Poly -Sand slab construction is not an acceptable construction. 3. Game Standard Inserts - Section 116623. 1.02 REFERENCES A. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association B. MFMA PUR — Performance Uniformity Requirements C. DIN 108032 (part 2) 2001 - Performance Test — These tests are superseded A,B & C D. DIN 108032 (part 2) 1991 - Performance Test E. ASTM F2772 - Athletic Performance Properties of Indoor Sports Floor Systems F. EN 14904 — European Committee for Standardization — Surfaces for Sports areas G. ASTM F2772 - Athletic Performance Properties of Indoor Sports Floor Systems H. FIBA — International Basketball Federation I. FSC — Forest Stewardship Council 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Floor System Manufacturer Qualifications 1. Basis of design shall be Defender floor system as provided by Robbins Sports Surfaces, www.robbinsfloor.com, (800- 543 -1913) 2. Manufacturer shall be an established firm experienced in field and have been in business or a minimum of ten (10) years; Robbins, Inc. or an approved equal. 3. Manufacturer will be a member in good standing of the Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (MFMA). B. Floor Contractor /Installer Qualifications and Certifications WOOD SPORTS -FLOOR ASSEMBLIES 096400 - Page 1 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170303 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. The flooring contractor shall be a Robbins Accredited Installation with MFMA Accredited Installer(s) on -site for the duration of the wood floor installation; or, a contractor approved by Robbins Sports Surfaces. 2. Flooring contractor shall submit a list of at least three completed projects of similar magnitude and complexity completed under current corporate identity. C. Surface Appearance (available option) 1. Expansion spaces will not exceed 1/64" at time of installation and will be spread evenly across the floor with each row of flooring. 2. Expansion spacing will be installed to allow for normal expected increases in Equilibrium Wood Moisture Content (EMC). D. Floor System Performance 1. Defender meets or exceeds criteria of the following performance criteria: a. MFMA PUR b. DIN 18032 Part2 2001 c. DIN 18032 Part2 1991 d. ASTM F2772 Sport Floor Standards e. FIBA International Standards f. EN 14904 Standards 2. Independent testing report showing the system passing all criteria shall be provided as part of the bid qualification process and submittal process. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Specification and Drawings 1. Submit Robbins Defender specification sheet. 2. Submit Robbins Defender drawings as required. B. Sample 1. Submit one (1) sample of Defender, if requested by architect C. Concrete Guidelines 1. Submit MFMA Recommendations for correct preparation, finishing and testing of concrete subfloor surfaces to receive wood flooring. D. Maintenance Guidelines 1. Submit copy of Maintenance Instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials 1. Materials shall not be delivered, stored or installed until all masonry, painting, plastering tilework, marble and terrazzo work is complete and all overhead mechanical work, lighting, backstops, scoreboards are installed. Room temperature of 55 -80 degrees Fahrenheit (13 to 27 degrees Celsius) and relative humidity of 35 -50 % are to be maintained. Ideal installation /storage conditions are the same as those that will prevail when building is occupied 2. Materials shall not be stored at the installation location unless the in -slab relative humidity level for the concrete slab is 85% or lower before installation. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS - SEQUENCY A. Do not install floor system until concrete has been cured 60 days and the requirements in paragraph 1.05 A are obtained. B. General Contractor is responsible to ensure slab is clean and free of all dirt and debris prior to floor installation beginning. WOOD SPORTS -FLOOR ASSEMBLIES 096400 - Page 2 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170303 • • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Permanent heat, light and ventilation shall be installed and operating during and after installation. Maintain a temperature range of 55 to 80 degrees Fahrenheit and a relative humidity range of 35 to 50 %. Consult MFMA guidelines for further information. D. After floors are finished, area to be kept locked by general contractor to allow curing time for the finish. If after required curing time general contractor or owner requires use of gym, he shall protect the floor by covering with non - fibered kraft paper or red rosin paper with taped joints, until acceptance by owner (or owner's agent) of complete gymnasium floor. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Guarantee shall not cover damage caused in whole or in part by casualty, ordinary wear and tear, abuse, use for which material is not designed, faulty construction of the building, settlement of the building walls, failure of the other contractors to adhere to specifications, separation of the concrete slab and excessive dryness or excessive moisture from humidity, spillage, migration through the slab or wall, or any other source. B. Robbins, Inc. hereby warrants the Defender material to be free from manufacturing defects for a period of 1 year. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied including but not limited to any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, and of any other obligations on the part of Robbins. In the event of breach of any warranty, the liability of Robbins shall be limited to repairing or replacing Defender material and system components supplied by Robbins and proven to be defective in manufacture, and shall not include any other damages, either direct or consequential. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Vapor Barrier 1. 6 -mil polyethylene. B. Subfloor 1. Factory assembled Defender panel. 2. Defender Panel Connectors. 3. Anti- Squeak Sleeves. C. Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (MFMA) Wood Flooring 1. Specie: Northern Hard Maple 2. Seasoning: Kiln Dried 3. Matching: Tongue and groove on side -match and end - match. 4. Type: Random Length (RL) 5. Pattern: Straight -lay (One directional) 6. Thickness: 25/32" 7. Width: 2 %" 8. Grade: 2nd and Better 9. Expansion Option: Standard 10. Factory Finish: Factory Finished 11. Treatment: Dri -Vac Treated D. Fasteners 1. Flooring 1 3/4" barbed cleats or staples. 2. Anchors — 2.5" Powers SPIKE® anchors. WOOD SPORTS -FLOOR ASSEMBLIES 096400 - Page 3 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170303 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX E. Finishing materials 1. MFMA approved oil- modified Sealer. 2. MFMA approved oil- modified Finish. F. Gamelines 1. Gameline paint(s) shall be recommended by the finishing materials manufacturer, and must be compatible with the finish. G. Perimeter 1. 3" x 4" ventilating type. Black. H. Receptacle Covers 1. Provide wood covers for in -floor electrical receptacles matching the wood sports - floor. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect concrete slab for proper tolerance and dryness, and report any discrepancies to the general contractor and architect in writing. Slab will be level to within 1/8" (3mm) in a 10' (3m). Moisture content of the concrete slab not exceed 85% in accordance to an In -Slab Relative Humidity test. B. All work required to put the concrete subfloors in acceptable condition shall be the responsibility of the general contractor. C. Subfloor shall be broom cleaned by general contractor. D. Installer shall document all working conditions provided in General Specifications prior to commencement of installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Vapor Barrier 1. Install polyethylene with joints lapped a minimum of 6" and turned up 4" at the walls. B. Subfloor 1. Layout Defender panel assembly at right angle to the flooring. Maintain spacing between panel edges as instructed. Lap panel ends onto designated cross supports, providing 1/4" end joint spacing, and secure with staples and construction adhesive. Stagger subfloor panels as instructed. Provide 2" expansion voids at perimeter and at all vertical obstructions. 2. Add Panel Connectors per manufacturer's instructions. 3. Install solid blocking at doorways, under bleachers in the stacked position, and below portable goals. 4. Install Bleacher Blocking per manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Drill and place anchor spike and sleeve per manufacturer's instructions in each factory- prepared location in the panel. C. Flooring 1. Machine nail maple finish flooring at every sleeper location with end joints properly driven up and proper spacing provided for humidity conditions in specific regions. Consult your local Robbins "Certified" contractor. Provide 2" expansion voids at the perimeter and at all vertical obstructions. 3.03 FINISHING A. Sanding WOOD SPORTS -FLOOR ASSEMBLIES 096400 - Page 4 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170303 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Sand per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. After sanding. buff entire floor using 100 grit screen or equal grit sandpaper, with a heavy -duty buffing machine. 3. Inspect entire area of floor to insure the floor presents a smooth surface without drum stop marks, gouges, streaks or shiners. 4. Vacuum and /or tack floor before first coat of seal. 5. Floor should be clean and completely free of dirt and sanding dust. B. Finishing 1. Gymnasiums (delete if not applicable) a. Apply specified combination of seal, gameline paint, and finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. Buff and vacuum and /or tack between each coat after it dries. c. Apply game lines accurately after the buffing and vacuuming the coated surfaces. Game lines shall be painted between seal coats and finish coats. Layout in accordance with drawings. For game lines, use current rules of association having jurisdiction. Lines shall be straight with sharp edges in colors selected by architect. 3.04 WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Install vent cove base anchored to walls with base cement or screws. Use pre - molded outside corners and neatly mitered inside corner. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean up all unused materials and debris and remove it from the premises. END OF SECTION 096400 WOOD SPORTS -FLOOR ASSEMBLIES 096400 - Page 5 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170303 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 096450 — RESILIENT SPORTS -FLOOR COVERINGS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Supply and installation of the indoor resilient sports -floor coverings. B. References for the correct construction and preparation of concrete slabs to receive resilient flooring. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's promotional brochures, specifications and installation instructions. B. Samples: 1. Submit for selection and approval three (3) sets of the indoor resilient sports -floor coverings, manufacturer's brochures, samples of the colors, textures and styles indicated on the Drawings. 2. Submit color samples of all the available game line paint colors for selection and approval. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Submit three (3) copies of the indoor resilient sports -floor coverings and manufacturer's maintenance instructions. 2. Submit three (3) copies of the material and installation warranties as specified. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. The indoor resilient sports -floor covering shall have been actively marketed fora minimum of ten (10) years. 2. The indoor resilient sports -floor covering shall be manufactured in an ISO 9001 certified plant. 3. The indoor resilient sports -floor covering supplier shall be an established firm experienced in the field and appointed as a distributor by the manufacturer of the indoor resilient multipurpose surfacing. 4. The installer of the indoor resilient sports -floor covering shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the field installing indoor resilient sports -floor coverings and have worked on at least five (5) projects of similar size, type and complexity. B. Certifications: 1. Installer to submit the indoor resilient sports -floor covering manufacturer's or distributor's certification attesting that they are an approved installer of the indoor resilient sports -floor covering. 2. The indoor resilient sports -floor covering manufacturer to submit official ISO 14001 certification for the facility in which the indoor resilient sports - floor covering is manufactured. C. Testing: 1. Tests shall be relative for multi - purpose use with certificates from independent testing resources to be made available upon request. Test results shall be no more than 5 years old and performed according to ASTM and /or EN standard testing procedures. RESILIENT SPORTS -FLOOR COVERINGS 096450 - Page 1 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Material shall not be delivered until all related work is in place and finished and /or proper storage facilities and conditions can be provided and guaranteed stable according to the resilient sports -floor manufacturer's recommendations. B. Storage: 1. Store the material in a secure, clean and dry location. Maintain temperature between 55° and 85° Fahrenheit. Store the indoor resilient sports -floor covering rolls in an upright position on a smooth flat surface immediately upon delivery to jobsite. Rolls shipped in rigid protective cardboard containers can be laid horizontally prior to unpacking and installation. 1.5 PROJECT /SITE CONDITIONS A. It is the responsibility of the general contractor /construction manager to maintain project /site conditions acceptable for the installation of the indoor resilient sports -floor covering. B. The area in which the indoor resilient sports -floor covering will be installed shall be dry and weather tight. Permanent heat, light and ventilation shall be installed and operable. C. All other trades shall have completed their work prior to the installation of the resilient sports -floor covering. The general contractor or Construction Manager shall maintain a secure and clean working environment before, during and after the installation. Suspension of other trades' work may be authorized providing their work will not damage the new flooring. D. Maintain a stable room temperature of at least 65 °F for a minimum of one (1) week prior to, during and thereafter installation. E. An effective low - permeance vapor barrier is placed directly beneath the concrete subfloor. For "on" or "below grade" installations, it is recommended to provide a permanent vapor barrier resistant to long term hydrostatic pressure /moisture exposure. Protrusions should be sealed to prevent moisture migration into the slab. Moisture should not be allowed to enter the slab after the completed construction. F. Concrete subfloor surface pH level within the 7 to 10 range dependent upon installation type. G. Concrete subfloor should be no greater than 1/8" within a 10 ft diameter. This tolerance can be measured in accordance with ASTM E1155. A specified (FF) of 50 and an (FL) of 30 should reach this degree of floor flatness and floor level. There is no numerical correlation between F numbers and the deviation from the straight edge, however the above specified numbers should achieve a flat floor with minimal deviation in the slab. Reference ACI 117 and ACI 302.1R. The general contractor should provide a certificate of compliance with the above recommendations. H. Concrete subfloor must be clean and free of all foreign materials or objects including, but not limited to, curing compounds and sealers. I. Fill cracks, grooves, voids, depressions, and other minor imperfections with Ardex (or equal) cement -based patching /leveling compounds. Follow the manufacturer's directions. Moveable joints must be treated utilizing specific transitioning joint devices depending upon the architect's recommendations. RESILIENT SPORTS -FLOOR COVERINGS 096450 - Page 2 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Follow current ASTM F710 guidelines for the preparation of concrete slabs to receive resilient flooring. J. Refer to ACI 302.2R "Guidelines for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture - Sensitive Flooring Materials' for concrete design and construction. K. Concrete slab shall be fortified with continual steel reinforcement. Fiber reinforcement alone shall not be considered adequate fortification. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Materials: i. The indoor resilient sports -floor coverings shall be covered by the manufacturer against product defects for 8 years. A 3rd party limited warranty shall also be provided as reinforcement. The manufacturer of the indoor resilient sport -floor coverings must provide this warranty upon request. B. Installation: 1. The installation of the indoor resilient sports -floor covering shall be covered against poor workmanship and faulty installation by a two (2) year written, limited warranty provided by the contractor performing /overseeing the installation. 1.7 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS A. Furnish to the owner additional materials containing a total of at least 1% of each different color or design of the indoor resilient sports -floor covering used on the project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS. A. Basis -of- Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Commotion Sports Flooring manufactured by Johnsonite or a comparable product manufactured by one of the following: 1. Gerflor Sports Flooring 2. LG Chem: Rexcourt, 3. Moose Sports Surfaces, Ltd. B. Welding Rod: As supplied by the indoor resilient athletic surfacing manufacturer or supplier. Color to blend with the indoor resilient athletic surfacing color or design. All seams shall be welded to create a monolithic and impermeable surface. C. Adhesive: As approved by the indoor resilient athletic surfacing manufacturer. D. All other installation accessories and related components must be either made or approved by the indoor resilient sports -floor covering manufacturer. Other products may be approved as equal if deemed qualified and submitted in accordance with the General Conditions. Test reports confirming compliance from an Independent Sports Laboratory must be provided along with samples, technical data, installation, maintenance, and warranty prior to acceptance as an alternative product. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION RESILIENT SPORTS -FLOOR COVERINGS 096450 - Page 3 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX A. It is the responsibility of the general contractor /construction manager to ensure that project/site conditions are acceptable for the installation of the indoor resilient athletic flooring. B. Verify that the area in which the indoor resilient athletic surfacing will be installed is dry and weather tight. Verify that permanent heat, light and ventilation is installed and operable. C. Verify that all other work that could cause damage, dirt and dust or interrupt the normal pace of the indoor resilient athletic flooring installation is completed or suspended. D. Verify that there is a stable room temperature of at least 65 °F. E. Verify that there are no foreign materials or objects on the subfloor and that the subfloor is clean and ready for installation. F. Verify that the concrete subfloor surface pH level is within the 7 - 10 range. G. Document the results indicating the slab is within manufacturer's tolerances for slab deviation. 3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Sand the entire surface of the concrete slab. B. Sweep the concrete slab so as to remove all dirt and dust. If a sweeping compound is to be used it must be a sweeping compound that does not contain oil or other items that may inhibit the adhesive bond. C. Slab must be dust free. In the event that dust impairs adhesive bond, priming the slab prior to application of adhesive may be necessary. Follow installation guidelines. 3.3 MOISTURE TESTING OF CONCRETE SUBSTRATES A. General: Comply with flooring manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. b. Perform additional moisture tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3.4 OPTIONS FOR MOISTURE MITIGATION A. If moisture conditions exceed the specified tolerances, use only two - component urethane adhesives approved by and as directed by the resilient sports -floor covering manufacturer for conditions that do not exceed 121bs per ASTM 1869 and /or 92% per ASTM F2170. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. The installation area shall be closed to all traffic and activity for a period to be set by the indoor resilient sports -floor covering installer. The indoor resilient sports -floor covering installation shall not begin until the installer is familiar with the existing conditions. B. All necessary precautions should be taken to minimize noise, smell, dust, the use of hazardous materials and any other items that may inconvenience others. RESILIENT SPORTS -FLOOR COVERINGS 096450 - Page 4 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Install the indoor resilient sports -floor covering in strict accordance with the indoor resilient sports -floor covering manufacturer's written instructions. D. Install the indoor resilient sports -floor covering to eliminate cross seams within the main court playing area, with the exception of color changes. Provide a seam diagram during the submittal process for approval prior to installation. E. Install appropriate threshold plates or transition strips where necessary. 3.6 CLEANING A. Remove all unused materials, tools, and equipment and dispose of any debris properly. Clean the indoor resilient sports -floor covering in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION A. If required, protect the indoor resilient sports -floor covering from damage using coverings approved by the manufacturer until acceptance of work by the customer or their authorized representative. 3.8 RELATED STANDARDS AND GUIDELINES A. ASTM F2170 "Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity In Concrete Floor Slabs Using In -Situ Probes" B. ASTM F710 "Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring" D. ACI 302.2R -06 "Guideline for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture- Sensitive Flooring Materials." END OF SECTION 096450 RESILIENT SPORTS -FLOOR COVERINGS 096450 - Page 5 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 096513 — RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl base. 2. Thermoplastic rubber base. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 096519 "Resilient Tile Flooring" 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard -size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. D. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W /sq. cm. B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL BASE A. Basis -of- Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated on the Drawings. B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). C. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. D. Outside Corners: Preformed. E. Inside Corners: Preformed. F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 THERMOPLASTIC RUBBER BASE A. Basis -of- Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated on the Drawings. B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). C. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. D. Outside Corners: Preformed. E. Inside Corners: Preformed. F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic- cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water- resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl Plank (Linear Vinyl Tile or LVT) Flooring. 2. Rubber Floor Tile. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include flooring layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built -in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns. C. Samples for Verification: Full -size units of each color and pattern of flooring required. D. Seam Samples: For seamless - installation technique indicated and for each flooring product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6 -by -9 -inch Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. E. Product Schedule: For flooring. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of flooring to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of flooring installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for flooring installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. RESILIENT FLOORING 096519 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W /sq. cm. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store flooring on flat surfaces. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after flooring installation. E. Install flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL PLANK FLOORING A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated on the Drawings. B. Standard: ASTM F 1066, BS EN 649, BS EN 654. C. Colors and Patterns: See Drawings. 2.2 RUBBER FLOOR TILE A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated on the Drawings. B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1344. C. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic- cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water- resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. RESILIENT FLOORING 096519 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install flooring until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 RESILIENT FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing flooring. B. Lay out flooring from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one -half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay flooring perpendicular to side walls of rooms. C. Match flooring for color and pattern by selecting flooring from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed flooring. 1. Lay flooring in pattern of colors and sizes indicated. D. Scribe, cut, and fit flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built -in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend flooring to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion -joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. H. Adhere flooring to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. RESILIENT FLOORING 096519 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of flooring. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing flooring installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect flooring products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from flooring surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply two coats. E. Cover flooring until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096519 RESILIENT FLOORING 096519 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 096623 — RESINOUS URETHANE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. , Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resinous urethane flooring system and base. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to the flooring system, but not limited to, the following: a. Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades. b. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include flooring system installation requirements. Include plans, elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other work. Show layout of the following: 1. Divider strips. 2. Control -joint strips. 3. Accessory strips. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Material Certificates: For each type of flooring material or product, from manufacturer. C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: Maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by the flooring manufacturer as qualified to install the manufacturer's product. B. Source Limitations: Obtain materials from single source from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. RESINOUS URETHANE FLOORING 096623 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in supplier's original wrappings and containers, labeled with source's or manufacturer's name, material or product brand name, and lot number if any. B. Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well - ventilated, dry area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures (no less than 60 F and no more than 90 F), humidity and direct sunlight. C. Keep copies of the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all components on site and available for review by all personnel. D. Provide adequate disposal facilities for non - hazardous waste generated during installation of the flooring system. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions required for epoxy quartz flooring installation. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions by field measurements before fabrication. C. Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during installation. D. Provide adequate ventilation for the application work area. E. Remove all open flames and spark producing equipment from work area prior to commencement of application. F. Close spaces to traffic during application and for not less than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESINOUS URETHANE FLOORING SYSTEM. A. Basis -of- Desiqn Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hybri -Flex MC Macro Chip, 100% solids decorative chip flooring system manufactured by Dur -A -Flex, Inc., or a comparable product by another manufacturer subject to approval by the Architect and the Owner. 1. System Materials: a. Body Coat: 1/8" -inch POLY -CRETE MD SL. b. Broadcast Coats: 16 mil CRYL -A -GLAZE G201 c. Topcoats: Two (2) 16 mil CRYL -A -TOP T301 yielding total nominal system thickness of 3/16 ". 2. Formulated Mix Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions, including levelness tolerances, have been corrected. RESINOUS URETHANE FLOORING 096623 - Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances, including oil, grease, and curing compounds, that might impair bond. Provide clean, dry, and neutral substrate for application. B. Concrete Slabs: 1. Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form - release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with flooring system. a. Shot -blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup. b. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to the flooring system manufacturer's written recommendations. c. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to the flooring system manufacturer's written instructions. C. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture -vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests indicated below. a. Test Method: Test for moisture content by method recommended in writing by the flooring system manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3.3 RESINOUS EPDXY FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with the flooring system manufacturer's recommendations for flooring and accessory installation. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cure flooring material in compliance with manufacturer's directions, taking care to prevent their contamination during stages of application and prior to completion of the curing process. B. Remove masking. Perform detail cleaning at floor termination, to leave cleanable surface for subsequent work of other sections. END OF SECTION 096623 RESINOUS URETHANE FLOORING 096623 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 096813 — TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for carpet tile installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Pattern type, location, direction, and starting point. 2. Insets and borders. 3. Transition, and other accessory strips. 4. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each for each carpet and exposed accessory and for each color and pattern required. D. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Mockups: Install mockups, if required by Owner, to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions: Temperature and Humidity." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet tile over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by manufacturer. D. Provide certification of moisture test before starting installation. E. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tile, install carpet tile before installing these items. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Carpet Tile Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet from unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent Toss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS TILE CARPETING 096813 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full tiles equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI 104, Section "Direct Glue- Down ". B. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. C. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. END OF SECTION 096813 TILE CARPETING 096813 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 099100 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and ironwork, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory- finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Acoustical wall panels. c. Toilet enclosures. d. Lockers. f. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. g. Light fixtures. h. Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums. d. Utility tunnels. e. Pipe spaces. f. Duct shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. PAINTING 099100 - Page 1 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code - required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 3. Satin refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 4. Semigloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 5. Full gloss refers to high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross - reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish -coat material indicated. 1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. 3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Concrete: Provide two 4 -inch- square samples for each color and finish. b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4 -by -8 -inch samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. c. Painted Wood: Provide two 12 -inch- square samples of each color and material on hardboard. d. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4 -by -8 -inch samples of natural- or stained -wood finish on actual wood surfaces. e. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4 -inch square samples of flat metal and two 8 -inch long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. PAINTING 099100 - Page 2 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full -coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating and substrate required on the Project. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples. 1. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of wall surface. b. Small Areas and Items: The Architect will designate an item or area as required. 2. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply coatings in this room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as specified. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. 3. Final approval of colors will be from job - applied samples. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well - ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F. B. Apply solvent- thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F. PAINTING 099100 - Page 3 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. At the conclusion of the project and as a part of Project Closeout, submit a summary list of all paint products used on the project. List manufacturer, paint name, paint color, specific paint mix and location where additional quantities may be purchased. B. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory - sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with extra paint materials in the quantities indicated below: a. Exterior, Flat Acrylic Paint: One case of each color applied. b. Exterior, Low - Luster Acrylic Finish: One case of each color applied. c. Exterior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 2 gal. of each color applied. d. Exterior, Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 gal. of each color applied. e. Interior, Flat Acrylic Paint: One case of each color applied. f. Interior, Low - Luster Acrylic Finish: One case of each color applied. g. Interior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 2 gal. of each color applied. h. Interior, Full -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 1 gal. of each color required. 2. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules. B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: 1. PPG Paints (PPG). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best - quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint - material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect. PAINTING 099100 - Page 4 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral- fiber - reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast - cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. PAINTING 099100 - Page 5 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC -SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop - applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire - brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum -based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors; surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built -in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. PAINTING 099100 - Page 6 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field- finished casework to match exterior. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. 6. Motors and mechanical equipment. 7. Accessory items. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. 3. Panelboards. PAINTING 099100 - Page 7 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass- smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. L. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative material analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. c. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. I. Color retention. m. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. PAINTING 099100 - Page 8 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint- spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Stucco and concrete,: Provide the following finish systems over exterior stucco and concrete: 1. Satin, Acrylic- Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Alkali- resistant, exterior, acrylic -latex primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of 1.2 mils to 1.5 mils. 1) PPG Paints:4 -603 Perma -Crete Interior /Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Satin, exterior, acrylic -latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) PPG Paints 4 -22 Perma -Crete apply at a total dry film thickness of 3.2 mils to 5.0 mils. 2) PPG Paints PP3939 series Portercept Satin apply at a total dry film thickness of 1.4mils. B. Stucco and concrete: Exterior Walls (Accent Color). 1. Provide the following finish systems over exterior stucco and concrete Satin, Acrylic - Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. 1) Primer; Alkali- resistant, exterior, acrylic -latex primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of 1.2 mils to 1.5 mils. a. PPG Paints: 4 -603 Perma -Crete Interior /Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant Primer. 2) First and Second Coats: Satin, exterior, acrylic -latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. b. PPG Paints; PP769 PERMANIZER® Satin Exterior Acrylic Coating apply at a total dry film thickness of 2.0 - 2.5mils per coat. C. Galvanized Steel Guardrailing Supports, Connectors, and Concrete Deck Edge Galvanized Steel Closure Angle at Second Floor Balcony, see architectural drawings for more information. a. Prime Coat: CoraflonTM ADS Epoxy Primer /Intermediate ADS573 /ADS574 3.0 apply at a total dry film thickness of 5.0 Mils DFT. b. Finish Coat: CoraflonTM ADS apply at a total dry film thickness of 1.5 to 2.0 DFT per instructions on the tech data sheet. D. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop - primed items. 1. Full - Gloss, Alkyd - Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust - inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Rust - inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of 2 -2.5 mils. 1) PPG Paints: 4360 Devguard high solids, rust - inhibitive, int /ext. alkyd primer. PAINTING 099100 - Page 9 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX b. First and Second Coats: Full- gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not Tess than 1.5 to 2.5 mils. 1) PPG: 95 -5012 Sil- Shield Silicone Alkyd Enamel High Gloss E. Exposed structural steel: Full - Gloss, Urethane finish: 2 finish coats over a rust - inhibitive primer. Prime Coat: CoraflonTM ADS Epoxy Primer /Intermediate ADS573 /ADS574 apply at a dry film thickness of 3.0 - 5.0 Mils. Finish Coat: CoraflonTM ADS @ 1.5 to 2.0 DFT per instructions on the tech data sheet. 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry block units: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic - Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler: High - performance, latex- based, block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not Tess than 5.0 mils. 1) PPG Paints :6 -7 Speedhide Interior /Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic - latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than Finish and Second Coat; 1) PPG Paints; PITT - GLAZE® WB1 Interior Semi -Gloss Pre - Catalyzed Water -Borne apply at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. B. Gypsum Board and Gypsum Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. At Vertical Surfaces: Low - Luster, Acrylic - Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Latex - based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not Tess than 1.2 mils . 1) PPG Paints 6 -2 Speedhide Interior Latex Sealer Quick- Drying. b. First and Second Coats: Low - luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic - latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not Tess than 1.5 mils. 1) PPG Paints: PP389 HI -HIDEO EGGSHELL Interior Latex Wall & Trim Paint. 2. At Overhead Horizontal Ceilings and Soffits: Matte finish, Acrylic - Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Latex - based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils . 1) PPG Paints 6 -2 Speedhide Interior Latex Sealer Quick- Drying b. First and Second Coats: Low - luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic - latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 1) PPG Paints PP369 HI -HIDE® CERAMIC MATTE Interior Latex. 3) Overhead Horizontal Interior Bathroom Ceilings: Eggshell Finish a. Primer: Latex - based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not Tess than 1.2 mils . 1) PPG Paints 6 -2 Speedhide Interior Latex Sealer Quick- Drying PAINTING 099100 - Page 10 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX b. First and Second Coats: Low - luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic - latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not Tess than 1.5 mils. 1) PPG Paints; PITT- GLAZE®WB1 Interior EGGSHELL Pre - Catalyzed Water- Borne. C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Full - Gloss, Acrylic- Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Quick- drying, rust - inhibitive, alkyd -based or epoxy -metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2 -2.5 mils. 1) PPG: Devguard® 4360 Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Full- gloss, acrylic - latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils per coat. 1) PPG Paints; PP909 ADVANTAGE."' 900 HIGH GLOSS Int /Ext Acrylic Enamel. Upgrade 2) Amercoat PSX One High Solids, Single Pack Acrylic Polysiloxane a total dry film thickness of 2 — 3 mils per coat. E. Interior masonry units at toilet rooms and janitor's closets: Provide the following finish systems: 1. Severe Environment (Semigloss Finish): One finish coat over an intermediate coat and a block filler. a. Block Filler: Acrylic or epoxy block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer as sufficient to fill pores. 1) PPG Paints: Amerlock 400 BF Epoxy masonry block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 4- 8mils, unless otherwise indicated. 1) PPG Paints: Amerlock 2 Surface tolerant VOC compliant epoxy. c. Topcoat: Semigloss epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 4- 8mils, unless otherwise indicated. 1) PPG Paints: Amerlock 2 Surface tolerant VOC compliant epoxy. END OF SECTION 099100 PAINTING 099100 - Page 11 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 099623 — GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of Graffiti Resistant Coating on the following substrates: 1. Interior Substrates: a. Concrete, vertical surfaces. b. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). c. Toilet Partitions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099113 "Painting" for general field painting. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: Cross - reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Coatings: 5 percent, but not Tess than 1 gal. of each material applied. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each coating system. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 099623 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well - ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained between 45 and 100 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are between 40 and 90 deg F. B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each coating system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. Products shall be of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If coating materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible. 2.3 PRODUCTS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Defacer Eraser Graffiti Wipe multi - surface graffiti remover manufactured by PROSOCO or a comparable product subject to approval by the Architect and the Owner. 1. Apply this product, per manufacturer's instructions, on all interior exposed concrete masonry wall surfaces continuous from finish floor up to 8 feet above finish floor. GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 099623 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing application, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface- applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and encapsulants. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content, alkalinity of surfaces, or alkalinity of mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. B. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations. GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 099623 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. END OF SECTION 099623 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 099623 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of signs: 1. Room identification panel signs. 2. Pin mounted dimensional characters. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities" for temporary project identification signs. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large - scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large -scale details of wording and lettering layout. 2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections. D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. 1. Samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture: a. 1/8- inch -thick Matte Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of material including the full range of colors available for each material required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in- service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Manufacturers of Panel Signs: SIGNAGE 101400 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX a. Best Manufacturing Company. b Mohawk Sign Systems. c. Southwell Company d. GC Graphic Communications 2.2 MATERIALS A. For Permanent Room Signage: 1/8 -inch- thick, clear non -glare acrylic with eased edges. B. Letters and Numbers — Machine cut copy from opaque acrylic sheet and chemically welded onto sign face, raised 1/32 -inch, upper case Sans Serif font. Grade II Braille manufactured under Raster insertion process. Raised letters and Braille shall be formed as integral part of sign face. C. Mounting: Attach sign to vertical surfaces using methods as directed by the manufacturer including mechanical fasteners, double sided foam tape and silicone adhesive. Use non - ferrous metal hot - dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in- place anchors. D. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet: Use non - fading colored coatings, including inks and paints for copy and background colors, that are recommended by the manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are UV stable. 2.3 ROOM - IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNS A. Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. See Schedule on drawings for location and copy. 1. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally. B. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to conform with the following requirements: 1. Edge Condition: Eased. 2. Corner Condition: Rounded corners. C. Laminated Sign Panels: Permanently laminate 1/8 -inch acrylic face panels to backing sheets of material and thickness indicated using the manufacturer's standard process. D. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated for size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices. All signs are to comply with American Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines. Lettering to be Helvetica Medium Caps. F. For Permanent Room Signs: Chemically weld letters onto sign face, raised 1/32 -inch, upper case Sans Serif font. G. See Article 3.4, Room Identification Panel Signage Schedule, for signage locations and copy. 2.4 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast Tugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. Comply with the following requirements. 1. Character Material: Aluminum. 2. Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 3. Color(s): As indicated. 4. Mounting: Concealed studs, noncorroding for substrates encountered. B. Dimensional Character Sign Schedule: 1. Sign Type: Building Address. SIGNAGE 101400 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Sign Size: As indicated on drawings. 3. Character Size: As indicated on drawings. 4. Text /Message: See Signage Schedule this section. 2.5 FINISHES A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. B. Wall- Mounted Signs: Attach signs to wall surfaces by mechanical means using exposed fasteners into wall or into inserts as required by construction of wall. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. 3.3 ROOM IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE SCHEDULE A. The following schedule is subject to revision per Owner requirements. ROOM NUMBER , SIGNAGE COPY REMARKS 102 Staff Office ADA type, one line tactile letters and one line Braille - typical for all room Identification signs - 3" x 9" approximately depending on extent of signage copy 103 Director's Office ADA type 104 Fitness Room ADA type 105 Gymnasium ADA type 106 Life Guard Office ADA type 107 Storage ADA type 108 109 Women's Toilet Family Toilet Unisex Pictogram & ISA Symbol (International Symbol of Accessibility) Unisex Pictogram & ISA Symbol (International Symbol of Accessibility) 110 Unisex Toilet Unisex Pictogram & ISA Symbol (International Symbol of Accessibility) 111 Men's Toilet Unisex Pictogram & ISA Symbol (International Symbol of Accessibility) 112 Janitor Closet ADA type 113 Multi- Purpose Room ADA type 114 Flex Room ADA type 115 Break Room ADA type 116 Storage Room ADA type 117 Electrical Equipment ADA type SIGNAGE PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 101400 - Page 3 of 4 VERSION: 161104 LOCATION r SIGNAGE COPY See Drawings MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX REMARKS Building Name: Individual twelve (12) inch high characters stud mounted into concrete masonry exterior wall. END OF SECTION 101400 SIGNAGE 101400 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes solid - polymer units as follows: 1. Toilet Enclosures: Overhead braced, Floor anchored. 2. Urinal Screens: Floor anchored. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment- mounted toilet accessories. 2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment- mounted grab bars. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. D. Samples for Verification: Of each type of color and finish required for units, prepared on 3 -inch- square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements in CID -A -A- 60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID - POLYMER UNITS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Ampco. 3. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 4. Capitol Partitions, Inc. 5. Comtec Industries. 6. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 7. Global Steel Products Corp. 8. Metpar Corp. 9. Santana Products, Inc. 10. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing Company. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 11. Weis - Robart Partitions, Inc. C. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high- density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. 1. Color and Pattern: Two colors and patterns in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard and premium range of colors and patterns. D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. E. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Full- Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; polymer or extruded aluminum. a. Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching pilaster. F. Heat -Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded- aluminum strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid - polymer components to prevent burning. G. Overhead Cross Bracing for Ceiling -Hung Units: As recommended by manufacturer and fabricated from solid polymer. In no case shall the cross bracing extend below 80" above finish floor. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy -duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Chrome - plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear anodized aluminum. B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded- aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. C. Support Posts for Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum post with floor shoe for anchoring to floor construction. D. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome - plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft - resistant -type heads. Provide sex -type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip galvanized or other rust - resistant, protective- coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Overhead - Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. B. Floor- and - Ceiling- Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant anchoring assemblies complete with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage. C. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24 -inch wide in- swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36 -inch wide out - swinging doors with a minimum 32 -inch wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self - closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface- mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber - tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment- mounted accessories. Note that on any accessible stall doors, the hook shall be mounted at 48" above finish floor. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber - tipped bumper at out - swinging doors. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out - swinging doors that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 2.4 EXTRA QUANTITIES A. Turn over to Owner at Project Closeout enough hardware to completely install two compartments, including pilaster shoes, wall to panel brackets, panel to panel brackets, latches, hinges, etc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 3/4 inch. 2. Continuous Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with continuous brackets. a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. B. Overhead - Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. C. Floor- Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches (50 mm) into structural floor, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position. D. Wall -Hung and Post - Supported Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in- swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out - swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer and provide protection ad necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 102239 - FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated, acoustical panel partitions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach supporting tracks to overhead structural system. 2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for fire -rated assemblies and sound barrier construction above the ceiling at track. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. B. STC: Sound Transmission Class. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Completed LEED Material Documentation Sheet (LMDS) (located in Section 018113 "Sustainable Design Requirements ") for each material. 2. For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages of weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. 3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 4. Certified Wood: Wood products shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD -01 -00 and FSC STD -40 -004. Chain -of- Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs. 5. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde C. Shop Drawings: For operable panel partitions. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Textile Facing Material: Full width by not less than 36- inch -long section of fabric from dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. 2. Panel Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard -size unit, not less than 3 inches square. FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - Page 1 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Partition track, track supports and bracing, switches. turning space, and storage layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which suspension systems are attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Smoke detectors. f. Access panels. B. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. D. Product Certificates: For each type of operable panel partition. E. Product Test Reports: For each operable panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. F. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable panel partitions to include in maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. b. Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operating components. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Panel Finish - Facing Material: Furnish full width in quantity to cover both sides of two panels when installed. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels. FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - Page 2 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Faulty operation of operable panel partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated: 1. Sound - Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound - transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated. 2. Noise - Reduction Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly, identical to partition tested for STC, tested for sound - absorption performance according to ASTM C 423, and rated for not less than the NRC indicated. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with one of the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface- Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame- Spread Index: 25 or Tess. b. Smoke - Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Fire Growth Contribution: Complying with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B Protocol. 2.2 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories. 1. Basis -of- Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model 642 Operable Partition by Hufcor or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: a) Modernfold b) Panelfold B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, continuously hinged panels. C. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in -place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities. D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements. 1. Panel Width: Standard widths. E. STC: Not less than 54. F. NRC: Not less than 0.50. FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - Page 3 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX G. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. H. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 2.3 SEALS A. General: Provide seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance requirements and the following: 1. Manufacturer's standard seals unless otherwise indicated. 2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage. 3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is extended and closed. B. Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous- contact, extruded -PVC seal exerting uniform constant pressure on track or PVC - faced; mechanical, retractable, constant - force - contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on track when extended. C. Horizontal Bottom Seals: Manufacturer's standard continuous - contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on floor. 2.4 PANEL FINISH FACINGS A. General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire - test - response characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing, using mildew- resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written instructions. B. Surface: Manufacturer's standard vinyl / steel. 1. Color /Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tracks: Steel or aluminum mounted directly to overhead structural support, designed for operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage. 1. Panel Guide: Aluminum guide on both sides of the track to facilitate straightening of the panels; finished with factory - applied, decorative, protective finish. 2. Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance. B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball- bearing wheels. C. Track Accessories: As required for operation, storage, track configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with partition assembly specified. D. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish or manufacturer's standard, factory- applied, decorative finish unless otherwise indicated. FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - Page 4 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Pass Doors: Swinging door built into and matching panel finish and thickness, complete with frames and operating hardware. Hinges finished to match other exposed hardware. 1. Accessibility Standard: Fabricate doors to comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1 and the U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA- ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Building and Facilities. 2. Single Pass Door: 36 by 84 inches. 3. Pass Door Hardware: Equip pass door with the following: a) Door Seals. b) Concealed door closer. c) Latchset: Passage set. B. Storage Pocket Door: Full height at end of partition runs to conceal stacked partition; of same materials, finish, construction, thickness, and acoustical qualities as panels; complete with operating hardware and acoustical seals at soffit, floor, and jambs. Hinges in finish to match other exposed hardware. 1. Manufacturer's standard method to secure storage pocket door in closed position. 2. Rim Lock: Key- operated lock cylinder, keyed to master system, to secure storage pocket door in closed position. Include two keys per lock. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable panel partitions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable panel partition manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation. C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings. D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable. E. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable. F. Light- Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints and full closure along top and bottom seals. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning. FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - Page 5 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions. END OF SECTION 102239 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - Page 6 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 102239 - FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated, acoustical panel partitions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach supporting tracks to overhead structural system. 2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for fire -rated assemblies and sound barrier construction above the ceiling at track. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. B. STC: Sound Transmission Class. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Completed LEED Material Documentation Sheet (LMDS) (located in Section 018113 "Sustainable Design Requirements ") for each material. 2. For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages of weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. 3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 4. Certified Wood: Wood products shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD -01 -00 and FSC STD -40 -004. Chain -of- Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs. 5. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde C. Shop Drawings: For operable panel partitions. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Textile Facing Material: Full width by not less than 36- inch -long section of fabric from dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. 2. Panel Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard -size unit, not less than 3 inches square. FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - Page 1 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Partition track, track supports and bracing, switches, turning space, and storage layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which suspension systems are attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Smoke detectors. f. Access panels. B. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. D. Product Certificates: For each type of operable panel partition. E. Product Test Reports: For each operable panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. F. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable panel partitions to include in maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. b. Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operating components. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Panel Finish- Facing Material: Furnish full width in quantity to cover both sides of two panels when installed. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels. FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - Page 2 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Faulty operation of operable panel partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated: 1. Sound - Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound - transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated. 2. Noise - Reduction Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly, identical to partition tested for STC, tested for sound - absorption performance according to ASTM C 423, and rated for not Tess than the NRC indicated. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with one of the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface- Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame- Spread Index: 25 or Tess. b. Smoke - Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Fire Growth Contribution: Complying with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B Protocol. 2.2 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories. 1. Basis -of- Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model 642 Operable Partition by Hufcor or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: a) Modernfold b) Panelfold B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, continuously hinged panels. C. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in -place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities. D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements. 1. Panel Width: Standard widths. E. STC: Not Tess than 54. F. NRC: Not less than 0.50. FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - Page 3 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX G. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. H. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 2.3 SEALS A. General: Provide seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance requirements and the following: 1. Manufacturer's standard seals unless otherwise indicated. 2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage. 3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is extended and closed. B. Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous- contact, extruded -PVC seal exerting uniform constant pressure on track or PVC - faced, mechanical, retractable, constant - force - contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on track when extended. C. Horizontal Bottom Seals: Manufacturer's standard continuous - contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on floor. 2.4 PANEL FINISH FACINGS A. General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire - test - response characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing, using mildew- resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written instructions. B. Surface: Manufacturer's standard vinyl / steel. 1. Color /Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tracks: Steel or aluminum mounted directly to overhead structural support, designed for operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage. 1. Panel Guide: Aluminum guide on both sides of the track to facilitate straightening of the panels; finished with factory- applied, decorative, protective finish. 2. Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance. B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball- bearing wheels. C. Track Accessories: As required for operation, storage, track configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with partition assembly specified. D. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish or manufacturer's standard, factory- applied, decorative finish unless otherwise indicated. FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - Page 4 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Pass Doors: Swinging door built into and matching panel finish and thickness, complete with frames and operating hardware. Hinges finished to match other exposed hardware. 1. Accessibility Standard: Fabricate doors to comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1 and the U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA- ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Building and Facilities. 2. Single Pass Door: 36 by 84 inches. 3. Pass Door Hardware: Equip pass door with the following: a) Door Seals. b) Concealed door closer. c) Latchset: Passage set. B. Storage Pocket Door: Full height at end of partition runs to conceal stacked partition; of same materials, finish, construction, thickness, and acoustical qualities as panels; complete with operating hardware and acoustical seals at soffit, floor, and jambs. Hinges in finish to match other exposed hardware. 1. Manufacturer's standard method to secure storage pocket door in closed position. 2. Rim Lock: Key- operated lock cylinder, keyed to master system, to secure storage pocket door in closed position. Include two keys per lock. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable panel partitions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable panel partition manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation. C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings. D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable. E. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable. F. Light- Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints and full closure along top and bottom seals. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning. FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - Page 5 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions. END OF SECTION 102239 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 102239 - Page 6 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 102800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Public -use washroom accessories. 2. Warm -air hand and hair dryers. 3. Childcare accessories. 4. Underlavatory guards. 5. Custodial accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312 -inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359 - inch minimum nominal thickness. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot -dip zinc coating. D. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper - and -theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. F. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). G. Mirrors: Bright polished stainless steel. H. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile- butadiene- styrene resin formulation. 2.2 PUBLIC -USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). B. See Schedule on Drawings for Toilet Accessories not specified here. C. Mirror Unit: 1. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft - resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. One - piece, galvanized steel, wall- hanger device with spring- action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. 2. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2.3 WARM -AIR HAND AND HAIR DRYERS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the warm air electric hand dryer and hair dryer units manufactured by Excel Dryer, Inc. indicated on the Drawings, or comparable products by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Dryer, Inc. 3. American Specialties, Inc. 4. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). 6. World Dryer Corporation. B. Warm -Air Hand and Hair Dryers: TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. ADA Compliance: Under absolutely no circumstances shall the dryer protrude more than 4 inches from the wall surface. Mount unit so that location and position of the activation controls comply with accessibility requirements. 2. Operation — Hand Dryers: Automatically activated when hands are present. 3. Operation — Hair Dryers: Push Button. 4. Electrical Requirements: Verify the manufacturer's power and wiring requirements for each unit selected and approved for installation. Provide the power and wiring specifically required for each type and model of unit selected and approved for installation by the Architect and the Owner. Notify the Architect if information provided on the Drawings or elsewhere in the Technical Specifications Manual conflicts with the power and wiring requirements for the selected and approved units. Coordinate with the Electrical Subcontractor. 2.4 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturer: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product by the Koala Corporation. No substitutions. B. Diaper- Changing Station: 1. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child - protection strap. a. Engineered to support a minimum of 250-lb static load when opened. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches from wall when closed. 3. Operation: By pneumatic shock - absorbing mechanism. 4. Material and Finish: High- density polyethylene in manufacturer's standard color. 5. Liner Dispenser: Built in. 2.5 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. TCI Products. 3. Truebro, Inc. B. Underlavatory Guard: 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded - plastic, white. 2.6 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). B. Utility Shelf: 1. Provide one at each Janitor's closet. 2. Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch and supported by two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside. 3. Size: 16 inches long by 6 inches deep. 4. Material and Finish: Not less than nominal 0.05 -inch thick stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). C. Mop and Broom Holder: 1. Provide one at each Janitor's closet. 2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 3. Length: 36 inches. 4. Hooks: Three 5. Mop /Broom Holders: Four spring - loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05 -inch thick stainless steel. b. Rod: Approximately 1/4 -inch diameter stainless steel. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full - length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion - resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward Toad of at least 250 Ibf when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 102800 TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 104400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire - protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating, classification, material descriptions, dimensions of components and profiles for portable fire extinguishers. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing -in dimensions and details showing recessed -, semirecessed -, or surface- mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction for fire - protection cabinets. B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. D. Shop Drawings: For fire- protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. E. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. F. Product Schedule: For fire - protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed, semirecessed, or surface mounted. Coordinate final fire - protection cabinet schedule with fire- extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers ". B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with the fire extinguisher cabinets, specified in a separate section, to ensure fit and function. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For fire - protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire - protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire - protection cabinets with wall depths. 1.9 SEQUENCING A. Apply decals on field - painted fire - protection cabinets after painting is complete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTABLE, HAND - CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for mounting bracket indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. e. Fire End & Croker Corporation. f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. h. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. i. Moon - American. j. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc. k. Potter Roemer LLC. I. Pyro -Chem; Tyco Safety Products. 2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. Multipurpose Dry - Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL -rated 4 -A: 60 -B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in enameled -steel container. 2.2 FIRE - PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Basis -of- Desiqn Product: Provide "Cosmopolitan Series" recessed fire extinguisher cabinets with #6 satin - finish stainless steel trim and doors, door style; "V" (Vertical Duo), door glazing; clear tempered glass as manufactured by JL Industries (a division of the Activar Construction Products Group) or provide a comparable product by one of the following: a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Potter Roemer LLC. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Cabinet Material: Stainless -steel sheet. D. Recessed Cabinet: 1. Exposed Flat Trim: One -piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). E. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door - operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. F. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire - protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked - enamel finish. G. Materials: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304. a. Finish: No. 6 satin finish. 2. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear). 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire - Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory - drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow -metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Fabricate door frames of one -piece construction with edges flanged. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire - protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire - protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire - protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers and fire - protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Fire - Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire - protection cabinets. If wall thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire - protection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break -glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire - protection cabinets, square and plumb. C. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire - protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire - protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire- protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire - protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory - finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire - protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire - protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 104400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 104416 — FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire - protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers. 3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire - protection cabinets. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire - Protection Cabinets: Include roughing -in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire- protection cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - Page 1 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold- Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear). 2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Amerex Corporation. 2. Ansul Incorporated. 3. Badger Fire Protection. 4. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. 5. Fire End & Croker Corporation. 6. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. 7. JL Industries, Inc. 8. Kidde Fyrnetics. 9. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 10. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico. 11. Moon American. 12. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. 13. Watrous; Div. of American Specialties, Inc. B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each indicated. 1. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard 3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B C. Multipurpose Dry - Chemical Type in Steel Container : UL -rated 4- A:60 -B:C, 5-lb and 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in enameled -steel container. 2.4 FIRE - PROTECTION CABINET A. Manufacturers: 1. Fire End & Croker Corporation. 2. General Accessory Mfg. Co. 3. JL Industries, Inc. 4. Kidde Fyrnetics. 5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 6. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico. 7. Moon American. 8. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. 9. Watrous; Div. of American Specialties, Inc. B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. C. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. D. Cabinet Material: Enameled -steel sheet. 1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet. E. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated. 1. Exposed Flat Trim: One -piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend) of 1/4 to 5/16 inch. F. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. G. Door Material: Steel sheet. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - Page 2 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX H. Door Style: Center glass panel with frame. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear). J. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door - operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1 Provide manufacturer's standard. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. K. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire - protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked - enamel finish. 2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle. 3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire - protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet. 2) Application Process: Pressure - sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Black 4) Orientation: Vertical. L. Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's standard baked - enamel paint for the following: a. Exterior of cabinet door and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. b. Interior of cabinet and door. 2. Steel: Baked enamel. a. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Manufacturers: 1. Amerex Corporation. 2. Ansul Incorporated. 3. Badger Fire Protection. 4. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. 5. Fire End & Croker Corporation. 6. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. 7. JL Industries, Inc. 8. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 9. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. B. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked - enamel finish. 1. Color: Black. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fire - Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - Page 3 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow -metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire - protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one -half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods. B. Factory Priming for Field- Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast - curing, lead- and chromate - free, universal primer, selected for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with substrate and field - applied finish paint system indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field - applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. C. Baked - Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two -coat, baked - enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed. B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire - protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - Page 4 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire - protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below: 1. Fire - Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet. 2. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. B. Fire - Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire - protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire - protection cabinets. The general contractor shall coordinate with the fire extinguisher manufacturer proper wall thickness required for recessed cabinets. If wall thickness is not possible for recessed cabinets, provide semi - recessed fire - protection cabinets. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire - protection cabinets, square and plumb. C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. D. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire - protection specialties are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. Adjust fire- protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire - protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire - protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory - finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire - protection cabinet manufacturer. E. Replace fire- protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - Page 5 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 107300 — ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Design, fabrication, and installation of welded extruded aluminum walkway cover systems. B. Related Section: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete". 2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry ". 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" 4. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ". 1.3 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Design Manual 2010, The Aluminum Association. B. ASCE /SEI 7 -05 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. C. AAMA — American Architectural Manufacturers Association. D. ASTM A500 — Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. E. ASTM B209 — Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. F. ASTM B221 — 08 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. G. ASTM B117 — Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. H. ASTM B429/B429M — 06 Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. I. ASTM D822 — Tests on Paint and Related Coatings Using Filtered Open -Flame Carbon -Arc Exposure Apparatus. J. ASTM D1794 — Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). K. ASTM D3363 — Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. L. Florida Building Code — Building 2014. M. AWS D1.2/D1.2M:2003, Structural Welding Code — Aluminum. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install aluminum canopy, sunshade, and louvered fence assemblies to withstand the effects of Toads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of components including beams, decks, gutters, trim, outriggers, frames, louver blades, posts; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS 107300 - Page 1 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressures (velocity pressures) indicated on Drawings, acting inwards or outwards. Provide attachment to meet wind loads. Attachment to be designed by an Engineer registered in the State of Florida. 2. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. a. Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg F (56 deg C). B. Delegated Design: Provide design of aluminum canopy assemblies, including comprehensive engineering analysis, by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for components and finishes specified. C. Shop drawings signed and sealed by a State of Florida registered engineer. 1. Overall canopy, sunshade, and louvered fencing layout dimensions. 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details showing profiles, angles, and spacing of components; unit dimensions related to concrete masonry column construction and wall openings; profiles of frames and anchorage details and locations. 3. Hashing details pertaining to the aluminum canopies. 4. Show applicable live and wind loads. D. Samples – Submit samples of actual finished aluminum material. F. Certification – Provide letter of compliance certifying that the proposed canopy design and layout meets or exceeds all applicable loadings including, wind load, rain live Toad and dead load, for the project location in accordance with the Florida Building Code, Building, 2007. G. Copy of warranties specified in Paragraph 1.8 for review by Architect. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single- Source Responsibility: If possible, obtain aluminum canopy from one source and by a single manufacturer to be alike in related components and aluminum finish. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years experience in design, fabrication, and production of aluminum canopies, protective covers, and sunshades. C. Installer qualifications: Approved by manufacturer(s) for installation. D. Assemble components in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. E. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of D1.2 "Structural Welding Code — Aluminum". 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. F. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual adjacent construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS 107300 - Page 2 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official in which the manufacturer agrees to repair or replace systems that fail in materials and workmanship within one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under the Contract Documents. Failure includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, coating finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. B. Twenty (20) year warranty for factory finish against cracking, peeling, and blistering under normal use. C. Provide warranties in accordance with Section 01770 — Closeout Procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide canopy assemblies, shown on Drawings, Ditt -Deck Aluminum Walkway Cover manufactured by Dittmer Architectural Aluminum, or by one of the following: 1. Aluminum Techniques, Inc. 2. AVAdek. 3. Awning Works Inc. 4. Mitchell Metals, LLC. 5. West Coast Awnings. 2.2 DESIGN AND ASSEMBLY — ALUMINUM CANOPY ASSEMBLIES A. Mechanically fasten aluminum protective cover using internally welded brackets and concealed stainless steel fasteners. Welded connections can be used if shipping allows. B. Provide extruded gutter at canopy perimeter. Notch beams to receive the extruded gutter to allow decking to sit flush to top of the beam. Provide roll - locked design extruded decking where the extruded cap and pan interlock to make a rigid structure. Crimped decking is not allowed. Roll formed decking is allowed. C. Drain canopies away from building, perpendicular to face, to perimeter gutter and discharge through aluminum downspout adjacent to concrete masonry canopy support column. Provide 1/8 inch per foot slope on deck to allow drainage and eliminate ponding. Align and secure decking to aluminum frame structure. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 1. 6063 alloy, T6 temper. B. Aluminum Plate: ASTM B 209 1. Clear, anodized finish. C. Beams: 1. Open or closed extrusions. 2. Size beams to accommodate applied loadings without over - stress or over - deflection. Minimize size: 4" x 6" at 0.125" thick. D. Decking: 1. Rigid roll - locked design that is self flashing and utilizes interlocking sections. ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS 107300 - Page 3 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Provide extruded decking. 3. Roll formed decking is allowed. E. Gutter: 1. Radius cornered aluminum extrusion. Minimum size: 4" x 6" at 0.093" thick. F. False Fascia: 1. Aluminum extrusion. Minimum size: 1" x 6" at 0.070" thick. G. Flashing: 1. Aluminum sheet finished to match canopy finish. Minimum thickness: 0.040 ". H. Fasteners: 300 series stainless steel with neoprene washers. 1. Deck Screws (rivets not permitted): Type 18 -8 non - magnetic stainless steel sealed with a neoprene "O" ring beneath 5/8" outside dimension, conical washer. 2. Fascia Rivets: Size 3/16" by 1 /z" grip range aluminum rivets with aluminum mandrel. 3. Bolts: All bolts, nuts and washers to be 18 -8 non - magnetic stainless steel. 4. Tek Screws: not permitted. I. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for type of loading and installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. J. Provide clear acrylic protection or bituminous paint protection between aluminum components and concrete and concrete masonry construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prior to fabrication, field measure required dimensions. B. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. C. Provide cast concrete footings for posts in accordance with Section 03300 — Cast -in -Place Concrete and the drawings. D. Provide setting holes for embedment posts. Hole shall be 2 inches minimum greater than post width. 3.2 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, materials, joinery, and performance. B. Assemble in shop, to the greatest extent possible, to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. All welding to be done by heli -arc process. D. Bents shall consist of shop welded one piece units. When size of bents do not permit shipment as a welded unit, concealed mechanical joints may be used. E. Mechanical joints shall consist of stainless steel bolts with a minimum of two (2) bolts per fastening. Bolts and nuts shall be installed in a concealed manner utilizing 1/2" thick by 1 '/" aluminum bolt bars welded to structural members. All such mechanical joints must be detailed on shop drawings showing all locations. ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS 107300 - Page 4 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX F. Roof Deck: Extruded aluminum shapes. interlocking self- flashing sections. Shop fabricate to lengths and panel widths required for field assembly. Depth of sections to comply with structural requirements. Provide shop induced camber in deck units with spans greater than 16' -0" to offset dead load deflections. Internal dams are to be used at non - draining ends of deck. G. Expansion joints, design structure for thermal expansion and contraction. Provide expansion joints as required. H. Exposed rivets used to fasten bottom of fascia to deck to have finish to match fascia. I. Apply a shop applied dip -coat of clear acrylic enamel to each column end terminating in concrete to insulate from electrolytic reaction. Column ends shall be pierced to "key" grout to bent for maximum uplift protection. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Erection: Set roof support frames (bents) into pockets provided in top of footings; set to required elevations, align, plumb, and level; and grout in place with 2,000 p.s.i. Portland Cement grout. Assure that grout fills all voids and "keys" to columns. Fill downspout units with grout to bottom of discharge level. Install aluminum deflectors after grouting. Follow manufacturer's instructions. Match to finish and elevation of adjacent sidewalks. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings. B. Do not install bent, bowed, or otherwise damaged assemblies or components. Remove damaged components from site and replace. C. Secure aluminum canopy assembly to concrete masonry columns and concrete masonry walls with supports and anchorages that will provide the aluminum canopy assembly with adequate support and resistance to wind loads. Repair damage to these concrete masonry columns, concrete masonry walls and finish materials applied to the concrete masonry caused by the installation of the aluminum canopy assemblies. D. Install roof deck sections, accessories and related flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide roof slope for rain drainage without ponding water. Align and anchor roof deck units to structural support frames. E. Install aluminum canopy as close as possible to project completion. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Protect aluminum canopy from damage during construction period by appropriate methods including use of temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by the manufacturer. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore any aluminum canopy, sunshade, and louver fencing assemblies damaged during installation and construction period, so that no evidence remains of correction work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as judged by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes. 3.4 CLEANING A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of aluminum canopy components that are not protected by temporary covering to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Rinse surfaces thoroughly and dry. END OF SECTION 107300 ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS 107300 - Page 5 of 5 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers. 2. Motor - operated roller shades with single rollers. 3. Motor - operated roller shades with dual rollers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. 2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light - blocking shades with a sealant. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations. 1. Motor - Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 10 inches long. D. Roller -Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material, signed by product manufacturer. C. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Roller Shades: Full -size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than [two] <Insert number> units. ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - Page 1 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. See Drawings. B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS A. Basis -of- Design Product: 1. See Drawings. B. Chain- and - Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous -loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated. 1. Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard. a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. c. Chain- Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount. 2. Spring Lift - Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller -shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades. a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb (or for shades as recommended by manufacturer, whichever criteria are more stringent. C. Rollers: Corrosion - resistant steel or extruded- aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - Page 2 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive -end assemblies and idle - end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service. D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated. E. Roller- Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive -end assembly. F. Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material: Light - filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. G. Installation Accessories: 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L- shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband when shade is fully open. 2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 3. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at bottom of site - constructed ceiling recess or pocket and for snap -in attachment to wall clip without fasteners. 4. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops. 5. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at bottoms of shades when shades are closed. 6. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 MOTOR - OPERATED, SINGLE - ROLLER SHADES A. Basis -of- Design Product: 1. See Drawings. B. Motorized Operating Systems: Provide factory - assembled, shade - operator systems of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories suitable for conditions indicated, complete with electric motor and factory - prewired motor controls, power disconnect switch, enclosures protecting controls and operating parts, and accessories required for reliable operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motor controls to motors. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical system. 1. Electrical Components: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Electric Motor: Manufacturer's standard tubular, enclosed in rollers. a. Electrical Characteristics: Single phase, 110V, 60 Hz. b. Provide quick disconnect J box lead (Anderson plug with the male end on the J box lead and the female end on the motor power cord). 3. Remote Control: Electric controls with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for recessed or flush mounting. Provide the following for remote - control activation of shades: a. Keyed Control Station: Keyed, maintained- contact, three - position, switch- operated control station with open, close, and off functions. Provide two keys per station. Utilize range extender if control station location is located out of standard range. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - Page 3 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 4. Crank - Operator Override: Crank and gearbox operate shades in event of power outage or motor failure. 5. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to stop shade movement automatically at fully raised and fully lowered positions. 6. Operating Features: a. Group switching with integrated switch control; single faceplate for multiple switch cutouts. b. Capable of interface with audiovisual control system. c. Capable of accepting input from building automation control system. d. Override switch. C. Rollers: Corrosion - resistant steel or extruded - aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive -end assemblies and idle - end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shades for service. 1. Shadeband -to- Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method. D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller mounting configuration, roller assemblies, operating mechanisms, installation accessories, and installation locations and conditions indicated. E. Roller- Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive -end assembly. F. Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material: Light - filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. G. Installation Accessories: 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L- shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband when shade is fully open. 2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 3. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at bottom of site - constructed ceiling recesses or pockets and for snap -in attachment to wall clip without fasteners. 4. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops. 5. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate Tight gaps at bottoms of shades when shades are closed. 6. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 MOTOR - OPERATED, DOUBLE - ROLLER SHADES A. Basis -of- Design Product: 1. See Drawings. B. Motorized Operating Systems: Provide factory - assembled, shade - operator systems of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories suitable for conditions indicated, complete with electric motor and factory - prewired motor controls, power disconnect switch, enclosures protecting controls and operating parts, and accessories required for reliable ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - Page 4 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motor controls to motors. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical system. 1. Electrical Components: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Electric Motor: Manufacturer's standard tubular, enclosed in rollers. a. Electrical Characteristics: Single phase, 110V, 60 Hz. b. Provide quick disconnect J box lead (Anderson plug with the male end on the J box lead and the female end on the motor power cord). 3. Remote Control: Electric controls with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for recessed or flush mounting. Provide the following for remote - control activation of shades: a. Keyed Control Station: Keyed, maintained- contact, three - position, switch - operated control station with open, close, and off functions. Provide two keys per station. Utilize range extender if control station location is located out of standard range. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Crank - Operator Override: Crank and gearbox operate shades in event of power outage or motor failure. 5. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to stop shade movement automatically at fully raised and fully lowered positions. 6. Operating Features: a. Group switching with integrated switch control; single faceplate for multiple switch cutouts. b. Capable of interface with audiovisual control system. c. Capable of accepting input from building automation control system. d. Override switch. C. Rollers: Corrosion - resistant steel or extruded - aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive -end assemblies and idle - end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shades for service. 1. Double - Roller Mounting Configuration: Side by side. 2. Shadeband -to- Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method. D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller mounting configuration, roller assemblies, operating mechanisms, installation accessories, and installation locations and conditions indicated. E. Roller- Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive -end assembly. F. Inside Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material: Light - filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. G. Outside Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material: Light - blocking fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. H. Installation Accessories: 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L- shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband when shade is fully open. 2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - Page 5 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at bottom of site - constructed ceiling recesses or pockets and for snap -in attachment to wall clip without fasteners. 4. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops. 5. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With Tight seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at bottoms of shades when shades are closed. 6. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 SHADEBAND MATERIALS A. Shadeband Material Flame- Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. B. Light - Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant. 1. Source: Roller -shade manufacturer. 2. Openness Factor: 3 percent. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range C. Light - Blocking Fabric: Opaque fabric, stain and fade resistant. 1. Source: Roller -shade manufacturer. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.6 ROLLER -SHADE FABRICATION A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMAA 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain -loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb -to -jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 -inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head -to -sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch. 2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end -to -end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings. C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible except as follows: 1. Vertical Shades: Where width -to- length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material. 2. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll -width panel(s) plus, if required, one partial roll -width panel located at top of shadeband. ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - Page 6 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ROLLER -SHADE INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. B. Electrical Connections: Connect motor - operated roller shades to building electrical system. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean roller -shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain motor - operated roller shades. END OF SECTION 122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - Page 7 of 7 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 123661 — SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Quartz agglomerate countertops. 2. Solid- surface countertops. 1.3 A. B. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For countertop mate Shop Drawings: For countertops. methods of joining, and cutouts for 1. Show locations and details o 2. Show direction of directional rials. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, plumbing fixtures. f joints. pattern, if any. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Countertop material, 6 inches square. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom - fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops. C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 QUARTZ COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with ICPA SS -1, except for composition. 1. Products: See Drawings. 2. Colors and Patterns: See Drawings. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2- Exterior Glue. C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C -C Plugged, touch sanded. 2.2 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous - filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS -1. 1. Products: See Drawings. 2. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with CSA B45.5 /IAPMO Z124. 3. Colors and Patterns: See Drawings. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2- Exterior Glue. C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C -C Plugged, touch sanded. 2.3 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions and the AWI /AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Grade: Custom. B. Configuration: See Drawings. C. Fabricate tops with shop - applied edges and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. D. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. a. Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening. b. Provide vertical edges, rounded to 3/8 -inch radius at juncture of cutout edges with top surface of countertop, slightly eased at bottom, and projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening. c. Provide 3/4 -inch full bullnose edges projecting 3/8 inch into fixture opening. 2. Counter - Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter - mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. 3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items. 4. Counter - Mounted Cooktops: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for cooktops. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Product recommended by manufacturer. SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1 /4inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64 -inch difference between planes of adjacent units. B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. C. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane. D. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. E. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. 1. Install metal splines in kerfs in countertop edges at joints. Fill kerfs with adhesive before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position. 2. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width. F. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. G. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. H. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. 1. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish. I. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." END OF SECTION 123661 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 210000 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide complete automatic wet pipe type sprinkler system for the areas and occupancies shown on the drawings. System shall be designed and installed in accordance with: A) 2007 Edition of NFPA 13 Standard for the "Installation of Sprinkler Systems ", B) 2010 Florida Building Code (FAC 69A- 3.012)(1:13.2.2), C) 2010 Florida Fire Prevention Code, D) Underwriters Laboratories, and E) Factory Mutual Standards. 1.02 Shop Drawings: A. Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". Calculation for hydraulic design shall be submitted with working plans and results of recent flow test (to determine the adequacy of the water supply before construction begins) showing approval by the "Authority Having Jurisdiction ". B. Within thirty (30) days after the award of contract and prior to fabrication, complete shop drawings of the sprinkler systems, including manufacturer's equipment data and catalog sheets, shall be submitted to the following. 1. Insurance association having jurisdiction. 2. Local authorities having jurisdiction. C. When approved shop drawings are obtained from the above jurisdictions, they shall be immediately submitted to the architect for his review. D. Drawings shall be based on the latest floor plans, which are available at that time. 1.03 Industry Standards: Where compliance with an industry, society or association standard is specified or indicated, certification of such compliance shall be submitted with shop drawings. Equipment shall, where applicable, be Underwriters Laboratories listed or Factory Mutual approved. 1.04 Design Parameters: A. General: Pipe sizes shall be hydraulically calculated and designed in accordance with NFPA 13, based on the occupancy classification of the protected area as scheduled on the drawings or as otherwise defined. Where a system is scheduled to include more than one occupancy classification, the hydraulic calculations shall be based on the higher demand or duplicate calculations may be submitted to show that each demand is met in its particular area. B. Light Hazard Occupancies: Shall be designed to provide a minimum density of 0.10 GPM per square foot for the most hydraulically remote 1500 square feet of system coverage and 100 GPM for inside and outside hose streams. Sprinkler spacing shall not exceed 225 square feet per sprinkler. C. Ordinary Hazard Occupancies: 1. Group I: Shall be designed to provide a minimum density of 0.15 GPM per square foot for the most hydraulically remote 1500 square feet of system FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 210000 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX coverage and 250 GPM for inside and outside hose streams. Sprinkler spacing shall not exceed 130 square feet per sprinkler. 2. Group II: Shall be designed to provide a minimum density of 0.20 GPM per square foot for the most hydraulically remote 1,500 square feet of system coverage and 250 GPM for inside and outside hose streams. Sprinkler spacing shall not exceed 130 square feet per sprinkler. 1.05 Water Supply: Shall be connected to a reliable and adequate water supply as described in NFPA 13 and indicated on the drawings. 1.06 Type of Construction: Shall be as indicated on the drawings or as defined by NFPA 13. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Pipe, Valves and Specialties: A. Piping and Valves: 1. Fire protection piping above grade, inside buildings, shall be schedule 40 black steel (1/2" to 1 ") & schedule 10 black steel (1 1/4" and larger). Fittings generally shall be UL approved, Victaulic piping fittings and Victaulic Style 77 couplings on 3" and larger sizes. All fittings and couplings shall be screwed for pipe 2 -1/2" or smaller. All Victaulic Style 77 couplings shall have housing fabricated in two or more parts malleable iron castings; coupling gasket shall be Victaulic Grade "H" molded synthetic rubber; coupling bolts shall be oval neck track head type. Victaulic fittings shall be fabricated of malleable iron casting in accordance with Federal Specification QQ- 1 -666c, Grade II. 2. Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with grease or graphite paste. 3. Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications contained in latest published literature. 4. Fire Protection System gate valves shall be UL /Fm approved, class 200, solid wedge disc, O.S. & Y. or butterfly type. 5. Fire Protection System check valves 2 -1/2" and smaller shall be Crane No. 41, made of best grade brass and screwed pattern. Check valves 3" and larger shall be UL /FM approved, swing check, bolted cap, high strength cast iron body and cap, bronze trim, flanged, Crane No. 375 or Jenkins. 6. All valves where shown on the drawings shall be electrically supervised with tamper switch wired to alarm bell at central panel. Coordinate wiring with valve and controls. 7. Check valves for Siamese fittings shall be provided with automatic ball drip, piped to drip over a floor drain. 8. System to be installed to UL Standards and to their approval. 9. Where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings, or other building construction, sleeves (UL Classified assembly) must be used. Where exposed FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 210000 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX piping passes through finished work, escutcheons shall be chrome plated, used as part of the sprinkler system shall be listed for such use. Split wall plates or escutcheons shall be installed to fit snuggly around piping. Where finish is not a problem, suitable plates shall be provided at each hole to assure effectiveness of construction as a fire stop. Fire rated wall penetrated by any pipe or wire shall be appropriately fire stopped with a listed device or method. 10. Piping in areas having ceilings shall be concealed. Piping in other areas may be exposed, but kept at a minimum distance from structural systems. All piping shall be free of rust, clean and have a minimum of one shop coat of rust inhibiting paint. B. Wet Pipe Sprinkler System: Shall consist of riser check valve trimmed for vertical or horizontal installation with complete trim piping, valve and fittings including flow switch. Piping arrangements and system boundaries shall be as indicated on the construction drawings. 2.02 Hangers and Supports: Refer to the Section entitled "Hangers and Supports: Piping System ". 2.03 Sprinkler Heads A. General: Shall be types as shown on drawings. Sprinklers shall be designed for a 175 - PSI w.w.p. All sprinklers shall be UL listed and /or FM approved. All heads located in any area subject to mechanical injury shall be protected with approved guards. A reserve supply of sprinklers, quantity in accordance with NFPA 13 -2002, shall be provided in a metal cabinet with at least one sprinkler wrench for each type of sprinkler used. Cabinet shall, as a minimum, contain at least two of each type and temperature - rating sprinkler used in the system. Model numbers indicated are to set standard of quality and design. Comparable sprinklers by other firstline manufacturers may be submitted for use subject to approval. B. Escutcheon Plates: Shall be used in finished areas having suspended ceilings with pendant and sidewall sprinklers. Escutcheons shall have bright chrome, be constructed of brass, and shall not exceed 5/8" in height. Escutcheon plates shall be listed for use. C. Temperature Rating: Shall be based on the anticipated maximum ceiling temperatures in the area being protected in accordance with the following table: Max. Ceiling Temp. Rating Temperature Temp. (degree F) (degree F) Class 100 135 — 170 Ordinary 150 175 — 225 Intermediate 225 250 — 300 High Proximity of heat producing devices or special conditions as described in NFPA 13 also will be considered. 2.04 Water Flow Indicators and Alarms: Provide in the fire protection system a flow switch; alarm bell, tamper switch on stop valves and pressure gauge. The wiring of alarms and connection to the fire alarm system shall be by the electrical contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 210000 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.01 General: Install systems in areas indicated on drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, etc.; however, these deviations shall be installed at no additional cost to the Owner. The system shall be installed in accordance with applicable portions of the National Fire Protection Association Code. 3.02 Inspector's Test Connection: Each sprinkler system shall be equipped with an inspector's test connection. Inspector's test valves to be located not more than 7' -0" above finished floor. Inspector test connection shall... A. Shall be located as remotely a possible from the fire sprinkler riser. B. Inspectors test connection shall be located in a wall box and provided with appropriate signs. C. Box shall be located below dropped ceiling. D. FDC point of discharge shall be directed at an improved surface /splash guard to prevent damage to the lawn & gardens. 3.03 Sprinkler Drains and Flushing Connections: All sprinkler drains and flushing fittings, which are required by NFPA 13, shall be installed. All drains and exterior discharge points shall be directed at improved surfaces to prevent damage to gardens and other unimproved surfaces. A concrete pad /splash block or other preventive measure will be provided. 3.04 Sleevinq: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". All openings in walls or floor slabs through which piping passes shall be UL classified mineral and details. Openings in exterior walls or floor slabs below grade shall be made permanently air, gas, and watertight with approved devices. 3.05 Special Areas: A. Suspended Ceilings: Sprinklers located in areas having suspended ceilings shall be located so as to create an aesthetic appearance with other ceiling fixtures as indicated on the Architect's consolidated reflected ceiling plans. Any deviations to meet code requirements or for other reasons shall be approved by the Architect prior to incorporation. Sprinklers shall be located in an aesthetic pattern, which complies with code coverage and shall not penetrate ceiling T -bars. Sprinkler contractor shall provide all modifications to grid required to accommodate sprinklers. END OF SECTION 210000 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 210000 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 220503 - PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Refer to Section 230501 entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". 1.02 Description of Work: A. The extent of plumbing is indicated on the drawings and specifications. B. In general, the work consists of, but is not limited to the following: 1. Hot and cold water supply piping, and all necessary valves, fittings, etc. 2. A system of soil, storm, waste and vent piping. 3. Plumbing fixtures and trim. 4. Furnishing lead flashings for penetrations through the roof or as specified on drawings. 5. Connections of equipment furnished by others. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Refer to individual technical sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 The plumbing materials, fixtures and installation shall comply with all requirements of the latest edition of the 2010 Florida Building Code and all applicable state and local codes. END OF SECTION 220503 PLUMBING 220503 - Page 1 of 1 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/2016 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide all angles, brackets, clamps, anchors, inserts, rods, braces, frames, hangers, nuts and bolts, and other miscellaneous steel and hardware items as may be required for the proper support of equipment and all piping systems. 1.02 Relation to Other Work: Contractor shall coordinate: shop drawings; placement; structural framing and overall building construction; and the work of all trades to insure an orderly and timely progress of the work. Refer to other Sections for special requirements relating to specific equipment and systems. 1.03 Manufacturer: Hangers and supports shall be as manufactured by Grinnell, Division ITT, F &S Manufacturing Corp.; Fee and Mason Manufacturing Co., or an approved equal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Use the following (or approved equals thereof) if and as applicable to this project: A. Hangers: 1. Hangers in contact with copper piping: Shall be copper plated or Teflon coated. Grinnell Fig. 97 or 97C. 2. Hangers (other than in contact with copper piping): Shall have manufacturer's standard finish. Pipe 3" and larger: Grinnell Fig. 260. Pipe 2 -1/2" and smaller: Grinnell Fig. 104. B. Pipe Roller Stands: Grinnell Fig. 274. C. Pipe Roller Hangers: Grinnell Fig. 171. D. Pipe Alignment Guide: Grinnell Fig. 256. E. Pipe Riser Clamps: Grinnell Fig. 261. F. Insulation Shields: Grinnell Fig. 292 with links. G. Beam Clamps: Grinnell Fig. 292 with links. H. Rod: Sized with safety factor of five (5). Grinnell Fig. 140 or 146. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work." All inserts, fasteners, hangers and supports shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 Pipe: Hangers shall be spaced to prevent sag and to permit proper drainage. All piping shall be run parallel with the lines of building, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. The hanger HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: PIPING SYSTEMS 230529 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX spacing and placement shall be such that after the covering (insulation and finish) is applied there will be not Tess than 1/2" clear space between finished covering and other surfaces, including the finished covering of parallel adjacent pipes. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be sized to encompass the insulating, finish and metal insulation shield (a metal insulation shield shall be provided for each hanger and support). Vertical piping shall be supported with pipe riser clamps at every floor penetration, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings. END OF SECTION 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: PIPING SYSTEMS 230529 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 10/28/2016 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 221100 - DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide potable water systems complete as indicated on the specifications and drawings. Drawings scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves, and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this Section at no additional cost to the Owner. (No change in Contract price). 1.02 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section 230501 entitled ''Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Interior Water Pipe: Cold water supply piping, below grade, up to a point five feet outside the building line shall be type K hard drawn seamless copper water tube in a vinyl sleeve conforming to ASTM B88 -89. Hot and cold water supply piping above grade shall be Schedule 40 PVC. 2.02 Fittings: Below grade wrought copper, pressure type conforming to ASTM B16.22 -1989 and above grade, schedule 40 PVC. 2.03 Solder: Lead free, 95 -5 non - corrosive flux, PVC — solvent welded. 2.04 Pipe Protective Coating (Interior): Protect hot and cold water piping below floor or in contact with concrete by wrapping with 20 mil thickness vinyl tape equal to Permacel No. 307. 2.05 Dielectric Isolators: A. Unions: For pipe sizes two inches (2 ") and smaller, EPCO or Rockford - Eclipse insulated unions with joint connection to suit pipe and equipment. B. Flanges: For pipe sizes two and one -half inches (2 -1/2 ") and over; Plico Products flange insulation sets with: phenolic retainer, nitrile rubber seal element, polyethylene sleeves and double washer sets. Spring lock type with set screw. 2.06 Relief Valves: ASME rated; size and setting as recommended by equipment manufacturer and /or indicated on drawings. 2.07 Valves: A. All valves shall have the name or trademark of the manufacturer and the guaranteed working pressure cast or stamped on the body. Adapters shall be provided for all valves on copper lines. B. All stop valves used on this work, unless otherwise specified or required, shall be of the gate pattern, suitable for 125 pound working pressure. C. All gate valves shall be packed and left perfectly tight at the completion of work. D. Gate Valves: Gate valves two inches (2 ") and smaller shall be made of the best brass of screwed pattern of the solid wedge type, double seat, non - rising stem, with gland stuffing box and iron wheel, NIBCO T -133, Stockham B -128 or Jenkins 370C. Gate valves two and one -half inches (2 -1/2 ") or larger shall be iron body, brass trimmed, flanges ends DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM 221100 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX and otherwise same type as smaller valves, NIBCO F617 -0, Stockham 9 -623 or Jenkins 651C. E. Check Valves: check valves two inches (2 ") and smaller shall be made of the best grade brass, screwed pattern, swing check, one disc for hot and cold water; NIBCO T4- 413 -BY, Jenkins 996 or Stockham B -319. Check valves two and one -half inches (2 -1/2 ") and larger shall be iron body. F. Ball valves two inches (2 ") and smaller shall be all bronze of compact pattern with solder joint connections rated at 400 pounds WOG. Stem extensions shall be furnished for use in insulated lines where insulation exceeds 1/2" Ball valves may be substituted for gate valves in sizes two inches (2 ") and smaller. NIBCO S -580, Milwaukee BA 100/150 Apollo 70- 100/200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Joints and Connections: A. General: Joints and connections shall be made permanently air, gas and watertight. B. Equipment Connections: Final connections to services and connections to equipment shall be made with unions for pipe sizes two inches (2 ") and under and with companion flanges for pipe two and one -half inches (2 -1/2 ") and larger. Where incompatible piping material comes in contact, except for the use of valves, isolate the two materials using dielectric isolators as specified herein before. C. Piping drops to points of use shall each be valved for individual shut -offs. 3.02 Valves: All valves, stops, pressure regulators and similar items shall be installed in an easily accessible location. Provide access panel (refer to Section 15000 entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ") for all concealed valves. 3.03 Sterilization: Sterilization solution shall be 400 PPM to 1000 PPM chlorine made from a sanitation grade chlorine or sodium hypochlorite. Solution shall remain in system for twenty four (24) hours during which time valves and faucets are to be opened and closed several times. Outlets shall be tested to insure an adequate amount of chlorine is present. At conclusion of sterilization entire system shall be flushed with clean water until chlorine content is at a level approved by the County Health Department. 3.04 Tests: Upon completion of the water supply system it shall be tested and proved tight under a water pressure no less than 25 PSI above the working pressure under which it is to be operated and retained for not less than 24 hours .s shall be observed by a representative of the Project Architect /Engineer before it is removed. END OF SECTION 221100 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM 221100 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 221313 - SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide soil, waste and vent piping systems complete as indicated on specifications and drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this section at no additional cost to Owner (no change in Contract price). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Pipe and Fittings: A. Interior above first floor slab shall be schedule 40 polyvinylchloride pipe with PVC solvent welded fittings. B. Interior below floor slab and up to a point five feet (5' -0 ") beyond the building walls shall be type PVC DWV pipe and fittings (ASTM 2665 -88). 2.02 Floor Drains: Floor drains shall be as manufactured by Josam, J.R. Smith, Wade or Zurn. Provide flashing clamp devices where required by floor construction. Refer to schedule on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General: Contractor shall promptly install all sewer and drain piping after excavating, chasing, or cutting for same has been done, so as to keep the openings for such piping open as short a time as possible. No piping shall, however, be permanently closed up, furred in or covered before the examination of it by the authorities having jurisdiction. 3.02 Scope: All piping shall be run in the most direct manner. Horizontal pipe shall have a grade of one - quarter inch (1/4 ") per foot wherever possible and not less, in any case, than one - eighth inch (1/8 ") per foot. All offsets shall be 45 degrees or Tess. 3.03 Insulation: Refer to Section 15400 entitled "Thermal Insulation ". 3.04 Cleanouts: Refer to Section 15201 entitled "Plumbing Fixtures Trim and Specialties ". 3.05 Vents: Vent branches shall be kept above the fixtures in such a manner as to preclude the use of the vents as waste pipes should the latter become obstructed. All branches shall be so graded as to prevent accumulation of water or scale therein. All vent pipes shall be properly graded without drops or sags and so connected as to drip back to waste pipes by gravity. Wherever practicable, two or more vents shall be connected together and extended as one vent through the roof. 3.06 Escutcheons: Where waste and vents are exposed at fixtures, pipes shall be chrome - plated brass (iron pipe size) and have chrome - plated escutcheons where they pass through floors, walls, or ceilings. 3.07 Flashing: At all points where the vents pass through the roof, the openings shall be flashed with sheet lead flashing weighing not less than four (4) pounds per square foot. The flashing shall be made absolutely watertight at the roofline and shall be extended up, over and down at least two SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM 231313 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX inches (2 ") into the pipe. Each flange shield shall extend not less than fourteen inches (14 ") in all directions from the respective vent, underneath the roofing material. 3.08 Tests: After all soil, waste and vent stacks have been installed, the outlets shall be plugged and the piping system filled with water to the highest point of the system, but with no less than 10 ft head of water, and allowed to remain filled for twenty -four (24) hours and proved tight under such conditions. This test may be conducted in segments as required by the sequence of construction. All tests shall be observed by a representative of the Project Architect /Engineer before tests are removed. END OF SECTION 231313 • • SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM 231313 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 221413 - STORM WATER SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide storm water piping system complete as indicated on drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves, and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this section at no additional cost to Owner (no change in Contract price). 1.02 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section 230501 entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Pipe and Fittings: A. Interior above first floor slab shall be schedule 40 polyvinylchloride pipe with PVC solvent welded fittings. B. Interior below floor slab and up to a point five feet (5' -0 ") beyond the building walls shall be type PVC DWV pipe and fittings (ASTM 2665 -88). 2.02 Roof Drains: All roof drains will be furnished and installed with sheet lead flashing of dimensions and configurations as shown on A- series drawing. Provide all accessories required for the particular construction in which they are to be mounted. Josam, J. R. Smith, Wade or Zurn are approved manufacturers. Refer to schedule on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General: All piping shall be run in the most direct manner. Horizontal pipes shall have a grade of one - quarter inch (1/4 ") per foot wherever possible, and not less in any case than one - eighth inch (1/8 ") per foot. All offsets shall be 45 degrees or less. 3.02 Insulation: Refer to Section 230700 entitled "Thermal Insulation ". 3.03 Tests: All storm drains shall be tested by filling leader with water to 10 feet head minimum and allowing to stand twenty -four (24) hours with no loss of head. Any tests shall be observed by a representative of the Architect before tests are removed. END OF SECTION 221413 STORM WATER SYSTEM 221413 - Page 1 of 1 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 224200 - PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM, AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". 1.02 Energy Conservation Requirements: A. Showers: Shower heads used shall be equipped with flow control devices to limit total flow to a maximum of two and a half (2.5) gallons per minute for ADA showers and a maximum of one and three quarts (1.75) gallons per minute for non -ADA showers. B. Lavatories: Lavatories which are provided in public areas shall have the following feature: Outlet devices which limit the flow of water to a maximum of 0.5 GPM. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim: A. Provide all brackets, plates, anchors and fastening devices necessary for rigidly mounting fixtures in place. Unless noted otherwise, each wall hung plumbing fixture shall be supported on appropriate type of chair carriers. B. Use chrome - plated brass piping where exposed to view between fixture and finished wall face and jacketed where fixture is designated for handicapped use. Provide tight fitting escutcheons of chrome plated brass wherever piping passes through walls. Supply piping to all fixtures shall be anchored to prevent movement. C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Fixtures: American Standard, Crane, Eljer, Elkay, Just, Fiat or Kohler. 2. Flush Valves: Delaney, Sloan or Zurn. 3. Toilet Seats: Bemis, Beneke, Church, Olsonite or Centoco. 4. Trim: American Standard, Chicago, Crane, Eljer, Kohler, T &S Brass, Zurn or Symmons. 5. Electric Water Coolers: Elkay, Halsey Taylor or Oasis. D. General: 1. Acid resisting enamel for enameled cast iron and steel fixtures. 2. Cast brass P -trap with cleanout for each lavatory and sink unless otherwise indicated. 3. Renewable seats and disks for supply valves. 4. Stops for fixture hot and cold water supplies. PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM, AND SPECIALTIES 224200 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.02 Plumbing Specialties: A. Cleanouts: 1. Exterior type: Heavy -duty cast iron body with round, scoriated, non -tilt top. 2. Interior floor type: Cast iron with square, heavy duty, scoriated nickel bronze top. 3. Interior wall type: Cast iron cleanout tee with countersunk plug and square, smooth nickel bronze access cover and frame. 4. Plugs: Heavy cast iron ferrule with screw plug. 5. Josam, J. R. Smith, Wade, Zurn, Sioux Chief or approved equal. Refer to schedule on drawings. B. Traps: 1. Deep seal type on all floor drains. 2. Exposed and /or in cabinets: Chrome plated cast brass with cleanouts. C. Water Hammer Arresters: 1. Shall be in accord with Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI -WH -201. 2. Josam, J. R. Smith, Wade, Zurn or Sioux Chief are approved equals. D. Floor Drains: 1. Adjustable height, cast iron body, double drainage flanges, flashing clamp, nickel bronze strainer, no integral trap, inside caulk bottom outlet with adapter for ring. 2. Floor drains shall include a 6" strainer. 3. Polished brass strainer in equipment rooms. 4. Automatic trap primer connection except on shower drains. 5. Josam, J. R. Smith, Wade, Zurn or Sioux Chief are approved equals. Refer to schedule on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General: A. Protect chrome - plated items from damage by wrenches and other hazards. B. Install fixtures having flush valves so that supplies to valves for all identical fixtures in each room are at same height for that fixture type. Seat valve in place so that valve discharge centerline is directly above fixture spud centerline; do not connect by bending nipple between valve spud. PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM, AND SPECIALTIES 224200 - Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Install cold water on right (facing applicable fixtures). D. Verify, coordinate, adjust, align and secure rough -in piping to provide neat appearances and serviceable operation. Correlate with fixture manufacturer's data and recommendations and with required dimensions. 3.02 Cleanouts: A. Install at or near foot of each soil or waste stack and at each change in direction of building drain greater than 45 degrees. B. Shall be accessible; install flush with finished wall, floor or finished grade. 3.03 Traps: A. Trap each fixture (except those with integral traps) with water sealed trap located as close as possible to fixture and never greater than 24" from fixture. B. Provide all floor drains and hub drain traps and indirect waste traps with automatic primer system for each trap. 3.04 Water Hammer Arresters: Size and locate in accord with PDI Standard PDI -WH -201. 3.05 Final Installation: Final installation of all drains (floor, roof, hub, shower and other similar types) must yield absolutely permanently water tight floor and /or roof system. END OF SECTION 224200 PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM, AND SPECIALTIES 224200 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 230501 - COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope of Division: Work shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for a complete and properly functioning mechanical installation in accordance with requirements of the 2010 Florida Mechanical Code and to other pertinent codes made a part of such code by reference and local state codes, and contract drawings and specifications. Work shall be understood to include all work specified in Division 15, Mechanical, section numbers 15000 through 15999, inclusive, of the Specifications. 1.02 Drawings: Architectural and structural drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings with reference to the building construction. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement and extent of work. Architectural drawings indicate more exactly the desired relationship between diffusers, registers, lighting fixtures, equipment, electric panels and devices, plumbing fixtures, and other items which remain exposed in the completed buildings. Exact locations and arrangements of materials and equipment shall be determined, with the approval of the Engineer, as work progresses to conform in the best possible manner with the surroundings and with the adjoining work of other trades. Where locations of equipment, devices or fixtures are controlled by architectural features, establish such locations by referring to dimensions on Architectural (A- series) drawings and not by scaling drawings. 1.03 Coordination of Work: Coordinate all work, prior to installation, with work of other trades and with architectural and structural features to preclude interference's between the work of different trades and to insure necessary clearances at crossovers and equipment. Work requiring necessarily fixed locations (e.g., piping with required slopes, lighting fixtures, and diffusers in ceilings, etc.) takes precedence overwork not requiring such fixed locations and shall establish permissible routing of services associated with the latter. Should work be performed without adequate coordination so that interference's occur between work of different trades, the Contractor shall eliminate such interference's by requiring necessary rework by the trades involved. Such rework shall meet express approval of the Architect and shall be performed at no addition to the contract amount. 1.04 Shop Drawings: Refer to "General Conditions ". Submit to Architect for approval, before commencing work or ordering of materials, shop drawings for all mechanical materials and equipment to be provided. In addition, submit other drawings or diagrams, dimensioned and in correct scale, requested by Architect to clarify the work intended or to show its relationship to adjacent work or work of other trades. Contractor is responsible for any delays in job progress accruing directly or indirectly from late submission of shop drawings. Shop drawings shall clearly show the following: A. Technical and descriptive data in detail equal to or greater than the data given in the item specification. Indicate all characteristics, special modifications and features. Where performance and characteristic data is shown on the drawings or specified, submitted data shall be provided in a degree which is both quantitatively and qualitatively equal to that specified and shown so that comparison can be made. Present data in detail equal to or greater than that given in item specifications and include all weights, deflections, speeds, velocities, pressure drops, operating temperatures, operating curves, temperature ranges, sound ratings, dimensions, sizes, manufacturers' names, model numbers, types of material used, operating pressures, full load amperages, starting amperages, fouling factors, capacities, set - points, chemical COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 230501 - Page 1 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX compositions, certifications and endorsements, operating voltages, thicknesses, gauges and all other related information as applicable to particular item. B. Exceptions to or deviations from the contract documents. Should Engineer approve any items having such deviations which are not clearly brought to Architect's attention, in writing, on item submittal, then Contractor is responsible for correction of such deviations regardless of when such deviations are discovered. 1.05 Record drawings: A. Maintain one extra set of black -line, white print drawings for use as Record drawings. Records shall be kept daily, using colored pencil. As the work is completed, relevant information shall be transferred to a reproducible set, and copies made shall be given to the Architect. B. As -built information shall be shown to scale, using standard symbols listed in the legend. As a minimum, show the following: 1. Location of stub -outs, dimensioned from permanent building lines. 2. Location and depth of under -slab and in -slab piping. 3. All routing of piping system. 4. Correct all equipment schedules. 5. Corrected numbers as they appear on the schedules. 6. Corrected motor horsepower electrical data. 1.06 Fees and Permit: A. All work done under this Contract shall comply with all State and Local Codes having jurisdiction and with the requirements of the Utility Companies whose service may be used. All modifications required by these codes shall be made by this Contractor without additional charge. Where code requirements are less than those shown on the Plans or in the Specifications; the Plans and Specifications shall be followed. Where applicable, N.F.P.A. requirements shall be met. B. The Contractor shall obtain all permits, inspections, and approvals as required by all authorities having jurisdiction. All fees and costs of any nature what -so -ever incidental to these permits, inspections, and approvals must be assumed and paid by this Contractor. C. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the Williams- Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 General: COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 230501- Page 2 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX A. All materials and equipment shall be new and without blemish or defect. B. Equipment and materials shall be products which will meet with the acceptance of the agency inspecting the work. Where acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested, and certified by Underwriters or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so examined, tested, and certified. C. Substitutions: The following paragraphs shall govern should any conflict exist between these "substitution" paragraphs and any other paragraphs of Division 15. 1. Substituted equipment or optional equipment where permitted and approved, must conform to space requirements. Any substituted equipment that cannot meet space requirements, whether approved or not, shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Any modifications of related systems as a result of substitutions shall be made at the Contractor's expense. 2. Note that the approval of shop drawings, or other information submitted in accordance with the requirements herein before specified, does not assure that the Architect, or any other Owner's representative, attests to the dimensional accuracy or dimensional suitability of the material or equipment involved or the ability of the material or equipment involved or the mechanical performance of the equipment. Approval of shop drawings does not invalidate the plans and specifications if in conflict, unless a letter requesting such change is submitted by the Contractor and approved in writing by the Architect. 3. Substitutions of mechanical equipment for that shown on the schedules or designated by model number in the specifications will not be considered if the item is not a regular catalogued item shown in the current catalog of the manufacturer. 4. If bidder proposes to substitute materials and /or manufacturer's equipment in lieu of those specified. he shall submit written request to the Architect for approval no later than ten (10) days prior to the receipt of bids. 5. Requests submitted directly to the Owner or to the Architect's consultants and /or verbal requests will not be evaluated. 6. Should the proposed substitution be accepted, it will be incorporated into the Contract Documents by form of addendum. 7. All substitutions proposed later than ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of bids shall not be considered. Any substitution not accepted and any substitution request proposed later than ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of bids shall not be used as either the basis for bidding or submittal after award of the contract. D. Operating conditions and capacities must be as follows: 1. No overloading. 2. No operation at conditions outside of maximum and minimum limits recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the engineer. COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 230501 - Page 3 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Compatible with all systems. E. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment and materials furnished must be as follows: 1. Recommended by the manufacturer for the application. 2. Installed in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations for the application except where specifications and drawings clearly indicate otherwise. 2.02 Sleeves: A. General: Lay out work and set sleeves in new or existing construction so there shall be minimum of cutting, drilling and patching. All sleeves not used during construction period shall be sealed using grout. Unused penetrations or sleeves through fire rated barriers shall be sealed to prevent passage of smoke or heat using an Underwriters' Laboratories approved method rated at least equal to the barrier being penetrated. Method submitted must show proof of UL label. B. Pipe sleeves: 1. Walls and partitions: a. Sleeves 8 inch Diameter and Smaller (above grade): Sleeves shall be 18 gauge steel pipe or plastic sleeves built into wall, partition or beam, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4 inch minimum between covering and sleeve. Penetrations of fire rated barriers shall have 18 gauge steel sleeves. b. Floors (above grade): Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized pipe or plastic, set before floor is poured, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4 inch between covering and sleeve, and shall extend 1/2 inch above finished floor. c. Duct Sleeves: Sleeves or openings sized to pass mechanical ducts and covering shall be of framed construction in roof, wall, or partitions. d. Sealing of sleeves: 1. Sleeves Above Grade: Openings around pipes, duct, etc., passing through sleeves shall be made draft free and vermin -proof by packing solidly with mineral wool or fiberglass. 2 Sealing Material: Where applicable and recommended by manufacturer, other sealing materials may be acceptable as options to above specified methods. Submit for Engineer approval prior to procurement. 2.03 Floor, Wall, and Ceiling Plates or Escutcheons, in Exposed Areas: Provide escutcheons or fabricated plates or collars at each location where pipe or exposed duct passes through a finished surface. Escutcheons for flush sleeves shall be chromium plated brass and sleeves extending above floor shall be chrome plated brass. Collars or plates for ducts and large COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 230501- Page 4 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX diameter insulated pipe shall be fabricated of 18 gauge galvanized copper bearing sheet steel, secured to structure and neatly fitted around duct or pipe. 2.04 Motors: Unless specifically specified otherwise in the section covering the driven equipment (or the equipment drives), motors shall comply with the following: A. Three Phase: NEMA design B, three - phase, squirrel cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 40 degree C ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation material and shall be cast iron, drip proof, horizontal foot mounted type with ball bearings. Two speed motors shall be provided as scheduled and shall be two winding type. B. Single Phase: Squirrel cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 40 degree C ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation materials and shall be two winding capacitor start type with steel enclosure, drip proof, horizontal foot mount and ball bearings. C. Scheduled Horsepowers: The horsepowers scheduled or specified are those nominal sizes estimated to be required by the equipment when operating at specified duties and efficiencies. In the case of pumps, these horsepowers are non - overloading and may also include provisions for future planned impeller changes. If the actual horsepower for the equipment furnished differs from that specified or shown on the drawings, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to insure that proper size feeders, breakers, starters, etc. are provided at no change in contract price. 2.05 Substitutions Involving Electrical Changes: If the Contractor proposes items which have different electrical and /or control characteristics (such as larger amperage requirements, etc.) than those specified and provided for and /or which otherwise change the electrical and /or control system(s), then (even if the Architect approves such items) the Contractor must correlate all sizes, voltages, amperages and wiring for applicable items so that applicable electrical and /or control changes can be made. Contractor is responsible for all related additional costs. Other coordination is as specified elsewhere. 2.06 Belt Drives: Equip each motor driven machine not directly connected with V -belt drive. Belts shall be of correct cross section to fit properly in sheave grooves and shall be carefully matched for each drive. Sheaves shall be cast iron or steel, bored to fit properly on shafts and secured with keys of proper size. The rating of each drive shall be as recommended by manufacturer for service but shall be at least 1.5 times nameplate rating of motor. A. Fan Belt Drives: Fixed pitch sheaves shall be provided. B. Speed Adjustments: Adjust fan speed by change(s) in sheave size as necessary to obtain proper design air flow with fan in its installed location. Fans may be first fitted with variable pitch drive until proper fixed pitch drive size, or alternate sizes of fixed pitch drives may be used until proper fan speed is obtained. Provide all drives necessary to obtain proper fan speed needed to deliver necessary air quantity. 2.07 Bearings: All bearings shall be rated for 200,000 hour operating life unless indicated. 2.08 Belt and Coupling Guards: Each belt drive shall be equipped with an OSHA approved guard. Guards shall be constructed of #12 U.S. Standard gauges 3/4 inch diamond mesh wire screen, COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 230501 - Page 5 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX or equivalent, welded to one inch steel angle frames, and shall enclose all belts and sheaves. Tops and bottoms of guards shall be of substantial sheet metal or not less than #18 U.S. Standard gauge. Braces or supports must not "bridge" sound and vibration isolators. Guards shall be designed with adequate provision for movement of motor required to permit oiling, use of speed counters, and other maintenance and testing operations with guard in place. All direct drive equipment shall have coupling guards in accordance with Florida Department of Business Regulation safety regulations and OSHA. 2.09 Painting and Marking: A. Painting: Painting of equipment, pipe, and ducts (insulated or uninsulated is specified under the "Painting" Division of these specifications. Touch -up of shop coat shall be performed under Division furnishing equipment. B. Marking: Refer to Section entitled "Identification of Mechanical Systems ". 2.10 Access Doors: Provide as necessary for access to concealed valves, cleanouts, unions, dampers, coils, junction boxes, etc., where no other means of access is shown or specified. Doors shall be manufactured by the Milcor Division of Inland- Ryerson, or an acceptable equal, type as follows: Door Location Door Type Drywall Style "DW" Masonry or tile Style "M- Stainless" Acoustical tile Style "AT" Plaster Style "K" Fire -rated walls Style "Fire Rated" Each door shall be equipped with two flush, screwdriver operated, cam latches and, other than Style "M ", shall be finished to match adjacent surface. Door sizes shall be applicable to the access required for normal service. See sections entitled "Ductwork" for access doors related to duct systems. 2.11 Excavation & Backfill: A. Each subcontractor shall do trench and pit excavating and backfilling inside and outside the building, as required by his work, including shoring and bracing, pumping and protection for safety of persons and property. B. Backfill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding six (6) inches in depth. Completed backfill shall conform to surrounding ground and finish grade and with compaction requirements of Division Two of these Specifications: 1. Concrete encasement: Piping passing under footings, foundations and other locations as shown on Drawings shall be encases by eight (8) inches (minimum) concrete on all sides. Concrete shall conform to Division Three requirements. COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 230501- Page 6 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Extend concrete encasement eight (8) inches around piping and twelve (12) inches each side of footings or foundations. C. Remove non - usable excavated material from the site. Deposit any usable surplus material on site where directed by the Project Architect /Engineer. Do not remove usable material from site. D. Provide and maintain bracing, shoring or sheathing as required to safely support sides of excavations. The Contractor doing the excavation and the Contractor using the excavation are responsible for safety in excavations. E. This Contractor shall provide and operate pumping equipment to keep excavations free of water. F. This Contractor is responsible for repairing and restoring paving streets, curbs, walks and other work in the area where excavations are made. G. Provide additional excavation and backfill where required to resolve conflicts in buried lines. H. Coordinate timing of excavations in advance with other trades. Excavation shall be open cut from the surface. J. Hold trench width to a minimum. K. Do not excavate utility trenches parallel to building footings closer than four (4) feet from the footings except by approval of the Project Architect /Engineer. When parallel trenches require cuts deeper than the building footings, the horizontal distance from the footing shall be equal to, or greater than one and one -half (1 -1/2) times the vertical distance below the footing, but in no case shall the horizontal distance be less than four (4) feet except by the approval of the Project Architect /Engineer. L. Mechanical excavation shall be held to four (4) inches above final grade of the bottom of trench. The remainder shall be shaped by manual excavation, so that piping is fully supported on undisturbed soil. Shoring of piping in trench will not be allowed. Piping must be suspended from above. M. Bell joint holes shall be carefully excavated so that none of the load is supported by the bells or joints. N. Whenever, in the opinion of the Project Architect /Engineer, the soil is unsuitable for supporting piping and appurtenances, provisions for proper foundations shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. Soil test reports are bound in the Specifications Book. O. The drawings for this project show the anticipated underground utilities. Locations of utilities which will interfere with proposed construction shall be assumed to be a known factor to each subcontractor unless such locations on drawings are in error. P. Wherever trenching or excavating, assume utilities may exist in area without such being shown on the drawings. Exercise extreme caution. Should existing facilities be damaged, repair such to Project Architect /Engineer's satisfaction at no additional cost to the Owner. COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 230501 - Page 7 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Q. Special care shall be taken with excavation in limited distance from existing trees. Manual excavation shall be required. END OF SECTION 230501 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 230501- Page 8 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Electrical and Control Work Coordination: A. Definitions: Definitions for the purpose of mechanical /electrical control and power coordination are as follows. (Note: The use of the words, "Provide ", "Furnish" and "Install" are intended only for use in describing the coordination indicated by this paragraph 3.01, and do not necessarily have the same definitions when used outside of the context of this paragraph 3.01). Any items which do not fall within the scope of this paragraph 3.01 shall be coordinated as individually specified. 1. "Furnish" means to procure an item and to deliver it to the project for installation. 2. "Install" means to determine (in coordination with others as necessary) the appropriate intended location of an item to set and connect it in place. 3. "Provide" means to both furnish and install. 4. Power Circuit: Circuit which carries main electric power to apparatus to which the power circuit is connected. 5. Control Circuit: Circuit which carries electrical signals directing the performance of a controller but which does not carry the main electric power. (See NEC, Section 430 -71). Such circuits shall also include those which serve a dual control and power function (e.g., a line voltage thermostat circuit which both activates and powers a small fan motor). 6. Controller: A device, or group of devices, which serves to govern, in some predetermined manner, electric power delivered to apparatus to which the controller is connected and includes any switch or device normally used to start and stop a motor. (See NEC, Article 100, Definitions, "Controller ", and Section 430-81(a).) 7. Control Device: A device which reacts to an operating condition (pressure, temperature, flow, humidity, etc.) and which initiates transmission of an electrical control signal which causes operation of a controller or which causes operation of pressure switches, etc. B. Auxiliary Control Device: A device (such as a low voltage control transformer, electric relay, etc.) which is located in a control circuit and which carries or responds to (but does not initiate) an electrical control signal initiated by a control device. C. Work of Division 15: includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Provide: a. All controllers which are generally manufactured or shipped as integral with Division 15 equipment (for example, such as starters packaged with packaged equipment, etc.). COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 230501 - Page 9 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX b. All electric motors and other electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.) which are specified in Division 15. c. All controls specified in Division 15 "HVAC Controls ". d. All control circuits (including conduit and boxes) from any Division 16 panels to power utilizing equipment provided by Division 15 and including the necessary circuit breakers. e. All control connections to equipment provided by Division 15. f. All control circuits, including conduit and boxes. g. All control connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.). h. Auxiliary control devices. All control devices (thermostats, pressure switches, flow switches, humidistats, etc.) and make control circuit connections thereto. Any and all electronic and electric control devices and electric or pneumatic connections thereto. k. Provide all starters for all mechanical equipment. Provide all disconnects for all mechanical equipment. 2. Furnish: All controllers. Controllers shall comply with the requirements of applicable sections of Division 16. D. Work of Division 16 includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Provide: a. All power circuits, including conduit and boxes. b. All power connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems, electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.). c. All remote motor disconnects (remote from the related controller) at all locations required by NEC and connections thereto except those disconnects which are specified in Division 15 to be provided as part of the equipment itself. 2. Install: All controllers furnished by Division 15. E. Other Requirements: COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 230501- Page 10 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Interface Coordination: Contractor which supplies the power consuming equipment shall coordinate with actual contract document control and sequencing requirements regarding interface of the equipment with the control system specified in Division 15 and shall provide equipment wiring diagrams for final coordination for actual installation. 3.02 Tests: A. General: All systems shall be inspected, tested, given a trial run, and demonstrated to Architect's and Owner's satisfaction that they are complete and ready for operation. Plumbing Soil, Waste and Vent Piping: Test in accord with standard plumbing code and as otherwise specified. C. All Other Piping: Unless required otherwise by code or other divisions of specifications, piping shall be tested at one hundred fifty percent (150%) of normal operating pressure for a continuous 24 -hour period without leaking. D. Systems - Air Conditioning: Refer to section describing test and balance of system. E. Observation of Tests: Contractor shall notify Architect in writing at least two weeks prior to scheduled test(s) and demonstration(s) to allow Architect time to schedule his observation of Contractor's test(s) and demonstration(s). 3.03 Instruction: Refer to "Instruction and Maintenance Manuals" Section. 3.04 Acceptance: A. Prior to requesting final inspection: Complete all work required by drawings and specifications. Acceptance will be made by the Architect on the basis of tests and inspection of project. Contractor shall furnish necessary mechanics to operate system, furnish test instruments and equipment as required, make necessary adjustments and assist with final inspection. 3.05 Protection of Work Until Final Acceptance: Contractor shall protect all materials and equipment from damage, the entrance of dirt and construction debris from the time of installation until final acceptance. Any materials and equipment that has been damaged shall be repaired to "as new" condition or replaced at the direction of the Architect. Where factory finishes occur and damage is minor, finishes may be touched -up. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the damage is excessive, factory finish shall be replaced to "new" condition. END OF SECTION 15000 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 230501 - Page 11 of 11 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 230510 - INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Provide complete written and verbal operating and maintenance instruction to the Owner for all mechanical systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Provide two (2) Instructions and Maintenance manuals, each complete as follows: A. Hardback three ring loose -leaf binders. B. Title sheet with job name, Contractor's subcontractors control subcontractor and related contractors or material supplier's names, addresses and phone numbers. C. Index of contents. D. A signed copy of acknowledgment of instructions to the Owner or his authorized representative. Two additional copies of the signed acknowledgment shall be sent directly to the Architect as soon as possible after receipt. E. Typewritten operating instructions for the Owner's personnel describing the following for each piece of equipment and systems: 1. How to start and stop each piece of equipment. 2. How to set equipment and systems for normal operation. 3. Normal restarting procedures before contacting the service contractor. 4. Complete description of functions and operations of each piece of equipment including description of how equipment operates in conjunction with automatic control systems. 5. Instructions for cleaning, oiling, greasing, fueling and similar tasks. F. Approved shop drawings and submittal data and parts and maintenance booklet for each item of material and equipment furnished under this Division, (but not limited to) the following: 1. Spare parts list and source of supply for each equipment item. 2. List of valves with location, service, size, model and operating position. 3. Diagrams clearly indicating automatic control hook -up. G. Any as -built wiring diagrams as called for in other sections of this Division as needed to show how equipment controls interface with related systems. H. Contractor's Site Test and Balance report. INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 230510 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX I. Copies of certificates of inspection. J. Guarantees. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Verbal Instruction: Provide verbal, hands -on, operating and maintenance instruction to Owner's authorized personnel for each equipment item and system. Instruction shall be given by competent personnel. END OF SECTION 230510 INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 230510 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 230531 - ROOF CURBS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide a roof curb for each fan and outside air intake. 1.02 Relation to Other Work: Coordinate roof openings, curb dimensions and electrical connections including stub up through roof deck with fans actually furnished. 1.03 Shop Drawings: Refer to the requirements of Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". 1.04 Manufacturer: Curbs shall be matched to, and be a companion item for the equipment provided. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Factory prefabricated. 2.02 Minimum height of 12 inches (unless otherwise indicated). 2.03 Completely insulated internally with 2 inch minimum thickness fiberglass insulation complying with NFPA 90A. 2.04 Approved by Architect prior to provision of roof openings. 2.05 Heavy gauge steel with welded joints and hot dip galvanized after fabrication, or heavy gauge aluminum with welded joints. 2.06 Foam rubber gasket on top of curb. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Coordination of Roof Curb Placement and Equipment Mounting: Mount equipment, curb and accessories in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Correlate size(s) of roof opening(s) and roof curb(s) with actual equipment to be mounted thereon. Properly flash and seal curb opening. END OF SECTION 230531 ROOF CURBS 230531 - Page 1 of 1 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION ISOLATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: It is the intent of the specification to provide for vibration isolation supports for all equipment and piping as may be required to prevent transmission of vibration to building structure. This shall include air handling units, fans, piping, chillers, pumps and similar items as are applicable to this project. 1.02 Design Conditions: Expected noise levels in various parts of the building shall conform to noise criteria recommendations as set forth in the 2003 ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook. The lower limit of the range of NC criteria curves shall apply. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to select and install vibration isolators, which will enable the noise criteria standards to be met, to the extent that the noise can be controlled by vibration isolators. 1.03 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". Submittal data shall show type, point, loading information, size and deflection of each isolator proposed and any other information as may be required for the Architect to check isolator selections for compliance with specification. Include clearly outlined procedures for installing and adjusting isolators. 1.04 Manufacturer's Qualifications: Products of the following manufacturers will be acceptable, provided they comply with all of the requirements of this specification: Mason Industries; Amber - Booth; Flexonics. 1.05 Relation to Other Work: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". 1.06 Other Requirements: All vibration isolation equipment shall be both recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Architect for each particular application on this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Basic Requirements: Unless otherwise noted, spring type vibration isolators shall be used for all motor driven equipment. It shall be the responsibility of isolation manufacturer to determine the amount of spring deflection required for each isolator to achieve optimum performance, prevent the transmission of objectionable vibration and meet noise criteria referenced herein. 2.02 Corrosion Protection: A. Steel components shall be phosphated and painted. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc - electroplated. Structural steel bases shall be thoroughly cleaned of welding slag and primed with zinc - chromate or metal etching primer. B. All isolators exposed to weather shall have steel parts PVC coated or hot -dip galvanized. Aluminum components shall be etched and painted. Nuts, bolts, and washers may be zinc - electroplated. 2.03 Basic Isolators (Unit Designations Indicated are Architect's Designations): Each of the following basic isolations may not be applicable to a specific installation application. See Section 3, "Execution ", for the type of actual isolators required. VIBRATION ISOLATION 230548 — Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX A. Spring Mounts, Open Type Unrestrained (Unit SMOU): Free standing springs; laterally stable; minimum horizontal -to- vertical spring rate (Kx /Ky) of 1.0; 1/2 -inch neoprene acoustical friction pads between bottom baseplate and the supporting surface; leveling bolts; provision for bolting the mount to the equipment (unless otherwise specified); spring diameters not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load; springs shall have a minimum additional travel to full compression of 50% of the rated deflection (unless otherwise specified); 1 -inch minimum static deflection (unless otherwise specified); submittals shall include spring diameters, deflections, free spring heights, solid spring heights, and operating heights. Be similar to Mason Type SLF; Korfund Series L; Amber -Booth Type SW. Spring Mounts, Open Type, Restrained (Unit SMOR): Free standing springs; laterally stable; 1/2 inch neoprene acoustical friction pads between bottom baseplate and the supporting surface; leveling bolts; provision for bolting the mount to the equipment (unless otherwise specified); spring diameters not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load; springs shall have a minimum additional travel to full compression of 50% of the rated deflection (unless otherwise specified); 1 -inch minimum static deflection (unless otherwise specified); restrain consisting of welded steel channel ends for outdoor installation and welded steel studs for indoor installation; restraint shall have restraining bolts connecting top plate and lower housing to limit vertical rise of isolated equipment when load is reduced; vertical clearance of 1/8 to 3/8 inch shall be maintained between spring top plate and housing (leveling bolts shall be adjusted to maintain this clearance). Submittal shall include spring diameters, deflections, free spring heights, solid spring heights, and operating heights. Be similar to Mason Type SLR; Amber -Booth Type CT. C. Neoprene and Spring Hangers, Vertical and Angular Deflection (Unit NSHVA): Shall contain a laterally stable steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene or fiberglass element in series. A neoprene neck shall be provided where the hanger rod passes through the steel box supporting the isolator mount to prevent metal to metal contact. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Mason Type 30N or equal. D. Neoprene -in Shear Hangers (Unit NH): Steel housing for undampened support of the neoprene; provisions for attachment of hanger rods, neoprene -in -shear isolator, similar to Mason Type HD, Amber -Booth Type HRD. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General: A. All isolators shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and shall be properly adjusted prior to requesting final inspection or the performance of any vibration testing specified. B. Each item of equipment (machinery, piping, etc.) which is provided with vibration isolation equipment shall rest in its intended, proper operating position (i.e.; exactly level, etc.) after installation of vibration isolation equipment. Approval of such vibration isolation equipment by Architect shall not relieve the contractor of this responsibility. VIBRATION ISOLATION 230548 — Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.02 Air Handling Unit: A. Flexible duct connections as specified in "Ductwork" section. B. Neoprene and Spring Hangers, Vertical and Angular Deflection (Unit NSHVA). 3.03 Manufacturers Supervision: The Contractor shall include in his price the cost of the vibration isolation manufacturer, or his qualified representative, providing such supervision as may be necessary to assure correct installation and adjustment of the isolators. Upon completion of the installation and after system is put into operation, the manufacturer or his representative shall make a final inspection and submit his report to the Architect in writing certifying the correctness of installation and compliance with approved submittal data. END OF SECTION 230548 VIBRATION ISOLATION 230548 — Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 230593 - TEST AND BALANCE - FINAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: HVAC Contractor shall provide the services of an independent test and balance agency to test, balance and certify the performance of the complete heating and air conditioning system, including supply and makeup air systems and all exhaust systems. 1.02 Job Requirements: The Contractor shall provide to the approved test and balance agency a complete set of plans and specifications and an approved copy of all heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment shop drawings. The Contractor shall include the cost of all pulley, belt, and drive changes, as well as balancing dampers required to achieve proper system balance recommended by the test and balance agency. 1.03 Agency Qualifications: The test and balance agency shall be an approved member of AABC or NEBB that specializes in testing and balancing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems. Acceptable: Test and Balance Corp. of Tampa, Phoenix Agency, Southern Independent Test and Balance, Bay to Bay Balancing, Inc. or other agency approved by Engineer. 1.04 Guarantee: The test and balance agency shall include a warranty period of ninety (90) days after completion and acceptable of test and balance work. During the warranty period, the Architect may request a re -check or re- setting of any outlet, supply fan, exhaust fan, or pump. The test and balance agency shall provide technicians, instruments, and tools to assist the Architect in conducting any test that he may require during this time. The foregoing shall be in addition to the A.A.M.C. National Project Certification Performance Guaranty which shall be forwarded with shop drawing data specified hereinbefore. 1.05 Perform all testing and balancing, adjusting and data recording necessary to establish and confirm capacity, quality and completed status of work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Instruments used for test and balance shall have been calibrated within a period of six (6) months prior to the testing and balancing of this project. Letter of certification listing instrumentation used and last date of calibration shall be furnished to Architect with test report. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 National Standards: Testing and balancing shall be performed in accordance with A.A.B.C. National Standards. 3.02 Loqs: Shall clearly indicate the following: A. All inlet and outlet areas. B. All applicable duct, pipe and coil sizes. C. Outside, inside, mixed and supply air conditions. D. All air velocities, flow rates, temperatures and pressures at significant locations TEST AND BALANCE - FINAL 230593 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX E. All fan speeds. F. All motor ampere ranges. G. Descriptions of each test method used. H. Use Associated Air Balance Council log and data forms. 3.03 Adjust and calibrate all applicable items (e.g., controls, dampers, registers, diffusers, thermometers, gauges, etc.). 3.04 Set all distribution devices to properly distribute conditioned air. 3.05 Check all safety devices for proper operation. 3.06 Verify adequacy, acceptable quietness and proper continuous operation of at least 24 hours duration of all motors, fans, etc. 3.07 Perform spot check tests or complete tests to fully reconfirm prior test results if required by the Architect as dependent upon extent, completeness and accuracy of prior tests and Togs. Do in Architect's presence if called for. 3.08 After air distribution devices have been balanced to distribute calculated design indicated air quantities and if temperature in any area (where such area does not have the particular zone temperature control thermostat located therein) of any zone is not maintained within 2 degrees plus or minus of the zone area which does have the zone temperature control thermostat, then notify the Architect in writing of such conditions and obtain Architect's approval to rebalance devices to obtain air quantities other than those indicated so that air temperature in entire zone will be as even as possible regardless of calculated design air quantities. After obtaining Architect's written approval to rebalance, perform such necessary rebalancing. 3.09 When the mechanical work is in a state of readiness for test and balance work to proceed, the test and balance contractor shall proceed with his work. If, upon this proceeding, the test and balance contractor determines that there are other items of the work (control items, sheet metal items and /or other similar specialties and proper completion of which affects the ability of the test and balance contractor to properly perform his work) which have not been completed to an extent which will allow him to complete test and balance work, then he shall make a detailed written report of these items and shall send written notification to the Contractor of such incomplete work. The Contractor shall then send a copy of this report to the Architect. The test and balance work shall not proceed until these items are corrected; such correction shall be subject to approval of Architect. 3.10 All mechanical systems shall be balanced to optimum performance capabilities of the equipment and the design. This shall be done in accordance with the standards published by the Associated Air Balance Council unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 Report: Upon completion of all testing and balancing and prior to requesting final inspection and acceptance of the project, submit three (3) complete copies of the Test and Balance Report to the Architect /Engineer for approval. No final inspection will be conducted until the final Test and Balance Report has been accepted by the Engineer. Measurements shall be taken by methods recommended in the AABC (Associated Air Balance Council) National Standards. All reports submitted for review shall contain all of the information required in the reports shown in the related chapters of the AABC National Standards. END OF SECTION 230593 TEST AND BALANCE - FINAL 230593 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 230700 - INSULATION, THERMAL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide plant, labor, and materials to insulate equipment, piping and miscellaneous items in the piping and duct systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 1.02 Relation to other work: Refer to section entitled "Common Requirements For Mechanical Work ". No insulation adhesives, materials or finishes shall be applied until the item to be insulated has been completely installed, tested and proved tight. 1.03 Shop Drawings: Refer to section entitled "Common Requirements For Mechanical Work ". 1.04 NFPA 90A: All materials and adhesives shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A as to flame spread and smoke developed ratings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Insulation Materials, General: Insulation materials shall include products from, but not limited to, the following approved manufacturers; a) Armstrong b) Calsilite c) Childers d) Compac e) Fasson f) Fosters g) Great Lakes h) Johns Manville i) Knauf j) Marathon k) Owens Corning I) Pittsburgh Corning m) Premier n) Proto o) Rubetex p) Truebro q) Venture INSULATION, THERMAL 230700 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX r) Vimasco s) Zeston 2.02 Ductwork Insulation Materials: A. Insulation, Fiber Glass Blanket Wrap (Type DI -1): Knauf Fiber Glass Duct Insulation, two and three sixteenths (2- 3/16 ") thick, three quarter (3/4 #) pound per cubic foot density; (R =6.0). B. Insulation, Ceramic Fiber Blanket (Type DI-4): Great Lakes Fire Stop Blanket. 2.03 Piping Insulation Materials: A. Insulation, Fiber Glass Pipe (Type PC -1): Knauf Fiber Glass Pipe Insulation, white all service jacket with self - sealing laps (asj /ssl). Insulation, Flexible Unicellular (Type PC -3): Armstrong AP Armaflex Pipe Insulation. C. Insulation, Flexible Fiber Glass (Type PC -4): Knauf Fiber Glass Wrap Insulation, one and one half (1 1/Z') thick, three quarter (3/4 #) pound per cubic foot density. D. Insulation, Molded Vinyl (Type PC -5): Truebro Handi Lav -Guard Kits, snap tight fasteners. 2.04 Equipment Insulation: A. Insulation, Flexible Unicellular Sheets (Type EQ -3): Armstrong Armaflex AP Sheet & Roll Insulation. 2.05 Adhesives, Mastics and Sealants: A. Flexible Unicellular Insulation Adhesive (Type FU -1): Armstrong # 520 Armaflex Adhesive. B. Vapor Barrier Mastic (Type VB -1): Vimasco # 749 VAPOR -BLOK, water based. 2.06 Miscellaneous Insulation Accessories: A. Vapor Barrier Tape (Type T -1): 3" wide dead soft aluminum foil pressure sensitive, acrylic based, Compac # 120. INSULATION, THERMAL 230700 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Mechanical Fasteners (Type F -1): Mild steel cup head capacitor discharge or glued stick pins, lengths as required to prevent over compression of insulation (25% maximum allowed). C. Staples (Type ST -1): Outward clinching type, mild steel. D. Fitting Covers (Type FTG -1): Proto 25/50 rated PVC fitting covers, factory supplied fiber glass inserts. PART 3 - EXECUTION PIPING 3.01 A. Domestic Hot Water Piping: Insulate with fiber glass pipe covering (PC -1), all jacket laps and butt strips sealed tight, and fitting covers (FTG -1). Heating hot water piping to be one and one half inches (1 ' /z') thick except for runouts to individual heating units to be one inch (1 ") thick. Steam supply piping to be two inches (2 ") thick, condensate return be one and one half inches (1 1/2') thick. All other piping to be one inch (1 ") thick. 3.02 A. Concealed Horizontal Rain Water Leaders Including The Vertical Portion Up To The Roof Sump: Insulate with flexible fiber glass insulation (PC -4), one and one half inches (1 1/2') thick, secured with staples (ST -1), all seams sealed with tape (T -1). 3.03 Interior Condensate Drain (Cold) Piping: Insulate with flexible cellular insulation (PC -3) three quarters of one inch (3/4 ") thick secured with adhesive (FU -1). 3.04 Refrigerant Suction Piping: Insulate with flexible cellular insulation (PC -3) three quarters of one inch (3/4 ") thick secured with adhesive (FU -1). Exterior insulation to be finished with two coats of finish (FU -2). 3.05 Handicapped Lavatories: Insulate water supplies and waste piping with molded vinyl covers (PC -5). DUCTWORK General: Internal insulation. See section entitled "Ductwork ". This section describes all of the ductwork used on this project and defines whether the ductwork should be insulated internally as work of the section "Ductwork" or externally insulted as work of the section "Insulation, Thermal ". Internally lined ductwork does not require any additional external insulation. 3.06 Low Pressure Ductwork, Interior Concealed: All supply (including ceiling outlets),return and outside air that is not internally insulated shall be externally insulated with fiber glass blanket (DI -1). Overlap internal insulation a minimum six INSULATION, THERMAL 230700 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX inches (6 ") beyond any such internal insulation and vapor seal raw edges as specified herein for joints. The insulation is to be wrapped around the ductwork and have its laps secured with staples (ST -1). Where duct width exceeds eighteen inches (18 "), the insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottoms of the ductwork using mechanical fasteners (F -1) spaced eighteen inches (18") on centers. Insulation shall be applied with all edges tightly butted and all joints and breaks in the vapor barrier sealed tight using tape (T -1) applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.07 Rectangular Medium and Low Pressure Ductwork, Interior Exposed: All supply, return and outside air that is not internally insulated shall be externally insulated with fiber glass board (DI -2). The insulation shall be secured to the ductwork using mechanical fasteners (F -1) spaced eighteen inches (18 ") on centers. Insulation shall be applied with all edges tightly butted and all joints and breaks in the vapor barrier sealed tight using tape (T -1) applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. When duct is round or flat oval, insulate with (DI -1) as in paragraph 3.08 above. 3.08 Smoke Damper External Surfaces: A. Externally Insulated Duct: Extend duct insulation up face of fire damper onto wall. Seal to wall with tape (T -1) coated with vapor barrier mastic (VB -1). 3.09 Flexible Duct Connections: Insulate with flexible unicellular sheet insulation (EQ -3), one inch (1 ") thick, adhered with adhesive (FU -1). GENERAL APPLICATION 3.10 Insulation Fit: Where insulation is applied to piping or equipment, it shall be installed with all joints fitted to eliminate voids. Voids shall not be filled with joint sealant but shall be eliminated by refitting or replacing the insulation. 3.11 Items Not Requiring Insulation: In general, the following items do not require insulation: Domestic cold water piping; Vertical storm water piping; and exposed piping located under sinks except for ADA compliance. END OF SECTION 230700 INSULATION, THERMAL 230700 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 231123 - NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 Scope: A. Work under this section of the specifications shall include furnishing, installing and testing the complete natural gas pipeline systems including piping, fittings, valves, outlets, cylinder manifolds, alarms, etc. (Electrical wiring shall be part of the electrical work under Division 16). B. All systems shall be complete in every aspect and ready to be put into operation. All materials used shall be new and of the best grade and quality obtainable, and workmanship shall be first class in every respect. The subcontractor shall be responsible for compliance with all local, state or federal codes and local gas company regulations applicable to this installation. C. The contractor shall arrange with the local gas utility for, and shall pay all charges incidental to, extending an underground service line and the installation of the gas meter. The contractor shall connect to the house side of the meter a complete natural gas piping system as shown on the drawings. 1.02 Specifications and Drawings: A. The plans show the location of all fixtures and equipment and are intended to depict the general intent of the work, in scope, layout and quality of workmanship. They are not intended to show, in minute detail, each and all accessories intended for the purpose of execution of the work, but shall be understood that such details will be part of this work. B. Where drawings and specifications conflict, it shall be the responsibility of this contractor to bring such conflict to the attention of the Architect for clarification. 1.03 Relationship to Other Work: Refer to Section 15000 entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". Piping systems requiring fixed locations and slopes shall take priority over those which do not have these requirements. 1.04 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section 15000 entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". 1.05 Quality Assurance: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of natural gas piping products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not Tess than 5 (five) years. B. Installer: A firm with at least 3 (three) years of successful installation experience on projects with natural gas piping system work similar to that required for project. C. ANSI Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI 831.2 "Fuel Gas Piping" D. National Fuel Gas Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1) "National Fuel Gas Code ", and ANSI Z223.1a "Supplement to National Fuel Gas Code ". NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM 231123 — Page 1of 4 PAROJECT NUMBER 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX E. Local Utility Compliance: Comply with requirements of local gas utility company. 1.06 Industry Standards: Where compliance with an industry, society or association standard is specified or indicated, certification of such compliance shall be submitted with shop drawings. Equipment shall, where applicable, be the same manufacturer throughout the system and shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed or Factory Mutual approved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Pipe and Fittings: Natural gas piping shall be schedule 40 PE polyethylene pipe conforming to ASTM and AWWA with PE fittings conforming to ASTM and AWWA. All piping shall be extruded with homogeneous wall and pressure rated to 150 psi. Fittings shall be heat fusion welded. 2.02 Gas Cocks: A. Gas Cocks 2" and Smaller: 150 psi non - shock, WOG, bronze straightway cock, flat or square head, threaded ends, Jenkins No. 30A. B. Gas Cocks 2 1/2" and Larger: 125 psi non - shock, WOG, iron body, bronze mounted, straightway cock, square head, flanged ends. Nordstrom No. 142 or 143. 2.03 Control Valves: Master Gas Control Valve: Bronze body, packless, single seat, explosion - proof, solenoid operated, normally closed, UL approved, automatic reset, 120 volt. 2.04 Control Station: Control Station: Push - button station, by Automatic Switch Company, mounted in 2 -gang box, 1 normally open key operated contact, 1 normally closed push- button operated contact, face -plate inscribed with "GAS VALVE CONTROL" on top, "OPEN" over keyhole, "CLOSED" over push- button. Install at exit from room. 2.05 Pressure Regulating Valves: Provide single stage, steel jacketed, corrosion resistant gas pressure regulators; with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator; with threaded ends for 2" and smaller, flanged ends for 2 -1/2" and larger; for inlet and outlet gas pressures, specific gravity, and volume flow indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Gas Service: A. Arrange with utility company to provide gas service to indicated location with shutoff valve at terminus. Consult with utility as to extent of its work, costs, fees and permits involved. Pay such costs and fees; obtain permits. B. Extend service pipe from utility's terminus to inside building wall, under utility's direction. C. Provide shutoff in gas service pipe at entry to building, extend pipe to gas meter location indicated; provide parts and accessories required by utility to connect meter. 3.02 Installation of Piping: A. All piping shall be run straight without sags or traps and shall be so pitched as to drain back to the riser and from the riser to the meter. A drip pocket consisting of a nipple and a cap shall be screwed into the bottom of each riser and at all low points of the gas NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM 231123 — Page 2of 4 PAROJECT NUMBER 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX distributing system. Install all piping in accordance with Southern Standard Gas Code, Section 901 and the local authorities having jurisdiction. All gas piping within the building shall be run exposed unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. C. All pipe and fittings in the ground shall be protected against corrosion by a wrapping applied in accordance with the standards of the gas company. Field- fabricated joints shall be similarly protected. Exposed piping between meter and building shall be cleaned and painted with one coat asphaltic aluminum paint. D. For piping buried in building substrate, or below floor slabs, install in welded conduit, ventilated to outdoors on both ends, and tested to same requirements as gas piping. E. Plug each gas outlet, including valves, with threaded plug or cap immediately after installation and retain until continuing piping, or equipment connections are completed. 3.03 Tests: The complete natural gas piping system shall be tested at 75 PSIG for three (3) hours with no pressure drop or as requested by the local administrative authority or the local gas company. Ether or peppermint fumes shall be used to locate leaks. All tests shall be observed by a representative of the Architect and local gas company before the tests are removed. 3.04 Purging: After the piping system has been checked and tested it shall be purged. Under no circumstances shall a line be purged into the combustion chamber of an appliance. The open ends of piping systems being purged shall not discharge into confined spaces or areas where there are sources of ignition unless precautions are taken to perform purging in a safe manner by ventilation of the space, control of purging rate and elimination of all hazardous conditions. 3.05 Painting: Piping exposed in finished areas shall be painted in a color to be selected by the Architect. Under no circumstances shall painting be done before testing and approval of the system is complete. END OF SECTION 231123 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM 231123 — Page 3of 4 PAROJECT NUMBER 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 231316 - PIPING AND FITTINGS: STORM, SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND DRAIN PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide storm, soil, waste, vent and drain piping systems complete as indicated on drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves, and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this section at no additional cost to Owner (no change in Contract price). 1.02 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Pipe: Schedule 40 PVC. 2.02 Fittings: PVC solvent welded fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ", paragraph entitled "Drawings ". 3.02 Joints and Connections: A. General: Joints and connections shall be made permanently air, gas, and water tight. B. Connections: Provide fixture and equipment connections in compliance with requirements of local codes. 3.03 Flashinqs: A. Floor Drains, Roof Drains, Showers, Etc.: Provide proper flashings for plumbing specialties installed in floors and roofs. Flashings shall be as per detail shown on architectural drawings. B. Roof Penetrations: Provide flashing for all pipes passing through the roof. Minimum height of vents shall be one foot (1') above finished roof. Refer to architectural drawings for detail. 3.04 Cleanouts: Provide as indicated and as required by local code. Provide access covers as specified for concealed locations. END OF SECTION 231316 PIPING AND FITTINGS: STORM, SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND DRAIN 231316 - Page 1 of 1 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 232115 - PIPING: CONDENSATE DRAIN PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide condensate drain piping from cooling coil drain pans. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 Pipe: Schedule 40 PVC. 2.02 Fittings: Solvent welded. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General: Piping shall be sloped uniformly toward drain, and provided with trap seal having a depth, in inches, equivalent to the total static pressure of the respective fan system. Traps shall be assembled using elbows and tees with threaded brass plugs to permit cleaning of trap and drain line. Piping shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall not be smaller than full size of the equipment drain connection or three - quarters inch (3/4 "), whichever is larger. 3.02 Routing: Route pipe discharge to nearest drain or as otherwise indicated on drawings. 3.03 Insulation: Insulate as specified in Section 15400 entitled "Thermal Insulation ". END OF SECTION 232115 PIPING: CONDENSATE DRAIN 232115 - Page 1 of 1 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPE, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide refrigerant piping systems, complete in all respects, between the system components and connected equipment. 1.02 Shop Drawing: Refer to the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". Provide flow diagram shop drawings of each different type of refrigerant piping system used on this project. Indicate all pipe sizes, accessories, filters, etc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Copper Pipe: Refrigerant system piping shall be refrigerant grade, dehydrated and sealed, seamless, uniformly dead soft temper. 2.02 Fittings: Refrigerant grade, wrought copper, long radius, solder joint type. 2.03 Flux: Non - corrosive, specifically designed for silver brazing. 2.04 Solder: Silver brazing alloy (Sil Fos) Fed. Spec. AA- S -561d. 2.05 Access Valves: Schrader type designed for use with quick coupler hose fittings and provided with individual cap. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Pipe Sizes: Refrigerant pipe sizes which may be shown on drawings are nominal. Provide sizes not less than sizes indicated and in compliance with size recommended by the manufacturer(s) at the connected equipment. Provide change in sizes if such change is in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and with Architect's approval. Size piping to maintain minimum velocity of 500 -fpm in horizontal lines and 1000 fpm in vertical risers for proper oil return; provide double suction risers and hot gas risers as may be necessary to accomplish this. 3.02 Refrigerant Specialties: Refrigerant valves, driers, expansion valves, and similar items shall be provided with each system. Where refrigerant access valves are not furnished by manufacturer, they shall be field installed to enable charging and checking the system. 3.03 Solder Joints: Cut tubing square using tubing cutters, with sharp cutting wheels, so as not to crimp the tubing ends. Remove all burrs using a pipe reamer and taking care not to flare the ends of the tube. Thoroughly clean the outside of the pipe and the inside of the fitting using a fine sand cloth. Apply non - corrosive paste flux to the cleaned surfaces immediately and apply silver solder and heat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use care not to damage equipment or refrigerant specialty items when making up joints (protect from excessive heat). 3.04 Scale Prevention: During brazing, keep pipe system full of inert gas to prevent scale formation. 3.05 Mechanical Joints: Where the Contractor uses refrigerant tubing sets, follow the manufacturer's installation instructions explicitly, including the use of special tools, when making up the joints. REFRIGERANT PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES 232300 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Where pre- charged tubing and equipment is provided, do not cut into the system to install access valves. 3.06 Hangers and Supports: Refer to any sections of this division entitled "Hangers and Supports ", or entitled "Vibration Isolation ". Isolate copper tubing from contact with any dissimilar metals. 3.07 Evacuation and Charging: When other than completely factory charged equipment and piping systems are used, they shall be evacuated and charged as follows: Charge the system with dry nitrogen and refrigerant and leak test all joints including factory piping within the units. Repair all leaks by disassembling and remaking the joint. After all leaks are corrected, evacuate the system to an absolute pressure of 0.2" mercury. System shall hold this vacuum test for two hours with no noticeable rise in pressure. After passing vacuum test, break vacuum twice using refrigerant and re- evacuate for a minimum of two hours each time. Charge the system in the manner and with the type and amount of refrigerant recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with accepted refrigeration practice. 3.08 Protection of Work: Protect all refrigerant piping systems from damage prior to final acceptance and make repairs to damaged systems at once, completely evacuating and charging as specified herein. 3.09 Other Requirements: A. Arrange piping generally as shown and such that service access is facilitated. Keep refrigerant lines as short and direct as possible with a minimum number of joints. Provide sleeves through floors, wall, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full- thickness insulation; seal air tight after installation of piping and insulation. B. Provide flexible piping arrangement in hot gas discharge line of compressor. Such arrangement shall consist of a piping loop or similar measure to prevent transmission of objectionable vibration. C. Provide a removable core filter -drier in liquid line. In -line filter- driers are acceptable in individual circuits of less than 10 -ton nominal capacity. Provide a full size valved bypass around this filter- drier. Provide shut -off valves to isolate the filter - drier while flow is through the bypass and also a shut -off valve in the bypass so that filter -drier can be put into use. D. Provide a refrigerant charging connection in the liquid line upstream from the filter- drier. E. Provide a moisture indicator /sight glass in the liquid line downstream from the filter- drier. Install in vertical line if possible and a sufficient distance downstream from any valve such that the resulting disturbance does not appear in the glass. F. Provide a filter -drier with isolating shut -off valves and with valved bypass only if compressor is not equipped with a suction line filter or screen. G. Keep piping free from traps unless otherwise indicated. Install vertical pipe plumb. Pitch horizontal piping only where slope is desirable. H. Provide shut -off valves at inlet and outlet to all condensers, receivers and evaporators to permit isolation for service. If possible, use angle valves to minimize pressure drop. Use angle valves in all cases at receivers. Use glove valves only when angle valves are impractical. REFRIGERANT PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES 232300 - Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Provide solenoid valves upright in horizontal lines only unless their design allows installation in vertical pipe. J. Where compressor(s) do not have pump down control and the compressor(s) associated evaporator coil(s) do not have bottom suction header connections and the evaporator coil(s) are located above the compressor(s), then loop suction line(s) to top level of coil to prevent liquid slugging. K. To prevent erratic operation of thermal expansion valve, provide a suction line trap next to evaporator coil suction outlet with expansion valve bulb located between coil and trap. Provide only in suction lines which are level leaving coil outlet or which rise on leaving coil outlet. Trap not required when evaporator coil outlet suction line drops to compressor or suction header immediately after expansion valve bulb. END OF SECTION 232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES 232300 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 233113 - LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide complete duct systems as indicated. Systems shall include, but not be limited to; the following: Outside air, exhaust air, and air conditioning supply and return air duct systems as shown on drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, and like items; however, these items shall be installed as required for the actual project conditions at no change in contract price. A. Items Included: This section generally includes, but is not limited to, the following major items: 1. Low pressure sheet metal ductwork. 2. Low pressure flexible ducts. 3. Duct system accessories. a. Flexible duct connections. b. Low pressure metal turning vanes. c. Manual volume dampers. d. Low pressure access doors. 1.02 Relation to Other Work: Coordinate shop drawings ordering, delivery, and placement of all items affecting the duct systems including, but not limited to, the following items: Air handling units, exhaust fans, supply fans, sound attenuators, duct mounted coils, access panels, air distribution devices, fire dampers, outside air louvers, hoods, filters, roof curbs, structural framing, roof construction, roofing, and the work of all trades to insure an orderly and timely progression of the work. Refer to the requirements of the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". 1.03 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". Include complete data on: All prefabricated duct and fittings; access doors; flexible connectors; manual volume dampers including operating hardware; extractors; turning vanes; automatic shutters; duct liner including mechanical fasteners and adhesives; and all other items. 1.04 Air Handling Unit and Ductwork Configuration Shop Drawings: A. Air handling unit manufacturer and model or series, which has been used as the design basis for this project, is indicated. If Contractor elects to submit for approval any unit which is made by any other manufacturer which is listed as acceptable, the Contractor shall submit a shop drawing for each air handling unit for which he proposes to use a unit which is different than the design basis. Such shop drawings shall meet the following requirements: 1. Be drawn at the same scale as the unit is shown on the Drawings. Contractor may elect to use a larger scale if he desires (i.e., if drawing of unit is at 1/4" = 1' -0 ", 1/2" = 1' -0" may be used). LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 233113 -Page 1 of 9 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Clearly show all proposed ductwork configuration changes (sizes, routing, and similar differences) which are different in any respect from the Drawings. Extent of shop drawings shall show all ductwork to and from each unit beginning with and terminating at those points where ductwork is intended to remain unchanged as shown on Drawings. 3. Where proposed changes affect any other work such as structure, housekeeping pads, piping, equipment, electrical work or any other work, shop drawings shall clearly show those proposed changes. 4. Proposed changes shall be at no additional change in contract price. 5. Where Drawings show units in plan only, shop drawings shall show proposed units in plan and also in elevation. 6. Shop drawings shall also show exact locations of related work (such as bar joists, columns, beams, sound attenuators, and like items) which affect the proposed ductwork routing and unit location and configuration. 7. Each section of each air handling unit shall be clearly identified (i.e., coil section, fan section, filter section, mixing box section, etc.). B. Failure to submit these shop drawings together at the same time with the air handling unit shop drawings will result in total disapproval of the proposed air handling units. Time delays or other reasons will not be considered. C. These shop drawings shall be prepared as work of this section in coordination with the work of section describing the air conditioning unit(s). 1.05 Other Requirements: A. Provide all ductwork and components thereof in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. All ductwork dimensions indicated are nominal free clearance internal dimensions, which do not include insulation thickness. 1.06 Definitions: A. "SMACNA" means "Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc." B. Low Pressure Ductwork: Any and all ductwork conveying air or other gases at velocities Tess than 2000 fpm and static pressure less than 2.0 inches w.g. This ductwork may also be referred to in these specifications as "Low Velocity Ductwork ". SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible," First Edition, 1985, shall govern construction of this ductwork unless otherwise specified; construct duct in accord therewith. C. Pressure and Velocity Classifications: Pressure and velocity classifications, (hereinafter called "P/VC ") for ducts are defined as follows: Positive • • LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 233113 - Page 21 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SMACNA Static or SMACNA PNC Pressure Pressure Negative Seal Velocity Designation Class Rating Pressure Class (fpm) 2 Low 2" + or - B 2500 do 1 Low 1" + or - C 2500 do 1/2 Low 1/2" + or - D 2000 do Note: All seams, joints, fastener penetrations and connections to be sealed with hard cast. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork: Systems operating at two inches of water static pressure or less, shall, unless specifically specified otherwise, conform to the following requirements: A. Material: Prime quality forty -eight inch wide resquare tight coat galvanized steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM A -526. B. Reinforcing, Cross Breaking, Seams, Joints: Be in accordance with latest SMACNA construction standard for low- pressure sheet metal duct. 2.03 Glass Fiber Low Pressure Ductwork: None allowed on this project. 2.04 Low Pressure Round Ductwork: A. Conduit: Shall be "zinc grip" steel of spiral lock -seam construction. Duct shall be made using galvanized steel as per ASTM A -527 G -90. Gauge shall be as follows: 1. Round Duct: Fitting Size Duct Gauge Gauge Up through 8 "diameter 26 gauge 24 gauge 9" through 14" diameter 26 gauge 24 gauge 15" through 26" diameter 24 gauge 22 gauge 27" through 36" diameter 22 gauge 20 gauge 37" through 50" diameter 20 gauge 20 gauge 51" through 60" diameter 18 gauge 18 gauge 61" through 84" diameter 16 gauge 16 gauge 2.05 Low Pressure Flexible Ducts: Flexible duct shall consist of spiral wound Helix Coil with Trilaminate Inner Fabric. Core shall be covered with factory applied one inch, one pound per cubic foot fiberglass insulation of 0.23 thermal conductance sheathed in a seamless exterior Class 1 vapor barrier jacket reinforced aluminum foil metalized jacket. Connections shall be made using quadrant dampered twist -in type fittings with extractor scoops and volume damper. Duct shall be NFPA 90A, Class 1 (UL 181), flame spread Tess than 25 and smoke developed less than 50. Provide in factory finished lengths not in excess of 6' -0' to make suitable connections with minimum pressure drop. Acceptable: Flexmaster, Genflex, Clevaflex or equal with "SPIN -IN" fitting with integral damper and air scoop at connection to main duct branch. LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 233113 -Page 3 of 9 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.06 Duct System Accessories: A. General: 1. Provide all necessary duct system accessories to assure proper balance, quiet and draftless distribution and conveyance, and minimization of turbulence, noise and pressure drop for all supply, return, and exhaust and ventilation air quantities indicated. 2. Be recommended by the manufacturer for the application. B. Flexible Duct Connections: 1. Provided where air handlers, fans and blowers connect their ductwork. 2. At least 4 inches long. 3. Connected on each side to metal (either metal ductwork, air handling apparatus, or heavy gauge steel sleeves). 4. For use in low- pressure duct systems. 5. Ventfabrics, Inc., "Ventglas Metaledge ". C. Low Pressure Metal Turning Vanes: Provide in all elbows, bends and tees of all low velocity supply air ducts whether or not shown in detail; provide in all elbows, bends and tees of all other low velocity ducts where portions of such ducts convey air at greater than 700 fpm average velocity. Adequate rigidity and strength to be complete flutterproof; properly designed; permanently fixed type. Aluminum, or steel with corrosion resistant coating, or galvanized steel. Air foil type in all mitered elbows, mitered bends and mitered tees. Air foil type must be manufactured by Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Anemostat, Waterloo, Metalaire, Barber - Colman, "Airturns ", Tuttle & Bailey "Ducturns ", or Dura -Dyne "VR" with 24 gauge rails and hollow vanes. D. Manual Volume Dampers: (Other than those specified as being integral with each register diffuser and other air outlet or inlet): 1. Provide where indicated in the complete air distribution system(s) (including ductwork, return air plenums, etc.) to allow complete balancing of the air supply, return, ventilation and exhaust system(s). 2. Opposed blade type. 3. 8" Maximum blade width. 4. Made of galvanized steel, or steel with a sprayed or dipped aluminum rust resistant finish; flutterproof. 5. Provided so that all damper adjustments can be made from outside the completed ductwork without necessity for puncturing or otherwise penetrating ductwork and /or its vapor barrier. 6. Fully adjustable and with locking device. • • LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 233113 - Page 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 7. Manufactured by Titus, Metalaire, or other approved manufacturer. 8. Provided at a point in the ductwork which is a sufficient distance upstream from an outlet (or downstream from an inlet) to attenuate objectionable noise due to damper throttling and to preclude adverse affects on the distribution characteristics (throw, drop, patter, etc.) of the air distribution device. 9. Based upon location of the duct in which the damper is to be installed, provide the following types: a. Dampers in ducts which are exposed or located above "lay -in" or "accessible ceilings ": Young Regulator Company Model 896. b. Dampers in ducts concealed above plaster ceilings or behind dry wall construction: Young Regulator company Model 896. E. Low Pressure Duct Access Doors: 1. Provided for: Each manual and motorized damper; fire damper; smoke damper; electric duct heater; and where access is otherwise necessary. 2. Factory prefabricated double wall insulated type of 24 US gauge galvanized steel (of same or thicker gauge than ductwork panel in, which installed whichever is greater). 3. Minimum size shall be as large as is compatible with duct size, but in no case Tess than the following (provide larger sizes if necessary to permit proper access operating): Maximum Duct Dimensions 11" or less 12" through 16" 17" and over Access Door Size 10" X 12" 12" X 16" 16" X 24" 4. Doors shall be provided with hand operated adjustable tension catches and shall be completely gasketed around their perimeters. Doors shall be Ventlock "Access Doors ". Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations using Ventlock #360 sealant. F. Test Openings: Furnish and install gasketed applied test openings for test equipment (pitot tubes, etc.) on the entering and leaving sides of air handling units and other air handling equipment and heating coils. Test openings shall be Ventlock #699 -2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General: A. Construct all ductwork and accessories in accordance with the latest indicated editions of applicable Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association construction standards. LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 233113 -Page 5 of 9 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Streamline all ductwork to the full extent practical and equip with proper and adequate devices to assure proper balance and quiet draftless distribution of indicated air quantities. C. Protect all ductwork and system accessories from damage during construction until Architect's final acceptance of project. D. Prior to ductwork fabrication, verify if all ductwork as dimensioned and generally shown will satisfactorily fit allocated spaces. Take precautions to avoid space interference's with beams, columns, joists, pipes, lights, conduit, other ducts, equipment, etc. Notify Architect if any spatial conflicts exist, and then obtain Architect's approval of necessary routing. Make any such necessary revisions, which are minor at no additional cost. E. Carefully correlate all duct connections to air handling units and fans to provide proper connections, elbows and bends which minimize noise and pressure drop. F. Provide all curved elbows with radius ratios of not less than 1.5, unless otherwise shown or approved by Architect. Provide all mitered elbows with turning vanes. G. Properly suspend all ductwork so that no objectionable conditions result (such as vibration, sagging, etc.). H. Coordinate any and all dimensions at interfaces of dissimilar type of ductwork and at interfaces of ductwork with equipment so that proper overlaps, interfaces, etc., of insulation and continuity of vapor barriers are maintained. I. If necessary, where ducts interface and have different types of insulation, provide transitions so that internal free -clear dimensions of duct remain unchanged. J. Install horizontal low pressure ductwork at a level which maximizes length of any vertical rectangular duct connections to rectangular diffuser necks; however, such vertical duct connections are not required to be over 24 inches in length. K. Install all flexible round duct without kinks or similar obstructions so that pressure drop is minimized. Cut and remove excess lengths as necessary. L. Install horizontal rigid ductwork as high as practical above suspended ceilings so that movable light fixtures may be relocated without interference to meet any future partition relocation requirements. 3.02 Special Conditions: The following duct system installation requirements shall be done to maximize flexibility of relocation of lighting systems, duct systems and fire sprinkler systems in the event of partition relocation and in order to facilitate ease of servicing components of the systems contained within the ceiling plenum. These requirements are: A. Install all horizontal rigid ductwork against the underside of the steel structure. Coordinate ductwork reinforcing such that standing seams angles and similar space- consuming reinforcement does not occur on the top surface of ducts where such ducts pass below steel beams. B. Make minor field adjustments as necessary to the locations of terminal units as shown on the drawings such that: • • LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 233113 - Page 61 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. Each terminal unit is essentially in the center of a ceiling module and is not obstructed from access from below by the main runners or cross tees of the ceiling system. 2. Each terminal unit is not installed over a light fixture or such that a light fixture does not obstruct service access to the unit. 3. Each terminal unit is supported at an elevation such that the bottom of the terminal unit is at least 10- inches above the bottom of the ceiling. To accomplish this, each terminal unit may be recessed upward into the main structural bay cavity and provided at its outlet with a downwardly - sloped supply air duct which contains two angular offsets (each of which is not greater than 15 angular degrees) to allow the supply duct to drop to the same horizontal plane as the remainder of the low pressure ductwork. 4. No terminal unit is located so that access to it is obstructed by fire sprinkler system piping. 5. No rigid duct is located to obstruct access to an electrical lighting system junction box. 3.03 Field Measurement: Refer to the requirements of the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". 3.04 Hangers and Supports: A. General: Comply with latest applicable SMACNA construction standards. Where sprayed fireproofing occurs, install hangers before application of such treatment and withhold installation of ducts until after application. B. Supports: Vertical risers and other duct runs where the method of support specified above is not applicable shall be supported by substantial angle brackets designed to meet field conditions and installed to allow for duct expansion. C. Fasteners: Secure hangers to steel beams or metal deck with beam clamps to drop through connections from metal or concrete deck. Refer to the requirements of the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". 3.05 Insulated Duct: Where ducts will be insulated, make provision for neat insulation finish around damper operating quadrants, splitter adjustment clamps, access doors, and similar operating devices. A metal collar equivalent in depth to insulation thickness and of suitable size to which insulation may be finished shall be mounted on duct. 3.06 Partition and Floor Openings: All openings in floor slabs or partitions through which ducts pass shall be filled tightly with mineral or glass wool batting. 3.07 Smoke Dampers: A. Install smoke dampers where indicated on drawings. Install adjustable linkage stops on linkage so that the open position of damper may be adjusted and set. B. Where smoke dampers and smoke detectors are located together, install smoke damper on downstream side of smoke detector. LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 233113 -Page 7 of 9 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. See Section 15880. 3.08 Change In Shape or Dimension: Where duct size or shape is changed to effect a change in area, the following shall apply: A. Where the area at the end of the transformation results in an increase in area over that at the beginning, the slope of the transformation shall not exceed one inch in seven inches. B. Where the area at the end of the transformation results in a decrease in area from that at the beginning, the slope of the transformation may be one inch in four inches, but one inch in seven inches if preferable, space permitting. C. The angle of transformation at connections to heating coils or other equipment shall not exceed thirty degrees from a line parallel to the air flow in the entering side of the equipment, nor fifteen degrees on the leaving side. The angle of approach may be increased to suit limited space conditions when the transformation is provided with vanes approved by the Architect. D. At contractors option, connection from low pressure rectangular ductwork to air distribution devices via flexible ductwork may be made from bottom of rectangular ductwork in lieu of side connection providing contractor makes appropriate size transitions (if necessary) to maintain same free clear internal area at connection and also allows dimensional clearance for spin -in fitting with integral damper. E. At contractors option, he may eliminate a low pressure duct transition and hold the upstream duct size to the next downstream transition and make the necessary size transition at that point. 3.09 Changes in Direction: Changes in direction shall be basically as indicated on the drawings and the following shall apply: A. Supply ducts turns of ninety degrees in low- pressure duct shall be made with mitered elbows fitted with closely spaced turning vanes designed for maintaining a constant velocity through the elbow. B. Return and exhaust duct turns of ninety degrees in low pressure duct shall be made mitered elbows, as specified herein before, for supply ducts, unless radius elbows are indicated, in which case they shall be vaned and constructed with a throat radius three - quarters the duct width and a full radius heel. C. Tees in low- pressure duct shall conform to the design requirements specified herein before for elbows. D. Branch take -offs in low- pressure duct shall be made with extractors, splitter dampers, or 45 take -off with volume dampers, as indicated on drawings. 3.10 Other Requirements: A. If ductwork materials are installed which do not meet these specifications, Contractor shall remove such ductwork materials and replace them with the specified materials. Any delay in job progress will be the responsibility of the Contractor. • • LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 233113 - Page 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Properly install all control related devices, which are part of the duct system. See Section(s) describing HVAC control systems. END OF SECTION 233113 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 233113 -Page 9 of 9 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 233313 - FIRE DAMPERS (If required) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included: A. Fire dampers. B. Access doors. 1.02 Related Work: A. Section 15000: General Conditions B. Section 15850: Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork 1.03 Reference Standards: A. NFPA 90A (2009 edition). B. SMACNA Fire, Smoke, and Radiation Installation Guide for HVAC Systems. C. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. D. SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards. 1.04 Submittals: Submit drawings, specifications and schedules in accordance with Section 01300 and Section 15000. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers: A. National Controlled Air. B. Ruskin. C. Greenheck. 2.02 Construction: A. Fire dampers: One -piece roll galvanized steel frame, 20 -gauge minimum; galvanized steel roll form blades 22 gauge minimum, 165 degree F replaceable, fusible link & as noted on plans security bars. 1 -1/2 to 3 hour rating. B. Fire /Seal Access Doors: Frame, 24 -gauge galvanized steel with 5/8" notched knock over edges for sheet metal or flanged frame for fiberglass duct. Door, insulated, one -inch thick double cam access, galvanized steel. C. Testing: All fire dampers shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for its intended use, per industry standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION FIRE DAMPERS 233313 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.01 Provide smoke dampers at all location shown on plans, and if not shown on plans, where ducts and outlets pass through or penetrate smoke -rated components. 3.02 Provide largest size access doors up to 16 inches by 24 inches that can be installed in the ductwork without obstruction. Provide an access door for each damper. 3.03 Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 233313 FIRE DAMPERS 15880 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 233423 - FANS, POWER ROOF VENTILATOR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide all power roof ventilators of size, capacity, and electrical characteristics indicated on the drawings or as otherwise indicated. 1.02 Shop Drawings: Refer to the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". 1.03 Manufacturer: Greenheck Fan and Ventilator Corp.; Loren Cook Company; or approved equal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Fan Hood, Housing and Base: Weatherproof and constructed of heavy gauge aluminum. Motor and drive shall be supported by a structural frame independent of hood, housing and curb base. 2.02 Fan Wheel: Backward curved, non - overloading, aluminum, air foil blade type. 2.03 Drive Assembly: Direct or belt drive type as indicated. Conform to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". 2.04 Disconnect Switch: Provide factory mounted disconnect switches wired to the motor. 2.05 Bird Screen: Provide 1/2" mesh aluminum bird screens on all fans. 2.06 Starter: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Roof Curb Placement and Fan Mounting: Fan location shall be essentially as shown on the drawings; however, actual placement of roof curb shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to the equipment approved for actual installation. Mount fan and backdraft damper in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 233423 FANS, POWER ROOF VENTILATOR 233423 — Page 1 of 1 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 233713 - AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide all air distribution devices as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein for a complete and operable system. 1.02 Relation to Other Work: Coordinate with work of the ceiling, drywall, and plastering trades as required to insure an orderly progression of work and a first class finished system with respect to placement, alignment, finish, general fit, and absence of conflict with lighting systems and fire protection systems. 1.03 Design Conditions: A. Acoustical: Noise produced at each diffuser, register, grille, or other air distribution device shall not exceed a noise criteria level of NC 25 based on sound pressure levels in db re 0.0002 microbars unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate air distribution devices, sound attenuation measures, and equipment actually provided to insure that this design constraint is not exceeded by the system installed. B. Pressure drop across any air distribution device shall not exceed 0.10 in w.g. static pressure unless otherwise indicated. C. Guarantee: Air distribution equipment shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer to operate without excessive noise and with velocities in the five foot occupancy zone, when handling air with temperature differentials as high as 25 degrees, not to exceed 30 fpm at 2 degree difference, 50 fpm at 1 -1/2 degree difference, or 75 fpm at a 1 degree difference when operating with an average 75 degree room temperature and measured no closer than 6 inches from a wall surface. 1.04 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". 1.05 Manufacturer: Titus, Metalaire, Price or approved equal. Manufacturers style and series numbers indicated are examples of products to be provided. 1.06 Manufacturers must be members of the Air Distribution Council unless otherwise indicated. 1.07 All aluminum is to be extruded unless otherwise indicated. 1.08 Appearance: Each air distribution device which has a portion thereof (frame, core, etc.) exposed to view in the finished area shall have a factory applied finish which matches and is compatible with the color of the surrounding surface on which the device is installed. Colors must be approved by Architect prior to device fabrication. 1.09 All louvers, dampers, and /or shutters shall be rated by their manufacturer in accordance with AMCA Standard in effect. 1.10 Integral Components: All dampers, blank -off baffles and other companion devices which form an integral part of air distribution devices shall be factory made items produced by the manufacturer of air distribution device. AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 233713 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Ceiling Mounted Conditioned Air Supply Diffusers, Return Air, and Exhaust Air A. Designated on drawings by the manner of indicated system function for the device. B. Sponge Rubber Gaskets. C. Aluminum or steel, as specified. D. Companion adjustable volume dampers. 2.02 Ceiling Mounted Transfer Grilles: A. Designated on drawings by the manner of the indicated system function for the device. B. Aluminum or steel as specified. C. Sponge rubber gaskets. 2.03 Mounting Screws: Where grilles, diffusers, or registers are specified which require mounting screws visible from the face of the device, these screws shall be furnished with the air distribution equipment or register in which they are to be used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General: A. Install neatly where indicated in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and in accord with SMACNA recommendations and as otherwise indicated. B. Properly test, balance and adjust to produce quiet, draftless operating to best degree possible. C. Do not install blank -offs under continuous linear diffuser distribution plenums. Distribution plenums shall cover only active portion of the diffuser. 3.02 Rectangular Diffusers: Where diffusers are in lay -in type, they shall be supported by the inverted T -bar suspension system, but all ducts connected thereto shall be supported independently of the ceiling as specified under Section entitled "Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork ". Surface mounted diffusers shall be supported by the duct runouts or drops where sheet metal ducts are indicated and by separate hangers where flex runouts are indicated. All rectangular ceiling diffusers shall be installed with their lines parallel and perpendicular to the building line and properly aligned with ceiling. 3.03 Sidewall Grilles and Registers: Mount securely to the duct system flanges using finish screws and in accordance with accepted good practice. 3.04 Ceiling Mounted Exhaust and Return Registers /Grilles: Mount as specified herein before for surface mounted ceiling diffusers except use finished screws provided and secure to duct and finished ceiling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Where required to provide adequate support for registers or grilles, provide appropriate mounting frame for incorporation into the ceiling system. AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 233713 - Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX END OF SECTION 233713 AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 233713 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 238129 - GAS ENGINE HEAT PUMP WITH VARIABLE REFRIGERANT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Furnish and install packaged air - cooled, gas engine heat pump system with variable refrigerant flow as indicated on drawings and specified herein. 1.02 Relation to Other Work: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". Note that the space available for the chiller(s) is restricted dimensionally. 1.03 Shop Drawings: Refer to the requirements of Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". 1.04 Manufacturer: The heat pumps used as a basis of design are as scheduled. This is not to imply that all features specified herein or indicated on drawings as requirements for this project are standard to the manufacturer's product nor that the standard project will be acceptable without such modifications as may be required to meet these requirements. Acceptable: Yanmar Energy System Company. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 System description The variable capacity heat pump, air cooled, air conditioning system shall be a Yanmar VRF series heating and cooling system as specified. The system shall consist of multiple evaporators using PID control, Y or H style joints and headers, 3 pipe refrigerant distribution system and Yanmar VRF DX condenser unit, multi -zone air conditioning systems with variable speed natural gas engine with belt- driven compressors using R-410A refrigerant. The condensing unit may connect an indoor evaporator capacity of operation up to 130% of condensing unit capacity separately with individual temperature controsl. The indoor air handling unit shall be connected to the condensing unit utilizing Yanmar specified piping joints, header and sizing to ensure correct refrigerant flow and balancing. Operation of the system shall permit either cooling or heating and /or combination of heating and cooling of all of the indoor units simultaneously. The unit shall be factory assembled in Japan and pre -wired with all necessary electronics, refrigeration controls and fully functional with all U.S. approvals for materials, efficiencies and UL safety ratings. Frame: Completely factory assembled with all components mounted on a structural steel frame base. 2.02 Housing: Housed to allow easy access to all components and be completely weatherproof and treated with costal weatherproofing corrosion resistant coating. 2.03 Compressor: Belt driven scroll compressors, variable speed, and integrated with the gas engine to eliminate deviations from target values. 2.04 Condenser: Seamless copper tubes with mechanically bonded aluminum fins. 2.05 Condenser Fans: (2) propeller type fans with direct -drive fan motors, fan guard and multiple speed operation. GAS ENGINE HEAT PUMP 238129 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2.06 Operating Range: Cooling: 14 deg DB to 115 deg F DB. Heating: -6 deg F WB to 64 deg F WB. 2.07 Operating Controls: The control voltage between the indoor air handling units and condensing unit shall be 16 VDC non - shielded, stranded 2 conductor cable. The control wiring shall be a two - wire multiplex transmission system, making it possible to connect multiple indoor ahu's to one condensing unit with (1) 2 -cable wire. 2.08 Factory Prewirinq: Unit shall be factory wired with power connections brought out to a single set of terminal lugs for field connection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Unit Placement: The unit location shall be essentially as shown on drawings; however, actual placement shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to the equipment approved for actual installation. 3.02 Piping: Refer to Section entitled "Refrigerant Pipe" and provide all refrigerant piping, hangers, supports, valves and specialty items as required for a complete and operable system. 3.04 Manufacturer's Field Supervision: An authorized representative of the manufacturer shall personally supervise the checkout of all field wiring; unit startup; and unit test and balance including control calibration. The manufacturer shall furnish the Owner with a letter certifying that the unit is properly installed, adjusted, balanced, and will perform in accordance with the requirements of plans and specifications. END OF SECTION 238129 GAS ENGINE HEAT PUMP 238129 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 238219 - FAN COIL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Where shown on the drawing, furnish and install fan coil units in sizes and types in accordance with the schedule of capacities and with the detail shown on the drawing. 1.02 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ". 1.03 Manufacturer: The fan coils used as a design basis is Daikin. Acceptable: No substitution. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Basic Unit: Shall be heavy gauge galvanized steel, reinforced and welded. Interior parts exposed to moisture shall be zinc- coated steel. Casing shall be acoustically and thermally insulated with mat -faced glass fiber blanket material. A. Units shall comply fully with the National Electrical Code. 2.02 Coils: Coils shall have aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Coils shall be suitable for a minimum of 400 PSIG working pressure. Connections are to be female brazed connections. 2.03 Main Coil and Auxiliary Drain Pans: Shall have a zinc - protected coating and shall be insulated with 1/2" thick cellular sprayed seamless foam -in -place insulation. Insulation shall be fire resistant with required flame spread rating. All end pocket piping, service and temperature control valves must be insulated unless auxiliary drain pan fully extends under these units. 2.04 Fan Wheels: Shall be the centrifugal forward - curved, double -width type. A. Fan wheels and housing shall be corrosion resistant, constructed of molded, fiber reinforced resin based material. 2.05 Motors: All motors shall have integral thermal overload protection. Motors will have the capability of starting at 78% of rated voltage and operate at 90% of rated voltage on all speed settings. A. Units shall be supplied with 3 speed permanent split capacitor motors and shall have a maximum motor winding temperature rise of 50 degrees Centigrade. Units shall have a maximum noise rating at the face of the supply and return grille of 30 D.B. when running at medium speed. 2.06 Models and Sizes: All models and sizes specified for this project must have certified performance ratings in accordance with ARI Industry Standard for "Room Fan Coil Air Conditioners, 441 -66. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Piping Package: The fan coil unit manufacturer shall provide a piping package to facilitate installation at the job site. All required valve and fittings shall be supplied by the contractor. The FAN COIL UNITS 238219- Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 15525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX package shall be complete. Piping package shall be factory mounted. Connections and full installation shall be by a certified by manufacturer, Mechanical Contractor and Vendor supervised. 3.02 Tests: All units shall pass an insulation efficiency test using ambient air of 80 degrees Fahrenheit dry bulb and 75 degrees Fahrenheit wet bulb, entering water temperature 43 degrees Fahrenheit, water temperature rise of 6 degrees Fahrenheit; there shall be no condensate drip from the unit when the fans are off or at high speed for a full 8 hours. END OF SECTION 238219 FAN COIL UNITS 238219- Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 15525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 260500 - ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Scope of electrical work shall include all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services or operations necessary for or incidental to proper installation and completion of the work as called for herein and indicated on the Drawings. B. Unless otherwise noted, provide all materials necessary for the mounting of all electrical equipment furnished under Division 16 or other Divisions. C. Make final connections to all equipment. D. The contractor shall furnish labor as necessary for intermediate field inspections by the Engineer. E. Acceptance of work will be based upon tests and inspections of work. Contractor shall furnish labor to operate systems, make necessary adjustments and assist with final inspections and tests. F. The contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any field inspector directives prior to proceeding. Failure to notify the Engineer may result in forfeit of change order. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. "Provide" — Furnish, install and test, complete and ready for intended use. B. "Furnish" — Supply and deliver to project site, ready for subsequent requirements. C. "Install" — Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, test complete ready for intended use and similar requirements. 1.03 DRAWINGS AND RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to work of this Section. B. Contractor shall submit bid in accordance with Instructions to Bidders or any direction provided by Owner or Architect. C. Provisions of this Section apply to work of all Division 16 Sections. D. Review all project Drawings to be aware of conditions affecting work. E. Drawings and Specifications are intended to be complimentary. Contractor is to perform in accordance with the requirements of both. In the event of conflict, the most stringent document /requirement will apply. F. Where manufacturers are listed, listing is alphabetical in nature and does not indicate preference. ELECTRICAL WORK - GENERAL 260500 - Page 1 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.04 LICENSES /FEES /PERMITS A. Contractor shall be licensed in accordance with the rules and regulations of all applicable agencies and authorities. Proof of such licensing shall be furnished upon request. B. Contractor shall pay for and obtain all necessary permits, fees, meters and inspections required for his work. C. Contractor shall obtain certificate of final inspection at the completion of the work. Deliver inspection certificates as directed. D. Contractor shall pay all electric, telephone and cable utility company related charges and include them in his bid. Provide receipt for identified charges upon request. 1.05 REFERENCES A. Installation of materials shall comply with the following: 1. Local inspection department of the authority having jurisdiction. 2. The National Electrical Code (NFPA 70), latest edition adopted by the local authority having jurisdiction. 3. Requirements of local telecommunication company supplying telephone /data service to the project. 4. Requirements of local power company supplying electrical service to the project. 5. Building Code referenced in Division 1. 1.06 TEMPORARY POWER A. Provide temporary power including material, tools and labor. Coordinate supply point with the local electrical power company. Temporary power shall consist of the following as a minimum: 1. Meet all OSHA requirements for temporary lighting in all enclosed spaces. 2. Provide general purpose 120 volt outlets at intervals as required to accommodate the use of 50' extension cords. 3. Provide temporary construction power for crane(s) as required. B. Remove all temporary materials when use is no longer required and prior to final inspection. 1.07 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the accuracy of all data indicated on the Drawings and /or provided by the Owner. Should the Contractor discover any inaccuracies, errors or omissions in the data, he shall immediately notify the Engineer. Commencement of work by the Contractor shall be held as an acceptance of the data by him after which time the Contractor has no claim resulting from alleged errors, omissions or inaccuracies of the data. ELECTRICAL WORK - GENERAL 260500 - Page 2 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Verify all field dimensions and locations of equipment to insure close, neat fit with other trades' work. Make use of all Contract Documents and approved shop drawings to verify exact dimensions and locations. Do not scale electrical drawings; rely on dimensions shown of architectural or structural drawings. C. Coordinate work in this Division with all other trades in proper sequence to insure that the total work is completed within Contract time schedule and with minimum cutting and patching. D. Locate all equipment, materials and apparatus symmetrical with architectural elements. Install to exact height when shown on architectural drawings. When locations are shown only on electrical drawings, be guided by the architectural details and conditions existing at job site and correlate this work with that of other trades. E. Install work as required to fit structure, avoid obstructions and retain clearance, headroom, openings and passageways. Cut no structural members without written approval from Structural Engineer or Architect. F. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets and fittings or to locate every accessory. Drawings are essentially diagrammatic. Study carefully the sizes and locations of structural members, wall and partition locations, trusses, and room dimension and take actual measurements on the job. Locate material, equipment and accessories with sufficient space for installing and servicing. Contractor is responsible for accuracy of his measurements and shall not order materials or perform work without verification. No extra compensation will be allowed because field measurements vary from the dimensions on the Drawings. If field measurements show the equipment or material cannot be fitted, the Engineer shall be consulted immediately. Remove and relocate, without additional compensation, any item that is installed and is later found to encroach upon space assigned to another use. G. Materials delivered to the site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded and stored with a minimum of handling. All materials shall be stored to provide protection from the weather and damage, blocked off the ground or floor. H. Extent of work is indicated in the Drawings, Schedules and Specifications. Singular references shall not be construed as requiring only one device if multiple devices are shown on the Drawings or are required for proper system operation. Maintain an up -to -date set of as -built drawings on the project site at all times reflecting as- constructed changes. Drawings shall be turned over to the Architect at the time of final acceptance. J. Carefully examine any existing conditions, piping and premises. Compare Drawings with existing conditions. Report any observed discrepancies. Written instructions will be issued by the Engineer to resolve discrepancies. 1.08 EXCAVATION FOR ELECTRICAL WORK A. The Contractor shall provide all excavating, boring and backfilling operations as necessary to install the electrical work. B. The Contractor shall coordinate this work with that of other trades working in the same area including other underground services, landscape development, paving and floor slabs on grade to minimize the amount of excavating, dewatering, flood protection provisions and backfilling. ELECTRICAL WORK - GENERAL 260500 - Page 3 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. The Contractor shall schedule work operations with weather conditions where possible and provide temporary facilities as needed for protection of project construction, uninstalled materials, construction personnel, and public safety including but not limited to barricades, temporary access and emergency lighting. 1.09 GUARANTEE AND SERVICE A. The Contractor shall guarantee all labor, materials and equipment for a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion or from Owner's occupancy, whichever is earlier. Contractor shall make good any defects and shall include all necessary adjustments to and replacement of defective items without expense to the Owner. B. Multi -year manufacturer warranties as required in selected sections of the specifications shall be transferred to the Owner after the Contractor's year of responsibility expires. C. The Contractor is responsible for replacement of all equipment and materials including but not limited to lighting fixture lamps and ballasts damaged or found defective during installation and until final acceptance. D. The Owner reserves the right to make emergency repairs as required to keep equipment in operation without voiding Contractor's Guarantee Bond or relieving Contractor of his responsibilities during guarantee period. 1.10 CLOSE -OUT REQUIREMENTS A. Assemble two (2) 3 -ring binders containing all operating and maintenance manuals for the equipment provided and test reports where required. Provide a list of all major equipment and replacement items. Turn binders over to Owner within thirty (30) days of final acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. The following list does not limit the scope of electrical work but is a list of major equipment and systems: Panelboards Lighting System Fire Alarm System B. The following list does not limit the scope of work performed by other trades, but does list work that design standards designate as work by other trades: Furnish and install electric motors. Furnish motor starters unless otherwise noted. Furnish and install electro- mechanical temperature, pressure, level, flow, tamper, and solenoid control devices. Furnish and install HVAC control wiring unless otherwise noted. C. All materials and equipment shall be new, unused, the best of their respective kinds, suitable for the conditions and duties imposed upon them. The description, ELECTRICAL WORK - GENERAL 260500 - Page 4 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX characteristics and requirements of materials to be used shall be in accordance with qualifying conditions established as follows: 1. Equipment and materials furnished under this Division shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items for a period of three (3) years. Where practical, all of the components shall be the products of a single manufacturer in order to provide proper coordination and responsibility. 2. Each item of equipment shall bear a name plate showing the manufacturer's name, model number, serial number if applicable, ratings and other information necessary to fully identify it. This plate shall be permanently mounted in a prominent location and shall not be concealed, insulated or painted. 3. The label of the approving agency, such as UL, ETL, CSA or NEMA, by which a standard has been established for the particular item, shall be in full view. Materials shall be listed by UL, ETL, CSA or other testing organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction for the application specified or indicated on the Drawings or Specifications. 2.02 SUBMITTALS /SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submittals /shop drawings and /or manufacturer's data sheet requirements are noted in the individual specification section. Quantity of submittals shall be six (6) unless otherwise noted in Division 1 of the specifications. B. Submit shop drawings and any other drawings specifically called for in other sections. Shop drawings shall consist of plans sections, elevations, and details to scale (not smaller than 1/4" per foot) with dimensions clearly showing the installation. Direct copies of small scale project drawings issued to the contractor are not acceptable. The contractor will not be furnished electronic files of the Division 16 Drawings. The contractor shall coordinate obtaining architectural backgrounds in electronic form with the Architect. C. Submittals /shop drawings shall bear a stamp by the electrical subcontractor and the general contractor indicating they have been reviewed and that the equipment proposed is compatible without exception with the contract documents. Submittals /shop drawings without such stamp shall be returned without review by the Engineer. D. The Contractor is specifically advised that one (1) set of re- submittal /shop drawings shall be allowed. Additional re- submittals shall be accompanied by a check payable to the Engineer in the amount of $300.00 for each re- submittal. Documents will be returned without review if submitted without funds. E. Catalog numbers and model numbers indicated in the Drawings and Specifications are used as a guide in the selection of the equipment and are only listed for the Contractor's convenience. The Contractor shall determine the actual model numbers for ordering equipment, accessories and other materials in accordance with the written description of each item and with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications. 2.03 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Where a particular system, product or material is specified by name, consider it as the standard basis for bidding and base proposal on the particular system, product or material specified. Other systems, products, equipment or materials may be accepted only if in the opinion of the Engineer, they are equivalent in quality and workmanship and ELECTRICAL WORK - GENERAL 260500 - Page 5 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX will perform satisfactorily its intended purpose or design levels established by the Engineer. All such substitutions in materials or equipment shall be approved in writing by the Engineer. Decisions made by the Engineer are final and are not subject to further debate. B. In making requests for substitutions, the Contractor shall list the particular system, product, equipment or material he wishes to substitute and at bid time the Contractor shall state the amount he will deduct from his base bid if the substitution is approved by the Engineer. C. Requests by Contractor for substitutions will be considered only when reasonable, timely, fully documented and qualifying under one or more of the following circumstances: 1. Required product cannot be supplied in time for compliance with Contract time requirements through no fault of the contractor. 2. Required product is not acceptable to governing authority, or determined to be non - compatible or cannot be properly coordinated, warranted or insured or has other recognized disability as certified by the Contractor. 3. Substantial cost advantage is offered Owner after deducting off - setting disadvantages including delays, additional compensation for re- design, investigation, evaluation and other necessary services by the Engineer, other trades or other similar circumstances. Compensation due to re- design by the Engineer necessitated by substitutions shall be at the Engineer's standard hourly billing rates then in effect and payable upon receipt of modified documents. A signed agreement to that effect is required of the Contractor prior to re- design. 4. All requests for substitution shall contain a "Comparison Schedule" and clearly and specifically indicate any and all differences or omissions between the product specified as the basis of design and the product proposed for substitution. Differences shall include but not be limited to data as follows for both the specified and substitute products: Principle of operation Materials of construction or finishes Dimensions (L, W, H) and thickness of materials Weight of item Deleted features or items Added features or items Changes in work under other divisions caused by the substitution Performance and rating data Manufacturer's warranty If the approved substitution contains differences or omissions not specifically called to the attention of the Engineer, the Engineer reserves the right to require equal or similar features to be added to the substituted products at the Contractor's expense. 2.04 TESTING A. Testing of product or installation shall be by the contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION ELECTRICAL WORK - GENERAL 260500 - Page 6 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All materials, fixtures and equipment shall be installed and completed in a first -class workmanlike manner and in accordance with the best modern methods and practices. B. Special attention shall be given to the appearance of electrical installations exposed to view. Any materials which do not present an orderly and reasonably neat and /or workmanlike appearance, or do not allow adequate space for maintenance, shall be removed and replaced when so directed by the Engineer. C. Protect equipment and fixtures at all times during storage and construction. Contractor shall replace all equipment which is damaged as a result of inadequate protection including exposure to condensation. D. Pay particular attention to Specification sections for excavation, backfill, cutting, patching and painting requirements. E. Remove all flammable debris from the building before the end of each workday. F. Contractor shall repair all remodel penetrations made by his forces to original condition, paying particular attention to preservation of original fire ratings. Contractor shall submit UL Fire Resistance Directory details for all penetrations through fire rated assemblies (W- L -1001 for walls and C -AJ -1045 for floors or equivalent for new construction). G. Provide final connection to all equipment shown on the Drawings. The actual connections shall be made to fully suit the requirements of each location and adequately provide for servicing of the equipment. H. Provide local disconnecting means for all equipment except where specifically noted on the Drawings to be furnished by others. Verify all equipment ratings prior to connection and notify Engineer of any discrepancy prior to proceeding with final connection. J. Before any equipment is shut down for disconnecting or tie -ins, arrangements shall be made with the Engineer and the Owner. This work shall be performed at the convenience of the Owner. Outages must be scheduled through the Engineer. Extent, length and timing of outages shall be reviewed by the engineer. Services shall be restored the same day when possible. Provide temporary service as required to maintain Owner's operation for all outages exceeding 12 hours. K. Bolt equipment directly to concrete pads or foundation using hot - dipped galvanized anchor bolts, nuts and washers. Set equipment level utilizing galvanized shims where necessary. L. Touch -up of factory finishes on all electrical equipment shall be done under Division 16. Obtain factory matched color coatings from the manufacturer and apply as directed by manufacturer. If corrosion is discovered during inspection on the surface of any equipment, clean, prime and paint as required. M. Thoroughly clean all exposed parts of apparatus and equipment of cement, plaster, and other materials and remove all oil and grease spots. Re -paint or touch up to look like new. Vacuum interior of all equipment. ELECTRICAL WORK - GENERAL 260500 - Page 7 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX N. Start each piece of equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions; or where noted under equipment specifications, start -up shall be done by a qualified representative of the manufacturer. Alignment, lubrication, safety and operating controls shall be included in start -up check. END OF SECTION 260500 ELECTRICAL WORK - GENERAL 260500 - Page 8 of 8 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 260519 - BUILDING WIRE, CABLE, AND CONNECTORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS /QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, IPCEA, ASTM, UL and CSA standards pertaining to the items specified herein. Provide products and components which have been UL, CSA listed and labeled. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. None required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide wire, cable assembly and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Wire: Provide factory — fabricated wire of the size, rating, material and type as indicated for each service indicated. Provide materials meeting the following requirements: 1. Copper: Provide copper conductors with conductivity rated not less than 98% at 20 deg C (68 deg F). A. Insulation shall be type THHN/THWN for all power and lighting wiring. C. Cable Assembly: Provide Metal -Clad Cable, Type MC meeting the following requirements: 1. Conductors shall be copper, minimum #12 AWG and maximum of #10 AWG. 2. Provide fully rated ground in cable assembly. D. Systems: Provide wiring in accordance with system specification, i.e. Fire Alarm — Section 16721. Applies to all special systems. E. Connectors /Terminals: Provide factory- fabricated, connectors of the size, rating, material, type and class as required for each service meeting the following requirements: 1. Provide split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices, #6 AWG and larger. Tape un- insulated conductors and connector with insulating pads and electrical tape to 150 percent of insulating rating of conductor. 2. Provide insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, #8 AWG and smaller. BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE /CONNECTORS 260519 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install building wire and cable products as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and complying with recognized industry practices to insure products serve intended function. B. All conductors shall be copper unless otherwise noted. Minimum aluminum circuit size is 100 amps. C. Minimum size conductors are #12 for power and lighting functions and #14 for control functions. D. Use solid conductors for feeders and branch circuits #10 AWG and smaller. Use stranded conductors for all others. E. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. F. Clean conduit system to be free of dirt and moisture prior to installing conductors. Install all conductors into conduit/raceway simultaneously. G. Check conduit system to be complete with no loose or damaged connections or conduit sections prior to installing conductors. H. Provide insulated conductors in accordance with the following color code: CONDUCTOR SYSTEM VOLTAGE 208Y/120 Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral White Ground Green Isolated Ground Green /Yellow Stripe For conductors #8 AWG and larger, permanent plastic colored tape may be used to mark conductor end in lieu of colored insulation. Tape shall cover not less than 2" of conductor insulation within enclosure. I. Provide an equipment grounding conductor in all raceways except service lateral regardless of indication of Drawings. J. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended values of allowable pulling tensions and sidewall pressures. K. Splices in feeders are not permitted. L. Provide wire mesh style vertical conductor supports on all vertical conductor runs in accordance with NEC requirements. BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE /CONNECTORS 260519 - Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX M. Install exposed cable assemblies parallel and perpendicular to structural elements or building lines and follow surface contours where possible. Tie wrap to joists at intervals as required by NEC. N. Use manufacturer - approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary. Compound must not deteriorate conductor or insulation or harden with time preventing the removal of conductors. O. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals in accordance with manufacturer's published torque values. If manufacturer's values are not indicated, follow the values published in UL 486A and 486B. P. Clean and prepare all conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. Q. Neatly train and lace wiring within panelboards, enclosures and boxes. R. Run all parallel feeder conductors and ground full length of all wiring troughs. Make all connections in wireway using staggered multiple tap, dual rated connectors. S. Check conductors, cable installation for continuity and to be free from shorts using appropriate voltage "Megger" on all feeders prior to energizing circuit. Correct malfunction when detected. T. When removing insulation for terminations, do not damage conductors by ringing or removing strands. U. Where multiple conductors are terminated with a common /single lug, lug shall be listed as suitable for application. V. All connections made in in- ground junction boxes or handholes shall be made with waterproof, snap -lock, gel- filled connector kits equal to CMC #DSR2 /0 or Raychem #GTAP -2 and King "Dry- Conn" wirenuts for fuse to fixture connection. END OF SECTION 260519 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE /CONNECTORS 260519 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS /QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, UL and CSA standards pertaining to the items specified herein. Provide products and components which have been UL, CSA listed and labeled. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. None required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide assembly of ground rods, couplings, clamps, conductors, connectors and fittings as required for a complete ground or bond connection. All materials shall be of manufacturer's standard materials as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated on the drawings. B. Wire: Provide stranded bare soft drawn copper wire for electrode grounding conductors and insulated green colored stranded copper conductors of the same type as current carrying conductors for equipment grounds and bonds. For aluminum feeders, provide copper conductors for grounding and bonding applications. C. Clamps: Provide Weaver style clamps, exothermic welds equal to "Cadweld" or "U" type clamps (pipe only) as required by location or as indicated on the drawings. D. Rods: Provide copper -clad steel type rods for all driven ground rods unless otherwise noted. Minimum size 3/4" x 10' -0 ", minimum of (2) rods unless otherwise noted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all grounding and bonding products as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and complying with recognized industry practices to insure products serve intended function. B. The grounding system shall be installed to protect against static charges and to provide personnel protection through the service ground to all electrical equipment. All parts of the electrical system shall be positively grounded in accordance with the requirements of the NEC and all other applicable local and state codes. C. Provide connection to the reinforcing steel (20' continuous minimum) in the foundation system and structural steel columns using exothermic methods and materials. GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX D. Provide connection from the grounding electrode to the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment. E. Provide grounding connection to interior metal water piping within 5' of water pipe(s) entrance to the building. F Grounding connections to equipment, grounding bus bars, etc. shall be made using lugs and threaded stud connectors to facilitate removal for testing and maintenance. G. Provide grounding connection to gas piping upstream from equipment shut -off. Underground portions of gas piping system shall not be permitted to serve as a grounding electrode. H. Exposed grounding and bonding conductors susceptible to mechanical damage shall be protected by an adequate length of Schedule 80 PVC conduit secured with PVC straps and stainless steel screws. Surfaces where grounding connections are to be made shall be clean and dry. Steel surfaces shall be ground or filed to base metal and cleaned with abrasive cloth to remove oxides before making connections. J. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders, branch circuits and raceways (except service entrance). K. Install grounding bus on telephone board. Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch from board. L. Route grounding conductors and connections to ground and protective devices in shortest and straightest paths possible to minimize transient voltage rises. M. Tighten electrical connections and terminals in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. N. Provide irreversible compression or exothermic weld connections where required by local codes. O. Do not install ground rods directly beneath switchboards. Locate grounds in accessible locations. Do not locate ground rods where they would create a "tripping" hazard. Accurately record service ground rods on as -built drawings. P. If telephone service is located greater than 20' from electrical service, provide additional grounding electrode and conductor as described by NEC 800. Q. Connect nearest lightning protection ground terminal to service grounding electrode using lightning protection main sized buried conductor. R. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems and prior to energizing any equipment or gear, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester using "3 -point fall -of- potential" method with utility neutral disconnected. Where tests show resistance -to- ground in excess of 25 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to less than 25 ohms by driving additional ground rods. Re -test to demonstrate compliance. Submit final test report to Engineer upon request. END OF SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 260530 - CONDUIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS /QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, UL and CSA standards pertaining to the items specified herein. Provide products and components which have been UL, CSA listed and labeled. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. None required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide assembly of conduit, tubing and fittings including but not limited to conduit, connectors, couplings, offsets, elbows, straps, bushings, expansion joints, hangers and other components and accessories as required for a complete system. All products shall be of manufacturer's standard materials as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thickness) for each service indicated and meeting the following requirements: 1. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC — NEC. Art. 344): ANSI C80.1, UL 6. Provide hot - dipped galvanized inside and outside. Fittings shall be threaded type. 2. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC — NEC Art. 342): ANSI C80.6, UL 1242. Provide galvanized outside and paint, zinc or enamel inside. Fittings shall be threaded type. 3. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT — NEC Art. 358): ANSI C80.3, UL 797. Provide galvanized outside and paint, zinc or enamel inside. Fittings shall be zinc - coated steel, set -screw type. 4. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC — NEC art. 348): Provide zinc - coated steel, maximum allowable length of 6 feet. Minimum size 1/2 ". Provide positive locking type cadmium plated steel or malleable iron fittings. 5. Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC — NEC Art. 350): Provide liquid -tight flexible metal conduit with smooth -wall internal wiring channel. Conduit shall be constructed of single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked and double- wrapped steel, galvanized inside and outside and coated with a liquid- tight, sunlight - resistant, non - metallic jacket. Maximum allowable length of 6 feet. Minimum size 1/2 ". Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Provide cadmium plated steel or malleable iron fittings with compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings. CONDUIT 260530 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Rigid Non - metallic Conduit (RNC — NEC Art 352): Provide non - metallic conduit of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thickness) for each service indicated and meeting the following requirements: 1. PVC: NEMA TC -2: Schedule 40 and Schedule 80. Minimum Size 3/4 ". Rigid Non - metallic Conduit Tubing and Fittings: Provide non - metallic fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thickness) for each service indicated. 2. HDPE: NEMA TC -7: Schedule 40 and Schedule 80. Minimum size 3/4 ". Rigid Non - metallic Conduit Tubing and Fittings: Provide non - metallic fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thickness) for each service indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all conduit and tubing products as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and complying with recognized industry practices to insure products serve intended function. B. Install concealed conduits in new construction work, either in walls, slabs, below slabs or above hung ceilings. Run conduits concealed in existing work where practical. Where conduits cannot be concealed in finished areas, use surface metal raceways. C. Provide RMC or IMC in areas where exposed conduit could be subject to physical damage and on exposed portions of service entrance. Conduits emerging from floor up to 10' -0" AFF. D. Provide EMT in all interior, exposed and /or concealed areas except where indicated as RMC, IMC, RNC or FMC. Minimum size 1/2 ". E. Provide MC Cable assembly in lieu of conduit at contractor's option where use is permitted by specification section 16123. F. Provide RNC Schedule 40 for direct buried runs below grade, in reinforced floors, concrete walls and roofs. Minimum size 3/4" for all underground conduit unless otherwise noted. Conduits larger than 1" shall be run under slab, not in slab unless otherwise noted. Do not use HDPE under slab. G. For direct buried conduit runs less than 50', provide PVC, Schedule 80 elbows. For conduit runs more than 50', provide rigid galvanized steel elbows coated with Bitumastic. Provide long sweep elbows for utility applications. H. Provide FMC for connections from outlet boxes to recessed light fixtures. 6' maximum length. I. Provide FMC for connections to motors and other equipment subject to movement and /or vibration. 24" maximum length. J. Provide LFMC where subjected to one or more of the following conditions: 1. Exterior locations. 2. Moist to humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate. CONDUIT 260530 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Corrosive atmosphere. 4. Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease. K. Provide steel compression type EMT fittings in weatherproof required areas. L. Provide 6" minimum separation from un- insulated hot water pipes, steam pipes, heater flues or vents. M. Provide 24" minimum cover for runs below finished grade outside of buildings unless otherwise noted. N. Provide minimum concrete cover of 1 -1/2 times conduit size for conduits in poured concrete but not less than that required to maintain fire ratings. O. Route conduit to minimize number of elbows. P. Provide protection on inside of conduits against dirt, rubbish during construction by capping all openings with steel, plastic or heavy paper caps or pennies. Do not use duct tape to protect conduits. Q. Provide conduit bodies for exposed conduits runs at junctions, bends or offsets where required. Do not use elbows or bends around outside corners of beams, wall or equipment. All conduit body covers shall be accessible. R. Make all field cuts square and ream out to full size. S. Provide a minimum of (1) 3/4" empty conduit for every (3) single pole or fraction thereof of spare circuit breakers, spaces and not less than (2) 3/4" conduits from every flush mounted panel to an accessible space above or below. T. Provide watertight flashing on all conduits penetrating roof. Flashing means shall be "boot" type, sealed with stainless steel adjustable clamps and silicone sealant or pitch pan type. Provide pitch pan where not supplied by others. Coordinate allowable penetration locations and installation procedures with roofing contractor. U. Provide polypropylene or nylon pull -line in all empty or spare conduits. Lines are to be pulled full length and tagged at both ends designating opposite terminus. V. Install all exposed conduits parallel or perpendicular to structural elements or building lines. Do not install exposed horizontally on walls below 15' AFF or AFG. All vertical runs below 15' AFF or AFG shall be RMC or IMC. W. Provide glue -on PVC caps on all empty conduits stubbed -out underground. Mark end of conduit with flush in- ground marker. X. Provide expansion /deflection fittings in all raceways where structural expansion joints are crossed including exposed, concealed, in slab and underground locations. Junction boxes connected by FMC or LFMC are not acceptable. Y. Provide wire mesh grip style vertical conductor supports in all vertical conduit runs in accordance with NEC requirements. CONDUIT 260530 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX Z. Provide fire stopping materials for all rated penetrations as described on the Drawings. Refer to Specification 16010. AA. Provide all offsets, couplings, fittings, etc. as necessary to coordinate with structural, architectural, mechanical, etc. items. END OF SECTION 260530 CONDUIT 260530 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 260531 - BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS /QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, UL and CSA standards pertaining to the items specified herein. Provide products and components which have been UL, CSA listed and labeled. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. None required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide box or fitting assembly of manufacturer's standard materials as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Outlet boxes, interior locations: Provide galvanized flat rolled sheet steel outlet wiring boxes to suit each respective location and use meeting the following requirements: 1. Provide boxes with pre - punched stamped knockouts in back and sides and with threaded screw holes with corrosion - resistant screws for securing box covers, extension rings and devices. 2. Provide minimum of 4" square boxes unless otherwise noted. 3. Provide device rings suitable for the applicable devices for boxes concealed in walls. 4. Provide raised covers suitable for the applicable devices for exposed boxes. C. Outlet boxes, exterior locations: Provide corrosion resistant, cast -metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes to suit each respective location and use meeting the following requirements: 1. Provide boxes with threaded conduit entrances in back and ends and with adjustable mounting ears. 2. Provide cast -metal faceplates /covers with spring- hinged waterproof caps suitable for the applicable device in each weatherproof location. Provide corrosion - resistant screws and faceplate /cover gaskets. 3. Provide cast -metal faceplate and deep plastic cover (wet while in use) suitable for the applicable device in each "wet" location. Provide corrosion - resistant screws and faceplate /cover gaskets. Cover is equal to Taymac. BOXES /FITTINGS 260531 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX D. Junction and Pull boxes: Provide galvanized code gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes with welded seams. For interior locations, provide screw -on covers. For exterior locations, provide weatherproof covers conforming to NEMA 3R requirements. E. Conduit Bodies: Provide corrosion resistant, cast -metal weatherproof conduit bodies to suit each respective location and use meeting the following requirements: 1. Provide bodies with threaded conduit entrances and removable covers. 2. Provide corrosion - resistant screws and cover gaskets. F Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion - resistant punched -steel knockout closures, conduit locknuts, conduit bushings and offset connectors of size and type to suit respective locations and uses. G. Sealing Fittings: Provide cadmium plated, malleable iron sealing fittings complete with barriers and filler material of size and type to suit respective locations and uses. Provide sealing type washers where required. H. In- Ground Splice Boxes: Provide polymer- concrete, open- bottom utility style box in accordance with schedule on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install boxes /fittings products as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and complying with recognized industry practices to insure products serve intended function. B. Provide a minimum of 6" horizontal separation of boxes installed in walls. Do not install boxes back -to -back. C. Do not install cast aluminum boxes /fittings in concrete. D. Arrange junction in rated partitions as required to satisfy the requirements of the UL Fire Resistance Directory. E. Provide sealing fittings in all conduit runs entering areas of extreme temperature differential. F. Do not use round boxes where conduit must enter through side of box. G. Rigidly fasten boxes to surfaces on which they are mounted, or solidly embed boxes in concrete or masonry. H. Install hinged -cover boxes, enclosures and cabinets plumb such that covers will remain in either open or closed position. Support boxes at each corner. Provide pull and junction boxes where required by code whether or not they are shown on the Drawings. All boxes shall be legibly marked to indicate circuits or contents therein. J. Inspect factory finished boxes after installation and repair damaged finishes. BOXES /FITTINGS 260531 - Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX K. Provide bonding pigtails in all metal boxes and assure that all metal boxes are grounded. L. Provide horizontal framing members between studs as required to assure that multiple boxes installed in one location are arranged for a maximum of 6" spacing between boxes. M. Adjust switch locations at above counter locations to match receptacle locations for appearance and uniformity. N. Clean all boxes free of debris prior to closing, covering or installing devices. END OF SECTION 260531 BOXES /FITTINGS 260531 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS /QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, UL and CSA standards pertaining to the items specified herein. Provide products and components which have been UL, CSA listed and labeled. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's data sheets on multi - outlet assemblies, underfloor raceways and wall /trench duct in accordance with Section 16010 requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide assembly of raceway, and fittings including but not limited to raceway, connectors, couplings, offsets, elbows, hold -down straps, wire retainers, expansion joints, hangers and other components and accessories as required for a complete system. All products shall be of manufacturer's standard materials as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated on the Drawings. B. General Purpose Wireways: Constructed in accordance with UL standard 870. Provide materials meeting the following requirements: 1. Interior Use: NEMA 1 with screw covers. Constructed of 16 gauge sheet metal for 2 1/2 ", 4" and 6" square sections. Constructed of 14 gauge sheet metal for 8" square and larger section. Provide with concentric knockouts. Finish shall be baked enamel over corrosion resistant coating. 2. Exterior Use: NEMA 3R with drip shield cover. Constructed of 16 gauge sheet metal for 2 1/2 ", 4" and 6" square sections. Constructed of 14 gauge sheet metal for 8" square and larger sections. Provide with no knockouts. Finish shall be galvanized steel. C. Surface Metal Raceways: Constructed in accordance with UL standards. Provide materials meeting the following requirements: 1. Dry locations only: Base and cover of steel material, minimum 0.040" thickness. Provide wiring compartment divider for separation of line voltage and low voltage wiring where indicated. Finish shall be minimum of baked enamel over corrosion coating and suitable for field re- painting. D. Multi- outlet Assemblies: Constructed in accordance with UL standards. Provide materials meeting the following requirements: 1. Dry locations only. Base and cover of steel material, minimum 0.040" thickness. Provide devices, device covers and manufacturers pre -wired assemblies where /as indicated on Drawings. Provide wiring compartment divider for RACEWAYS/WIREWAYS 260533 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX separation of line voltage and low voltage wiring where indicated. Finish shall be minimum of baked enamel over corrosion coating and suitable for field re- painting. E. Wall/Trench Duct: Constructed in accordance with UL standards. Provide materials meeting the following requirements: 1. Provide base of paintable galvanized steel as indicated. Width as indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide flush or surface cover as indicated. 3. Provide elbows, adapters (trench width to wall width), hold -down straps, levelers as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install raceway /wireway products as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and complying with recognized industry practices to insure products serve intended function. B. Install all raceway /wireway systems to form a continuous electrical conductor and connect to boxes, conduits, fittings and cabinets as to provide effective electrical continuity and rigid mechanical assembly. C. Provide proper fitting for change of direction in raceway /wireway. No field bends of raceway /wireway sections will be permitted. D. Provide proper structural supports for all raceway /wireway for their entire length. Raceways /wireways are not to span any space unsupported. E. Seal all joints of underfloor duct system with manufacturer's sealing compound prior to placing concrete. F. Make all field cuts square, file down raw edges and paint to reduce corrosion. G. Install all raceway /wireway system level and square with structural elements or building lines and at proper heights /elevations. H. Ensure adequate concrete cover for all floor /trench duct is achieved in accordance with NEC requirements. END OF SECTION 260533 RACEWAYS/WIREWAYS 260533 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 260553 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS /QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, OSHA, UL and CSA standards pertaining to the items specified herein. Provide products and components which have been UL, CSA listed and labeled. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. None required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types as required for each application unless otherwise noted. B. For each electrical conduit system indicated, provide identification of conduits that are exposed or concealed in accessible spaces to distinguish each run as either a power or signal /communication conduit. If power conduit, indicate panel and circuit numbers contained therein. Markings may be permanent marker directly on the conduit, neatly and legibly written. 1. Conduit markings shall be at ends of conduit runs, near switches and /or other control devices, near items of equipment served by the conductors, at points where conduits pass through walls, or floors or enter non - accessible construction and at spacing of not more than 50' along each run of conduit. 2. Switch -leg conduit and short branches for power connections need not be marked where use is obvious and except where conduit is larger than 1". C. For all cables and conductors installed in interior locations, provide manufacturer's standard vinyl -cloth self- adhesive markers, plastic- coated pre- numbered wrap- around style or job site printed thermal transfer type. Brady, Panduit or approved equal. D. For all cables and conductors installed in exterior locations such as manholes, handholes, etc., provide die - stamped, 1" brass tags. E. For all equipment, provide nameplates meeting the following requirements: 1. Provide engraved, plastic - laminate signs at locations of major units of electrical equipment including panelboards, enclosures, safety switches /disconnects, lighting controls, exhaust fans, emergency generating units, and master units of telephone, clock program, sound, signal, alarm, fire alarm, TV, and similar systems. 2. Signs shall be minimum 1" wide plate with minimum 1/4" lettering as follows: a. Normal Power: Black background with white letters. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX b. Service Plaques: Red background with white letters. 3. Multiple mains at separate and remote locations shall be identified and reader shall be directed to location of all other mains using minimum of 5" x 7" sign. Lettering shall be in accordance with NEC 230. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all electrical identification products as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, OSHA and complying with recognized industry practices to insure products serve intended function. B. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finishing, install identification after completion of painting. C. Provide warning signs where there is a hazardous exposure or danger associated with access to or operation of electrical facilities. 1. Provide text of sufficient brevity, clarity and lettering size to convey adequate information at each location. 2. Signs shall be permanently secured by mechanical mounting with self- tapping, stainless -steel screws, stainless -steel rivets or 10/32 stainless -steel machine bolts with nuts and lock washers in an appropriate and effective location. 3. Do not locate signs behind doors of panels, switchboards or motor controls. D. Wherever reasonably required to insure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of electrical systems, including prevention of misuse by unauthorized personnel, provide signs on switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures. E. Provide warning signs where there is a hazardous exposure or danger associated with access to or operation of electrical facilities in or about the project. F. Apply cable /conductor identification at origin and termination. Match identification with marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings and contract documents. END OF SECTION 260553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 262600 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS /QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, UL and CSA standards pertaining to the items specified herein. Provide products and components which have been UL, CSA listed and labeled. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's data on panelboards and enclosures, dimensions of which shall not exceed those as shown on the Drawings or as called out in this section. Indicate voltage, main bus arrangement and rating, circuit breaker and /or fusible switch arrangement and sizes. Include applicable series short circuit ratings information where it is applied. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide panelboards of manufacturer's standard materials as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Power distribution panelboards shall be dead - front, safety type power distribution with protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and with arrangement as shown on the Drawings. Bussing shall be tin - plated aluminum. Circuit Breaker power distribution panelboards shall be equal to Square D "I- Line" or equal. C. 120/208 volt Lighting and appliance panelboards shall be dead - front, safety type lighting panelboards with circuit breakers as shown on the Drawings. Circuit breakers shall be bolt -on type. Bussing shall be tin - plated aluminum. Circuit breakers are location specific and shall be arranged as indicated in the panel schedules on the Drawings. Tandem or twin circuit breakers are not allowed. Panelboards shall be Square D "NQOD" or approved equal. D. Panel trim shall be surface or flush as indicated on the Drawings. E. Provide all panelboards with hinged door with flush lock, keyed alike. F. Provide each panelboard with an engraved plastic - laminate nameplate and typewritten directory card in plastic pocket. G. Provide a ground bus in all panelboards. H. Provide all panelboards with provision for connecting feeders at top of panel unless otherwise noted. Provide NEMA type 1 for indoor applications. J. Provide NEMA type 3R for applications exposed to weather. PANELBOARDS 262600 - Page 1 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX K. Provide NEMA type 4 for applications exposed to water spray, wash -down, etc. L. All panelboards shall be furnished without factory knockouts. All knockouts shall be field punched for specific purpose. M. Where circuit breakers serve HID lighting loads, circuit breakers shall be manufacturer self certified for that purpose. N. Where circuit breakers serve HVAC equipment requiring HACR rated circuit breakers, U.L approved HACR rated breakers shall be used. O. Multi- section panelboards shall be matched dimensionally. P. Load centers are not acceptable. Q. Provide panelboards manufactured by one of the following: 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. Siemens 4. General Electric PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and complying with recognized industry practices to insure products serve intended function. B. Install panelboards plumb and rigid without distortion as follows: 1. Height: 6' to top of panelboard unless otherwise noted. 2. Install panel taller than 6' with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor. C. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements. D. Provide all necessary mounting hardware as required for rigid mounting of each panelboard. Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring they are permanently and mechanically anchored. E. Mount all recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly aligned and flush with wall finish. F. Install filler blanks /plates in all unused spaces. PANELBOARDS 262600 - Page 2 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX G. Provide a minimum of (1) 3/4" empty conduit for every (3) single pole or fraction thereof of spare circuit breakers, spaces and not less than (2) 3/4" conduits from every flush mounted panel to an accessible space above or below. H. Tighten electrical connections and terminals in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original factory finishes. J. Vacuum all panelboards free of debris. END OF SECTION 262600 PANELBOARDS 262600 - Page 3 of 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS /QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, UL and CSA standards pertaining to the items specified herein. Provide products and components which have been UL, CSA listed and labeled. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's data sheets on wiring devices in accordance with Section 16010 requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide devices of manufacturer's standard materials as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated on the Drawings or meeting the following requirements: 1. Wall Switches: White unless otherwise noted. DESCRIPTION RATING LEVITON HUBBELL P & S SPST 20A, 277V CS120 -2W CS120W CS2OAC1 -W DPST 20A, 277V CS220 -2W CSB220W CSB2OAC2 -W 3 WAY 20A, 277V CS320 -2W CS320W CS2OAC3 -W 4 WAY 20A, 277V CS420 -2W CSB420W CSB2OAC4 -W SP DIMMER SEE DRAWINGS DECORA SLIDE PRE -SET ARCH SLIDE PRE -SET DECORATOR SLIDE PRE -SET 2. Wall Receptacles: White unless otherwise noted. DESCRIPTION RATING LEVITON HUBBELL P & S DUP 20A, 120V BR20 -W CR20WHI CR20 -W DUP GFI 20A, 120V 6899 -W GF5352WA 2094 -W B. Device Plates: Provide device plates matching and coordinated with installed device meeting the following requirements: 1. Plates shall be standard size, thermoset, non - combustible opaque plastic, white unless otherwise noted. 2. Where plates are noted on drawings to be engraved, provide standard size, 302 grade stainless steel. Engraving shall be red enamel in -fill paint. If plates are plastic, a clear adhesive label with black 1/4" text shall be submitted for approval to the Architect. WIRING DEVICES PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 262726 - Page 1 of 2 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Provide jumbo size plates where required to cover defects in wall construction. 4. Provide all plates with manufacturer's colored screws matching faceplate material. 5. Provide 302 grade stainless -steel device plates on all devices located within kitchen or food prep areas. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate device installation with work of other trades. Provide protection from wall- board compound, paint, dirt, dust and other debris. B. Clean all outlet boxes prior to device installation and again prior to installing cover. C. Provide and install wiring devices after all wiring installation work is completed. D. Install all devices such that removal of device will not affect circuit integrity or operation. E. Install all grounded receptacles devices in the following manner: 1. All devices installed below counter height (30 ") shall be installed with ground pin up unless otherwise noted. 2. All devices installed at counter height (30 ") or above shall be installed with ground pin right (horizontal) unless otherwise noted. 3. All devices locally switched shall be installed 180 degrees from defined method. F. Install all device plates so that they are plumb and level. G. Test all devices for proper grounding, wiring polarity, and that switches controlling the intended device and ground /arc fault devices are working properly. END OF SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 262727 - CONTACTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS /QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, UL and CSA standards pertaining to the items specified herein. Provide products and components which have been UL, CSA listed and labeled. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's data sheets on contactors in accordance with Section 16010 requirements. B. Contactor submittal data shall include but not be limited to voltage ratings, phase ampere ratings, number of poles and dimensions. C. Submit Lighting Contactor Cabinet layout drawing showing accurately scaled basic components. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide contactors of ratings, classes, types and characteristics which comply with manufacturer's standard design, material, components and construction in accordance with published product information and as indicated on the Drawings. B. General Description: 1. Configuration: Electrically Held. 2. Configuration: Mechanically Held. 3. Enclosure: Open, NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray enamel finish where applicable. C. Magnetic Contactor: AC general purpose, lighting rated, magnetically operated, full - voltage contactor with the following characteristics: 1. Coil operating voltage: Select coil voltage based upon controlling function indicated on the Drawings. 2. Auxiliary Contacts: Provide (1) each NO and NC auxiliary contacts in addition to phase contacts. 3. Control Transformer: Provide line voltage control transformer where indicated and sized to coil characteristics plus 125% additional capacity minimum. Secondary voltage of transformer based upon controlling function indicated on the drawings. Provide primary and secondary fuses and bond un -fused leg of secondary to enclosure. CONTACTORS 262727 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 4. Indicating Lights: Provide red indicating light in cover. 5. Pushbuttons: Provide shrouded reset button in cover. 6. Selector Switches: Provide rotary style, oil -tight type in cover. Type as indicated on Drawings. D. Combination Contactors: Combine contactors with thermal magnetic circuit breakers, on- fusible switches or fusible switches in a common enclosure as indicated on the Drawings. E. Provide contactors as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Cutler Hammer 2. General Electric 3. Siemens 4. Square D PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install contactors indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and complying with recognized industry practices to insure products serve intended function. B. Provide all necessary mounting hardware as required for each contactor. C. Provide typed label on inside of contactor cover indicating load served. D. Tighten electrical connections and terminals in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. END OF SECTION 262727 CONTACTORS 262727 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 262728 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS /QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, UL and CSA standards pertaining to the items specified herein. Provide products and components which have been UL, CSA listed and labeled. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's data sheets on lighting control devices in accordance with Section 16010 requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide lighting control devices from a same manufacturer. B. Provide photoelectric control cells and time clocks of ratings and types which comply with manufacturer's standard design, material, components and construction in accordance with published product information and as indicated on the Drawings. C. Provide photoelectric control cells meeting or exceeding the following: 1. Enclosure shall be die -cast zinc, gasketed for weather protection and designed for stem mounting. 2. Cell shall be cadmium sulfide type with built -in time delay to minimize false switching. 3. Control function shall be adjustable from 1 -15 fc operation. 4. Cell shall have 5 year warranty, equal to product information as indicated on the Drawings. D. Provide time clocks meeting or exceeding the following: 1. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 for indoor applications unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2. Enclosure shall be NEMA 3R for outdoor applications unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 3. Time clocks refer to product information as indicated on the Drawings. E. Provide photoelectric control cells and digital time clocks manufactured by one of the following: 1. I nterm atic 2. Paragon LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 262728 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3. Tork PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install photoelectric control cells and time clocks indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and complying with recognized industry practices to insure products serve intended function. B. Provide all necessary mounting hardware as required for rigid mounting of each starter. C. Install all devices plumb. D. Mount photoelectric cell minimum of 12" above finished roof and aim cell towards northern sky. Adjust for approximately 5fc ON. E. Tighten electrical connections and terminals in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. END OF SECTION 262728 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 262728 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 262729 — FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS /QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, UL and CSA standards pertaining to the items specified herein. Provide products and components which have been UL, CSA listed and labeled. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's data sheets on fuses including time current curves in accordance with Section 16010 requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings and time current and peak let -thru current characteristics which comply with manufacturer's standard design, material, components and construction in accordance with published product information and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Class L Time -Delay Fuses: Provide Class L time delay, current limiting fuses rated 600 volts, 60 hertz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protection of transformers, motors, circuit breakers and switchboards. Bussmann Low -Peak KRP -C or approved equal. C. Class RK1 Dual Element Time -Delay Fuses: Provide Class RK1 dual element, time delay, current limiting fuses rated for the applicable voltage, 60 hertz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protection of transformers, motors, and circuit breakers. Bussmann Low -Peak LPN- RK/LPS -RK or approved equal. D. Non -Time Delay Fuses: Provide non -time delay, single element fuse rated 300 volts, 60 hertz for protection of fluorescent light fixture ballasts. Bussmann GLR with type HLR fuse holder or approved equal. E. Miscellaneous Fuses: Provide time delay fuse rated for the applicable voltage, 60 hertz, with 10,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protection of exterior, non - fluorescent, ballasted light fixtures. Bussmann FNM /FNQ with HEB fuse holder or approved equal. F. Fuse Cabinet: Provide spare fuse cabinet. Bussmann SFC or approved equal. G. Provide fuses manufactured by one of the following: 1. Bussmann 2. Littelfuse 3. Shawmut /Gould FUSES 262729 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Maintain and store all fuses in dry environment until ready to use. B. Clean and tighten all electrical connections prior to installing fuses. Do not install fuses until ready to energize equipment. C. Furnish and install interior fluorescent light fixture fuses only when required by local code. Size fuses in accordance with light fixture manufacturer's recommendations. D. Furnish and install exterior ballasted light fixture fuses as shown on Drawings. E. Furnish 10% spare fuses (3 minimum) of every size and type fuse installed on this project. F. Where fuses are current limiting type, contractor shall assure that all corresponding devices are equipped with rejection clips to insure that the fuse cannot be replaced with an incorrect type. END OF SECTION 262729 FUSES 262729 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 262816 - DISCONNECTS AND SAFETY SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS /QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, UL and CSA standards pertaining to the items specified herein. Provide products and components which have been UL, CSA listed and labeled. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's data sheets on disconnects and safety switches in accordance with Section 16010 requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide disconnects and enclosed safety switches of manufacturer's standard materials as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Enclosures shall be surface- mounted, heavy -duty, sheet steel of the type and size indicated on the drawings. C. Switches shall be quick -make, quick -break type and constructed so that switch blades are visible in the OFF position with door open. D. Switches shall be equipped with operating handles that are lockable in both ON and OFF positions, interlocked with cover and have bypass function. E. Switches shall be UL listed for Service Entrance applications where indicated on the Drawings. F. Switches shall be equipped with bonding /grounding bar. G. Provide NEMA type 1 for indoor applications. H. Provide NEMA type 3R for applications exposed to weather. Provide NEMA type 4 for applications exposed to water spray, wash -down, etc. J. Provide fusible switches with rejection clips. K. All switches shall be 250 volt rated unless otherwise noted. L. Provide all switches with line side and load side lugs as required to accommodate conductors indicated on the drawings. M. Provide switches manufactured by one of the following: 1. Cutler Hammer DISCONNECTS AND SAFETY SWITCHES 262816 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. General Electric 3. Siemens 4. Square D PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnects and safety switches indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and complying with recognized industry practices to insure products serve intended function. B. Switches shall be installed in accessible locations and mounted on or in the visible vicinity of the equipment served. C. Provide all necessary mounting hardware as required for rigid mounting of each switch. D. Tighten electrical connections and terminals in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. END OF SECTION 262816 DISCONNECTS AND SAFETY SWITCHES 262816 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS /QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, UL and CSA standards pertaining to the items specified herein. Provide products and components which have been UL, CSA listed and labeled. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's data sheets on lighting fixtures in accordance with Section 16010 requirements. B. Lighting fixtures submittal data shall include but not be limited to housings, reflectors, lenses, ballasts, voltage rating, lamps, lamp holders, mounting accessories and photometric data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide lighting fixtures of types and characteristics which comply with manufacturer's standard design, material, components and construction in accordance with published product information and as indicated on the Drawings. Ship fixtures factory- assembled, with parts required for a complete installation. Design fixtures with concealed hinges and catches, with metal parts grounded as common unit, and so constructed as to dampen ballast generated sounds. B. Lamps. 1. LED lamps to be provided with fixture. C. Provide interior lighting fixtures as manufactured by one of the following and subject to conformance with features of units specified on the Drawings. 1. Cooper Industries 2. Hubbell 3. Lithonia 4. Thomas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES 265100- Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX B. Provide fixtures and /or fixture outlet boxes with hangers at diagonal corners to properly support fixture weight. Support from structural elements independent of ceiling system. C. Install flush mounted fixtures to eliminate light leakage between fixture frame and finished surface. Provide plaster frames for recessed fixtures installed in other than suspended grid type acoustical ceiling systems. Brace frames temporarily to prevent distortion during handling. E. For air supply type fixtures, retain side slot closures in place for adjustment by Balancing Contractor. F Fasten fixtures securely to indicated structural supports; and ensure that pendant fixtures are plumb and level. Provide individually mounted pendant fixtures longer than 2' with twin stem hangers. Provide stem hanger with ball aligners and provision for minimum 1" vertical adjustment. Mount continuous rows of fixtures with an additional stem hanger than number of fixtures in the row. G. Support surface mounted fixtures greater than 2' in length at a point in addition to the outlet box fixture stud. H. Recessed fixtures shall be connected with a maximum 6', 1/2" flexible conduit whip. Flexible conduit shall be of sufficient length to allow relocation of fixtures one tile in any direction without modifications to wiring. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris including fingerprints from reflectors, etc. upon completion of installation. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period. C. Replace burned -out lamps upon completion prior to turning building over to owner. END OF SECTION 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES 265100- Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS /QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, UL and CSA standards pertaining to the items specified herein. Provide products and components which have been UL, CSA listed and labeled. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's data sheets on lighting fixtures in accordance with Section 16010 requirements. B. Lighting fixtures submittal data shall include but not be limited to housings, reflectors, lenses, ballasts, voltage rating, lamps, lamp holders, poles, mounting accessories and photometric data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide lighting fixtures of types and characteristics which comply with manufacturer's standard design, material, components and construction in accordance with published product information and as indicated on the Drawings. Ship fixtures factory - assembled, with parts required for a complete installation. Design fixtures with concealed hinges and catches, with metal parts grounded as common unit, and so constructed as to dampen ballast generated sounds. B. Lamps. 1. LED lamps to be provided with fixture. C. Accessories and Finishes: 1. All poles shall be provided with factory standard hand holes, full base cover and pole cap where applicable. 2. Pre - stressed, reinforced concrete poles shall be constructed of 6,500 PSI concrete. 3. Provide all poles with hardware necessary to complete the intended installation. 4. Contractor is required to submit calculations from the pole manufacturer, sealed by a structural engineer licensed in the State of Florida certifying conformance of the entire pole and base assembly (where applicable) in accordance with calculations dictated in the Florida Building Code, 1606 -1.6 and ASCE 7 -98. D. Provide exterior lighting fixtures as listed in the light fixture schedule on the drawings. The listed manufacturers are the only approved manufacturers. Substitutions will not be considered. EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES 265600 - Page 1 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Fasten wall mounted fixtures securely to structural supports. Provide structural backing material to ensure fixture does not sag or warp wall. C. Install anchor bolts as provided by pole manufacturers and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Provide #4 bare copper equipment ground bond from branch circuit ground and installed ground rod to metal grounding stud. E. Install all poles plumb and straight. In the case of tapered poles, use a plumb bob on the center of the pole and plumb in both major axis. Tighten all anchor bolt connections in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris including fingerprints from reflectors, etc. upon completion of installation. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period. C. Replace burned -out lamps upon completion prior to turning site or building over to owner. END OF SECTION 265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES 265600 - Page 2 of 2 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 270000 - TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS /QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, UL and CSA standards pertaining to the items specified herein. Provide products and components which have been UL, CSA listed and labeled. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. None required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Outlet Boxes: Outlet boxes shall consists of 4" square box with depth as required per field conditions with single gang tile ring. B. Conduits: Telephone instrument conduits shall consist of 3/4' minimum EMT interior and 1" minimum PVC exterior (and underground). C. Backboards: Backboard shall consist of (1) 4' x 8' x 3/4' Grade AC plywood sheet. D. Ground Bus: Ground bus shall consist of (1) 1/4" x 4" x 20" drilled copper bus bar. Equal to Newton Instrument Company system 3055. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. In insulated walls and fire -rated walls, install (1) 3/4" conduit from telephone outlet box to the accessible ceiling space and terminate with insulated bushing. B. In non - insulated walls and non - fire -rated walls, eliminate the outlet box and install a single gang tile ring and pull string up through the top plate and tied off. C. Paint telephone backboard with (2) coats of white, fire retardant paint. D. Install ground bus assembly adjacent to electrical outlet on backboard. E. Clean all conduits after installation install pull string and secure at each terminus. F. Route all conduits to minimize quantity of ells. G. Install long- sweep, 90- degree rigid galvanized steel ells on all PVC telephone service conduits. END OF SECTION 16741 TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEM 270000 - Page 1 of 1 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 283100 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 The contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the installation of complete system for fire detection, annunciation, and evacuation. The system shall be a addressable fire alarm system with initiating, monitoring, and control devices individually supervised and programmable. The system shall be addressed per plans, electrically supervised, connected, tested and left in first class operating condition. These materials include: A. Fire alarm control panel with horn evacuation system for the Building. B. Manual fire alarm pull stations. C. Automatic smoke detectors. D. Fire alarm signaling appliances. E. Auxiliary fire alarm equipment. 1.2 REFERENCES Comply with the locally adopted edition's applicable requirements of: A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, 2011 ed. B. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code, 2010 ed. C. 2014 Florida Building Code. D. UL Standards. E. Provide products and components which have been UL listed and labeled. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The system shall use closed loop initiating device circuits with individual address supervision, individual indicating appliance circuit supervision, incoming and standby power supervision. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall consist of the following data to be submitted concurrently as one package: 1. Complete point to point wiring diagram indicating all device addresses, signal circuits, and conductor quantities in plan view (not conceptual) and riser style. Conceptual diagrams will be rejected. Deviations from designed address /device designations will not be accepted. Contractor is to create their own shop drawings and will not be provided with electronic copies of electrical drawings. 2. The contractor shall submit complete documentation showing the type, size, rating, style, catalog number, manufacturer's names, and catalog data sheets, for all items FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283100 - Page 1 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX to ensure compliance with these specifications. Required copies of this information shall be submitted to the engineer and shall be subject to his approval. Any wiring which is indicated on the drawings is for the purpose of defining intent and not intended to relieve the contractor of any responsibility with respect to furnishing a complete operational system in accordance with the plans and specifications. 3. Battery calculations (in alarm) for the FACP, audio amplifier(s), and each signal circuit. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Location of the controls, alarm actuating devices and audible alarm signaling devices shall be as shown on the plans. Any necessary deviances shall be approved by the engineer and indicated on as -built documents to remain on site at an accessible location. 1.6 SYSTEM OPERATION A. The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any manual station, automatic detection device, or sprinkler flow switch shall be as follows: 1. The appropriate initiating device address shall be indicated on the control panel and the remote annunciator until the alarm has been silenced at the control panel or the remote annunciator. A subsequent alarm received shall scroll the alarm devices address on the LCD on the control panel. A pulsing alarm tone shall occur within the control panel until silenced. 2. All visual alarm lamps shall flash at a rate of between 60 to 120 times per second until extinguished by the alarm silence switch. Where multiple visual alarm lamp outputs may be viewed from a single location, they shall be synchronized. Provide synchronization strobes and modules as necessary to accommodate. 4. A supervised signal to notify the local fire department or an approved central station shall be activated. 5. All doors normally held open by door control devices shall close, where required for smoke control. 6. Activate signals to emergency exit electric door locks to unlock these doors. B. The alarm indicating appliances may be silenced by authorized personnel upon entering the locked control cabinet and operating the alarm acknowledge key or by use of the key operated switch at the remote annunciator. Such operation will cause the flashing "Alarm" LED to glow steadily. A subsequent initiating device circuit alarm shall reactivate the signals. C. The activation of any duct smoke detector shall, in addition to the operations listed above, cause its associated air handler to shut down via auxiliary relay module. D. Silence any and all public addressing systems. E. The system shall include a sprinkler supervisory sequence which shall operate as follows: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283100 - Page 2 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1. The activation of any standpipe, detector check valve, or sprinkler tamper switch shall activate a distinctive system supervisory audible signal, illuminate a "Supervisory" LED at the system controls and the remote annunciator, and sequence up to three messages on the alphanumeric display. There shall be no confusion between valve tamper activation and opens and /or grounds on fire alarm initiation circuit wiring. 2. Activating the supervisory acknowledge key will silence the supervisory audible signal while maintaining the "Supervisory" LED indicating the tamper contact is still activated. 3. Restoring the valve to the normal position shall cause the audible signal and LED to pulse at a march time rate. 4. Activating the trouble acknowledge key will silence the supervisory audible signal, cause "Trouble'' LED to glow, and restore the system to normal. 5. Each such switch shall have a separate supervisory address. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS All panels and peripheral devices shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer and shall display the manufacturer's name on each component. The catalog numbers specified under this section are those of Silent Knight and constitute the type, quality of design, material, and operating . features desired. 2.2 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) A. Silent Knight Model 5700 or equivalent by Notifier or Edwards, complete with all ancillary components required to satisfy the requirements of the Florida Building Code for assembly occupancy. FACP shall have integral digital alarm communicator transmitter. B. The control panel shall receive 120 VAC power (as noted on the plans) via a dedicated circuit breaker and IEEE 587 CAT A protected. C. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode of a period of twenty -four (24) hours with five (5) minutes, but not less than that required by the local authority, of alarm indication at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic. Batteries, once discharged, shall recharge at a rate to provide a minimum of 70% capacity in 12 hours. D. All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually fused at the control panel. E. The FACP shall contain a quantity fifty (50) addresses, independently supervised, so that a fault in any one loop shall not affect any other loop. The alarm activation of any initiation loop shall not prevent the subsequent alarm operation of any other initiation loop. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283100 - Page 3 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX F. There shall be four (4) independently supervised and independently fused indicating appliance circuits for flashing alarm lamps. Each visual circuit shall be capable of supplying 2.0 amps at 24 VDC in alarm. SK -5499. G. The FACP shall contain (2) dry- contact relays capable of indicating alarm and trouble conditions. All auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that all switches must be returned to the normal automatic position to clear system trouble. J. The FACP shall contain the following LED indicators; fire alarm, trouble /security alarm, display trouble, AC power, signals silenced. K. Each independently supervised circuit shall activate the discrete "Trouble" LED to indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit. L. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel. A "Power" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. M. The system batteries shall be supervised so that disconnection of a battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel. N. The system expansion modules connected by ribbon cables shall be supervised for module placement. Should a module become disconnected, the system trouble indicator shall illuminate and audible trouble signal shall sound. O. There shall be one supervisory initiation address for connection of each sprinkler valve tamper switch and one alarm initiation address each water flow switch to perform the operation listed for 1.6 D. Wiring methods which affect any fire alarm initiation circuits to perform this function shall be deemed unacceptable; i.e.: sprinkler and standpipe tamper switches (N /C contacts) shall NOT be connected to circuits with fire alarm initiation devices (N /O contacts). These independent initiation addresses shall be labeled "Sprinkler Supervisory Tamper" and "Sprinkler Supervisory Flow" and shall differentiate between tamper switch activation, flow switch activation, and wiring faults. 2.3 INITIATING DEVICES A. Pull stations - Semi flush, double action. B. Smoke detectors - Photoelectric type with environmental compensation, ceiling mounted. C. Smoke detectors - Photoelectric type, duct mounted, with housing with remote relay and sampling tube(s). Contractor is to connect control circuit of air handling unit via relay to shut down fans. Detectors are to be furnished by the electrical subcontractor installed by the mechanical contractor, and circuited by the fire alarm subcontractor. Provide with remote test station. D. Water flow and tamper switches - Furnished and installed by sprinkler contractor. Provide monitor modules to satisfy 1.6 D above. 2.4 PERIPHERAL DEVICES FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283100 - Page 4 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX A. Horn /Strobe Units - Multi- candela, wall mounted (80" AFF to bottom of lens), Wheelock NS- 24MCW-FR. 15/75 cd strobes will not be accepted. Must comply with ADA for spacing shown on plans. Furnish with synchronization modules as necessary. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install manual station with operating handle 46 inches above finished floor. Install audible and visual signal devices 80 inches above finished floor to bottom of device. No visual signal devices are to be ceiling mounted. C. All wire be a minimum gauge as required by circuit requirements and UL listed for FPL fire rated service, in accordance with NEC Article 760 and 725 for Class 2 and 3 power limited 105 degrees Centigrade, 300 volt fire protective signaling circuits. The cables shall be color coded with an integral polarizing stripe molded into the insulation. All wiring will be color coded the same throughout the entire installation. Wiring for signaling, initiating device and notification circuits shall be arranged using Class B wiring. Signaling circuits shall be style 4, initiating circuits shall be Style A, and notification circuits shall be Style Y. A. For alarm initiating and notification circuits - #16 AWG (minimum) twisted, shielded pair, stranded per NEC Article 760. B. For bell circuits, 24 VDC power, door holder wiring - #16 AWG (minimum) twisted pair, stranded per NEC Article 760. D. Mount end -of -line device in box with last device or separate box adjacent to last device in circuit. E. Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 80 pounds pulling force. F. Make wiring connections to door release devices, sprinkle flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, fire suppression system control panels, duct smoke detectors and other fire alarm system devices installed by others. G. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72 and manufacturer's instructions. H. Junction boxes shall be spray painted red. Contractor shall provide a framed typewritten address schedule which clearly indicates devices connected to each alarm initiating device circuit and signal circuit and hang adjacent to the FACP. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements. B. All work shall be performed by a State of Florida Certified Electrical Contractor (EC) or Alarm Contractor I (EF). 3.3 SUPERVISION AND TESTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283100 - Page 5 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX The installation shall be supervised by an authorized manufacturer's representative as a Remote Supervisory Station Fire Alarm System. B. Upon completion, the system shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 in the presence of the owner and tenant's representative, the Fire Marshal, and an authorized manufacturer's representative. C. Manufacturer's and contractor's certification of completed, operable, and successfully tested system shall be furnished to the owner. D. Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections. END OF SECTION 283100 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283100 - Page 6 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION DATE: 11/09/16 • • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 312300 - SITE PREPARATION, EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK FOR FOUNDATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All requirements of Division 0 and Division 1 forms a part of this section. B. A subsurface investigation and soils report have been completed for this project. All work in this section shall comply with the soils report. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with federal, state, local, and other duly constituted authorities in matters pertaining to: 1. Permitting 2. Disposal of and hauling of waste material 3. Safety precautions 4. Barricades 5. Protection of environmental matters 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK A. Perform all work specified herein as indicated within the grading area, i.e., that area within which earth grades are shown to be approximately 5 feet outside building perimeter. Remainder of property is to be left undisturbed, except as otherwise authorized for such purposes as spoil or stock pile areas, temporary ditches, swales and/or haul or access roads, in which case such authorized areas become part of the grading area. This work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Clearing and grubbing of vegetation and debris of all kinds. 2. Stripping. 3. Excavating to grade and subgrades. 4. Excavating and backfilling for foundations. 5. Providing finish load- bearing subgrades for foundations. 6. Disposal of removed materials. 7. Dewatering. 8. Laboratory testing. B. Related work not specified under this subdivision. 1 Excavation of backfill for utilities. 2. Finish grading. 1.04 GENERAL A. Contractor shall obtain a copy of the soils report for use with this section. B. The Contractor shall examine all drawings and the specifications, consulted the records of adjacent construction and of any existing utilities, and the connections, if any, and noted all conditions and limitations which may influence the work required by this Section. C. Where recommendations presented in the soils report conflict with this section, the soils report shall govern. SITE PREPARATION, EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK 312300 — Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.05 EXISTING STRUCTURES A. Care shall be exercised during excavation, backfilling, and compaction work to avoid damage to existing buildings or foundations. 1.06 PROTECTION A. Protect trees and dispose of all removed trees including stumps and roots. B. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from equipment and vehicular traffic. C. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. D. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods required to prevent cave in or loose soil from falling into excavation. E. Notify Architect /Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in area until notified to resume work. F. Control grades in vicinity of excavations to prevent surface water running into excavated areas. G. Conduct earthwork operations under this division to insure against rainwash and silting of watercourses, ponds and adjoining property resulting therefrom. Should such silting occur, restore such areas to their original condition if outside the grading areas, or to lines, grades and conditions shown specified if within grading areas, all at no cost to the Owner. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. Fill material shall be as specified in the soils report or at least clean fine sand, free of rubble, organics, clay, debris and other unsuitable material. Fill should be tested and approved prior to acquisition. B. Source of new material and length of haul shall be the Contractor's responsibility. C. Drainage fill: Crushed stone or gravel so that 100% passes 1 -1/2" sieve with not more than 10% passing a No. 4 sieve. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. 1. Identify known underground utilities. Stake and flag locations. 2. Identify and flag surface and aerial utilities. 3. Notify companies to remove and relocate utilities as required. 4. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work area. B. If required, perform remedial de- watering prior to any earthwork operations. C. Clear and grub site as defined in the soils report. D. Proof -roll the sub -grade in accordance with the soils report and under the observation of the testing laboratory. Proof - rolling will help locate any zones of especially loose or soft soils not encountered in the soil test borings. Then undercut, or otherwise treat these zones as recommended by the testing lab. E. Testing the sub -grade for compaction will be as directed by the testing laboratory and as shown on the structural drawings. SITE PREPARATION, EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK 312300 — Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.02 FILL A. Fill in areas where required shall be placed in loose lifts as directed by the soils report. B. In load- bearing areas, fill shall be compacted as recommended in the soils report or at least to 95% of maximum modified Proctor dry density. A moisture content within two percent (2 %) points of optimum indicated by the modified Proctor test (ASTM D -1557) is recommended. C. Perform compliance tests within the fill as directed by the testing lab. 3.03 EXCAVATION A. Excavation shall conform to the dimensions and elevations shown on the drawings, but excavation lines shall be such as to provide sufficient clearance for the proper execution of the work to be installed. Allowances shall be made for work and inspections. Bottom of all excavations shall be trimmed to the levels indicated and sloping surfaces cut in steps shown on drawings. After carrying the excavation to the required depth, the Contractor shall await the inspection and testing of the bearing soil. B. Control of ground water, including all necessary equipment, to maintain all excavated areas in a dry condition shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Sides of temporary excavations can be cut to maximum slope of 1:1. However, no claim may be made by the Contractor for extra work for damages resulting from slope stability failure. D. The bottom of foundation excavations shall be compacted after excavation to densify any soils loosened in the excavation process. Backfill soils placed adjacent to footing or walls shall be carefully compacted with a light rubber tired roller or vibratory plate compactor to avoid damaging the footings and walls. Approved sand fills placed in footing excavations above the bearing level, in trench excavations, and in other areas which are expected to provide slab support and foundation embedment constraint shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 6 inches and shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% of the maximum modified Proctor dry density. E. Test all footing cuts for compaction to a depth of 1 foot, as directed by the testing laboratory. 3.04 DEWATERING A. Refer to the soils report for an estimate of seasonal high ground water table. B. The geotechnical testing laboratory shall determine the depth of ground water just prior to construction to determine what dewatering will be required. C. Water control will consist of, but not necessarily be limited to, well points, sumps, and pumps, in conjunction with berms and any needed ditches. Deep wells will not be permitted. D. Approval by the Architect of data submitted shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for adequacy of dewatering system. In the event that during the progress of the work it is determined that the dewatering system is inadequate, the Contractor shall install and operate such additional dewatering equipment and /or make such changes in the system or plan of operation as may be necessary to perform the dewatering system in an adequate manner. E. Groundwater shall be maintained at least 24 inches below all earthwork, foundations, and compacted surfaces, or as directed by the testing laboratory. 3.05 BACKFILL UNDER AND AROUND BUILDING AREA A. All debris shall be removed from excavations prior to backfilling and filling. B. Backfill under and around building area shall be placed in loose layers not exceeding 12" and shall be compacted as defined in the soils report or at least to a density equal to 95% of the modified Proctor maximum dry density as per ASTM D698 -70. SITE PREPARATION, EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK 312300 — Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX C. Backfill in electrical plumbing and mechanical trenches shall be compacted to previously specified density. 3.06 GRADING A. Grade areas to lines and elevations indicated, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finish surface within specified tolerances. Compact and bring to uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown or between such points and existing grades. B. Unless shown on the drawings, slope the grade evenly to provide drainage away from the building. C. Complete the grading operations after the building has been finished, utilities installed, site improvements constructed, and all excavated materials, rubbish, and debris removed from the site. Leave grade for lawns and planted areas clean and at required grades. 3.07 TESTING A. A qualified licensed geotechnical testing laboratory shall be retained to perform all necessary quality control testing for earthwork. B. All testing shall comply with the project soils report. C. See structural drawings for a minimum testing program. D. Provide samples of materials proposed for fills as required. Cooperate with laboratory personnel in obtaining samples, and during quality control testing. 3.08 SPECIAL NOTES A. Fill material shall not be placed against walls until 7 days after grouting of masonry cells. Compaction of exterior fill and interior backfill shall not be performed until wall grout has cured 14 days. B. Do not use drum compactor within 6 feet of walls. Compaction within 6 feet of walls shall be accomplished with a hand operated vibratory compactor. END OF SECTION 312300 SITE PREPARATION, EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK 312300 — Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 161104 • • APPENDIX OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION Table of Contents OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS 1 Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Instructions 2 REQUEST TO REQUISITION FORM 3 CLEARWATER GAS MORNINGSIDE REC CENTER PROPOSAL 4 GEOTECHNICAL SOIL REPORT 5 SWFWMD PERMIT 6 • APPENDIX Updated 2/11/2016 APPENDIX — Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Documents AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION •OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS [if needed] • • APPENDIX 1 Updated 2/11/2016 APPENDIX — Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Documents AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Instructions 1. Upon contract award and execution, a Purchase Order (PO) shall be issued to Contractor for the full amount of contract. 2. Contractor shall submit a list (ODP Summary) of potential ODP vendors and estimated dollar amounts (minimum of $10,000) to the City for consideration prior to initial pay application. Certain bid proposals will list pre- determined item(s) for ODP and the accompanying tax savings. The ODP Summary shall list: (a) item cost and (b) sales tax savings associated with the item. Direct purchase shall be considered for single items that exceed $10,000 in value and /or items identified in Section V, Bidders Proposal. 3. Contractor shall prepare Request to Requisition forms (see attached) for each vendor to the City for review and approval, in electronic, MS Word format. The City will review, code, and process the requisition form. The City prefers that all Request to Requisitions be included in a single submittal. 4. A Change Order (CO) shall be issued to Contractor reducing their PO by the amount of the ODP purchase(s) and the sales tax savings (per Request to Requisitions). COs will be drafted by the City and will be forwarded to the Contractor for execution. Contractor shall submit two (2) originals, signed, sealed and witnessed, to the City for execution. One fully executed original CO shall be returned to the Contractor. 5. Concurrently, the City Purchasing Department shall issue ODP POs directly to each vendor (via email), along with an executed Certificate of Entitlement and the City's Certificate of Tax Exemption. The Contractor and City Project Manager will be copied. 6. City's Project Manager shall coordinate delivery with Contractor and Vendor. Material shall be delivered to the project site. Contractor will verify contents and check for defective materials. Vendor to send original invoice to the City as the purchaser and a copy to the Contractor. Invoices shall include the ODP PO number and invoice number. 7. Contractor shall review invoice copy for accuracy and send electronic approval to the City Project Manager within fourteen (14) calendar days after date of receipt of invoice. This electronic approval shall consist of the Contractor's signature, date, and indication of approval on the scanned invoice as well as scanned copies of the delivery documentation or an explanation as to why the invoice should not be paid. These items shall be emailed to the City Project Manager and City Engineering Department's Senior Accountant, copy to Construction Inspector. 8. Contractor shall provide delivery documentation (delivery ticket, packing slips, bill of lading, etc.) in hard copy form to the City Project Manager attached to a copy of the invoice within thirty (30) calendar days after date of receipt of invoice. If these hard copy items are delivered within fourteen (14) calendar days after date of receipt of invoice, then electronic approval as noted in paragraph seven (7) above may be excused. 9. City Project Manager shall have final approval to pay invoices and City Accounting Department shall issue payment to the Vendor for materials or equipment received. 10. ODP POs must be closed out prior to closing out the contract /Contractor PO. If material costs needed for the project exceed the ODP PO amount, the ODP PO will not be increased. Amounts in excess of the ODP PO will be paid for by the Contractor. APPENDIX 2 Updated 2/11/2016 APPENDIX — Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Documents AND OTHER PROJECT ^^ " " ""'TATS ^"' REQUEST TO REQUISITION FORM 410 For Owner Direct Purchase Materials City Project Name: General Item Description: Vendor: Street Address: City /State /Zip: Receiving Location (Ship to): Street Address: City/State/Zip: General Contractor: Contact Name: Date Needed by: City Contract #: Project Location) Contact Name: Phone No: Email: Attention: (Company Name) Phone No: Phone No: Email: Expense Code: (City will complete) Quan Units (LS, SF, etc Detailed Description (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) Price Per Each (refer to Line Item # and details from Bidder's Proposal Section V) LS PO Total LS Sales Tax Savings to Owner (First $5,000 x 7.0 %, thereafter Sales Tax Rate is 6.0 %) Equipment shall be n accordance with the applicable technical specifications, and all other applicable provisions (shop drawings „O &Ms, warranties, etc.,) of contract referenced above. Spare parts provided as per specifications; freight included. Start up services and training are included in the above price, if provided for in bid. Special Delivery Instructions Send Original Invoices to: Send Copy of Invoice to: City of Clearwater Engineering Department Leroy Chin P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758 CONTRACTOR Attention To: Mailing Address Phone Number Approving Official (City of Clearwater Representative): Signature: Date: Print Name: Title: •ngineering will provide records retention according to City of Clearwater's Records Management Program and State Retention Schedules. APPENDIX 3 Updated 2/11/2016 APPENDIX — Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Documents AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION PROJECT PERMITS [if needed] APPENDIX 4 Updated 2/11/2016 APPENDIX — Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Documents AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION OGEOTECHNICAL SOIL REPORT [if needed] • • APPENDIX 5 Updated 2/11/2016 APPENDIX — Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Documents AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION ASBESTOS REPORT [if needed] APPENDIX 6 Updated 2/11/2016 • Instructions to Qualify for Bidding on Clearwater Construction Projects In order to be eligible to bid for City of Clearwater construction projects a contractor must be prequalified with the Engineering Department's Construction Division. The purpose of pre - qualification is to provide the City with reasonable assurance that your organization has the financial assets, resources, work force and work experience to successfully complete construction contract agreements with the City. If your company is interested in becoming prequalified or wishes to reapply for pre - qualification, please fill out the attached application. In order for your application to be considered complete and begin the approval process you will need to submit all of the following items with your application: • A current financial statement completed within the past year (City policy dictates that we return this item to you after the approval process is completed. We do not make copies or retain this financial information. If you submit electronically the file will be deleted following approval.) • Three letters of reference, on the owner's letterhead, written within the past three years, that includes the contractor's performance on a specific project. The letter should include a brief description of the project, start and end dates, dollar amount of contract and owner comments on the quality of workmanship and satisfaction of work completed. • A List of major projects active and completed within the past three years. Each project must include the type of work, contract dollar amount, start and completion dates, name and contact information of project owner representative. • A copy of all current contractor licenses. Pre - qualification status lasts for three (3) years from approval date and is limited to particular construction categories or construction activities in which the Contractor has successfully completed construction projects or extensive work in the category in conjunction with larger project work. Included in the application are the general categories of construction work which are available for contractor pre - qualification approval by the City of Clearwater. Check all categories for which your firm is seeking pre - qualification approval. To receive approval in a particular construction category, your application must contain documentation of successfully completed work experience in that category. This documentation is to be included in your firm's completed project list. In addition, your application must exhibit that your firm has sufficient equipment, resources, and employees on your firm's direct payroll to complete work as a prime contractor in each approved construction work category. Contractors with an insufficient work force or insufficient resources will not be approved for pre - qualification or will not receive pre - qualification in particular work categories. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to confirm pre- qualification status before a bid opening. Please return the application and submittal items to: Construction Specialist City of Clearwater Engineering P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758 -4748 Or e -mail to: Valerie .craig(a�mvclearwater.com • If you have any questions during this process please contact the Construction Specialist at 727 - 562 -4509 or e-mail Valerie .craiqamyclearwater.com. vc 8/5/16 Application to Qualify for Bidding on Clearwater Construction Projects Contractor Firm Name: Contact Person Name & Title: Mailing Address: City, State & Zip: Contact Phone Number: Fax Number: E -mail Address: Company Website: Type of Organization ( Individua , Corporation, Partnership, etc.): Date organization began under present name: Other names and dates organization has existed as: List of Organization Leadership (President, Vice President, Secretary, Treasurer, Partners, etc.): References: 1 2 3 Contractor's License Number (attach copy): Individual Holding License: Issuing Authority: Classification of License: Number of Full time employees directly on applicants payroll: Present value and type of all construction and operational equipment directly owned by the applicant (Information may be obtained from most recent financial statement and include long term lease /purchase equipment): Value: Type: Has your firm ever failed to complete work awarded to you? If so, where and why? The information in this application and all attachments included with the application is true and correct to the best of my knowledge. Organization Name: Print Name and Title: Signature: Date Signed: vc 8/5/16 • • • • The pre - qualification to bid limitation is an amount of dollars equal to the amount of the largest single construction protect which has been successfully completed by the Contractor. • This amount is limited to the particular construction categories in which the Contractor is approved to perform work. • The Contractor may request an adjustment after successfully completing larger construction projects or providing evidence where two or more similar projects were completed by the Contractor at the same time. The combined amount of these simultaneous projects may be more than the largest single project accomplished to increase your bid limit. This amount will be considered as the pre - qualification amount up to an amount equal to 150% of the largest single project amount. • Pre - qualification amounts and categories may be limited as warranted by the City's experience with the Contractor's construction projects. • Please attach a list of major projects active and completed within the past three years. Each project must include the type of work, contract dollar amount, start and completion dates, name and contact information of project reresentative. p Largest Single Project COMPLETED : Amount of Contract: Start and End Dates: Type of Work: Owner /Representative: Address: Phone Number: Email Address: • Pre - qualification is limited to particular construction categories or construction activities in which the Contractor has successfully completed construction projects or extensive work in the category as part of larger project work. • To receive approval in a particular construction category your application must contain documentation of successfully completed work experience in that category. This documentation is to be included in your firm's attached competed project list. • In addition, your application must exhibit that your firm has sufficient equipment, resources and employees on your firm's direct payroll to complete work as a prime contractor in each approved construction work category. Contractors with an insufficient workforce or resources will not be approved and will not receive pre - qualification in particular work categories. The following are the general categories of construction work which are available for contractor pre - qualification approval by the City of Clearwater. Check all categories for which your firm is seeking pre - qualification approval. Asphaltic Concrete Resurfacing Landscape and Irrigation Bridge Construction and Modification Marine Construction Commercial Buildings Marine Dredging Commercial Swimming Pools • Pre - qualification is limited to particular construction categories or construction activities in which the Contractor has successfully completed construction projects or extensive work in the category as part of larger project work. • To receive approval in a particular construction category your application must contain documentation of successfully completed work experience in that category. This documentation is to be included in your firm's attached competed project list. • In addition, your application must exhibit that your firm has sufficient equipment, resources and employees on your firm's direct payroll to complete work as a prime contractor in each approved construction work category. Contractors with an insufficient workforce or resources will not be approved and will not receive pre - qualification in particular work categories. The following are the general categories of construction work which are available for contractor pre - qualification approval by the City of Clearwater. Check all categories for which your firm is seeking pre - qualification approval. Asphaltic Concrete Resurfacing Landscape and Irrigation Bridge Construction and Modification Marine Construction Commercial Buildings Marine Dredging Commercial Swimming Pools Roadway and Parking Lot Construction Concrete Flat Work (curbs, walks, courts, etc.) Sanitary Pump Station Construction Management Services Sanitary and Storm Sewers Demolition Specialty Concrete Repair & Coating Work Design Build Stormwater Management Construction Electrical Tennis Courts Excavation /Site Work Traffic Signalization Fiber Optic Urban Streetscape Gunite Restoration Wastewater & Water Treatment Facilites Horizontal Directional Drilling Water and Force Mains Industrial Painting Well Construction Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Plumbing Other: vc 8/5/16 Clearwater Gas System 711 Maple Street Clearwater, FL 33755 Ph: 727 - 562 -4980 Fax. 727-562-4989 SOLD TO: Name: City of Clearwater - Morning Side Rec. Center APPLIANCE ORDER Address: 2400 Ham Blvd. City /State /Zip: Clearwater, Fl 33764 Phone: Cell - 224 -7101 Leroy Chin Email: leroy.chini myclearwater.com Date: 4/5/2017 Type: Proposal Prices Good For: 10 Days Date To Install: DELIVER TO: Name: City of Clearwater - Morning Side Rec. Center Address: 2400 Ham Blvd. City /State /Zip: Clearwater, Fl 33764 Phone: Page 1 of 2 Quantity Model & Description Five (5) Rinnai C199i 199,000 btu Indoor Tankless Water Heaters w/ Neutralizer 1 Kits, and Vertical Venting Installation /Work Description: From existing Natural Gas meter serving Pool, extend underground gas line to new Recreation Center. Extend gas line into Electrical Room. Mount two (2) Rinnai C199i Tankless Water Heaters on wall common with Multi Purpose Room. Connect gas line to heaters and vent Water Heater through roof above. From underground gas line, extend another gas line into Rec.Center, extend gas line above dropped ceiling to Janitor Room located near Bathrooms. Mount two (2) Rinnai C199i Tankless Water Heaters on wall common with Men's Bathroom. Connect gas line to heaters f yvent Water Heaters through Roof above. Continue gas through Lobby to Gymnasium. Continue gas line through mnasium into Storage Room located on North side of Gymnasium. Mount one (1) Rinnai C199i Tankless Water Heater on wall common with Life Guard Room. Connect gas line to heater and vent Water Heater through Roof above. Extend gas line behind stackable Washer /Dryer. Connect gas line to Dryer with Stop and Flex Connector. Install second Natural Gas meter at Northeast corner of building to serve Natural Gas A/C system. Extend gas line to ten (10 ) Yanmar Gas Fired Refrigeration Units. Connect gas line to units with stops and flex connectors. Special Instructions: Merchandise Total Unit Price $10412.00 Installation Or Changeout Delivery Save Allowance Subtotal Ext. Price $10412.00 $10412.00 $21338.00 $2625.00 $29125.00 Sales Tax - Exempt Gas Permit (By Clearwater Gas) Total Due $29125.00 Amount Received Grand Total $29125.00 Any repairs to existing gas equipment and /or gas lines will be based on time and material. All equipment will be set for Natural Gas. All plumbing connections and electrical connections for tankless water heaters, by other. Make Up Air for tankless water heater and /or Dryers, by others. To proceed, authorized signatory must sign order and provide payment in full (Cost Code). NOTE - Gas Hot Water Heaters and Gas Dryer to be served by existing Gas meter service Pool Area. Second Gas Meter to be set for Gas A/C System. Terms And Conditions: Default: If any installment of the purchase price is not paid when due, and such failure continues for fifteen days, seller has the option to either declare the entire balance of purchase price immediately due and to proceed to collect the same, or to rescind this contract and all rights of purchaser there under and retake possession of the property. In the event seller elects to rescind the contract, all payments previously made by purchaser shall be retained by seller for rental and use property and as liquidated damages for the breach. Notice of election by seller shall be given in writing to purchaser and acceleration or rescission, as the ay be, shall become effective at the time specified. Seller's Assignment: For valuable consideration, the receipt whereof is hereby acknowledged, the seller (Creditor) hereby sells, assigns, transfers, and sets over this contract, and all right, title and interest in and to the goods being purchased and all rights and remedies under this contract. Purchaser shall, upon execution of this contract, have the right to immediate possession of the property. Purchaser's continuing right of possession shall be subject to seller's right to re -enter and repossess the property in the event of default, as provided elsewhere in this contract, during the life of the contract and until the entire deferred purchase price and interest thereon has been paid. A Twenty -five percent (25 %) restocking fee applies to all cash and carry and special order items that are returned. 4/6/2017 Chris Thorn (727) 562 -4980 Ext. 7457 CLEARWATER GAS REPRESENTATIVE SIGNATURE OF CUSTOMER /OWNER /AGENT Page 2 of 2 • • 4/6/2017 • REPORT OF THE GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION PROPOSED MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated • • • D R I G G E R S E N G I N E E R I N G S E R V I C E S . I N C O R P D RATE D Geotechnical Engineering S. Construction Materials Testing City of CIearwater Parks & Recreation Dept. 1001 S. Myrtle Ave., Ste. 120 Clearwater, FL 33618 Attention: Mr. Leroy Chin RE: Dear Leroy: Report of the Geotechnical Investigation Proposed Morningside Recreation Center Clearwater, Florida Our File DES 167913 August 31, 2016 In accordance with your authorization, DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES has completed the requested geotechnical investigation at the subject site. Presented herein are the results of our field and laboratory studies, together with geotechnical recommendations for consideration. FIELD INVESTIGATION PROGRAM Plate I of the report illustrations identifies the respective positioning of a series of five (5) Standard Penetration Test borings that were requested within the area planned for the proposed facilities. The Standard Penetration Test method of sampling was utilized in our investigation in accordance with ASTM -D 1586. Logs of the test borings are presented in the attachments reflecting visual together with estimated Unified Soil classification. The appended logs also provide tabulated and graphically plotted standard penetration resistance values corresponding to each sample interval. It should be noted that the lines connecting the penetration resistance values are for visual interpretation and do not imply a linear variation in soil properties. A brief description of this method of sampling is included in the attachments. In addition to the Standard Penetration Test borings, two (2) classification borings were requested in conjunction with Double -Ring Infiltration tests at the locations also identified on the attached Plate I. The results of the classification borings and infiltration tests are included in the report attachments. You will note that the results of the infiltration tests and estimated normal seasonal high groundwater levels were previously provided to expedite the drainage design. Sarasota Clearwater Spring Hill Phone: 727.471.6655 P.O. Box 17839 • Clearwater, Florida 33762 Phone: 727,471.6657 Fax: 941.371.8962 Phone: 727.571.1313 • Fax: 727.471.6653 Fax: 727.471.6653 saroffice@driggers-eng.com clwoffice@driggers-eng.com sphilloffice @driggers- eng.com 2 GENERALIZED SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS The results of our exploratory borings reflect the presence of predominately fine sands with variable silt fines content extending from the ground surface to some 18 feet below existing grade. Penetration resistance values suggest that the sands within the upper 5 to 6 feet vary from very loose to medium dense in consistency, whereas the underlying sandy soils were generally medium dense to dense. Below the upper fine sands, soft calcareous silt with shell fragments was penetrated, which generally continued to the termination depth of the test borings. This calcareous silt would locally be termed "Marl ". Your attention is directed to the fact that at boring B -5 a seam of highly organic silt (muck) was encountered in the depth range of about 2.0 to 2.5 feet. This organic seam probably represents a residuum of the original ground surface, perhaps prior to the application of historic fill. Groundwater was encountered at depths ranging from a shallow of 3 feet to in excess of 5 feet below existing grade. Variations in the depth of groundwater are probably reflective of differences in topography as well as subtle differences in subsurface soil permeability. The results of the infiltration tests indicated infiltration test_ rates varying_ from 2.5 to 4.0 inches per hour. Care should be exercised in the application of infiltration test results to the design of stormwater retention areas. The infiltration will be dependent upon the permeability characteristics of the subsurface soils, together with hydraulic boundary conditions that will impact exfi ltrati on. Based upon the results of our geotechnical investigation, we would estimate that the normal seasonal high groundwater elevation would be expected to occur near El. +14 ±ft. (NAVD). Naturally, higher water levels can occur during extreme climatic events. EVALUATION AND FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS STRUCTURE TYPE AND LOADING CONDITIONS —It is our understanding that the proposed facilities will be single story and probably of masonry construction. Information provided by McCarthy and Associates, Inc. indicates that maximum wall loads may approach 5.5 Kips per lineal foot, with maximum column loads not exceeding 70 Kips. It is also our understanding that the finished floor elevation for the structures has been set at El. +22.75 ft. (NAVD). Judging from existing topography, it is anticipated that some 0 to 4 feet of fill will likely be required to adjust to proposed finished grades. Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated 3 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS — Based on the results of our subsurface investigation, shallow foundations may be utilized for structure support. Shallow foundations may be designed based upon an allowable soil bearing pressure of up to 2,500 pounds per square foot (psf). Foundations proportioned in accordance with this allowable soil bearing pressure should experience maximum total settlements of less than 0.75 inch with differential settlements of less than 0.5 inch. Furthermore, due to the sandy nature of the subsurface soils, we would anticipate that dead load settlements would occur during construction. Utilization of this allowable soil bearing pressure will necessitate appropriate subgrade preparation. In general, subgrade preparation would include proofrolling of the subgrade utilizing heavy vibratory compaction equipment and the appropriate placement and compaction of structural fill needed to establish finished grade elevations. Appended are general recommendations relative to earthwork requirements, together with recommendations for quality assurance inspection and testing during the construction stage. Your attention is redirected to the fact that isolated seams of shallow, highly organic soils were encountered. Accordingly, it will be necessary, during subgrade preparation, to identify the limits of such organic seams that would require removal and replacement with compacted structural fill. This can perhaps best be accomplished by undercutting the exposed subgrade in the areas where the organic soils were detected, to expose this organic zone to effect proper stripping and replacement. Shallow hand probings throughout the structure areas extending to depths of 3 to 4 feet would also be beneficial in identifying any other localized organic seams that would warrant removal and replacement. With appropriate subgrade and fill compaction, the ground floor slab may be supported on the prepared subgrade. We would conservatively suggest utilization of a Modulus of Subgrade Reaction, K = 150 pounds per cubic inch (pci) for the analysis of slab thickness requirements that may be subjected to point loading conditions. Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated 4 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES appreciates the opportunity to serve you, and we trust that if you have any questions regarding our report, you will not hesitate to contact the undersigned at your convenience. Respectfully submitted, DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. J fffi A.'iggers, P.E. F I egistration No. 70598 .�.m sm0 esn9 i 44 ti p G ' ► p .? . lGEN . •• o� 4(" �'A i i Driggers, P.E. No. 16989 N °! i Pre ent P * _ 573*, FL Registration No. 16989 c -o ; , X °�. STATE o . t ; 0. t FJD /ff �l0a9% . A�. . � .°` FJD- PRO/167913 4 ba44 q oN�,. Co p ies: (1) Email Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated • • • APPENDIX SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND FOUNDATION DESIGN PLATE I - BORING LOCATION PLAN STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING LOGS HAND AUGER BORING LOGS INFILTRATION TEST RESULTS SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS GRAINSIZE ANALYSES METHOD OF TESTING Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated • • • SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND FOUNDATION DESIGN Origgers Engineering Services Incorporated • • • RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND FOUNDATION DESIGN SUBGRADE PREPARATION 1. The entire structure areas and for a distance of at least 5 feet beyond the outside footing perimeter should be stripped of all surface vegetation, pavements, highly organic soils, root concentrations, existing structures and other objectionable material. Exact depth of stripping should be determined by a representative of the soil engineer in the field. The structure area, prior to filling, should be carefully examined and probed, as discussed in the report text. A qualified soils technician should be present to delineate the plan limits and depth of removal of any unsuitable material identified. 2. The exposed subgrade should be uniformly compacted using a heavy, vibratory roller having a minimum static drum weight of 5 tons. Subgrade compaction should consist of no less than ten (10) complete coverages in a criss- crossed pattern throughout the entire structure area, plus the 5 foot margin. A qualified engineer or technician should be present during the compaction operations to inspect compaction performance and procedures to make sure excessive vibrations are not transmitted to adjacent structures that could necessitate altering compaction procedures. Compaction should achieve a minimum density of no less than 95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density as established in ASTM D -1557. 3. Density tests should be used to control subgrade compaction. At least one (1) density test should be performed for every 2,500 ft.2 at the surface of compaction and at a depth of 12 inches. 4. The excavated footing areas shall be compacted with a hand- guided vibratory compactor having a minimum plate or drum width of 30 inches or the footing width, whichever is less. No fewer than ten (1) coverages shall be effected. Compaction tests shall be conducted to check that a density of not less than 95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density has been maintained. 5. Density tests should be used to control compaction. At least one (1) density test should be performed for every 2,000 ft.2 at a depth of 6 inches below the stripped, compacted grade elevations. No fewer than two (2) tests should be planned. Density tests should also be performed in the bottom of selected representative footings. 2 FILL OR BACKFILL PLACEMENT 1. Fill or backfill required to develop proposed grade should be inorganic, clean to slightly silty fine sand, free of unsuitable debris. Soils with a Unified Soil classification of SP to SP -SM would certainly be considered. suitable. 2. The fill should be placed in lift thicknesses not exceeding 12 inches with each lift compacted to a density of no less than 95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density. Moisture content within the fill soil should be controlled to within ±2% of optimum as established in ASTM D -1557 to help ensure development of both density and stability during compaction operations. No fewer than six (7) to eight (8) coverages should be made on each lift using the above specified heavy, vibratory roller. 3. Density tests should also be used to control fill placement. At least one (1) density test should be performed for each 2,500 ft.2 per fill lift. FOUNDATION 1. Post- tensioned foundations may be designed based upon an allowable soil bearing pressure of 3,000 pounds per square foot based upon dead plus live plus wind load requirements. 2. We recommend a footing embedment of no less than 16 inches below the finished slab, but excessive embedment should be avoided to take advantage of the compaction process and maintain the footing as high as possible within the compacted structural fill. 3. Slab -on -grade construction may be utilized. To maintain slab support, care should be taken so that all excavations made for foundations and utilities are backfilled with suitable fill compacted in thin lifts with a small compactor. Before Backfill is placed, all water and loose debris should be removed from these excavations. 4. A column footing width of no less than 30 inches and a wall footing width of at least 16 inches is recommended. • • • PLATE I - BORING LOCATION PLAN Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated • • LEGEND: IS STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING LOCATION OO STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING/ HAND CONE SOUNDING LOCATION ® DOUBLE -RING INFILTRATION TEST/ HAND AUGER BORING LOCATION 0 25 50 100 SCALE IN FEET PROJECT NO. DES 167913 SHEET NO. SHEET TITLE BORING LOCATION PLAN LA z I- v Lit 0 c z W U z 0 rx c O LLJ tX i W O m Q Z Q = J M U PROPOSED CAD / ENGINEER R.D.B. / J.A.D. 0 L LI 0_ L11 0_ H 0o zl� OL ¢ Lil E WO za U)0 0 Z wz U) EY. � . wuJ �O U)> CC STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING LOGS Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated • • DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED Project No. DES 167913 BORING NO. B -1 Project Proposed Morningside Recreation Center, Ham Boulevard, Clearwater, Florida Location See Plate I Foreman J.R. Completion Depth To Depth 21.5' Date 8/11/16 Water 4.8' Time Date 8/29/16 DEPTH, FT SYMBOL w -J a. Q U) SOIL DESCRIPTION SURF. EL: +18.4 + / -' BLOWS ON SAMPLER PER 6" OR PEN. STR. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BLOWS /FT. ON 2" O.D. SAMPLER -140 LB. HAMMER, 30" DROP 10 20 40 60 80 0 ., ` Fine SAND 2/3/12 5/8/8 3/3/3 3/5/6 8/15/16 8/12/12 10/11/11 1/1/2 __.■.,," 11/11 1111 -M■.■.,,'11 NMI 1111H1 \Brown with trace of roots (SP) \Brown Fine SAND (SP) Dark brown Fine SAND (SP) Medium dense dark gray to brown Fine SAND (SP) r Loose to medium dense brown to light brown slightly silty Fine SAND (SP -SM) i.ci ,:C, I') Lt) ,.�, :' CI UIIIIIIfl 1111 11111 �' ���1111 IIII Dense light brown Fine SAND (SP) Mg 1111 Medium dense light grayish -brown silty Fine SAND (SM) 15 __ NI I 1111 1111 IIII 1111 Soft cream colored calcareous SILT and shell fragments (MH) .■.,1111 20 11111 n1111 25 - 30 - II 1 1111 Remarks Borehole Grouted Casing Length DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED Project No. DES 167913 BORING NO. B -2 Project Proposed Morningside Recreation Center, Ham Boulevard, Clearwater, Florida Location See Plate I Foreman J.R. Completion Depth To Depth 21.5' Date 8/12/16 Water Time Date DEPTH, FT SYMBOL w a. Q Cl) SOIL DESCRIPTION SURF. EL: +18.9 + /_, BLOWS ON SAMPLER PER STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D. SAMPLER -140 LB. HAMMER, 30" DROP 10 20 40 60 80 0 '`''r Dark brown WH/WH/ WH 13/15/26 15/24/27 15/19/22 6/14/13 1/2/2 __...,11 �_.II1111 slightly silty Fine SAND with finely divided organic material and trace of roots (SP -SM) Dark brown Fine SAND (SP) I1111 :.. Light brown Fine SAND (SP) ( ) 1111 c �` Grayish -brown slightly silty Fine SAND (SP -SM) ;.,.1 "'"'' 0.1: 1 011 i i i a i— • Very loose to dense dark grayish -brown to light brown slightly silty Fine SAND (SP -SM) 21111111, A_ SIE!lI1111 1,4 11 VA .1 III 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 __•111111111 10 Very dense to medium dense light brown silty Fine SAND (SM) _ 15 11111 1111 101 _%��1111 111 In11 rA IR Soft cream colored calcareous CLAY (CH) 20 -/ "I'll' 11111 1111 25 - 30 - 11111 Remarks Borehole Grouted WH = Weight of Hammer Casing Length • HAND AUGER BORING /HAND CONE SOUNDING LOG PROJECT: Proposed Morningside Recreation Center Ham Boulevard Clearwater, Florida Project No.: DES 167913 CLIENT: City of Clearwater WATER TABLE: DATE: TECHNICIAN: T.D. DATE: COMPLETION DEPTH: 8/12/16 8.0' LOCATION: See Plate I TEST NUMBER: B-2A ELEV. (FT) DESCRIPTION DEPTH (FT) SYMBOL HAND CONE TIP RESISTANCE (TSF) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Dark brown slightly silty Fine SAND with finely divided organic material and roots (SP -SM) 0 ,c; "F�`''` Ct 18 1 Dark gray highly organic, silty Fine SAND (Pt) • Dark brown Fine SAND (SP) 2 - : DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED • Project No. DES 167913 BORING NO. B -3 Project Proposed Morningside Recreation Center, Harn Boulevard, Clearwater, Florida Location See Plate I Foreman J.R. Completion Depth To Depth 26.5' Date 8/9/16 Water 4.8' Time Date 8/29/16 SOIL DESCRIPTION SURF. EL: +18.8 +1 - -' STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BLOWS /FT. ON 2” O.D. SAMPLER -140 LB. HAMMER, 30" DROP Dark grayish -brown Fine SAND with trace \of roots (SP) ,Brown Fine SAND (SP) Dark grayish -brown Fine SAND (SP) Medium dense brown to light brown Fne SAND (SP) Medium dense light brown slightly silty Fine SAND (SP -SM) Dense light brown Fine SAND (SP) 15 20 .1 C Very dense to medium dense light brown silty Fine SAND (SM) Soft cream colored and gray calcareous SILT with shell fragments (MH) 25 Medium dense gray and brown variably cemented, silty Fine SAND (SM) 30 - 4/6/6 6/8/16 7/9/8 6/5/7 10/17/22 12/35/39 10/16/14 2/2/2 9/14/14 10 20 40 60 80 'SINE MEM MINIM mum MEN stimmommil ram mmulli mommuu imusummni wismunli •mmil NEIN . 11111111111111 „e Remarks Borehole Grouted Casing Length • • • DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED Project No. DES 167913 BORING NO. B -4 Project Proposed Morningside Recreation Center, Ham Boulevard, Clearwater, Florida Location See Plate I Foreman J.R. Completion Depth To Depth 21.5' Date 8/11/16 Water 3.0' Time Date 8/29/16 DEPTH, FT SYMBOL w a. Q N SOIL DESCRIPTION SURF. EL: +19.8 + /-' BLOWS ON SAMPLER PER 6" OR PEN. STR. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BLOWS /FT. ON 2" O.D. SAMPLER -140 LB. HAMMER, 30" DROP 10 20 40 60 80 0 Loose brown Fine SAND (SP) 3/3/3 12/12/15 10/14/15 10/15/17 13/17/20 14/22/25 2/1/2 &Il == -_NM __.I _,'.,,,1' �..�111' 1111 5 i.ii - v_ r,:. -- Medium dense dark gray organic, 9 Y sli•htl silt Fine SAND SP-SM/Pt 1111 -• 'Medium dense brown slightly silty Fine SAND (SP -SM) _■ Medium dense light brown Fine SAND (SP) '10 ■ Dense to medium dense light brown to brown silty Fine SAND (SM) - grayish -brown at depth 10.0' 111 ■ ' A8/18/11► 15 IIII :r U Very loose grayish -brown silty Fine SAND with trace of cemented fragments .; and shell fragments (SM) , 20 - 25 30 '� Remarks Borehole Grouted Casing Length DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED Project No. DES 167913 BORING NO. B -5 Project Proposed Morningside Recreation Center, Harn Boulevard, Clearwater, Florida Location See Plate I Foreman J.R. Completion Depth To Depth 21.5' Date 8/11/16 Water 3.3' Time Date 8/29/16 DEPTH, FT SYMBOL w Q N SOIL DESCRIPTION SURF. EL: +22.2 + / - -' BLOWS ON SAMPLER PER 8''OR PEN. STR. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BLOWS /FT. ON 2" O.D. SAMPLER -140 LB. HAMMER, 30" DROP 10 20 40 60 80 0 Dark brown Fine SAND (SP) 2/1/2 3/10/11 9/12/12 6/9/10 6/8/11 4/6/3 1/1/2 -= -- -\Soft dark gray highly organic SILT (Pt) Very loose dark brown Fine SAND (SP) - 5 : V __ Medium dense brown to tan Fine SAND (SP) - light brown at depth 6.0' 4 - 10 ' _ r7/10/11 T Medium dense to loose light grayish -brown silty Fine SAND (SM) - 15 ��o ili � 1 Soft cream colored calcareous SILT and shell fragments (MH) - 20 - 25 - 30 - Remarks Borehole Grouted Casing Length • • • • • HAND AUGER BORING LOGS Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated 410 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED • • HAND AUGER BORING LOG PROJECT: Proposed Morningside Recreation Center Harn Boulevard Clearwater, Florida Project No.: DES 167913 CLIENT: City of Clearwater WATER TABLE: 5.8' DATE: 7/20/16 TECHNICIAN: J.R. DATE: 7/20/16 COMPLETION DEPTH: 10.1' LOCATION: See Plate I TEST NUMBER: DRI -1 (FT) DESCRIPTION DEPTH SYMBOL REMARKS Brown Fine SAND (SP) 0 Surface Elevation: +17.7 +I -' • Light gray Fine SAND (SP) - 16 - Gray Fine SAND (SP) - 2 -. Grayish -brown Fine SAND (SP) • .. .. 14 - 4 Light brown Fine SAND (SP) ... .. " . • :. •:: - 12 6 Light brown slightly silty Fine SAND (SP -SM) :i 1: F 1 ri:ti t . 1.t 1J.t .1 1 C i :1 -1: t i '.L It i I•t { - 10 - 8 Light brown silty Fine SAND (SM) - 8 - 10 - - 6 - - 12 - - 4 - 14 - DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED • HAND AUGER BORING LOG PROJECT: Proposed Morningside Recreation Center Ham Boulevard Clearwater, Florida Project No.: DES 167913 CLIENT: City of Clearwater WATER TABLE: 5.3' DATE: 7/20/16 TECHNICIAN: J.R. DATE: 7/20/16 COMPLETION DEPTH: 8.8' LOCATION: See Plate I TEST NUMBER: DRI -2 ELEV. (FT) DESCRIPTION DEPTH (FT) J pip rn REMARKS Dark grayish-brown Fine SAND 9 Y with roots (SP)`, 0 '• ti �° , . : :: : ".j. 'V.:, :, ' ,. Surface Elevation: +17.2+/-' - 16 - Dark grayish -brown Fine SAND (SP) -' _ 2 14 Light brownish -tan and brown Fine SAND I (SP) Dark grayish -brown Fine SAND (SP) Dark brown organic, silty Fine SAND (SM /Pt) Gray and light brown Fine SAND (SP) 4 - 12 - ;. - 6 - Light grayish -brown Fine SAND (SP) •- : - 10 - 8 -. - 8 - - - - 10 - 6 _ 12 - - 4 14 - • • • INFILTRATION TEST RESULT • Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated • DOUBLE RING INFILTRATION TEST Job No: DES 167913 Test No. DRI - 1 Client : City of Clearwater Parks and Rec Department Project: Morningside Rec Center Location: See Plate I Date: 7/20/2016 Test Depth: 2.5' Outer Cyl. Diam: 24" Inner Cyl. Diam: 12" Description of Soil at Test Depth: Grayish Brown Fine Sand Depth of Groundwater Below Test Depth: 3.3 ft Infiltration Rate: 4.00 In /Hr 10 on Rat P i -a • 0 1 2 3 Elapsed Time of Infiltration — 4 HOURS 5 TEST PROCEDURE: The test was conducted in general accordance with ASTM D 3385 -75. A seven (7 ") inch hydraulic head was utilized. The infiltration rate was determined at selected time intervals by recording the time for a 1 inch drop in water level. The seven (7 ") inch head was then re- established until the next test interval. The test was continued until stability was achieved and the infiltration rate did not vary in excess of 5% between successive one (1) hour measurements. Readings were recorded at intervals not exceeding 30 minutes. The plotted infiltration rate above represents the average of all observations .grill • eacr. our interval. Technician: J.R. • Reviewed by: DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. DOUBLE RING INFILTRATION TEST Job No: DES 167913 Test No. DRI - 2 Client : City of Clearwater Parks and Rec Department Project: Morningside Rec Center Location: See Plate I Date: 7/20/2016 Test Depth: 2.5' Outer Cyl. Diam: 24" Inner Cyl. Diam: 12" Description of Soil at Test Depth: Dark Grayish Brown Fine Sand Depth of Groundwater Below Test Depth: 2.8 ft Infiltration Rate: 2.50 In /Hr In on Rat • • 0 1 2 3 4 Elapsed Time of Infiltration — HOURS 5 TEST PROCEDURE: The test was conducted in general accordance with ASTM D 3385 -75. A seven (7 ") inch hydraulic head was utilized. The infiltration rate was determined at selected time intervals by recording the time for a 1 inch drop in water level. The seven (7 ") inch head was then re- established until the next test interval. The test was continued until stability was achieved and the infiltration rate did not vary in excess of 5% between successive one (1) hour measurements. Readings were recorded at intervals not exceeding 30 minutes. The plotted infiltration rate above represents the average of all observations dujrag - -ac ho r interval. Technician: J.R. Reviewed by: DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. • • • • • SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS Origgers Engineering Services Incorporated • • SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS • BORING NO. DEPTH (ft) DESCRIPTION W % Yd (pc() CS ATTERBERG LIMITS LL PL Pr P.P. (tst) U.C. CON. G.S. ORG. ( %) pH Cl. (ppm) SO a (Ppm) RES. (ohm -cm) B -2 6.0 -7.5 Dark grayish -brown slightly silty Fine SAND 8-3 12.0 -13.5 Light brown silty Fine SAND 8-5 2.0 -2.5 Dark gray highly organic SILT 11.0 DRI -1 2.5 Dark grayish -brown Fine SAND DR1 -2 2.5 Grayish -brown Fine SAND DRI -2 3.6 -4.1 Dark brown organic, silty Fine SAND 7.2 W % = Yd(pcf) = Gs LL = PL PI = P.P. (tsf) = U.C. = Water Content Dry Density Specific Gravity Liquid Limit Plastic Limit Plasticity Index Pocket Penetrometer Unconfined Compression Con. G.S. ( +1) ORG. ( %) Cl. (ppm) SO., (ppm) RES. (ohm -cm) * ** ▪ Consolidation Tes • Grainsize Analysis (Hydrometer) • Organic Content • Total Chloride • Total Sulfate • Lab Resistivity • See Test Curves • Percent Passing No. 200 Sieve CLIENT: PROJECT: FILE: City of Clearwater Proposed Morningside Recreation Center, Ham Boulevard, Clearwater, Florida DES 167913 • • • GRAINSIZE ANALYSES Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated • DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. U. S Standard inn 2 Siwe Operant in Inches U. S Standa d Sieve Number. Hydrometer 1 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 10 100 140 Percent Finer by Weight 0 s 0 0 0 o 8 0 S 8 1Eil 9i 1 "II'�� � a' g' o $ S 0 0 0 0 0 Percent Coarser by Weight II 11I� 11I� I 11��� 11 I It 11iuu�� �11�� 1 1_I ■I S It ■ 11 I� 1'� 1II 11I 11I \ 11 100 50 10 5 1w 0 5 0 1 0.05 0.01 0.005 0.001 Grain Size in Millimeters GRAVEL SAND SILT or CLAY 1 Coarse j Medium I Fine Number Depth Natural Moisture L L. P. L P. I. Classification CLIENT: City of Clearwater PROJECT: Proposed Morningside Recreation Center, Harn Boulevard, Clearwater, Florida FILE: DES 167913 B -2 6.0' -7.5' Dark grayish -brown slightly silty Fine SAND DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. • • U. S Standard 100 3 r Siwe Openni s in1l1inches U. S Stands 3 6 10 1i l4 d Sieve Numbers `0 Ii Hydrometer ZQO 90 80 70 Z. 011 u 60 T d L., 50 _ C u F. 40 er a 30 20 10 0 t II I I 1 1 s I1I I 0 10 20 30 L 00 40 15 50 N A O u C 4 V u Q- 70 ao 90 100 100 50 10 5 0 5 0 1 0.05 0.01 0.005 Grain Size in Millimeters 0.001 GRAVEL SAND SILT or CLAY Coarse j Medium I Fine Number Depth Natural Moisture L L P L p I Classification CLIENT: City of Clearwater PROJECT: Proposed Morningside Recreation Center, Harn Boulevard, Clearwater, Florida FILE: DES 167913 B -3 12.0' - 13.5' Light brown silty Fine SAND • • • DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. U. 5 Standard S+ w Openings in Inches U. S Stands 3 r T}I } 6 10 l b IM r T d Sieve Numbers Hydrometer 30 ao So 70 300 140 7qO i a if III I i g o g 8 0 0 0 0 a Percent Coarser by Weight Percent Finer by Weight .o $ o 0 \ 7 100 50 10 5 0 5 0 1 0.05 su 0.01 0.005 0 001 Grain Size in Millimeters GRAVEL SAND SILT or CLAY Coarse _I Medium 1 Fine Number Depth Natural Moisture L L P. L P. I. Classification CLIENT: City ot Clearwater DRI -1 2.5' Dark grayish -brown Fine SAND PROJECT: Proposed Morningside Recreation Center, Harn Boulevard, Clearwater, Florida FILE: DES 167913 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. U. S Standard r m 3 }S4.. Openunps in }Inches U. S Standard Sit . Number Hydrometer 5 10 1# 4 30 40 50 100 140 2tp _ T t i I 1 1 T X20 s� t 1 .\ 1 100 50 10 5 0 5 0 1 0.05 0.01 0.005 0 001w Grain Size in Millimeters GRAVEL SAND SILT or CLAY Coarse j Medium I Fine Number Depth Natural Moisture L L P. L P I Classification CLIENI : City of Clearwater DRI -2 2.5' Grayish -brown Fine SAND PROJECT: Proposed Morningside Recreation Center, Harn Boulevard, Clearwater, Florida FILE: DES 167913 • • • • METHOD OF TESTING Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated • • STANDARD PENETRATION TEST AND SOIL CLASSIFICATION STANDARD PENETRATION TEST (ASTM D -1586) In the Standard Penetration Test borings, a rotary drilling rig is used to advance the borehole to the desired test depth. A viscous drilling fluid is circulated through the drill rods and bit to stabilize the borehole and•to assist in removal of soil and rock cuttings up and out of the borehole. Upon reaching the desired test depth, the 2 inch O.D. split - barrel sampler or "split- spoon ", as it is sometimes called, is attached to an N -size drill rod and lowered to the bottom of the borehole. A 340 pound hammer, attached to the drill string at the ground surface, is then used to drive the sampler into the formation. The hammer is successively raised and dropped for a distance of30 inches using arope and "cathead" assembly. Thenumber of blows is recorded for each 6 inch interval ofpenetration or until virtual refusal is achieved. in the above manner, the samples are ideally advanced a total of 18 inches. The sum of the blows required to effect the final 12 inches of penetration is called the blowcount, penetration resistance or "N" value.of the particular material at the sample depth. After penetration, the rods and sampler are retracted to the ground surface where the core sample is removed, sealed in a glass jar and transported to the laboratory for verification of field classification and storage. - SOIL SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION Soil and rock samples secured in the field sampling operation were visually classified as to texture, color and consistency. The Unified Soil Classification was . assigned to each soil stratum per ASTM D 2487. Soil classifications are presented descriptively and symbolically for ease of interpretation. The stratum identification lines represent the approximate boundary between soil types. In many cases, this transition may be gradual. • Consistency of the soil as to relative density or undrained shear strength, unless otherwise noted, is based upon Standard Penetration resistance values of "N" values and industry- accepted standards. "N" values, or blowcounts, are presented in both tabular and graphical fonn on each respective boring log at each sample interval. The graphical plot of blowcount versus depth is for illustration purposes only and does not warrant continuity in soil consistency or linear variation between sample intervals. The borings represent subsurface conditions at respective - boring locations and sample intervals only. Variations in subsurface conditions may occur between boring locations. Groundwater depths shown represent water depths at the dates and time shown only. The absence ofwater table information does not necessarily imply that groundwater was not encountered. ill Rev. 9/203 3 SECTION V — Contract Documents SECTION V • CONTRACT DOCUMENTS • • Table of Contents PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND 1 CONTRACT 3 CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT 7 PROPOSAL/BID BOND 8 AFFIDAVIT 9 NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 10 PROPOSAL 11 CITY OF C.LEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET 13 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL 14 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 15 SECTION V Page i Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents Bond No.: • PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (t) • • This bond is given to comply with § 255.05, Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in subsections (2) and (10). Pursuant to § 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, "Before commencing the work or before recommencing the work after a default or abandonment, the contractor shall provide to the public entity a certified copy of the recorded bond. Notwithstanding the terms of the contract or any other law governing prompt payment for construction services, the public entity may not make a payment to the contractor until the contractor has complied with this paragraph." CONTRACTOR SURETY OWNER [name] [name]' [principal business address] [phone numb ] [principal business address] [phone number] PROJECT NAME: [ PROJECT NO.: [ City of Clearwater [Dept. owning project]' 100 S. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33756 (727) 562- [xxxx] PROJECT DESCRIPTION: [A description of the project sufficient to identify it, such as a legal description or the street address of I the property being improved, and a general description of the improvement] BY THIS BOND, We, as Contractor, and , a corporation, as Surety, are bound to the City of Clearwater, Florida, herein called Owner, in the sum of $[x,xxx,xxx.xx], for payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally. THE COND][TION OF THIS BOND is that if Contractor: 1. Performs the contract dated , between Contractor and Owner for construction of [project name], the contract documents being made a part of this bond by reference (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Proposal, Contract, Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Plans, Technical Specifications and Appendix, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for), at the times and in the manner prescribed in the contract; and 2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes, supplying Contractor with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Contractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract; and SECTION V Page 1 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • SECTION V — Contract Documents Bond No.: PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (2) 3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Contractor under the contract; and 4. To the limits of § 725.06(2), Florida Statutes, shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, their officers and employees, from liabilities, damages, losses and costs, including, but not limited to, reasonable attorney's fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional wrongful misconduct of Contractor and persons employed or utilized by Contractor in the performance of the construction contract; and 5. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time specified in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise it remains in full force. 6. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes. 7. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance with any formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect Surety's obligation under this lbond, and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this day of 20 (If sole Ownership or Partnership, two (2) Witnesses required). (If Corporation, Secretary only will attest and affix seal). • [TYPE LEGAL. NAME OF CONTRACTOR] • By: Title: Print Name: WITNESS: WITNESS: Corporate Secretary or Witness Print Name: Print Name: (affix corporate seal) (Corporate Surety) By: ATTORNEY -IN -FACT Print Name: (affix corporate seal) (Power of Attorney must be attached) SECTION V Page 2 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (1) • This CONTRACT made and entered into this day of , 20 by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City ", and , of the City of County of and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor ". • • [Or, if out of state:] This CONTRACT made and entered into this T day of 20 by and between the' City of __ __ . municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City ", and a /an' (State) Corporation authorized to do Florida, of the City of County of and State of , hereinafter designated as the "Contractor ". b me S m the Si e WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: PROJECT NAME: [ ] PROJECT NO.: [ in the amount of $ In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, technical specifications, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. SECTION V Page 3 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (2) • THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES, TO THE LIMITS OF § 725.06(2). • • In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the public construction bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such public construction bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. SECTION V Page 4 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (3) In addition to all other contract requirements as provided by law, the contractor executing this agreement agrees to comply with public records law. IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE APPLICATION OF CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, THE CONTRACTORS DUTY TO PROVIDE PUBLIC RECORDS RELATING TO THIS CONTRACT. CONTACT THE CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC RECORDS AT 727 -562 -4092, Rosemarie .Call @myclearwater.com, • 112 S. Osceola Ave., Clearwater, FL 33756 The contractor's agreement to comply with public records law applies specifically to: a) Keep and maintain public records required by the City of Clearwater (hereinafter "public agency ") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder. b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as may be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law. c) Ensure that the public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the records to the public agency. d) Upon completion of the contract , transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt pr confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for retaining public records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency. e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess the requested records the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time. f) The contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in accordance with the contract. g) A contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes. h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if: SECTION V Page 5 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (4) 1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public records request within a reasonable time and 2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the public records request, including a statement that the contractor has not complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor. i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Such notices must be sent by common carrier delivery service or by registered, Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic format. j) A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: (SEAL) William B. Horne, II City Manager Attest: • Countersigned: • Rosemarie Call City Clerk By: Approved as to form: George N. Cretekos, Mayor Matthew M. Smith Assistant City Attorney Contractor must indicate whether: Corporation, Partnership, Company, or Individual (Contractor) By: (SEAL) Print Name: Title: The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation -- provide Affidavit. SECTION V Page 6 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT TO OWNER: City of Clearwater PROJECT NAME: [Dept. owning project] PROJECT NO.: [ 1 100 S. Myrtle Ave. CONTRACT DATE: [ Clearwater, FL 33756 BOND NO. : [ , recorded in O.R. Book [ Page [,,., of the Public Records of Pinellas County, Florida. CONTRACTOR: [ Pursuant to § 255.05(11), Florida Statutes, and in accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the: [insert name of Surety] [address] [address] on bond of [insert na [address] [address] 0 C'ontract'or] ,SURETY, ,CONTRACTOR, hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor • shall not relieve Surety of any of its obligations to • City of Clearwater [Dept. owning project] 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 as set forth in said Surety's bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand this day of Attest: (Seal): ,OWNER, (Surety) (Signature of authorized representative) (Printed name and title) SECTION V Page 7 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSALBID BOND (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) • KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, as Contractor, and as Surety, whose address is , are held and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Dollars ($ ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. • • The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of as Contractor, and as Surety, for work specified as: all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Public Construction Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal/Bid Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Principal must indicate whether: Corporation, Partnership, Company, or Individual Signed this day of , 20 Contractor Principal By: Title Surety The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation -- provide Affidavit. SECTION V Page 8 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • SECTION V — Contract Documents AFFIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Secretary of a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: , being duly sworn, deposes and says that he /she is (Street & Number) (City) (County) (State) Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by -laws of (Name of Corporation) Affiant further says that (Officer's Name) is (Title) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for or said corporation by virtue of (state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of • Board of Directors. If by Resolution give date of adoption). • Sworn to before me this Affiant day of , 20 Notary Public Type /print/stamp name of Notary Title or rank, and Serial No., if any SECTION V Page 9 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 1 STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF SECTION V — Contract Documents NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is of the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof. Affiant Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of , 20 Notary Public SECTION V Page 10 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for PROJECT NAME (PROJECT #) and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked PROJECT NAME (PROJECT #) Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Public Construction Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: If the foregoiing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. SECTION V Page 11 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSAL (2) Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on Bank, for the sum of (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount). ($ ) The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: ADDRESSES: Signature of Bidder: The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice President, he must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation. Principal: By: Title: Company Legal Name: Doing Business As (if different than above): Business Address of Bidder: City and State: Zip Code Phone: Email Address: Dated at , this day of , A.D., 20 . SECTION V Page 12 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET PROJECT: PROJECT NAME (PROJECT #) Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. SECTION V Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: (Name of Bidder) (Signature of Officer) (Title of Officer) (Date) Page 13 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: PROJECT NAME (PROJECT #) CONTRACTOR: BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ (Numbers) BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: (Words) Insert Bid Tab Table Here THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. SECTION V Page 14 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM PER SECTIONIII, ITEM25, IF YOUR BID IS $1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. STATE OF COUNTY OF Authorized Signature Printed Name Title Name of Entity /Corporation The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this day of , 20 , by (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the (title) of (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein , or produced a (type of identification) as identification, and who did /did not take an oath. My Commission Expires: NOTARY SEAL ABOVE SECTION V Notary Public Printed Name Page 15 of 15 Updated: 2/6/2017 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER PROJECT # 16- 0035 -PR BID OPENING - 5/23/17 AWARD - WEDNESDAY JUNE 14, 2017 BID ITEMS l Mobilization & Demobilization 2 Surveying, Layout, Material Testing & `As Built' Dwg. 3 Inclusive of all site work shown on Bldg. Permit BCP2016 -014 t 5 4 Inclusive of all building construction of New Recreation Center shown on Bldg. Permit BCP2016 -01415 5 Extended 3 year warranty of beyond 7 year provided by Yanmar Gas HV /AC System 6 Inclusive of all items for al0 year maintenance agreement of Yanmar Gas HV /AC system, includes monthly maintenance of system. Owner shall provide lift for access of air handler in gymnasium during the 10 year maintenance agreement. 7 General Contractor shall provide an electrical lift to Service HV /AC air handling units mounted in the Gymnasium Ceiling per Florida Building Code, Section 306.3 Appliance in Attic a man lift large enough to allow removal of the largest appliance and wide enough to accommodate service personnel to perform servicing of the appliance in the gymnasium. The man lift shall be stored on site in the storage room off the gymnasium. 8 General Conditions /Supervision 9 Profit and Overhead 10 City of Clearwater Building Permit No Fee for City project from Building Dept. 11 Sales Tax & Materials for Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) of materials (construction material for building site work items, & all other miscellaneous items) 1 la Owner Direct Purchase (break out of 11 not in bid totals) 1 lb Sales Tax amount (break out of I I not in bid totals) 12 10% Bid Bond, Performance surety bond recorded at Pinellas County Court House recorded original provide to the Owner. 13 Sub Total of items 1 — 12 14 10% Contingency 15 TOTAL BID (Items 1 -12 +Contingency) • • Bandes Construction Company Inc. 1368 Spalding Road Dunedin, FL 34698 Caladesi Construction Co. 1390 Donegan Road Largo, FL 33771 J.O. Delotto & Sons, Inc. 924 E. Busch Blvd. Tampa, FL 33612 -8598 Lema Construction & Developers, Inc. 10001 16th St. N. St. Petersburg, FL 33716 I(TV UNIT UNIT PRICE AMllr1NT 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS $ 280,000.00 $ 20,000.00 $ 570,000.00 $ 2,129,150.00 $ 17,000.00 $ 92,000.00 UNIT PRIPE AMIN INT ItNIT PRICE AM(II INT IINIT PRICE A MfI TNT 280,000.00 20,000.00 570,000.00 $ 2,129,150.00 $ 17,000.00 $ 92,000.00 $ 28,000.00 $ 28,000.00 $ 190,000.00 $ 190,000.00 $ 210,000.00 $ 210,000.00 $ 1,802,000.00 $ 1,802,000.00 $ 1,700,000.000 $ 1,700,000.000 $ 102,000.000 $ 102,000.000 $ 150.00 $ 150.00 $ 5,338,300.00 $ 533,830.00 $ 5,872,130.00 $ 54,270.00 $ 23,466.75 $ 299,458.85 $ 4,081,680.87 $ $ 27,315.90 $ $ 67,604.34 $ 26,004.15 $ $ 195,221.75 $ 381,680.21 $ 1,535,050.92 54,270.00 23,466.75 299,458.85 2,546,629.95 27,315.90 67,604.34 26,004.15 195,221.75 381,680.21 $ 1,535,050.92 $ 1,444,096.000 $ $ 90,954.920 $ $ 27,669.66 $ 1,444,096.000 90,954.920 27,669.66 $ 5,184,372.48 $ 518,437.25 $ 5,702,809.73 $ 17,512.00 $ 32,700.00 $ 605,694.00 $ 3,318,757.00 17,512.00 32,700.00 605,694.00 $ 3,318,757.00 $ 25,061.00 $ 25,061.00 126,788.00 $ 126,788.00 150,199.00 $ 1 50,199.00 $ 880, 1 30.00 $ 880,130.00 829,792.000 $ 829,792.000 50,338.000 $ 50,338.000 $ 5,156,841.00 $ 515,684.10 $ 5,672,525.10 $ 29,416.00 $ 22,500.00 $ 451,061.00 $ 3,586,350.00 $ 27,180.00 $ 67,268.00 $ 29,175.00 $ $ 255,912.00 $ 327,873.00 $ 1,009,360.00 $ $ 938,705.000 $ $ 70,655.000 $ $ 54,645.00 $ 29,416.00 22,500.00 451,061.00 3,586,350.00 27,180.00 67,268.00 29,175.00 255,912.00 327,873.00 1,009,360.00 938,705.000 70,655.000 54,645.00 $ 5,860,740.00 $ 586,074.00 $ 6,376,159.00 Bid modified to allow for proper comparison. Abenge 5/31/17 INCOMPLETE BID - Non-responsive. Abenge 5/31/17 • • • NuJak Development, Inc. 714 N. Massachusetts Ave. Lakeland, FL 33801 Park Construction 2201 NE Coachman Rd. Suite Clearwater, FL 33765 201 Shearer Companies, Inc. 8311 63rd Way N. Pinellas Park, FL 33781 Triad Construction Services, Inc. P.O. Box 13309 Tampa, FL 33681 West Construction, Inc. 4th St. 33642 820 N. Lantana, FL UNIT PRICE AMOUNT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT $ 32,300.00 $ 29,472.00 $ 440,064.00 $ 32,300.00 $ 29,472.00 $ 440,064.00 $ 12,450.00 $ 18,950.00 $ 486,256.61 $ 12,450.00 $ 18,950.00 $ 486,256.61 $ 13,082.00 $ 15,550.00 $ 478,427.00 $ 13,082.00 $ 15,550.00 $ 478,427.00 $ 34,000.00 $ 21,000.00 $ 353,873.00 $ 34,000.00 $ 21,000.00 $ 353,873.00 $ 75,000.00 $ 30,775.00 $ 730,060.00 $ 75,000.00 $ 30,775.00 $ 730,060.00 $ 4,580,448.00 $ 2,835,361.00', $ 4,166,266.10 $ 2,970,552.46 $ 3,097,552.00 $ 3,097,552.00 $ 3,401,667.00 $ 3,401,667.00 $ 4,048,910.00 $ 3,038,041.00 $ 27,180.00 $ 27,180.00 $ 27,180.00 $ 27,180.00 $ 27,000.00 $ 27,000.00 $ 32,200.00 $ 32,200.00 $ 30,006.00 $ 30,006.00 $ 67,268.00 $ 67,268.00 $ 67,268.00 $ 67,268.00 $ 67,000.00 $ 67,000.00 $ 78,200.00 $ 78,200.00 $ 74,263.00 $ 74,263.00 $ 28,567.00 $ 28,567.00 $ 14,493.15 $ 14,493.15 $ 892.40 $ 892.40 $ 26,588.00 $ 26,588.00 $ 35,966.00 $ 35,966.00 $ 96,900.00 $ 96,900.00 $ 244,630.80 $ 244,630.80 $ 149,475.00 $ 149,475.00 $ 309,704.00 $ 309,704.00 $ 148,063.00 $ 148,063.00 $ 154,842.00 $ 154,842.00 $ 313,174.16 $ 313,174.16 $ 209,761.12 $ 209,761.12 $ 400,912.00 $ 400,912.00 $ 458,460.00 $ 458,460.00 $ - $ - $ - $ - $ $ 1,745,087.00 $ 1,745,087.00 $ 1,195,713.64 $ 1,195,713.64 $ 1,459,500.00 $ 1,459,500.00 $ 1,041,828.00 $ 1,041,828.00 $ 1,071,521.00 $ 1,071,521.00 $ 1,636,771.000 $ 1,636,771.000 $ 1,195,713.640 $ 1,195,713.640 $ 1,375,763.000 $ 1,375,763.000 $ 937,671.000 ( $ 937,671.000 $ 1,010,869.000 $ 1,010,869.000 $ 108,316.000 $ 108,316.000 $ 75,151.800 $ 75,151.800 $ 83,737.000 $ 83,737.000 $ 68,157.000 $ 68,157.000 $ 60,652.000 $ 60,652.000 $ 54,700.00 $ 54,700.00 $ 41,000.00 $ 41,000.00 $ 47,250.00 $ 47,250.00 $ 60,300.00 $ 60,300.00 $ 50,234.00 $ 50,234.00 $ 5,511,741.00 $ 5,391,668.82 $ 5,565,489 52 $ 5,760,272.00 $ 5,742,389.00 $ 551,174.10 $ 539,166.88 $ 556,548.95 $ 576,027.20 $ 574,238.90 $ 5,954,599.10 $ 5,855,683.90 $ 6,122,038.47 1 $ 6,336,299.20 $ 6,316,627.90 Bid modified to allow for proper comparison. ABenge 5/31/17 Bid modified to allow for proper comparison. ABenge 5/31/17 Bid modified to allow for proper comparison. ABenge 5/31/17 • • • ADDENDUM NO. 1 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR DATE: April 26, 2017 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 1 TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned This Addendum is issued to modify the previously issued Contract Documents & Specifications, and is hereby made a part of the Contract Documents. Please attach this addendum to the Contract Documents in your possession. Item 1. Bidder's Proposal Form The Bidder's Proposal Form that was not present in the original contract documents is provided here. End of Addendum No. 1 ADDENDUM 1- Page 1 of 3 • • • BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: Morningside Recreation Center CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL UNIT QTY. PRICE PRICE General Contractor shall provide labor. equipment. materials and all insurances as necessary for construct a new recreation building approximately 21,000 sq. ft. all site work required at Morningside Recreation Complex — 2400 Harn Boulevard — Clearwater Florida 33754 according to Building Permit BCP20I6 -01415 and the construction documents of Project Number I6- 0035 -PR for the lump sum price provided in this contract. 1. Mobilization & Demobilization LS 1 2. Surveying, Layout, Material Testing & `As Built' Dwg. LS 1 3. Inclusive of all site work shown on Bldg. Permit BCP2016 -01415 LS 1 4. Inclusive of all building construction of New Recreation Center shown on Bldg. Permit BCP2016 -01415 LS 1 5. Extended 3 year warranty of beyond 7 year provided by Yanmar Gas HV /AC System LS 1 6. Inclusive of all items for al0 year maintenance agreement of Yanmar Gas HV /AC system, includes monthly maintenance of system. Owner shall provide lift for access of air handler in gymnasium during the 10 year maintenance agreement 7. General Contractor shall provide an electrical lift to Service HV /AC air handling units mounted in the Gymnasium Ceiling per Florida Building Code, Section 306.3 Appliance in Attic a man lift large enough to allow removal of the largest appliance and wide enough to accommodate service personnel to perform servicing of the appliance in the gymnasium. The man lift shall be stored on site in the storage room off the gymnasium LS 1 LS 1 8. General Conditions /Supervision LS 1 9. Profit and Overhead LS 1 10. City of Clearwater Building Permit No Fee for City project from Building Dept. LS 1 N/A N/A 11. Sales Tax & Materials for Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) of materials (construction material for building site work items, & all other miscellaneous items) LS 1 12. 10% Bid Bond, Performance surety bond recorded at Pinellas County Court House recorded original provide to the Owner. ADDENDUM 1 - PAGE 2 of 3 L. S. 1 • • • BIDDER'S PROPOSAL (continued) PROJECT: Morningside Recreation Center CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR ITEM UNIT TOTAL NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY. PRICE PRICE 13. Sub Total of items 1 — 12 $ 14. *10% Contingency of line 13 *(Note contingency funds shall only utilized upon written approval by the Owner or the Owner's representative to utilize these fund for additional Scope of Work not included in items 1 -13 of the Bill of Quantities. Contingency funds not utilized in the implementation of this contract shall be returned to the Owner by closing out purchase order short during close out of the contract (purchase order.) 15. Grand Total items 1 through 12 Bid Items plus 10% Contingency $ CONTRACTOR NAME: BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ (Numbers) BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: A. For extra work: OH &P percentage for materials purchased on a time and material (T &M) basis. ADD $ (Words) cyo B. For extra work: OH &P percentage for general contractor for subcontractor services on additional work. ADD $ C. For extra work: Labor rate for work performed on a time and material basis (includes all taxes and fringe benefits). ADD $ /HR 1. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 1. The contractor agrees to commence work within 7 calendar days from execution of contract and notice to proceed. 2. The contractor further agrees to complete the work within 330 calendar days from execution of contract and notice to proceed per the referenced schedule in the Invitation to Bid. THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. THE OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SELECT ANY ITEMS AND OR REJECT ALL BIDS. THE TOTAL PRICE SHALL BE BASED ON ITEMS SELECTED BY THE OWNER OF THIS PROJECT. ADDENDUM 1 - PAGE 3 of 3 ADDENDUM NO. 2 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR DATE: May 15, 2017 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 2 TO: Prospective Bidders and Other Concerned This Addendum is issued to modify the previously issued Contract Documents & Specifications, and is hereby made a part of the Contract Documents. Please attach this addendum to the Contract Documents in your possession. Item 1: Revised Drawing List: Sheet No. C7of 19 LA.1 LA.1 LA.2 LA.3 A2.1 M1.0 M2.0 M2.1 M4.0 M5.0 E2.0 E2.3 E4.0 E4.1 E4.2 ES1.0 Item 2: Item 3: Sheet Title Morningside Rec. Ctr. Site Plan Overall Phase 1 & 2 Morningside Rec. Ctr. PHASE 1 Landscape IRR. Plan Morningside Rec. Ctr. Landscape Plan Morningside Rec. Ctr. Landscape Plan Morningside Rec. Ctr. Landscape Details Morningside Rec. Ctr. Floor Plan Mechanical Plan Mechanical Plan Mechanical Plan Mechanical Plan Mechanical Plan Power Plan Electrical HV /AC & Fire Alarm Plan Electrical Riser Electrical Panel Electrical Panels & Lighting Control Diagrams Site Electrical Plan Technical Specifications: Section Description No. of Pages 092900 Gypsum Board 8 pages 099623 Graffiti Resistant Coatings 4 pages Equipment Cut Sheet Information: Genie Scissor Lift 2646 Specifications Genie Scissor Lift 2646 Specification Features Drop Down Screen Specifications Drop Down Screen Data Sheet 2320 EH500 Optima Projector Data Sheet 2 Pages 2 Pages 15 pages 1 page 2 pages Item 4: Bidder's Proposal — 2 pages Prospective Bidder shall utilize the attached for submitting their bids. Item 5: Questions and Answers Page 1 Date Revision 5.16.17 5.06.17 5.11.17 5.11.17 5.11.17 5.16.17 5.11.17 5.11.17 5.11.17 5.11.17 5.11.17 5.11.17 5.11.17 5.11.17 5.11.17 5.11.17 5.11.17 Question 1 Response: Question 2 Response: Question 3 Response: Question 4 Response: Question 5 Response: Question 6 Response: • ADDENDUM NO. 2 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR Will there be a site visit during the pre -bid meeting? Yes the site visit will follow immediately after the pre -bid meeting. The prospective bidders may visit the site during regular business hours and are welcome to visit the site during the bidding process. Is Maire Company providing pricing for their work to be included in the General Contractor's bid? No, a. Maire Company has a contract with the City of Clearwater who will be providing hardware and monitoring of the fire alarm and security intrusion systems of the proposed recreation center. b. The General Contractor shall provide all conduits and raceways for both fire alarm and security intrusion systems. c. The General Contractor shall provide no exposed conduits or raceway in view of the public unless where conduits and raceways are in the exposed ceiling and they shall be painted the same color as ceilings, however the General Contractor must rout these systems from view of the public before exposing to view. No conduits shall be mounted on walls in view by the public. d. The General Contractor shall provide smoke detectors in the air handlers as shown on the contract drawings. e. No exposed conduits or wires mounted on outside of door jambs and must be concealed in the metal door jambs. f. No low voltage conduits smaller than 3/4 inch diameter. g. General Contractor shall also provide smoke detectors as required. h. Mechanical and electrical closet conduits may be mounted on walls. Regardless of code; is all low voltage to be installed in conduits? Yes, all low voltage wiring shall be installed in conduits and no conduits shall be smaller than 3/4 inch in diameter. No low voltage shall be free wiring above ceiling or in walls; all low voltage shall be installed in electrical conduits. All work shown on the Electrical documents shall work to be performed by the Electrical Contractor, unless otherwise noted. The Owner prefers Cat 6. The General Contractor may elect to sub - contract the low voltage work (wiring, hardware and other low voltage equipment) to a certified or licensed low voltage contractor, all electrical conduits, raceways junction boxes, etc... shall be installed by an Electrical Contractor for the low voltage contractor. Is this project funded? Yes. Are there any special minority requirements for this project? This project is NOT federally funded project and there are no special requirements and the General Contractor shall review Section II — Instructions to Bidders and Section III - General Conditions for further information regards to this question. Is the gas shutoff system attached to the fire alarm system? The building is classified an "Assembly Occupancy" the fire alarm system will need to be connected to the gas valve, so when the fire alarm system is activated it will shut off the flow of Page 2 • Question 7 Response: Question 8 Response: Question 9 Response: Question 10 Response: • • ADDENDUM NO. 2 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR gas. The contractor shall provide a one (1) inch conduit from fire alarm panel to the gas valve. The automated gas valve shall be provided by Clearwater Gas. Owner Direct Purchases (ODP) is this to be on in the General Contractor's bid? The General Contractor shall provide the on the bid form amount of direct purchase items and shall include all applicable sales taxes. Are the drawings issued for bidding the permitted drawings? Yes the drawing package issued for bidding are the building permitted drawings. Will and or equal be considered for the basketball /volleyball equipment or is Porter the only manufacturer accepted? Yes, other manufacturers may be submitted for consideration and potential acceptance. CD: Spec 116623 specifies "basis -of- design" products. Did not change. The landscape and irrigation plans seem to be incomplete. There is a master plan and only one part of the landscape plan and there are no irrigation plans available in this set just the notes and details. Landscape plans are provided in the drawing set: Sheet No. Title of drawing LA.0 Morningside Rec. Ctr. Landscape Master Plan LA.1 Morningside Rec. Ctr. Landscape Plan LA.2 Morningside Rec. Ctr. Landscape Plan LA.3 Morningside Rec. Ctr. Landscape Details & Plant Quantities Owner has provided sodding around basketball court and resodding of this area will not be required by Phase 2 General Contractor unless he disturb the area during Phase 2 construction. Irrigation system, please see scope of work item no. 36 information has been provided for General Contractor to provide shop drawings for approval of irrigation system by the Owner. a. The General Contractor shall retain a certified irrigation designer to design irrigation system for approval by Owner. The irrigation system shall be designed based on irritation detail plans and technical specifications provided. The General Contractor shall note: b. No drip irrigation system shall be allowed such as Netafim c. Locate existing irrigation system and utilize existing system as necessary. d. Relocate existing irrigation system as necessary. e. Provide a complete operational irritation system from existing well f. Design system base on well providing 65 psi at 50 gallons per minute from point of connect at existing well location. Hedge along parking lot shall be irrigated with full spray nozzle and spaced accordingly. All spray shall be designed with 80% of maximum radius distance of nozzle to allow adjustment for wind. i. No trenching beneath tree canopy drip line of existing trees, either bore beneath tree root system or go around tree canopy drip line. All parkways (space between sidewalk and curb of street) shall be irrigated. Page 3 g. h. j. Question 11 Response: .Question 12 Response: Question 13 Response: Question 14 Response: Question 15 •Res ponse: ADDENDUM NO. 2 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR k. All pipe beneath hard surfaces shall be sleeved twice the size irrigation pipe passing through and 2 inch wire sleeve shall be provided for irritation control wires. I. No irrigation head shall be spraying towards building but away from building. m. General Contractor shall be required to connect three irrigation zones with temporary battery operated controllers. Owner has provided one inch conduits for access to electrical solenoid valve from existing irrigation mainline. See attached irrigation plan for basketball area. n. Irrigation Consultant Designer and General Contractor is not obligated to use recommended designer: Michael C. Essenwein ICD Services 10803 Providence Oaks Drive Riverview, FL 33578 Office: (813) 653 -1587 Cell: (813) 495 -4987 Fax: (813) 436 -9603 Email: irrigate @tampabay.rr.com Are there any engineered plans available for the pool designs by G. B. Collins? Pool construction is in Phase 1 - Pool Renovations & Demolition of Existing Bathhouse and currently under construction and is not in contract of Morningside Recreation Center. 12 Spec Section 092900 2.2 D calls for Abuse - Resistant Gypsum Board in specific rooms. These rooms are listed in the specs but appear to be a holdover from another project. Is there any abuse - resistant gypsum board to be used on this project? If so which rooms? Specification Section 092900 2.2 D shall be revised to read: Abuse Resistant Gypsum board wall assembly panels shall be provided from floor to eight feet above finish floor in all area to receive Gypsum board. CD: Spec 092900 Updated. See Addendum Folder for Spec. Also, are the interior soffits engineered? All soffits are to be provided at the dimensions depicted in the plans. Contractor shall provide delegated MTL stud engineering as required. A specification sections were not provided for the athletic equipment and /or the scoreboards, however some model numbers are provided on the equipment schedule. Will any more information for this equipment be provided? All American Scoreboards — Model 8210C LED Basketball Scoreboard is the basis of design Any additional equipment without a manufacturer listed will be open to contractor selection for approval. General Contractor shall note tip and roll bleachers are to be provided by the Owner in the FF &E package and not in contract of the Morningside Recreation Center. CD: Spec 116623 does not include scoreboard. Did not change. The floor plan of the Gymnasium shows one (1) scoreboard; however the equipment schedule shows that two (2) scoreboards are required. Please confirm the quantity of scoreboards required? There are (2) scoreboards. Sheet A5.8 illustrates their position on the interior elevations. Page 4 • ADDENDUM NO. 2 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR Question 16 The equipment schedule does not list a model number for the scoreboards. Please provide a specification or model number for the required scoreboards? Response: All American Scoreboards — Model 8210C LED Basketball Scoreboard is the basis of design CD: Spec 116623 does not include scoreboard. Did not change. Question 17 Tierra, Inc. is interested in providing the materials testing for this Construction project. We should be on the City's rotation for Geotechnical firms for testing and /or Geotechnical work. Is the Quality Control testing for this project to be assigned to City /Sub consultant Staff, or to be included as a responsibility of the Contractor? Response: Material testing is to be provided by the contractor via a third party testing agency. See specification 033000 section 3.10 see also City of Clearwater Section III 13.1 Test and Inspections, Article 13.1 General Contractor shall employ and pay for services of independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The cost for these inspections, test or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor. Original and 2 copies shall be provided n the Operations and Maintenance Manual as stipulated in the scope of works. Question 18 Response: •Question 19 Response: Question 20 Response: Question 21 Response: • Request for substitution: Section 096400 - Wood Sports -Floor Assemblies Action Aero NR floor system is to be an approved manufacturer. Approval of manufacturer does not constitute variation of any other section of specification 096400 CD: Spec 096400. Did not change. Clarification Addendum regards to conduits and raceways: If reference to conduits, piping, data, refrigerant lines, gas lines etc. Exposed systems will not be accepted at the Lobby and multipurpose room where roof deck is exposed. Care shall be taken to conceal these systems below slab or within walls. CD: Spec Electrical. Did not write spec. Is a remote internet Mechanical Control Management System Clarification required for this project? Yanmar is to provide a Control Management system for HVAC equipment and shall include software and equipment as required to allow internet connectivity and control. Are we required to provide electrical service to basketball courts, pool lighting and make public address system operational? Yes. General Contractor shall provide electrical service for the pool lighting and basketball courts. In Phase 1 Pool Renovations and Bathhouse demolition the basketball lighting poles were relocated to its new current location. The existing Tight poles were left intact with existing conductors in place and ground junction boxes were install and conduit between light poles were installed with pull string. The General Contractor of Phase II shall be required to reconnect the basketball light poles and provide switches in the lifeguard building and make sport lighting operational, shall provide new lamps 1000 watt metal halide lamps and possibly ballast are required. The General contractor shall adjust light fixtures to provide minimum 30 foot candles average after burn in of lamps. The General Contractor of Phase a. b. Page 5 ADDENDUM NO. 2 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR II shall provide a complete operational lighting system. The General Contractor shall be required to install 2 inch conduit 100 lineal feet from lighting contact electrical box to electrical room. c. The pool lighting is temporary operated in a contactor panel in the pool mechanical yard. The General Contractor of Phase II shall be required to provide electrical service to operate the pool lighting from switches in the lifeguard office to operate the pool lighting system. d. The public address system speakers wiring of the pool horns are routed to a green box adjacent to the electrical panel in the electrical /mechanical yard. The General Contractor shall be required to provide a 90 lineal feet of1.5 inch diameter conduit and route from green electrical junction box to the building electrical room for the operation of the public address system speakers back to the lifeguard room and make pool speakers operational. Question 22 Where is the service for the electrical service of proposed recreation building to provided from? Is the Owner to provide electrical service during the construction of the project? Response: The Owner has provided a new transformer by Duke Energy to service the new recreation center and two 4 inch conduits have provided to the 120/208 volt 3 phase new service transformer. a. The contractor shall be required to complete installation of two 4 inch conduits, provide a new CT meter panel in the proposed electrical room and provide new aluminum conductors to the transformer. 2 four inch electrical conduit 90 lineal feet from existing conduits from transformer to electrical room. b. The General Contractor shall note temporary power has been provided for the irrigation well to operate in Phase 1 Pool Renovations & Demolition of the Bathhouse. The General Contractor shall relocate the irrigation controller and the electrical service to the well to construct the new recreation center and the irrigation system shall remain operational during the construction of the new recreation center. At end of project construction of new recreation center the permanent power shall be provided to the well from the building. Question 23 The Door and Frame Specification appears to be a closed specification for Steel Craft. Can other manufacturers be used? Response: Yes, other manufacturers may be submitted for consideration and potential acceptance per the specifications CD: Spec 081113. Did not change. "Basis -of- design" allows other manufacturers. Question 24 Wood Athletic Floors. Is the Defender Panel, sole source. Or can we provide similar subfloor systems? Response: CD: See Question 18. Yes, other manufacturers may be submitted for consideration and potential acceptance per the specifications Question 25 Please advise if there is a CAD file (for earthwork) for subject job. If there is one, may we have it please? Response: CAD files will not be released until the project is awarded. • Page 6 • • • ADDENDUM NO. 2 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR Question 26 For the specification for the architectural millwork. It is requiring an AWI Certification. Can the requirement for the AWI Certification be waived? The Millwork would still be built to AWI Standards. The AWI Certification just adds extra cost to all the Millwork Bids. Response: Response: Spec 064116. Did not change. AWI Certification adds a standard level of quality to projects in order to avoid conflicts over subjective standards between individuals. Owner shall waive AWI Certification requirement but shop drawings and samples will be required for approval prior to millwork sub - contractor begins manufacturing process. General Contractor shall be held responsible for providing quality millwork for the project and subject to critiques by the Architect and Owner to insure quality millwork is provided for project. Question 27 For the Athletic Equipment/Scoreboards. We did not see a spec section for the athletic equipment and /or scoreboards but do see that some model #'s are called out on the equipment schedule. Can you confirm that this is the extent of the spec available? There is one scoreboard called out on the floor plan, the equipment schedule shows two are required. Can you confirm the quantity of scoreboards required? The equipment schedule does not list a model number for the scoreboards. Could you provide a spec /model for the required scoreboard /s? Response: All American Scoreboards — Model 8210C LED Basketball Scoreboard is the basis of design Any additional equipment without a manufacturer listed will be open to contractor selection for approval. General Contractor shall note tip and roll bleachers are to be provided by the Owner in the FF &E package and not in contract of the Morningside Recreation Center. CD: Spec 116623 does not include scoreboard. Did not change. Question 28 Is Maire or the EC responsible for the low voltage cabling and AV systems? There are conflicting references to Maire or the EC performing this work: Page 5 of the SOW Response: Fire Alarm and Security system are contracted with the City of Clearwater and Maire Company for installation of low voltage wiring system and hardware. The General Contractor is responsible to coordinate with John Maire for installation of hardware wiring of the Fire Alarm and Security systems. Maire Company P. O. Box 1346 Dunedin, FL 34697 Office: (727) 712 -3250 Email: mairesysr7a,verizon.net The General Contractor shall provide all conduits /raceway for fire alarm and security systems and no conduits exposed on finished wall viewable to public spaces. All conduits and raceway shall be behind walls, coordinate all work with Maire Company. The General Contractor shall be responsible for all other low voltage system including but not limited for installation of all conduits, raceways, wiring, hardware of audio visual, data, telephone, cable television, closed circuit television, and speaker system for audio public address system, hearing loop, and any other low voltage system shown on the contract drawings. Page 7 ADDENDUM NO. 2 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR The Owner in the pass has contacted low voltage work at other recreation centers with: Charlie Moorefield Diversified Telecom Services, Inc. 5447 Haines Rd. North Suite 421 St. Petersburg, FL 33714 (941)951 -2991 (941) 915 -4227 cell cmoorefield @dtsoffice.com All work shown on the Electrical documents is work shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor, unless otherwise noted. The Owner prefers Cat 6. The General Contractor may elect to sub - contract the low voltage work (wiring, hardware and other low voltage equipment) to a certified or licensed low voltage contractor, all electrical conduits, raceways junction boxes, etc... shall be installed by an Electrical Contractor for the low voltage contractor. Question 29 Sheet E2.0, Note 15 states that the Electrical Contractor is to provide underground conduit with 2 — Cat 5e Cables for future use to the pool equipment area. Since all other data cables are Category 6 rated, should these cables also be Category 6 and outdoor rated? Is the EC responsible for this work? Response: The determination for the cables being Cat 5e or Cat 6 would be determined by the Owner. All conductors installed shall be rated for the condition it is installed in. If conductors are installed in wet or exterior use, it shall be rated for this condition. All work shown on the Electrical documents is work shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor, unless otherwise noted. The Owner prefers Cat 6. The General Contractor may elect to sub - contract the low voltage work (wiring, hardware and other low voltage equipment) to a certified or licensed low voltage contractor, all electrical conduits, raceways junction boxes, etc... shall be installed by an Electrical Contractor for the low voltage contractor. Question 30 Sheet E2.1 and E2.2, Low Voltage Plan and Low Voltage Specification, include info on low voltage cabling, AV, security, and CCTV systems which typically aren't provided if the Owner's Contractor will perform this work. Response: Maire Company is only providing low voltage hardware and wiring for fire alarm system and security intrusion system. All other low voltage systems, hardware and wiring are the responsibility of the General Contractor to provide a complete functional operational system to the satisfaction of the Owner. All work shown on the Electrical documents is work shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor, unless otherwise noted The General Contractor may elect to sub - contract the low voltage work (wiring, hardware and other low voltage equipment) to a certified or licensed low voltage contractor, all electrical conduits, raceways junction boxes, etc... shall be installed by an Electrical Contractor for the low voltage contractor. Question 31 If we are to provide the AV system, here are some specific questions: a. E2.1 Drawing shows 2 icons for Globe Sound Speakers but there is no reference to them in the legend or the specifications. oAre they for music in the Gym or for the PA system? Response: Yes they are for both music and PA. b. There is an AV rack in the storage room. Will there be TV /Digital Signage anywhere? • Page 8 • ADDENDUM NO. 2 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR Response: This would be coordinated with the owner; however, there shall be a Digital Storage system for the CCTV system provided by the General Contractor. Response: c. E2.1 Multipurpose room shows an AV rack and an AV Keypad but there is no reference to them in the specifications. Will there be a projector and screen in this area? If so are there specifications that they are looking for? Specifications for the Rack and Key Pad requirements are shown in the Specifications on sheet E2.2. For the Projector, refer to Hex Note 3 on sheet E2.1 and Hex Notes 17 and 18 on sheet E2.0. Requirements for the Ceiling Projector System shall be provided by Owner and installed by the General Contractor. Selection of Ceiling projector system has not been selected by the Owner. The Owner shall also provide drop down automatic drop down screen and shall be boxed in to the wall and the ceiling, included shall include a toggle switch to operate the drop down screen to be installed by the General Contractor. d. E2.1 paging system notes specify a need for exterior speakers but there is not any specified in the plans. Will there be speakers out by the pool or front entrance and if so how many? Response: See Question 21 response d. all required speakers are shown on the drawing. Question 32 Specification section 096450.2.1 requires welding of the sports floor seams. The • manufacturer of the product selected on drawing A2.3 does not make a welding rod for this floor. Please advise. Response: Spec 096450. Did not change. Weld seams per manufacturer's requirements. Question 33 Civil drawing C -7 of 19 lists the scale as 1" = 20'. It appears the actual scale to be 1" = 30'. Please confirm. Response: The scale on plan sheet C -7 is incorrect and should read 1"= 30' • Question 34 Specification section 099623 states that Prosoco Defacer Eraser Graffiti Wipe is to be applied to all exposed masonry wall surfaces. This product is used to remove graffiti, not to prevent graffiti. Please advise which anti - graffiti product should be included. Prosoco manufacturers a graffiti blocking product called Blok -Guard & Graffiti Control. Response: Spec 099623 Updated. See Addendum Folder for Spec. Question 35 The Landscaping notes state that the irrigation system shall achieve 100% coverage. Does this include the Bahia sod? Response: Yes this includes all the Bahia sodded areas. Question 36 Is the irrigation pump equipped with a pressure tank or control relay to provide automatic operation? Response: The irrigation well is irrigation controller pump start. There is no pressure tank, currently the irrigation well is functional, and a new pump relay was installed by the General Contractor of the pool renovations and demolition of the existing bathhouse. Page 9 Question 37 Response: Question 38 Response: Question 39 Response: Question 40 Response: Question 41 Response: Question 42 Response: Question 43 Response: • ADDENDUM NO. 2 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR Is Maire Company or the Electrical Contractor responsible for the low voltage cabling and AV systems? There are conflicting references to Maire or the EC performing this work. Drawings E2.1 and E2.2, Low Voltage Plan and Low Voltage Specification include information on low voltage cabling, AV, Security and CCTV systems which typically are not provided if the Owner's Contractor will perform this work. Maire Company is only providing low voltage hardware and wiring for fire alarm system and security intrusion system. All other low voltage systems, hardware and wiring shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to provide a complete functional operational system to the satisfaction of the Owner. All work shown on the Electrical documents is work shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor, unless otherwise noted. The General Contractor may elect to sub - contract the low voltage work (wiring, hardware and other low voltage equipment) to a certified or licensed low voltage contractor, all electrical conduits, raceways junction boxes, etc... shall be installed by an Electrical Contractor for the low voltage contractor. Note 15 on drawing E2.0 states that the Electrical Contractor is to provide underground conduit with 2 — Cat 5e cables for future use to the pool equipment area. Since all other data cables are Category 6 rated, should these cables also be Category 6 and outdoor rated? Is the EC responsible for this cabling? This question is the same as #29 above. Please refer to the response in that question. Drawing E2.1 shows 2 icons for Globe Sound Speakers but there is no reference to them in the legend or the specifications. Are they for music in the Gym or for the PA system? The globe sound speakers can be used for music, and game PA announcing. On Drawing E2.1 there is an AV rack in the storage room. Will there be TV /Digital Signage anywhere? This question is the same as #31 c above. Please refer to the response in that question. Drawing E2.1 shows an AV rack and an AV keyboard but there is no reference to them in the specifications. This question is the same as #31 c above. Please refer to the response in that question. Please provide specifications on the owner provided projectors and screens. This item has not been selected at this time and the General Contractor shall provide a price to install Owner provided drop down screen and projector, projector will include ceiling hanger. The Owner has attache projection screens and projectors they have had contractor install in pass project, however the information is subject to change at time of purchase because of availability and new generation of projectors and screens but installation will be similar. On drawing E2.1, the paging system notes specify a need for exterior speakers but there is not any specified in the plans. Will there be speakers out by the pool or front entrance and, if so, how many? All required speakers are shown on the drawings unless otherwise stated in this addendum no. 2 See Question 21 Response d. Page 10 Question 44 Response: Question 45 Response: Question 46 Response: • ADDENDUM NO. 2 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR Please confirm that the Electrical Contractor is to provide duct smoke detectors for the project. Yes the General Contractor shall include smoke duct or air handler smoke detectors in his bid price. Smoke detectors hung on ceilings and walls shall be provided by Maire Company. Will the Electrical Contractor need to provide a conduit and pull string to the fire water back flow device for the City's Fire Alarm Contractor and if so what size? Yes, the General Contractor shall be required to provide two (2) backflow tamper switches and mounting devices and a one - 1 inch diameter electrical conduit from fire alarm panel to the backflow prevention device for the City's Fire Alarm Contractor to connect to the fire alarm panel In C -1 thru C -19 we bid on only phase II items, we see over laps between Phase I and I on sheets c — 6,7,8,9,10,11,12,and 13 need clarification on starting and stopping points The Phase I drawings sheets C -5, C -7, C -8, C -10 & C -12 clearly identifies scope of work to be performed by the Pool Renovations /Bathhouse Demolition General Contractor. The pool deck areas (main pool, activity pool & training pool), pool mechanical /transformer yard, newly constructed basket ball courts including swale east of basket ball court to east property line, upland areas of playground, picnic shelter and tennis courts to the north and east property lines. All Phase II items shall be included in your bid and are clearly shown on sheets C -6, C -7, C -9, C -11 C -12, C -13 (concrete sidewalk and end of basketball court southwest corner & bottle fill water fountain, 1 inch water pipe to service pool & construct P -45 for pool overflow from pool to sanitary manhole (S20) phase 2 contractor to continue from sanitary manhole to retention pond is in phase 1 contract, Clearwater Gas to construct all natural gas piping, Owner to construct 48 inch high chain link fence through landscape bed. Phase 2 General Contractor shall install landscaping and irrigation in landscape bed adjacent to main pool deck), C -14, C -15, C -16, C- 17, C -18, C -19, L -0, LA -1, LA -2, LA -3, LA -4, LA -5, LA -6 LA -7, See sheet C -7 for Phase I and Phase II delineation limits it is noted even though there is separation of limit of Phase I and Phase II the General Contractor shall be required to perform work in Phase I to tie in various electrical, data, speaker system and other low voltage items to various locations of the new recreation center for complete operational systems. Clarification of items of ES1.0 Electrical site plan (Plan marked up in color by Owner for clarification scope of work) 1. Detail 2 Enlarge Cabana — Not in Contract of Phase 2 (completed in Phase 1) Cabanas electrical lighting is Not in Contract of Phase 2 2. Electrical primary feed and transformer by Owner and Duke Energy — Not in Contract of Phase 2 (completed in Phase 1) 3. Electrical service to building from Duke Energy Transformer — Phase 2 General contractor shall be required to provide extension of two 4 inch existing electrical conduits stub up in to transformer. Two 4 inch conduit required approximate 90 feet from end of existing conduits to building electrical room. Phase 2 General Page 1 1 • • ADDENDUM NO. 2 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR Contractor to provide CT cabinet and required equipment to provide electrical service new recreation center building. 4. Green Electrical Junction box contains two conduits with wiring for speakers of pool deck. Faze 2 General Contractor shall be required to extend 2 inch conduits to electrical building for: a) speaker wire to electrical room sound /PA system of lifeguard office. b) CCTV or Wi -Fi to northern half of property, temporary staff office has a 2 inch conduit from pool electrical panel this conduit shall be converted to low voltage conduit and GC shall provide connection of conduit from electrical room to temporary staff trailer and provide a junction box and connect conduit from city cell tower for future use by Owner. 5. Two 1.5 inch conduits have been stub out from pool chemical control system for data connection to monitor pool chemical feed at lifeguard office. Phase 2 General Contractor shall extend from existing conduits to electrical room data low voltage back to lifeguard office. 6. Conduits for future tennis court lighting is Not in Contract for Phase 2 7. Lighting poles of basketball court has been relocated in Phase 1 and also ran an electrical conduit between poles. Junction boxes are provided at base of pole See additional information response to question 21 for scope of work for basket ball court by Phase 2 General Contractor. 8. Provided by Phase 2 General Contractor: There are 4 – 3 inch conduits for low voltage from electrical room to east utility easement and southeast corner of property of Harn Blvd. 1. 2 – 3 inch conduits to east utility easement for Verizon an Spectrum 2. 2 – 3 inch conduits to southeast property corner of Harn Blvd. for City fiber optic and spare. 3. Conduits shall included heavy duty pull strings 4. Provide traffic rated junction box at end of conduits. 5. Provide traffic rated junction boxes between termination point and electrical room if intermediate junction boxes are required. Question 47 No pipe schedule on c -13 Response: We have checked the plans that were posted and they do indeed contain the pipe schedule on sheet 013 of 19. Question 48 Response: Question 49 Response: A2.1 has several square with letters ( F, J ,S, AV) cannot find meaning Please refer to the Electrical Legend Sheet (E1.0) & the Electrical Drawing Sheets (E2.0 & E2.1) A2.1 in fitness /gym east side square with triangle half shaded cannot find meaning ...same area on sheet A4.3 has PL06 cannot find meaning (north and east wall) Please refer to the Electrical Legend Sheet (E1.0) & the Electrical Drawing Sheets (E2.0 & E2.1) - PL06 is an error in notation as the TV is already tagged. Please disregard. Please refer to A2.1 for all PL— Specific Notes pertaining to plans. Page 12 • Question 50 Response: Question 51 Response: Question 52 Response: Question 53 Response: •Question 55 Response: Question 56 Response: Question 57 Response: Question 59 ADDENDUM NO. 2 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 003.5 -PR On sheet A2.1 note W25 ref. to a wall and on sheet A3 -1 elevation west elevation note AS24 are these same wall accent wall /roof Yes, the notes are referring to the same feature wall. Detail 1 on Sheet A8.6 illustrates a section cut through the wall assembly with the appropriate notes and material callouts. On bidder Proposal form from City of Clearwater in Addendum #1 item #11 does the city want this on all items over $10,000.00 dollars or does the city have a list of what it is willing to buy? No list was shown in Spec book ( Feel this could be hard to compare bids on an equal field) The city is looking for a lump sum of all of a total aggregate of materials $10,000.00 or more i.e. masonry units, sand, mortar, concrete etc... from possibly one or more material vendors. You should be able to obtain this aggregate number from your material vendors of sums $10,000.00 or greater. It is my understanding you wants ODP for the subcontractors also Yes that would be correct Do we attach ODP breakdown with bid proposal No we are only looking for lump sum at during the bidding process. Owner direct purchase $ amount Sales Tax $ amount Total $ amount of ODP & Sales Tax It is our understanding that the city want the cost of a man lift in the contract bid prices? The Owner would like a price for a man lift in the bid item which will accommodate the largest air handler in gym and two men and include safety harness for both men. Architect recommends Genie Scissor Lift GS -2646 (32' working height and 1000 lbs lift capacity) or equal please see attached cut sheet of self — Propelled Scissor Lifts and Genie Website: http: / /www.genielift.com /en /products /scissor -1 ifts /slab- scissor- lifts /gs2646 /index.htm In the past the city did the survey with its own personnel? The General Contractor shall provide all surveying for performance of work on this project. Can you please give additional information on items 15A,15B,15C of addendum #1? 15A — Should the Owner request the General Contractor for additional scope of work requested not included in the contract documents for additional materials what is the percentage of overhead and profit of materials added to the materials from a material supply house. 15B - Should the Owner request the General Contractor for additional scope of work requested not included in the contract documents for work performed by the general contractor or his sub contractor what is the percentage mark up for overhead and profit for additional work performed. 15C — We would like to know the hourly labor rate should the Owner decide to perform additional work based on time & materials including all taxes and fringe benefits provided to the employee by the contractor. On structural drawing S1.1, the eastern side of the south elevation of the fitness room has a section cut called out as 5 on S3.1. This section has a thickened edge slab over Page 13 • Response: Question 60 Response: ADDENDUM NO. 2 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR a CMU stem wall, however this detail does not show CMU above the slab. According to the elevations, window schedule and isometric views, the window sill is at 2' -8" above finish floor. Should this detail be similar to section 1 on S4.1? Please advise. The detail is incorrectly called out as 5/S3.1 and should be similar to 1/S4.1. Should the restroom floors slope to the drains? If so, please provide the proposed sloping and confirm if the sloping is to be achieved with the concrete slab or the resinous urethane flooring? Drawing detail 5 A4.1 depicts slope to drains. Contractor is to provide 2% min positive slope to drains. Contractor may choose to slope slab or recess slab and provide compatible mud set for resinous flooring. Mud set is preferred. Question 61 Drawing A2.4 identifies PWT -2 as an Interceramic product but does not list the style. Please advise. Response: The basis of design for the project is: Interceramic Aquarelle color sky blue 10 "x20" Question 62 Drawing A2.4 identifies the tile grout as Starquartz Epoxy. Please confirm that this should be Quartzlock2 Urethane grout. Starquartz is no longer a product with Bostik. • Response: That is acceptable • End of Addendum No. 2 Page 14 • • C-7 PROPOSED LEGEND Agg - X68 0' SO' BD SCALE IT - 90' NOTE: EXISTING CONDITIONS. AS DEPICTED. WERE PROVIDED TO DEUEL AM ASSOCIATES BY THE CIPY Or CLEARWATER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT JANUARY 2018. THE BENCHMARK THE SURVEY WAS BASED ON IS: D-I3 ELEVATION - 36.6683 NAV° 1988 DATUM "Zw"01.N7rel RECORD DRAWINGS REVISION CITY OF CLEARWATER. FLORIDA PARKS & RECREATION DEPT 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, Fl 33708 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PHASING PLAN PHASE I AND II PJL ."4:on NONE .Oleanxclor • • • C -8 ��(PrsE POOL EEEMEP PLANS YARD ONST. SINGLE PROPOSED rr EL. = 22.7S LEGEND f i qtr. Hunter I -20 2.5 LA nozzles 30 p s i . 27' R adjust to 20' 2.1 gpm e Half Hunter I.20 2.5 LA nozzles 30 pa. 27' R adjust to 20' 2.1 gpm • Full Hunter I -20 2.5 LA nozzles 30 ps.. 27' A adjust N. 20' 2.t gpm Selenaid valve BASKETBALL COURT 0' TO WALL) _. ./ :r�. t ♦ncxv u_L� RECORD DRAWINGS REVISION CITY 00 CLEARWA'1'ER. FLORIDA PARKS & RECREATION DEPT. 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater. 01 33750 Allow Po BOC ,. hedge prow lo l MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SITE PLAN — PHASE I LANDSCAPE /IRRIGATION PLAN .nn B. eg. A P o4i�0„5 2r15- 1000 -s , '1? -a or 19 • • • POOL (SEE MEP PLANS) Awo PROPOSED Fr I.v2•• PROPOSED Pr — ]5 LEGEND 506. TO TO�WAALL�) 5) Qtr. Hunter I -20 2.5 LA nozzles 30 psi, 27. R adjust to 20' 2.1 gpm Hal} Hunter I-20 25 LA nozzles 30 psi, 27. R adjust to 20' 2.1 gpm • Full Hunter I-20 2.5 LA nozzles 30 ps,. 27' R adjust to 20' 2.1 pro F0 Solenoid valve l 0 p P.a.,. a ool neigh ROe RECORD DRAWINGS UNE 0 7/ 2R 0 AL LSELNOO P a.R ;..EP IED MON:ocaEN; ED L REVISION CI'T'Y 07 070200A'I'ER. FLORIDA PARKS & RECREATION DEPT. 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, P7 33756 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SITE PLAN — PHASE I & 11 LANDSCAPE /IRRIGATION PLAN 0-8 • • • LA.1 '12i00i1w nwo1a ear.acr, ILh rope „mscar I 'Gage P(1.11 (3' Lmcrald Goddess Lirinpc a9 Trachelo.spern,um a irtlic,m. Var. Asiatic Jasmine I •e'. Red Ma plc RI SA,Opn- '15 (10 q.N. lal -1`;:,„„„1 CC'' �IVVa egalolO 00o101611 *269 112E.°11' r) a Gor C, . P nn 13' n'30 ed hor(eof iranegitted 33b0gwl ) ri n 'L ove/'ohcn /i !Emerald Goddess I_ diopc �Shm g dZm y IS II Bird of P 1 d•e ai_ T h I IV Asiatic Jasmine I 3- non hgusimm J l lsa 6g t d arho�a V ego e dnco0,u,r f-- o l Pngl.Pdooa 1a 1 pJl Pr ,glcs Pod rpus o. 1S / ms •• IS 11 Bird of P t dise • f ISI I b Nx a rl�d 30i Tr'a h 1 IV A Otieslasmine , Cs st oas solo. d or ,s t o h,IIn Prtngles Por ocarpus sl. 1 i pi ryl Small Bird of Paradise r [Variegated C d- ',, Croon. I o 6 I JIIshOJ a3 1 Y' v gd T h fov `,,V .Asia 1 - arpusmaan9alyIlu.r ingles Podocaapus TREE & PALM REPLACEMENT TREE INCHES REMOVED: 319 TREE INCHES REPLACED: 330 s Llgusm 1 No^ivm 3- lig NOTES A GeneralContracmr shall provide shop drawings of irrigation system for approval by he Owner. BA/ligation 00011 achieve 100/ coverage h I h ad. C. Contractor h II install irrigation system per iga details & specifications pnwided ' h documents. D. Spray h A rotors still only open to ROY. of naval nozzle radius in design of system. L 1 p- p and shrvb heads shall only open to Rta , of actual noddle ad as in design f:y. F.Each Dec 515011 Inc tig.stecl by tsvo Ran 1300 R Watering Systems. Specific podu t Rain Bird RWSBC1404 Root Wowing System with 1.10 GPM f A hubblei -A check valve, J (10] ern1 g sersatile swing snsembly with 0.5 (I5211M N71 inlet Si N PVCSh 01 pipes shall be smuller than a055121er. H. No drip irrigation shall Ns allowed . 1. All disturbed areas Id be dded. .01Trachelos 'Vas 4 la: min r —r !Yetcr,T. Today& Tomorro Shrub 000000 .. OOO.OTO IS 11 Bird of Paradise Igor/so/ „ / 1, ard '11r. 'ken', Q, NOhcr In Law Tony,c' 6 0 .' Brown Beauts Magnolia ns IP l 1 -11110 'D sarll EI,.s P,I,I,c. roes , t'Ror()SI 1)1 k R IGATION 60122129011.1 0 R & kAIS SE. SOI0 1 in controller IConingtor shall provide J fl nrlc e s,u I ll o np breaker 0 vol - .Srcrlihia s •. Small Bird of Pending ". 1 Srerlirzia eve. j 15 P Arne �S 11 Bird of ParadloC • i • 01) • 1 N. T 1. Osvner reserves the right k dl of location of plant onnerial tni site odor to installation of drigution system. RECOR0 ORAWINGS AD01110NAL UNDSCAP 0 PUNTS & SOD a 000 &t ADD ADDITIONAL 130060560 P13NT6 AND SOD CAO REVISION n en's Br a Drack U- Bea 0 -Duty Magnoli EXISTING sr IRRIGATION WELL Capable I 3010111113 ?(lgpm (; 601 General C t hall reestablish power in well as required. Red Maple B, aday & '7' hl \ / ari 'Lave Po l' ddessLrape • m•/ 13is 11 er to ' 1 CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA PARKS & RECREATION DEPT. 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, Fl 33756 Ihhumum naaransso. Swc el vtbum_ K10RNINCSIDE REC CENTER LANDSCAPE F'L.AN • • • ECORD DRAWINGS tD Vihur r mnr imuni Sww v,h u1n 4XISTING SIGN Mn arnlio ondi lora'8 ackcnb Br, on 13 ar 13 Bracken a Brown Beauty Magnolia zradreloe, ermaoraerarraarr Var. Asiatic Jasmine LA.2 l�S,I e,`nworeooa` "ar I,r 61 Sclremern arearieala �V negmeaariwna,la I Arer Rann,� I12� aU ttonwo b"ar-.'"•"' 'Flon'du Fla e Red Mapla r Sehe rn rboncoln �'Gerieg da bnncA10 " ADDTIONAL LANDSCAPE PLANTS SOD L A ICO5.,1., ADO ADDITIONAL LANDSCAPE PLANTS O D IDAeD REVISION o.w CITY OF CLEARWATER. FLORIDA PARKS & RECREATION DEPT. 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, Fl 30756 se Llriap('n,u'%ari O.oma Potion 13' IEfn ld vd'dr<syiisNpe �arInga cd whOncola Lnl /,ircari 'lwia/P , a n 13' 0 ;Emerald Goddess L,ndlro 75IL1 o mu cml'to,e Po n ,n 13 [Emerald I /oddess l.Iriopc IDat Pn gl aP,iduierFUs 13 pr,docnrma marro,hr/ha 'Dwf Pringles 111ow,Pus 1"l Bird oft 53306 [Ste s d�rim. CRNIN S DE REC CEN r=.NDSCAPE PLAN • TREE & PALM REPLACEMENT TREE INCHES REMOVED: 319 TREE INCHES REPLACED: 330 ADDITIONAL LANDSCAPE ss a sOD LIMIT Cncs. 11.1 DLPT ORNINGSIDE RAC ;ENT!_R( LANDSCAPE DETAILS • • TAG LEGEND ELEMENT TAGS VIEW TAGS STOREFRONT SAs sr, SECTION NSW ANNOTATION TAGS SEIN CA om� _J -PE..E SOTS SAS 0 SSOISLEVAIONYKS • GROLOSSO CP- 1 I' © i FLOOR PLAN SPECIFIC NOTES - PLAN sop psspyNG,ppms CLBSISSVOUSSPoSTS MOMS SLPFSSEFLUSHISOODISEEPS COVES PLATE J. • GENERAL NOTES WALL TYPES SCHEDULE J.EEn.. 6.J6«666,6 .E,y. 12,msx,EVwro.. SWISS .w . sr Su,<..a_,._v4E .c <ua,vc�r�E <rsuiEV o�nexr - -. „Fi.� -inru. ,,. i G Cw,, ,<,� „�E a «F S12,SC CPS SEE, 01.f. 71, PaL.FLLO ISIMSEP SUP r. 111 'ICS SAXER Se H., SESSAISSSFY LAS LOCK., ROOS ACCESSLASS,P IFS 4IPSCS SASS s: IA 1.11SPOSS,,B,S Se sSCS9.0.4170 SSESS SP sy"no sa, SHINER PECESSESSSESSESS 7, .70k LSO, YPOSIOS SCO AI ISSC.04 441-1. PPS LOSSIPASSOF SOISSASSOP OSSISSCIOS FLOOR PLAN A2.1 • MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN BO °PATIN, CON MA, GGLE LIP," PAAS PEPS AND LEE A DEVIATION CI OG CON,NPLI, PIPING ALL MECHANICAL LEGEND S a 16- 0035 -PR M 1.0 • jr5.50 [jai, r JO T.11777' j-j-a, LINEAR, I • 14" —9- • J, Larrl, ata r •Ij•JI arl;:!1.•Cra'r:JJ„L.'21 Sri 1 fa -fa-a-r. —tar ;JJaaraZ. • 'I • I 4. I . , I - r I , , = - ;-.1 12, atl - • • I NO , 5 j- - MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN - PARTIAL .jf • Momingside Recreation Complex - Multipurpose Room, 3924 so ft, 300 0cc v.° HI 111111NIMINEINIEIMINENIMINI MECHANICAL LEGEND Morningside Recreation Complex 16-0035-PR IvIECMAIP /CAL PLAN PARTIAL M 2.0 1, - • • 14DREC,II 7,`,n1Z • \ ,6Rox Fo6 'LEXCGINECIO. T S./..70,,S, APPVCIIIUSCR TYPICAL AHU AT GYM DUCT DETAIL MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN - GYMNASIUM • IMIE11111111111111111 Morningslcle Recreation Complex - Gym, 9617 57 ft, 125 OCR a;6761;i111164141F6NATi611WHW:41:,11-13161A1iiiiita - 'estuv•Rws7 NerryVat 1111/11111/11•1111111•1 u., 1C 111721- • MECHANICAL LEGEND 16-0035-PR ,STRTC11,77, MECHANICAL PLAN • GYMNASIUM M 2 . 1 • YANMAR GAS FIRED REFRIGERATIO 2061.* G 43 I s , ELE,PC 5 DISCON,O, .7A B f071:3■',1"" LHOvIDE NON X.I.TERS,C7VPLETIONCY LC.ISTROCIION '''IMLOtT;11.0C.F 1.04.17 1 0, OF P.,'S Fon Ar.ly ifi ION GENERATORS : ELECTRODE EJAPS • AIR HANDLER UNIT SCHEDULE SUPPLY OUTSIDE MARK AFRO MODEL AIR 6 ,ININ 2,313,4 Mi1.1147.4,1 ,AKIN F.010361.1,1, 01.C,Annal 4,2 - hi1L, Mil, 1 .<4 :3.1 7,51 CP1.4 2,.YIClm TOTAL CAPACITY I ESP CAPACITY II—COOLING 1 HEATING 1 TO C FILTER TYPE r , ==mary 71,10,,,py I., 8 TCN .V13, ,5mBli 03 0 7CN ,.6,181■ (17. INROWA,r; COI L 5,MPH ! 0.3 ELECTRICAL DATA MPH/HZ) MCA MFA WE OAT GTP AS 205 3, AS • NOT ES I 'e A'"■VP 3,ATE° COZC'S VAY71'17'4RW;Wr I P'‘n.,_4'f''N'IrPgEr 3 750 INCL_HDED, , INTEGRAL I PLASMA AIR SAFI 01 X °L"'"'"'" 6,;;ED SE-WEFN CONTROL PANFI IDE OF THE COOLING COIL Zni-;NPL40 667 1.157ING ANy 07,4FR STANDA ,ONIZE SHALL EIF r,,0.24v ,ON C.NE.TORS SHALL mAir RF ION SENSOR S„ALL B,PRCP/I.6 D In! DOE, NO' CON,AIN ORV CONT.,, A •SE cAl.I.1 FES, 51-■A 5.SCrl FDL !iv AIR DISTRIBUTION SCI-IEDULE ,,lil< 1,,,,,ACTI_PE7 1.7,174 MATERIAL NOTES IM,E C.., 3...„ 1 11., .■.,141,1,5A I .1 4 5 7 STE,L 1 2 3 5, , 02 ,IR, 5 E.,1,1,EGIS-ER SUP,CE mi., -1, ... ,2 7,5 ,,,I, 1 S,,,,IL.V.ILL SIL.■ ...FILTER 4,A1114,h, 1 2 3 4 5 7 9 ALAIN, 3,9 .4.1MINIAI , 7 C" ,,,N7 r4,10,..11F,RETIIIRNGFILLE '01 CO,,,,SE.,4,77,1KG, 5 CP, 'JO CI, AIR HANDLER (WALUCEILIN HUNG) SCHED LE SUPPLY OUTSIDE TOTAL CAPACITY ES P ELECTRICAL DATA MARK MFRG I MODEL AIR 1 AIR CAPACITY COOLING HEATING WC FILTER TYPE (WPHR1Z) .41,I ELWIN 30.,.■ I5 7. , 18 n. 2 A., - RES,,,,,,,,-IM f 22P01.7, DAMN 10,7,1 1570,1, I DAWN ro, 24 nel 5NCH 3:9,10 D.N11.1 ,X4024,..1 400 CPA OCR. 21,0:4 . 24.1 16.5 VGA 0..04 .10DCFM RE. s,x MCA MEG EYE APT NOTES ,Anro amp L.RS I 7 I i5 15 Am, 4.7fInZAMITATL;TEg47■7U.L71=XCLIO'ng'SLSAND ALL CARAOrrIES AT COOTIPIS .4L 0.17510E MOIDRIZED vOL,EPAV.ERSNTERLOCKED WI, OPERA-NCH 0= UnI7S PCRYL4 COvECTKr, Vngg:.070'4TAZIEZ4g3fErGRZI)=-E,=70,T77;YI■jiMZ.ST,L7 XOTAr7nri ELOIP,EXT SY,Int WI71.7,EAI.RXMOLEROC.SIONAT YrI,D , NS! kL_PPLIERS14.7 PRID,05,171 LP VOmovroe YEW C.F FILTF.A7CCI.,,Ig40,-.5.7.7L/CTIONPRI0,07CS7 ,DB4,14, A\ FAN SCHEDULE ,ANIJGACTU,EF, ,ODEL SP 470 ,114.1.1 asp 0 I Err CRNAL STATIC ,n,ssuR, ■ap FAN 7,F CEN7,x, Cts1+,-(0, .,14, FAN 8.P,F CONTPOLS, I 'V WI q0NE'S ••■• .0 1 w[10-11 LB; NOTES 2 J NOTES i0.11).E.,C7C,MO.INTED,,,Dr.rvECT .07.11E v,,,,..C.0,11.4 .51-1,C,Cril,rx OUTSIDE AIR CALCULATION SCHEDULE '"V,"° occ,'A.cv RT,g=7 FE01=1.1ENTS 303,0, SOC■ MANS, 0 06 CPUR,11 II; 174,. 12,0,1 50 Cfh.11.1,50, 0 06. °Map II IN 1 iC. ...O. . 1,, 10 KOPLE SOCFMKRSOS 0 06 CI, gy it . .5P P.F.P.I,O0v 1 240 6 "EC,i : 5,CrItPERStr. 0 06.0FM, it . 0 >H., ! 0,,PFR,,Dri 0 OG CFM, It II STCRAC,,,B0v7K, 51 C.,.., ' 0 C•E7S,, P IX Crivi.sr, li 1 42 ,0 NOTES Lix,,,,m1);,SCESSORIES .1.1lr AL,PC, BUILDING AIR BALANCE (GYMNASIUM, LIFEGUARD, STORAGE) BUILDING AIR BALANCE (FITNESS) norSTIE Ain Ir. ro y BUILDING AIR BALANCE (MULTI-PURPOSE, OFFICE, LOBBY, RESTROOMS) CLITS.OE AIR in. I = ■■■Al, H ,,/ E ,EL EE. Hai MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M4.0 • EON:EN., r 'git:r?:Ir'r=sr" ' "'s'c'c'rri±2N■Lr'rr+1' ; r,ser rrTrc, GSCH VILE JTIT OTT N FIG5 _ L.c0NEITIEWI Z1Z-Ti7Hl'IL= HP SUS G LAE. TN.& 5N1T PAN .1. BE VET Fzns-,L7=r"- 0 FRDWEr, NWT. ar A.GFACTUPER HORIZONTAL AIR HANDLING UNIT DETAIL SCALE NONE .ELExiaLL DS, HATOE.STRAPS 1 . 22 CADGE ROT. SNARL., W EET 1 INEET METAT DUG-I-S.A. RE FABRICATED & INSTALLED PER THE LATENT EP:EGON, TurrnA STEPORTED FRON STRUCTURE ADTWE ITIETAL FOR RUN OHTS AND TNE EIORIDA ENEROVCO0C SECTION .10, WI. THE Fa.. NG CRITERIA .5. OT • FOOT / MAXIMUM 2 FEET . Si IELT NE-AL SCREWS OFLOW GREATER THAN, WITH 25 WRAE NSLITA/ ION . DUCT SECTIONS 2,,,,I... GUI. MATER. GANGERS EELNE49,... APPROVED EDUAL IS wRAP INSULATION OVER / 2 5C NONE 0 1, A GA Tv, i AP emir., urn TrARLE W 20 Jr GA READED 2 OS G IS NONE 19 30' ...NEI. a TART TOR WPOR SEAL 7 , l ' I.' 01"P S'P YTT ST rA (I'S 31 54 =GA BEADED 6 OS 21 ..STANDINT1 1. G , Fa ETASD,NO 2 s 20 GA 59 Er . GA CROSS T. 0. 0 IS .0. V ANDrNG 2 I sa - STANDING TV, A 2C GA . / AND KITES IT El EX _.F. I , lillEAR 2 ALTERNATE INTERPRETATIONS OP SM... Du, mATTRarr HANGERS AND REGFORCENENTs ARE ' suBrECT TO ENO NEER APPROVAL AND REOBIRE SEPARATE STAMM,. OF 'HE M.. 1 es I T l-I ' 'r 2 .."..' .2 FLEXIBLE TEXT OONNECYORS Sr. 1 GE PROyin. Ar CONNECTIONS TO ALL POL, TIENT , I SIZES SHOe. X , , I TA. AND mANT IT .1 ,...,, ,_ x ,...r, - , SIF,T,E4=rA,I,:,,,,,,, 4 SURE& V AIR ORO. PROM ROOROP UNITS SHAlL TRANSITION FROM THE 55411. OPENING SIZE To I A'AIIVA' I ■ ' %;73,-'Ll"r SODA. NECK ELBOWS WITH SEES. SHOWN ON -THE PLAN 1E NG, SuPPLY AiR Ducr RuNs ARE AT THE UNIT THEN IWO SEPARATE wors .0 El ROWS SITATI DE PROYIDED L...3 'T - - 'tETY: /T5, /G rs.. L'rjJ.■:■E'e-E , , .5 RETURN 4R ENDRE FROM THE ROOFTOP UNGS ST. RE RAI S. OF THE urra oPErENG E ELBOWS., SE SOLIARL.C. IS.. IN 051 WmENSION rm. 2. sCHRLL THics.ss ,I5,5T,Uxl-F.L.NisssAyri A, ,1.1.00.0.-ri r H - T. G'''GIT,, GoEn,...-lEl . Er....K.... llY 5 l'r., '''''''' F OTErTS'S'ANA'LFI'NOT RE0r1OE -EFIE FREE AREA AND SHALL NOT EXCEEE IC DEGREES A RAORTS MEL SNAG_ . rnovIDEn ON 20 DEGREE OFFSETS sm,,n OFES5 IS MAY lrE TOILN. A r Torii T NOD ANNESWE . 1.17CIA r r1 X G . - . . Foa OTC. Hn AND valcEn THE HEEL ANG THROAT 8 TRANSITIONS SHA1 J NOT EXCEED I 3 ENVIO ur TRATSITION .12 POOT sINGL E S DEN / 24. Tn. v&RTICAL DUCT PUN 1- maNsmoN AND.. PER FOOT Derly.E. SOLO -RANTGIoN, 9 ING.E.AnoN SHALL BE,. 90 APEROVE0 ITI. TH WRAP INSULATION SHAL, SPIN IN FITTING \ TrG ---7—' 5,-- PE 2. TRIG. WIT-I &TWAIN... FOIL EALINN UNFIT SHALT BE 1 1 2 'NNW 5 a R VA I, WIIII SLOOP AND cOvArr,WIAnc,xEcFyr,T.NIN,,,,, .,. TuRAP 1NSuLAWON ARO. TT.. OFIGNO WEISER SET l'■ 2,7Z,t47.,=g-;g2LTZTL°:r4,,n',.-,,,Z7-7,7,7gt;g:4°!:,',°=.,7fr'' TTIF CEILINS DIFELISERS - THROW AS SHOWN ON Elm. ETTINGS WITH .0 DEGREE SCOOP DAMP. AND HANG. SPRAY PAINT LOW-IONS OF HANDLES [WAREN IT NECK .. 12 .EXIBLE DUCT STIAL1 INCLUDE AN INNEI POLYETTEILENE LITER A Sl RING FEL!. 1 c ...REIN...NON A FOIL OUTER .POR R... AND PP W IS. APPROVED 13 ALL TAPE SHALL BF TASSON 0910 INO SUBSTITUTIONS, STIAENA APPROyED la COMPI ETELY SEAL ALL SUPPLY RETURN ANDOUTSIDE AIR DI-STS wilk !FAS HO TYPICAL SHEETMETAL DUCT DETAIL SCALE NONE TYPICAL DUCT DETAIL SCALE NONE DD.., Y5,1 INSITATED E., IVO INNER L.. .,SIGLX SLASITEICHSTRTSTIGN TETATIG.05 EDLIAL FLUE DETAIL SCALE NONE ■-,:(6.6.,-,..(E6Lr., (71j"--4-1 _J1 1505BLE ..Y. nanrED TGIDEL Dr BESET.. NETT_BESr. RAT/CLL. Tux i o I T 7 , • I - 0 , , 0. L , , , ST = " ^1L I , - 1 'I A , ,p •+1 1 A , , , , , FLUE DETAIL SCALE NONE L :TI.'grE TZ.IT -- RETE.ELRANT [INST.-L[0r , I - ,G,OTL,GFETC FA, 70 EACH FASSEERCER. NG!. 1...ESC rwTEL,I10 S_ALL,TEATILEIT IGX T COT EISA. STITT..5_5. UNDERGROUND REFRIGERANT LINE DETAIL SCALE NONE HORIZONTAL AIR HANDLING UNIT DETAIL AT GYM( SCALE NONE 4,1 , snr 140EL TY I WE I TOP VIEW t NIT MOONFING BOLT POLE Fs .10 1 V ND BOLT ITII2V20, UT X 2 0..3.33FI x 2 & NOTES GESION SEISMIC INTENsErY &ORIG.,. 2 0, VERGICAI FOUNOAWON BOLTS N112 WIT1 ALLOWABLE PUIVOUT LOAD OF 5 cn row* VBRATIGN ABSORBER - WOGATION PROOF STOPPER SCM COIL SPRING SW-C G css,m16,01,1P....12F0 IBT ACK FL FETROREPOSITION COATING, ,/ Vall'rjEjfITEVI =TM' C SING ELASTONER HORIZONTAL, 20 vEralcAL 1G --- 50 POUND/GS°, BOLT NOTE HI 1 1 IL, AND BRACKET SS■00 NOT DIP GA,ANIZING DOLT WASHER I TONGS, M12, T FRONT VIEW YANMAR CHILLER MOUNT DETAIL (FROM YANMAR MANUFACTURER( SCALE NONE Morningside Recreation Complex 16-0035-PR DS, PL.,110,. MUSICS& DATE ALIECILANICAt DETAILS M5.0 • /.! N .0 e2,22Ell USB CUBBY DETAIL • 1 - N 1 / v >0� " , LEVEL 1 -POWER PLAN FITNESS201.4 L.28 Morningside Recreation Complex M -J W Cu U v m > o d O m C Z o a` o N 16- 0035 -PR DisrR,BOTiom POWER PLAN E2.0 • • ELECTRICAL HVAC & FIRE ALARM PLAN El EC HVA, HVAC EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE J W N C. jp E E 0 U y o .7 d A u y LO O m E CM C_ _ 2 E O 0 o a 2 N 16- 0035 -PR D,STRIBUTION xl,srONE 1:11.7f ELECTRICAL LIVAC AND FIRE ALARM PLAN E2.3 • EXILNIOR P001 a.,IPMENT rE,CE AREA 'DZIM Is s s 's s F FIRE ALARM SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM NONE Fl EC P1,1 Z,T,SMA. ° SPRINKLER PIPE POWER RISER DIAGRAM NONF r Au, SiDDY .-RCVEC- rIrLITY C.0..IPANY AG: [95.1.1 CO,A,/ X9 RA-N0 PANEL , r ANFI PANE L , r , J...11-1E Y, AL 51,1r1 „fl ,1,17 51,0 1„ OA, ,I,16 51B10 11, ri TP,A1 corrrnAcFon C,ONFIR, ITV FAJLI-C,REN-r PRIOR 10 0111.10u,i GEFr, IF UTILITY rC71"WAYOgr1"5%.1'(14M.17==ECE=OrTICF'O'Urr;;;:= ,11-1ARIF A, RATIN, ,JECLRATMSEP,ESEmpu„s c.1,1,IT ,RFAKER, IS DRTAIN PATIN, ,CP 1, AILED NOTES L.IGHTNING PRO„CT■ON co,,,,,cron F.., rn,InF ALI LAB,P AND VA-7E,IAL F,H Al.■(:!:?,, t:0,1,4PLE7 • COPPFP uni PPEVENTOR L PRFV,MR OF AinEPICe. A.L_ tPlAl HETMJCS MAVI,FACI-UPERS OH L,,■■■NINS rnFvF,r, S',-,AS ALL IN, ,I,F■API., Fly , I A,FIA-rr, FS km+ ;TA A-r ON CrANDAPD n.01E, SH.1 ,37,;12.vt mom,. mOuNI-ED ^IE-r C.,30,1NAIE 1,127,11(i.„1,;.r ■3■1,4111-11,11 S-R A,D 91,1SHIK, FOR L2-11LI, r■FI-Fmter. 3u,f, DevIC.F PER n, ,,POL NNW:ELECTRODE M CONS!, ,,, N 13,13 INF ktr, Ar.r, EXTENr, JNSTIOKFr. Trrrw0 2, d I FE GROLA01.10,, ,APES1- e,LoNc, COLD OVAIER PIPE ANO SPRINKLER MS AC:C.PDAN, 1. no, 7E PC SHAI.1 PROvIDE A DIrnENsioNED FUAN LAYS, OF SJB,11-1- TED 6LAH 01, • FLECI-R1,,ROOKIAL.AIING,,Pi LAN, 1,51-4,NC. PAnAN(..., rA*4N78AVWPTLTA'■11)P.IS'OrCVAHAtZ rO'Z'atTL'Orn.;31/7.-.7SXZt 6 S,B.1EC-I 10 ENG,. APPRO._ PR■UR TO'RELEASL Or (;:, Co en —J if> t 13. E 0 Uo Cu CC Cu 5 (-) Cd = ■15 E 16-0035-PR DISTRIBUTIO, ..LESTONF Flf MICAL E4.0 reation Cente.Reril 2016.4089 8619.9, 5,1122012 7.8 03 6.4. Marlene 16048. • • • 336,6ER i 50513 I 336,6E3 5 .6 -35n5 115,05E 05- 355. CODE C31- 053.CRA, 1-66,2 5551.5 3,553' 3,63 CO, 537 TRF• 55,1,5 r 165, I 001-J C37 5565 re, r 5 5.55.-: 535 5, 315. 0-5 - 1 15, 55 I 5 • 120 0 7 7 5,355,135.0R653v.55 , X , C - Se • 120 5 7 5 83 5 la 3 t 5 '25 : :70 13 5155515,CTR 5.3E6,3E6, 560 55 AC.,533,35 X ' 12.3 6 5 5 0 6353.53 35C1. 3433 1,3 : 4 5 751 , 3 708 C e 7 1, C .1 5 15 ,3,1 • 553 C c .5 56 3 5.5•35(3 25 • ■27 3355.31,1551,33.1 25 3 C 4 5 1 717573'51577 - '1! „, „ 156 r- RE5651•35,5 55, ! 5. 5 9 5 61R5.5533 1DER ,R556. 1 5 "0 3 230 X 1 153 :1 5 AVRACK4ECEPT nw 116 2C t-120. C 7 5 0"15, " 5 . • " ,„ 545,5RE.50 sR63, 35, ,r 1 1,c 5 01 35,5 55361555 . 156 " 55 6-56551, , R,615-33535 25 I 1, C2 5 24 B.COSTER 35 1 56 0,505 0C 1 : 133 55 7 5 135 1 75 counoTERPECEP,C.ES 2,C c a 5 : 1513355,n 1.52,51111 125, 5 53366 c.61,5.6. 55 56 1 1,3 6 5 5 25 ,65,6‘55 .,156365 35• 1'5 X 157 0 , 2- a 1SCE 355.5.35,53 ' 11 5 5 : 53555 553, 85,5■56 25 • 11 GA-35513,55,55, 5.1,5cF 1 '53 75 7 5.353315, 35 RAI 115 . In 5 5 54 3-33.5.551630 MAI, 123 " 5 55 3516 555335 5.5 5: 55 • ,3 ,,,, , 031153,C7161.5 00551551513 51 : C 53 13R555.5333503•3015314 . 1 1, 5 : 5 656,RCI341R33333,165 26 : 1 1, 1 5 30 55 25 55 , 055,355 COI 35 0,75 .55 • • • • ••• ..••.•.• 575 5.5,3153,31■tRCCUI=T5r" "'M" 5375 15•53 734, .5 VC35,. CC,OE 103636,3336 KEEPER RP31, , '25 3166.3036 1553333 351 , , 2 533 IC 3 aa Nu, 05,5 53366 .7 • 51' 2' I • 5' MEM 56536 53,51.5 ,23 F.R5.5,n5 • BR3p3515 • FORA, Brte0:55,3,L3,335.55nR1- PART OF P.3.15-.135 06563M-03 }- BRE 65.4 I BRE 35R TIRP 3056 3063 1.53.5 7,77„7„77.,7.77, " 4 7.752°3:LL 33563,53516533. ! 25 • 160 0 r 5 737(73:=17 p 13,5576333, „ • 0,1 7 1, 7„7 ■3133,333651„331,53 „ „O 0 5 15 ,PARF : ' 25 OR,R RM 1, ,B.5,6,ER,,35553 3 , 22 moroR6,666262Dem.c2 22 1 626 22 2 26 626,26,6662666,-v2c.266 -227 5 365355.553ES '626' L6:55'•'..CU•=5D3SC■30.6 6 1651-35165,05.FTAEM,53■ECES, 0 305E5 ROOM 50,3 :72 _ 6666,w2 FACTOR 25 NEC 227 43 7crajo=juu Lo.aus 1.36.6 NON 0,5635•01,15,33 N74' 3=7•513 "" 77 5'5'5 11; Job Number 10. I Ett!' atnutg Morningside Recreation Complex 3 c o 0- 535361,6., 16-0035-PR DISTRIBUTION imEsTORE osTe 6. 36.15553 rg65'31,5i ELECTRICAL PANELS E4.1 • • • oro I :ea 30133 0/111 RESTROOM EXHAUST FAN CONTROL DIAGRAM SCALE. NONE f; g I, TOTAL 3E3,, LOA V33.11,E 131 13 Ann, T srsrw swu eE nN rvrEO�P *EO sysrEU Pan T� acor�x:. onNG Eu SMALL MELLRNi L:i CWmaS. SttEACV LLNri t SLPPEa, EATON, eDrPSnOK� EWPL 'mrH iaA]6CREFry fF10 NrEfFPLE P"NRS PMTOCELL t swiio� f.TS. ZoTOL rr CO Z . RESET smcs • Piv "HTEca !]O+� .a.Ts RECESSED FIXTURE SUPPORT DETAIL SCALE. NONE 16- 0035.PR OkSTOBONCO WLEVONE UFO RRICA PoES No DIAGRAMS LIGHTING E4.2 • ENLARGED CABANA DETAIL ti‘ rAiegot ?o,o, srAnr c t.`rzr o tr 9,00- .11.1P11. /1> . CAM1N,e4 <?- ,etv.Ak:cc-99.9 phttytez, Tote.; 0. crcs3„sJ 3,6 • PARKING LOT ROUND TAPERED STEEL POLE DETAIL ,cr r .KAIL In —J I AN O`oro!,f m ,1111, :4Y E pIt N. cf., ES ...Am Ar4 „ , C cm 0. 4. <N, 16-0035-PR 1(0. 4 rnr,.0.,;r... :44...t■ .91144, or. ,50v-ter-elt 15 , .+y ,-:ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN „_. — Csoch, Vs ' \‘. DISIR18,17104 ELECTRICAL 5171- NAN ES1.0 MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full -size Sample in 12- inch -long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper -faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia- Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - Page 1 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170515 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple- Inland. 8. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Abuse - Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Gypsum board wall assembly panels from floor to eight feet above finish floor in all rooms where gypsum board occurs. See Drawings. 2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer. b. Georgia- Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer. 2. Core: 1/2 inch. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. b. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum- coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper -faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC -Bead: J- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L -Bead: L- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U -Bead: J- shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint. f. Curved -Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - Page 2 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170515 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063 -T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion - resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting -type taping compound. a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Laminating adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire - Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly. E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Pecora Corporation. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - Page 3 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170515 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical joint sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07210 "Building Insulation." G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07210 "Building Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install panels with face side out. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back - blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor /roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8- inch -wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load- bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2- inch -wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide - dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - Page 4 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170515 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX J. STC -Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound - flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces with the exception of those surfaces where abuse - resistant type is specified. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. B. Single -Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall /partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions /walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire - resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire - resistance -rated assembly. 3. On Z- furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4 -inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile. C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. Curved -Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - Page 5 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170515 • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. E. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3: Panels that are substrate for wall covering (vinyl). 4. Level 5: At all panel surfaces exposed to view. E. Glass -Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non - drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - Page 6 of 6 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170515 • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX SECTION 099623 — GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of Graffiti Resistant Coating on the following substrates: 1. Interior Substrates: a. Concrete, vertical surfaces. b. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). c. Toilet Partitions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099113 "Painting" for general field painting. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: Cross - reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material applied. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each coating system. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. • GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 099623 - Page 1 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170515 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well - ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained between 45 and 100 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are between 40 and 90 deg F. B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each coating system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. Products shall be of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If coating materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible. 2.3 PRODUCTS A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Blok -Guard & Graffiti Control" manufactured by PROSOCO or a comparable product subject to approval by the Architect and the Owner. 1. Apply this product, per manufacturer's instructions, on all interior exposed concrete masonry wall surfaces continuous from finish floor up to 8 feet above finish floor. GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 099623 - Page 2 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170515 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing application, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface - applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and encapsulants. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content, alkalinity of surfaces, or alkalinity of mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. B. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations. GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 099623 - Page 3 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170515 • • • MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. END OF SECTION 099623 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 099623 - Page 4 of 4 PROJECT NUMBER: 1525 VERSION: 170515 • • • A TEREX BRAND Self- Propelled Scissor Lifts GS '-2646 AV 1—n www.genielift.com Measurements Working height maximum* Platform height maximum ** Platform height stowed A Platform length - outside extended US 32 ft 6 in 26 ft 6 in 4ft1in 7ft8in 12ft8in Extension deck 5 ft Platform width - outside 3 ft 9.3 in Guardrail height 3 ft 7 in Toeboard height 6 in Height - stowed 7 ft 11 in Length - stowed 8 ft 8 in extended 13 ft 8 in AWidth- with protective padding 4 ft 9 in "A Wheelbase 6 ft 1 in Ground clearance - center 3.76 in A - with pothole guards deployed 0.75 in Metric 9.91 m 7.92 m 1.24 m 2.34 m 3.86 m 1.52 m 1.15 m 1.09 m 0.15 m 2.41 m 2.64 m 4.16 m 1.45 m 1.85 m 95 mm 0.02 m Productivity Maximum platform occupancy 3 3 Lift capacity 900 Ibs 408 kg Lift capacity - extension deck 300 Ibs 136 kg Drive speed - stowed 2.2 mph 3.5 km /h Drive speed - raised 0.5 mph 0.8 km /h Gradeability - stowed 25% Turning radius - inside zero zero Turning radius - outside 7 ft 6 in 2.29 m Raise / lower speed 30 / 38 sec 30 / 38 sec Controls 2 speed Drive dual front wheel Multiple disc brakes dual rear wheel Tires - solid non - marking 15 x 5 x 11 in 38 x 13 x 28 cm Power Power source 24 V DC (four 6 V 225 Ah batteries) Hydraulic system capacity Weight * ** ANSI /CSA 4.5 gal 17 L 5,225 Ibs 2,370 kg Standards Compliance ANSI A92.6, CSA B354.2, The metric equivalent of working height adds 2 m to platform height. U.S. adds 6 ft to platform height. " Maximum clearance with extention deck deployed is 25 ft 9 in. "' Weight will vary depending on options and /or country standards. • • A TEREX BRAND Features Measurements GS -2646 AV • 32 if 6 in (9.91 m) working height • Up to 900 Ibs (408 kg) lift capacity Productivity • 92 x 45.3 in (2.30 x 1.15 m) steel platform • 60 in (1.52 m) powered extension deck • AC power to platform • Full height swing gate • Dual front wheel drive • Front gate • Gate and extension deck limit switches • Universal 20 amp smart charger • Rear recessed charger receptacle • Padded aircraft protection rail (PAR) • SmartLink'" - proportional lift and drive • Platform control with battery charge indicator and diagnostic display • Tread -grip deck • On -board diagnostic system • 28 mph (45 km /h) wind rating • Lanyard attachment points • Manual platform lowering valve • Emergency stop at both platform and ground controls • Rear wheel multiple disc brakes • Front wheel hydraulic dynamic braking • Brake release • Swing -out component trays • Solid non- marking tires • Pothole guards • Tilt level sensor with audible alarm • Descent alarm • Electronic horn • Skydrol resistant paint Self- Propelled Scissor Lifts GS°-2646 AV Power • 24 V DC (four 6 V 225 Ah batteries) Genie United States 18340 NE 76th Street P.O. Box 97030 Redmond, Washington 98073 -9730 Telephone +1 (425) 881 -1800 Toll Free in USA/Canada +1 (800)- 536 -1800 Fax +1 (425) 883 -3475 Productivity Options • Air line to platform • Dual flashing beacons • Motion alarm • Keyless switch • Remote charging (no on -board charger) • 35 mph (56 km /h) wind rating Power Options • EE rating • Power inverter (120 V / 60 Hz) • AGM maintenance -free batteries Distributed By: III tor nstructions on the proper se of this equipment. Failure to follow the pP P 1 Operator's Manual when using our equIpment or to otherwise act irresponsibly may result n se s y death. The only warranty applicable to equipment is the written warranty appl cable to the p rt 1 product tl ale and Inc make other warranty, express or implied. Products and services listed may be trademarks, e ry c marks arks o trade names of Terex Corporation and/or their subsidiaries rn the USA and many other countries. Genie s a registered trademark of Terex South Dakota, Inc. © 2015 Terex Corporation. G52646AV 0210H. Part No. 127285 www.genielift.com • • A TEREX BRAND Self- Propelled Scissor Lifts GS'"-2046, GS -2646 & GS -3246 Measurements Working height maximum* Platform height maximum A Platform height stowed Platform length - outside extended Slide -out platform extension deck A Platform width - outside Guardrail height Toeboard height Height - stowed: folding guardrails rails folded A Length - stowed extended A Width ,Wheelbase A Ground clearance - center - with pothole guards deployed Productivity Maximum platform occupancy "* Lift capacity Lift capacity - extension deck Drive height Drive speed - stowed Drive speed - raised Gradeability - stowed Turning radius - inside Turning radius - outside Raise / lower speed Controls Drive Multiple disc brakes Tires - solid non - marking Power Power source Hydraulic system capacity Weight " * ** ANSI /CSA CE/AUS Standards Compliance 4 ■ www.genielift.com US 26 ft 20 ft 3ft 4.8 in 7 ft 5 in 10ft 5in 3ft 3 ft 9.5 in 6 in 7ft 5ft 1 in 8ft 10 ft 10.5 in 3ft 10in 6ft1 in 3.76 in 0.75 in Metric 7.9 m 6.10 m 1.04 m 2.26 m 3.18 m 0.91 m 1.16 m 0.15 m 2.13 m 1.55 m 2.44 m 3.31 m 1.16 m 1.85 m 95 mm 0.019 m 4 4 1,200 Ibs 544 kg 250 Ibs 113 kg full height 2.2 mph 3.5 km /h 0.5 mph 0.8 km /h *.. 30% zero zero 7ft6in 2.29m 30/30 sec 30/30 sec proportional dual front wheel dual rear wheel 15x5in 38x13 cm 24 V DC (four 6 V 225 Ah batteries) 4.5 gal 17 L 3,977 Ibs 1,804 kg 4,351 Ibs 1,974 kg US 32 ft 26 ft 3 ft 9.6 in 7ft 5in 10ft 5in 3ft 3 ft 9.5 in 3ft 7in 6 in 7ft5in 5ft6in 8ft 10ft10.5in 3 ft 10 in 6ft 1 in 3.76 in 0.75 in 3 1,000 Ibs 250 lbs full height 2.2 mph 0.5 mph zero 7ft6in 30/30 sec proportional dual front wheel dual rear wheel 15 x 5 in Metric 9.8 m 7.92 m 1.16 m 2.26 m 3.18 m 0.91 m 1.16 m 1.09 m 0.15 m 2.26 m 1.68 m 2.44 m 3.31 m 1.16 m 1.85 m 95 mm 0.019 m US 3811 32 ft 4 ft 2.75 in 7ft5in 10ft5in 3ft 3 ft 9.5 in 3 ft 7 in 6 in 7ft 10in 5ft11in 8ft 10ft 10.5in 3ft 10in 6ft 1in 3.76 in 0.75 in Metric 11.6 m 9.75 m 1.29 m 2.26 m 3.18 m 0.91 m 1.16 m 1.09 m 0.15 m 2.39 m 1.80 m 2.44 m 3.31 m 1.16 m 1.85 m 95 mm 0.019 m 3 2 2 454 kg 700 Ibs 318 kg 113 kg 250 Ibs 113 kg full height 3.5 km /h 2.2 mph 3.5 km /h 0.8 km /h 0.5 mph 0.8 km /h 30% 25% zero zero zero 2.29m 7ft6in 2.29m 30 / 30 sec 57 / 30 sec 57 / 30 sec proportional dual front wheel dual rear wheel 38x13 cm 15x5in 38x13 cm 24 V (four 6 V 225 Ah batteries) 24 V (four 6 V 225 Ah batteries) 4.5 gal 17 L 4,312 lbs 1,956 kg 5,395 Ibs 2,447 kg ANSI A92.6, CSA B354.2, CE Compliance, AS 1418.10 4.5 gal, 17 L 5,211 Ibs 2,364 kg 6,200 Ibs 2,812 kg ' The metric equivalent of working height adds 2 m to platform height. U.S. adds 6 if to platform height. CE/AUS markets: Two person maximum occupancy on all models. GS -3246 outdoor maximum occupancy is one person. Gradeability applies to driving on slopes. See operator's manual for details regarding slope ratings. "" Weight will vary depending on options and /or country standards. • A TEREX BRAND Self- Propelled Scissor Lifts GSr" -2046, GS -2646 & GS -3246 Features Measurements GS -2046 • 26 ft (8.10 m) working height • Up to 1,200 Ibs (545 kg) lift capacity GS -2646 • 32 ft (9.92 m) working height • Up to 1,000 Ibs (454 kg) lift capacity GS -3246 • 38 ft (11.75 m) working height • Up to 700 Ibs (318 kg) lift capacity Productivity • 89 x 45.3 in (2.26 x 1.15 m) steel platform • 36 in (.91 m) extension deck • Folding rails with full height swing gate • Drive at full height • Dual front wheel drive • Universal 20 amp smart charger • Rear recessed charger receptacle • SmartLink" - proportional lift and drive • Platform control with battery charge indicator and diagnostic display • On -board diagnostic system • AC power to platform • Lanyard attachment points • Manual platform lowering valve • Emergency stop at both platform and ground controls • Rear wheel multiple disc brakes • Front wheel hydraulic dynamic braking • Brake release • Swing -out component trays • Solid non - marking tires • Pothole guards • Tilt level sensor with audible alarm • Descent alarm • Electronic horn • Hour meter Power • 24 V DC (four 6 V 225 Ah batteries) Productivity Options • Air line to platform • Dual flashing beacons • Motion alarm • Automotive horn • Biodegradable hydraulic fluid Power Options • Power inverter (120 V /60 Hz) • EE rating • AGM maintenance -free batteries Genie United States Distributed By: 6464 185th Ave. NE Redmond, WA 98052 Telephone +1 (425) 881 -1800 Toll Free in USA/Canada +1 (800)- 536 -1800 Fax +1 (425) 883 -3475 .."r ., :'. I': -: r:.t .� I,. 1. h.. ". 1: r. le 3,4 ..� ... ,. instructions on the proper use of this equipment. Failure to follow the appropriate Operator's Manual when using our equipment or to otherwise act irresponsibly may result in serious injury or death. The only warranty applicable to our equipment 0 the standard written warranty applicable to the particular product and sale and we make no other warranty, express or implied. Products and services listed may be trademarks, service marks or trade names of Terex Corporation and /or their subsidiaries in the USA and many other countries. Terex, Genie and AWP are registered trademarks of Terex Corporation or Its subsidiaries. © 2016 Terex Corporation. GS46 021014. Part No. 109379 www.genielift.com • TAKE YOUR AUDIENCE TO A WHOLE NEW DIMENSION DLP TEXAS INSTRUMENTS Full 3D 1080p Optoma Projector Expert Ho Native 1080p high- definition resolution for crystal clear presentations 4700 lumens bright output makes it ideal for use in large screen applications Q Latest image controller technology and Full 3D compatibility for the most amazing immersive experience Over the network management and control capability makes it the perfect projector for large installations HDMI E E ron P Link SMART PHONES TABLETS 3D BI.U- RAY /DVD PLAYERS lir 1. SET TOP BOXES AIN GAME DIGITAL CAMCORDERS CONSOLES CAMERAS CRESTRON EN CED The Optoma EH500 will make your presentations shine crystal clear in full high definition. Its powerful 4700 lumens bright output combined with an outstanding 10,000:1 contrast ratio deliver amazingly bright presentations with vibrant colors and sharp, clear text and graphics. Ideal for use in large screen applications where fine image detail is required. The Optoma EH500 features an impressive array of connectivity options which include a display port, two HDMI, two VGA, VGA - Out, S- Video, composite video, 12V trigger, RS -232C and RJ45. Full 3D compatibility, Crestron RoomView for over the network control and management of up to 250+ projectors. Perfect for large installations in business and educational environments. Roku'" Apple TV' DATA SERIES PROJECTOR — EH500 SOPTICAL/TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Display Technology Single 0.65" DC2 DMD DLP " Technology by Texas Instruments Native Resolution Maximum Resolution Brightness Contrast Ratio Displayable Colors Lamp Life and Type' Projection Method Keystone Correction Uniformity Aspect Ratio Throw Ratio Projection Distance Image Size (Diagonal) Projection Lens Offset Audio Noise Level Remote Control HD (1920 x 1080) WUXGA (1920 x 1200) 4700 lumens 10,000:1 (full on/full off) 1.07 Billion 3500/2500 Hours (STD/bright) Front, rear, ceiling mount, table top ±15° Vertical 85% 16:9 Native, 4:3 compatible 1.59- 1.91:1 (distance/width) 3.28' -32.8' (1.0 -10 m) 23.6 " -300" (0.6 -7.62 m) F =2.5 -2.76, 1 =23.5 -28.2 mm, 1.2x manual zoom and focus 115% 3 -Watt speaker 30d B IR remote mouse control Operating Temperature Power Supply 41 -104 °F (5- 40 °C), 85% max humidity AC input 100 -240V, 50 -60Hz, auto - switching 0 Power Consumption Preliminary 380W (bright), 320W (STD), <1 W (standby) COMPATIBILITY SPECIFICATIONS Computer Compatibility HD, WUXGA, UXGA, WXGA, SXGA +, SXGA, XGA, SVGA, VGA resized, VESA, PC and Mac compatible Video Input Compatibility NTSC, PAL, SECAM, SDTV (480i), EDTV (480p), HDTV (720p, 1080i /p) 3D Compatibilityt Supports all HDMI 1.4a mandatory 3D format, side -by -side format and top and bottom format. 3D glasses are needed and sold separately. Vertical Scan Rate 50-85Hz, 120Hz, 144Hz Horizontal Scan Rate 15, 31-90KHz User Controls Complete on- screen menu, adjustments in 23 languages VO Connection Ports Display port, Two HDMI, Two VGA -in, VGA - out, S- video, composite video, stereo RCA, audio -in, stereo audio -out, RS -232C, RJ45, 3D -sync, USB and 12V trigger Loop Through (Audio, VGA) Monitor: D -Sub 15 pin VGA output Audio -out: Stereo 3.5 mm mini -jack (functional in both normal and standby modes) PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS Security Kensington "' Lock Port, security bar and keypad lock Weight 8.2 Ib (3.7 kg) •Dimensions (W x D x H) 12.8" x 4.3" x 10.2" (326 x 109 x 259 mm) 'Lamp life is dependent on many factors, including lamp mode, display mode, usage, environmental conditions and more. Lamp brightness can decrease over time. t3D content can be viewed with either RF or DLP Link active shutter glasses when projector is used with a compatible 3D player. RF 3D glasses require the use of an RF 3D emitter and a projector with a 3D VESA Sync port. Please visit www.OptomaUSA.com for more information. VGA -Out VGA -in 2 Display Port VGA in 1 E HDMI -2 HDMI -1 j - 3D SYNC 12V Trigger RJ45 Audio -out/in RS -232C S -Video IR Kensington Video Lock Port RCA Audio -in L/R 3W speaker Power On .- Test Pattern F1 Mode Enter Info. Source Volume Formate Zoom •- - -- Power Off • Mouse Switch • F2 AV Mute • Four Directional Select Keys • Laser Re -Sync Vertical Keystone -" Page Up /Down Remote All • Remote ID HDMI2 • 0 oy 0 o • 0 VGA1 0 HDMI 0 Video 0 BNC 0 Display Port S -Video VGA2 0 DVI 0 YPbPr 0 3D Warranty 3-Year Optoma Express Service, 1 -Year on lamp In the Box EH500 projector, AC power cord, VGA to VGA cable, remote control, batteries for remote, carrying case, lens cap, multilingual CD -ROM user's manual, quick start card and warranty card Optional Accessories Ceiling mount, RF 3D glasses, RF 3D emitter and Optoma screens Part Numbers Lamp: BL- FU310B Mount: BM -5001 U Remote: BR -3070L Case: BK -4013 Wireless VGA dongle: 8I- EXTBG03 DLP`" Link'" 3D glasses: BG -ZD301 RF 3D glasses: BG- ZF2100GLS RF 3D emitter: BG- BC100B UPC 796435 41 865 6 www.OptomaUSA.com Optoma Projector Expert Copyright t) 2013 Optoma Technology, Inc_ DLP± and the DLP logo are registered trademarks of Texas Instruments". All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. All specifica- tions subject to change at any time. The Optoma Express Program is only valid in the U.S. • • • ' E L E C T R I C S C R E E N S BOARDROOM ELECTROL® Concealed -In- The - Ceiling Electric Screen • Designed specifically for ceiling recessed installation in any conference or boardroom. • Patented in- the - roller motor mounting system for quiet operation. • Fully automatic ceiling closure doors conceal screen when not in use. • White box and white door options available. • Silent motor option available. See page 16. For optional remote control operation, see options on pages 50 -54. Matte White fabric up to 10' high will be seamless. Video Spectra 1.5 fabric up to 8' high will be seamless. High Power' fabric up to 6' high will be seamless. VIDEO FORMAT Viewing Area Nominal Overall H x W Diagonal Length of Case Matte Video High in. cm. in. cm. in. cm. White Spectral.5 Power' 43" x 57" 109 x 145 72" 183 73'!:" 187 x x x 50" x 67" 127 x 170 84" 213 837." 212 x x x 57" x 77" 145 x 196 96" 244 97'1." 248 x x x 60" x 80" 152 x 203 100" 254 97 1:" 248 x x x 69" x 92" 175 x 234 120' 305 109'2" 278 x x x 87" x 116" 221 x 295 150" 381 133'1." 339 x x x 105" x 140'" 267 x 356 180" 457 157'2" 400 x x 120" x 160" 305 x 406 200" 508 17772' 441 x HDTV FORMAT Viewing Area Nominal Overall H x W Diagonal Length of Case Matte Video High in. cm. in. cm. in. cm. White Spectral.5 Power` 45" x 80" 114 x 203 92" 234 97'2' 248 x x x 52" x 92" 132 x 234 106" 269 109'2" 278 x x x 54" x 96' 137 x 244 110" 279 113'2" 288 x x x 58" x 104" 147 x 264 119" 302 121'h" 309 x x x 65" x 116" 165 x 295 133" 338 133'2" 339 x x x 78" x 139" 198 x 353 159" 404 15772" 400 x x x SQUARE FORMAT Size Overall H x W Length of Case Matte Video High In.Ift. cm. in. cm. White Spectra 1.5 Power` 50" x 50" 127 x 127 63'2" 161 x x x 60" x 60" 152 x 152 73'2" 186 x x x 70" x 70" 178 x 178 83'/, 211 x x x 84" x 84" 213 x 213 912" 248 x x x • 6' x 8' 183 x 244 109'2" 278 x x x 8' x 8' 244 x 244 1091h" 278 x x x 7'x9' 213x274 121'6" 309 x x x 9' x 9' 274 x 274 12111" 309 x x 8' x 10' 244 x 305 133'2" 339 x x x 10' x 10' 305 x 305 133'h" 339 x x 9' x 12' 274 x 366 157'2" 400 x x 12' x 12' 366 x 366 157'/2" 400 x 30 www.da- lite.com info @da- lite.com • Concea I 4n- This -GeeII ^►q Electric Screen Designed spA:y t COnterence c beardronm, ▪ Patented in- the - roller noIor rnourlting s st> for quiet operation. • Wully automatic um 44eC1` ' 144,x41 C4 )t in use :fjssed install tic^ s any • White box and Mile doer Ochs - aalble ▪ in avant nritit a°444tiie. See Matte Vitte'��n: t 4 atel ` z"a,iTriaaa, . 4f tippph ni 1} W O F CAT °45J' 12 47" •C'e ° 144 kir A 97 152 x c 5 Or x 1 175* 234 432" 41i* 221X. aN 11Y, x14r 297x 1 x 0E7 2414, r 44 X245'' 241 a3"9" 212 244 9fl 240 a 254 " 10 1 ' VI 691 1 1?:'' ft 15 45? 157°4r' 4N^13 a. 1 4.2°.4." 441 pax X 1311rt 244 a ' 5' 1a514F 3C4'3x5 9°u 12 274 a XI 12c12 ltiii a, U 1342 241 X43 10,1.° 179 121'x" 3ak9 14114!:" 334 1� °, • 334 15r. " 4:41 .411 BOARDROOM ELECT:MR) marts Electric Projection Screen MorkSPECIFICATION DATA 04 LITE SC.EEN ClikEPAtlt, NC ='=== -`4 ,•i'="..='.•,= SLI,GCESTED SPECII:ECAVIONS.. vr:1: 11:31,,,!"--?,€, nor Sr. • i"ove -- • he; Lih n ttc e„,t 'oroi.ed io ket t .21 (:•en!...; rt, , • -71•711,7.7`.;,. : Vvnenal 1'7! 71=L.■ 1:1.".1="7›,1 ..".="=="=.:(' "iio7or 1='" 47" Lux.;.oln o! zne ' , tz z,na 1,7‘. ;..;o ' cr'..horc 17= :7-7" 7 001; ■".", C=./1 Matto Whit: r Vgdet Spttr,o in sizi-ss ii!� power: t If W WM, Ar0-4 VIQED I NISC rr AZ.DIMIN,S,LOUTArtn ' I ck d NO4116101 ."Ove,rall Length Mg DAM sr Case ewing A ell it W Approx. $Itip. WI. Ciu 311" Cnn Kq 1E0' 457 42). 'Poo 77'.= 4.4' it !TV 11;1, 4i FORMAT DIViCNSIONSIZ' ="AFIALItV4 111;iCk Nomiaal eve.* ; Leelta Dia °nal lot Cask it Ca Approx. Shp. Lba. =5. x 116' • 1?9 917 1617 Sues '41 404 c..".;.": 4-51 SO4JAFIF FORMAT DthoirtillONS !sere-eni baee t ntatItIor'd btor:k drop t rep' I trilth 114.;;1;4;... StIT iz Iti Lir; ---r kg _ . - , . ■•■ rs '1, 4 W>) 4411.):15 ',=r t )"• t+,4 WREN O I E IN$ , MA3[ ff. .APPROPMAT SEE I • Select sere bum claws ajhovc. Select rte tug surface atuitsari ' end Grt9lrsquAri1 t `• -i t1rs:', no Srrhe:Kiif; Optional Ae ces cries: . €3'8 v■t#f,t ,; F lee, yr ' - rerr� t o Crrntr R ..� ,.jd3iir-.:: F'ii:5;3p1171dr Re:7.. " pi 7 i /r ;.} K;4'r1"s;e, = °F3e . : `jo:t9 a,ws rr'i£711.7 to rend .. a iS 9-3, se ;err . t „,,d S,°A d,: ;kmp Borders IE :Lei car: Archilec P ;one. • rdractcir. Ektper. ride. 1 °�jSti`kk!. Ji:PII r L1.1t �r I. 31ST aj,r! dicers [fit Sishe-, J • €Nrot k s..`._..iri1i: "w`:! a rr h- ese°r'eA "In U 5 . 1 -reA BOARDROOM ELECTRO L E8TED METHODS OF 1N TAL.[.AlON' Far eery Mt, MS !St :csaaa xrre:r< ut:: IVE. ma-ae: tsz?: L; 4iyF s�f LJCu Spei--;tra c7tr.<1" Tck • ",',41■,+; • ■s„,- " • Scrt;.;.m • )1,1, Sk:■ • Cik1WO 5c.,1-,'"" 6 Pnagaartml Wall 05' Raar air ,ax, 4'451 rlAt Cri arm,act 4'i D5,4ei ant,. ptj WhartaIat-Ail W ir, .1.-Drae.-n3irit",g,ratiart Tr as-4." ink Pl-le I of ":"? S°11,""naim hificidosi SECURE rrrr- • Qri YJA` titre 1.48eweleaW0551/ GAII to 7 'TIE 17,1dten man 1 a'l i t My FrTi Any My 1777i1"! = Voir'o trt i„.C/"Iira:',t Van:, C11,21.,77C' Bryn vo.irface In ivriecia'AY riesigneirl cYf arf'llas ; • "", ""-"" 3r '1 i;pv Gavii 1 5 Unable to find what you wine tenting for If you are' intorw5taid man Om not iiWttria on our wotisOto, tan i-a$0-6,55,-Q551 we actetat Litrvenent, taucistion and Lam= Vorchase Urchin an appmved accatmta: Fetuattd Twehnology The right edampnverit at the right pr ice! PeliCitt* hermit I Wahtneatet A-* caiAtvtaitt ht4 kAlk, Catli Sed Let 11 110[Olgy ni, kivOSIXT I ra 1.1 i i f:!--2i,„I';'.20! 3 • rift POWERin PRESENTATION PRODUCTS I Instruction Book for BOARDROOM ELECTROL • DA-UTF. S f.i:INIPA.NY • IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS jiur V/Cle0 ba5M-C iways, (7H1...10.Ing 1.hc! id rfi , RErad unriorstci 1nruefuns before usi7rig. l'esbion rho. cord so th..i.7fr it will ri,07 rfir...31-j-.7-:id pi....i11.3171, or cOntacT If ;.4i1 aide roo,!-1,: cord r ec:ejr-, 9 twrent ratraj eq. 10 that of the 3p ncc shoirlo 05(3,1. t'1ord...9 rated foi- less aropefgie than the rpc may Cr.o.,/01,,. 4 id- reduce the risk c electric shrii:<7.:K., do not disassemble tras appl iarrc17% 1.:,07-4.a:Ct a aiatho- ried ser,fic-e dealer. jvhr Pf9j wOrl< red Fro:::Orr.ect reass,ereLdy can cause elearic .appilarret7::, used subsequerby. i by tril.? roaritifacturef rroy use ISk fire, eleti71C titiock, or Erijury to SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS PRE-INSTALLATION a:A screen .and rerrOve puler vy.rap:.:tinc.,; -from. 1.6,4 Iv, ryf RWTIOVe..c..ffilef sponr bracket s rid wider (7.0.7.ne'L arid .sI iC the. tpp. ni FORE " I 4 DIVP SILECti iNsT,ALLeirioN NOTE: Uoit k act to Itt 104 hatittliirto SC.ftten by taisIng .10*.173 ono. 0-11:$ cnl. 1r)..eg3lt 1..,On&f 1:•110LiVing b kid Setar'.0 COWZ.iS.11.0 5urVC4-1.. lelpAitiriet's r g3aCh Orae..ktft f jr-.1 PturnP, CAUTION! Ott tie tonere acs s door or saaE in unit :until :screen has bean secured in position and property Seated or satistec.- ....., Jory operation.. Do twill unit 5m...tightly:that the screen ..surtace drop doer hinds. Door drop by gravity only, ;V:Ei g)111:g 't;r: C:,V,P afrg ii Dan,e.knq. a.c.§zes$ .15t,Kani.E.t hIc or. raigi .sizr wrien $..erv:iocinc.F crop( 00A8OROOM ELECTROL INSTALLATION h nL y (1,:ccr-r:c 1 is or 7.! CAUIION! Do not sill wrapping paper or tape with IiiPe or any sharp tool Remove by hand. hool, tr) Ow: urAlri...i . :LirJ !,-0€ s!rg!. 23VAC tr4.2. 0±^,{1 ',I'll Re I k.3>, :C.:, CCTF': ri CE tIrgal °A1' tic;, -a DT NOTE: Screen h Peei internally wired at DA-UTE. Wiring designated "external" is completed by installer COiliOirnifig to lacal and nationet codes. Ar„r„ufairry,ih.,:%, rh;ri: ,C.7t l:T.;;;) 'D" :tro:i Ande- I he NOTE: Do not allow slat to boo orno obotruntoid on door olonjng hootol attoohod to oonfritte door. Whoa ro nod flown, the piotore surface should wrap fully arowarl the roller. No part of the roller should be exposed. PiCttirk liteface will auternaticellyi ..,411op in the down position. n -cst. tEtor :ty c:areit i-inc.! 2-:7; ffl;:,ye.C.,..1 r4on tindsa 1 1V1111 ON 3 mti oFF „in trio utur surtare irdv-mick cin.or rt rticei rolls in! hr. I er oe the alai 11 r,srch tt-p r,0,0 cxk nr, the lora and c.oll I 'IR dr:or cic,seri. the d&or 41111 '3,MIEh ir :pen and the motor stmts. oil. AkCAUT1ON! Excessiyo'CtIfItillUO US operation may cause overheating_ 12 14. • RJR pr,„:41..ee surtnce dowrwsra PIclure sorface de,or itIy co ens. Infi!ar rrnclion cover access &in/ AriC reirrStAi F,";IPW5 f7,-..-7:1c) end. ci,f CAUTION! Do not ammo to re-store a at wr lxv adiestitt4 Wait switabe3, Allow otte-eillhitt of a inch (1!$1 cc areunti Sin-face doer. Moire &one door does not bittrt, Check hinges,. Paint or the cement w interfone with free criermitm, ratiity (trope doer ,yirt fin 717, .CA1 d PI APC,,,v =;1:,-;0( teflIOVet:i 11 BOARDROOM ELECTROL INSTALLATION 129V SCREENS • V WIRING DIAGRAM E 1 Ot< Ur, iJ \11 ir4 14'4 mL 1 :P4 AEM; — acatiLin, Duck DOWN) fl AO, SIDE VIEW OF taSWITCH - — BED C COMMON AC NCI 12 1 AMP. MAX. THIS SWITCH CANNOT BE USED WITH E V C DUCK 'MTH YELLOW NORMALLY CIGSED LINDH WAIT SWITCH tAO TOR LVEHAING SIM/IA ANN) PLATE ENMESHED WITH scaurt !VDT WITH DEEi NOTE: A SENIAI SWITCH CANNOT OE USED TO OPERATE MODE TM ONE SCALEX CMITACT THE FACTORY FD fURTHER INFORMATION. IliMEILTIFEE CONTROL INSTALTATION$ THE SWITCH IS IIEPEACED itY THE LOW VIRTADE CONTHE„ (lraitiAIan FROM MO HINETTEH STATINNS, SCREEN AiX,RISTIOENT FOR taW SCREENS st,..r5cipert 9 i,;;Artfitid1 .tf:431,0- and thttat are ttiropetivt attl- pLit;!tc•ti 00d it be. nece.y.,-.N.ary .8;,.ijus.t friorai, cm. pr:O.Ceed th JOilewin.0 tr.4ninen NOTE cti.riyer or F„....;132' alien ,Nie,t•icti i'rialte rrr MORE SCREEN DR.G.:P: 1 111: dawn" thU SCriaf.t.11:5.1a)pti7i., aVril Th dajri EATTA: k..nob dl 1jrt`t. $7;01...,1rtteltOlet<A.,k,i4SCo approximalpt," vc wer again.. Repea!:. cjes.k7...0:1 Itotecoti LESS SLEILITE tell ALMA KUM "LW—, sroarti U1NM1 molt warn 7,- tont -'auwfr t;:fo k< Itt tt or, y,,tt.t,) t tt:' k t o 1 P, 8 azT.: <nnsil „s, fl,.11 ;tut ii t yr 9 4) Quarto 1,,jp.' 3Ck M. t.:,t1 'a rd ordkilk: `3,€1 twr 4Pf!.1 7. -on tcivuer again RP-noA- CAUTION! On not adigai lor more drop -titan vgbai was orrierat. At toast 1-1/2 wraps of fattric must rim lo co the roller. This &cteeo cornea wooliard with v or r. blatk at the top. Sea the specification data sheet fee details 2 0 >r 240V WIRING IA GRAM P.111.:;( .sto I raT °E iI4 IN ENrceo TER:mig:NATE5 114 I a. y. LEA S L OPE AT r SWIT I w14NO I NOT KATE F IJANIE rem. tF INST AE W [L 10 CONFORM TO 5CREEt# !spin WFF N LOCAt WIRING CODE, THIS SWITCI' i ww CENTEll t FI CANA101 AE USIA WYtEI L.I.0 NOTE A SNITUE MOP gk fl)J AA AS VIM OP 0 WITH CENTER M. FE SHOWN AC ooT BIM AC COMMON 2201240V. AC 5002 .XeP. MAX DIIJE PER VON Box IPLECONTRIi1Ii UM-A w Rain R f'.ACEir (t41YVI LTAGE CONTROL MID C 1PUSHI1urmN IONS NOTE: MORE DREEN DROP 1 "a drt 1"fa ; rl '! ;_ra ^t1 v l(4 n 4''u°roncl' = °3 torn hen $y' 17 :11.. a. °gar mar Irt, O 'act N�f�itihar§' Tc i i t' ak r gair'. ;e ,r..it n d s .__ed -n 1 nr rullo`m„rlij rti.rr ^r'Ie Ar}a1r!ayrr tot r r FR 7rAlr .' St4 kth .0141.fillolEff f FED Rani 7 4N2 B "IV LESS SCREEN DROP. lea i P u ,."..)era ::I spa o-`r i'; n "a xif,;siti n 1 €, r ia?; 'deicer' €II;Ft. hire 0 €€ r CAUTION! Do not adjust tar mire drop than what was ordered. At least 1 -1;t2 wraps of fabric must rema irr on the roller, This screen comes standard with or or 2' black at the tap. See the spec if catiim data sheet for details.. • SOAROROOKELECTROLN INSTALL:AMON 41° 'fierrysoci aCcottvdttr"vt) 7tr:, olvTrtftr:::•:,T • • NifiliOD A f.4.FSTR Atiet•JK t tAk; R RE, AfEARKE EITLACKL I I 7 Er 1ff 14511Pili A•4*•„;5P..?sett.):.4 —; oftywALL •• • ,f EZREVO 'Tr le NuAt tot & I vti UI HIM; FURRING' STRIP ...„`E.EXPFACE S.TEEL SLAT arcEgs So4' 1:e TO Aq: ORIJR fINISPIED I CEIL 2-1Z ?; 'or v NOTE CAN SE PARTED:TN SAME AS MGR REIIMIYED AM REPLACES WITH IT TO rir FINISHED CUM 111,13:4a r CRYWAIL SCRIM' t TAUT ISOIMSTILG SCTIPAS iCttft.ttl• roc,:tottio+-1, above Cedino. Tot. olova-21, Of•par).-10)q, DofyiEi and botz.o4f of• Oair:Itod Sartie,, METHOD C KTORAITINC - RIACRET ORACKIT . . tbr . , • TiliTTeet FS TFR',, I letter Oil SCRF'AtS mak* Trvto _10031 Ft:RHINE - STRIP iSILLIGT.S TO, To-BOLE wookiri44 ° 031 111019ALL SCREW SCREW T faR ALT1 lqrST EEL SLAT IN PEICREE PICTURE 4cCESS-+1 ee,e, 3t4. ,` NOREOCE , I DOOR TORS REP ; CEILING W°". a-ur ttte almtm 47,,n•Qo adapted TfartitlEriET fr cr nc rn doors. a. 4' gLIRK :it AT rDI: 1nel E;(1rITACE aar STEIL 1 Vt 1k POCKET MEIN • I SLIC.E STEC' 1,4" ROC ATAATAT BEEKKKET FAUUTILLVilki ‘; X11157 LT TO INtS RED CHEM T. icrtIRE ivrAtiss SURFACE DooR te 21.? 1,14 STIRTWS CEILING TILE CUT TO 13" 'MIDI ATTACH TAI1111 MASTIC! erece-::„.•.en ary)ve tie I. 314° to. 14 thtick uncie.• ORTifittLL SGRPOSI SCRE W t WIT SLAT KICK I UPI FURE.11EmED WITII CEILING OD 0 — MICGESTEISI It SOLIS IFALTURTIPPS JOIST BLAME! TARKURTIMU BRACKET e FURRING STRIP SAW SLTSPEKTDE TT: MAC I TILL . 1 PICTURE 1 AccEss . : 1 SURFACE ; ' 2eler 2.1er I * • , CE4.0.111 TILE CUT Po iN TAIN 4 TT/U1TIIMAST1I re-; er•;;;...T; :sn,„,,T) C.,;€Tire,9 FOr mopped ktay 015,0 ma.. aea.ozoati kr tysft, iith 112' 7.0 it TAI 10 14 ' V.410,4 f;,;:c.feen Gato2-. • SHOOTING duos silt +ic:orh F Qpow r €1 i •F} C +'' <i z Ej arlEart1 T h+ i1.1',0 anirr rr.” F'il it ?�sI It, '•'I ( :hot:l<, c°il" t:!'7E`tlifa- i.l +i'r •led aeSe lT : k.- §. NOTE: up :110( does odd Footw hums. �^�t a la"` €'s 131 #P,: #t „'PII IEi,_ •, ',_is �; nn f 2jen ' k 1P r }ic:1ro pier al jw ctin boat I(7 7 hernial ve ,eiau #;h;1 t. iotet,, cri a+: tu,.:. 1;0 vc c n g1711V11y, #tea lieciAticin unit "Up. III Lct 33y:. � Replac Metal is a se red Linth#,r NOTE smart four crc=!v.. lir'h f ,a5. = =du • • Tili)UBLESHO011itig SY rapaim CAUS E SULUTIGN .1 D'....it ,' '...k.:',,, IIA d■,..);-,t1 W,...:0 :1'), 'o.:1:, Up" 1, `..i=.: ,",.,,,. = + !i !...., „ii rn L..!, ,--.'q, 0S: M:',nt ' '..; NOTE. TItitz Nivituli i h DlUi iturmilly esed when operating sersoa. Motor atttairtatically shots off it fabric does riot close 'Odic door .f di :n Alicp,,,::,, rrO7Or tn :-'1', 4 -:1:41 .70C :',Z,•:.09 I- ,..,,,':, it:,:i,.-:, L'It'., !,11::.• ',,,,,,,,it«:.i', ':..1,;(,t;.,..,•.'1F,1°:.: t!Cwii'f,I.:°, 1 I ccont" ft t ":,-Wi ,":"..P) rri,,:j . 1 0 g: L lj'! -Down' ',:i:0„ t;,,k, tk:I• k:cli :'..! ;,-....1! v.:', tr- ur. I 1:4 :::,;,:t;. ,N:i!j.4-t7,....mi di '.,-;,..„15...,,;;;4:W g !t,,,lit)tir ',, I if...1 -,..,1...,..1 ,,I; NOTE; Streto will ontrato with a ',yr g ID' 1,-,zi h..11'.. f.,.9- ... ic; tluor r.:..tif:c. -1 rrk-7:17..-tincj , 1;3 bvc: bra icei ,:4 f:•.."1;r0 Of r,')i '„:1 If' .,..„,j.,,,,,, ,;:„-..; fItv,t:3:...... '1''')€(..`ir kbl A br:":z I f'-',1; VII aSSblIblY ji:Fir,,:;92.1 Ifr:',11 rtpOki•r..lriq 6.1 F-'u11if'''';6 10 1.1r,ud tu.t. ...)1 1- y t;:r-. flk,-J, ofa cker 1119 ,:,1 fifA-G,,v,,,, .Jir,,,, f..9,:l ircb/ /lc? .... FicallcIn 1-1c 1f,.1.7 In rt.:)t., -1-eattaC:h n 1:t--10 ,:::,0 -ac.:10 10 (1-)d :Di ,:ilat vd.11.:,re (Icor fa.sql....1s, Bt.HIC1 ,,,i,i,tt u:.,I.firoi,,,rj/1. h,-3 1,:.icoyo door, 1: .1 nOt :...:or'il..;CIL'ij Qy Jb;q;;1 dace lab' ,ts. '9 F FrTi`:‘. ClOor l'a nig', (117.,,c*,..,1:1 ,../ag:-.j erd !al i.:::;lot llor .,...ri 1-,..;,..,,1 i,alt-gf.,,f ithli y ) 1j, F=.:ii,.:4 lb bur°7y3 ;21 =,..,.,A1•:..,:1 ruu- bfr)g on slat bor..: .. . ... Ltsi Surcur, r,u1'nt,i1lec ufouc Ou. (n) Fatwir has Lac. Lad .t..,p rr,sdc- c...1-r.,:e, (ri 1-7,47tFIC ri gtacted, =:1: C':i.E-Zi.; for 1E-itti zar :I t°,,unto. ,,1.1 kiitx..--.t "down" In-Mt SWO.Cf. sirs,,,,,ly Lrrr raft A 1:3 expo.s.f.A ar,L1 ,,,,,q a'4:-..-., C•MC,E OUL InCin rci'atikty.,„ fro rn,roe rirrIn ,:r:, Rpisr. fabnc: A *tzar& t)ra0. at WI 6410 4198,03.4551 Da ,Lite Boardro‘wri Ele-ctrie Projection Screen - P:oject.or ktettree, zeds Irrcirtlor tt:A.A. P5'5.55ibbbtIr ,,555550,-515 555f595ifixt 5trf,5,555,515', 5554 -;-555.5 C5.55551,555 gi,„"5-55555,55.5' 55555ttge■t 555t5, 5,5555,51 IN, 555 '5.555,555ff af5549 5ft,5.5:5,55,551,5, 5,''5555559P VArltivrl trze aelltrht ,t• LatlArv: rol*tgersztr Prtrtit,trrtitts kgrr,tp, gkts;!-;1 t*:trr-t-t-rtm rrt, att, Atti tt te.rttp-Wit: 5,59tt5.1550-,5-5-,55, 555,55't555,5,55 Cs5555ta.t., V, 55,5,555-,f,f5,5f55 rresit ,:etttrrtt rt, 5,558 5:555i L: :ofil :};•,;:r.; 0: i';:rcx.,- f2 !;5-tr55, ttrt r . SECURE Art., 5,55%1.55 5,MS, Cririii01Watt Tre E$;, LAttir RirrktfiNtr:Ifl't ItCrartt:. tit;r:4-;;-',C11 rrl:Ont4 it.AASkzitetZ-d trtVait-05110M rtt arIV :ttnierentt t!tr V 1om Po/ented ti-,trkt ,rraer 71.7.47,of rre:,,kg-tcn VerAtett-t qAtt.t4 of.A,4hotrt t-ttdrt,' Attelartrait, rg Itt,ttr.t ttt 5P11,11 pity, rit,tr trt taw, ^Ottv vandard hrvihtr$$ c-ay iv t■i■m;',•,-"d et51.55)1,1f .5,55-fbr-f." ,7•Cr(rr5. EtTtr! $r4orotut, Pr.,„,r,irt4pt! ytr,rojr rrN gi(Irretirrton !itetronn crrrttrttsr,tttrt, 'Sttrropit rtctkr,,,,,t1 rotkr irttIrrtrrl,t, tts,t teltt ittAet 41411.",:rt 545,1 .254 i...tletlt tot,tr, etyp to Ant! -art Flualeetj hijh rid bt° 55,5 5,55,5,55 Litsr t t`tk3:ifiric 1,46411 ri h S.kittatkrt, ' ratgiC `-t= seb54 515, ,5,5 oto( t.7„ 7,,r4 =othlarzl trizttAt 5,55 o f5t-t:t5,50“-.55°,55 rAgiL rrt 541,1 martt) r/ ft 65.rtb wi Ii ff5,4150f5f5. r Pow. a • art: 4f:um, rt. A. C", "' 122$ edrt aiaiarii Ttrtthilituy o dett:Aateti 1,1"Stcrtsfv4 UOit Y‘..1 zcittiX Vtkrt ttt;iAr". 11:tr 1-80S-665-9554 lur p 1$;,-r■ a! oir punt Fretpettf; uname to find Attu you wort loolury iar? tr you MO intertswd tn 2r1 nem not 5stud ten our websttu. can E1136,61h 0551. I'Vts oct-40 Gcteernmont, tdtscoftle, te,rttdrrt-tarxtrettc rurtIrtt-rata C.,,Itzatt• Dn opprertvc,d titttc.r.,,,,Att, ! $aum.$40 TrKi-ruuy Thu rittl gtiltkiprrtA4trA Rialie I Hfiftlfa IthatinasUr hltp:"..,'''www„„focusoitcchncd.ogy.comiboard.rooril„hturil .61215,2012 SECTION V — Contract Documents BIDDER'S PROPOSAL ADDENDUM NO. 2 OPROJECT: Morningside Recreation Complex New Recreation Center CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR ITEM UNIT TOTAL NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY. PRICE PRICE General Contractor shall provide labor. equipment. materials and all insurances as necessary for construct a new recreation building approximately 21.000 sq. ft. all site work required at Morningside Recreation Complex — 2400 I lam Boulevard — Clearwater Florida 33754 according to Building Permit BCP2017 -01415 and the construction documents of Project Number I6- 0035 -PR for the lump sum price provided in this contract. 1. Mobilization & Demobilization LS I 2. Surveying, Layout, Material Testing & `As Built' Dwg. LS 1 3. Inclusive of all site work shown on Bldg. Permit BCP2017 -91415 LS I 4. Inclusive of all building construction of New Recreation Center shown on Bldg. Permit BCP2017 -91415 LS 1 5. Extended 3 year warranty of beyond 7 year provided by Yanmar Gas HV /AC System LS 1 6. Inclusive of all items for al0 year maintenance agreement of Yanmar Gas HV /AC system, includes monthly maintenance of system. Owner shall provide lift for access of air handler in gymnasium during the 07. 10 year maintenance agreement LS 1 General Contractor shall provide an electrical lift to Service HV /AC air handling units mounted in the Gymnasium Ceiling per Florida Building Code, Section 306.3 Appliance in Attic a man lift large enough to allow removal of the largest appliance and wide enough to accommodate service personnel to perform servicing of the appliance in the gymnasium. The man lift shall be stored on site in the storage room off the gymnasium LS 1 8. General Conditions /Supervision LS 1 9. Profit and Overhead LS 1 10. City of Clearwater Building Permit No Fee for City project from Building Dept. LS 1 N/A N/A 11. Sales Tax & Materials for Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) of materials (construction material for building site work items, & all other miscellaneous items) 11 -a. Owner Direct Purchase $ 1 I- b.Sales Tax amount $ • Addendum No. 2 Bid Form 5.1 1.17 LS 1 SECTION V — Contract Documents BIDDER'S PROPOSAL (continued) PROJECT: Morningside Recreation Complex New Recreation Center CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR ITEM UNIT TOTAL NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY. PRICE PRICE 12. 10% Bid Bond, Performance surety bond recorded at Pinellas County Court House recorded original provide to the Owner. L. S. 1 13. Sub Total of items 1 — 12 $ 14. *10% Contingency of line 13 *(Note contingency funds shall only utilized upon written approval by the Owner or the Owner's representative to utilize these fund for additional Scope of Work not included in items 1 -13 of the Bill of Quantities. Contingency funds not utilized in the implementation of this contract shall be returned to the Owner by closing out purchase order short during close out of the contract (purchase order.) 15. Grand Total items l through 12 Bid Items plus 10% Contingency $ CONTRACTOR NAME: *BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ (Numbers) BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: (Words) A. For extra work: OH &P percentage for materials purchased on a time and material (T &M) basis. ADD $ B. For extra work: OH &P percentage for general contractor for subcontractor services on additional work. ADD $ cyo C. For extra work: Labor rate for work performed on a time and material basis (includes all taxes and fringe benefits). ADD $ /HR I. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 1. The contractor agrees to commence work within 7 calendar days from execution of contract and notice to proceed. 2. The contractor further agrees to complete the work within 330 calendar days from execution of contract and notice to proceed per the referenced schedule in the Invitation to Bid. THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. THE OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SELECT ANY ITEMS AND OR REJECT ALL BIDS. THE TOTAL RICE SHALL BE BASED ON ITEMS SELECTED BY THE OWNER OF THIS PROJECT. Addendum No. 2 Bid Form 5.1 1.17 • • ADDENDUM NO. 3 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR DATE: May 17, 2017 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 3 TO: Prospective Bidders and Other Concerned This Addendum is issued to clarify fencing, roll off dumpsters and additional information on Question 20 Response of Addendum No. 2 for Morningside Recreation Center and is hereby made a part of the Contract Documents. Please attach this addendum to the Contract Documents in your possession. Item 1: Clarification Information: 1. General Contractor shall be required to install 6 foot high temporary construction fencing construction limits of the project as shown on the contract documents. a. All ties of fence to post shall be with heavy duty steel ties. Aluminum ties are not acceptable. A minimum of 3 steel ties to each post equally spaced. b. General Contractor shall call 811 — 48 hours for underground locate prior to installation of fence posts. c. All post shall be driven into existing ground a minimum of 2 feet, straight and plumb. d. All corners shall have steel stretcher bar full height of 6 foot high fence and fence stretched tight. e. Angle braces at all corners both sides. f. Contractor shall inspect fence daily for any intrusions and shall repair breaches immediately. g. Gates shall be double gate (2 panels) minimum 24 feet wide and reinforced to prevent intrusion. Number of entry gates is at the digression of the General Contractor. h. The temporary construction fence shall remain in place during the duration of the project construction period 330 consecutive calendar days or completion of substantial completion and close out of the building permit. 2. New fencing — the Owner shall provide all new fencing for project and is not to be provide by the General Contractor of this project. New fencing the General Contractor shall coordinate new fencing with the Owner for installation. 3. Roll off dumpsters shall be ordered from City of Clearwater Solid Waste per city ordinance. The General Contractor shall be responsible for all dump fees and charges from City of Clearwater Solid Waste for roll of dumpsters. Questions and Answers: Question 20 Is a remote internet Mechanical Control Management System Clarification required for this project? Page 1 • • • ADDENDUM NO. 3 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR Response: Vanmar is to provide a Control Management system for HVAC equipment and shall include software and equipment as required to allow Internet connectivity- and control.. In consultation with City of Clearwater Building & Maintenance in regards to Control Management System for HVAC equipment and shall include software and equipment as required to allow internet connectivity and control remotely. 1. Disregard response of addendum No. 2 - -- Question 20 2. All City of Clearwater Recreation Centers are controlled by KMC Controls and this is the recommended Control Management System for HVAC equipment for the Morningside Recreation Center. ABC Controls are the local dealer for KMC Controls Contract: Mr. Jody Byers Cell -- 813- 963 -2166 Office 813- 879 -8222 Email jodybeyers@abc- controls.com 3. Other acceptable Control Management System for HVAC equipment manufactures: a. Siemens b. Trane End of Addendum No. 3 Page 2 • ADDENDUM NO. 4 FOR MORNINGSIDE RECREATION CENTER CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR DATE: May 19, 2017 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 4 TO: Prospective Bidders and Other Concerned This Addendum is issued to Extend Bid Due Date, clarifies missing information on civil drawings C12 and C13 and Section V - Contract, and clarification to Question 47 Response of Addendum No. 2 for Morningside Recreation Center and is hereby made a part of the Contract Documents. Please attach this addendum to the Contract Documents in your possession. Item 1: Extension of Bid Due Date: Revised Bid Due Date: Friday, May 26, 2017 — 10:00 AM Purchasing Office, 3rd Floor 100 S. Myrtle Ave, Clearwater, FL 33756 -5520 Item 2. Revision to Questions and Answers of Addendum No 2: 47 No pipe schedule on c -13 *Question Response: We - have - -checked -- the - -plans that -_were - posted -- and - -t hey - d.o._indeed....conta•in the -pipe- -schedule - -on sheet -C 1-3- of -1-9: Further investigation of missing pipe schedule we have provided drawings showing the missing information on Addendum No. 4 Item 3. Drawing Includes Pipe Schedule: 1. Drawing C12 Phase I includes missing pipe schedule. 2. This drawing is provided to show existing storm sewer piping and drainage structures installed in Phase I - Pool Renovations & Demolition of Existing Bathhouse. 3. Phase II contract proposed storm sewer system to connection of Phase I Storm Sewer System 4. Drawing C13 Phase 2 includes missing pipe schedule. Item 4. Additions to Page 15 of 16 of Section V Bidders Proposal: 1. Added Construction Schedule Item 1 and 2. Item 5. Changed Line Item 11 to the Bid Tabulation Sheet Page 14 of 16: 1. Added 11 -a Owner Direct Purchase and 11 -b Sales Tax Amount End of Addendum No. 4 • Page 1 • • • CALL 811 SUNSHINE STATE C -12 ( CONS,. ELECTRC TRANSFORMER (BY OTHERS -S POOL EQUIP. (SEE BY G.13 COLLINS ENG.) U NS IS TO BE NO EXCAVATION WORK HE HATCHED AREAS EAST Or MAIN POOL (TYP.) EcTRCAL PLANS) RECORD DRAWINGS WATERSHED MANAGEMENT CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA PARKS & RECREATION DEPT, 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, Fl 33756 1R, REVISID INV. 16.71 WITH TEMPORARY CAP CONS CONST. NSLIGHT `POLE EO !UNCTION 0 (PHASE II) - �S EC (SEEELEC. PLANS AECTIONR l PHA T. l;' EL. CONDUIT SF I) 1(SEE EL PLANS) 16 .e, wITN TEMPORARY C P CONS *. P_ CONS1. - +tO7-1S7 RELOCATED (( vva SE `)R(SEOPEUEI C.R�� EUEL'ASSOC1ATES MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX UTILITY & DRAINAGE PLAN PHASE I • IVY uE • CONST w• + 4. VALVE PER EEIRE N YUR. i5x:03_ CITY °(_" (SEE DETAIL) 00161 A' 00;00 CONST C(89 CITY) MIS 2 O.IT. ODC AND METER CONST 12" TS AND .V (Br ITT) PROVIDE Y. FOR DETECTION WIRES OEVICESMTO RE' PA N CO (SEE DETAIL) CONS, 200 LF 6' DI FIRE STRUCTURE (S -22) (5 -3) 53 CONST. (S -19) CONST. FL00DPLAIN COMPENSATION AREA CONS, P-41 'CONST 75 L NDERDRUN PIPE WITH 0.'S NV. 14.35 �•est. (5 -36) CONST. (5 -39) CONST. CONST. (S -5) POND 'A' NE" //24HR FL00 LA N W TERSNED MANAGEMENT ONST. (5 -42) RECORD DRAWINGS • EXISTING INLET (5 -16) TO REMAIN CONST. P-45 FOR E OVERFLOW DISCHARGE (E CONTINUATI441 FOR MECN. YARD) TO CONST p0 WATER PIP LINE TO EXISTING POOL L WATER SUCPPLY: TO MEP PLANS FIELD FOR C NNE SEE CTION WITHIN THE MECH,LYARD PROTECTION SERV SERVICE TO) BUILDIIOE CONST. (5 -20) y1r ox 1 L ZC EX IR L S FOF CONNECT NEW/ % R. SYNG 0 -SITE E IO PwE TO EXIST X OCATE EX. R I ONST. (5 -7) INS eN PIPE MN p UTILI E SYSTEM A IDURING.. CONSTRUC, ION P -51 (5-43) (9 -36) CONST. P -16 • 19/11 CO C Or 3/3/ REVISION .CONST P- / CONST. 2" GAS LINE TO WITHIN E NoNSFNE u9506. NNS HI ECM. YARD) COMES SA N CO 3.61 -57 CONNECT TO EYE ME uECH C MDEP • INV. 13.851 (STING MANNOLE (S -15) TO RE °'E seT,1 ONE CALL AA ((Amon ° E.sTOfIDU W 1DNED ,BEAT .IN PDD"L' (HT rP, INV. 20.69 ND D.G D INSTALLATION P t OF 20.49 CONST. (5 -19) - 00141'0 C NY 6 0 NV. 19.94 WITH TRENCH DRAIN) (5 -43) CONST. P 1 (5 -3() 1 -21 (S 33 (S-14 -9 -25 P -28 (52) (5 -33) P -29 CONST. - C.O. (TIP.) MECHANICAL YARD: CONST. COx57. (5 -12) 1` 14:1. 2:141 cros. sE ATiPNU D P443 (5 -23) 1-42 CONST_ RETUNING WALL - . 4 PVC SDR -35 ROOF PIP. (TYP.) FAIN (5 -24) (5525) P(5 -26) P -35 P -40 P -36 -, (5 -27) P -34 CONST. (9 -20) 0' AD 9) • IC -13 CONS, WATER U EO NTAIN WITH BOTTLE FILL (PROVOED BY OWNER: • INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR 98 TO 5 T0 FACE OETBALL COURT —! —` — RFT CITY OF CLEARWATER. FLORIDA PARKS & RECREATION DEPT. 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, F1 33756 DEUEL *ASSOCIATES MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX UTILITY & DRAINAGE PLAN PHASE II • • SECTION V — Contract Documents Addendum NO.4 SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND 1 CONTRACT 3 CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT 7 PROPOSAL/BID BOND 8 AFFIDAVIT 9 NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 10 PROPOSAL 11 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET 13 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL 14 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 16 SECTION V Page i Updated: 2/6/2017 • SECTION V — Contract Documents Bond No.: 482596S PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (1) This bond is given to comply with § 255.05, Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in subsections (2) and (10). Pursuant to § 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, "Before commencing the work or before recommencing the work after a default or abandonment, the contractor shall provide to the public entity a certified copy of the recorded bond. Notwithstanding the terms of the contract or any other law governing prompt payment for construction services, the public entity may not make a payment to the contractor until the contractor has complied with this paragraph." CONTRACTOR SURETY OWNER Developers Surety and Indemnity Company Caladesi Construction Co [name] 17771 Cowan Avenue Suite 100 Irvine, CA 92614 [1390 Donegan Rd. Largo, FL 33771 ] [principal business address] 949 - 263 -3344 [727 - 585 -9945] [phone number] City of Clearwater Parks & Recreation Dept 100 S. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33756 (727) 562 -4856 PROJECT NAME: MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX PROJECT NO.: 16- 0035 -PR PROJECT DESCRIPTION: Morningside Recreation Complex — New Recreation Center 21,000 sq. ft., 2400 Ham Blvd. Clearwater, Florida 33764 BY THIS BOND, We, Caladesi Construction Co. , as Contractor, and Developers Surety and Indemnity Company , a corporation, as Surety, are bound to the City of Clearwater, Florida, herein called Owner, in the sum of $5,702,809.73], for payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally. THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Contractor: 1. Performs the contract dated , between Contractor and Owner for construction of Morningside Recreation Complex — New Recreation Center, the contract documents being made a part of this bond by reference (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Proposal, Contract, Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Plans, Technical Specifications and Appendix, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for), at the times and in the manner prescribed in the contract; and 2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes, supplying Contractor with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Contractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract; and SECTION V Page 1 of 16 Updated: 2/6/2017 • SECTION V — Contract Documents Bond No.: 482596S PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (2) 3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Contractor under the contract; and 4. To the limits of § 725.06(2), Florida Statutes, shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, their officers and employees, from liabilities, damages, losses and costs, including, but not limited to, reasonable attorney's fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional wrongful misconduct of Contractor and persons employed or utilized by Contractor in the performance of the construction contract; and 5. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time specified in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise it remains in full force. 6. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes. 7. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance with any formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect Surety's obligation under this bond, and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this day of ,20 (If sole Ownership or Partnership, two (2) Witnesses required). (If Corporation, Secretary only will attest and affix seal). WIT SS: Corporate Secret Print Name: (affix corporate seal) lei Ts( [Caladesi Con By: Title: Print Name: WITNESS: ion Comp. is P Mg% tear b ®Ifh ii �1V1�tl.�S Print Name: Developers Surety and Indemnity Company (Corporate Surety) By: i AT RNEY -IN -FACT Print Name: Kevin R. Wojtowicz (affix corporate seal) (Power of Attorney must be attached) SECTION V Page 2 of 16 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • POWER OF ATTORNEY FOR DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY INDEMNITY COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA PO Box 19725, IRVINE, CA 92623 (949) 263 -3300 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS that except as expressly limited, DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY and INDEMNITY COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA, do each hereby make, constitute and appoint: ** *John R. Neu, Brett M. Rosenhaus, Kevin R. Wojtowicz, Daniel F. Oaks, Charles J. Nielson, Charles D. Nielson, David R. Turcios, Michael A. Gentile, Jessica P Reno, Devin Job Phillips, jointly or severally * ** as their true and lawful Attorney(s) -in -Fact, to make, execute, deliver and acknowledge, for and on behalf of said corporations, as sureties, bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship giving and granting unto said Attorney(s) -in -Fact full power and authority to do and to perform every act necessary, requisite or proper to be done in connection therewith as each of said corporations could do, but reserving to each of said corporations full power of substitution and revocation, and all of the acts of said Attomey(s) -in -Fact, pursuant to these presents, are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY and INDEMNITY COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA, effective as of January 1st, 2008. RESOLVED, that a combination of any two of the Chairman of the Board, the President, Executive Vice- President, Senior Vice- President or any Vice President of the corporations be, and that each of them hereby is, authorized to execute this Power of Attorney, qualifying the attorney(s) named in the Power of Attorney to execute, on behalf of the corporations, bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship; and that the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary of either of the corporations be, and each of them hereby is, authorized to attest the execution of any such Power of Attorney; RESOLVED, FURTHER, that the signatures of such officers may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures shall be valid and binding upon the corporations when so affixed and in the future with respect to any bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship to which it is attached. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY and INDEMNITY COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA have severally caused these presents to be signed by their respective officers and attested by their respective Secretary or Assistant Secretary this 6th day of February, 2017. By: By: Daniel Young, Senior Vice- President Mark Lansdon, Vice- President State of California County of Orange IA notary public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document to which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document. On February 6, 2017 personally appeared Date before me, Lucille Raymond, Notary Public Hera Insert Name and Title of the Officer Daniel Young and Mark Lansdon LUCILLE RAYMOND Commission • 2081945 Notary Public • California Orange County M Comm. E • Ires Oct 13 2018 Place Notary Seal Above Name(s) of Signer(s) who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is /are subscribed to the within Instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she /they executed the same in his /her /their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her /their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph Is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. Signature CERTIFICATE The undersigned, as Secretary or Assistant Secretary of DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY or INDEMNITY COMPANY OF AtPFORNIM; -does hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney remains in full force and has not been revoked and, furthermore, that the provisions of the resolutions of the . s cye Boards of Directors of said corporations set forth in the Power of Attorney are in force as of the date of this Certificate. "....-'14V74r)"1 V and Notary Lucille f y ry ublic By: This Certificate Is executed in the City of Irvine, California, this Cassie J S nisford, Assistant Se.s'tary ATS -1002 (02/17) (f day of • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (1) This CONTRACT made and entered into this ' day of,,) (3 h-L , 2011 by and between the City of C earwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City ", and �Q,ICL .si Co '»- hal Co . , of the City of VI.._e.tters County of and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor ". state :]' M, herein WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: PROJECT NAME: Morningside Recreation Complex — New Recreation Center PROJECT NO.: 16- 0035 -PR in the amount of $_5,702,809.73 In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, technical specifications, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. SECTION V Page 3 of 16 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (2) 0 THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES, TO THE LIMITS OF § 725.06(2). • • In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the public construction bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such public construction bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. SECTION V Page 4 of 16 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (3) S In addition to all other contract requirements as provided by law, the contractor executing this agreement agrees to comply with public records law. IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE APPLICATION OF CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, THE CONTRACTORS DUTY TO PROVIDE PUBLIC RECORDS RELATING TO THIS CONTRACT. CONTACT THE CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC RECORDS AT 727 -562 -4092, Rosemarie .Call @myclearwater.com, 112 S. Osceola Ave., Clearwater, FL 33756 • The contractor's agreement to comply with public records law applies specifically to: a) Keep and maintain public records required by the City of Clearwater (hereinafter "public agency ") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder. b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as may be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law. c) Ensure that the public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the records to the public agency. d) Upon completion of the contract , transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for retaining public records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency. e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does notpossess the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time. f) The contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in accordance with the contract. g) A contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes. h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if: SECTION V Page 5 of 16 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (4) 1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public records request within a reasonable time; and 2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the public records request, including a statement that the contractor has not complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor. i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Such notices must be sent by common carrier delivery service or by registered, Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic format. j) A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: William B. Horne, II City Manager Countersigned: Attest: By: .— C.RADrItiVr tkwj Approved Rosemarie Call City Clerk George N. Cretekos, Mayor Contttfctor must indicate whether: Corporation, Partnership, Company, or Individual Matt r, . Smith Assistant City Attorney 1.1) (pnstr VC Co, (Contxctor) By: 1 'C r SEAL) Print Name: D jIA U 1- 4ii lG }4-s Title: j %fIF_t, 10 Ytr The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation — provide Affidavit. SECTION V Page 6 of 16 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • SECTION V— Contract Documents CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT TO OWNER: City of Clearwater PROJECT NAME: Morningside Recreation Complex New Recreation Center Parks & Rec. Dept. PROJECT NO.: 16- 0035 -PR 100 S. Myrtle Ave. CONTRACT DATE: r Clearwater, FL 33756 BOND NO.: r I, recorded in O.R. Book f ], Page r ], of the Public Records of Pinellas County, Florida. CONTRACTOR: r' Pursuant to § 255.05(11), Florida Statutes, and in accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the: [insert name of Surety] [address] [address] on bond of [insert name of Contractor] [address] [address] ,SURETY, ,CONTRACTOR, hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve Surety of any of its obligations to City of Clearwater Parks & Recreation Dept 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 as set forth in said Surety's bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand this day of Attest: (Seal): SECTION V ,OWNER, (Surety) (Signature of authorized representative) (Printed name and title) Page 7 of 16 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSALBID BOND (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, Caladesi Construction Co. as Contractor, and Developers Surety and Indemnity Company as Surety, whose address is 17771 Cowan Avenue, Suite 100, Irvine CA 92614 , are held and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Ten Percent of the Amount Bid Dollars ($ 10% ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of Caladesi Construction Co. as Contractor, and Developers Surety and Indemnity Company as Surety, for work specified as: Morningside Recreation Center Project #16- 0035 -PR all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Public Construction Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal /Bid Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Principal must indicate whether: X Corporation, Partnership, Company, or Signed this 23rd day of May Cal desi Construction Co. Individual ,20 17. Principal By: Title Developers Surety and Indemnity Company Vv Sure Kevin R. Wojtowicz, Attorney -in -Fact The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation — provide Affidavit. SECTION V Page 8 ofX ifo Updated: 2/6/2017 • • SECTION V — Contract Documents AFFIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Pinellas ) Scott Hinrichs Caladesi Construction Co. and existing under and by virtue of the laws 1390 Donegan Rd. , being duly sworn, deposes and says that he,(she is Secretary of a corporation organized of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: (Street & Number) Largo (City) Pinellas (County) FL (State) Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by -laws of Caladesi Construction Co. (Name of Corporation) Affiant further says that Donald J. Hinrichs (Officer's Name) (Title) is President of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for Caladesi Construt'l1oi 'to: or said corporation by virtue of Corp. Meeting as of May 15, 2017 Sworn to before me this SECTION V Board of Directors. If by day of iiiMMTRINPFAKOMINEC Page 9 of 16 Updated: 2/6/2017 • SECTION V — Contract Documents NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Pinellas ) Donald J. Hinrichs being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is President of Caladesi Construction Co. the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents of, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof. Sworn to and subscribed before me this LID day of Affiant Nota Pu. is Agik DELMAS WAYNE WYATT N •;,r MY COMMISSION # GG 045335 by EXPIRES: March 5, 2021 ''•° ;; «°r Bonded Thru Notary Public Underwriters SECTION V Page 10 of 16 Updated: 2/6/2017 SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSAL (1) • TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for • • Morningside Recreation Complex — New Recreation Center - Project No. 16- 0035 -PR and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked Morningside Recreation Complex — New Recreation Center - Project No. 16- 0035 -PR Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Public Construction Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. SECTION V Page 11 of 16 Updated: 2/6/2017 • SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSAL (2) Attached hereto is a bond or certifie" r11eok on IVVAN`Y A' f!%'_A•rf , mmum o _ 1 %o of C 1 rxv o & (.4geff AND (WAIN It( of l 41Q1MP- i1J Ne (s k" i 4fis, 6}) (being a for the sum gal ._,� °.I01 ,iii *it 1 alL1 ntractor's total bid amou t). The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: ADDRESSES: Donald J. Hinrichs 416 Harborview Lane Largo, FL 337711 Scott D. Hinrichs 1659 S.Frederica Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 Signature of Bidder: The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Wherq„the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice President, he must,,byraffid vit,r show-his authority, to b. l the corporation. Princip igAS" •C,21. By: t Company Legal Name: Title: Tq=Ari/ti Caladesi Construction Co. 'II�,t,. Doing Business As (if different than above): N/A Business Address of Bidder: 1390 Donegan Road City and State: Largo, FL Phone: 727 -585 -9945 Dated at Ld81O, f , this 1. day of Zip Code 33771 Email Address: dhinrichs@caladesi.biz SECTION V , A.D., 20a. Page 12 of 16 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET PROJECT: Mornin2side Recreation Complex — New Recreation Center - Project No. 16- 0035 -PR Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. 1 Date: April 26, 2017 Addendum No. 2 Date: May 15, 2017 Addendum No. 3 Date: May 17,2017 Addendum No. 4 Date: May 19,2017 Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Dona ' J. Hinrichs (Na 7e o l7; (Signature of Officer President (Title of fficer) S. (Date) a*c7I1 ( ) SECTION V Page 13 of 16 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • SECTION V- Contract Documents Addendum No. 4 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: Morningside Recreation Complex New Recreation Center CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR ITEM UNIT TOTAL NO DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY. PRICE PRICE General Contractor shall provide labor, equipment, materials and all insurances as necessary for construct a new recreation building approximately 21,000 sq. ft. all site work required at Momingside Recreation Complex -2400 Harn Boulevard - Clearwater Florida 33754 according to Building Permit BCP2017 -01415 and the construction documents of Project Number 16- 0035 -PR for the lump sum price provided in this contract. 1. Mobilization & Demobilization LS 1 $ 54,270.00 $ 54,270.00 2. Surveying, Layout, Material Testing & 'As Built' Dwg. LS 1 $ 23,466.75 $ 23,466.75 3 Inclusive of all site work shown on Bldg. Permit BCP2017 -91415 LS 1 $ 299,458.85 $ 299,458.85 4. Inclusive of all building construction of New Recreation l 2 5771‘ O f qr 25 ( 2 ?s Center shown on Bldg. Permit BCP2017 -91415 LS $� $"4410;054978-7- 5 Extended 3 year warranty of beyond 7 year provided by Yamnar Gas HV /AC System LS 1 $ 27,315.90 $ 27,315.90 6. Inclusive of all items for a 10 year maintenance agreement of Yanmar Gass HV /AC system, includes monthly maintenance of system. Owner shall provide lift for access of air handler in gymnasium during the 10 year maintenance agreement LS 1 $ 67,604.34 $ 67,604.34 7. General Contractor shall provide an electrical lift to Service HV /AC air handling units mounted in the Gymnasium Ceiling per Florida Building Code, Section 306.3 Applicance in Attic a man lift large enough to allow removal of the largest applicance and wide enough to accommodate service personnel to perform servicing of the appliance in the gymnasium. The man lift shall be stored on site in the storage room off the gymnasium 8. General Conditions/Supervision 9. Profit and Overhead 10. City of Clearwater Building Permit No Fee for City project from Building Dept. LS 1 $ 26,004.15 $ 26,004.15 LS 1 $ 195,221.75 $ 195,221.75 LS 1 $ 381,680.21 $ 381,680.21 LS 1 N/A N/A 11. Sales Tax & Materials for Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) of materials (construction material for building site work items. & all other miscellaneous items) A Wee o? '. 00 1 1 -a. Owner Direct Purchase 1 1 b. Sales Tax amount 1 ' $ $ G(9�9,'4-t2 -r • a/,,1��/�� �LS SECTION V 1V f L Page 14 of 16 (l( Updated: 2/6/17 • SECTION V- Contract Documents Addendum No. 4 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL (continued) PROJECT: Morningside Recreation Complex New Recreation Center CONTRACT 16- 0035 -PR ITEM UNIT NO DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY. PRICE TOTAL PRICE 12. 10% Bid Bond, Performance surety bond recorded at Pinellas County Court House recorded original provide to the Owner LS 1 13. Sub Total of items 1 -12 14. *10% Contingency of line 13 *(Note contingency funds shall only utilized upon written approval by th Owner's representative to utilize these fund for additional Scope of Work not included in items 1 -13 of the Bill of Quantities. Contingency funds not utilized in the implementation of this contract shall be returned to the Owner by closing out purchase order short during close out of the contract (purchase order.) $ 27,669.66 15. Grand Total items 1 through 12 Bid Items plus 10% Contingency $ CONTRACTOR NAME: Caladesi Construction Co. BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: • BIDDER'S GRAND TOT ✓` /kWhrt Scar $ 27,669.66 578k iV57 2 s 364,321b- 5-- th ?dztYO ?. ?3 4;044-5aelt (Numbers) F illion Fourteen Thousand Two Hundred Fif Three 72/100 t ITAre the f �area, 4x'7 Attni/ I ki rtr rdsj e)b A. For extra work: OH &P percentage for materials purchased on a time and material (T &M) basis. B. For extra work: OH &P percentage for general contractor for subcontractor services on additional work. C. For extra work: Labor rate for work performed on a time and material basis (includes all taxes and fringe benefits). 170.00 /HR L CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE: 1. ADD $ 5% ADD $ 8% ADD $ The contractor agrees to commence work within 7 calendar days from execution of contract and notice to proceed 2. The contractor further agrees to complete the work within 330 calendar days from execution of contract and notice to proceed per the referenced schedule in the Invitation to Bid. THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS THIS TOTAL BID BASED ON KRIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE • THE OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SELECT ANY ITEMS AND OR REJECT ALL BIDS. THE TOTAL PRICE SHALL BE BASED ON ITEMS SELECTED BY THE OWNER OF THIS PROJECT. SECTION V Page 15 of 16 Updated: 2/6/17 SECTION V — Contract Documents SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM • PER SECTION III, ITEM 25, IF YOUR BID IS $1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. • • The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendo company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwatlas writing, no later th. five (5) calendar days after any of A. its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Compan th Activi ; Sti an List, the 4crutnized Companies fe Authonzed Signatur Donald J. Hinrichs Printed Name President Title Caladesi Construction Co. Name of Entity /Corporation STATE OF Florida COUNTY OF Pinellas The fore loin in ru en; was a� owledged before me on this lip day of .4 Y �� • • � � iM (name � f person w • se sill a re i Al '' (title) of a i.! .PS. e. A r. Ar corporation/entity), personally known to me as • escribe herein My Commission Expires: NOTARY SEAL ABOVE SECTION V , 20 11 ,by notarized) as the • (name of , or producod a PIJ_idn tak •ath. Notary •_ ♦ r i li. ublic 1 1.....11 it CEEMAS WAYNE WYATT f A ltflr'COMMISSI014 GQ 045335 's; a -•:» cji,XPOLokliferch'5,2021 as't tiN Underwriters , Page 16 of 16 Updated: 2/6/2017 • • • • POWER OF ATTORNEY FOR DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY INDEMNITY COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA PO Box 19725, IRVINE, CA 92623 (949) 263 -3300 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS that except as expressly limited, DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY and INDEMNITY COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA, do each hereby make, constitute and appoint: ** *John R. Neu, Brett M. Rosenhaus, Kevin R. Wojtowicz, Daniel F. Oaks, Charles J. Nielson, Charles D. Nielson, David R. Turcios, Michael A. Gentile, Jessica P Reno, Devin Joe Phillips, jointly or severally * ** as their true and lawful Attorney(s) -in -Fact, to make, execute, deliver and acknowledge, for and on behalf of said corporations, as sureties, bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship giving and granting unto said Attorney(s) -in -Fact full power and authority to do and to perform every act necessary, requisite or proper to be done in connection therewith as each of said corporations could do, but reserving to each of said corporations full power of substitution and revocation, and all of the acts of said Attorney(s) -in -Fact, pursuant to these presents, are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY and INDEMNITY COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA, effective as of January 1st, 2008. RESOLVED, that a combination of any two of the Chairman of the Board, the President, Executive Vice - President, Senior Vice - President or any Vice President of the corporations be, and that each of them hereby is, authorized to execute this Power of Attomey, qualifying the attorney(s) named in the Power of Attorney to execute, on behalf of the corporations, bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship; and that the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary of either of the corporations be, and each of them hereby is, authorized to attest the execution of any such Power of Attorney; RESOLVED, FURTHER, that the signatures of such officers may be affixed to any such Power of Attomey or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures shall be valid and binding upon the corporations when so affixed and in the future with respect to any bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship to which it is attached. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY and INDEMNITY COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA have severally caused these presents to be signed by their respective officers and attested by their respective Secretary or Assistant Secretary this 6th day of February, 2017. By: By: Daniel Young, Senior Vice- President Mark Lansdon, Vice - President State of California County of Orange On A notary public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document to which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document. February 6, 2017 Date personally appeared before me, Lucille Raymond, Notary Public Here Insert Name and Title of the Officer Daniel Young and Mark Lansdon LUCILLE RAYMOND Commission +i 2081945 Notary Public • California Orange County M Comm. Expires Oct 13 2018 Place Notary Seal Above Name(s) of Signer(s) who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she /they executed the same in his/her /their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his /her /their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of Califomia that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. / G41/71914 Signature Lucille •:y ond, Notary Public CERTIFICATE The undersigned, as Secretary or Assistant Secretary of DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY or INDEMNITY COMPANY OF CALIFORNIA, does hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney remains in full force and has not been revoked and, furthermore, that the provisions of the resolutions of the respective Boards of Directors of said corporations set forth in the Power of Attorney are in force as of the date of this Certificate, This Certificate is executed in the City of Irvine, Califomia, this By: Cassie J. msford, Assistant Se •i tary ATS -1002 (02/17) 23'a' day of tray 2011 • • IDRUG -FREE WORKPLACE FORM I The undersigned vendor in accordance with Florida Statute 287.087 hereby certifies that Caladesi Construction Co. (Name of Business) does: 1. Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. 2. Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business' policy of maintaining a drug -free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. 3. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). 4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of Chapter 1893 or of any controlled substance law of the United States or any state, for violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. 5. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program, if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. 6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. As the person authorized to sign the statement, I certify that this firm complies fully with the above requirements. is Sienatu*e" fl Date ACORO® CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE `..---' DATE(MMIDDIYYYY) 6/2/2017 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. PORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. UBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER WorkComp Solutions, Inc. P.O. BOX 24987 Lakeland, FL 33802 www.workcompsolutionsfl.com CONTACT Pac°Nao. Ertl: 863- 6464642 FAX c, No): 863 -646 -3521 EMAIL ADDRESS: INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURER A: Bridgefield Employers Insurance Company 10701 INSURED Caladesi Construction Co 1390 Donegan Rd. Largo FL 3771 INSURER B : INSURERC: INSURERD: $ INSURER E : $ INSURER F : COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 35976017 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. 1NSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL INSD SUER WVD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF (MMID M(YYI POLICY EXP IMWDDIYYYY) UNITS COMMERCIAL. GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ AGE RENTED PPREM SESO(Ea occurrence) $ CLAIMS -MADE OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ GENERAL AGGREGATE $ GE 'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES POLICY I I JE T OTHER: PER: LOC PRODUCTS - COMP /OP AGG $ $ • AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO OWNED AUTOS ONLY HIRED AUTOS ONLY SCHEDULED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS ONLY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ $ UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAR _ OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE EACH OCCURRENCE $ AGGREGATE $ DED RETENT ON $ $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBEREXCLUDED? (Mandatory In NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below YIN I N / A 0830 -31491 3/1/2017 3/1/2018 ✓ STATUTE ✓ ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 500,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 500,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 500,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) Momingside Recreaton Complex; Project NO: 16- 0035 -PR 30 day Notice of Cancellation Applies. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION City of Clearwater Parks & Recreation Dept. 100 S. Myrtle Ave earwater FL 33756 I SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Darrell J. Mills ACORD 25 (2016/03) ©1988.2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 35976017 1 17/18 WC 1 Barbara Emery 1 6/2/2017 7 :59:34 AM (CDT) Page 1 of 1 12 RO® CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MMIDD/YYYY) 06/02/2017 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(les) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder In Ileu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER Commercial Insurance MarketIng, Inc. 7303A Merchant Court Sarasota FL 34240 CONTACT NAME: J. MICHAEL WELCH PHONE (941) 373-3888 . N : PHONE). Edl: raADDARLESS: I FAX C, No): (941) 3736660 INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC INSURER A: NATIONAL TRUST INSURANCE COMPANY 20141 INSURED CALADESI CONSTRUCTION CO. 1390 DONEGAN ROAD LARGO FL 33771 INSURER B : INSURER C : INSURER D : INSURER E : COVERAGES INSURER F: roc Yh71Vre nu umocrc: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT. TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR FL 33758 TYPE OF INSURANCE MID MOD WVD POLICY NUMBER (MMIDDYOIYYYYL (MMM/D YINYYYY) OMITS A ( X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABIUTY X X 0L0007897 11/01/2016 11/01/2017 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 1 CLAIMS-MADE X OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ 100,000 X X CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY MED EXP (My one person) $ 5,000 $1000 PD DEDUCTIBLE PERSONAL &ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE UMITAPPUESPER: Fi POLICY X IJECTT [1 LOC OTHER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 PRODUCTS - CAMP/OP AGO $ 2.000,000 $ A ' AUTOMOBILE X — X X UABIUTY ANY AUTO ALL HIRED AUTOS PIP $10,000 X SCHEDULED NON AUTOS OWNED X CA0014666 11/01/2016 11/01/2017 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) S PROPERTY DAMAGE (Peracddent) $ $ A X UMBRELLA UAB EXCESS LIAR X OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE UMB0007836 11/01/2016 11/01/2017 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 2,000,000 AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 DED I XI RETENTION $ 10,000 $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' UABIUTY Y / N ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory In NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below N f A ( I STATUTE 111 ER" E.L EACH ACCIDENT $ E.L DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ E.L DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ A AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE CA0014666 11/01/2016 11/01/2017 COMPREHENSIVE DEDUCTIBLE $1,000 COLLISION DEDUCTIBLE $1,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (ACORD 101, AdditIonal Remarks Schedule, may be attached If more space Is required) MORNINGSIDE RECREATION COMPLEX; PROJECT NO:16- 0035 -PR --- -- - - - --- CITY OF CLEARWATER PARKS & RECREATION DEPT. 100 S. MYRTLE AVENUE CLEARWATER FL 33758 VI•1.V161.■l1 I ,V,\ SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN PROVI S. AU ORIZED REPRESENTATIVE a: • i• ACORD 26 (2014/01) ©1988 -2014 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo aro register arks of ACORD ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT (727) 562 -4747 FAX: (727) 562 -4755 Pre -Bid Conference Agenda Date /Time: Wednesday, May 3, 2017 @ 1 pm Meeting Location: 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FI. Municipal Service Building First Floor Conference Room 130 Morninqside Recreation Center Project # 16- 0035 -PR City of Clearwater Project Manager: Leroy Chin 727 - 562 -4856 Email: Leroy.Chinc1 myclearwater.com Consultant Company /Project Manager: Wannamacher & Jenson /Jason Jenson 727 - 822 -5566 Email: JasonAwjarc.com Deuel & Associates /Brian Barker 727 - 822 -4151 Email BrianAdeuelengineerinq.com • Engineering Contract Specialist: Lisa Bayly 727 - 562 -4782 Email: Lisa.BaylyAmyclearwater.com 1. Introduction of Attendees 2. Sign -In Sheets — This is a recommended meeting. Please complete the sign -in sheet legibly and completely. Copies of the Pre -bid Conference sign -in sheet will be scanned and posted on the plan room website. 3. City's Plan Room — Plans are available for purchase at DVC Marketing formerly known as Jiffy Reprographics, 411 S. Garden Avenue, Clearwater, Florida (727) 445 -1034. Any notification e-mails (sign -in sheets, addendums, date changes, etc.) from the plan room will be from wendyc DVC360.com. On occasion, the City will issue notification e-mails via the plan room. In this instance, notification e-mails will be from Wendy with DVC Marketing or lisa.bayly @myclearwater.com. Please add both e -mail addresses to your white list or non -spam list to ensure receipt. You may access the DVC Plan Room through a link on the City website: http: / /www.myclearwater.com/ /business /bid - information 4. Pre - Qualification — In order to be eligible to bid for this project, the contractor /bidder must be pre - qualified with the Engineering Department's Construction Division in the Commercial Building category with a minimum amount of $4,250,000.00. It is the •Contractor's /Bidder's responsibility to confirm pre - qualification eligibility prior to submitting a bid. Contractors may check their pre - qualification status by contacting the Construction Office Specialist Laura Davis at (727) 562 -4509. Pre - qualification • applications and submittal items are due on 5/9/2017, two weeks (ten business days) before the bid opening. If the pre -bid meeting is a mandatory meeting and if a company plans to submit a bid on this project, the Company name on the sign in sheet must match the Company name in the pre - qualification packet. If the person attending the pre -bid meeting is a subcontractor then indicate so on the sign -in sheet with both company names. • 5. Bid Proposal Forms - All quantities and costs must be filled in legibly and completely. Please re -check your figures for accuracy. 6. Proposal Bond — must be completely filled out with the 10% bid bond amount. 7. Scrutinized Companies - Please Note, if Project is $1,000,000 or more please see Section III, Article 25, Scrutinized Companies and Business Operations with Cuba and Syria Certification Form. Otherwise, if final bid amount is less than $1,000,000, this form may be omitted. 8. Request for Clarifications — Submit in writing via email to Project Manager by end of day on 5/12/2017. Questions must include: company name, contact name, email address and phone number of contact person (in case clarification is needed). 9. Addendums - Responses will be issued via an addendum by end of day 5/16/2018. If you have purchased plans through another plan house, please check the DVC Plan Room to ensure the receipt of any addenda information. It is the responsibility of the prospective bidder to ensure that they have received all addendums. 10. Bid Opening is scheduled for 5/23/2017 at 1 p.m. 11. Contract Award is scheduled for 6/14/2017 12. Scope of Work — Scope of Work: 1. General Contractor shall provide labor, equipment, materials and all insurances as necessary for construct a new recreation building approximately 21,000 sq. ft. includes but not limited to site work, underground infrastructure utilities to service new building, grading, asphalt parking lot, irrigation system, landscaping, sanitary /storm sewer and water systems, natural gas system piping, natural gas HV /AC system, electrical system, low voltage: data, telephone, security, close circuit television system, hearing loop system, fire alarm system, masonry, concrete flatwork, steel framing & trusses, metal and built up roofing system, glazing system, drywall, rough and finish carpentry, reflective ceiling system, millwork, door and door hardware, wall finishes and painting at Morningside Recreation Complex — 2400 Harn Boulevard — Clearwater Florida 33754according to Building Permit BCP2017- 01415 and the construction documents of Project Number 16- 0035 -PR for the lump sum price provided in this contract. 2 • • • 2. The Contractor shall provide 1 [Fixed project signs as described in SECTION 111, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required at no additional cost to the Owner due to the Contractor's schedule of work. 3. List Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Items to be included in the Contract Document contractor to include all sales taxes as applicable by law for this project. See ODP document in Appendix of this contact document. 4. All Bidders shall be Pre - qualified in May 9, 2017 two week prior to bid opening date. Prequalification minimum amount is $4,250,000.00 attached copy of pre - qualifications is included in this contract document. 5. 10% bid bond is required and a performance surety bond is also required for this project see detailed information in this contract document 6. The prospective bidders shall agree to hold his bid prices for ninety (90) days from bid opening date. 7. The General Contractor shall note the Owner shall continue daily operations of the facility(pool playground tennis courts and parking lot other than as shown on the contract documents during the construction of the recreation building and the General Contractor shall minimize disruption of daily operational business activities. 8. General Contractor's lay down area shall be within the confines of construction limit and exact location shall be provided at the pre- construction meeting. 9. The Owner has submitted for Building Permit application and the Contractor shall collect the Building Permit from the City of Clearwater Building Dept. There shall be no fee required for the General Contractor to collect the building permit. The Building Permit No.BCP2017- 01415. The General Contractor shall call in for all inspections as required at the correct intervals for City Inspector observe the work performed and sign of as the project progresses. The General Contractor shall be required to close out the building permit and obtain a Certificate of Completion. Provide the Building Permit and Certificate of Completion originals to the Owner in the Operation & Maintenance Manual (O &M Manual). 10. General Contractor shall construct the recreation center per the permitted drawings with the City of Clearwater Building Dept. No deviations from the permitted construction drawings or technical specifications of this project. Deviations shall only be allowed in writing by the General Contractor to the Architect and Owner and deviations shall be approved in writing by the Architect and Owner. Any approved deviation shall be the responsibly of the General Contractor and issues may arise from the deviations requested and approved by the Architect and Owner. Under no circumstance shall the Architect or Owner provide any additional funds for any cost arise from the deviation in completing a fully functional recreation center per the design intent of the building permitted drawings. Any deviation from the permitted drawings the building permit shall be updated by submitting an amendment to the building permit by the General Contractor prior to beginning and approved deviations. 3 • • • 11. Schedule: a. Plans available for General Contractor for collection April 20, 2017 b. Pre Bid Meeting Municipal Service Bldg. - 100 S. Myrtle Ave. - Rm. 130 - Clearwater, FL 33756 -5520 c. Last Day for Prequalification Submission Date -May 9, 2017 d. Last Day for Question (Request for Information) Date - May 12, 2017 e. Last Addendum Issue Date - May 16, 3017 f. Bid Due Date - May 23, 2017 — 1:00 PM - Purchasing Office, 3rd Floorl00 S. Myrtle Ave, Clearwater, FL 33756 -5520 g. Intent award of contract by City Council shall be on June 14, 2017 and contractor shall collect the contract on Friday June 16, 2017 and execute signing the contract. Notice to proceed with the work shall be on Monday, June 26, 2017 and contractor shall be on site performing the work within 7 days from Notice to Proceed. Contract duration 330 Consecutive Calendar Days Substantial Completion of the work shall be Tuesday, May 22, 2018 12. Substantial completion means the General Contractor shall have substantially completed the building and site work to obtain a Certificate of Completion from the City of Clearwater Building Dept. and the Owner may occupy the new building for operation of the facility. 13. In execute signing the contract the Surety Performance Bond shall be recorded at the Pinellas County Court House and the original and the executed sign contractor shall be returned to the City for finalization of the contract. 14.The Owner shall develop a request to requisition and formally submit for Purchase Order based on the amount of contract approved by City Council and submitted on Friday June 16,2017 and the Contractor shall receive the purchase order the following week. 15. The Owner has elected to institute tax saving to for this project and the General Contractor shall provide cost for direct purchase order by the City. The General Contractor shall include all applicable sales tax for materials to be purchased by the city. Upon contract award and execution, a Purchase Order (PO) shall be issued to General Contractor for the full amount of contract. 16. General Contractor shall submit a list Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Summary of Materials of potential ODP vendors and estimated dollar amounts (minimum of $10,000) to the City for consideration prior to initial pay application. Certain bid proposals will list pre- determined item(s) for ODP and the accompanying tax savings. The ODP Summary shall list: (a) item cost and (b) sales tax savings associated with the item. Direct purchase shall be considered for single items that exceed $10,000 in value and /or items identified in Section V, Bidders Proposal. See Appendix for additional information Owner Direct Purchase of Materials. Owner Direct Purchase cost shall be included in the Bidders Proposal See section V Bidders Proposal Item 11 a &b • • • 17. Pre - construction meeting prior to award of contract (June 2017, exact date to be determined).At this meeting the contractor will provide the following: a. Schedule of Values to be utilized for progress payments. Final copy of Payment Schedule in the 0 & M Manual. b. Detailed progress schedule shall be submitted at the pre construction meeting and updated for each progress meeting and long lead items shown on the schedule. Final Schedule in the 0 & M Manual. c. Material submittals & Shop Drawings — list of materials to be provided to the Architect /Engineer for approval prior to purchasing. All material and shop drawings shall be submitted within 75 day from notice to proceed. Contractor shall maintain a submittal log showing dates of submittal, status of submittals and approvals. All Material & Shop Drawing Submittals in the 0 & M Manual. d. Discussion of project closeout procedures. 3 hard copies of 0 & M Manual shall be provided to the Owner in a three ring binder and separate tabs shall separate each section. e. All warranty shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. f. Owner to provide electric and water during the construction of the project. g. General Contractor to provide employee sanitation (shall not use Owner public restrooms). h. The schedule is to be discussed at project progress meetings and shall be held every two week at an agreed day and time. Discussion items at the meetings as follows: i. Work completed the past two (2) weeks. ii. Work scheduled next two (2) weeks. iii. Issues of concern. (Questions and answers.) iv. Updated schedule. v. Draft pay request and submission of invoice. 18. Quality Assurance: a. The General Contractor's field superintendent is to review the project documents in total, and subsequently meet with the engineer prior to starting the work to address any questions relevant to the project requirements. b. General Contractor shall provide all barricades, as necessary to protect the property structure and safety of the residents, visitors, and workers at all times. c. General Contractor's staging area to be determined at the pre- construction meeting. 19.The General Contractor's superintendent shall be required to maintain a daily log on -site identifying the number of workers, work activity, change in weather conditions, etc. and shall be included in the 0 & M Manual 20. Payment for work performed. a. The General Contractor shall submit pay application of the 25th of each month of work performed the pass 30 days. b. A pencil draft of the pay application shall be provided to the Engineer and Owner at one of the progress meeting for review. Upon approval the General Contractor shall submit an electronic pay application for approval and upon approval by the Engineer shall send electronic copy to the Owner for payment. c. Payment of request for payment shall be made within 30 days from date of invoice and payment shall be made to the General Contractor's mailing address. No check will be provided by hand delivering and only delivery by U. S. Postal Service. 5 • • • d. Final payment shall be made as stipulated in the contract documents. 21. 10% retainage of total project cost shall be retained by the Owner until the following schedule of items are completed: a. 5% retainage may be requested upon: b. Substantial completion of the project: c. Close out of Building Permit Final d. Obtain Certificate of Completion e. Preliminary walk through by Engineer & Owner f. Punch list has been provided to the Contractor to perform punch list 22. Remaining 5% retainage may be request upon: a. Punch list items are completed and request for final walk through by the Owner and Engineer and approval punch list items are completed. b. 0 & M Manual has been reviewed and approved by Engineer, turned over to the Owner Hard Copies of the 0 & M Manual with divider tabs of each section c. Hard copy set of red lined As Built drawings provide to the Owner. d. electronic CD's of files in the 0 & M Manual and As built drawings 23. Deliverable at Close Out of Project: a. Red Line `As- Built' drawings shall be provided to the Owner. The Contractor shall obtain a clean set of drawings from the Owner. The clean set of drawings the Contractor shall red line and changes to the work performed. 24. Surveying layout and grades by the General Contractor. 25. General Contractor shall install: a. Temporary construction fencing b. Tree barricades c. Root pruning d. Silt fencing and any other storm water protection prior to calling Land Recourses for inspection for collection of Building Permit BCP2017 -01415 26. General Contractor shall note the Owner intends to operate the Aquatic Center beginning Memorial weekend May 2018 and will continue operation during the construction of the new recreation center. General contractor shall take all safety precautions necessary for safety and welfare of the public and city staff. 27. The Owner has provided temporary power for existing irrigation well and the General Contractor shall maintain operation of existing irrigation well and provide permanent power from new recreation building. 28. Existing irritation system is operational and General Contractor shall relocate irritation system as required to construct new recreation center. 29. Hearing Loop in Multipurpose Room General Contractor shall contact Patrick Ostman for instruction of installing hearing loop in proposed floor and termination points for connection of hearing loop equipment. Contract information: 6 • Indoor Wireless Solutions 732 Stremma Rd Largo, FL 33770 Office: 813- 333 -6557 Cell: 813 -597 -3227 Email: patrick.ostman @1 -W -S.org 30. Fire Alarm and Security system shall contact John Maire for installation of low voltage wiring system and hardware. The Owner has ongoing contract with Maire Company for monitoring and supply of hardware the Fire Alarm and Security systems. Maire Company P. O. Box 1346 Dunedin, FL 34697 Office: (727) 712 -3250 Email: mairesys@verizon.net The General contractor shall provide all conduits /raceway for fire alarm and security systems and no conduits exposed on finished wall viewable to public spaces. All conduits and raceway shall be behind walls, coordinate all work with Maire Company. 31. Natural gas water heaters the Owner has received from Clearwater Gas for installation of Rinnia C199i tankless water heaters contact person with Clearwater gas is Chris Thorn in the appendix is attached proposal for gas installation. The Owner shall contract directly with Clearwater Gas for gas system piping and gas water heaters for the facility. The General Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with Clearwater Gas for installation of gas piping system and all electrical and potable water and blow off plumbing for the water heaters and any other items inclusive for a complete operable gas system of the propose new recreation center's Yanmar Gas HVAC system. Chris Thorn Clearwater Gas System 711 Maple St. Clearwater FI. 33755 Office: (727)562 -4980 x7457 Cell: (727)224 -7306 Fax: (727)562 -4989 Email: chris.thorn @myclearwater.com Description of work installation by Clearwater Gas: From existing Natural Gas meter serving Pool, extend underground gas line to new Recreation Center. Extend gas line into Electrical Room. Mount two (2) Rinnai C199i Tankless Water Heaters on wall common with Multi Purpose Room. Connect gas line to heaters and vent Water Heater through roof above. From underground gas line, extend another gas line into Rec. Center, extend gas line above dropped ceiling to Janitor Room located near Bathrooms. Mount two (2) Rinnai C199i Tankless Water Heaters on wall common with Men's Bathroom. Connect gas line to heaters and vent Water Heaters through Roof above. Continue gas line through Lobby to Gymnasium. Continue gas line through Gymnasium into Storage Room located on North side of Gymnasium. Mount one (1) Rinnai C199i Tankless Water Heater on wall common with Life 7 • • • Guard Room. Connect gas line to heater and vent Water Heater through Roof above. Extend gas line behind stackable Washer /Dryer. Connect gas line to Dryer with Stop and Flex Connector. Install second Natural Gas meter at Northeast corner of building to serve Natural Gas A/C system. Extend gas line to ten (10) Yanmar Gas Fired Refrigeration Units. Connect gas line to units with stops and flex connectors. 32.The HV /AC YANMAR System is a Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) natural gas heat pump system, Owner recommends the system be installed with a certified YANMAR installer or an HVAC company who has vast knowledge of installation of variable refrigerant flow systems. YANMAR provide seminars for being a certified YANMAR System, contact: Roger Davis or Integrity Sales & Marketing, Inc. 3140 Mulford Rd. Mulberry, fl. 33860 Cell: 863 -581 -0687 Email: roger@intsales.com Brad Hopkins Integrity Sales & Marketing, Inc. 3140 Mulford Rd. Mulberry, fl. 33860 CeII: 863 -581 -0690 Email: brad(a,intsales.com Upon receiving and opening bid the Owner will issue a letter of intent to award the contract to the successful responsible low bidder. The Owner shall request meeting with the General Contractor for schedule of values of the project base on his bid price based on specification division for value of the work. The cost associated with the installation of the YANMAR Minimum requirements for all potential installation companies: a. Installation company shall hold HVAC Contractor license in the State of Florida. b. All installation crews nust have verifiable VRF installation experience from a major VRF company (Daiken, Mistubishi, LG etc.) Certification shall be provided with all submittal documentation or upon request by the Owner /Architect. c. Installation company shall guarantee their workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of Yanmar VRF startup. d. Installation company must have adequate labor force (crew) to perform scope of work in a professional timely manner and project safe manner to ensure the proper operation of the Yanmar VRF System. e. Installation company shall be able to read and interoperate all submittal documentations, drawings and instructions from Yanmar. HV /AC System verses a conventional electrical HVAC system, which includes but not limited to the following: a. YANMAR HV /AC System b. Concrete flatwork c. Retaining wall d. Screening of mechanical yard e. All piping and redundant condensation piping f. Additional structural steel fabrication works to hang system g. Additional electrical work h. Condensation stainless steel pans i. Additional HVAC ducts 8 • • • j. Extra labor involved 33. The General Contractor shall provide a electrical man lift to meet the Florida Building Code, Section 306.3 Appliance in Attic. The Owner man lift shall be large enough to allow removal of the largest appliance and wide enough to accommodate two (2) service personnel to perform servicing the appliances in the gymnasium. The man lift shall be stored on site in the storage room off the gymnasium prior to completion of the project. The proposed manlift shall not be utilized during the construction of the project. Man lift shall be sized to reach the highest point in the gym and care shall be taken in section of the lift as not to damage the maple hardwood flooring. The man lift shall have charging equipment included as part of the man lift package. Shop drawings shall be provided to the Architect and Owner for approval prior to General Contractor purchasing the man lift. 34. General contractor shall note sanitary sewer lines shall be only mechanical, electrical, plumbing (MEP) installed below grade no other shall be allowed below grade except for penetration into the building. All MEP shall be installed in walls or above reflective ceiling or exposed shall be painted. 35. All painted wall surface shall receive heavy knock down textured surface, General Contractor shall provide 5'x5' textured surface for approval by Owner. Approved texture surface sample shall be store by General Contractor for future reference. 36. Pool trench drain is shown circular curve for ease of installation this will now be segmental sections and shop drawing shall be provided by the General Contractor for approval by the Owner and Engineer prior to ordering trench drain. 37. All landscape bed which has been compacted during constructions shall be tilled to a minimum depth of 30 inches to loosen up compaction. 38. The General Contractor shall retain a certified irrigation designer to design irrigation system for approval by Owner. The irrigation system shall be designed based on irritation detail plans and technical specifications provided. The General Contractor shall note: a. No drip irrigation system shall be allowed such as Netafim b. Locate existing irrigation system and utilize existing system as necessary. c. Relocate existing irrigation system as necessary. d. Provide a complete operational irritation system from existing well e. Design system base on well providing 65 psi at 50 gallons per minute from point of connect at existing well location. f. Hedge along parking lot shall be irrigated with full spray nozzle and spaced accordingly. g. All spray shall be designed with 80% of maximum radius distance of nozzle to allow adjustment for wind. h. No trenching beneath tree canopy drip line of existing trees, either bore beneath tree root system or go around tree canopy drip line. i. All parkways (space between sidewalk and curb of street) shall be irrigated. j. All pipe beneath hard surfaces shall be sleeved twice the size irrigation pipe passing through and 2 inch wire sleeve shall be provided for irritation control wires. k. No irrigation head shall be spraying towards building but away from building. 1. Irrigation Consultant Designer and General Contractor is not obligated to use recommended designer: 9 • • • Michael C. Essenwein ICD Services 10803 Providence Oaks Drive Riverview, FL 33578 Office: (813) 653 -1587 Cell: (813) 495 -4987 Fax: (813) 436 -9603 Email: irrigate jampabay.rr.com 39. Upon Owner in providing letter intent to award contract the General Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule of value by Technical Specification Divisions. Contract Period: _330_ Consecutive Calendar Days 40. Questions — open to floor. 10 • Sign -in Sheet Morningside Recreation Center Project # 16- 0035 -PT Recommended Pre -Bid Conference Leroy Chin, Project Manager 100 S. MYRTLE AVENUE, CONFERENCE ROOM #130, CLEARWATER, FL 33756 Wednesday, May 3, 2017 @ 1pm Print Name I Initial O Organization P Phone E E -Mail Address Leroy Chin Landscape Architect C City of Clearwater 7 727 - 562 -4856 Catherine Corcoran Parks Support Specialist C City of Clearwater 7 727 - 562 -4809 Lisa Bayly a a "" City of Clearwater 7 727 - 562 -4782 Jason Jenson AIA Engineer of Record W Wannamacher & Jenson 7 727 - 822 -5566 Brian Barker P.E. Engineer of Record D Dueul & Associates 7 727 - 822 -4151 X 203 Brad Hopkins Sales Manager I Integrity Sales & Marketing, Inc. 8 863 - 581 -0690 G�a,� % %Xdi S S 57J 6 f f�r j='' � � �:.'�_ s�j/?✓' t1[ S (4,','''' �a • Page 1 ,e0 • • Sign-in Sheet Morningside Recreation Center Project # 16-0035-PT Recommended Pre-Bid Conference Leroy Chin, Project Manager 100 S. MYRTLE AVENUE, CONFERENCE ROOM #130, CLEARWATER, FL 33756 Wednesday, May 3, 2017 @ 1pm Print Name Initial Organization Phone E-Mail Address f f:,1/1 Or:111 e it .-1 i i'A. C4-4._,,.■.1 I 1 C. 1 I t' L ( 1:A47- N. , (=Z. ,4,-afti-c,,tit, 4\--c) 1,-efork.0\ -,-,,,_,Aisz--10-Roz ,,,,,,,. b 1,en101,C01S+K. -10e.reyx...1 CitiNr?..7er __u) Le/v COQ, -k-t.,c.,ktatk.) -76-7-ST0'3 oaco - _Net/YIN/AA, 0 fevvoc_ok)s„-In)c-170A.,,com) \„i. /-4g4v€ OW 4F-.N asruer100(36,29.-w,30 E-rimn-r/14.1(1/40gi.,ccouswveri°0 F };-a... 5c W-15) Li-t..._ CoAcikir■-g-41on Cir5 ) ''-5- 51,0, e-A.i/ Ro Se f YANCMPliz- Akon-r2., ,0,- ().7g 2,16 - 6c1,)-1 1 ct-ry — IcLru Sc_,e y710.1,1A4/2-,(0,4A, ;):;liri A (.,,,i 64-44-1 , • ' & it. il V -2 '1 ,2,1(1, z,•ic., c;F) (10,,,,:f c),,,, k , , ) L.,_ 1 il.. e C kl,'',. LL 5}4_,,„6 1,t) ..110. gPP ,5--(Lx.1,0,) 5,411( 5 IA)c . (j'7) g,9- 5311 -77AP, PA --ri.„AD e.Nsta(41., rACT ::fk;5Y/3<1, , /V1-71.1e-E, ''' ,,, I: ----I tit -I-1404'U , 0 9'76 12i(/A vi • c7(011, Cf3341 , CO Al Page 3 4, Sign-in Sheet Morningside Recreation Center Project # 16-0035-PT Recommended Pre-Bid Conference Leroy Chin, Project Manager 100 S. MYRTLE AVENUE, CONFERENCE ROOM #130, CLEARWATER, FL 33756 Wednesday, May 3, 2017 ©1pm , • Page 4 !3ri11 Name Initial Organization Phone E-Mail Address , / 7 ji) 1 ,-.71-7,4 .,.e- . fi---) -1,2 ? r..• (C - .)-;!--1 i f [..,...,__ J5a4 .. 3 . 43....--0.........TID, •'' Sc.s. g tg -4jsc. 2,ict I cl-t-t, wilso,,,I c cleiletit, J ti' _ . C0. 7,97- 7:40.--3.1.-41 rzrt.4„, 'f.c,„ -1/:7iy...,"/-s-4--f-z (k, ‘letr v 2 A4....._ Cs Mi„,,,, ir*\c-"----:4... —lin 57.2..411 LI, , Act--C.....4),E"...--1,--1 \,\--A. L. .,.L_) , • Page 4 • • Sign-in Sheet Morningside Recreation Center Project # 16-0035-PT Recommended Pre-Bid Conference Leroy Chin, Project Manager 100 S. MYRTLE AVENUE, CONFERENCE ROOM #130, CLEARWATER, FL 33756 Wednesday, May 3, 2017 @ 1pm Print Name Initial Organization Phone E-Mail Address l'ANOZ-- Mk miuz.Lo, Vtl.t ‘,0-/ECZ- e3Q‘L\4•)G. (.532,40(2A%N-xc.)N) (i. hi 7 \'16\ ) ,2 3 -1 -00 0 tit( (AtiUtu-NecYcooti-t[NGccdste-P. co, cr■e...\oe_\e,_ eArda-<S3, (.-tC\C.. %034-x-.K.e Csx'1,-Ikrue-ktyl Qorks\par.6 rA-Dor- Occ:5\558 e_,-.6cno-47-1rk3).,(2) bar):),c_s co k-MSArck...C.2ho fl . c on-7 13) i C (.-0C, f°2e- / - ' ,.5 e:7,,,,,41011k4 Alit-5 1 ' 7 484 4:7 - 72 21 2/10-(‘Scr I ‘No:::_..___,.,d,,eKs.„,(c:,,,6iy 4-; e kOVi • ('(-)-Wi 4Arib'i.'4\gr-- PARIe- rgt'xria'Y • Page 2 • • Bid Opening Recording Sheet • Project Name: Morningside Recreation Center Project # 16- 0035 -PR Bid Opening Date: Friday, May 26, 2017 Award Date: Wednesday, June 14, 2017 Project Manager: Leroy Chin Bid #: Contractor Bid Bond Bid Total 1 Bandes Construction Company ✓ $ 5,872,130.00 3 Caladesi Construction Co. ✓ $ 5,702,809.73 6 J.O. Delotto & Sons, Inc. ✓ incomplete - non - responsive bid 7 Lema Construction & Developers, Inc. ✓ $ 6,376,159.00 8 NuJak Development, Inc. ✓ $ 5,954,599.10 9 Park Construction, LLC ✓ $ 5,855,683.90 10 Shearer Companies, Inc. ✓ $ 6,122,038.47 11 Triad Construction Services, Inc. ✓ $ 6,336,299.20 12 West Construction, Inc. ✓ $ 6,249,910.70 11 12 13 14 • • 15 16 17 18 Apparent Low Bidder: Caladesi Construction Co. 2nd Low Bidder: Park Construction, LLC 3rd Low Bidder: Bandes Construction Company All of the above listed contractors have met the pre - qualification requirement for this project. • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 100 SERIES: GENERAL 101. SCOPE OF WORK Project Name: Morningside Recreation Complex — New Recreation Building Project Number: 16- 0035 -PR Scope of Work: 1. General Contractor shall provide labor, equipment, materials and all insurances as necessary for construct a new recreation building approximately 21,000 sq. ft. all site work required at Morningside Recreation Complex — 2400 Harn Boulevard — Clearwater Florida 33754 according to Building Permit BCP2017 -01415 and the construction documents of Project Number 16- 0035 -PR for the lump sum price provided in this contract. 2. The Contractor shall provide 1 [Fixed project signs as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required at no additional cost to the Owner due to the Contractor's schedule of work. 3. List Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Items to be included in the Contract Document contractor to include all sales taxes as applicable by law for this project. See ODP document in Appendix of this contact document. 4. All Bidders shall be Pre - qualified in May 9, 2017 two week prior to bid opening date. Prequalification minimum amount is $4,250,000.00 attached copy of pre - qualifications is included in this contract document. 5. 10% bid bond is required and a performance surety bond is also required for this project see detailed information in this contract document 6. The prospective bidders shall agree to hold his bid prices for ninety (90) days from bid opening date. 7. The General Contractor shall note the Owner shall continue daily operations of the facility (pool playground tennis courts and parking lot other than as shown on the contract documents during the construction of the recreation building and the General Contractor shall minimize disruption of daily operational business activities. 8. General Contractor's lay down area shall be within the confines of construction limit and exact location shall be provided at the pre- construction meeting. 9. The Owner has submitted for Building Permit application and the Contractor shall collect the Building Permit from the City of Clearwater Building Dept. There shall be no fee required for the General Contractor to collect the building permit. The Building Permit No. SECTION IV Page 1 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications BCP2017- 01415. The General Contractor shall call in for all inspections as required at the correct intervals for City inspector observe the work performed and sign of as the project progresses. The General Contractor shall be required to close out the building permit and obtain a Certificate of Completion. Provide the Building Permit and Certificate of Completion originals to the Owner in the Operation & Maintenance Manual (O &M Manual). 10. General Contractor shall construct the recreation center per the permitted drawings with the City of Clearwater Building Dept. No deviations from the permitted construction drawings or technical specifications of this project. Deviations shall only be allowed in writing by the General Contractor to the Architect and Owner and deviations shall be approved in writing by the Architect and Owner. Any approved deviation shall be the responsibly of the General Contractor and issues may arise from the deviations requested and approved by the Architect and Owner. Under no circumstance shall the Architect or Owner provide any additional funds for any cost arise from the deviation in completing a fully functional recreation center per the design intent of the building permitted drawings. Any deviation from the permitted drawings the building permit shall be updated by submitting an amendment to the building permit by the General Contractor prior to beginning and approved deviations. 11. Schedule: a. Plans available for General Contractor for collection April 20, 2017 b. Pre Bid Meeting Municipal Service Bldg. - 100 S. Myrtle Ave. - Rm. 130 - Clearwater, FL 33756 -5520 c. Last Day for Prequalification Submission Date -May 9, 2017 d. Last Day for Question (Request for Information) Date - May 12, 2017 e. Last Addendum Issue Date - May 16, 3017 f. Bid Due Date - May 23, 2017 — 1:00 PM - Purchasing Office, 3rd Floor 100 S. Myrtle Ave, Clearwater, FL 33756 -5520 g. Intent award of contract by City Council shall be on June 15, 2017 and contractor shall collect the contract on Friday June 16, 2017 and execute signing the contract. Notice to proceed with the work shall be on Monday, June 26, 2017 and contractor shall be on site performing the work within 7 days from Notice to Proceed. Contract duration 330 Consecutive Calendar Days Substantial Completion of the work shall be Tuesday, May 22, 2018 12. Substantial completion means the General Contractor shall have substantially completed the building and site work to obtain a Certificate of Completion from the City of Clearwater Building Dept. and the Owner may occupy the new building for operation of the facility. 13. In execute signing the contract the Surety Performance Bond shall be recorded at the Pinellas County Court House and the original and the executed sign contractor shall be returned to the City for finalization of the contract. 14. The Owner shall develop a request to requisition and formally submit for Purchase Order based on the amount of contract approved by City Council and submitted on Friday June 16, 2017 and the Contractor shall receive the purchase order the following week. SECTION IV Page 2 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 15. The Owner has elected to institute tax saving to for this project and the General Contractor shall provide cost for direct purchase order by the City. The General Contractor shall included all applicable sales tax for materials to be purchased by the city. Upon contract award and execution, a Purchase Order (PO) shall be issued to General Contractor for the full amount of contract. 16. General Contractor shall submit a list Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Summary of Materials of potential ODP vendors and estimated dollar amounts (minimum of $10,000) to the City for consideration prior to initial pay application. Certain bid proposals will list pre- determined item(s) for ODP and the accompanying tax savings. The ODP Summary shall list: (a) item cost and (b) sales tax savings associated with the item. Direct purchase shall be considered for single items that exceed $10,000 in value and /or items identified in Section V, Bidders Proposal. See Appendix for additional information Owner Direct Purchase of Materials. 17. Pre - construction meeting prior to award of contract (June 2017, exact date to be determined). At this meeting the contractor will provide the following: a. Schedule of Values to be utilized for progress payments. Final copy of Payment Schedule in the 0 & M Manual. b. Detailed progress schedule shall be submitted at the pre construction meeting and updated for each progress meeting and long lead items shown on the schedule. Final Schedule in the 0 & M Manual. c. Material submittals & Shop Drawings — list of materials to be provided to the Architect /Engineer for approval prior to purchasing. All material and shop drawings shall be submitted within 75 day from notice to proceed. Contractor shall maintain a submittal log showing dates of submittal, status of submittals and approvals. All Material & Shop Drawing Submittals in the 0 & M Manual. d. Discussion of project closeout procedures. 3 hard copies of 0 & M Manual shall be provided to the Owner in a three ring binder and separate tabs shall separate each section. e. All warranty shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. f. Owner to provide electric and water during the construction of the project. g. General Contractor to provide employee sanitation (shall not use Owner public restrooms). h. The schedule is to be discussed at project progress meetings and shall be held every two week at an agreed day and time. Discussion items at the meetings as follows: i. Work completed the past two (2) weeks. ii. Work scheduled next two (2) weeks. iii. Issues of concern. (Questions and answers.) iv. Updated schedule. v. Draft pay request and submission of invoice. 18. Quality Assurance: a. The General Contractor's field superintendent is to review the project documents in total, and subsequently meet with the engineer prior to starting the work to address any questions relevant to the project requirements. b. General Contractor shall provide all barricades, as necessary to protect the property structure and safety of the residents, visitors, and workers at all times. SECTION IV Page 3 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications c. General Contractor's staging area to be determined at the pre - construction meeting. 19. The General Contractor's superintendent shall be required to maintain a daily log on -site identifying the number of workers, work activity, change in weather conditions, etc. and shall be included in the 0 & M Manual 20. Payment for work performed. a. The General Contractor shall submit pay application of the 25`I' of each month of work performed the pass 30 days. b. A pencil draft of the pay application shall be provided to the Engineer and Owner at one of the progress meeting for review. Upon approval the General Contractor shall submit an electronic pay application for approval and upon approval by the Engineer shall send electronic copy to the Owner for payment. c. Payment of request for payment shall be made within 30 days from date of invoice and payment shall be made to the General Contractor's mailing address. No check will be provided by hand delivering and only delivery by U. S. Postal Service. d. Final payment shall be made as stipulated in the contract documents. e. 10% retainage of total project cost shall be retained by the Owner until the following schedule of items are completed: i. 5% retainage may be requested upon: 1. Substantial completion of the project: a. Close out of Building Permit Final b. Obtain Certificate of Completion c. Preliminary walk through by Engineer & Owner d. Punch list has been provided to the Contractor to perform punch list ii. Remaining 5% retainage may be request upon: 1. Punch list items are completed and request for final walk through by the Owner and Engineer and approval punch list items are completed. 2. 0 & M Manual has been reviewed and approved by Engineer, turned over to the Owner 3. 3 Hard Copies of the 0 & M Manual with divider tabs of each section 4. 1 Hard copy set of red lined As Built drawings 5. 3 electronic CD's of files in the 0 & M Manual and As built drawings 21. Deliverable at Close Out of Project: a. Red Line 'As- Built' drawings shall be provided to the Owner. The Contractor shall obtain a clean set of drawings from the Owner. The clean set of drawings the Contractor shall red line and changes to the work performed. 22. Surveying layout and grades by the General Contractor. 23. General Contractor shall install: a. Temporary construction fencing b. Tree barricades c. Root pruning SECTION IV Page 4 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • d. Silt fencing and any other storm water protection prior to calling Land Recourses for inspection for collection of Building Permit BCP201 7 -01 4 1 5 • • 24. General Contractor shall note the Owner intends to operate the Aquatic Center beginning Memorial weekend May 2018 and will continue operation during the construction of the new recreation center. General contractor shall take all safety precautions necessary for safety and welfare of the public and city staff. 25. The Owner has provided temporary power for existing irrigation well and the General Contractor shall maintain operation of existing irrigation well and provide permanent power from new recreation building. 26. Existing irritation system is operational and General Contractor shall relocate irritation system as required to construct new recreation center. 27. Hearing Loop in Multipurpose Room General Contractor shall contact Patrick Ostman for instruction of installing hearing loop in proposed floor and termination points for connection of hearing loop equipment. Contract information: Indoor Wireless Solutions 732 Stremma Rd Largo, FL 33770 Office: 813- 333 -6557 Cell: 813-597-3227 Email: patrick.ostman a,I- W -S.org 28. Fire Alarm and Security system shall contact John Maire for installation of low voltage wiring system and hardware. The Owner has ongoing contract with Maire Company for monitoring and supply of hardware the Fire Alarm and Security systems. Maire Company R O. Box 1346 Dunedin, FL 34697 Office: (727) 712 -3250 Email: mairesys @verizon.net The General contractor shall provide all conduits /raceway for fire alarm and security systems and no conduits exposed on finished wall viewable to public spaces. All conduits and raceway shall be behind walls, coordinate all work with Maire Company. 29. Natural gas water heaters the Owner has received from Clearwater Gas for installation of Rinnia C199i tankless water heaters contact person with Clearwater gas is Chris Thorn in the appendix is attached proposal for gas installation. The Owner shall contract directly with Clearwater Gas for gas system piping and gas water heaters for the facility. The General Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with Clearwater Gas for installation of gas piping system and all electrical and potable water and blow off plumbing for the water SECTION IV Page 5 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications heaters and any other items inclusive for a complete operable gas system of the propose new recreation center's Yanmar Gas HVAC system. Chris Thorn Clearwater Gas System 71 1 Maple St. Clearwater FI. 33755 Office: (727)562 -4980 x7457 Cell: (727)224 -7306 Fax: (727)562 -4989 Enail: chris.thorn@myclearwater.com myclearwater.com Description of work installation by Clearwater Gas: From existing Natural Gas meter serving Pool, extend underground gas line to new Recreation Center. Extend gas line into Electrical Room. Mount two (2) Rinnai C199i Tankless Water Heaters on wall common with Multi Purpose Room. Connect gas line to heaters and vent Water Heater through roof above. From underground gas line, extend another gas line into Rec. Center, extend gas line above dropped ceiling to Janitor Room located near Bathrooms. Mount two (2) Rinnai C199i Tankless Water Heaters on wall common with Men's Bathroom. Connect gas line to heaters and vent Water Heaters through Roof above. Continue gas line through Lobby to Gymnasium. Continue gas line through Gymnasium into Storage Room located on North side of Gymnasium. Mount one (1) Rinnai C199i Tankless Water Heater on wall common with Life Guard Room. Connect gas line to heater and vent Water Heater through Roof above. Extend gas line behind stackable Washer /Dryer. Connect gas line to Dryer with Stop and Flex Connector. Install second Natural Gas meter at Northeast corner of building to serve Natural Gas A/C system. Extend gas line to ten (10) Yanmar Gas Fired Refrigeration Units. Connect gas line to units with stops and flex connectors. 30. The HV /AC YANMAR System is a Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) natural gas heat pump system, Owner recommends the system be installed with a certified YANMAR installer or an HVAC company who has vast knowledge of installation of variable refrigerant flow systems. YANMAR provide seminars for being a certified YANMAR System, contact: Roger Davis Integrity Sales & Marketing, Inc. 3140 Mulford Rd. Mulberry, fl. 33860 Cell: 863 -581 -0687 Email: roger@intsales.com or Brad Hopkins Integrity Sales & Marketing, Inc. 3140 Mulford Rd. Mulberry, fl. 33860 Cell: 863 -581 -0690 Email: brad cr intsales.com Upon receiving and opening bid the Owner will issue a letter of intent to award the contract to the successful responsible low bidder. The Owner shall request meeting with the General Contractor for schedule of values of the project base on his bid price based on specification division for value of the work. The cost associated with the installation of the YANMAR SECTION IV Page 6 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • HV /AC System verses a conventional electrical HVAC system, which includes but not limited to the following: a. YANMAR HV /AC System b. Concrete flatwork c. Retaining wall d. Screening of mechanical yard e. All piping and redundant condensation piping f. Additional structural steel fabrication works to hang system g. Additional electrical work h. Condensation stainless steel pans i. Additional HVAC ducts j. Extra labor involved • 31. The General Contractor shall an electrical man lift to meet the Florida Building Code, Section 306.3 Appliance in Attic. The Owner man lift shall be large enough to allow removal of the largest appliance and wide enough to accommodate two (2) service personnel to perform servicing the appliances in the gymnasium. The man lift shall be stored on site in the storage room off the gymnasium prior to completion of the project. The proposed man lift shall not be utilized during the construction of the project. Man lift shall be sized to reach the highest point in the gym and care shall be taken in section of the lift as not to damage the maple hardwood flooring. The man lift shall have charging equipment included as part of the man lift package. Shop drawings shall be provided to the Architect and Owner for approval prior to General Contractor purchasing the man lift. 32. General contractor shall note sanitary sewer lines shall be only mechanical, electrical, plumbing (MEP) installed below grade no other shall be allowed below grade except for penetration into the building. All MEP shall be installed in walls or above reflective ceiling or exposed shall be painted. 33. All painted wall surface shall receive heavy knock down textured surface, General Contractor shall provide 5'x5' textured surface for approval by Owner. Approved texture surface sample shall be store by General Contractor for future reference. 34. Pool trench drain is shown circular curve for ease of installation this will now be segmental sections and shop drawing shall be provided by the General Contractor for approval by the Owner and Engineer prior to ordering trench drain. 35. All landscape bed which has been compacted during constructions shall be tilled to a minimum depth of 30 inches to loosen up compaction. 36. The General Contractor shall retain a certified irrigation designer to design irrigation system for approval by Owner. The irrigation system shall be designed based on irritation detail plans and technical specifications provided. The General Contractor shall note: a. No drip irrigation system shall be allowed such as Netafim b. Locate existing irrigation system and utilize existing system as necessary. c. Relocate existing irrigation system as necessary. SECTION IV Page 7 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications d. Provide a complete operational irritation system from existing well e. Design system base on well providing 65 psi at 50 gallons per minute from point of connect at existing well location. f. Hedge along parking lot shall be irrigated with full spray nozzle and spaced accordingly. g. All spray shall be designed with 80% of maximum radius distance of nozzle to allow adjustment for wind. h. No trenching beneath tree canopy drip line of existing trees, either bore beneath tree root system or go around tree canopy drip line. i. All parkways (space between sidewalk and curb of street) shall be irrigated. j. All pipe beneath hard surfaces shall be sleeved twice the size irrigation pipe passing through and 2 inch wire sleeve shall be provided for irritation control wires. k. No irrigation head shall be spraying towards building but away from building. 1. Irrigation Consultant Designer and General Contractor is not obligated to use recommended designer: Michael C. Essenwein ICD Services 10803 Providence Oaks Drive Riverview, FL 33578 Office: (813) 653 -1587 Cell: (813) 495 -4987 Fax: (813) 436 -9603 Email: irrigate@tampabay.rr.com 37. Upon Owner in providing letter intent to award contract the General Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule of value by Technical Specification Divisions. Contract Period: _330_ Consecutive Calendar Days SECTION IV Page 8 of 113 Updated 2/11/2016